JP7601600B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to provide an advantageous state for the player.

Conventional gaming machines are capable of simultaneously executing a battle effect and a timer effect as reach effects, and some are also capable of executing a slow motion effect during the battle effect, which slows down the playback speed of the battle effect (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2017-99801 A

There was room for improving the marketability of a gaming machine having the functions and configuration of Patent Document 1.

This invention was made in consideration of the above situation, and aims to provide a gaming machine with improved marketability.

(A) The gaming machine according to claim 1,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A sound output means;
A display means;
A light emitting means;
A game control means for controlling the progress of a game;
A performance execution means capable of executing a performance based on information from the game control means;
Equipped with
The game control means includes:
A determination means for determining the advantageous state;
A determination means for determining that the advantageous state will be achieved before the determination by the determination means;
a state control means capable of controlling the display to a non-special state and a special state in which a variable display is more easily executed than in the non-special state;
and an information transmitting means capable of transmitting to the performance executing means a plurality of types of information including determination result information capable of identifying that the advantageous state will be controlled when the determination means determines that the advantageous state will be achieved;
The effect execution means is capable of executing a specific effect that suggests that the game is controlled to the advantageous state,
the display means includes a first display area and a second display area closer to the periphery than the first display area;
The specific performance is,
the display means displays a performance video, the sound output means outputs a performance sound, and the light emitting means emits light,
A first specific performance and a second specific performance having a higher expectation level that is controlled to the advantageous state than the first specific performance,
A first period, a second period after the first period, and a third period after the second period in which either one of an advantageous aspect or an unfavorable aspect is notified as a performance result,
The performance execution means includes:
The first display area is capable of displaying the effected video,
In the second display area, information display relating to a game can be displayed,
During the first period, the information display can be displayed in the second display area while the effected moving image in an effect manner progressing at a first speed is displayed in the first display area,
During the second period, the information display can be displayed in the second display area while displaying the effected moving image in an effect mode proceeding at a second speed slower than the first speed in the first display area,
A still effect is executed in which, after displaying the effect video of the effect mode proceeding at the second speed during the second period of the second specific effect , a still image is displayed by freezing the effect video;
When the specific performance is executed, the light emitting state of the light emitting means can be changed in both the first period and the second period,
When the first specific performance is executed, during the second period, it is possible to change the light emission state of the light emitting means at the same interval as that of the first period;
When the second specific performance is executed, the light emission state of the light emitting means can be changed at an interval shorter than the first period during the second period;
There are a plurality of still effects, and the expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state varies depending on which effect is selected;
The state control means controls the non-special state to the special state when a special display result is displayed in the non-special state,
The determination means is capable of determining that the special state will be entered before the state control means controls the vehicle to the special state,
The information transmission means is capable of transmitting special information capable of identifying that the vehicle will be controlled to the special state when the determination means determines that the vehicle will be in the special state.
It is characterized by:
In addition, other gaming machines,
A gaming machine that performs a variable display based on the establishment of a start condition, and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player when a specific display result is displayed as a variable display result,
A game control means for controlling the progress of a game;
A performance execution means capable of executing a performance based on information from the game control means,
The game control means includes:
A state control means capable of controlling the vehicle into a non-special state, a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state, and the advantageous state;
A determination means capable of determining to control to the advantageous state;
a variable display pattern determining means for determining one variable display pattern from a plurality of types of variable display patterns having different variable display periods based on a result of the determination by the determining means;
A determination means for determining that the advantageous state will be achieved before the determination by the determination means;
and an information transmitting means capable of transmitting to the performance executing means a plurality of types of information including determination result information capable of identifying that the advantageous state will be controlled when the determination means determines that the advantageous state will be achieved;
the special state includes a first special state, a second special state, and a third special state;
The state control means includes:
When the specific display result is displayed as the variable display result in the non-special state, the control is made to the advantageous state;
After the advantageous state ends, control to the first special state;
When a predetermined number of variable displays have been executed in the non-special state without being controlled to the advantageous state, control is made to the second special state;
When a special display result different from the specific display result is displayed as the variable display result in the non-special state, control is made to the third special state;
when the variable display is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means, the number of variable display patterns that the variable display pattern determination means can determine in the second special state is smaller than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the first special state,
when the variable display is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means, an average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination means in the second special state is shorter than an average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined in the first special state,
The determination means is capable of determining that the vehicle is controlled to the third special state before the state control means controls the vehicle to the third special state,
The information transmitting means is capable of transmitting special information capable of identifying that the vehicle is controlled to the third special state when the determining means determines that the vehicle is controlled to the third special state,
The performance execution means includes:
When the determination result information is received, a pre-reading effect can be executed based on the determination result information,
When the determination result information is received after the special information is received, the execution of the pre-reading performance based on the determination result information is restricted.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, taking into consideration the long period during which the variable display was not controlled to an advantageous state, the variable display for which it is not determined to be controlled to an advantageous state has a smaller variety of variable display patterns and a shorter average variable display period, thereby increasing the speed at which the variable display is consumed compared to other states, and therefore a suitable second special state can be provided. In addition, control can be performed according to the game state when the special display result is displayed, thereby improving game interest and enhancing marketability.

The present invention may have only the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention, or may have the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention as well as configurations other than the invention-specific matters.

FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine according to this embodiment. 1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in a pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a game control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process for game control. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol process. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. A diagram showing the numerical range of a jackpot and the numerical range of a miss with time-saving in the variable display of the first special chart in normal state or time-saving state. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. A front view showing a pachinko gaming machine in characteristic part 069SG. This is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like installed in a pachinko gaming machine in characteristic part 069SG. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing each random number, (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table, (C1) and (C2) are explanatory diagrams showing a jackpot type determination table, and (D) is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. An explanatory diagram showing a time-saving count determination table for each transition trigger. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a fluctuation pattern determination table. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a fluctuation pattern determination table. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a fluctuation pattern determination table. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a fluctuation pattern determination table. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating an example of a performance control command. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a game control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of normal special symbol processing. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of normal special symbol processing. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol stopping process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol stopping process. FIG. 2 is a state transition diagram for explaining state transitions. This is an explanatory diagram to explain Yu-time (rescue time reduction). This is also an explanatory diagram for explaining Yu-time (rescue time reduction). This is also an explanatory diagram for explaining Yu-time (rescue time reduction). 1A is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation mode related to Battle Rush, and FIG. 1B is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation mode related to Yu-Time. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation mode related to Extreme Battle Rush. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation mode relating to a variable display count display and a special display count display. This is a time chart showing the timing of execution of the effects when the rescue time reduction is reached after the RAM is cleared. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation pattern when the rescue time reduction is reached after the RAM is cleared. (A) is a time chart showing the execution timing of the effect when the rescue time-saving mode is reached after 900 variable displays after a jackpot, and (B) is a time chart showing a modified example of time-saving entry effect B. This is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the presentation mode when the rescue time reduction is reached after 900 variable displays after a jackpot. An explanatory diagram showing an example of a presentation operation when the number of reserved memories is 0 when the rescue time reduction is reached. An explanatory diagram showing an example of a presentation operation when the number of reserved memories is 1 or more when the rescue time reduction is reached. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation mode relating to a customer waiting screen. A figure showing an example of a presentation operation regarding transition to a customer waiting screen as feature part 069SG variant example 1. A figure showing a modified example of a presentation operation regarding transition to a customer waiting screen as feature section 069SG modified example 1. A flowchart showing timer interrupt processing for game control as variant example 2 of feature section 069SG. This is a flowchart showing the special pattern stopping processing as feature part 069SG variant example 2. This is a flowchart showing the special pattern stopping processing as feature part 069SG variant example 2. 13 is a flowchart showing a display process as a modified example 2 of the characteristic part 069SG. A figure showing variant example 3 of characteristic portion 069SG. A diagram for explaining the contents of various effects. A figure showing an example of a countdown preview presentation operation. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a countdown preview presentation. A figure showing an example of the presentation operation for a hold change notice. A figure showing an example of the presentation operation of the pattern chance eye announcement. A figure showing an example of the effect display preview performance. 13A to 13D are diagrams showing a pre-reading notice type determination table. 13A to 13F are diagrams showing a pre-reading preview performance pattern determination table. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variable display start setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variable display performance process. 13A is a diagram showing a reach notice execution determination table, and (B) to (E) are diagrams showing button notice performance pattern determination tables. 11A to 11D are diagrams showing a character preview pattern determination table. 13A to 13D are diagrams showing a movable body operation pattern determination table. 13A to 13D are figures showing a movable object preview pattern determination table. 13A to 13C are diagrams for explaining various operation examples according to game status. (A) is a timing chart showing the variable display mode of the pattern in the sure-change state and the miss-shortening non-reach fluctuation pattern of the time-saving state A, and (B) is a timing chart showing the variable display mode of the pattern in the miss-shortening non-reach fluctuation pattern of the time-saving state B. This is an example of the presentation operation of a shortened non-reach miss fluctuation pattern in the special state and time-saving state A. This is an example of the presentation operation of a shortened non-reach miss fluctuation pattern in the special state and time-saving state A. This is an example of the presentation operation of a shortened non-reach miss fluctuation pattern in the time-saving state B. This is an example of the performance of SP Reach E and SP Reach D. This is a diagram comparing examples of the presentation operation of non-reach out-of-range fluctuation patterns. This is a diagram comparing examples of the presentation operation of non-reach out-of-range fluctuation patterns. This is a diagram comparing examples of the presentation operations of super reach fluctuation patterns. This is a diagram comparing examples of the presentation operations of super reach fluctuation patterns. This is a diagram comparing examples of the presentation operations of super reach fluctuation patterns. 13A to 13C are timing charts showing examples of control operations in SP reaches E, C, and D. This is a diagram comparing a super reach and a non-reach miss. (A) to (C) are figures showing examples of entry introduction effects, and (D) is a figure showing an example of the performance of time-saving entry effect A. (A1) to (A4) are diagrams showing an example of the special mode entry performance, and (B1) to (B4) are diagrams showing an example of the time-saving mode entry performance B. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a fluctuation pattern determination table as embodiment 2 in feature part 069SG. A figure showing a part of the variable display start setting process as embodiment 2 in characteristic part 069SG. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a variable display effect pattern determination table. This is an example of the presentation operation of SP Reach D. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining characteristics according to game status. In the feature part 099SG, (A) is an explanatory diagram showing each random number, (B1) and (B2) are explanatory diagrams showing a jackpot type determination table, and (C) is an explanatory diagram of the jackpot type. (A) and (B) are explanatory diagrams showing the normal pattern hit determination table, (C) is an explanatory diagram of the variable display time of the normal pattern, and (D) is an explanatory diagram of the second start winning port opening time when a normal pattern is hit. 13 is an explanatory diagram of a change pattern according to a variable display result. FIG. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of a data retention area for game control. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern determination table in a normal state. This is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern determination table in a special probability state. This is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern determination table in a special probability state. An explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern determination table in time-saving state A. An explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern determination table in time-saving state A. An explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern determination table in time-saving state B. An explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern determination table in time-saving state B. An explanatory diagram of the probability of winning at the starting winning slot and the winning interval. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of period values α, β, and γ. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of period values α', β', and γ'. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of period values δ, ε, and ζ. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of period values δ', ε', and ζ'. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of period values η, θ, and ι. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of period values η', θ', and ι'. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of period values κ, λ, and μ. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of period values κ', λ', and μ'. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of period values v, ξ, and π. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of period values v', ξ', and π'. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram of each period value. 1A is an explanatory diagram of the actual shooting values of a pachinko gaming machine for 10 hours, and FIG. 1B is an explanatory diagram of the design values of the pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of calculation of an average fluctuation time in a normal state. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of calculation of an average fluctuation time in a time-saving state A. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of calculation of an average fluctuation time in a time-saving state B. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for calculating the average fluctuation time in a probability variable state. This is an explanatory diagram of the average fluctuation time when the fluctuation of the second special chart is executed in the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the special state. This is an explanatory diagram of the average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuation displays of the second special chart are executed in the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the special state. (A) is an explanatory diagram of the average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuation displays are executed when the number of reserved memories of the second special chart is three in the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the special probability state, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of the average fluctuation time when 1,100 fluctuation displays are executed when the number of reserved memories of the second special chart is three in the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the special probability state. (A) is an explanatory diagram of the average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuation displays are executed when the number of reserved memories of the second special chart is two in the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the special probability state, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of the average fluctuation time when 1,100 fluctuation displays are executed when the number of reserved memories of the second special chart is two in the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the special probability state. (A) is an explanatory diagram of the average change time when 110 change displays are executed when the number of reserved memories of the second special chart is one in the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the special probability state, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of the average change time when 1,100 change displays are executed when the number of reserved memories of the second special chart is one in the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the special probability state. (A) is an explanatory diagram of the average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuation displays are executed in a state in which the number of reserved memories of the second special chart is 0 in the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the special probability state, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of the average fluctuation time when 1,100 fluctuation displays are executed in a state in which the number of reserved memories of the second special chart is 0 in the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the special probability state. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram of each period value. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram of each period value. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a variation pattern in feature portion 018SG. 1A is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a fluctuation pattern determination table in a low base state, and FIG. 1B is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a fluctuation pattern determination table in a high base state. This figure shows the execution periods of various effects in the jackpot fluctuation patterns of Super Reach α, β, and γ. This figure shows the execution periods of various effects in the failure variation patterns of Super Reach α, β, and γ. (A) is a diagram for explaining the contents of various effects, and (B) is a diagram for explaining character types. (A) is a diagram showing the display mode of characters in SP reach performances A to E, (B) is a diagram showing the lighting pattern of LEDs in SP reach performances A to E, and (C) is a diagram showing the output pattern of background music and sound effects in SP reach performances A to E. FIG. 1A is a diagram showing an example of each light emission pattern, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example of each sound pattern. This is a tree diagram showing the flow of SP reach performances A to E. A figure showing an example of the presentation operation from the start of the variable display of SP reaches α, β, and γ to the development into the SP reach presentation. A figure showing an example of the presentation operation of SP reach presentation A. A figure showing examples of the presentation operations of SP reach presentations B and C. A figure showing examples of the presentation operations of SP reach presentations D and E. A figure showing an example of the presentation operation of the win/lose button presentation. A diagram showing an example of a movable body presentation. A figure showing examples of the performance operations for announcing a jackpot in SP reach effects A to E. A figure showing an example of the performance operation for notifying the loss of SP reach performances A to E. A figure showing an example of the performance operation of post-performance A. A figure showing an example of the performance operation of post-performance B. A figure showing an example of the performance operation of post-performance B. 13A is a diagram showing SP reach performance type definition table A, FIG. 13B is a diagram showing SP reach performance type definition table B, and FIG. 13C is a diagram showing SP reach performance type definition table C. 13 is a diagram for explaining a data table for lighting the frame LED in a smooth rainbow light emission lighting pattern. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a data table for lighting the frame LED in a flash rainbow light emission lighting pattern. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol process. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variable display start setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a stop symbol determination process. A figure showing an example of settings for the setting suggestion performance execution decision table. A figure showing configuration examples and setting examples regarding setting suggestion patterns. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variable display performance process. A diagram showing an example of execution of a setting suggestion effect. FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a start winning determination process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a random number value determination process when a prize is won. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of normal special symbol processing. A figure showing an example of the configuration of a special chart display result determination table. A diagram showing an example of the configuration of a jackpot type determination table. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a time-saving type determination table. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variation pattern setting process. A figure showing an example of a time-saving promotional performance period. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a fluctuation pattern. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern determination table. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern determination table. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol stopping process. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of main performance control commands. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of a decorative pattern stop command transmission setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a time-saving start process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a process at the end of a time-saving period. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a remaining reservation period end determination process. A flowchart showing an example of a jackpot end process. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a command analysis process. A figure showing an example of the configuration of a command buffer at the start of a winning streak. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a pre-reading notice setting process. A figure showing an example of the configuration of a reservation change determination table. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variable display start setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a process when a data is dropped. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a stop symbol setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a time-saving promotion effect setting process. A figure showing an example of determining a time-saving promotion performance pattern. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a return performance setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variable display performance process. 13 is a timing chart showing each timing during variable display when the time-saving pattern is displayed stationary and in other cases. A figure showing an example of the presentation operation when a time-saving pattern is displayed stationary or when a time-saving promotional effect is executed. A figure showing an example of the presentation operation when a time-saving pattern is displayed stationary or when a time-saving promotional effect is executed. A figure showing an example of the presentation operation when a time-saving pattern is displayed stationary or when a time-saving promotional effect is executed. A figure showing an example of the presentation operation when a time-saving pattern is displayed stationary or when a time-saving promotional effect is executed. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process in an information output process. 6 is a timing chart showing output timings of various signals output in the external information output process. A figure showing an example of the configuration of a special chart display result determination table. A figure showing an example of a special chart display result. A figure showing an example of a presentation operation when a time-saving pattern is displayed in a stopped state. A front view of a pachinko game machine relating to characteristic part 063AK. A diagram showing the configuration of the special variable winning ball device relating to feature part 063AK when the large winning opening is controlled to a closed state. 13A to 13C are diagrams for explaining the flow of a game ball that has entered the big prize slot related to the characteristic part 063AK. 13A is a diagram showing a configuration of a distribution unit according to the characteristic portion 063AK, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing a configuration of a distribution member according to the characteristic portion 063AK. 13A to 13C are diagrams for explaining the flow of game balls that have entered the distribution section related to the feature part 063AK. A figure to explain the operation of the distribution member related to characteristic part 063AK. This is a diagram to explain the relationship between the small win start presentation time related to feature part 063AK and the timing at which the game ball enters the distribution section. (a) is a timing chart of the performance corresponding to the small hit fluctuation related to the feature part 063AK. (b) is a diagram for explaining the execution or non-execution and the performance mode of the performance corresponding to the small hit fluctuation related to the feature part 063AK. 1A is a timing chart of the time-saving suggestion effect related to the feature portion 063AK. FIG. 1B is a diagram showing the time-saving suggestion pattern related to the feature portion 063AK. (a) is a diagram for explaining a normal time passing prompting effect corresponding to the first special game related to the feature part 063AK. (b) is a diagram for explaining a normal time passing prompting effect corresponding to the second special game related to the feature part 063AK. (c) is a diagram for explaining a time-saving time passing prompting effect related to the feature part 063AK. A flowchart showing an example of normal processing of special patterns related to feature part 063AK. 1A is a diagram showing an example of a first special symbol display result determination table related to the feature portion 063AK. FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example of a second special symbol display result determination table related to the feature portion 063AK. 1A is a diagram showing a list of big win types related to the feature portion 063AK. FIG. 1B is a diagram showing a configuration example of a big win type determination table related to the feature portion 063AK. 1A is a diagram showing a list of small win types related to the feature portion 063AK. FIG. 1B is a diagram showing a configuration example of a small win type determination table related to the feature portion 063AK. A figure showing a list of variation patterns related to feature part 063AK. A flowchart showing an example of a variation pattern setting process related to feature part 063AK. A figure showing an example of the configuration of a jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table related to feature part 063AK. A figure showing an example of the configuration of a miss fluctuation pattern determination table for feature part 063AK. 1A is a diagram showing an example of a time-saving pattern determination table for a normal state according to a feature portion 063AK. FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example of a time-saving pattern determination table for a time-saving state according to a feature portion 063AK. A flowchart showing an example of a special pattern stopping process related to the feature part 063AK. A figure showing an example of the configuration of a small win start performance waiting time determination table for feature part 063AK. This is a flowchart showing an example of a small win pre-release processing related to feature part 063AK. This is a flowchart showing an example of processing during the opening of a small win related to feature part 063AK. A figure showing an example of the configuration of a hit end designation command determination table related to feature part 063AK. A figure showing an example of the configuration of a passing notification performance waiting time determination table for feature part 063AK. This is a flowchart showing an example of a small hit end processing related to feature part 063AK. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variable display start setting process related to the characteristic part 063AK. (a) is a diagram showing a decorative pattern that is a small winning combination related to the feature part 063AK. (b) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a decorative pattern determination table for a small winning in a normal state related to the feature part 063AK. (c) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a decorative pattern determination table for a small winning in a time-saving state related to the feature part 063AK. A flowchart showing an example of a variable display performance process related to the feature part 063AK. 1A is a flowchart showing an example of a special winning waiting process related to the feature portion 063AK. FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example of a small winning start performance time determination table related to the feature portion 063AK. A flowchart showing an example of a small win performance processing related to feature part 063AK. A flowchart showing an example of a small win end presentation processing related to feature part 063AK. 13A to 13I are diagrams showing examples of performance operations in a normal state relating to the characteristic part 063AK. 13A to 13G are diagrams showing examples of performance operations in a normal state relating to the characteristic part 063AK. 13A to 13E are diagrams showing examples of performance operations in the time-saving state related to feature section 063AK. 13A to 13E are diagrams showing examples of performance operations in the time-saving state related to feature section 063AK. 1A is a diagram showing an example of a normal hold change determination table according to a modified example of the feature portion 063AK. FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example of a limit hold change determination table according to a modified example of the feature portion 063AK. 13A to 13C are diagrams showing examples of performance operations relating to modified examples of the characteristic portion 063AK. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine having characteristic part 065AK. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a normal symbol process. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a normal symbol determination table. A diagram showing the results of normal display and the number of time reductions. A diagram showing the special chart display results and the number of time reductions. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of processing when a normal pattern stops. A flowchart showing an example of the performance control process processing of feature unit 065AK. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a general map linked performance control process. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of a special chart linked performance determination process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a time-saving notification setting process. This is a timing chart showing the performance content when the time-saving transition occurs in feature part 065AK. A figure showing an example of the performance operation of feature part 065AK. A figure showing an example of the performance operation of feature part 065AK. A figure showing an example of the performance operation of feature part 065AK. 1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in a pachinko gaming machine. (A) is a diagram showing an image display device, (B) is a diagram showing the rotating display of the hold display in each hold display area, (C) is a diagram showing the moving display of the caption in the caption display area, and (D) is a diagram showing the blinking pattern of the fourth pattern. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of image data that constitutes a display on an image display device. 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating examples of performance control commands. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. 1A is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table 1, and FIG. 1B is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table 2. FIG. 1A is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a jackpot type determination table, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a variation pattern. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between variable display results and fluctuation patterns. FIG. A block diagram showing an example of the configuration of a game control data retention area. 1A is a block diagram showing an example of the configuration of a data holding area for performance control, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a command buffer received at the time of start winning. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a start winning determination process. 11 is a part of a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variable display start setting process. A diagram showing the execution decision rate of chance-up effects. FIG. 13A is a diagram showing the determination ratio of the presentation pattern of the still image display presentation, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing the presentation content of each presentation pattern. 13A is a diagram showing the determination ratio of the presentation pattern of the operation promotion presentation, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing the presentation content of each presentation pattern. 13 is a timing chart showing the variable display of super reach α1. 13 is a timing chart showing the variable display of super reach α2. 13 is a timing chart showing the variable display of super reach α3. 13 is a timing chart showing the variable display of super reach α3. 13 is a timing chart showing the variable display of super reach β1. 13 is a timing chart showing the variable display of super reach β2. 13 is a timing chart showing the variable display of super reach β3. 13 is a timing chart showing the variable display of super reach β3. A figure showing the presentation mode of the first reach presentation. A figure showing the presentation mode of the first reach presentation. A figure showing the presentation mode of the second reach presentation. A figure showing the presentation mode of the second reach presentation. A figure showing the presentation mode of the second reach presentation. A figure showing the presentation mode of the third reach presentation. A figure showing the presentation mode of the third reach presentation. A figure showing the presentation mode of the fourth reach presentation. A figure showing the presentation mode of the fourth reach presentation. A figure showing the presentation mode of the fourth reach presentation. A figure showing the presentation form of the second reach presentation in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation form of the fourth reach presentation in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation form of the fourth reach presentation in a modified example.

The following describes an embodiment of the gaming machine according to the present invention with reference to the drawings.

(Feature 069SG form)
(SG2020-069) The gaming machine of type 1-1 is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a start winning hole) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means capable of controlling the non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control the normal state, a time-saving state A in which the time-saving control is performed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol), a probability variable state, and a time-saving state B);
A determination means capable of determining to control to the advantageous state (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the normal special symbol process);
A variable display pattern determination means for determining one of a plurality of types of variable display patterns having different variable display periods based on the determination result of the determination means (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 determines one of a plurality of types of variable display patterns based on the variable display result in the variable display pattern setting process of step SGS111);
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed,
In the case of a variable display in which the determination means has not determined that the variable display should be controlled to the advantageous state, the number of variable display patterns that the variable display pattern determination means can determine in the second special state is smaller than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the first special state (for example, in the case of a variable display result being a "miss," the number of miss variable patterns (e.g., two) that the CPU 103 can determine in the "time-shortened state B" in the case of a "miss" is smaller than the number of variable display patterns (e.g., three) that can be determined in the "time-shortened state A" and is also smaller than the number of miss variable patterns (e.g., four) that can be determined in the "probable variable state");
In the case where the variable display is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means, the average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination means in the second special state is shorter than the average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined in the first special state (for example, when the variable display result is "miss", the average time (e.g., about 2.2 seconds) of the variable display time of the miss variable pattern determined by the CPU 103 in the "time-shortened state B" is shorter than the average time (e.g., about 5.58 seconds) of the variable display time of the miss variable pattern determined in the "time-shortened state A", and is shorter than the average time (e.g., about 4.83 seconds) of the variable display time of the miss variable pattern determined in the "probable state". See FIG. 11-50).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, taking into consideration the fact that a long period of time has continued during which the variable display is not controlled to an advantageous state, the variable display for which it is not determined to be controlled to an advantageous state has a smaller variety of variable display patterns and a shorter average duration of the variable display period, thereby making it possible to provide a preferable second special state, since the variable display is consumed at a faster rate than in other states.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 1-1,
It is possible to perform variable display of multiple columns of decoration identification information (for example, decoration patterns displayed in the decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C);
The start order of the variable display of the decoration identification information of each column is the same for a case in which, in the first special state, in the variable display in which it is not determined by the determination means to control to the advantageous state, the state of the variable display of the decoration identification information is not a specific state and a non-specific display result is displayed, and a case in which, in the second special state, in the variable display in which it is not determined by the determination means to control to the advantageous state, the state of the variable display of the decoration identification information is not a specific state and a non-specific display result is displayed,
The time until the variable display speed of the decorative identification information of each column that has started the variable display reaches the maximum speed is different between the case where the state of the variable display of the decorative identification information is not a specific state in the variable display in which the determination means does not decide to control the advantageous state in the first special state and a non-specific display result is displayed, and the case where the state of the variable display of the decorative identification information is not a specific state in the variable display in which the determination means does not decide to control the advantageous state in the second special state and a non-specific display result is displayed (for example, the start order of the variable display of the decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C is common between the case where the variable display is a non-reach miss variable pattern in the probability variable state and the time-saving state A, and the case where the variable display is a non-reach miss variable pattern in the time-saving state B, but the time until the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C reach the maximum speed is shorter in the time-saving state B than in the probability variable state and the time-saving state A (tb1 to tb2 < ta1 to ta3). See FIG. 11-51).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, while the order in which the decorative identification information of each column starts to be variable is the same in the first special state and the second special state, the time taken to reach maximum speed is different, which gives a different impression for each state and enhances interest.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 1-1 or 1-2,
It is possible to perform variable display of multiple columns of decorative identification information (e.g., decorative patterns);
The stop order of the variable display of the decorative identification information of each column is different between the case where the state of the variable display of the decorative identification information is not a specific state in the variable display in which it is not determined by the determination means to control the advantageous state in the first special state and a non-specific display result is displayed, and the case where the state of the variable display of the decorative identification information is not a specific state in the variable display in which it is not determined by the determination means to control the advantageous state in the second special state and a non-specific display result is displayed (for example, the stop order of the variable display of the decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C is the left → right → middle order in the case of a non-reach miss variable pattern in the probability change state and the time-saving state A, and the left, middle, and right are stopped and displayed simultaneously in the case of a non-reach miss variable pattern in the time-saving state B. See FIG. 11-51).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the variable display stopping order of the decoration identification information in each column differs between the first special state and the second special state, so that different impressions are given for each state, thereby enhancing interest.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-4 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-3,
It is possible to perform variable display of multiple columns of decorative identification information (e.g., decorative patterns);
The order in which the variable display of the decorative identification information of each column is stopped is the same for a case in which, in the first special state, in the variable display in which it is not determined by the determination means to control to the advantageous state, the state of the variable display of the decorative identification information is not a specific state and a non-specific display result is displayed, and a case in which, in the second special state, in the variable display in which it is not determined by the determination means to control to the advantageous state, the state of the variable display of the decorative identification information is not a specific state and a non-specific display result is displayed,
The time from when one of the decoration identification information in the multiple columns is statically displayed to when the next decoration identification information is statically displayed differs between a case where the state of the variable display of the decoration identification information is not a specific state and a non-specific display result is displayed in the variable display in which it is not determined by the determination means to control the decoration identification information to the advantageous state in the first special state, and a case where the state of the variable display of the decoration identification information is not a specific state and a non-specific display result is displayed in the variable display in which it is not determined by the determination means to control the decoration identification information to the advantageous state in the second special state (for example, a decorative pattern display The stopping order of the variable display of the decorative symbols in the areas 5L, 5R, and 5C is common to the case of a non-reach miss variable pattern in the high probability state and time-saving state A, and the case of a non-reach miss variable pattern in the time-saving state B, but the time from when a decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in one of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C until the next decorative symbol is stopped and displayed may be different between the case of a non-reach miss variable pattern in the high probability state and time-saving state A, and the case of a non-reach miss variable pattern in the time-saving state B.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the time from when one decorative identification information is statically displayed to when the next decorative identification information is statically displayed differs between the first special state and the second special state, so that different impressions can be given for each state, enhancing interest.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-5 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-4,
It is possible to perform variable display of multiple columns of decorative identification information (e.g., decorative patterns);
an output means for outputting a stop sound when the decoration identification information of each row is stopped and displayed;
The number of times the stop sound is output in the variable display of 1 is different between the case where the state of the variable display of the decorative identification information is not a specific state in the variable display in which it is not determined by the determination means to control the advantageous state in the first special state and a non-specific display result is displayed, and the case where the state of the variable display of the decorative identification information is not a specific state in the variable display in which it is not determined by the determination means to control the advantageous state in the second special state and a non-specific display result is displayed (for example, the number of times the pattern stop sound is output in the variable display of 1 is three times in the case of a non-reach miss variable pattern in the probability change state and time-saving state A because the left, middle, and right are stopped and displayed at different timings, and in the case of a non-reach miss variable pattern in the time-saving state B, the left, middle, and right are stopped and displayed at the same timing, so that it is one time. See FIG. 11-51).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the stop sound can draw attention to the stopping of the decorative identification information, and by outputting the stop sound differently between the first special state and the second special state, different impressions can be given for each state, thereby enhancing interest.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-6 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-5,
It is possible to perform variable display of multiple columns of decorative identification information (e.g., decorative patterns);
an output means for outputting a stop sound when the decoration identification information of each row is stopped and displayed;
The number of times the stop sound is output in one variable display is common between a case where the state of the variable display of the decorative identification information is not a specific state in the variable display in which it is not determined by the determination means to control the advantageous state in the first special state and a non-specific display result is displayed, and a case where the state of the variable display of the decorative identification information is not a specific state in the variable display in which it is not determined by the determination means to control the advantageous state in the second special state and a non-specific display result is displayed (for example, the number of times the pattern stop sound is output in one variable display may be common between a case where a non-reach miss variable pattern is displayed in a probability variable state and a time-saving state A, and a case where a non-reach miss variable pattern is displayed in a time-saving state B).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the stop sound can draw attention to the stopping of the decorative identification information, and by making the number of times the stop sound is output common between the first special state and the second special state, development costs can be reduced.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-7 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-6,
It is possible to perform variable display of decorative identification information (e.g., decorative patterns),
a display means capable of executing a specific operation display for causing the decoration identification information to perform a specific operation when the decoration identification information is statically displayed in a state in which the state of the variable display of the decoration identification information is a variable display that displays a non-specific display result rather than a specific state when the determination means does not determine that the decoration identification information is to be controlled to the advantageous state;
When the decorative identification information is stopped and displayed in the first special state, the specific operation display is executed, and when the decorative identification information is stopped and displayed in the second special state, the specific operation display is not executed (for example, when the pattern is a non-reach miss variation pattern in the probability change state and the time-saving state A, a specific operation display (a pattern stop action) is executed, whereas when the pattern is a non-reach miss variation pattern in the time-saving state B, a specific operation display (a pattern stop action) is not executed. See Figures 11-51 to 11-54).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, while the special action display is used to enhance the presentation effect in the first special state, a smooth variable display can be achieved by not executing the special action display in the second special state.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-8 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-7,
It is possible to perform variable display of decorative identification information (e.g., decorative patterns),
a display means capable of executing a specific operation display for causing the decoration identification information to perform a specific operation when the decoration identification information is statically displayed in a state in which the state of the variable display of the decoration identification information is a variable display that displays a non-specific display result rather than a specific state when the determination means does not determine that the decoration identification information is to be controlled to the advantageous state;
The display mode of the specific operation display is common between the case where the decorative identification information is stopped and the case where the decorative identification information is stopped and displayed in the first special state and the case where the decorative identification information is stopped and displayed in the second special state (for example, the specific operation display (pattern stop action) is common between the case where the non-reach miss fluctuation pattern is in the probability change state and the time-saving state A and the case where the non-reach miss fluctuation pattern is in the time-saving state B, thereby enhancing the performance effect with the specific operation display, while commonizing the mode of the specific operation display in the case of the probability change state, the time-saving state A and the time-saving state B. See Figures 11-51 to 11-54).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, while the presentation effect is enhanced by the specific action display, development costs can be reduced by standardizing the manner in which the specific action display is displayed between the first special state and the second special state.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-9 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-8,
It is possible to perform variable display by synchronizing decoration identification information (e.g., a decorative pattern) with predetermined identification information (e.g., a small pattern) different from the decoration identification information,
The period from when the identification information is stopped and displayed to when the predetermined identification information is stopped and displayed is shorter in the case where the state of the variable display of the decorative identification information is not a specific state and a non-specific display result is displayed when it is not determined by the determination means to control to the advantageous state in the second special state, than in the case where the state of the variable display of the decorative identification information is not a specific state and a non-specific display result is displayed when it is not determined by the determination means to control to the advantageous state in the first special state (for example, the period from when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed to when the small pattern is stopped and displayed is shorter in the case of a non-reach miss variable pattern in the time-saving state B than in the case of a non-reach miss variable pattern in the probability change state and the time-saving state A {t1 (ta6 to ta7)>t2 (tb3 to tb4)} portion. See FIG. 11-51).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a smooth variable display can be realized in the second special state.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-10 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-9,
It is possible to perform variable display of decorative identification information (e.g., decorative patterns),
The minimum period from when the decorative identification information is stopped and displayed in the variable display of 1 in the first special state until the variable display of the decorative identification information is started in the next variable display, and the minimum period from when the decorative identification information is stopped and displayed in the variable display of 1 in the second special state until the variable display of the decorative identification information is started in the next variable display are common (for example, the pattern determination period (ta7 to ta8), which is the minimum period from when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in the variable display of 1 in the probability change state and the time-saving state A until the variable display of the decorative pattern is started in the next variable display, and the pattern determination period (tb4 to tb5), which is the minimum period from when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in the variable display of 1 in the time-saving state B until the variable display of the decorative pattern is started in the next variable display, are common parts. See FIG. 11-51).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, development costs can be reduced by standardizing control that takes into account the rendering process until the decoration identification information is completely frozen and displayed.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-11 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-10,
The variable display pattern that the variable display pattern determination means can determine in the second special state when the variable display is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means, and the variable display pattern that the variable display pattern determination means can determine in the first special state when the variable display is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means are common (for example, when the variable display result is a "miss", a miss variable pattern (e.g., "non-reach A") that the CPU 103 can determine in the "time-shortened state B" and a miss variable pattern (e.g., "non-reach A") that can be determined in the "time-shortened state A" and the "probable variable state" are common parts).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by not setting a variable display pattern that can be determined only in the second special state, it is possible to reduce development costs and program capacity.

(SG2020-070) The gaming machine of type 2-1 is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a start winning hole) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means capable of controlling the non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control the normal state, a time-saving state A in which the time-saving control is performed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol), a probability variable state, and a time-saving state B);
A determination means capable of determining to control to the advantageous state (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the normal special symbol process);
A variable display pattern determination means for determining one of a plurality of types of variable display patterns having different variable display periods based on the determination result of the determination means (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 determines one of a plurality of types of variable display patterns based on the variable display result in the variable display pattern setting process of step SGS111);
Equipped with
The special states include a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed, and a third special state (e.g., a guaranteed bonus state) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends,
In the case of a variable display in which the determination means has not determined that the variable display should be controlled to the advantageous state, the number of variable display patterns that the variable display pattern determination means can determine in the second special state is less than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the first special state and is also less than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the third special state (for example, in the case where the variable display result is a "miss", the number of miss variable patterns (e.g., 2) that the CPU 103 can determine in the "time-shortened state B" is less than the number of variable display patterns (e.g., 3) that can be determined in the "time-shortened state A" and is also less than the number of miss variable patterns (e.g., 4) that can be determined in the "probable variable state").
In the case where the variable display is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means, the average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination means in the second special state is shorter than the average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined in the first special state and is shorter than the average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined in the third special state (for example, when the variable display result is "miss", the average time (e.g., about 2.2 seconds) of the variable display time of the miss variable pattern determined by the CPU 103 in the "time-shortening state B" is shorter than the average time (e.g., about 5.58 seconds) of the variable display time of the miss variable pattern determined in the "time-shortening state A" and is shorter than the average time (e.g., about 4.83 seconds) of the variable display time of the miss variable pattern determined in the "probable state". See FIG. 11-50).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, taking into consideration the fact that a long period of time has continued during which the variable display is not controlled to an advantageous state, the variable display for which it is not determined to be controlled to an advantageous state has a smaller variety of variable display patterns and a shorter average duration of the variable display period, thereby making it possible to provide a preferable second special state, since the variable display is consumed at a faster rate than in other states.

The gaming machine of aspect 2-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 2-1,
The variable display pattern that the variable display pattern determination means can determine in the second special state when the variable display is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means, and the variable display pattern that the variable display pattern determination means can determine in at least one of the first special state and the third special state when the variable display is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means are common (for example, a losing variable pattern (e.g., non-reach, SP reach D) that the CPU 103 can determine in the time-saving state B and a losing variable display pattern (e.g., non-reach, SP reach D) that can be determined in at least one of the time-saving state A and the probability variable state are common parts).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by not setting a variable display pattern that can be determined only in the second special state, it is possible to reduce development costs and program capacity.

The gaming machine of aspect 2-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 2-1 or 2-2,
The variable display pattern that the variable display pattern determination means can determine in the second special state when the variable display is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means, and the variable display pattern that the variable display pattern determination means can determine in both the first special state and the third special state when the variable display is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means are common (for example, a losing variable pattern (e.g., non-reach, SP reach D) that the CPU 103 can determine in the time-saving state B is common to a losing variable display pattern (e.g., non-reach, SP reach D) that can be determined in both the time-saving state A and the probability variable state).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by not setting a variable display pattern that can be determined only in the second special state, it is possible to reduce development costs and program capacity.

The gaming machine of aspect 2-4 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 2-1 to 2-3,
The average duration of the control period controlled to the second special state is shorter than the average duration of the control period controlled to the third special state, and the average duration of the control period controlled to the third special state is shorter than the average duration of the control period controlled to the first special state (for example, it is preferable that the average duration of the control period controlled to the time-saving state B is shorter than the average duration of the control period controlled to the probability variable state, and the average duration of the control period controlled to the probability variable state is shorter than the average duration of the control period controlled to the time-saving state A).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state, the average control period is shorter than in the third special state, thereby increasing the speed at which the variable display is consumed, thereby providing a preferable second special state, while in the first special state, the average control period is longer, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of aspect 2-5 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 2-1 to 2-4,
In the case of a variable display that is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means, the number of variable display patterns that the variable display pattern determination means can determine in the second special state is smaller than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the first special state, and the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the first special state is smaller than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the third special state (for example, the number of deviation fluctuation patterns (e.g., 2) that the CPU 103 can determine in the time-shortening state B is smaller than the number of deviation fluctuation patterns (e.g., 3) that can be determined in the time-shortening state A, and the number of deviation fluctuation patterns (e.g., 3) that can be determined in the time-shortening state A is smaller than the number of deviation fluctuation patterns (e.g., 4) that can be determined in the probability variable state).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state, the number of determinable variable display patterns is reduced to give priority to consumption of the variable display, while in the third special state, the number of determinable variable display patterns is increased to increase the interest of the game.

(SG2020-071) A gaming machine of form 1-12 is a gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-11,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a start winning hole) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means capable of controlling the non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control the normal state, a time-saving state A in which the time-saving control is performed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol), a probability variable state, and a time-saving state B);
A determination means capable of determining to control to the advantageous state (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the normal special symbol process);
A variable display pattern determination means for determining one of a plurality of types of variable display patterns having different variable display periods based on the determination result of the determination means (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 determines one of a plurality of types of variable display patterns based on the variable display result in the variable display pattern setting process of step SGS111);
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed,
When the variable display determined by the determination means to control to the advantageous state is a variable display, the number of variable display patterns that the variable display pattern determination means can determine in the second special state is smaller than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the first special state (for example, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", the number of jackpot fluctuation patterns (e.g., 1) that the CPU 103 can determine in the "time-shortened state B" is smaller than the number of variable display patterns (e.g., 2) that can be determined in the "time-shortened state A", and is also smaller than the number of loss fluctuation patterns (e.g., 3) that can be determined in the "probable variable state");
When the variable display is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means, the average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination means in the second special state is shorter than the average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined in the first special state (for example, when the variable display result is a “jackpot”, the average time (e.g., about 40 seconds) of the variable display period of the jackpot fluctuation pattern determined by the CPU 103 in the “time-shortened state B” is shorter than the average time (e.g., about 62.8 seconds) of the variable display period of the jackpot fluctuation pattern determined in the “time-shortened state A”, and is shorter than the average time (e.g., about 51.1 seconds) of the variable display period of the jackpot fluctuation pattern determined in the “probable variable state”. See FIG. 11-50).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, taking into consideration the long period during which the variable display has not been controlled to an advantageous state, it is decided to control the variable display to an advantageous state, and since there are fewer types of variable display patterns, development costs can be reduced, and since the variable display is controlled to an advantageous state without being unnecessarily provoked, an ideal second special state can be provided.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-13 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-12,
The variable display determined by the determining means to be controlled to the advantageous state includes a variable display part for performing a variable display of identification information, and a post-performance part for notifying game value information capable of identifying the amount of game value to be awarded in the advantageous state after the end of the variable display part,
An execution period of the variable display part in the first special state is different from an execution period of the variable display part in the second special state,
The execution period of the post-event performance part in the first special state and the execution period of the post-event performance part in the second special state are common (for example, the variable display time (50 seconds, 40 seconds) of the variable display part in the time-saving state A and the probability change state is different from the variable display time (25 seconds) of the variable display part in the time-saving state B, while the pattern determination time (15 seconds) of the post-event performance part in the time-saving state A and the probability change state is common to the pattern determination time (15 seconds) of the post-event performance part in the time-saving state B. See FIG. 11-61).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, development costs can be reduced by sharing the execution period of the post-effect in the variable display in which it has been decided to control to an advantageous state between the first special state and the second special state.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-14 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-13,
It is possible to perform variable display of identification information,
The variable display determined by the determining means to be controlled to the advantageous state includes a variable display part for performing a variable display of identification information, and a post-performance part for notifying game value information capable of identifying the amount of game value to be awarded in the advantageous state after the end of the variable display part,
a display means for executing a specific action display for causing the indicator to perform a specific action when the indicator is displayed in a stopped state during an execution period of the variable display part in the variable display determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state;
An execution period of the variable display part in the first special state is different from an execution period of the variable display part in the second special state,
The execution period of the specific operation display in the first special state and the execution period of the specific operation display in the second special state are common (for example, the variable display time (50 seconds, 40 seconds) of the variable display part of the time-saving state A and the probability change state is different from the variable display time (25 seconds) of the variable display part of the time-saving state B, while the display time (ta3 to ta4) of the jackpot specific operation display of the time-saving state A and the probability change state is common to the display time (ta3 to ta4) of the jackpot specific operation display of the time-saving state B. See FIG. 11-61).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, development costs can be reduced by standardizing the execution period of the specific action display in the variable display that has been determined to be controlled to an advantageous state between the first special state and the second special state.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-15 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-14,
The variable display pattern that the variable display pattern determination means can determine in the second special state when the variable display is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means, and the variable display pattern that the variable display pattern determination means can determine in the first special state when the variable display is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means are common (for example, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", a miss variable pattern (e.g., "SP reach D") that the CPU 103 can determine in the "time-shortened state B" and a miss variable pattern (e.g., "SP reach D") that can be determined in the "probable variable state" are common parts).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by not setting a variable display pattern that can be determined only in the second special state, it is possible to reduce development costs and program capacity.

(SG2020-072) The gaming machine of form 2-6 is a gaming machine according to any one of forms 2-1 to 2-5,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a start winning hole) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means capable of controlling the non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control the normal state, a time-saving state A in which the time-saving control is performed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol), a probability variable state, and a time-saving state B);
A determination means capable of determining to control to the advantageous state (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the normal special symbol process);
A variable display pattern determination means for determining one of a plurality of types of variable display patterns having different variable display periods based on the determination result of the determination means (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 determines one of a plurality of types of variable display patterns based on the variable display result in the variable display pattern setting process of step SGS111);
Equipped with
The special states include a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed, and a third special state (e.g., a guaranteed bonus state) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends,
When the variable display determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state is a variable display, the number of variable display patterns that the variable display pattern determination means can determine in the second special state is less than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the first special state and is also less than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the third special state (for example, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", the number of jackpot variable patterns that the CPU 103 can determine in the "time-shortened state B" (e.g., 1) is less than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the "time-shortened state A" (e.g., 2) and is also less than the number of loss variable patterns that can be determined in the "probable variable state" (e.g., 3)).
When the variable display is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means, the average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination means in the second special state is shorter than the average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined in the first special state and is shorter than the average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined in the third special state (for example, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", the average time (e.g., about 40 seconds) of the variable display period of the jackpot fluctuation pattern determined by the CPU 103 in the "time-shortened state B" is shorter than the average time (e.g., about 62.8 seconds) of the variable display period of the jackpot fluctuation pattern determined in the "time-shortened state A" and is shorter than the average time (e.g., about 51.1 seconds) of the variable display period of the jackpot fluctuation pattern determined in the "probable variable state". See FIG. 11-50).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, taking into consideration the long period during which the variable display has not been controlled to an advantageous state, it is decided to control the variable display to an advantageous state, and since there are fewer types of variable display patterns, development costs can be reduced, and since the variable display is controlled to an advantageous state without being unnecessarily provoked, an ideal second special state can be provided.

The gaming machine of aspect 2-7 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 2-1 to 2-6,
The variable display pattern that the variable display pattern determination means can determine in the second special state when the variable display is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means, and the variable display pattern that the variable display pattern determination means can determine in at least one of the first special state and the third special state when the variable display is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means are common (for example, a jackpot variable pattern (e.g., SP reach D) that the CPU 103 can determine in the time-shortening state B is common to a jackpot variable display pattern (e.g., SP reach D) that the CPU 103 can determine in at least one of the time-shortening state A and the probability variable state (e.g., the probability variable state)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by not setting a variable display pattern that can be determined only in the second special state, it is possible to reduce development costs and program capacity.

The gaming machine of aspect 2-8 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 2-1 to 2-7,
At least a part of the variable display pattern that the variable display pattern determination means can determine in the second special state when the variable display is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means, and the variable display pattern that the variable display pattern determination means can determine in both the first special state and the third special state when the variable display is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means are common (for example, a jackpot variable display pattern (e.g., not via SP) that the CPU 103 can determine in the time-shortening state B is a common part to a jackpot variable display pattern (e.g., not via SP) that can be determined in both the time-shortening state A and the probability variable state).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by not setting a variable display pattern that can be determined only in the second special state, it is possible to reduce development costs and program capacity.

The gaming machine of aspect 2-9 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 2-1 to 2-8,
The average duration of the control period controlled to the second special state is shorter than the average duration of the control period controlled to the third special state, and the average duration of the control period controlled to the third special state is shorter than the average duration of the control period controlled to the first special state (for example, the average duration of the control period controlled to the time-saving state B is shorter than the average duration of the control period controlled to the probability variable state, and the average duration of the control period controlled to the probability variable state is shorter than the average duration of the control period controlled to the time-saving state A).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state, the average control period is shorter than in the third special state, thereby increasing the speed at which the variable display is consumed, thereby providing a preferable second special state, while in the first special state, the average control period is longer, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of aspect 2-10 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 2-1 to 2-9,
When the variable display determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state is a variable display, the number of variable display patterns that the variable display pattern determination means can determine in the second special state is less than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the first special state, and the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the first special state is less than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the third special state (for example, the number of jackpot fluctuation patterns that the CPU 103 can determine in the time-shortened state B (e.g., 1) is less than the number of jackpot fluctuation patterns that can be determined in the time-shortened state A (e.g., 2), and the number of jackpot fluctuation patterns that can be determined in the time-shortened state A (e.g., 2) is less than the number of jackpot fluctuation patterns that can be determined in the probability variable state (e.g., 3)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state, the number of determinable variable display patterns is reduced to give priority to consumption of the variable display, while in the third special state, the number of determinable variable display patterns is increased to increase the interest of the game.

(SG2020-073) The gaming machine of form 1-16 is a gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-15,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player by variably displaying special identification information based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., a game ball entering a start winning hole),
A state control means capable of controlling the non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control the normal state, a time-saving state A in which the time-saving control is performed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol), a probability variable state, and a time-saving state B);
A determination means capable of determining to control to the advantageous state (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the normal special symbol process);
A variable display pattern determination means for determining one of a plurality of types of variable display patterns having different variable display periods of the special identification information based on the determination result of the determination means (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 determines one of a plurality of types of variable display patterns based on the variable display result in the variable display pattern setting process of step SGS111);
A decoration variable display means for performing variable display of decoration identification information in response to variable display of special identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decoration patterns as multiple types of decoration identification information in synchronization with the first special pattern and the second special pattern);
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times) of variable display of special identification information has been executed,
The variable display pattern determination means is capable of determining, in the case of a variable display of special identification information that is not determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state, a first non-specific variable display pattern (e.g., "SP Reach A to E Miss") in which a display result of the variable display of the special identification information (e.g., a miss display result) is displayed after the state of the variable display of the decorative identification information becomes a specific state (e.g., a reach state), and a second non-specific variable display pattern (e.g., "Non-reach Miss") in which a display result of the variable display of the special identification information is displayed without the state of the variable display of the decorative identification information becoming a specific state,
The rate at which the second non-specific variable display pattern is determined in the case where the variable display of the special identification information is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means in the second special state is higher than the rate at which the second non-specific variable display pattern is determined in the case where the variable display of the special identification information is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means in the first special state (for example, the rate at which the CPU 103 determines a "non-reach miss variable pattern" when the variable display result is "miss" in the "time-shortening state B" (for example, 97%) is higher than the rate at which the CPU 103 determines a "non-reach miss variable pattern" when the variable display result is "miss" in the "time-shortening state A" (for example, 95%), and is higher than the rate at which the CPU 103 determines a "non-reach miss variable pattern" when the variable display result is "miss" in the "probable change state" (for example, 95%). See FIG. 11-50).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, taking into consideration the long period during which the state is not controlled to an advantageous state, in the variable display for which it is not decided to control the state to an advantageous state, by making the manner of the variable display a specific manner, it is possible to provide a suitable second special state, since the state is less likely to be unnecessarily provoked.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-17 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-16,
It is possible to perform variable display of decorative identification information (e.g., decorative patterns),
The period from when the variable display of the decorative identification information starts to when it is stopped in the second non-specific variable display pattern is shorter than the period from when the variable display of the decorative identification information starts to when the variable display mode becomes the specific mode in the first non-specific variable display pattern (for example, the variable display period (tb0 to tb1) of the non-reach miss variable pattern is shorter than the period (tb0 to tb3) from when the variable display of the decorative pattern starts to when the variable display mode becomes the reach mode in the super reach miss variable pattern. See FIG. 11-62).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the variable display ends in a period shorter than the period until the variable display mode becomes the specific mode, so that a preferable second special state can be provided.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-18 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-17,
It is possible to perform variable display of multiple columns of decorative identification information (e.g., decorative patterns);
In the second non-specific variable display pattern, the period from when the variable display of the decorative identification information of a predetermined column among the multiple columns is started to when it is stopped is shorter than the period from when the variable display of the decorative identification information of the predetermined column is started to when it is stopped in the first non-specific variable display pattern (for example, in a non-reach miss variable pattern, the period (tb0 to tb1) from when the variable display of the decorative pattern in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is started to when it is stopped is shorter than the period (tb0 to tb2) from when the variable display of the decorative pattern in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is started to when it is stopped in the super reach miss variable pattern. See FIG. 11-62).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the variable display of the decoration identification information of the predetermined row ends in a short period of time, so that a preferable second special state can be provided.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-19 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-18,
The second non-specific variable display pattern that the variable display pattern determination means can determine in the second special state is common to the second non-specific variable display pattern that the variable display pattern determination means can determine in the first special state (for example, a non-reach miss variable pattern (e.g., non-reach) that the CPU 103 can determine in the time-saving state B and a non-reach miss variable pattern (e.g., non-reach) that the CPU 103 can determine in at least one of the time-saving state A and the probability variable state are common).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by not setting the second non-specific variable display pattern that can be determined only in the second special state, it is possible to reduce development costs and program capacity.

(SG2020-074) The gaming machine of form 2-11 is a gaming machine according to any one of forms 2-1 to 1-10,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player by variably displaying special identification information based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., a game ball entering a start winning hole),
A state control means capable of controlling the non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control the normal state, a time-saving state A in which the time-saving control is performed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol), a probability variable state, and a time-saving state B);
A determination means capable of determining to control to the advantageous state (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the normal special symbol process);
A variable display pattern determination means for determining one of a plurality of types of variable display patterns having different variable display periods of the special identification information based on the determination result of the determination means (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 determines one of a plurality of types of variable display patterns based on the variable display result in the variable display pattern setting process of step 069SGS111);
A decoration variable display means for performing a variable display of the decoration identification information in response to the variable display of the special identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 performs a variable display of the decoration patterns as multiple types of decoration identification information in synchronization with the first special pattern and the second special pattern);
Equipped with
The special states include a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed, and a third special state (e.g., a guaranteed bonus state) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends,
The variable display pattern determination means is capable of determining, in the case of a variable display of special identification information that is not determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state, a first non-specific variable display pattern (e.g., "SP Reach A to E Miss") in which a display result of the variable display of the special identification information (e.g., a miss display result) is displayed after the state of the variable display of the decorative identification information becomes a specific state (e.g., a reach state), and a second non-specific variable display pattern (e.g., "Non-reach Miss") in which a display result of the variable display of the special identification information is displayed without the state of the variable display of the decorative identification information becoming a specific state,
The rate at which the second non-specific variable display pattern is determined in the case of a variable display of special identification information that is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means in the second special state is higher than the rate at which the second non-specific variable display pattern is determined in the case of a variable display of special identification information that is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means in the first special state, and is higher than the rate at which the second non-specific variable display pattern is determined in the case of a variable display of special identification information that is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means in the third special state (for example, the rate at which the "non-reach miss variable pattern" is determined by the CPU 103 when the variable display result is "miss" in the "time-shortening state B" (for example, 97%) is higher than the rate at which the "non-reach miss variable pattern" is determined by the CPU 103 when the variable display result is "miss" in the "time-shortening state A" (for example, 95%), and is higher than the rate at which the "non-reach miss variable pattern" is determined by the CPU 103 when the variable display result is "miss" in the "probable change state" (for example, 95%). See FIG. 11-50).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, taking into consideration the long period during which the state is not controlled to an advantageous state, in the variable display for which it is not decided to control the state to an advantageous state, by making the manner of the variable display a specific manner, it is possible to provide a suitable second special state, since the state is less likely to be unnecessarily provoked.

The gaming machine of aspect 2-12 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 2-1 to 2-11,
The second non-specific variable display pattern that the variable display pattern determination means can determine in the second special state is common to the second non-specific variable display pattern that can be determined in at least one of the first special state and the third special state (for example, a non-reach miss variable pattern (e.g., non-reach) that the CPU 103 can determine in the time-saving state B and a non-reach miss variable pattern (e.g., non-reach) that can be determined in at least one of the time-saving state A and the probability variable state are common).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by not setting the second non-specific variable display pattern that can be determined only in the second special state, it is possible to reduce development costs and program capacity.

The gaming machine of aspect 2-13 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 2-1 to 2-12,
The second non-specific variable display pattern that can be determined by the variable display pattern determination means in the second special state is common to the second non-specific variable display pattern that can be determined in both the first special state and the third special state (for example, a non-reach miss variable pattern (e.g., non-reach) that can be determined by the CPU 103 in the time-saving state B is common to a non-reach miss variable pattern (e.g., non-reach) that can be determined in both the time-saving state A and the probability variable state).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by not setting the second non-specific variable display pattern that can be determined only in the second special state, it is possible to reduce development costs and program capacity.

(SG2020-075) The gaming machine of form 1-20 is a gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-19,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player by variably displaying special identification information based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., a game ball entering a start winning hole),
A state control means capable of controlling the non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control the normal state, a time-saving state A in which the time-saving control is performed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol), a probability variable state, and a time-saving state B);
A determination means capable of determining to control to the advantageous state (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the normal special symbol process);
A variable display pattern determination means for determining one of a plurality of types of variable display patterns having different variable display periods of the special identification information based on the determination result of the determination means (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 determines one of a plurality of types of variable display patterns based on the variable display result in the variable display pattern setting process of step 069SGS111);
A decoration variable display means for performing variable display of decoration identification information in response to variable display of special identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decoration patterns as multiple types of decoration identification information in synchronization with the first special pattern and the second special pattern);
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times) of variable display of special identification information has been executed,
The variable display pattern determination means is capable of determining, in the case of the variable display of special identification information determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state, a first specific variable display pattern (e.g., "SP reach A to C, E jackpot") which displays the display result of the variable display of the special identification information after the state of the variable display of the decorative identification information becomes a specific state, and a second specific variable display pattern (e.g., "SP reach D (instant hit or full spins)", "not via SP", etc.) which displays the display result of the variable display of the special identification information without the state of the variable display of the decorative identification information becoming a specific state,
The rate at which the second specific variable display pattern is determined in the second special state when the special identification information determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state is a variable display is higher than the rate at which the second specific variable display pattern is determined in the first special state when the special identification information determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state is a variable display (for example, the rate at which the "SP reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern (instant hit performance or full rotation performance)" that does not go through the reach mode in the time-saving state B is determined (for example, 90%) is higher than the rate at which the "SP non-via A jackpot fluctuation pattern" that does not go through the reach mode is determined in the time-saving state A (for example, 5%), and is higher than the rate at which the "SP non-via A jackpot fluctuation pattern" that does not go through the reach mode is determined in the probability variable state (for example, 5%). See FIG. 11-69).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, taking into consideration the fact that a long period has continued during which the variable display has not been controlled to an advantageous state, in the variable display for which it has been decided to control the variable display to an advantageous state, the variable display mode is set to a specific mode, so that the variable display is controlled to an advantageous state without being unnecessarily provoked, thereby providing an advantageous second special state.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-21 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-20,
It is possible to perform variable display of decorative identification information (e.g., decorative patterns),
a display means capable of executing a first specific action display for causing the decoration identification information to perform a specific action when the variable display mode becomes a specific mode, and a second specific action display (e.g., a pattern stop action display) for causing the decoration identification information to perform a specific action when the decoration identification information is stopped and displayed;
In the first specific variable display pattern, the first specific operation display and the second specific operation display are executed by the display means, whereas in the second specific variable display pattern, the first specific operation display is not executed by the display means but the second specific operation display is executed (for example, in the variation pattern of SP reach E which goes through a reach, a reach specific operation display and a jackpot specific operation display are executed, whereas in the variation pattern of SP reach D which does not go through a reach, a reach specific operation display is not executed but a jackpot specific operation display is executed. See FIG. 11-55).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, since the first specific action display is performed in the second special state, the player is less likely to be unnecessarily provoked, and therefore a preferable second special state can be provided.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-22 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-21,
The second specific variable display pattern that the variable display pattern determination means can determine in the second special state is common to the second specific variable display pattern that the variable display pattern determination means can determine in the first special state (for example, a non-reach miss variable pattern (e.g., non-reach) that the CPU 103 can determine in the time-saving state B and a non-reach miss variable pattern (e.g., non-reach) that the CPU 103 can determine in at least one of the time-saving state A and the probability variable state are common).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by not setting the second specific variable display pattern that can be determined only in the second special state, it is possible to reduce development costs and program capacity.

(SG2020-076) The gaming machine of form 2-14 is a gaming machine according to any one of forms 2-1 to 2-13,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player by variably displaying special identification information based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., a game ball entering a start winning hole),
A state control means capable of controlling the non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control the normal state, a time-saving state A in which the time-saving control is performed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol), a probability variable state, and a time-saving state B);
A determination means capable of determining to control to the advantageous state (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the normal special symbol process);
A variable display pattern determination means for determining one of a plurality of types of variable display patterns having different variable display periods of the special identification information based on the determination result of the determination means (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 determines one of a plurality of types of variable display patterns based on the variable display result in the variable display pattern setting process of step 069SGS111);
A decoration variable display means for performing variable display of decoration identification information in response to variable display of special identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decoration patterns as multiple types of decoration identification information in synchronization with the first special pattern and the second special pattern);
Equipped with
The special states include a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times) of variable display of special identification information has been executed, and a third special state (e.g., a guaranteed bonus state) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends,
The variable display pattern determination means is capable of determining, in the case of the variable display of special identification information determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state, a first specific variable display pattern (e.g., "SP reach A-C, E jackpot") which displays the display result of the variable display of the special identification information after the state of the variable display of the decorative identification information becomes a specific state, and a second specific variable display pattern (e.g., "SP reach D (instant hit or full spins)", "SP non-via A", etc.) which displays the display result of the variable display of the special identification information without the state of the variable display of the decorative identification information becoming a specific state,
The rate at which the second specific variable display pattern is determined in the case of a variable display of special identification information determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state in the second special state is higher than the rate at which the second specific variable display pattern is determined in the case of a variable display of special identification information determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state in the first special state, and is higher than the rate at which the second specific variable display pattern is determined in the case of a variable display determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state in the third special state (for example, the rate at which the "SP reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern (instant hit performance or full rotation performance)" that does not go through the reach mode in the time-saving state B is determined (for example, 90%) is higher than the rate at which the "SP non-via A jackpot fluctuation pattern" that does not go through the reach mode is determined in the time-saving state A (for example, 5%), and is higher than the rate at which the "SP non-via A jackpot fluctuation pattern" that does not go through the reach mode is determined in the probability variable state (for example, 5%). See FIG. 11-69).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, in consideration of the fact that a long period has continued during which the variable display has not been controlled to an advantageous state, in the variable display for which it has been decided to control the variable display to an advantageous state, the variable display mode is set to a specific mode, so that the variable display is controlled to an advantageous state without being unnecessarily provoked, thereby providing an advantageous second special state.

The gaming machine of aspect 2-15 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 2-1 to 2-14,
The second specific variable display pattern that the variable display pattern determination means can determine in the second special state is common to the second specific variable display pattern that can be determined in at least one of the first special state and the third special state (for example, a non-reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (e.g., not via SP) that the CPU 103 can determine in the time-saving state B is common to a non-reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (e.g., not via SP) that can be determined in at least one of the time-saving state A and the probability variable state).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by not setting the second specific variable display pattern that can be determined only in the second special state, it is possible to reduce development costs and program capacity.

The gaming machine of aspect 2-16 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 2-1 to 2-15,
The second specific variable display pattern that can be determined by the variable display pattern determination means in the second special state is common to the second specific variable display pattern that can be determined in both the first special state and the third special state (for example, a non-reach big win variable pattern (e.g., not via SP) that the CPU 103 can determine in the time-saving state B and a non-reach miss variable pattern (e.g., not via SP) that can be determined in both the time-saving state A and the probability variable state are common).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by not setting the second specific variable display pattern that can be determined only in the second special state, it is possible to reduce development costs and program capacity.

(SG2020-077) The gaming machine of form 1-23 is a gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-22,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) which can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player by variably displaying first identification information (e.g., a first special symbol) based on the establishment of a first start condition (e.g., a gaming ball entering a first start winning hole) and variably displaying second identification information (e.g., a second special symbol) based on the establishment of a second start condition (e.g., a gaming ball entering a second start winning hole),
A state control means capable of controlling the non-special state and a special state in which the second start condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control the normal state, a time-saving state A in which the time-saving control is performed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of the special pattern (particularly the second special pattern), a probability variable state, and a time-saving state B);
A first reserved storage means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the start winning determination process of step S101 in the special symbol process process) capable of storing information related to the variable display of the first identification information as reserved storage;
A second reserved storage means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the start winning determination process of step S101 in the special symbol process process) capable of storing information related to the variable display of the second identification information as reserved storage;
A determination means capable of determining to control to the advantageous state (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the normal special symbol process);
A variable display pattern determination means for determining one of a plurality of types of variable display patterns having different variable display periods based on the determination result of the determination means (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 determines one of a plurality of types of variable display patterns based on the variable display result in the variable display pattern setting process of step SGS111);
A performance execution means capable of executing a performance including a suggestion performance that suggests that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state;
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed,
the variable display pattern determination means is capable of determining a predetermined variable display pattern (e.g., "non-reach") for a predetermined variable display period capable of storing a reserved memory in the second reserved memory means when a reserved memory is not stored in the second reserved memory means in the first special state and the second special state and when a variable display is not determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state,
The performance execution means is capable of executing the suggestive performance in the variable display when the variable display is executed in the predetermined variable display pattern in the first special state, and does not execute the suggestive performance in the variable display when the variable display is executed in the predetermined variable display pattern in the second special state (for example, when the variable display is executed in a miss variable pattern determined when the reserved memory number is 0 in the "time-saving state A", and when the variable display is executed in a miss variable pattern determined when the reserved memory number is 0 in the "probable change state", a suggestive performance such as "movable object notice" or "character notice" is executed in the variable display, while when the variable display is executed in a miss variable pattern determined when the reserved memory number is 0 in the "time-saving state B", a part that does not execute a suggestive performance such as "movable object notice" or "character notice" in the variable display. See FIG. 11-50).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, taking into consideration the fact that a long period of time has continued during which the state is not controlled to be advantageous, the variable display of the predetermined variable display pattern does not unnecessarily induce excitement through suggestive effects, and therefore a favorable second special state can be provided.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-24 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-23,
In the second special state, if the variable display is one that is not determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state, the suggestive performance is not executed by the performance execution means, and if the variable display is one that is determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state, the suggestive performance is executed by the performance execution means (for example, in the time-saving state B, if the pattern is a miss fluctuation pattern, the "movable object forecast" or "character forecast" is not executed, and if the pattern is a jackpot fluctuation pattern, the "movable object forecast" or "character forecast" may be executed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, interest can be heightened by drawing attention to whether or not a suggestive performance will be executed in the second special state.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-25 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-24,
It is possible to perform variable display of decorative identification information (e.g., decorative patterns),
the variable display pattern determination means includes a variable display pattern that displays a display result of the variable display after a state of the variable display of the decoration identification information becomes a specific state,
The suggestive performance includes a provocative performance inviting a player to know whether the state of the variable display will be a specific state (for example, a suggestive performance inviting a player to be controlled to a jackpot game state may include a "reach notice" or a "button notice" as a provocative performance inviting a player to know whether the state of the variable display will be a reach state (whether a reach will be established)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, interest can be heightened by drawing attention to whether or not a suggestive performance will be executed in the second special state.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-26 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-25,
The effect execution means is capable of executing a plurality of types of suggestive effects including a first suggestive effect and a second suggestive effect which has a higher probability of being controlled to the advantageous state than when the first suggestive effect is executed, based on the determination result of the determination means (for example, a portion capable of executing a plurality of types of suggestive effects including a first suggestive effect (for example, a line A or a vibration (small)) and a second suggestive effect (for example, a line B or a vibration (large)) which has a higher probability of being controlled to a jackpot game state than when the first suggestive effect is executed, based on the variable display result);
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, interest can be heightened by drawing attention to whether or not a suggestive performance will be executed in the second special state.

(SG2020-078) The gaming machine of form 2-17 is a gaming machine according to any one of forms 2-1 to 2-16,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) which can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player by variably displaying first identification information (e.g., a first special symbol) based on the establishment of a first start condition (e.g., a gaming ball entering a first start winning hole) and variably displaying second identification information (e.g., a second special symbol) based on the establishment of a second start condition (e.g., a gaming ball entering a second start winning hole),
A state control means capable of controlling the non-special state and a special state in which the second start condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control the normal state, a time-saving state A in which the time-saving control is performed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of the special pattern (particularly the second special pattern), a probability variable state, and a time-saving state B);
A first reserved storage means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the start winning determination process of step S101 in the special symbol process process) capable of storing information related to the variable display of the first identification information as reserved storage;
A second reserved storage means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the start winning determination process of step S101 in the special symbol process process) capable of storing information related to the variable display of the second identification information as reserved storage;
A determination means capable of determining to control to the advantageous state (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the normal special symbol process);
A variable display pattern determination means for determining one of a plurality of types of variable display patterns having different variable display periods based on the determination result of the determination means (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 determines one of a plurality of types of variable display patterns based on the variable display result in the variable display pattern setting process of step SGS111);
A performance execution means capable of executing a performance including a suggestive performance that suggests that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 can execute a "movable object announcement" or a "character announcement");
Equipped with
The special states include a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed, and a third special state (e.g., a guaranteed bonus state) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends,
the variable display pattern determination means is capable of determining a predetermined variable display pattern (e.g., "non-reach") for a predetermined variable display period capable of storing a reserved memory in the second reserved memory means when a reserved memory is not stored in the second reserved memory means in the first special state, the second special state, and the third special state, and when a variable display is not determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state,
The performance execution means is capable of executing the suggestive performance in the variable display when the variable display is executed in the predetermined variable display pattern in the first special state and when the variable display is executed in the predetermined variable display pattern in the third special state, and does not execute the suggestive performance in the variable display when the variable display is executed in the predetermined variable display pattern in the second special state (for example, when the variable display is executed in a miss variable pattern determined when the reserved memory number is 0 in the "time-saving state A", and when the variable display is executed in a miss variable pattern determined when the reserved memory number is 0 in the "probable change state", a suggestive performance such as "movable object notice" or "character notice" is executed in the variable display, while when the variable display is executed in a miss variable pattern determined when the reserved memory number is 0 in the "time-saving state B", a part that does not execute a suggestive performance such as "movable object notice" or "character notice" in the variable display. See FIG. 11-50).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, taking into consideration the fact that a long period of time has continued during which the state is not controlled to be advantageous, the variable display of the predetermined variable display pattern does not unnecessarily induce excitement through suggestive effects, and therefore a favorable second special state can be provided.

(SG2020-079) The gaming machine of form 1-27 is a gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-26,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player by variably displaying identification information (e.g., a decorative pattern) based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., a game ball entering a start winning hole),
A state control means capable of controlling the non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control the normal state, a time-saving state A in which the time-saving control is performed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol), a probability variable state, and a time-saving state B);
A reserved memory means capable of storing information related to the variable display of the identification information as reserved memory (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the start winning determination process of step S101 in the special symbol process process);
A determination means capable of determining to control to the advantageous state (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the normal special symbol process);
An information transmitting means (e.g., a CPU 103) capable of transmitting information related to a game (e.g., a performance control command);
A performance execution means (for example, a portion where the performance control CPU 120 can execute a pre-reading notice performance) capable of executing a performance including a pre-reading notice performance that suggests that the reserved memory stored in the reserved memory means will be controlled to the advantageous state based on the information received from the information transmission means;
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed,
The performance execution means is capable of determining one pre-reading notice performance pattern from among a plurality of types of pre-reading notice performance patterns (for example, "countdown notice", "hold change notice", "symbol chance notice", "effect display notice");
In the case of a variable display in which the determination means has not determined that the control to the advantageous state is to be performed, the number of pre-reading notice performance patterns that the performance execution means can determine in the second special state is smaller than the number of pre-reading notice performance patterns that can be determined in the first special state (for example, the number of types of pre-reading notices that the performance control CPU 120 can determine when the variable display result is a miss in the "time-saving state B" (for example, 0) is smaller than the number of types of pre-reading notices that the performance control CPU 120 can determine when the variable display result is a miss in the "time-saving state A" (for example, 3), and is also smaller than the number of types of pre-reading notices that the performance control CPU 120 can determine when the variable display result is a miss in the "probable change state" (for example, 4)).
The rate at which the pre-reading notice performance is executed in the case where the variable display is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means in the second special state is lower than the rate at which the pre-reading notice performance is executed in the case where the variable display is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means in the first special state (for example, the execution rate of the pre-reading notice when the variable display result is a miss in the "time-saving state B" (for example, 0%) is lower than the execution rate of the pre-reading notice when the variable display result is a miss in the "time-saving state A" (for example, 30%), and is also lower than the execution rate of the pre-reading notice when the variable display result is a miss in the "probable change state" (for example, 40%). See FIG. 11-50).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, taking into consideration the long period during which the state was not controlled to an advantageous state, in the variable display in which it is not decided to control the state to an advantageous state, the number of pre-reading preview performance patterns is small, thereby reducing development costs, and the player is less likely to be unnecessarily swayed by the pre-reading preview performance, thereby providing an advantageous second special state.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-28 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-27,
As a look-ahead notice performance pattern which can be commonly executed by the performance execution means in the first special state and the second special state, there are a first look-ahead notice performance pattern and a second look-ahead notice performance pattern which has a higher probability of being controlled to the advantageous state than when the first look-ahead notice performance pattern is executed,
The rate at which the first pre-reading notice performance pattern is executed in the second special state is lower than the rate at which the first pre-reading notice performance pattern is executed in the first special state (for example, as a pre-reading notice performance pattern that can be commonly executed by the performance control CPU 120 in the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the probability variable state, there is a first pre-reading notice performance pattern (for example, a "blue" pattern of "hold change notice", "pattern chance eye notice", and "effect display notice"), and a second pre-reading notice performance pattern (for example, a "red" pattern of "hold change notice", "pattern chance eye notice", and "effect display notice") that has a higher rate of being controlled to the advantageous state than when the first pre-reading notice performance pattern is executed, and the rate at which the first pre-reading notice performance pattern is executed in the time-saving state B (for example, 0%, see FIG. 11-43(D)) is lower than the rate at which the first pre-reading notice performance pattern is executed in the time-saving state A and the probability variable state (for example, 10%, see FIG. 11-43(C))).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, since the player is less likely to be unnecessarily swayed by the first pre-reading preview performance in the second special state, a preferable second special state can be provided.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-29 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-28,
As a look-ahead notice performance pattern which can be commonly executed by the performance execution means in the first special state and the second special state, there are a first look-ahead notice performance pattern and a second look-ahead notice performance pattern which has a higher probability of being controlled to the advantageous state than when the first look-ahead notice performance pattern is executed,
The rate at which the second pre-reading notice performance pattern is executed in the second special state is higher than the rate at which the second pre-reading notice performance pattern is executed in the first special state (for example, as a pre-reading notice performance pattern that can be commonly executed by the performance control CPU 120 in the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the probability change state, there is a first pre-reading notice performance pattern (for example, a "blue" pattern of "hold change notice", "pattern chance eye notice", and "effect display notice"), and a second pre-reading notice performance pattern (for example, a "red" pattern of "hold change notice", "pattern chance eye notice", and "effect display notice") that has a higher rate of being controlled to the advantageous state than when the first pre-reading notice performance pattern is executed, and the rate at which the second pre-reading notice performance pattern is executed in the time-saving state B (for example, 90%, see FIG. 11-43 (D)) is higher than the rate at which the second pre-reading notice performance pattern is executed in the time-saving state A and the probability change state (for example, 50 to 70%, see FIG. 11-43 (C))).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, since the second pre-reading preview performance is likely to be executed in the second special state, a favorable second special state can be provided.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-30 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-29,
The pre-reading notice performance pattern that can be executed by the performance execution means in the first special state and the pre-reading notice performance pattern that can be executed by the performance execution means in the second special state are common (for example, the pre-reading notice performance pattern that can be executed by the performance control CPU 120 in the time-saving state A and the probability change state and the pre-reading notice performance pattern that can be executed by the performance control CPU 120 in the time-saving state B are common (for example, the part that is a "pattern chance eye notice").
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by not setting a pre-reading preview performance pattern that can be determined only by the second special state, it is possible to reduce development costs and program capacity.

(SG2020-080) The gaming machine of form 2-18 is a gaming machine according to any one of forms 2-1 to 1-17,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player by variably displaying identification information (e.g., a decorative pattern) based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., a game ball entering a start winning hole),
A state control means capable of controlling the non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control the normal state, a time-saving state A in which the time-saving control is performed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol), a probability variable state, and a time-saving state B);
A reserved memory means capable of storing information related to the variable display of the identification information as reserved memory (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the start winning determination process of step S101 in the special symbol process process);
A determination means capable of determining to control to the advantageous state (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the normal special symbol process);
An information transmitting means (e.g., a CPU 103) capable of transmitting information related to a game (e.g., a performance control command);
A performance execution means (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 can execute a pre-reading notice performance) capable of executing a performance including a pre-reading notice performance that suggests that the reserved memory stored in the reserved memory means will be controlled to the advantageous state based on the information received from the information transmission means;
Equipped with
The special states include a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed, and a third special state (e.g., a guaranteed bonus state) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends,
The performance execution means is capable of determining one pre-reading notice performance pattern from among a plurality of types of pre-reading notice performance patterns (for example, "countdown notice", "hold change notice", "symbol chance notice", "effect display notice");
In the case of a variable display in which the determination means has not determined that the control to the advantageous state is performed, the number of pre-reading notice performance patterns that the performance execution means can determine in the second special state is less than the number of pre-reading notice performance patterns that can be determined in the first special state and is also less than the number of pre-reading notice performance patterns that can be determined in the third special state (for example, the number of types of pre-reading notices that the performance control CPU 120 can determine when the variable display result is a miss in the "time-saving state B" (for example, 0) is less than the number of types of pre-reading notices that the performance control CPU 120 can determine when the variable display result is a miss in the "time-saving state A" (for example, 3), and is also less than the number of types of pre-reading notices that the performance control CPU 120 can determine when the variable display result is a miss in the "probable change state" (for example, 4)).
The rate at which the pre-reading notice performance is executed in the case of a variable display in which the determination means does not determine to control to the advantageous state in the second special state is lower than the rate at which the pre-reading notice performance is executed in the case of a variable display in which the determination means does not determine to control to the advantageous state in the first special state, and is also lower than the rate at which the pre-reading notice performance is executed in the case of a variable display in which the determination means does not determine to control to the advantageous state in the third special state (for example, the execution rate of the pre-reading notice when the variable display result is a miss in the "time-shortening state B" (for example, 0%) is lower than the execution rate of the pre-reading notice when the variable display result is a miss in the "time-shortening state A" (for example, 30%), and is lower than the execution rate of the pre-reading notice when the variable display result is a miss in the "probable change state" (for example, 40%). See FIG. 11-50).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, taking into consideration the long period during which the state was not controlled to an advantageous state, in the variable display in which it is not decided to control the state to an advantageous state, the number of pre-reading preview performance patterns is small, thereby reducing development costs, and the player is less likely to be unnecessarily swayed by the pre-reading preview performance, thereby providing an advantageous second special state.

The gaming machine of aspect 2-19 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 2-1 to 2-18,
The look-ahead notice performance pattern that the performance execution means can determine in the second special state and the look-ahead notice performance pattern that the performance execution means can determine in at least one of the first special state and the third special state are common (for example, the look-ahead notice performance pattern that the performance control CPU 120 can determine in the time-saving state B and the look-ahead notice performance pattern that the performance control CPU 120 can determine in at least one of the time-saving state A and the probability change state are common (for example, the "pattern chance eye notice") part).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by not setting a pre-reading preview performance pattern that can be determined only by the second special state, it is possible to reduce development costs and program capacity.

The gaming machine of aspect 2-20 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 2-1 to 2-19,
The look-ahead notice performance pattern that the performance execution means can determine in the second special state is common to the look-ahead notice performance pattern that the performance execution means can determine in both the first special state and the third special state (for example, the look-ahead notice performance pattern that the performance control CPU 120 can determine in the time-saving state B is common to the look-ahead notice performance pattern that the performance control CPU 120 can determine in both the time-saving state A and the probability change state (for example, the "pattern chance eye notice") part).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by not setting the second specific variable display pattern that can be determined only in the second special state, it is possible to reduce development costs and program capacity.

The gaming machine of aspect 2-21 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 2-1 to 2-20,
The number of the look-ahead notice performance patterns that the performance execution means can determine in the second special state is smaller than the number of the look-ahead notice performance patterns that the performance execution means can determine in the first special state, and the number of the look-ahead notice performance patterns that the performance execution means can determine in the first special state is smaller than the number of the look-ahead notice performance patterns that the performance execution means can determine in the third special state (for example, the number of types of look-ahead notices that the performance control CPU 120 can determine when the variable display result is a miss in the "time-saving state B" (for example, 0) is smaller than the number of types of look-ahead notices that the performance control CPU 120 can determine when the variable display result is a miss in the "time-saving state A" (for example, 3), and is smaller than the number of types of look-ahead notices that the performance control CPU 120 can determine when the variable display result is a miss in the "probable change state" (for example, 4)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state, the number of determinable pre-reading preview performance patterns is reduced to prioritize consumption of the variable display, while in the third special state, the number of determinable pre-reading preview performance patterns is increased to increase the interest of the game.

(SG2020-081) The gaming machine of form 1-31 is a gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-30,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a start winning hole) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means capable of controlling the non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control the normal state, a time-saving state A in which the time-saving control is performed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol), a probability variable state, and a time-saving state B);
A motion detection means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120, a push sensor 35B) capable of detecting a motion of a player;
A performance execution means capable of executing a performance including an action promotion performance for encouraging a player to take an action (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 can execute a "button notice");
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed,
The execution rate of the action promotion effect per one variable display in the second special state is lower than the execution rate of the action promotion effect per one variable display in the first special state (for example, the execution rate of the button notice per one variable display in the "time-saving state B" (for example, 10% for a jackpot and 5% for a miss) is lower than the execution rate of the button notice per one variable display in the "time-saving state A" (for example, 80% for a jackpot and 20% for a miss), and is lower than the execution rate of the button notice per one variable display in the "probability change state" (for example, 80% for a jackpot and 30% for a miss). See FIG. 11-50).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, taking into consideration the long period during which the player was not controlled to an advantageous state, the number of times that the player is prompted to take an action in one variable display is reduced, thereby providing an optimal second special state.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-32 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-31,
In the second special state, the percentage of the action promotion effect being executed by the effect execution means when the variable display is one that has been determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state is higher than the percentage of the action promotion effect being executed by the effect execution means when the variable display is one that has not been determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state (for example, in the time-saving state B, the percentage of the effect control CPU 120 executing a “button notice” when the variable display result is a jackpot (for example, 10%) is higher than the percentage of the effect control CPU 120 executing a “button notice” when the variable display result is a miss (for example, 5%)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, interest can be increased by drawing attention to the fact that the action promotion effect is executed in the second special state.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-33 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-32,
The action promotion performance pattern executable by the performance execution means includes a first action promotion performance pattern and a second action promotion performance pattern in which the rate of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the first action promotion performance pattern is executed,
The rate at which the second action-promoting presentation pattern is executed in the second special state is higher than the rate at which the second action-promoting presentation pattern is executed in the first special state (for example, as presentation patterns for the "button notice", there are a "hit" pattern and a "continuous hit" or "long press" pattern which has a higher rate of being controlled to a jackpot game state than when the "hit" pattern is executed, and the rate at which the "hit" pattern is executed in the time-saving state B (for example, 10%) is lower than the rate at which the "hit" or "long press" pattern is executed in the time-saving state A or the probability variable state (for example, 40%), but the rate at which the "hit" pattern is executed in the time-saving state B may be higher than the rate at which the "hit" or "long press" pattern is executed in the time-saving state A or the probability variable state).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when the action-promoting performance is executed in the second special state, the second action-promoting performance pattern is often obtained, thereby increasing interest.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-34 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-33,
The period during which the action promotion effect is executed in the first special state and the period during which the action promotion effect is executed in the second special state are common (for example, the period during which the “button notice” is executed in the time-saving state A or the probability change state and the period during which the “button notice” is executed in the time-saving state B are common (for example, the period during which the “reach notice” is executed)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the execution period of the action prompting effect can be made common between the first special state and the second special state, thereby reducing development costs.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-35 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-34,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a motion promotion preparation performance before executing the motion promotion performance,
The period during which the action promotion preparation effect is executed in the first special state and the period during which the action promotion preparation effect is executed in the second special state are common (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing an action promotion preparation effect (for example, although not shown in particular, before the operation effective period starts, an effect in which the push button 31B to be operated is faded in or an effect display is displayed) before executing the “button notice”, it is preferable that the period during which the action promotion preparation effect is executed in the time-saving state A or the probability variable state and the period during which the action promotion preparation effect is executed in the time-saving state B are common).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by making the execution period of the action promotion preparation performance common to the first special state and the second special state, development costs can be reduced and the execution of the action promotion performance can be appropriately notified.

(SG2020-082) The gaming machine of form 2-22 is a gaming machine according to any one of forms 2-1 to 2-21,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a start winning hole) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means capable of controlling the non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control the normal state, a time-saving state A in which the time-saving control is performed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol), a probability variable state, and a time-saving state B);
A motion detection means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120, a push sensor 35B) capable of detecting a motion of a player;
A performance execution means capable of executing a performance including an action promotion performance for encouraging a player to take an action (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 can execute a "button notice");
Equipped with
The special states include a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed, and a third special state (e.g., a guaranteed bonus state) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends,
The execution rate of the action promotion effect per one variable display in the second special state is lower than the execution rate of the action promotion effect per one variable display in the first special state and is also lower than the execution rate of the action promotion effect per one variable display in the third special state (for example, the execution rate of the button notice per one variable display in the "time-saving state B" (for example, 10% for a jackpot, 5% for a miss) is lower than the execution rate of the button notice per one variable display in the "time-saving state A" (for example, 80% for a jackpot, 20% for a miss) and is also lower than the execution rate of the button notice per one variable display in the "probability change state" (for example, 80% for a jackpot, 30% for a miss). See FIG. 11-50).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, taking into consideration the long period during which the player was not controlled to an advantageous state, the number of times that the player is prompted to take an action in one variable display is reduced, thereby providing an optimal second special state.

(SG2020-083) The gaming machine of form 1-36 is a gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-35,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a start winning hole) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means capable of controlling the non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control the normal state, a time-saving state A in which the time-saving control is performed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol), a probability variable state, and a time-saving state B);
A determination means capable of determining to control to the advantageous state (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the normal special symbol process);
A motion detection means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120, a push sensor 35B) capable of detecting a motion of a player;
A performance execution means capable of executing a performance including a performance for encouraging a player to perform a motion and a specific performance for informing the player that the player is being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 is capable of executing a "win/lose button performance" and a "movable body performance");
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed,
As the performance execution patterns of the action prompting performance and the specific performance that can be executed by the performance execution means in one variable display, there are a first performance execution pattern (e.g., “patterns A-2 and A-3”) in which the specific performance is executed after the action prompting performance is executed, and a second performance execution pattern (e.g., “pattern A-1”) in which the specific performance is executed without executing the action prompting performance,
The rate at which the second performance execution pattern is executed when it is determined by the determination means to control to the advantageous state in the second special state is higher than the rate at which the second performance execution pattern is executed when it is determined by the determination means to control to the advantageous state in the first special state (for example, the rate at which the "immediate hit performance" in which the "movable body performance" is executed without executing the "hit/miss button performance" in the SP reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern in the time-saving state B (for example, 90%) is higher than the rate at which the "immediate hit performance" in which the "movable body performance" is executed without executing the "hit/miss button performance" in the SP reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern in the time-saving state A (for example, 0%), and is higher than the rate at which the "immediate hit performance" or "full rotation performance" in which the "movable body performance" is executed without executing the "hit/miss button performance" in the SP reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern in the probability variable state (for example, 0%). See FIG. 11-69).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, taking into consideration the long period during which control to the advantageous state has not been made, the player is less urged to take action when notified that a decision has been made to control to the advantageous state, thereby providing an optimal second special state.

(SG2020-084) The gaming machine of form 2-23 is a gaming machine according to any one of forms 2-1 to 2-22,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a start winning hole) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means capable of controlling the non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control the normal state, a time-saving state A in which the time-saving control is performed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol), a probability variable state, and a time-saving state B);
A determination means capable of determining to control to the advantageous state (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the normal special symbol process);
A motion detection means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120, a push sensor 35B) capable of detecting a motion of a player;
A performance execution means capable of executing a performance including a performance for encouraging a player to perform a motion and a specific performance for informing the player that the player will be controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 can execute a "button notice" and a "win/lose button performance");
Equipped with
The special states include a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed, and a third special state (e.g., a guaranteed bonus state) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends,
As the performance execution patterns of the action prompting performance and the specific performance that can be executed by the performance execution means in one variable display, there are a first performance execution pattern (e.g., “patterns A-2 and A-3”) in which the specific performance is executed after the action prompting performance is executed, and a second performance execution pattern (e.g., “pattern A-1”) in which the specific performance is executed without executing the action prompting performance,
The rate at which the second performance execution pattern is executed when it is determined by the determination means to control to the advantageous state in the second special state is higher than the rate at which the second performance execution pattern is executed when it is determined by the determination means to control to the advantageous state in the first special state, and is higher than the rate at which the second performance execution pattern is executed when it is determined by the determination means to control to the advantageous state in the third special state (for example, the execution rate (e.g., 90%) of the "immediate hit performance" in which the "movable body performance" is executed without executing the "hit/miss button performance" in the SP reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern in the time-saving state B is higher than the rate (e.g., 0%) of the "movable body performance" in the SP reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern in the time-saving state A, and is higher than the rate (e.g., 0%) of the "movable body performance" in the SP reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern in the probability variable state without executing the "hit/miss button performance". See FIG. 11-69).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, taking into consideration the long period during which control to the advantageous state has not been made, the player is less urged to take action when notified that a decision has been made to control to the advantageous state, thereby providing an optimal second special state.

(SG2020-085) The gaming machine of form 1-37 is a gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-36,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a start winning hole) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means capable of controlling the non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control the normal state, a time-saving state A in which the time-saving control is performed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol), a probability variable state, and a time-saving state B);
A motion detection means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120, a push sensor 35B) capable of detecting a motion of a player;
A performance execution means capable of executing a performance including an action promotion performance for encouraging a player to take an action (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 can execute a "button notice");
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed,
The types of the action prompting effects that can be executed by the effect execution means include a first action prompting effect that prompts the player to perform a single action (e.g., an action prompting display for a “one-hit” action), and a second action prompting effect that prompts the player to perform an action over a predetermined action period (e.g., an action prompting display for a “continuous hit” or “long press” action),
The effect execution means is capable of executing both the first action promotion effect and the second action promotion effect in the first special state, and is capable of executing the first action promotion effect in the second special state, but does not execute the second action promotion effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of determining the execution of both the “one-hit pattern” and the “continuous hit pattern, long press pattern” in the “probable change state” and the “time-saving state A”, and is capable of determining the “one-hit pattern” in the “time-saving state B”, but does not determine the execution of the “continuous hit pattern, long press pattern”. See FIG. 11-50).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, taking into account the long period during which the player was not controlled to an advantageous state, the player is less prompted to perform troublesome actions such as operating over a predetermined operating period, thereby providing an optimal second special state.

(SG2020-086) The gaming machine of form 2-24 is a gaming machine according to any one of forms 2-1 to 2-23,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a start winning hole) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means capable of controlling the non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control the normal state, a time-saving state A in which the time-saving control is performed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol), a probability variable state, and a time-saving state B);
A motion detection means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120, a push sensor 35B) capable of detecting a motion of a player;
A performance execution means capable of executing a performance including an action promotion performance for encouraging a player to take an action (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 can execute a "button notice");
Equipped with
The special states include a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed, and a third special state (e.g., a guaranteed bonus state) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends,
The types of the action prompting effects that can be executed by the effect execution means include a first action prompting effect that prompts the player to perform a single action (e.g., an action prompting display for a “one-hit” action), and a second action prompting effect that prompts the player to perform an action over a predetermined action period (e.g., an action prompting display for a “continuous hit” or “long press” action),
The effect execution means is capable of executing both the first action promotion effect and the second action promotion effect in the first special state and the third special state, and is capable of executing the first action promotion effect in the second special state, but does not execute the second action promotion effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of determining the execution of both the “one-hit pattern” and the “continuous hit pattern, long press pattern” in the “probable change state” and the “time-saving state A”, and is capable of determining the “one-hit pattern” in the “time-saving state B”, but does not determine the execution of the “continuous hit pattern, long press pattern”. See FIG. 11-50).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, taking into account the long period during which the player was not controlled to an advantageous state, the player is less prompted to perform troublesome actions such as operating over a predetermined operating period, thereby providing an optimal second special state.

(SG2020-087) The gaming machine of form 1-38 is a gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-37,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a start winning hole) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means capable of controlling the non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control the normal state, a time-saving state A in which the time-saving control is performed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol), a probability variable state, and a time-saving state B);
A determination means capable of determining to control to the advantageous state (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the normal special symbol process);
A performance execution means capable of executing a performance including a suggestive performance that suggests that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 can execute a "movable object notice");
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed,
The effect execution means is capable of executing a plurality of types of suggestive effects including a first suggestive effect (e.g., "small vibration") and a second suggestive effect (e.g., "large vibration") that is more likely to be controlled to the advantageous state than when the first suggestive effect is executed, based on the determination result of the determination means;
The execution rate of the suggestive performance per one variable display in the second special state is lower than the execution rate of the suggestive performance per one variable display in the first special state (for example, the execution rate of the "movable object notice" per one variable display in the "time-saving state B" (for example, 0% jackpot, 0% miss) is lower than the execution rate of the "movable object notice" per one variable display in the "time-saving state A" (for example, 90% jackpot, 30% miss), and is lower than the execution rate of the "movable object notice" per one variable display in the "probable change state" (for example, 90% jackpot, 40% miss). See FIG. 11-50).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, the number of times that control to the advantageous state is suggested is reduced, taking into account the long period during which control to the advantageous state has not continued, thereby providing an optimal second special state.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-39 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-38,
The rate at which the suggestive performance is executed in the second special state when the variable display is determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state is higher than the rate at which the suggestive performance is executed in the first special state when the variable display is determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state (for example, the rate at which the "movable object notice" is executed in the time-saving state B when the variable display result is a jackpot (for example, 0%) is lower than the rate at which the "movable object notice" is executed in the time-saving state A or the probability variable state when the variable display result is a jackpot (for example, 90%), but the rate at which the "movable object notice" is executed in the time-saving state B when the variable display result is a jackpot may be higher than the rate at which the "movable object notice" is executed in the time-saving state A or the probability variable state when the variable display result is a jackpot).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, interest can be increased by differentiating the degree of attention to the suggestive performance between the first special state and the second special state.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-40 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-39,
The rate at which the first suggestive performance is executed in the second special state when the variable display is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means is higher than the rate at which the first suggestive performance is executed in the first special state when the variable display is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means (for example, the rate at which the “vibration (small)” pattern is executed in the time-saving state B when the variable display result is a jackpot (for example, 0%) is lower than the rate at which the “vibration (small)” pattern is executed in the time-saving state A or the probability variable state when the variable display result is a jackpot (for example, 30%), but the rate at which the “vibration (small)” pattern is executed in the time-saving state B when the variable display result is a jackpot may be higher than the rate at which the “vibration (small)” pattern is executed in the time-saving state A or the probability variable state when the variable display result is a jackpot (for example, 30%)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, interest can be increased by differentiating the degree of attention to the suggestive performance between the first special state and the second special state.

(SG2020-088) The gaming machine of form 2-25 is a gaming machine according to any one of forms 2-1 to 2-24,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a start winning hole) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means capable of controlling the non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control the normal state, a time-saving state A in which the time-saving control is performed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol), a probability variable state, and a time-saving state B);
A determination means capable of determining to control to the advantageous state (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the normal special symbol process);
A performance execution means capable of executing a performance including a suggestive performance that suggests that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 can execute a "movable object notice");
Equipped with
The special states include a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed, and a third special state (e.g., a guaranteed bonus state) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends,
The effect execution means is capable of executing a plurality of types of suggestive effects including a first suggestive effect (e.g., "small vibration") and a second suggestive effect (e.g., "large vibration") that is more likely to be controlled to the advantageous state than when the first suggestive effect is executed, based on the determination result of the determination means;
The execution rate of the suggestive performance per one variable display in the second special state is lower than the execution rate of the suggestive performance per one variable display in the first special state and is also lower than the execution rate of the suggestive performance per one variable display in the third special state (for example, the execution rate of the "movable object notice" per one variable display in the "time-saving state B" (e.g., 0% jackpot, 0% miss) is lower than the execution rate of the "movable object notice" per one variable display in the "time-saving state A" (e.g., 90% jackpot, 30% miss) and is also lower than the execution rate of the "movable object notice" per one variable display in the "probable change state" (e.g., 90% jackpot, 40% miss). See FIG. 11-50).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, the number of times that control to the advantageous state is suggested is reduced, taking into account the long period during which control to the advantageous state has not continued, thereby providing an optimal second special state.

(SG2020-089) The gaming machine of form 1-41 is a gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-40,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player by variably displaying special identification information based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., a game ball entering a start winning hole),
A state control means capable of controlling the non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control the normal state, a time-saving state A in which the time-saving control is performed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol), a probability variable state, and a time-saving state B);
A determination means capable of determining to control to the advantageous state (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the normal special symbol process);
A decoration variable display means for performing a variable display of the decoration identification information in response to the variable display of the special identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 performs a variable display of the decoration patterns as multiple types of decoration identification information in synchronization with the first special pattern and the second special pattern);
A performance execution means capable of executing a performance including a provocative performance for provoking whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative identification information is to be a specific mode (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 can execute a "character announcement" or a "reach announcement");
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed,
The execution rate of the teasing performance per one variable display in the second special state is lower than the execution rate of the teasing performance per one variable display in the first special state (for example, the execution rate of the “character notice” per one variable display in the “time-saving state B” (for example, 10% for a big hit, 5% for a miss) is lower than the execution rate of the “character notice” per one variable display in the “time-saving state A” (for example, 80% for a big hit, 20% for a miss), and is lower than the execution rate of the “character notice” per one variable display in the “probability change state” (for example, 80% for a big hit, 30% for a miss). Also, the execution rate of the “reach notice” per one variable display in the “time-saving state B” (for example, 20%) is lower than the execution rate of the “reach notice” per one variable display in the “time-saving state A” (for example, 40%), and is lower than the execution rate of the “reach notice” per one variable display in the “probability change state” (for example, 50%). See FIG. 11-50).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, taking into account the long period during which the state was not controlled to be advantageous, the number of times that the question of whether or not to display a specific display is prompted is reduced, thereby providing an optimal second special state.

(SG2020-090) The gaming machine of form 2-26 is a gaming machine according to any one of forms 2-1 to 2-25,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player by variably displaying special identification information based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., a game ball entering a start winning hole),
A state control means capable of controlling the non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control the normal state, a time-saving state A in which the time-saving control is performed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol), a probability variable state, and a time-saving state B);
A determination means capable of determining to control to the advantageous state (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the normal special symbol process);
A decoration variable display means for performing variable display of decoration identification information in response to variable display of special identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decoration patterns as multiple types of decoration identification information in synchronization with the first special pattern and the second special pattern);
A performance execution means capable of executing a performance including a provocative performance for provoking whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative identification information is to be a specific mode (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 can execute a "character announcement" or a "reach announcement");
Equipped with
The special states include a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed, and a third special state (e.g., a guaranteed bonus state) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends,
The execution rate of the teasing effect per one variable display in the second special state is lower than the execution rate of the teasing effect per one variable display in the first special state and is also lower than the execution rate of the teasing effect per one variable display in the third special state (for example, the execution rate of the "character announcement" per one variable display in the "time-saving state B" (for example, 10% for a big hit, 5% for a miss) is lower than the execution rate of the "character announcement" per one variable display in the "time-saving state A" (for example, 80% for a big hit, 20% for a miss). ), and is also lower than the execution rate of the "character announcement" per one variable display in the "probable change state" (e.g., 80% for big wins, 30% for misses). Also, the execution rate of the "reach announcement" per one variable display in the "time-saving state B" (e.g., 20%) is lower than the execution rate of the "reach announcement" per one variable display in the "time-saving state A" (e.g., 40%), and is also lower than the execution rate of the "reach announcement" per one variable display in the "probable change state" (e.g., 50%). See FIG. 11-50.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, taking into account the long period during which the state was not controlled to be advantageous, the number of times that the question of whether or not to display a specific display is prompted is reduced, thereby providing an optimal second special state.

(SG2020-091) The gaming machine of form 1-42 is a gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-41,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a start winning hole) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means capable of controlling the non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control the normal state, a time-saving state A in which the time-saving control is performed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol), a probability variable state, and a time-saving state B);
A determination means capable of determining to control to the advantageous state (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the normal special symbol process);
An operable movable body (e.g., movable body 32);
A performance execution means capable of executing a performance including a moving body performance that operates the moving body and a specific performance that notifies the user that the moving body is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 can execute a "moving body notice" and a "moving body performance");
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed,
As the performance execution patterns of the movable body performance and the specific performance that can be executed by the performance execution means in one variable display, there are a first performance execution pattern (e.g., "patterns A-2, A-3") in which the movable body performance is executed before the execution period of the specific performance and the movable body performance is also executed during the execution period of the specific performance, and a second performance execution pattern (e.g., "pattern A-1") in which the movable body performance is not executed before the execution period of the specific performance and the movable body performance is executed during the execution period of the specific performance,
The rate at which the second performance execution pattern is executed when it is determined by the determination means to control to the advantageous state in the second special state is higher than the rate at which the second performance execution pattern is executed when it is determined by the determination means to control to the advantageous state in the first special state (for example, the execution rate (e.g., 90%) of “Pattern A-1” when the variable display result is a miss in the “Time-saving state B” is higher than the execution rate (e.g., 10%) of “Pattern A-1” when the variable display result is a miss in the “Time-saving state A”, and is higher than the execution rate (e.g., 20%) of “Pattern A-1” when the variable display result is a miss in the “Probable variable state”. See FIG. 11-50).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, if it is decided to control to an advantageous state taking into consideration the fact that a long period has continued during which the state has not been controlled to an advantageous state, it is possible to provide a suitable second special state, since the movable body is unlikely to be unnecessarily operated even before a specific performance.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-43 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-42,
The control data used to control the movable body in the movable body performance when it is determined by the determination means to control the movable body to the advantageous state in the first special state and the control data used to control the movable body in the movable body performance when it is determined by the determination means to control the movable body to the advantageous state in the second special state are common (for example, the control data used to control the operation of the movable body 32 and the push button 31B in the "movable body performance" in the case of a jackpot in the time-saving state A or the probability change state (for example, the control data corresponding to the extended commands such as D100 and S200) is common to the control data used to control the operation of the movable body 32 and the push button 31B in the "movable body performance" in the case of a jackpot in the time-saving state B (for example, the control data corresponding to the extended commands such as D100 and S200)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by standardizing the control data used to control the movable body in the first special state and the second special state, development costs can be reduced.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-44 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-43,
A light emitting means capable of emitting light is provided,
The control data used to control the light-emitting means that emits light in conjunction with the movement of the movable body in the movable body performance when it is determined by the determination means to control the advantageous state in the first special state, and the control data used to control the light-emitting means that emits light in conjunction with the movement of the movable body in the movable body performance when it is determined by the determination means to control the advantageous state in the second special state are common (for example, the control data (for example, control data corresponding to an extended command such as B000) used to control the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12 that emit light in conjunction with the movement of the movable body 32 in the "movable body performance" in the case of a jackpot in the time-saving state A or the probability change state, and the control data (for example, control data corresponding to an extended command such as B000) used to control the movable body LED 208 that emits light in conjunction with the movement of the movable body 32 in the "movable body performance" in the case of a jackpot in the time-saving state B are common parts).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, development costs can be reduced by standardizing the control data used to control the light-emitting means that emits light in conjunction with the movable body performance in the first special state and the second special state.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-45 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-44,
a display means capable of displaying an effect image for emphasizing the movable body,
The effect image displayed by the display means in conjunction with the movement of the movable body in the movable body performance when it is determined by the determination means to control to the advantageous state in the first special state, and the effect image displayed by the display means in conjunction with the movement of the movable body in the movable body performance when it is determined by the determination means to control to the advantageous state in the second special state are common (for example, the effect image displayed in conjunction with the movement of the movable body 32 in the "movable body performance" in the case of a jackpot in the time-saving state A or the probability change state (see the movable body performance image 069SG456 in FIG. 11-59 (D1)) and the effect image displayed in conjunction with the movement of the movable body 32 in the "movable body performance" in the case of a jackpot in the time-saving state B (see the movable body performance image 069SG456 in FIG. 11-59 (D1)) are common parts).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by standardizing the effect images displayed in conjunction with the movable body performance in the first special state and the second special state, development costs can be reduced.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-46 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-45,
A vibration means capable of vibrating a predetermined portion is provided,
The vibration mode executed by the vibration means in conjunction with the movement of the movable body in the movable body performance when it is determined by the determination means to control to the advantageous state in the first special state, and the vibration mode executed by the vibration means in conjunction with the movement of the movable body in the movable body performance when it is determined by the determination means to control to the advantageous state in the second special state are common (for example, the vibration mode executed by the vibration motor 61 in conjunction with the movement of the movable body 32 in the "movable body performance" in the case of a jackpot in the time-saving state A or the probability variable state, and the vibration mode executed by the vibration motor 61 in conjunction with the movement of the movable body 32 in the "movable body performance" in the case of a jackpot in the time-saving state B are common parts).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by standardizing the vibration patterns executed in conjunction with the movable body performance in the first special state and the second special state, development costs can be reduced.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-47 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-46,
The rate at which the first performance execution pattern is executed when it is determined by the determination means to control to the advantageous state in the first special state is higher than the rate at which the first performance execution pattern is executed when it is determined by the determination means to control to the advantageous state in the second special state (for example, the rate at which “patterns A-2, A-3 (first performance execution pattern)” are executed when the variable display result is a jackpot in the time-saving state A or the probability variable state (for example, 80 to 90%) is higher than the rate at which “patterns A-2, A-3 (first performance execution pattern)” are executed when the variable display result is a jackpot in the time-saving state B (for example, 10%)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the first special state, interest can be enhanced by drawing attention to whether or not the movable body moves.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-48 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-47,
The execution frequency of the movable body performance in the second special state is lower than the execution frequency of the movable body performance in the first special state (for example, the execution frequency of the "movable body performance" in the time-saving state B (for example, about 10%) is lower than the execution frequency of the "movable body performance" in the time-saving state A or the probability change state (for example, 80 to 90%)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, since the movable body is unlikely to be unnecessarily operated in the second special state, a preferable second special state can be provided.

(SG2020-092) The gaming machine of form 2-27 is a gaming machine according to any one of forms 2-1 to 2-15,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a start winning hole) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means capable of controlling the non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control the normal state, a time-saving state A in which the time-saving control is performed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol), a probability variable state, and a time-saving state B);
A determination means capable of determining to control to the advantageous state (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the normal special symbol process);
An operable movable body (e.g., movable body 32);
A performance execution means capable of executing a performance including a moving body performance that operates the moving body and a specific performance that notifies the user that the moving body is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 can execute a "moving body notice" and a "moving body performance");
Equipped with
The special states include a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed, and a third special state (e.g., a guaranteed bonus state) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends,
As the performance execution patterns of the movable body performance and the specific performance that can be executed by the performance execution means in one variable display, there are a first performance execution pattern (e.g., "patterns A-2, A-3") in which the movable body performance is executed before the execution period of the specific performance and the movable body performance is also executed during the execution period of the specific performance, and a second performance execution pattern (e.g., "pattern A-1") in which the movable body performance is not executed before the execution period of the specific performance and the movable body performance is executed during the execution period of the specific performance,
The rate at which the second performance execution pattern is executed when it is determined by the determination means to control to the advantageous state in the second special state is higher than the rate at which the second performance execution pattern is executed when it is determined by the determination means to control to the advantageous state in the first special state, and is also higher than the rate at which the second performance execution pattern is executed when it is determined by the determination means to control to the advantageous state in the third special state (for example, the execution rate (e.g., 90%) of “Pattern A-1” when the variable display result is a miss in the “Time-saving state B” is higher than the execution rate (e.g., 10%) of “Pattern A-1” when the variable display result is a miss in the “Time-saving state A”, and is higher than the execution rate (e.g., 20%) of “Pattern A-1” when the variable display result is a miss in the “Probable state”. See FIG. 11-50).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, if it is decided to control to an advantageous state taking into consideration the fact that a long period has continued during which the state has not been controlled to an advantageous state, it is possible to provide a suitable second special state, since the movable body is unlikely to be unnecessarily operated even before a specific performance.

(SG2020-093) The gaming machine of form 1-49 is a gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-48,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a start winning hole) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means capable of controlling the non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control the normal state, a time-saving state A in which the time-saving control is performed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol), a probability variable state, and a time-saving state B);
A determination means capable of determining to control to the advantageous state (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the normal special symbol process);
A variable display pattern determination means for determining one of a plurality of types of variable display patterns having different variable display periods based on the determination result of the determination means (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 determines one of a plurality of types of variable display patterns based on the variable display result in the variable display pattern setting process of step SGS111);
a presentation execution means (for example, a portion where the presentation control CPU 120 can execute a "movable body presentation" and a "post-presentation") capable of executing presentations including a specific presentation that notifies the player that the display will be controlled to the advantageous state when the display is a variable display that has been determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state, and a post-presentation that is executed after the specific presentation and notifies the player of game value information (for example, the number of balls expected to be dispensed) that can specify the amount of game value to be awarded in the advantageous state;
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed,
When the variable display determined by the determination means to control to the advantageous state is a variable display, the number of variable display patterns that the variable display pattern determination means can determine in the second special state is smaller than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the first special state (for example, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", the number of jackpot fluctuation patterns (e.g., 1) that the CPU 103 can determine in the "time-shortened state B" is smaller than the number of variable display patterns (e.g., 2) that can be determined in the "time-shortened state A", and is also smaller than the number of loss fluctuation patterns (e.g., 3) that can be determined in the "probable variable state");
When the variable display is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means, the average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination means in the second special state is shorter than the average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined in the first special state (for example, when the variable display result is a “jackpot”, the average time (e.g., about 40 seconds) of the variable display period of the jackpot fluctuation pattern determined by the CPU 103 in the “time-shortened state B” is shorter than the average time (e.g., about 62.8 seconds) of the variable display period of the jackpot fluctuation pattern determined in the “time-shortened state A”, and is shorter than the average time (e.g., about 51.1 seconds) of the variable display period of the jackpot fluctuation pattern determined in the “probable variable state”. See FIG. 11-50).
The presentation mode of the post-event performance is common between the case where the post-event performance is executed in the first special state and the case where the post-event performance is executed in the second special state (for example, the presentation mode of the “post-event performance” which notifies the player of the planned number of balls to be awarded in the jackpot game state in which the SP reach performance notifies the player of the control to the jackpot game state is the part which is common to the “time-saving state B”, the “probability change state”, and the “time-saving state A” as shown in FIG. 11-60. See FIG. 11-50).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, taking into consideration the fact that a long period of time had continued during which the variable display was not controlled to an advantageous state, the variable display that has been decided upon to be controlled to an advantageous state has a smaller number of variable display patterns and a shorter average duration of the variable display period, thereby increasing the speed at which the variable display is consumed, and after it has been announced that the variable display will be controlled to an advantageous state, it is possible to provide an advantageous second special state by using a presentation that is common to the first special state.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-50 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-49,
The specific performance executed when it is determined by the determination means to control to the advantageous state in the first special state and the specific performance executed when it is determined by the determination means to control to the advantageous state in the second special state are common (for example, the "movable body performance" executed when the variable display result is a jackpot in the time-saving state A or the probability change state, and the "movable body performance" executed when the variable display result is a jackpot in the time-saving state B are common parts. See FIG. 11-59 (D1)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by sharing specific effects between the first special state and the second special state, development costs can be reduced.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-51 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-50,
A light emitting means capable of emitting light is provided,
The control data used to control the light-emitting means to emit light in conjunction with the post-event performance in the first special state and the control data used to control the light-emitting means to emit light in conjunction with the post-event performance in the second special state are common (for example, the control data used to control the movable body LED 208 to emit light in conjunction with the “post-event performance” in the time-saving state A or the probability change state and the control data used to control the movable body LED 208 to emit light in conjunction with the “post-event performance” in the time-saving state B are common (for example, the light-emitting control data executed based on the extension command D300).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, development costs can be reduced by standardizing the control data used to control the light-emitting means that emits light in conjunction with the post-performance in the first special state and the second special state.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-52 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-51,
A vibration means capable of vibrating a predetermined portion is provided,
The vibration mode executed by the vibration means in conjunction with the post-event performance in the first special state and the vibration mode executed by the vibration means in conjunction with the post-event performance in the second special state are common (for example, the vibration mode executed by the vibration motor 61 in conjunction with the “post-event performance” in the time-saving state A or the probability change state and the vibration mode executed by the vibration motor 61 in conjunction with the “post-event performance” in the time-saving state B are common (for example, the vibration control data executed based on the extended command S300) part).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by standardizing the vibration patterns executed in conjunction with the post-event performance in the first special state and the second special state, development costs can be reduced.

(SG2020-094) The gaming machine of form 2-28 is a gaming machine according to any one of forms 2-1 to 2-27,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a start winning hole) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means capable of controlling the non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control the normal state, a time-saving state A in which the time-saving control is performed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol), a probability variable state, and a time-saving state B);
A determination means capable of determining to control to the advantageous state (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the normal special symbol process);
A variable display pattern determination means for determining one of a plurality of types of variable display patterns having different variable display periods based on the determination result of the determination means (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 determines one of a plurality of types of variable display patterns based on the variable display result in the variable display pattern setting process of step SGS111);
a presentation execution means (for example, a portion where the presentation control CPU 120 can execute a "movable body presentation" and a "post-presentation") capable of executing presentations including a specific presentation that notifies the player that the display will be controlled to the advantageous state when the display is a variable display that has been determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state, and a post-presentation that is executed after the specific presentation and notifies the player of game value information (for example, the number of balls expected to be dispensed) that can specify the amount of game value to be awarded in the advantageous state;
Equipped with
The special states include a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed, and a third special state (e.g., a guaranteed bonus state) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends,
When the variable display determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state is a variable display, the number of variable display patterns that the variable display pattern determination means can determine in the second special state is less than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the first special state and is also less than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the third special state (for example, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", the number of jackpot fluctuation patterns (e.g., 1) that the CPU 103 can determine in the "time-shortened state B" is less than the number of variable display patterns (e.g., 2) that can be determined in the "time-shortened state A" and is also less than the number of loss fluctuation patterns (e.g., 3) that can be determined in the "probable variable state").
When the variable display is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means, the average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination means in the second special state is shorter than the average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined in the first special state and shorter than the average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined in the third special state (for example, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", the average time (e.g., about 40 seconds) of the variable display period of the jackpot fluctuation pattern determined by the CPU 103 in the "time-shortened state B" is shorter than the average time (e.g., about 62.8 seconds) of the variable display period of the jackpot fluctuation pattern determined in the "time-shortened state A" and shorter than the average time (e.g., about 51.1 seconds) of the variable display period of the jackpot fluctuation pattern determined in the "probable variable state". See FIG. 11-50).
The presentation mode of the post-event performance is common to the case where the post-event performance is executed in the first special state, the case where the post-event performance is executed in the second special state, and the case where the post-event performance is executed in the third special state (for example, the presentation mode of the “post-event performance” which notifies the player of the planned number of balls to be awarded in the jackpot game state in which the SP reach performance notifies the player of the control to the jackpot game state is the part which is common to the “time-saving state B”, “probability change state”, and “time-saving state A” as shown in FIG. 11-60. See FIG. 11-50).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, taking into consideration the fact that a long period of time had continued during which the variable display was not controlled to an advantageous state, the variable display that has been decided to be controlled to an advantageous state has a smaller number of variable display patterns and a shorter average period of the variable display period, thereby increasing the speed at which the variable display is consumed, and after it has been announced that the variable display will be controlled to an advantageous state, a common presentation can be used to liven things up in the first special state and the third special state, thereby providing an advantageous second special state.

(SG2020-095) The gaming machine of form 1-53 is a gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-52,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) which can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player by variably displaying first identification information (e.g., a first special symbol) based on the establishment of a first start condition (e.g., a gaming ball entering a first start winning hole) and variably displaying second identification information (e.g., a second special symbol) based on the establishment of a second start condition (e.g., a gaming ball entering a second start winning hole),
A state control means capable of controlling the non-special state and a special state in which the second start condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control the normal state, a time-saving state A in which the time-saving control is performed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of the special pattern (particularly the second special pattern), a probability variable state, and a time-saving state B);
A first reserved storage means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the start winning determination process of step S101 in the special symbol process process) capable of storing information related to the variable display of the first identification information as reserved storage;
A second reserved storage means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the start winning determination process of step S101 in the special symbol process process) capable of storing information related to the variable display of the second identification information as reserved storage;
A determination means capable of determining to control to the advantageous state (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the normal special symbol process);
A variable display pattern determination means for determining one of a plurality of types of variable display patterns having different variable display periods based on the determination result of the determination means (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 determines one of a plurality of types of variable display patterns based on the variable display result in the variable display pattern setting process of step SGS111);
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed,
The variable display pattern determination means
When the second reserved memory means has no reserved memory stored in the first special state and the determination means has not determined that the variable display should be controlled to the advantageous state, a predetermined variable display pattern (e.g., "non-reach") for a predetermined variable display period that can store the reserved memory in the second reserved memory means can be determined;
In the case where the reserved memory is not stored in the second reserved memory means in the second special state and the determination means does not determine that the control to the advantageous state is performed, the CPU 103 can determine a special variable display pattern having a special variable display time shorter than the predetermined variable display period (for example, when the reserved memory number is 0 in the probability variable state or the time-saving state A, the CPU 103 can determine a miss variable pattern (for example, a non-reach A with a variable time of 7 seconds or an SP reach variable pattern with a variable time of 25 seconds or 40 seconds) having a long variable display time to earn time to store the reserved memory in the second reserved memory, while when the reserved memory number is 0 in the time-saving state B, the CPU 103 can determine a shortened non-reach variable pattern (for example, an ultra-shortened non-reach with a variable time of 1.5 seconds or a shortened non-reach A with a variable time of 3 seconds) having a shorter variable display time than a miss variable pattern (for example, a non-reach A with a variable time of 7 seconds or an SP reach variable pattern with a variable time of 25 seconds or 40 seconds). See FIG. 11-69).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, taking into consideration the long period during which the state was not controlled to be advantageous, even if the reserved memory is not stored, a predetermined variable display pattern having a long variable display period is determined, so that the consumption speed of the variable display is not reduced, and a suitable second special state can be provided.

(SG2020-096) The gaming machine of form 2-29 is a gaming machine according to any one of forms 2-1 to 2-28,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) which can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player by variably displaying first identification information (e.g., a first special symbol) based on the establishment of a first start condition (e.g., a gaming ball entering a first start winning hole) and variably displaying second identification information (e.g., a second special symbol) based on the establishment of a second start condition (e.g., a gaming ball entering a second start winning hole),
A state control means capable of controlling the non-special state and a special state in which the second start condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control the normal state, a time-saving state A in which the time-saving control is performed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of the special pattern (particularly the second special pattern), a probability variable state, and a time-saving state B);
A first reserved storage means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the start winning determination process of step S101 in the special symbol process process) capable of storing information related to the variable display of the first identification information as reserved storage;
A second reserved storage means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the start winning determination process of step S101 in the special symbol process process) capable of storing information related to the variable display of the second identification information as reserved storage;
A determination means capable of determining to control to the advantageous state (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the normal special symbol process);
A variable display pattern determination means for determining one of a plurality of types of variable display patterns having different variable display periods based on the determination result of the determination means (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 determines one of a plurality of types of variable display patterns based on the variable display result in the variable display pattern setting process of step SGS111);
Equipped with
The special states include a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed, and a third special state (e.g., a guaranteed bonus state) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends,
The variable display pattern determination means
When the second reserved memory means has no reserved memory stored in the first special state or the third special state and the determination means has not determined that the variable display should be controlled to the advantageous state, a predetermined variable display pattern (e.g., "non-reach") for a predetermined variable display period during which the second reserved memory means can store the reserved memory is determined;
In the case where the reserved memory is not stored in the second reserved memory means in the second special state and the determination means does not determine that the control to the advantageous state is performed, the CPU 103 can determine a special variable display pattern having a special variable display time shorter than the predetermined variable display period (for example, when the reserved memory number is 0 in the probability variable state or the time-saving state A, the CPU 103 can determine a miss variable pattern (for example, a non-reach A with a variable time of 7 seconds or an SP reach variable pattern with a variable time of 25 seconds or 40 seconds) having a long variable display time to earn time to store the reserved memory in the second reserved memory, while when the reserved memory number is 0 in the time-saving state B, the CPU 103 can determine a shortened non-reach variable pattern (for example, an ultra-shortened non-reach with a variable time of 1.5 seconds or a shortened non-reach A with a variable time of 3 seconds) having a shorter variable display time than a miss variable pattern (for example, a non-reach A with a variable time of 7 seconds or an SP reach variable pattern with a variable time of 25 seconds or 40 seconds). See FIG. 11-69).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, taking into consideration the long period during which the state was not controlled to be advantageous, even if the reserved memory is not stored, a predetermined variable display pattern having a long variable display period is determined, so that the consumption speed of the variable display is not reduced, and a suitable second special state can be provided.

(SG2020-097) The gaming machine of form 1-54 is a gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-53,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a start winning hole) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means capable of controlling the non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control the normal state, a time-saving state A in which the time-saving control is performed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol), a probability variable state, and a time-saving state B);
When the control of the special state is started, a performance execution means (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 can execute a "entry performance") capable of executing a performance including a special state start performance that notifies the start of the control of the special state by displaying a special state start display;
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed,
The performance execution means includes:
When the control of the first special state is started, the special state start display is displayed in the special state start performance;
When the control of the second special state is started, the special state start display is displayed in the special state start performance, and a special display that is not displayed when the control of the first special state is started is displayed (for example, when the control of the time-saving state A is started, the entry image 069SG470 is displayed in the time-saving entry performance A, and when the control of the probability variable state is started, the entry image 069SG472 consisting of the entry image 069SG470 and the probability variable image 069SG471 is displayed in the probability variable entry performance, while when the control of the time-saving state B is started, the entry image 069SG470 common to the entry image 069SG470 displayed when entering the time-saving state A and the probability variable state is displayed in the time-saving entry performance B, and the part that displays the play time images 069SG473A and 069SG473B as special displays that are not displayed when the control of the probability variable state or the time-saving state A is started. See FIG. 11-50, FIG. 11-63, FIG. 11-64).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state, which is controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, taking into consideration the fact that a long period of time continued in which it was not controlled to an advantageous state, the special state start presentation not only displays the special state start display that is common to when control of the first special state begins, but also displays a special display that is not displayed when control of the first special state begins, thereby creating excitement for the start of the second special state.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-55 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-54,
A determination means capable of determining to control to the advantageous state (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the normal special symbol process);
A variable display pattern determination means for determining one of a plurality of types of variable display patterns having different variable display periods based on the determination result of the determination means (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 determines one of a plurality of types of variable display patterns based on the variable display result in the variable display pattern setting process of step SGS111);
Equipped with
The variable display pattern determination means is capable of determining a special variable display pattern of a variable display period in which the special state start performance can be executed in the variable display in which the control of the second special state has been started (for example, the performance control CPU 120 may be capable of determining a special variable display pattern having a variable display time in which the “entry performance” can be executed in the rescue time reduction reaching variation).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the special state start presentation can be executed in an optimal manner.

(SG2020-098) The gaming machine of form 2-30 is a gaming machine according to any one of forms 2-1 to 2-29,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a start winning hole) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means capable of controlling the non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control the normal state, a time-saving state A in which the time-saving control is performed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol), a probability variable state, and a time-saving state B);
When the control of the special state is started, a performance execution means (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 can execute a "entry performance") capable of executing a performance including a special state start performance that notifies the start of the control of the special state by displaying a special state start display;
Equipped with
The special states include a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed, and a third special state (e.g., a guaranteed bonus state) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends,
The performance execution means includes:
When the control of the third special state is started, the special state start display is displayed in the special state start performance;
When the control of the second special state is started, the special state start display is displayed in the special state start performance, and a special display that is not displayed when the control of the third special state is started is displayed (for example, when the control of the time-saving state A is started, the entry image 069SG470 is displayed in the time-saving entry performance A, and when the control of the probability variable state is started, the entry image 069SG472 consisting of the entry image 069SG470 and the probability variable image 069SG471 is displayed in the probability variable entry performance, while when the control of the time-saving state B is started, the entry image 069SG470 common to the entry image 069SG470 displayed when entering the time-saving state A and the probability variable state is displayed in the time-saving entry performance B, and the part that displays the play time images 069SG473A and 069SG473B as special displays that are not displayed when the control of the probability variable state or the time-saving state A is started. See FIG. 11-50, FIG. 11-63, FIG. 11-64).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state, which is controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, taking into consideration the fact that a long period of time continued in which it was not controlled to an advantageous state, in the special state start presentation, not only is a special state start display that is common to when control of the third special state begins, but also a special display that is not displayed when control of the third special state begins, thereby creating excitement for the start of the second special state.

(SG2020-119) The gaming machine of form 1-56 is a gaming machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-55,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player by variably displaying special identification information based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., a game ball entering a start winning hole),
A state control means capable of controlling the non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control the normal state, a time-saving state A in which the time-saving control is performed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol), a probability variable state, and a time-saving state B);
A determination means capable of determining to control to the advantageous state (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the normal special symbol process);
A variable display pattern determination means for determining one of a plurality of types of variable display patterns having different variable display periods of the special identification information based on the determination result of the determination means (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 determines one of a plurality of types of variable display patterns based on the variable display result in the variable display pattern setting process of step 069SGS111);
A decoration variable display means for performing variable display of decoration identification information in response to variable display of special identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of decoration patterns as multiple types of decoration identification information in synchronization with the first special pattern and the second special pattern);
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times) of variable display of special identification information has been executed,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state (e.g., jackpot A (6R), jackpot B (6R)) and a second advantageous state (e.g., jackpot C (10R)) that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state,
When the determination means determines that control should be made to the advantageous state, the decoration variable display means is capable of executing a special decoration variable display (e.g., SP reach D (full rotation)) which displays a specific display result, which is displayed as a display result of the variable display of the decoration identification information determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state, in a variable manner for a predetermined period of time and then stops and displays the special decoration variable display;
The rate at which the special decoration variable display is executed when it is determined by the determination means to control to the second advantageous state in the second special state is higher than the rate at which the special decoration variable display is executed when it is determined by the determination means to control to the second advantageous state in the first special state (for example, the rate at which the performance control CPU 120 executes the “full rotation performance” when “jackpot C (10R)” is determined as the jackpot type in the time-saving state B (for example, 100%) is higher than the rate at which the performance control CPU 120 executes the “SP reach D (full rotation)” when “jackpot C (10R)” is determined as the jackpot type in the time-saving state A (for example, 0% (not executed)), and the rate at which the performance control CPU 120 executes the “SP reach D (full rotation)” when “jackpot C (10R)” is determined as the jackpot type in the probability variable state (for example, 0% (not executed)). See FIG. 11-69).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, if it is decided to control to a more advantageous second advantageous state, taking into consideration the long period during which the second special state has not been controlled to an advantageous state, a special variable display is more likely to be executed, thereby making it possible to provide a suitable second special state.

(SG2020-120) The gaming machine of form 2-31 is a gaming machine according to any one of forms 2-1 to 2-30,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player by variably displaying special identification information based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., a game ball entering a start winning hole),
A state control means capable of controlling the non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control the normal state, a time-saving state A in which the time-saving control is performed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol), a probability variable state, and a time-saving state B);
A determination means capable of determining to control to the advantageous state (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 in the normal special symbol process);
A variable display pattern determination means for determining one of a plurality of types of variable display patterns having different variable display periods of the special identification information based on the determination result of the determination means (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 determines one of a plurality of types of variable display patterns based on the variable display result in the variable display pattern setting process of step SGS111);
A decoration variable display means for performing a variable display of the decoration identification information in response to the variable display of the special identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 performs a variable display of the decoration patterns as multiple types of decoration identification information in synchronization with the first special pattern and the second special pattern);
Equipped with
The special states include a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times) of variable display of special identification information has been executed, and a third special state (e.g., a guaranteed bonus state) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state (e.g., jackpot A (6R), jackpot B (6R)) and a second advantageous state (e.g., jackpot C (10R)) that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state,
When the determination means determines that control should be made to the advantageous state, the decoration variable display means is capable of executing a special decoration variable display (e.g., SP reach D (full rotation)) which displays a specific display result, which is displayed as a display result of the variable display of the decoration identification information determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state, in a variable manner for a predetermined period of time and then stops and displays the special decoration variable display;
The rate at which the special decoration variable display is executed when it is determined by the determination means to control to the second advantageous state in the second special state is higher than the rate at which the special decoration variable display is executed when it is determined by the determination means to control to the second advantageous state in the first special state, and is also higher than the rate at which the special decoration variable display is executed when it is determined by the determination means to control to the second advantageous state in the third special state (for example, when "jackpot C (10R)" is selected as the jackpot type in the time-saving state B, The percentage (e.g., 100%) at which the CPU 120 for controlling the presentation executes the "full spin presentation" when the jackpot type is determined to be "jackpot C (10R)" in the time-saving state A is higher than the percentage (e.g., 0% (not executed)) at which the CPU 120 for controlling the presentation executes the "SP reach D (full spin)" when the jackpot type is determined to be "jackpot C (10R)" in the probability variable state, and is higher than the percentage (e.g., 0% (not executed)) at which the CPU 120 for controlling the presentation executes the "SP reach D (full spin)" when the jackpot type is determined to be "jackpot C (10R)" in the probability variable state. See FIG. 11-69.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, if it is decided to control to a more advantageous second advantageous state, taking into consideration the long period during which the second special state has not been controlled to an advantageous state, a special variable display is more likely to be executed, thereby providing an advantageous second special state.

(Feature 099SG form)
(SG2020-099) The gaming machine of the form 1 of the characteristic part 099SG is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a start winning hole) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means (e.g., a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process shown in FIG. 6 ) is provided that can control a non-special state (e.g., a normal state) and a special state (e.g., a time-saving state A, a time-saving state B, a probability-changing state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than in the non-special state,
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed,
The condition for terminating the first special state includes that a first number of variable displays (e.g., 110 times) have been executed in the first special state;
The second special state termination condition includes that a second number of variable displays (e.g., 1,100 times) greater than the first number of times has been executed in the second special state;
The period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for the variable display of 1 that is not controlled by the advantageous state executed in the second special state by the first number of times is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for the variable display of 1 that is not controlled by the advantageous state executed in the first special state by the first number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-30, the period value ψ obtained by multiplying the period value β, which is the average fluctuation time of the fluctuation of 1 in the time-saving state B, by 110 is smaller than the period value χ obtained by multiplying the period value α, which is the average fluctuation time of the fluctuation of 1 in the time-saving state A, by 110).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing a predetermined number of variable displays in the non-special state, can be made to progress faster than the first special state, thereby increasing interest in playing in the second special state.

(SG2020-100) Form 2 gaming machine,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a start winning hole) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means (e.g., a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process shown in FIG. 6 ) is provided that can control a non-special state (e.g., a normal state) and a special state (e.g., a time-saving state A, a time-saving state B, a probability-changing state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than in the non-special state,
The special states include a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed, and a third special state (e.g., a guaranteed bonus state) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends,
The condition for terminating the first special state includes that a first number of variable displays (e.g., 110 times) have been executed in the first special state;
The second special state termination condition includes that a second number of variable displays (e.g., 1,100 times) greater than the first number of times has been executed in the second special state;
The termination condition of the third special state includes that the variable display is executed a third number of times (e.g., 110 times) less than the second number of times in the third special state,
The period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for the variable display of 1 not controlled by the advantageous state executed in the second special state by the first number of times is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for the variable display of 1 not controlled by the advantageous state executed in the first special state by the first number of times and is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for the variable display of 1 not controlled by the advantageous state executed in the third special state by the first number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-30, the period value ψ obtained by multiplying the period value β, which is the average fluctuation time of 1 fluctuation in the time-saving state B, by 110 is smaller than the period value χ obtained by multiplying the period value α, which is the average fluctuation time of 1 fluctuation in the time-saving state A, by 110, and the period value ψ is smaller than the period value ω obtained by multiplying the period value γ, which is the average fluctuation time of 1 fluctuation in the probability variable state, by 110).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing a predetermined number of variable displays in the non-special state, can be made to progress faster than the first special state, thereby increasing interest in playing in the second special state.

(SG2020-101) Form 3 gaming machine,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a start winning hole) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means (e.g., a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process shown in FIG. 6 ) is provided that can control a non-special state (e.g., a normal state) and a special state (e.g., a time-saving state A, a time-saving state B, a probability-changing state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than in the non-special state,
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed,
The condition for terminating the first special state includes that a first number of variable displays (e.g., 110 times) have been executed in the first special state;
The second special state termination condition includes that a second number of variable displays (e.g., 1,100 times) greater than the first number of times has been executed in the second special state;
The period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for the variable display of 1 that is not controlled by the advantageous state executed in the second special state by the second number of times is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for the variable display of 1 that is not controlled by the advantageous state executed in the first special state by the second number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-30, the period value ψ' obtained by multiplying the period value β, which is the average fluctuation time of the fluctuation of 1 in the time-saving state B, by 1100 is smaller than the period value χ' obtained by multiplying the period value α, which is the average fluctuation time of the fluctuation of 1 in the time-saving state A, by 1100).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing a predetermined number of variable displays in the non-special state, can be made to progress faster than the first special state, thereby increasing interest in playing in the second special state.

(SG2020-102) Form 4 gaming machine is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a start winning hole) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means (e.g., a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process shown in FIG. 6 ) is provided that can control a non-special state (e.g., a normal state) and a special state (e.g., a time-saving state A, a time-saving state B, a probability-changing state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than in the non-special state,
The special states include a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed, and a third special state (e.g., a guaranteed bonus state) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends,
The condition for terminating the first special state includes that a first number of variable displays (e.g., 110 times) have been executed in the first special state;
The second special state termination condition includes that a second number of variable displays (e.g., 1100 times) greater than the first number of times has been executed in the second special state;
The termination condition of the third special state includes that the variable display is executed a third number of times (e.g., 110 times) less than the second number of times in the third special state,
The period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for the variable display of 1 not controlled by the advantageous state executed in the second special state by the second number of times is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for the variable display of 1 not controlled by the advantageous state executed in the first special state by the second number of times and is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for the variable display of 1 not controlled by the advantageous state executed in the third special state by the second number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-30, the period value ψ' obtained by multiplying the period value β, which is the average fluctuation time of 1 fluctuation in the time-saving state B, by 1100 is smaller than the period value χ' obtained by multiplying the period value α, which is the average fluctuation time of 1 fluctuation in the time-saving state A, by 1100, and the period value ψ' is smaller than the period value ω' obtained by multiplying the period value γ, which is the average fluctuation time of 1 fluctuation in the probability variable state, by 1100).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing a predetermined number of variable displays in the non-special state, can be made to progress faster than the first special state, thereby increasing interest in playing in the second special state.

(SG2020-103) Form 5 gaming machine is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a start winning hole) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means (e.g., a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process shown in FIG. 6 ) is provided that can control a non-special state (e.g., a normal state) and a special state (e.g., a time-saving state A, a time-saving state B, a probability-changing state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than in the non-special state,
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed,
The condition for terminating the first special state includes that a first number of variable displays (e.g., 110 times) have been executed in the first special state;
The second special state termination condition includes that a second number of variable displays (e.g., 1,100 times) greater than the first number of times has been executed in the second special state;
Further provided with a reserved memory means (for example, a first special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151A or a second special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151B) capable of storing information related to the variable display as reserved memory,
The period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for one variable display not controlled in the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 0 in the second special state, by the first number of times is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for one variable display not controlled in the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 0 in the first special state, by the first number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-21, the period value ξ obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result is a miss, which is started when the number of reserved memories of the second special chart is 0 in the time-saving state B, by 110, is a portion smaller than the period value ν obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result is a miss, which is started when the number of reserved memories of the second special chart is 0 in the time-saving state A, by 110).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing a predetermined number of variable displays in the non-special state, can be made to progress faster than the first special state, thereby increasing interest in playing in the second special state.

(SG2020-104) Type 6 gaming machine is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a start winning hole) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means (e.g., a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process shown in FIG. 6 ) is provided that can control a non-special state (e.g., a normal state) and a special state (e.g., a time-saving state A, a time-saving state B, a probability-changing state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than in the non-special state,
The special states include a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed, and a third special state (e.g., a guaranteed bonus state) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends,
The condition for terminating the first special state includes that a first number of variable displays (e.g., 110 times) have been executed in the first special state;
The second special state termination condition includes that a second number of variable displays (e.g., 1,100 times) greater than the first number of times has been executed in the second special state;
The termination condition of the third special state includes that the variable display is executed a third number of times (e.g., 110 times) less than the second number of times in the third special state,
Further provided with a reserved memory means (for example, a first special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151A or a second special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151B) capable of storing information related to the variable display as reserved memory,
A period value obtained by multiplying an average variable display period for one variable display not controlled in the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 0 in the second special state, by the first number of times is smaller than a period value obtained by multiplying an average variable display period for one variable display not controlled in the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 0 in the first special state, by the first number of times, and a period value obtained by multiplying an average variable display period for one variable display not controlled in the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 0 in the third special state, by the first number of times. It is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying by 1 number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-21, the period value ξ obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result that starts when the number of reserved second special symbols is 0 in the time-saving state B is a miss by 110 is smaller than the period value ν obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result that starts when the number of reserved second special symbols is 0 in the time-saving state A is a miss by 110, and the period value ξ is a part smaller than the period value π obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result that starts when the number of reserved second special symbols is 0 in the probability variable state is a miss by 110).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing a predetermined number of variable displays in the non-special state, can be made to progress faster than the first special state, thereby increasing interest in playing in the second special state.

(SG2020-105) Type 7 gaming machine is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a start winning hole) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means (e.g., a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process shown in FIG. 6 ) is provided that can control a non-special state (e.g., a normal state) and a special state (e.g., a time-saving state A, a time-saving state B, a probability-changing state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than in the non-special state,
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed,
The condition for terminating the first special state includes that a first number of variable displays (e.g., 110 times) have been executed in the first special state;
The second special state termination condition includes that a second number of variable displays (e.g., 1,100 times) greater than the first number of times has been executed in the second special state;
Further provided with a reserved memory means (for example, a first special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151A or a second special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151B) capable of storing information related to the variable display as reserved memory,
The period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for one variable display not controlled in the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 0 in the second special state, by the second number of times is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for one variable display not controlled in the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 0 in the first special state, by the second number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-22, the period value ξ' obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result is a miss, which is started when the number of reserved memories of the second special chart is 0 in the time-saving state B, by 1100, is a portion smaller than the period value ν' obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result is a miss, which is started when the number of reserved memories of the second special chart is 0 in the time-saving state A, by 1100).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing a predetermined number of variable displays in the non-special state, can be made to progress faster than the first special state, thereby increasing interest in playing in the second special state.

(SG2020-106) Type 8 gaming machine is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a start winning hole) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means (e.g., a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process shown in FIG. 6 ) is provided that can control a non-special state (e.g., a normal state) and a special state (e.g., a time-saving state A, a time-saving state B, a probability-changing state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than in the non-special state,
The special states include a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed, and a third special state (e.g., a guaranteed bonus state) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends,
The condition for terminating the first special state includes that a first number of variable displays (e.g., 110 times) have been executed in the first special state;
The second special state termination condition includes that a second number of variable displays (e.g., 1,100 times) greater than the first number of times has been executed in the second special state;
The termination condition of the third special state includes that the variable display is executed a third number of times (e.g., 110 times) less than the second number of times in the third special state,
Further provided with a reserved memory means (for example, a first special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151A or a second special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151B) capable of storing information related to the variable display as reserved memory,
A period value obtained by multiplying an average variable display period for one variable display not controlled in the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 0 in the second special state, by the second number of times, is smaller than a period value obtained by multiplying an average variable display period for one variable display not controlled in the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 0 in the first special state, by the second number of times, and a period value obtained by multiplying an average variable display period for one variable display not controlled in the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 0 in the third special state, by the second number of times. (For example, as shown in FIG. 12-22, the period value ξ' obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result that starts when the number of second special reserved memories is 0 in the time-saving state B is a miss by 1100 is smaller than the period value ν' obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result that starts when the number of second special reserved memories is 0 in the time-saving state A is a miss by 1100, and the period value ξ' is a portion smaller than the period value π' obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result that starts when the number of second special reserved memories is 0 in the probability variable state is a miss by 1100).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing a predetermined number of variable displays in the non-special state, can be made to progress faster than the first special state, thereby increasing interest in playing in the second special state.

(SG2020-107) Type 9 gaming machine is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a start winning hole) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means (e.g., a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process shown in FIG. 6 ) is provided that can control a non-special state (e.g., a normal state) and a special state (e.g., a time-saving state A, a time-saving state B, a probability-changing state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than in the non-special state,
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed,
The condition for terminating the first special state includes that a first number of variable displays (e.g., 110 times) have been executed in the first special state;
The second special state termination condition includes that a second number of variable displays (e.g., 1,100 times) greater than the first number of times has been executed in the second special state;
Further provided with a reserved memory means (for example, a first special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151A or a second special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151B) capable of storing information related to the variable display as reserved memory,
The period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for one variable display not controlled in the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 1 in the second special state, by the first number of times is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for one variable display not controlled in the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 1 in the first special state, by the first number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-19, the period value λ obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result is a miss, which is started when the number of reserved memories of the second special chart is 1 in the time-saving state B, by 110, is a portion smaller than the period value κ obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result is a miss, which is started when the number of reserved memories of the second special chart is 1 in the time-saving state A, by 110).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing a predetermined number of variable displays in the non-special state, can be made to progress faster than the first special state, thereby increasing interest in playing in the second special state.

(SG2020-108) The gaming machine of type 10 is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a start winning hole) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means (e.g., a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process shown in FIG. 6 ) is provided that can control a non-special state (e.g., a normal state) and a special state (e.g., a time-saving state A, a time-saving state B, a probability-changing state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than in the non-special state,
The special states include a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed, and a third special state (e.g., a guaranteed bonus state) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends,
The condition for terminating the first special state includes that a first number of variable displays (e.g., 110 times) have been executed in the first special state;
The second special state termination condition includes that a second number of variable displays (e.g., 1,100 times) greater than the first number of times has been executed in the second special state;
The termination condition of the third special state includes that the variable display is executed a third number of times (e.g., 110 times) less than the second number of times in the third special state,
Further provided with a reserved memory means (for example, a first special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151A or a second special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151B) capable of storing information related to the variable display as reserved memory,
A period value obtained by multiplying an average variable display period for one variable display not controlled in the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 1 in the second special state, by the first number of times is smaller than a period value obtained by multiplying an average variable display period for one variable display not controlled in the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 1 in the first special state, by the first number of times, and a period value obtained by multiplying an average variable display period for one variable display not controlled in the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 1 in the third special state, by the first number of times. It is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying by 1 number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-19, the period value λ obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result that starts when the number of second special reserved memories is 1 in the time-saving state B is a miss by 110 is smaller than the period value κ obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result that starts when the number of second special reserved memories is 1 in the time-saving state A is a miss by 110, and the period value λ is a portion smaller than the period value μ obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result that starts when the number of second special reserved memories is 1 in the probability variable state is a miss by 110).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing a predetermined number of variable displays in the non-special state, can be made to progress faster than the first special state, thereby increasing interest in playing in the second special state.

(SG2020-109) Type 11 gaming machine is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a start winning hole) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means (e.g., a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process shown in FIG. 6 ) is provided that can control a non-special state (e.g., a normal state) and a special state (e.g., a time-saving state A, a time-saving state B, a probability-changing state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than in the non-special state,
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed,
The condition for terminating the first special state includes that a first number of variable displays (e.g., 110 times) have been executed in the first special state;
The second special state termination condition includes that a second number of variable displays (e.g., 1,100 times) greater than the first number of times has been executed in the second special state;
Further provided with a reserved memory means (for example, a first special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151A or a second special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151B) capable of storing information related to the variable display as reserved memory,
The period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for one variable display not controlled in the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 1 in the second special state, by the second number of times is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for one variable display not controlled in the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 1 in the first special state, by the second number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-20, the period value λ' obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result is a miss, which is started when the number of reserved memories in the second special pattern is 1 in the time-saving state B, by 1100, is a portion smaller than the period value κ' obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result is a miss, which is started when the number of reserved memories in the second special pattern is 1 in the time-saving state A, by 1100).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing a predetermined number of variable displays in the non-special state, can be made to progress faster than the first special state, thereby increasing interest in playing in the second special state.

(SG2020-110) Type 12 gaming machine is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a start winning hole) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means (e.g., a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process shown in FIG. 6 ) is provided that can control a non-special state (e.g., a normal state) and a special state (e.g., a time-saving state A, a time-saving state B, a probability-changing state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than in the non-special state,
The special states include a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed, and a third special state (e.g., a guaranteed bonus state) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends,
The condition for terminating the first special state includes that a first number of variable displays (e.g., 110 times) have been executed in the first special state;
The second special state termination condition includes that a second number of variable displays (e.g., 1,100 times) greater than the first number of times has been executed in the second special state;
The termination condition of the third special state includes that the variable display is executed a third number of times (e.g., 110 times) less than the second number of times in the third special state,
Further provided with a reserved memory means (for example, a first special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151A or a second special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151B) capable of storing information related to the variable display as reserved memory,
A period value obtained by multiplying an average variable display period for one variable display not controlled in the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 1 in the second special state, by the second number of times, is smaller than a period value obtained by multiplying an average variable display period for one variable display not controlled in the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 1 in the first special state, by the second number of times, and a period value obtained by multiplying an average variable display period for one variable display not controlled in the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 1 in the third special state, by the second number of times. (For example, as shown in FIG. 12-20, the period value λ' obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result that starts when the number of second special reserved memories is one in the time-saving state B is a miss by 1100 is smaller than the period value κ' obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result that starts when the number of second special reserved memories is one in the time-saving state A is a miss by 1100, and the period value λ is a portion smaller than the period value μ' obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result that starts when the number of second special reserved memories is one in the probability variable state is a miss by 1100).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing a predetermined number of variable displays in the non-special state, can be made to progress faster than the first special state, thereby increasing interest in playing in the second special state.

(SG2020-111) Type 13 gaming machine is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a start winning hole) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means (e.g., a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process shown in FIG. 6 ) is provided that can control a non-special state (e.g., a normal state) and a special state (e.g., a time-saving state A, a time-saving state B, a probability-changing state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than in the non-special state,
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed,
The condition for terminating the first special state includes that a first number of variable displays (e.g., 110 times) have been executed in the first special state;
The second special state termination condition includes that a second number of variable displays (e.g., 1,100 times) greater than the first number of times has been executed in the second special state;
Further provided with a reserved memory means (for example, a first special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151A or a second special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151B) capable of storing information related to the variable display as reserved memory,
The period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for one variable display not controlled in the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is two in the second special state, by the first number of times is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for one variable display not controlled in the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is two in the first special state, by the first number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-17, the period value θ obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result is a miss, which is started when the number of reserved memories of the second special chart is two in the time-saving state B, by 110, is a portion smaller than the period value η obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result is a miss, which is started when the number of reserved memories of the second special chart is two in the time-saving state A, by 110).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing a predetermined number of variable displays in the non-special state, can be made to progress faster than the first special state, thereby increasing interest in playing in the second special state.

(SG2020-112) The gaming machine of type 14 is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a start winning hole) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means (e.g., a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process shown in FIG. 6 ) is provided that can control a non-special state (e.g., a normal state) and a special state (e.g., a time-saving state A, a time-saving state B, a probability-changing state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than in the non-special state,
The special states include a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed, and a third special state (e.g., a guaranteed bonus state) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends,
The condition for terminating the first special state includes that a first number of variable displays (e.g., 110 times) have been executed in the first special state;
The second special state termination condition includes that a second number of variable displays (e.g., 1,100 times) greater than the first number of times has been executed in the second special state;
The termination condition of the third special state includes that the variable display is executed a third number of times (e.g., 110 times) less than the second number of times in the third special state,
Further provided with a reserved memory means (for example, a first special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151A or a second special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151B) capable of storing information related to the variable display as reserved memory,
A period value obtained by multiplying an average variable display period for one variable display not controlled in the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is two in the second special state, by the first number of times, is smaller than a period value obtained by multiplying an average variable display period for one variable display not controlled in the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is two in the first special state, by the first number of times, and a period value obtained by multiplying an average variable display period for one variable display not controlled in the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is two in the third special state, by the first number of times. It is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying by 1 number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-17, the period value θ obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result that starts when the number of second special reserved memories is 2 in the time-saving state B is a miss by 110 is smaller than the period value η obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result that starts when the number of second special reserved memories is 2 in the time-saving state A is a miss by 110, and the period value θ is a part smaller than the period value ι obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result that starts when the number of second special reserved memories is 2 in the probability variable state is a miss by 110).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing a predetermined number of variable displays in the non-special state, can be made to progress faster than the first special state, thereby increasing interest in playing in the second special state.

(SG2020-113) Type 15 gaming machine is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a start winning hole) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means (e.g., a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process shown in FIG. 6 ) is provided that can control a non-special state (e.g., a normal state) and a special state (e.g., a time-saving state A, a time-saving state B, a probability-changing state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than in the non-special state,
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed,
The condition for terminating the first special state includes that a first number of variable displays (e.g., 110 times) have been executed in the first special state;
The second special state termination condition includes that a second number of variable displays (e.g., 1,100 times) greater than the first number of times has been executed in the second special state;
Further provided with a reserved memory means (for example, a first special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151A or a second special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151B) capable of storing information related to the variable display as reserved memory,
The period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for one variable display not controlled in the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 2 in the second special state, by the second number of times is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for one variable display not controlled in the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 2 in the first special state, by the second number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-18, the period value θ' obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result is a miss, which is started when the number of reserved memories of the second special chart is 2 in the time-saving state B, by 1100, is a portion smaller than the period value η' obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result is a miss, which is started when the number of reserved memories of the second special chart is 2 in the time-saving state A, by 1100).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing a predetermined number of variable displays in the non-special state, can be made to progress faster than the first special state, thereby increasing interest in playing in the second special state.

(SG2020-114) The gaming machine of type 16 is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a start winning hole) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means (e.g., a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process shown in FIG. 6 ) is provided that can control a non-special state (e.g., a normal state) and a special state (e.g., a time-saving state A, a time-saving state B, a probability-changing state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than in the non-special state,
The special states include a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed, and a third special state (e.g., a guaranteed bonus state) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends,
The condition for terminating the first special state includes that a first number of variable displays (e.g., 110 times) have been executed in the first special state;
The second special state termination condition includes that a second number of variable displays (e.g., 1,100 times) greater than the first number of times has been executed in the second special state;
The termination condition of the third special state includes that the variable display is executed a third number of times (e.g., 110 times) less than the second number of times in the third special state,
Further provided with a reserved memory means (for example, a first special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151A or a second special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151B) capable of storing information related to the variable display as reserved memory,
A period value obtained by multiplying an average variable display period for one variable display not controlled in the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is two in the second special state, by the second number of times, is smaller than a period value obtained by multiplying an average variable display period for one variable display not controlled in the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is two in the first special state, by the second number of times, and a period value obtained by multiplying an average variable display period for one variable display not controlled in the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is two in the third special state, by the second number of times. (For example, as shown in FIG. 12-18, the period value θ' obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result that starts when the number of second special reserved memories is two in the time-saving state B is a miss by 1100 is smaller than the period value η' obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result that starts when the number of second special reserved memories is two in the time-saving state A is a miss by 1100, and the period value θ' is a portion smaller than the period value ι' obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result that starts when the number of second special reserved memories is two in the probability variable state is a miss by 110).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing a predetermined number of variable displays in the non-special state, can be made to progress faster than the first special state, thereby increasing interest in playing in the second special state.

(SG2020-115) Type 17 gaming machine,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a start winning hole) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means (e.g., a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process shown in FIG. 6 ) is provided that can control a non-special state (e.g., a normal state) and a special state (e.g., a time-saving state A, a time-saving state B, a probability-changing state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than in the non-special state,
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed,
The condition for terminating the first special state includes that a first number of variable displays (e.g., 110 times) have been executed in the first special state;
The second special state termination condition includes that a second number of variable displays (e.g., 1,100 times) greater than the first number of times has been executed in the second special state;
Further provided with a reserved memory means (for example, a first special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151A or a second special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151B) capable of storing information related to the variable display as reserved memory,
The period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for one variable display not controlled in the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 3 in the second special state, by the first number of times is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for one variable display not controlled in the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 3 in the first special state, by the first number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-15, the period value ε obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result is a miss, which is started when the number of reserved memories of the second special chart is 3 in the time-saving state B, by 110, is a portion smaller than the period value δ obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result is a miss, which is started when the number of reserved memories of the second special chart is 3 in the time-saving state A, by 110).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing a predetermined number of variable displays in the non-special state, can be made to progress faster than the first special state, thereby increasing interest in playing in the second special state.

(SG2020-116) Type 18 gaming machine is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a start winning hole) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means (e.g., a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process shown in FIG. 6 ) is provided that can control a non-special state (e.g., a normal state) and a special state (e.g., a time-saving state A, a time-saving state B, a probability-changing state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than in the non-special state,
The special states include a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed, and a third special state (e.g., a guaranteed bonus state) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends,
The condition for terminating the first special state includes that a first number of variable displays (e.g., 110 times) have been executed in the first special state;
The second special state termination condition includes that a second number of variable displays (e.g., 1,100 times) greater than the first number of times has been executed in the second special state;
The termination condition of the third special state includes that the variable display is executed a third number of times (e.g., 110 times) less than the second number of times in the third special state,
Further provided with a reserved memory means (for example, a first special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151A or a second special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151B) capable of storing information related to the variable display as reserved memory,
A period value obtained by multiplying an average variable display period for one variable display not controlled in the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is three in the second special state, by the first number of times, is smaller than a period value obtained by multiplying an average variable display period for one variable display not controlled in the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is three in the first special state, by the first number of times, and is smaller than a period value obtained by multiplying an average variable display period for one variable display not controlled in the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is three in the third special state, by the first number of times. It is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying by 1 number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-15, the period value ε obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result that starts when the number of second special reserved memories is 3 in the time-saving state B is a miss by 110 is smaller than the period value δ obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result that starts when the number of second special reserved memories is 3 in the time-saving state A is a miss by 110, and the period value ε is a portion smaller than the period value ζ obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result that starts when the number of second special reserved memories is 3 in the probability variable state is a miss by 110).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing a predetermined number of variable displays in the non-special state, can be made to progress faster than the first special state, thereby increasing interest in playing in the second special state.

(SG2020-117) Type 19 gaming machine is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a start winning hole) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means (e.g., a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process shown in FIG. 6 ) is provided that can control a non-special state (e.g., a normal state) and a special state (e.g., a time-saving state A, a time-saving state B, a probability-changing state) in which the variable display is executed more frequently and in which the starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than in the non-special state,
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed,
The condition for terminating the first special state includes that a first number of variable displays (e.g., 110 times) have been executed in the first special state;
The second special state termination condition includes that a second number of variable displays (e.g., 1,100 times) greater than the first number of times has been executed in the second special state;
Further provided with a reserved memory means (for example, a first special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151A or a second special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151B) capable of storing information related to the variable display as reserved memory,
The period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for one variable display not controlled in the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 3 in the second special state, by the second number of times is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for one variable display not controlled in the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 3 in the first special state, by the second number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-16, the period value ε' obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result is a miss, which is started when the number of reserved memories of the second special pattern is 3 in the time-saving state B, by 1100, is a portion smaller than the period value δ' obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result is a miss, which is started when the number of reserved memories of the second special pattern is 3 in the time-saving state A, by 1100).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing a predetermined number of variable displays in the non-special state, can be made to progress faster than the first special state, thereby increasing interest in playing in the second special state.

(SG2020-118) The gaming machine of type 20 is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a start winning hole) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means (e.g., a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process shown in FIG. 6 ) is provided that can control a non-special state (e.g., a normal state) and a special state (e.g., a time-saving state A, a time-saving state B, a probability-changing state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than in the non-special state,
The special states include a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been executed, and a third special state (e.g., a guaranteed bonus state) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends,
The condition for terminating the first special state includes that a first number of variable displays (e.g., 110 times) have been executed in the first special state;
The second special state termination condition includes that a second number of variable displays (e.g., 1,100 times) greater than the first number of times has been executed in the second special state;
The termination condition of the third special state includes that the variable display is executed a third number of times (e.g., 110 times) less than the second number of times in the third special state,
Further provided with a reserved memory means (for example, a first special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151A or a second special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151B) capable of storing information related to the variable display as reserved memory,
A period value obtained by multiplying an average variable display period for one variable display not controlled in the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is three in the second special state, by the second number of times, is smaller than a period value obtained by multiplying an average variable display period for one variable display not controlled in the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is three in the first special state, by the second number of times, and a period value obtained by multiplying an average variable display period for one variable display not controlled in the advantageous state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is three in the third special state, by the second number of times. (For example, as shown in FIG. 12-16, the period value ε' obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result that starts when the number of second special reserved memories is 3 in the time-saving state B is a miss by 1100 is smaller than the period value δ' obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result that starts when the number of second special reserved memories is 3 in the time-saving state A is a miss by 1100, and the period value ε' is a portion smaller than the period value ζ' obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result that starts when the number of second special reserved memories is 3 in the probability variable state is a miss by 1100).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing a predetermined number of variable displays in the non-special state, can be made to progress faster than the first special state, thereby increasing interest in playing in the second special state.

A gaming machine according to a twenty-first aspect is a gaming machine according to any one of the first to twenty aspects,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that launches gaming media into a gaming area (e.g., a right gaming area and a left gaming area) into which the gaming media can flow,
As the variable display, it is possible to execute variable display of special identification information and variable display of normal identification information (for example, a portion capable of executing variable display of special patterns and variable display of normal patterns),
a variable means (e.g., a variable winning ball device 6B forming a second starting winning hole) that changes the state between a first state (e.g., an open state) in which the game medium can enter and a second state (closed state) in which the game medium is less likely to enter than in the first state, based on the specific display result being derived and displayed as a variable display result of the variable display of the normal identification information;
A reserved memory means (e.g., a first special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151A and a second special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151B) capable of storing information regarding the variable display of the special identification information as reserved memory;
Equipped with
The game area has a special path (e.g., a left game area) in which the variable means is provided, and a non-special path (e.g., a right game area) different from the special path,
The upper limit number of reserved memories that can be stored by the reserved memory means is the same in both the first special state and the second special state (for example, the number of reserved memories that can be stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151A and the second special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151B is 4 regardless of the game state),
The probability that the specific display result is derived and displayed as a variable display result of the variable display of the normal identification information is the same in both the first special state and the second special state (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-2(B), the part where the normal winning probability is the same even if the game state is the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, or the probability-changing state),
The change pattern in which the variable means changes between the first state and the second state is the same in both the first special state and the second special state (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-2(D), the opening time of the second start winning port is 3 seconds even when the game state is the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, or the probability variable state).
In both the first special state and the second special state, the game medium is launched toward the special path (for example, the time-saving state A and the time-saving state B are both game states in which the game ball is launched toward the right game area),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to increase the commonality of gameplay between the first special state and the second special state, and it is possible to prevent the player from becoming confused due to a large difference in gameplay between the first special state and the second special state, which are both special states.

A gaming machine of aspect 22 is the gaming machine according to aspect 21,
In the case where the period value is obtained by measuring the period required for the first or second number of variable displays not controlled to the advantageous state to be executed in each special state, the start point of the measurement includes the time when the launch of the game medium is started (for example, the part for calculating the average variable display period in which the variable display result is a miss, as the period from the time when the game ball is shot out or the time when the shot game ball enters a start winning hole to the time when the variable display based on the start winning is ended),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the period value can be appropriately obtained by measurement.

A gaming machine of aspect 23 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 2, 6, 10, 14, and 18,
A reserve memory means is provided for storing a plurality of pieces of information regarding the variable display as reserve memory,
The upper limit number of reserved memories that can be stored by the reserved memory means is the same in any of the first special state, the second special state, and the third special state (for example, the number of reserved memories that can be stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151A and the second special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151B is up to four regardless of the game state),
The average variable display period of one variable display that is not controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means (for example, as shown in Figs. 12-6, 12-8, and 12-10, the selection ratio of the change pattern of the variable display that results in a miss differs depending on the number of reserved memories, so that the average variable display period of the variable display that results in a miss differs depending on the number of reserved memories stored).
The period value is a sum of values obtained by multiplying the proportion of the variable display executed at each reserved memory number in the first number of times by the average variable display period of the reserved memory number (for example, as shown in Figures 12-13, the period value in each game state is a part that is a sum of values obtained by multiplying the proportion of the variable display executed at each reserved memory number in 110 variable displays by the average variable display period of each reserved memory number),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, an accurate period value corresponding to the number of reserved memories can be obtained.

A gaming machine of aspect 24 is the gaming machine according to aspect 23,
The upper limit number of the reserved memory means is 4 (for example, the number of reserved memories that can be stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151A and the second special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151B is up to 4 regardless of the game state),
In the first special state,
The average variable display period of one variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state and is executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 0 is an average variable display period A, and the proportion of the variable display executed when the number of reserved memories is 0 to the first number of times is a proportion a (for example, A is an average variable display period in which the variable display result when the number of second special reserved memories is 0 in the time-saving state A is a miss, and a is a proportion of the variable display when the number of second special reserved memories is 0 in the time-saving state A to the 110 variable displays in the time-saving state A).
The average variable display period of one variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state and is executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 1 is an average variable display period B, and the proportion of the variable display executed when the number of reserved memories is 1 to the first number of times is a proportion b (for example, B is an average variable display period in which the variable display result when the number of second special reserved memories is 1 in the time-saving state A is a miss, and b is a proportion of the variable display when the number of second special reserved memories is 1 in the time-saving state A to the 110 variable displays in the time-saving state A).
The average variable display period of one variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state and is executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 2 is an average variable display period C, and the proportion of the variable display executed when the number of reserved memories is 1 to the first number of times is a proportion c (for example, C is an average variable display period in which the variable display result when the number of second special reserved memories is 2 in the time-saving state A is a miss, and c is a proportion of the variable display when the number of second special reserved memories is 2 in the time-saving state A to the 110 variable displays in the time-saving state A).
The average variable display period of one variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state and is executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 3 is an average variable display period D, and the proportion of the variable display executed when the number of reserved memories is 1 to the first number of times is a proportion d (for example, D is an average variable display period in which the variable display result becomes a miss when the number of second special reserved memories is 3 in the time-saving state A, and d is a proportion of the variable display when the number of second special reserved memories is 3 in the time-saving state A to the 110 variable displays in the time-saving state A).
The period value of the first special state is the sum of a reserved 0 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the first number of times, the ratio a, and the average variable display period A, a reserved 1 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the first number of times, the ratio b, and the average variable display period B, a reserved 2 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the first number of times, the ratio c, and the average variable display period C, and a reserved 3 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the first number of times, the ratio d, and the average variable display period D (for example, the period value α is a part calculated by the value of A×a+B×b+C×c+D×d).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, an accurate duration value of the first special state corresponding to the number of reserved memories can be obtained.

A gaming machine of aspect 25 is the gaming machine of aspect 23 or aspect 24,
The upper limit number of the reserved memory means is 4 (for example, the number of reserved memories that can be stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151A and the second special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151B is up to 4 regardless of the game state),
In the second special state,
The average variable display period of one variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state and is executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 0 is an average variable display period E, and the proportion of the variable display executed when the number of reserved memories is 0 to the first number of times is a proportion e (for example, E is an average variable display period in which the variable display result when the number of second special reserved memories is 0 in the time-saving state B is a miss, and e is a proportion of the variable display when the number of second special reserved memories is 0 in the time-saving state B to the 110 variable displays in the time-saving state B).
The average variable display period of one variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state and is executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 1 is an average variable display period F, and the proportion of the variable display executed when the number of reserved memories is 1 to the first number of times is a proportion f (for example, F is an average variable display period in which the variable display result when the number of second special reserved memories is 1 in the time-saving state B is a miss, and f is a proportion of the variable display when the number of second special reserved memories is 1 in the time-saving state B to the 110 variable displays in the time-saving state B).
The average variable display period of one variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state and is executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 2 is an average variable display period G, and the proportion of the variable display executed when the number of reserved memories is 1 to the first number of times is a proportion g (for example, G is an average variable display period in which the variable display result when the number of second special reserved memories is 2 in the time-saving state B is a miss, and g is a proportion of the variable display when the number of second special reserved memories is 2 in the time-saving state B to the 110 variable displays in the time-saving state B).
The average variable display period of one variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state and is executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 3 is an average variable display period H, and the proportion of the variable display executed when the number of reserved memories is 1 to the first number of times is a proportion h (for example, H is an average variable display period in which the variable display result when the number of second special reserved memories is 3 in the time-saving state B is a miss, and h is a proportion of the variable display when the number of second special reserved memories is 3 in the time-saving state B to the 110 variable displays in the time-saving state B).
The period value of the second special state is the sum of a reserved 0 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the first number of times, the ratio e, and the average variable display period E, a reserved 1 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the first number of times, the ratio f, and the average variable display period F, a reserved 2 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the first number of times, the ratio g, and the average variable display period G, and a reserved 3 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the first number of times, the ratio h, and the average variable display period H (for example, the period value β is a part calculated by the value of E×e+F×f+G×g+H×h).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, an accurate duration value of the second special state corresponding to the number of reserved memories can be obtained.

A gaming machine of aspect 26 is the gaming machine according to any one of aspects 23 to 25,
The upper limit number of the reserved memory means is 4 (for example, the number of reserved memories that can be stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151A and the second special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151B is up to 4 regardless of the game state),
In the third special state,
The average variable display period of one variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state and is executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 0 is an average variable display period I, and the proportion of the variable display executed when the number of reserved memories is 0 to the first number of times is a proportion i (for example, I is an average variable display period in which the variable display result when the number of second special reserved memories is 0 in the probability variable state is a miss, and i is a proportion of the variable display when the number of second special reserved memories is 0 in the probability variable state to the 110 variable displays in the probability variable state).
The average variable display period of one variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state and is executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 1 is an average variable display period J, and the proportion of the variable display executed when the number of reserved memories is 1 to the first number of times is a proportion j (for example, J is an average variable display period in which the variable display result when the number of second special reserved memories is 1 in a probability variable state is a miss, and j is a proportion of the variable display when the number of second special reserved memories is 1 in a probability variable state to 110 variable displays in the probability variable state).
The average variable display period of one variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state and is executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 2 is an average variable display period K, and the proportion of the variable display executed when the number of reserved memories is 1 to the first number of times is a proportion k (for example, K is an average variable display period in which the variable display result when the number of second special reserved memories is 2 in the probability variable state is a miss, and k is a proportion of the variable display when the number of second special reserved memories is 2 in the probability variable state to the 110 variable displays in the probability variable state).
The average variable display period of one variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state and is executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 3 is an average variable display period L, and the proportion of the variable display executed when the number of reserved memories is 1 to the first number of times is a proportion 1 (for example, L is an average variable display period in which the variable display result when the number of second special reserved memories is 3 in the probability variable state is a miss, and 1 is a proportion of the variable display when the number of second special reserved memories is 3 in the probability variable state to the 110 variable displays in the probability variable state).
The period value of the third special state is the sum of a reserved 0 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the first number of times, the ratio i, and the average variable display period I, a reserved 1 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the first number of times, the ratio j, and the average variable display period J, a reserved 2 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the first number of times, the ratio k, and the average variable display period K, and a reserved 3 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the first number of times, the ratio l, and the average variable display period L (for example, the period value γ is a part calculated by the value of I×i+J×j+K×k+L×l).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, an accurate duration value of the third special state corresponding to the number of reserved memories can be obtained.

A gaming machine of aspect 27 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 4, 8, 12, 16, and 20,
A reserved memory means (for example, a first special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151A and a second special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151B) capable of storing a plurality of pieces of information related to variable display as reserved memory,
The upper limit number of reserved memories that can be stored by the reserved memory means is the same in any of the first special state, the second special state, and the third special state (for example, the number of reserved memories that can be stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151A and the second special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151B is up to four regardless of the game state),
The average variable display period of the variable display varies depending on the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means (for example, as shown in Figs. 12-6, 12-8, and 12-10, the selection ratio of the variable display variation pattern in which the variable display result is a miss varies depending on the number of reserved memories, so that the average variable display period in which the variable display result is a miss varies depending on the number of reserved memories stored).
The period value is a sum of values obtained by multiplying the proportion of the variable display executed at each reserved memory number in the second number of times by the average variable display period of the reserved memory number (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-14, the period value in each game state is a sum of values obtained by multiplying the proportion of the variable display executed at each reserved memory number in 1100 variable displays by the average variable display period of each reserved memory number),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, an accurate period value corresponding to the number of reserved memories can be obtained.

A gaming machine of aspect 28 is the gaming machine according to aspect 27,
The upper limit number of the reserved memory means is 4 (for example, the number of reserved memories that can be stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151A and the second special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151B is up to 4 regardless of the game state),
In the first special state,
The average variable display period of one variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state and is executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 0 is an average variable display period A, and the proportion of the variable display executed when the number of reserved memories is 0 to the second number of times is a proportion a' (for example, A is an average variable display period in which the variable display result when the number of second special reserved memories is 0 in the time-saving state A is a miss, and a' is a proportion of the variable display when the number of second special reserved memories is 0 in the time-saving state A to the 1100 variable displays in the time-saving state A).
The average variable display period of one variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state and is executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 1 is an average variable display period B, and the proportion of the variable display executed when the number of reserved memories is 1 to the second number of times is a proportion b' (for example, B is an average variable display period in which the variable display result when the number of second special reserved memories is 1 in the time-saving state A is a miss, and b' is a proportion of the variable display when the number of second special reserved memories is 1 in the time-saving state A to the 1100 variable displays in the time-saving state A).
The average variable display period of one variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state and is executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 2 is an average variable display period C, and the proportion of the variable display executed when the number of reserved memories is 1 to the second number of times is a proportion c' (for example, C is an average variable display period in which the variable display result becomes a miss when the number of second special reserved memories is 2 in the time-saving state A, and c' is a proportion of the variable display when the number of second special reserved memories is 2 in the time-saving state A to the 1100 variable displays in the time-saving state A).
The average variable display period of one variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state and is executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 3 is an average variable display period D, and the proportion of the variable display executed when the number of reserved memories is 1 to the second number of times is a proportion d' (for example, D is an average variable display period in which the variable display result becomes a miss when the number of second special reserved memories is 3 in the time-saving state A, and d' is a proportion of the variable display when the number of second special reserved memories is 3 in the time-saving state A to the 1100 variable displays in the time-saving state A).
The period value of the first special state is the sum of a reserved 0 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the second number of times, the ratio a', and the average variable display period A, a reserved 1 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the second number of times, the ratio b', and the average variable display period B, a reserved 2 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the second number of times, the ratio c', and the average variable display period C, and a reserved 3 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the second number of times, the ratio d', and the average variable display period D (for example, the period value α' is a part calculated by the value of A×a'+B×b'+C×c'+D×d').
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, an accurate duration value of the first special state corresponding to the number of reserved memories can be obtained.

The gaming machine of means 29 is the gaming machine according to aspect 27 or 28,
The upper limit number of the reserved memory means is 4 (for example, the number of reserved memories that can be stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151A and the second special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151B is up to 4 regardless of the game state),
In the second special state,
The average variable display period of one variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state and is executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 0 is an average variable display period E, and the proportion of the variable display executed when the number of reserved memories is 0 to the second number of times is a proportion e' (for example, E is an average variable display period in which the variable display result when the number of second special reserved memories is 0 in the time-saving state B is a miss, and e' is a proportion of the variable display when the number of second special reserved memories is 0 in the time-saving state B to the 1100 variable displays in the time-saving state B).
The average variable display period of one variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state and is executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 1 is an average variable display period F, and the proportion of the variable display executed when the number of reserved memories is 1 to the second number of times is a proportion f' (for example, F is an average variable display period in which the variable display result when the number of second special reserved memories is 1 in the time-saving state B is a miss, and f' is a proportion of the variable display when the number of second special reserved memories is 1 in the time-saving state B to the 1100 variable displays in the time-saving state B).
The average variable display period of one variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state and is executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 2 is an average variable display period G, and the proportion of the variable display executed when the number of reserved memories is 1 to the second number of times is a proportion g' (for example, G is an average variable display period in which the variable display result becomes a miss when the number of second special reserved memories is 2 in the time-saving state B, and g' is a proportion of the variable display when the number of second special reserved memories is 2 in the time-saving state B to the 1100 variable displays in the time-saving state B).
The average variable display period of one variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state and is executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 3 is an average variable display period H, and the proportion of the variable display executed when the number of reserved memories is 1 to the second number of times is a proportion h' (for example, H is an average variable display period in which the variable display result becomes a miss when the number of second special reserved memories is 3 in the time-saving state B, and h' is a proportion of the variable display when the number of second special reserved memories is 3 in the time-saving state B to the 1100 variable displays in the time-saving state B).
The period value of the second special state is the sum of a reserved 0 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the second number of times, the ratio e', and the average variable display period E, a reserved 1 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the second number of times, the ratio f', and the average variable display period F, a reserved 2 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the second number of times, the ratio g', and the average variable display period G, and a reserved 3 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the second number of times, the ratio h', and the average variable display period H (for example, the period value β' is a part calculated by the value of E×e'+F×f'+G×g'+H×h').
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, an accurate duration value of the second special state corresponding to the number of reserved memories can be obtained.

A gaming machine according to a 30th aspect is a gaming machine according to any one of the 27th to 29th aspects,
The upper limit number of the reserved memory means is 4 (for example, the number of reserved memories that can be stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151A and the second special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151B is up to 4 regardless of the game state),
In the third special state,
The average variable display period of one variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state and is executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 0 is an average variable display period I, and the proportion of the variable display executed when the number of reserved memories is 0 to the second number of times is a proportion i' (for example, I is an average variable display period in which the variable display result when the number of second special reserved memories is 0 in the probability variable state is a miss, and i' is a proportion of the variable display when the number of second special reserved memories is 0 in the probability variable state to 1100 variable displays in the probability variable state).
The average variable display period of one variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state and is executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 1 is an average variable display period J, and the proportion of the variable display executed when the number of reserved memories is 1 to the second number of times is a proportion j' (for example, J is an average variable display period in which the variable display result when the number of second special reserved memories is 1 in a probability variable state is a miss, and j' is a proportion of the variable display when the number of second special reserved memories is 1 in a probability variable state to 1100 variable displays in the probability variable state).
The average variable display period of one variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state and is executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 2 is an average variable display period K, and the proportion of the variable display executed when the number of reserved memories is 1 to the second number of times is a proportion k' (for example, K is the average variable display period in which the variable display result becomes a miss when the number of second special reserved memories is 2 in the probability variable state, and k' is the proportion of the variable display when the number of second special reserved memories is 2 in the probability variable state to the 1100 variable displays in the probability variable state).
The average variable display period of one variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state and is executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 3 is an average variable display period L, and the proportion of the variable display executed when the number of reserved memories is 1 to the second number of times is a proportion l' (for example, L is an average variable display period in which the variable display result becomes a miss when the number of second special reserved memories is 3 in the probability variable state, and l' is a proportion of the variable display when the number of second special reserved memories is 3 in the probability variable state to 1100 variable displays in the probability variable state).
The period value of the third special state is the sum of a reserved 0 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the second number of times, the ratio i', and the average variable display period I, a reserved 1 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the second number of times, the ratio j', and the average variable display period J, a reserved 2 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the second number of times, the ratio k', and the average variable display period K, and a reserved 3 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the second number of times, the ratio l', and the average variable display period L (for example, the period value γ' is a part calculated by the value of I×i'+J×j'+K×k'+L×l').
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, an accurate duration value of the third special state corresponding to the number of reserved memories can be obtained.

(Feature part 018SG form)
(SG2020-018) The gaming machine of the feature part 018SG form 3-1 is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1 having a characteristic part 018SG) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player,
A light emitter (for example, the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12, etc.),
A movable body (e.g., movable body 32),
A performance execution means capable of executing a specific performance that notifies the player whether or not the game is controlled to the advantageous state, and a special performance that moves the movable body and causes the light-emitting body to emit light (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 is capable of executing the SP reach performances A to E and the movable body performance);
Equipped with
The performance execution means includes:
As the specific performance, a first specific performance (e.g., SP reach performance B) that displays a specific character (e.g., enemy character X-1) and notifies whether or not the specific character will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a second specific performance (e.g., SP reach performance A) that notifies whether or not the specific character will be controlled to the advantageous state without displaying the specific character can be executed.
When it is notified that the specific performance is controlled to the advantageous state, the special performance can be executed during the execution period of the specific performance (for example, a part where a movable body performance can be executed during the execution period (ta3 to ta4 of ta2 to ta5) of the SP reach performance),
During the execution period of the special performance in the first specific performance, the specific character (e.g., character image 018SGX1) is displayed together with an effect image (e.g., effect image 018SG250B) related to the movement of the movable body (see FIG. 13-14 (D2) (D4)),
During the execution period of the special effect in the second specific effect, an effect image (e.g., effect image 018SG250B) related to the movement of the movable body in a manner common to the first specific effect is displayed, while the specific character is not displayed (see FIG. 13-14 (D1)),
The light emission mode of the light-emitting body in the special performance (for example, the light emission pattern LP3-2) is common to the case where the special performance is executed in the first specific performance and the case where the special performance is executed in the second specific performance (see FIG. 13-6 (B)),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the operating mode of the movable body and the light-emitting mode of the light-emitting body in the first special effect, in which a specific character is displayed, are common to a second special effect, in which a specific character is not displayed, thereby reducing manufacturing costs, while the presence or absence of a specific character during the execution period of the special effect increases the correlation between the special effects and the special effects, thereby improving the presentation effect.

The gaming machine of aspect 3-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 3-1,
The rate at which the advantageous state is controlled is higher when the first specific performance is executed than when the second specific performance is executed (for example, since the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach β has a higher jackpot expectation rate than the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach α, the SP reach performance B and SP reach performance C have a higher jackpot expectation rate than the SP reach performance A (jackpot expectation rate: SP reach performance A < SP reach performance B < SP reach performance C) part).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, since it is possible to draw attention to whether or not the second specific effect is executed as the specific effect, interest in the game can be increased.

The gaming machine of aspect 3-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 3-1 or 3-2,
The execution period of the special effect is common to the first specific effect and the second specific effect (for example, the execution period (ta3 to ta4) of the “decisive effect” in the SP reach effects A to E is common to the SP reach effects A to E (ta3 to ta4; SP reach effect A = SP reach effect B = SP reach effect C = SP reach effect D = SP reach effect E) part).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by making the execution period of the special effects common, the control data for the movable bodies and light-emitting bodies in the special effects can be common, thereby enabling further reduction in manufacturing costs.

The gaming machine of aspect 3-4 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 3-1 to 3-3,
The execution period of the special effect includes a first period and a second period subsequent to the first period,
The presentation mode in the first period is common to the first specific presentation and the second specific presentation, while the presentation mode in the second period is different between the first specific presentation and the second specific presentation (for example, the execution period of the movable body presentation includes the first period and the second period after the first period, and the presentation mode in the first period is common to the SP reach presentations B to E and the SP reach presentation A (the attack image 018SG250 in FIG. 13-14(C) is common), while the presentation mode in the second period is different between the SP reach presentations B to E and the SP reach presentation A. The parts different from the image shown in FIG. 13-14(D1) and the images shown in FIG. 13-14(D2 to D5)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by keeping the presentation format common until the first period, it is possible to further reduce manufacturing costs, while at the same time increasing interest in the presentation of the specific presentation, since it is unclear until the first period whether it is the first or second specific presentation.

The gaming machine of aspect 3-5 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 3-1 to 3-4,
The effect execution means is capable of executing a third specific effect (e.g., SP reach effect E) that displays a special character (e.g., enemy character X-2) different from the specific character as the specific effect,
The ratio controlled to the advantageous state differs between when the first specific performance is executed and when the third specific performance is executed (for example, when the variable display result is a jackpot in a low base state, the determination ratio of the SP reach β fluctuation pattern corresponding to the SP reach performance B is 300/997, and when the variable display result is a jackpot in a high base state, the determination ratio of the SP reach γ fluctuation pattern corresponding to the SP reach performance E is 800/997).
In the third specific performance, during the execution period of the special performance executed when it is notified that the advantageous state will be controlled, an effect image (e.g., effect image 018SG250B) common to the first specific performance corresponding to the movement of the movable body is displayed, and the special character (e.g., character image 018SGX2) is displayed;
The light emission mode of the light-emitting body in the special performance executed in the third specific performance (for example, light emission pattern LP3-2) is common to the light emission mode of the light-emitting body in the special performance executed in the first specific performance (see FIG. 13-6 (B)),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the operating mode of the movable body and the light-emitting mode of the light-emitting body in each special effect can be standardized to reduce manufacturing costs, while the number of specific effects with different rates of being controlled to an advantageous state can be increased, allowing players to focus on which specific effect will be executed, thereby increasing interest in the game.

The gaming machine of aspect 3-6 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 3-1 to 3-5,
The device is provided with a motion detection means (e.g., a push sensor 35B) capable of detecting a motion of a player,
The light emission end state of the light-emitting body in the special effect is common regardless of the detection timing at which the player's action is detected by the action detection means during the effective operation period before the fact that the specific effect has been controlled to the advantageous state is notified (for example, even if the "movable body effect" is executed at any timing at which the operation of the push button 31B is detected during the effective operation period in which the "win/lose button effect" is executed, or at the timing at which the effective operation period ends without the operation of the push button 31B being detected, the light emission pattern during the execution period of the movable body effect is the common light emission pattern LP3-2).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the manner in which the light emission of the light-emitting body ends can be changed by changing the timing of the player's action, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

The gaming machine of aspect 3-7 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 3-1 to 3-6,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a post-period performance (a big win notification) in a post-period after the special performance during the specific performance,
The light emission pattern is common regardless of the type of the specific performance in which the later period performance is executed (for example, in the later period after the movable body performance during the execution of the SP reach performances A to E, a jackpot confirmation notification can be executed as a later period performance, and in the jackpot confirmation notification, the light emission pattern of the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12 and the movable body LED 208 is common regardless of the type of the SP reach performances A to E (for example, the light emission pattern LP3-2). See FIG. 13-6 (B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the post-period performance is executed using a common light emission pattern regardless of the type of specific performance, which makes it possible to further reduce manufacturing costs.

The gaming machine of aspect 3-8 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 3-1 to 3-7,
Sound output means (e.g., speakers 8L and 8R) are provided;
The effect execution means is capable of outputting a special effect sound from the sound output means during the special effect,
The output pattern of the special performance sound is common to any type of the specific performance (for example, the sound pattern during the execution period of the movable body performance is common to any type of SP reach performance A to E (sound patterns BP0-1 to BP3). See FIG. 13-6 (C)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by making the output pattern of the special effect sound common, it is possible to further reduce manufacturing costs.

The gaming machine of aspect 3-9 is the gaming machine according to aspect 3-8,
The device is provided with a motion detection means (e.g., a push sensor 35B) capable of detecting a motion of a player,
The output end state of the special effect sound in the special effect is common regardless of the detection timing at which the player's action is detected by the action detection means during the effective operation period before the fact that the specific effect has been controlled to the advantageous state is notified (for example, even if the "movable body effect" is executed at any timing at which the operation of the push button 31B is detected during the effective operation period in which the "win/lose button effect" is executed, or at the timing at which the effective operation period ends without the operation of the push button 31B being detected, the sound pattern during the execution period of the movable body effect is the common sound pattern BP2-1 to BP2-4).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the mode in which the output of the special effect sound ends can be changed by changing the timing of the player's action, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

The gaming machine of aspect 3-10 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 3-1 to 3-9,
The specific character displayed in the special performance executed in the first specific performance is displayed in a manner similar to the effect image (for example, in FIG. 13-14 (D2 to D5), the effect image 018SG250B displayed in response to the vibration of the movable body 32 is displayed in a display color that is the same as or similar to the display color of the character images 018SGX1 and 018SGX2 displayed at the same time (for example, a similar color, etc.)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the relationship between the specific character and the effect image, thereby improving the presentation effect of the special presentation.

(SG2020-019) A gaming machine of form 3-11 is a gaming machine according to any one of forms 3-1 to 3-10,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1 having a characteristic part 018SG) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player,
A movable body (e.g., movable body 32),
A performance execution means capable of executing a specific performance that notifies whether or not the game is controlled to the advantageous state, a special performance that operates the movable body, and a post-performance that is executed after the special performance (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 is capable of executing SP reach performances A to E and post-performances A and B);
Equipped with
The performance execution means includes:
As the specific performance, a performance in which a specific character (e.g., an enemy character) is displayed and whether or not the specific character is controlled to the advantageous state is notified using the specific character can be executed in a first mode (e.g., SP reach performance B) and a second mode (e.g., SP reach performance D),
When it is notified that the specific performance is controlled to the advantageous state, the special performance can be executed during the execution period of the specific performance (for example, a part where a movable body performance can be executed during the execution period (ta3 to ta4 of ta2 to ta5) of the SP reach performance),
During the execution period of the special performance, in both the first and second modes, a common effect image (e.g., effect image 018SG250B) related to the movement of the movable body is displayed together with the specific character (e.g., character image 018SGX1),
When the specific performance is executed in the first mode, the post-performance using the specific character displayed in the specific performance of the first mode is not executed, and when the specific performance is executed in the second mode, the post-performance using the specific character displayed in the specific performance of the second mode is executed (for example, in the case of SP reach performance B, instead of the post-performance B using the enemy character X-1 displayed in the SP reach performance, the post-performance A in which no enemy character is displayed is executed (see FIG. 13-17), while in the case of SP reach performance D, the post-performance B using the enemy character X-1 displayed in the SP reach performance (see FIG. 13-18 and FIG. 13-19) is executed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the operating modes of the movable bodies in the specific characters and special effects are made common between the first and second modes, thereby reducing manufacturing costs, while the common specific characters are displayed in different effects, thereby increasing the correlation between the specific effects and the special effects, and between the specific effects and the post-effects, thereby improving the effect of the effects.

The gaming machine of aspect 3-12 is the gaming machine according to aspect 3-11,
The effect execution means is capable of executing a special effect in which the specific character is changed into a special form after the special effect executed in the specific effect,
The special effect when the specific effect is executed in the second mode is executed after the post-effect effect (for example, in the SP reach effect B, in the big win notification before the post-effect effect A, a character image 018SGX1Z of the defeated enemy character X-1 that is not displayed due to a fade-out display is displayed (see FIG. 13-15 (E2)), and in the SP reach effect D, in the post-effect effect B, a special image 018SGXZ of the attacked enemy character X-2 that disappears and becomes a star after being blown away is displayed (see FIG. 13-19 (G1-5)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the timing at which the special effect is executed changes depending on the type of specific effect, thereby improving the presentation effect.

The gaming machine of aspect 3-13 is the gaming machine according to aspect 3-11 or 3-12,
A gaming machine capable of performing variable display,
The performance execution means is capable of executing the post-event performance during a variable display period in which one variable display is being executed,
In the post-event performance, game value information capable of specifying the magnitude of the game value to be awarded in the advantageous state that has been notified of being controlled by the specific performance related to the post-event performance is notified (for example, the execution period of "post-event performance A, B" in SP reaches α, β, and γ is the portion from timing ta5 when the fixed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined jackpot combination in the jackpot confirmation notification of SP reach performances A to E is temporarily displayed to timing ta7 when the fixed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined jackpot combination is stopped (the variable display ends) (ta5 to ta7) during the variable display period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, attention can be increased to the post-event performance in which the gaming value information is announced, and interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of aspect 3-14 is the gaming machine according to aspect 3-11 or 3-12,
A gaming machine in which a specific display result is derived and displayed as a result of a variable display, thereby informing the player that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state,
The performance execution means is capable of executing the post-performance when the specific display result is derived and displayed (for example, the execution period of "post-performance A, B" in SP reaches α, β, and γ is the portion from timing ta5 when the determined decorative pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination is temporarily displayed in the jackpot determination notification of SP reach performances A to E to timing ta7 when the determined decorative pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination is temporarily displayed (variable display ends) during the variable display period (ta0 to ta7) from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it becomes easier to recognize the timing when the post-performance will be executed, thereby increasing attention to the post-performance.

The gaming machine of aspect 3-15 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 3-11 to 3-14,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state in which a game value to be awarded is greater than that of the first advantageous state,
The proportion of the control to the second advantageous state is higher when the specific presentation of the second mode is executed than when the specific presentation of the first mode is executed (for example, when the SP reach presentation B is executed when the SP reach β jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined in a low base state, the proportion of the control to “jackpot B (6R)” (second advantageous state) which is more advantageous to the player than “jackpot A (6R)” (first advantageous state) is 30%, and when the SP reach presentation D is executed when the SP reach γ jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined in a high base state, the proportion of the control to “jackpot C (10R)” (second advantageous state) which is more advantageous to the player than “jackpot B (6R)” (first advantageous state) is 40%).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether the specific presentation is executed in the first mode or the second mode, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

The gaming machine of aspect 3-16 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 3-11 to 3-15,
When the performance execution means executes the specific performance in the first mode, it is capable of executing the post-performance in a mode in which the specific character is not displayed (for example, in post-performance A of SP reach performance A, since no character appears in SP reach performance A, no character appears in post-performance A either. Also, in post-performance A of SP reach performances B and C, characters appear in SP reach performances B and C but no character appears in post-performance A).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a post-performance is also executed when the specific performance of the first mode is executed, thereby enhancing the performance effect.

The gaming machine of aspect 3-17 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 3-11 to 3-16,
A gaming machine capable of performing variable display,
The performance execution means is capable of executing the specific performance during one variable display,
A variable display period of the variable display in which the specific performance is executed in the second mode is shorter than a variable display period of the variable display in which the specific performance is executed in the first mode,
In the specific performance of the second mode, the period from the end of the special performance to the derivation and display of the variable display result is longer than the period from the end of the special performance to the derivation and display of the variable display result in the specific performance of the first mode (for example, the variable display period of the SP reach γ for a high base is shorter than the variable display period of the SP reach β for a low base (ta0 to ta7: SP reach γ < SP reach β), and the period (ta4 to ta7) from the timing ta4 when the "movable body performance" ends in the SP reach γ to the timing ta7 when the fixed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined jackpot combination is stopped and displayed is longer than the period (ta4 to ta7) from the timing ta4 when the "movable body performance" ends in the SP reach β to the timing ta7 when the fixed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined jackpot combination is stopped and displayed in the SP reach β (ta4 to ta7; SP reach γ > SP reach β)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second type of specific presentation executed in a short variable display period, the impression of the variable display can be enhanced by lengthening the period after the end of the special presentation, even if the variable display period is short.

(SG2020-020) The gaming machine of form 3-18 is a gaming machine according to any one of forms 3-1 to 3-17,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1 having a characteristic part 018SG) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player,
A performance execution means is provided that can execute a specific performance that notifies the player whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, a special performance that is executed when the game is notified that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state in the specific performance, and a post-performance that is executed after the special performance (for example, a performance control CPU 120 is provided as a part that can execute SP reach performances A to E, a movable body performance, and post-performances A and B);
The performance execution means includes:
As the specific effects, a first specific effect (e.g., SP reach effect D) is displayed to indicate whether or not the specific character and the special character are used to control the advantageous state, and a second specific effect (e.g., SP reach effect E) is displayed to indicate whether or not the special character and the special character are used to control the advantageous state, the second specific effect (e.g., SP reach effect E) is displayed to indicate whether or not the special character and the special character are used to control the advantageous state,
As the post-event performance, when the special effect is executed in the first specific effect, the specific character displayed in the first specific effect and the special character are displayed and operated, thereby executing a first post-event performance (e.g., post-event performance B) that notifies game value information (e.g., the number of balls expected to be dispensed) that can specify the amount of game value to be awarded in the advantageous state,
As the post-event performance, when the special performance is executed in the second specific performance, a second post-event performance (e.g., post-event performance B) can be executed in which the special character displayed in the second specific performance and the special character are displayed and operated to notify game value information (e.g., the number of balls expected to be dispensed) that can specify the amount of game value to be awarded in the advantageous state;
At least the action mode of the special character is common to the first post-event performance and the second post-event performance (see FIG. 13-18 and FIG. 13-19 );
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by using a common character for both the special performance and the post-performance, it is possible to reduce manufacturing costs while also making it easier to understand the relationship between the special performance and the post-performance, thereby enhancing the effectiveness of the performance.

The gaming machine of aspect 3-19 is the gaming machine according to aspect 3-18,
The execution period of the second post-effect is common to the execution period of the first post-effect (for example, the execution periods (ta5 to ta7) of “post-effect B” corresponding to each of the SP reach effects D and E are all common),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by standardizing the execution period, it becomes easier to reuse the control data for the post-event performance, in particular the action control data for special characters, thereby enabling further reduction in manufacturing costs.

The gaming machine of aspect 3-20 is the gaming machine according to aspect 3-18 or 3-19,
The performance execution means is capable of causing a light-emitting body to emit light in the post-performance,
The light emission pattern of the light-emitting body is common to the first post-event performance and the second post-event performance (for example, the light emission pattern of the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12 in the planned ball addition part of the post-event performance B is common to the SP reach performance D and the SP reach performance E (light emission pattern LP4-4)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the light emission pattern can also be standardized, which makes it possible to further reduce manufacturing costs.

The gaming machine of aspect 3-21 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 3-18 to 3-20,
The performance execution means is capable of displaying a background image in the post-performance,
The background image is common to the first and second post-event performances (for example, the background image 018SG280 representing the universe is common to the post-event performance B of the SP reach performance D and the post-event performance B of the SP reach performance E (see Figures 13-18 to 13-19)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the background image can also be made common, which makes it possible to further reduce manufacturing costs.

The gaming machine of aspect 3-22 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 3-18 to 3-21,
The special character is common to the first and second post-event performances (for example, the ally character A-1 is common to the post-event performance B of the SP reach performance D and the post-event performance B of the SP reach performance E (see Figures 13-18 to 13-19)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the special characters can also be made common, which further reduces manufacturing costs.

The gaming machine of aspect 3-23 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 3-18 to 3-22,
The performance execution means includes:
In the first post-event performance, the specific character and the special character can be displayed at the same time,
In the second post-event performance, the special character and the special character can be displayed at the same time (for example, in the post-event performance B corresponding to the SP reach performance D, an image of an enemy character X-1 and an ally character A-1 fighting is displayed at the same time, and in the post-event performance B corresponding to the SP reach performance E, an image of an enemy character X-2 and an ally character A-1 fighting is displayed at the same time (see Figures 13-18 to 13-19)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, each character is displayed simultaneously, which enhances the impression of the post-show performance and improves the presentation effect.

The gaming machine of aspect 3-24 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 3-18 to 3-23,
The performance period of the post-performance includes a first performance period and a second performance period subsequent to the first performance period,
The performance execution means includes:
During the first performance period, a suggestion display regarding the magnitude of the game value to be awarded in the advantageous state that notifies that the specific performance related to the post-performance is controlled and an addition display indicating the magnitude of the game value to be added to the suggestion display are displayed (for example, a planned ball output addition part in which the number of planned balls to be output is added and displayed in response to an ally character appearing in SP reach performances D and E attacking an enemy character);
In the second performance period, the amount of the game value shown in the addition display is added to the game value shown in the suggestion display to produce an awarded game value, which is reported as the amount of game value to be awarded in the advantageous state (for example, in a planned ball output reporting part, after a friendly character delivers a final blow to an enemy character, the planned number of balls is displayed as a stopped number and the planned number of balls is reported, and then a fixed decorative pattern that is a jackpot combination is displayed as a stopped number and the variable display ends).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the post-performance, the amount of game value to be awarded in an advantageous state is announced after the suggestion display and the addition display are displayed, thereby enhancing the presentation effect of the post-performance.

(SG2020-021) The gaming machine of form 3-25 is a gaming machine according to any one of forms 3-1 to 3-24,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1 having a characteristic part 018SG) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player,
A performance execution means is provided that can execute a specific performance that notifies the player whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, a special performance that is executed when the game is notified that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state in the specific performance, and a post-performance that is executed after the special performance (for example, a performance control CPU 120 is provided as a part that can execute SP reach performances A to E, a movable body performance, and post-performances A and B);
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state (e.g., "jackpot A (6R)" in a low base state and "jackpot B (6R)" in a high base state) and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state (e.g., "jackpot B (6R)" in a low base state and "jackpot C (10R)" in a high base state),
The performance execution means includes:
As the specific performance, a first specific performance (e.g., SP reach performance D), a second specific performance (e.g., SP reach performance E) different in performance mode from the first specific performance, and a third specific performance (e.g., SP reach performance A) different in performance mode from the first specific performance and the second specific performance can be executed.
As the post-event performance, when the special performance is executed in the first specific performance, a first post-event performance (for example, a post-event performance B in which an ally A-1 and an enemy X-1 appear) of a performance aspect related to the first specific performance can be executed;
As the post-event performance, when the special performance is executed in the second specific performance, a second post-event performance (for example, a post-event performance B in which an ally A-1 and an enemy X-2 appear) of a performance aspect related to the second specific performance can be executed,
As the post-event performance, when the special performance is executed in the third specific performance, a third post-event performance (e.g., post-event performance A) of a performance mode related to the third specific performance can be executed;
The proportion of the second advantageous state varies depending on whether the first specific performance, the second specific performance, or the third specific performance is executed (for example, when the SP reach γ jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined in a high base state, the proportion of the second advantageous state, which is more advantageous to the player than the “jackpot B (6R)” (first advantageous state), is 40% when the SP reach performance D is executed, and 60% when the SP reach performance E is executed; when the SP reach β jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined in a low base state, the proportion of the second advantageous state, which is more advantageous to the player than the “jackpot A (6R)” (first advantageous state), is 100% when the SP reach performance A is executed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, not only is it notified that a special effect will control the player to an advantageous state, but the proportion of the player being controlled to the second advantageous state differs depending on which special effect is executed, so that the player's attention to the special effect can be appropriately increased, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

The gaming machine of aspect 3-26 is the gaming machine according to aspect 3-25,
The performance period of the first post-performance and the performance period of the second post-performance are the same,
The performance period of the third post-performance is different from the performance periods of the first post-performance and the second post-performance (for example, the execution periods (ta5 to ta7) of "post-performance A" corresponding to each of the SP reach performances A to C are all common, and the execution periods (ta5 to ta7) of "post-performance B" corresponding to each of the SP reach performances D and E are all common, while the execution period (ta5 to ta7) of "post-performance A" (10 seconds) is different from the execution period (15 seconds) of "post-performance B").
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by making the performance period of the first post-performance and the second post-performance common, it is easier to standardize the performance content and control between the first and second post-performances, which reduces manufacturing costs. Furthermore, by executing a third post-performance which has a different performance period, it is possible to prevent the post-performance from becoming monotonous, thereby enhancing the performance effect of the post-performance.

The gaming machine of aspect 3-27 is the gaming machine according to aspect 3-25 or 3-26,
The performance execution means is capable of causing the light-emitting body to emit light in the post-performance,
The light emission pattern of the light-emitting body in the first post-event performance is common to the light emission pattern of the light-emitting body in the second post-event performance,
The light emission pattern of the light-emitting body in the third post-performance is different from the light emission pattern of the light-emitting body in the first post-performance and the second post-performance (for example, the light emission patterns (light emission patterns LP4-5, LP4-6) of the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12 in the planned ball release notification part of the post-performance B corresponding to the SP reach performance D and the SP reach performance E are common, while the light emission patterns (light emission patterns LP4-2, LP4-3) of the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12 in the post-performance A corresponding to the SP reach performance A are different from the light emission patterns (light emission patterns LP4-5, LP4-6) of the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12 in the post-performance B corresponding to the SP reach performance D and the SP reach performance E. See FIG. 13-6).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by making the lighting pattern for the first post-performance and the second post-performance common, manufacturing costs can be further reduced, and by executing a third post-performance with a different lighting pattern, the effect of the post-performance can be enhanced.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which is also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of Pachinko Game Machine 1, etc.)
1 is a front view of a pachinko game machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. The pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is broadly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes the game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and game balls as game media are shot into this game area by a predetermined ball shooting device.

Note that the "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, a variable display of multiple types of special symbols (the same applies to other symbols described below). The variations include updating the display of multiple symbols, scrolling the display of multiple symbols, transforming one or more symbols, and enlarging/reducing one or more symbols. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, multiple types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative symbols described below, multiple types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative symbols are transformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that variations also include a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed flashing. At the end of the variable display, a specified special symbol is displayed stationary (also called derived or derived display) as the display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described below). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or variation.

The special pattern variably displayed on the first special pattern display device 4A is also called the "first special pattern," and the special pattern variably displayed on the second special pattern display device 4B is also called the "second special pattern." A special pattern game using the first special pattern is also called the "first special pattern game," and a special pattern game using the second special pattern is also called the "second special pattern game." There may be only one type of special pattern display device that variably displays the special patterns.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the play area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or an organic EL (electro luminescence) device, and displays various presentation images. The image display device 5 may also be composed of a projector and a screen. Various presentation images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, multiple types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) that are different from the special patterns are variably displayed as decorative identification information. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, decorative patterns are variably displayed (for example, scrolled up and down or updated) in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. Note that the special game and the variable display of decorative patterns that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

The screen of the image display device 5 may be provided with a display area for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display that is being executed. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display-compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of reserved variable displays is also referred to as the reserved memory number. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also referred to as the total reserved memory number.

A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B, each of which includes a plurality of LEDs, are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided to the right of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first start winning hole that is always kept in a constant open state so that game balls can enter, for example, by a specified ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a specified number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric device) forms a second start winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 3). The variable winning ball device 6B, for example, has an electric tulip-type device having a pair of movable pieces, and when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable pieces are in a vertical position, so that the tip of the movable pieces approaches the winning ball device 6A, and the second start winning hole is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the on state, the movable pieces of the variable winning ball device 6B are in a tilted position, so that the second start winning hole is in an open state in which the game ball can enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in an open state). When a game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the second special game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to devices that include an electric tulip-type device.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three locations are provided at the lower left of the game area and one location is provided above the variable winning ball device 6B), general winning openings 10 are provided which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when a game ball enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see Figure 3), and the large winning opening door forms the large winning opening as a specific area that can be switched between an open state and a closed state.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door (for the special electric device) is in the OFF state, the large prize opening door closes the large prize opening, and game balls cannot enter (pass through) the large prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door is in the ON state, the large prize opening door opens the large prize opening, and game balls can easily enter the large prize opening.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 14 balls) are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large prize opening, more prize balls are paid out than when a game ball enters the first start prize opening, the second start prize opening, or the general prize opening 10, for example.

The entry of a game ball into each winning port, including the general winning port 10, is also referred to as a "winning". In particular, a winning ball into the starting port (first starting winning port, second starting winning port) is also referred to as a starting winning port.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (the lower left of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is made up of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs a variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from the special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers showing "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbols may also include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal symbols is also called a normal symbol game.

A pass gate 41 through which the game ball can pass is provided to the right of the image display device 5. When the game ball passes through the pass gate 41, a regular game is executed.

A regular symbol pending display 25C is provided below the regular symbol display 20. The regular symbol pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the regular symbol pending memory count, which is the number of regular symbol games that are pending execution, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above features, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with windmills that change the direction and speed of the game balls, as well as numerous obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an outlet that takes in game balls that do not enter any of the winning holes.

Speakers 8L, 8R for playing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 on the gaming machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided on the left and right of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the playing area. Furthermore, an attacca lamp 9c is provided near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the gaming board 2.

At a predetermined position on the game board 2 (above the image display device 5 in FIG. 1), a movable body 32 (described later) that operates according to the performance is provided. The movable body 32 is also provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable body lamp 9d and the above-mentioned main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, and attacca lamp 9c may be collectively referred to as the game effect lamp 9. The main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d are each configured to include an LED.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided, which is operated by the player or the like to launch the gaming ball toward the gaming area using the ball-hitting device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area, a ball supply tray (upper tray) is provided to hold (store) gaming balls dispensed as prize balls or gaming balls loaned by a predetermined ball loaning machine so that they can be supplied to the ball launching device. In addition to the upper tray, the gaming machine frame 3 may also be provided with a payout section (ball supply tray) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. Operations on the stick controller 31A are detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 3).

At a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area, a push button 31B is provided that the player can press to give a predetermined command. The operation of the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 3).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's actions (operations, etc.), but other detection means may also be provided.

Figure 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11, housed in a board case 201, is mounted on the rear of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting change switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting change switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing settings such as the probability of winning a jackpot and the ball payout rate in the setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting change switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11, for example, at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17.

A display monitor 29 is disposed in the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 31 is disposed to the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured, for example, using a seven-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 31 are disposed directly in front of the main board 11 when the back surface of the game board 2 is viewed with the game machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive win ratio, winning combination ratio, and base. The consecutive win ratio is the ratio of the number of winning balls that have entered the large winning port (attacker) to the total number of winning balls. The winning combination ratio is the ratio of the number of winning balls that have entered the second start winning port (electric chute) and the number of winning balls that have entered the large winning port (attacker) to the total number of winning balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of winning balls to the number of game balls shot out. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko game machine 1. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 only needs to be able to display the setting values to be changed or confirmed.

When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The gaming machine frame 3 is provided with a rotatable glass door frame 3a having a glass window, and is configured so that the gaming area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the gaming area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end of the outer frame 1a, which is formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 50A covers the right side of the board case 201, including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52, from the rear side. The security cover 50A is a roughly L-shaped member including a short piece 50Aa and a long piece 50Ab, and may be made of a transparent synthetic resin.

(Outline of game progress)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the player rotating the ball hitting operation handle 30 provided on the pachinko game machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a normal game is started by the normal symbol display 20. If the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal game is being played (if the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 but the normal game based on the passing cannot be played immediately), the normal game based on the passing is put on hold up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal game, if a specific normal symbol (a normal winning symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal winning". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal winning symbol (a normal losing symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal losing". When a "normal winning" occurs, an opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B in an open state for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning port is opened).

When a game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game is started by the first special symbol display device 4A.

When a game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, a second special game is started by the second special pattern display device 4B.

In addition, if the game ball enters (wins) the start winning hole during the period when the special game is being played or during the period when the game is controlled to the jackpot game state described below (when a start winning occurs but the special game based on the start winning cannot be played immediately), the special game based on that entry will be put on hold until a specified upper limit number (for example, 4) is reached.

In the special game, if a specific special symbol (a jackpot symbol, for example, "7"; the actual symbol varies depending on the type of jackpot, as described below) is displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it is a "jackpot", and if a special symbol different from the jackpot symbol (a losing symbol, for example, "-") is displayed as a stopped symbol, it is a "miss". Note that "misses" in this pachinko game machine 1 include "misses with time reduction" that are controlled to a high base state (time reduction state) from the next variable display without going through a jackpot game.

After the display result in the special game becomes "jackpot," the game is controlled to a jackpot game state, which is an advantageous state for the player.

In the jackpot game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable prize ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. This open state continues until either a predetermined period of time (e.g., 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) has elapsed, or the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 9), whichever comes first. The predetermined period is the maximum period during which the large prize opening can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as the maximum opening period. This cycle in which the large prize opening is open is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until the predetermined maximum number of times (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the jackpot gaming state, the player can get prize balls by making the gaming ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The more rounds there are in the jackpot gaming state, and the longer the upper limit opening period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

The "jackpot" has a jackpot type set. For example, there are multiple types of opening modes of the jackpot opening (number of rounds or maximum opening period) and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time-saving state, special state, etc.), and the jackpot type is set according to these. There may be jackpot types that offer many prize balls, jackpot types that offer few prize balls, or jackpot types that offer almost no prize balls.

After the jackpot game state ends, the game may be controlled to a time-saving state or a special state depending on the type of jackpot mentioned above.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol fluctuation time (period during which the special symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state. In the time-saving state, control (high opening control, high base control) is also executed to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning hole by shortening the average regular symbol fluctuation time (period during which the regular symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state and by improving the probability of a "regular symbol hit" in the regular symbol game more than in the normal state. The time-saving state is an advantageous state for the player because it is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved.

In the probability variable state (probability fluctuating state), in addition to time-saving control, probability variable control is executed, which increases the probability that the display result will be a "jackpot" compared to the normal state. The probability variable state is an even more advantageous state for the player, as it not only improves the efficiency of special symbol fluctuation, but also makes it easier to get a "jackpot."

The time-saving state or the probability of a special bonus state will continue until one of the end conditions is met first, such as the specified number of special games being played or the start of the next big win game state. The end condition of the state in which the specified number of special games have been played is also called a count-cut (count-cut time-saving state, count-cut probability of a special bonus state, etc.).

The normal state refers to a game state other than advantageous states such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, and special states such as a time-saving state and a probability-varying state, and is a state in which the pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability that the display result in the normal game will be a "normal hit" and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", is controlled in the same way as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed and the specified return process is not executed after the power is turned on).

The state in which probability variable control is being executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not being executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which time-saving control is being executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which time-saving control is not being executed is also called a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low probability/high base state, the probability variable state is a high probability/high base state, and the normal state is a low probability/low base state. A high probability state and a low base state is also called a high probability low base state.

The game state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (e.g., a specific area in a big prize opening) during a big win game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the game state may be controlled to a high probability state after the big win game state.

(Progression of the performance, etc.)
In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects to notify the progress of the game or to liven up the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The effects are described below. The effects are executed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of the display, the effects may be executed as sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, turning on or off the game effect lamp 9, operating the movable body 32, or as an effect using any effect device including some or all of these.

As an effect that is executed according to the progress of the game, in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R provided on the image display device 5, a variable display of decorative patterns begins in response to the start of the first or second special pattern game. At the timing when the display result (also called the determined special pattern) in the first or second special pattern game is displayed statically, the determined decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns is also displayed statically (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts to when it ends, the state of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach state (a reach is achieved). Here, a reach state refers to a state in which the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 continue to be variable displayed when the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed form part of a jackpot combination, which will be described later.

In addition, when the above-mentioned reach state occurs during the variable display of the decorative symbols, a reach effect is executed. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, multiple types of reach effects are executed, which have different rates of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" (also called the jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation rate) depending on the performance state. Reach effects include, for example, a normal reach and a super reach, which has a higher jackpot reliability than a normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative patterns (for example, "7") are displayed stopped in line on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "center", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In the case of a "probability jackpot" that is controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, odd decorative symbols (e.g., "7") may be displayed in a line, and in the case of a "non-probability jackpot (normal jackpot)" that is not controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, even decorative symbols (e.g., "6") may be displayed in a line. In this case, odd decorative symbols are also called probability jackpot symbols, and even decorative symbols are also called non-probability jackpot symbols (normal symbols). After a reach state is reached with non-probability jackpot symbols, a promotion effect may be executed that ultimately results in a "probability jackpot".

When the display result of the special game is a "miss," the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern does not become a reach state, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a non-reach combination (also called a "non-reach miss") as a "non-reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "non-reach miss"). Also, when the display result is a "miss," after the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a reach state, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a predetermined reach combination (also called a "reach miss") that is not a jackpot combination as a "reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "reach miss").

The effects that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute include displaying the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) described above. In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. Preview effects include a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display currently being executed, and a pre-reading preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is on hold). As a pre-reading preview effect, an effect that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, a pseudo consecutive performance may be executed in which a single variable display appears to be multiple variable displays by temporarily pausing the decorative pattern during the variable display and then restarting the variable display.

Even during a jackpot game state, a jackpot performance is executed to notify the player of the jackpot game state. The jackpot performance may include a performance to notify the player of the number of rounds, or an upgrade performance to show that the value of the jackpot game state is increasing.

In addition, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo performance is executed).

(Board configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like, as shown in Fig. 3. In addition, various boards, such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board, are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also equipped. The various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductor patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit mounting boards configured to realize specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on the electronic circuit board.

A power switch 91 is connected to the power supply board 17, and by operating the power supply switch 91 (turning it ON), power from an AC power source such as an external power source such as a commercial power supply, such as 100V AC, can be supplied from the power supply board 17 to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12. The power supply board 17 is equipped with, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC), and a power supply circuit for converting a specified DC voltage to a specific DC voltage (for example, 12V DC or 5V DC).

The main board 11 is the main control board, and has the function of controlling the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of special games (including reserved game management), execution of regular games (including reserved game management), jackpot game status, game status, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, etc.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 executes the programs stored in the ROM 101 to perform processes that control the progress of the game (processes that realize the functions of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (such as data on fluctuation patterns, performance control commands, and tables referenced when making various decisions) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are preserved for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the programs stored in the ROM 101 may be deployed to the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 is configured to include, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described below) are input, and an output port for transmitting various signals (signals for controlling (driving) the first special pattern display device 4A, the second special pattern display device 4B, the normal pattern display device 20, the first hold display device 25A, the second hold display device 25B, the normal hold display device 25C, etc., solenoid drive signals).

The switch circuit 110 takes in detection signals (such as a detection signal indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and the switch has been turned on) from various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23), and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the game ball has passed or entered.

The switch circuit 110 receives a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of control circuits such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either a power supply monitoring circuit, an IC with a built-in watchdog timer, or a system reset IC. The power-off signal is turned off when the specified power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a specified value, and is turned on when the period during which the specified power supply voltage is below the specified value continues for longer than the power-off reference time. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, pressing the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits solenoid drive signals (such as signals to turn on solenoid 81 and solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric device and the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door.

The main board 11 is connected to a display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 31, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door open sensor 90. The door open sensor 90 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3, including the glass door frame 3a.

As part of controlling the progress of the game, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) supplies presentation control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) to the presentation control board 12 in accordance with the progress of the game. The presentation control commands output from the main board 11 are relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the presentation control board 12. The presentation control commands include, for example, commands that specify various determination results in the main board 11 (for example, the display results of the special game (including the type of jackpot), the variable pattern used when executing the special game (described in detail later)), the game status (for example, the start or end of the variable display, the opening status of the jackpot opening, the occurrence of a win, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, etc.

The performance control board 12 is a sub-control board independent of the main board 11, and has the function of receiving performance control commands and executing performances (various performances according to the progress of the game, including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notifying errors, and notifying of power outage recovery) based on the received performance control commands.

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The performance control CPU 120 executes the programs stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing for executing performances together with the display control unit 123 (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the performance control board 12, including determining the performance to be executed). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The presentation control CPU 120 may instruct the display control unit 123 to execute a presentation based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (signals that are output when an operation by the player is detected and that appropriately indicate the content of the operation).

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), CGROM (Character Generator ROM), VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes the performance based on instructions to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 displays a performance image on the image display unit 5 by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display unit 5 based on an instruction to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 and a lamp signal (a signal designating the on/off state of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the performance image and to turn on/off the game effect lamp 9. The display control unit 123 also supplies a signal to operate the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or to a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, causing the speakers 8L and 8R to output the sound designated by the sound designation signal.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamp 9, and drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, turning the game effect lamp 9 on and off in the manner specified by the lamp signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the sound output and the turning on and off of the lamp.

In addition, the control of sound output, turning on/off of the lamp (such as supplying a sound designation signal or a lamp signal), and control of the movable body 32 (such as supplying a signal to operate the movable body 32) may be performed by the performance control CPU 120.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for performance) used to execute various performances. The random numbers for performance may be updated by the performance control CPU 120 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the performance control board 12 includes an input port for taking in performance control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals (video signals, sound designation signals, lamp signals).

The boards other than the main board 11, such as the performance control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. As with the pachinko game machine 1, multiple sub-boards may be provided for different functions, or one sub-board may be configured to have multiple functions.

(Operation)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main Operations of Main Board 11)
First, a description will be given of the main operations of the main board 11. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and a game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. Fig. 4 is a flowchart showing the game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Then, it performs the necessary initial settings (step S2). The initial settings include setting the stack pointer, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), and setting the RAM 102 to be accessible.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery condition is met (step S3). The recovery condition can be met when the clear signal is off, backup data is present, and the backup RAM is normal. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, if a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, for example, an on-state clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an on-state clear signal is input, it is determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not met. The backup data only needs to be capable of being stored in the RAM 102, which serves as the backup RAM for game control. In step S3, it is determined whether the recovery condition can be met by checking or inspecting the presence or absence of backup data and the presence or absence of data errors.

If the recovery condition is met (step S3; Yes), recovery processing (step S4) is executed, followed by setting confirmation processing (step S5). The recovery processing in step S4 sets a working area based on the contents stored in RAM 102. By setting the working area using the backup data stored in RAM 102, the game state when the power supply was stopped is restored, and if, for example, a special symbol was changing, it is sufficient if the change of the special symbol can be resumed from the state before the stoppage.

If the recovery condition is not met (step S3; No), an initialization process (step S6) is executed, and then a setting change process (step S7) is executed. The initialization process in step S6 includes a clearing process that clears flags, counters, and buffers stored in RAM 102, and the execution of the clearing process sets initial values in the working area.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether a predetermined setting confirmation condition is met. The setting confirmation condition is met, for example, when power supply is started, the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is in the ON state and the setting key 51 is turned ON. The setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed when the recovery condition is met in step S3, including the clear signal being in the OFF state. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be met when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the clear signal being in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

If the setting confirmation condition is met in the setting confirmation process of step S5, the pachinko gaming machine 1 enters a setting confirmation state in which the setting values set therein can be confirmed, and a setting confirmation start command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by viewing them on the display monitor 29. When the setting confirmation state is to end, a setting confirmation end command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in a game stop state in which the progress of the game on the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. In the game stop state, the launch of game balls by operating the ball striking handle, the detection of game balls by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display device 20 may be controlled to stop displaying a losing symbol or the like, or to display a symbol corresponding to a game stop state other than a losing symbol. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state associated with it may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether a predetermined setting change condition is met. The setting change condition is met, for example, when power supply is started, the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is in the ON state and the setting key 51 is turned ON. The setting change condition may also include the clear signal being in the ON state.

When the setting change condition is met in the setting change process of step S7, the pachinko gaming machine 1 enters a setting change state in which the setting value set therein can be changed, and a setting change start command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. In the setting change state, the setting value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is updated and displayed sequentially each time the setting change switch 52 is operated. After that, when the setting key 51 is turned off by an attendant at the game center or the like, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated and stored) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is turned off. When the setting change state is to be ended, a setting change end command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be in a play stop state, just as when it is in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the associated play stop state may also end.

When the performance control board 12 receives a setting check start command or a setting change start command, it may perform control to notify the user that the setting is being checked or changed. For example, it may display a specific image on the image display device 5, output a specific sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, or cause a light-emitting component such as the game effect lamp 9 to emit light in a specific manner.

The clear signal is turned on by, for example, pressing a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on, if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 and the setting change process of step S7 are executed, making it possible to control the device to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process of step S4 and the setting confirmation process of step S5 are executed, making it possible to control the device to the setting confirmation state. When power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off, if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 is executed but the device is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process of step S4 is executed but the device is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the register of the CTC built into the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt occurs periodically at a predetermined time (e.g., every 2 ms) (step S9), and the interrupt is permitted (step S10). After that, a loop process is entered. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (e.g., every 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can execute the timer interrupt process periodically.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. 5. When the game control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 5 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch processing to determine whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 via the switch circuit 110 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main side error processing, it performs an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1, and can issue a warning if necessary depending on the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output processing, it outputs data such as jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpots), start information (information indicating the number of start winnings), and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the game has entered a probability variable state) that are supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko game machine 1 (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process is executed to update at least a portion of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process process at each timer interrupt, the execution and reservation management of the special symbol game, the control of the jackpot game state, the control of the game state, etc. are realized.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process at each timer interrupt, enabling the execution and reservation management of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passing gate 41), and the opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on a "normal symbol hit". The normal symbol game is executed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of reserved normal symbols is displayed by lighting the normal symbol reservation display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed. Then, the CPU 103 executes a command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set a performance control command for transmission in each of the above processes. In the command control processing of step S27, a process is performed to transmit the performance control command set for transmission to a sub-side control board such as the performance control board 12. After executing the command control processing, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt processing is terminated.

Figure 6 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol process executed in step S25 shown in Figure 5. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning judgment process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a start winning, store the reserved information in a specified area of the RAM 102, and update the reserved memory number. When a start winning occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of big win) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as reserved information. In addition, a process for predicting and judging the display result and the variation pattern based on the extracted random number value may be executed. After the reserved information and the reserved memory number are stored, a transmission setting is performed to transmit a performance control command to the performance control board 12 to specify the judgment results such as the occurrence of a start winning, the reserved memory number, and the predictive judgment. The performance control command at the time of the start winning that has been transmitted and set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special pattern process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 4.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S120 depending on the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. Note that in each step of the special symbol process (steps S110 to S120), a transmission setting is made to transmit a performance control command corresponding to each step to the performance control board 12.

The normal special pattern processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "0" (initial value). In this normal special pattern processing, a determination is made as to whether or not to start the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game based on the presence or absence of reserved information. In addition, in the normal special pattern processing, based on a random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special pattern or the decorative pattern is to be a "jackpot" and, if it is a "jackpot", the type of jackpot is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the normal special pattern processing, a determined special pattern (either a jackpot pattern or a losing pattern) to be stopped and displayed in the special pattern game is set in response to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "1", and the normal special pattern processing is terminated. In addition, the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed in priority to the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also called special pattern 2 priority consumption). Also, the order in which the game balls enter the first start winning slot and the second start winning slot may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special game may be met in the order in which the balls enter (also called winning order consumption).

When making various decisions based on random number values, various tables stored in ROM 101 (tables in which decision values compared with random number values are assigned to decision results) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the performance control board 12. On the performance control board 12, various tables are stored in ROM 121.

The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of determining one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns using a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a pre-determined result of whether or not the display result is a "jackpot". In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when a fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "2" and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern specifies the execution time of the special game (special game variation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbols), the manner of the variable display of the decorative symbols (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the content of the presentation during the variable display of the decorative symbols (type of reach presentation, etc.), and is also called the variable display pattern.

The special pattern change process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "2". This special pattern change process includes a process for making settings to change the special pattern in the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B, and a process for measuring the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change. It also determines whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special pattern change time corresponding to the change pattern. Then, when the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change reaches the special pattern change time, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "3", and the special pattern change process ends.

The special pattern stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "3". This special pattern stop process includes a process for setting the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B to stop the fluctuation of the special pattern and to stop displaying (deriving) the confirmed special pattern that is the display result of the special pattern. If the display result is a "jackpot", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "4". If the display result is a "miss", when the time-saving state or the probability bonus state is controlled and the end of the number-cutting is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special pattern process flag is updated, the special pattern stop process ends.

The pre-opening process for the jackpot in step S114 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "4". This pre-opening process for the jackpot includes a process for setting the jackpot opening port to open by starting the execution of a round in the jackpot game state based on the display result being "jackpot". When the jackpot opening port is opened, a process for supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening port is executed. At this time, for example, depending on the type of jackpot, the maximum open period for the jackpot opening port and the maximum number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5" and the pre-opening process for the jackpot is completed.

The jackpot opening process of step S115 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process for measuring the time that has elapsed since the jackpot opening was opened, and a process for determining whether or not it is time to return the jackpot opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23. When the jackpot opening is to be returned to a closed state, a process for stopping the supply of a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening door is executed, and then the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "6", and the jackpot opening process is terminated.

The post-jackpot release process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "6". This post-jackpot release process includes a process for determining whether the number of times the round that opens the big prize opening has been executed has reached a set upper limit, and a process for making settings to end the jackpot game state when the upper limit has been reached. When the number of times the round has been executed has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5", whereas when the number of times the round has been executed has reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "7". When the value of the special chart process flag is updated, the post-jackpot release process ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "7". This jackpot end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which an ending presentation is executed as a presentation operation that notifies the end of the jackpot game state has elapsed, and a process of making various settings for starting special rate control or time-saving control in response to the end of the jackpot game state. When such settings are made, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured so that the winning probability of a jackpot and the ball output rate change according to the setting value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the winning probability of a jackpot and the ball output rate change by using a display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the setting value. For example, the setting value is made up of six levels from 1 to 6, with 6 being the highest winning probability of a jackpot, and the winning probability of a jackpot decreasing as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. In this example, when the setting value is set to 6, the player has the highest advantage, and the advantage decreases stepwise as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. If the winning probability of a jackpot changes according to the setting value, the ball output rate may also change according to the setting value. The winning probability of a jackpot is constant regardless of the setting value, while the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may change according to the setting value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured to be able to set one of a number of setting values that have different degrees of advantage for the player. The setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is notified by sending a setting value designation command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

Figure 7 shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table. Figure 7 (A) shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, and Figure 7 (B) shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table for the second special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol. The display result judgment table is a collection of data stored in ROM 101. In the display result judgment table, a winning judgment value compared with the random number value MR1 according to a set value is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is updated randomly within the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result judgment table, a display result judgment table common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be used.

As shown in FIG. 7(A), when the variable special chart is the first special chart, if the setting value is 1 and the game state is normal or time-saving, the value can be a number in the range of 0 to 65535, and of the hit determination values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot", 65317 to 65535 are assigned to "miss with time-saving", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Also, when the setting value is 1 and the game state is a probability variable state, of the hit determination values mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "jackpot", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Note that when the setting value in the first special chart is 2 to 6 and the game state is normal or time-saving, it is as shown in FIG. 7(A).

As shown in FIG. 7(B), when the variable special chart is the second special chart, if the setting value is 1 and the game state is normal or time-saving, the value can be a number in the range of 0 to 65535, and of the hit determination values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot", 65317 to 65425 are assigned to "miss with time-saving", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Also, when the setting value is 1 and the game state is a probability variable state, of the aforementioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "jackpot", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Note that when the setting value in the second special chart is 2 to 6 and the game state is normal or time-saving, it is as shown in FIG. 7(B).

Now, looking at the numerical range of hit determination values assigned to "jackpot" and "miss with time-saving" in each display result determination table, as shown in FIG. 8, in the display result determination table for the first special chart when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit determination values from 1020 to 1237 is set as a common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value.

When the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set (1020 to 1237 is assigned to "jackpot"), while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value is set from 1238 as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. This non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, the range of 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5, and the range of 1238 to 1346 for setting value 6.

In other words, in the first special chart display result judgment table when the game state is normal or time-saving, when the setting value is 1, among the hit judgment values that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, only values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "jackpot", while when the setting value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range are assigned to "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1238 as the setting value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a jackpot is increased by increasing the non-common numerical range that is adjacent to the common numerical range as the set value increases, with 1020 being the reference value for determining a jackpot (jackpot reference value).

Furthermore, in the first special chart display result judgment table when the game state is the normal state or the time-saving state, the range of 65317 to 65535 among the hit judgment values is set as the common numerical range of the time-saving miss judgment value for judging a time-saving miss regardless of the setting value. If we focus on the case where the setting value is 6, as described above, the hit judgment value is set to 1020 to 1346 as the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and the time-saving miss judgment value is set to the range of 65317 to 65535 with 65317 as the reference value for the time-saving miss (time-saving miss reference value) in a numerical range different from the range of the jackpot judgment value of the setting value 6 (1020 to 1346), so that the numerical range of the time-saving miss judgment value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the jackpot judgment value that changes according to each setting value.

In addition, in the first special chart display result judgment table when the game state is in a special probability state, the range of hit judgment values from 1020 to 1346 is set as a common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value.

When the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set (1020 to 1346 is assigned to "jackpot"), while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value is set from 1347 as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. This non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to the range of 1347 to 1383 for setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for setting value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for setting value 4, the range of 1347 to 1556 for setting value 5, and the range of 1347 to 1674 for setting value 6.

In other words, in the first special chart display result judgment table when the game state is in the high probability state, when the setting value is 1, among the hit judgment values that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, only values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to "jackpot", while when the setting value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range are assigned to "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1347 as the setting value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a jackpot is increased by increasing the non-common numerical range that is adjacent to the common numerical range as the set value increases, with 1020 being the reference value for determining a jackpot (jackpot reference value).

In the display result judgment table for the second special chart when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit judgment values from 1020 to 1237 is set as the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value.

When the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set (1020 to 1237 is assigned to "jackpot"), while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value is set from 1238 as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. This non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, the range of 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5, and the range of 1238 to 1346 for setting value 6.

In other words, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, in the second special chart display result judgment table when the game state is normal or time-saving, when the set value is 1, among the hit judgment values that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, only values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "jackpot", while when the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range are assigned to "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a jackpot is increased by increasing the non-common numerical range that is adjacent to the common numerical range as the set value increases, with 1020 being the reference value for determining a jackpot (jackpot reference value).

Furthermore, in the second special display result judgment table when the game state is the normal state or the time-saving state, the range of 65317 to 65425 among the hit judgment values is set as the common numerical range of the time-saving miss judgment value for judging a time-saving miss regardless of the setting value. If we focus on the case where the setting value is 6, as described above, the hit judgment value is set to 1020 to 1346 as the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and the time-saving miss judgment value is set to the range of 65317 to 65425 with 65317 as the reference value for the time-saving miss (time-saving miss reference value) in a numerical range different from the range of the jackpot judgment value of the setting value 6 (1020 to 1346), so that the numerical range of the time-saving miss judgment value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the jackpot judgment value that changes according to each setting value.

In the second special symbol display result determination table when the game state is in a probability bonus state, the hit determination value range of 1020 to 1346 is set as a common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value. The other features of the second special symbol display result determination table are the same as those of the first special symbol display result determination table.

As described above, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, the range of 65317 to 65535 is set as the common numerical range for a miss with time-saving, regardless of the setting value, when the gaming state is normal and when the time-saving state, and when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, the range of 65317 to 65425 is set as the common numerical range for a miss with time-saving, regardless of the setting value, when the gaming state is normal and when the time-saving state. In other words, when the gaming state is normal and when the time-saving state, the rate at which the variable display result is a miss with time-saving is the same for all setting values, so it is possible to prevent the setting value from making the game excessively gambling-oriented. Furthermore, for the time-saving miss, which is assigned a common judgment value for each setting value, the setting is set to a continuous numerical range from 65317, which is the time-saving miss reference value, for all setting values, so that the processing load on the CPU 103 for determining whether the variable display result is a time-saving miss can be reduced.

In addition, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, six setting values can be set, from 1 to 6, but the setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be five or less or seven or more. Also, the smaller the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it may be for the player.

The jackpot type may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of judgment values in the jackpot type judgment table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The fluctuation pattern may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of judgment values in the fluctuation pattern judgment table. Alternatively, the fluctuation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The execution rate of normal reaches and super reaches may differ depending on the set value, so that the setting value may be suggested by the frequency at which normal reaches and super reaches are executed. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reaches and super reaches may be common regardless of the set value. In addition, any setting suggestion performance may be possible at different rates depending on the set value.

(Main operations of the performance control board 12)
Next, the main operations of the performance control board 12 will be described. When the performance control board 12 receives a power supply voltage from a power supply board or the like, the performance control CPU 120 starts up and executes the performance control main process as shown in the flowchart of Fig. 9. When the performance control main process shown in Fig. 9 starts, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the registers of the CTC (counter/timer circuit) mounted on the performance control board 12. In addition, it executes an initial operation control process (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control to drive the movable body 32 to return it to the origin position and control to perform a predetermined operation check.

Then, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on or not (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every time a predetermined time (e.g., 2 milliseconds) elapses, for example based on the register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the process waits.

In addition, on the performance control board 12 side, an interrupt occurs to receive a performance control command from the main board 11, in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time has elapsed. This interrupt occurs, for example, when the performance control INT signal from the main board 11 becomes ON. When an interrupt occurs due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt to be prohibited, but if a CPU that does not automatically become interrupt prohibited is used, it is desirable to issue an interrupt prohibition command (DI command). In response to an interrupt due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process. In this command reception interrupt process, a performance control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, among the input ports included in the I/O 125. The performance control command taken in at this time is stored in a performance control command reception buffer provided in, for example, the RAM 122. The performance control CPU 120 then sets the interrupt to permitted and ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to an off state (step S74), and a command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, various presentation control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the presentation control command reception buffer are read, and then settings and controls corresponding to the read presentation control commands are performed. For example, the read presentation control command is stored in a specified area of the RAM 122, or a reception flag provided in the RAM 122 is turned on so that which presentation control command was received and the contents specified by the presentation control command can be confirmed in the presentation control process process, etc. In addition, if the presentation control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the performance control process is executed (step S76). In the performance control process, for example, control is performed to operate various performance devices, such as the display operation of the performance image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light-emitting elements such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LEDs, and the driving operation of the movable body 32. In addition, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are made regarding the control contents of the performance operations using the various performance devices in accordance with the performance control commands, etc. transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing of step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 side is updated by software. Then, the process returns to step S73. Before returning to step S73, other processes may be executed.

Figure 10 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in step S76 of Figure 9 as the performance control process processing. In the performance control process processing shown in Figure 10, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a look-ahead preview setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead preview setting process, for example, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. for executing the look-ahead preview performance are made based on the performance control command at the time of the start winning transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, processing is executed to display the hold display based on the number of hold memories specified from the performance control command.

After executing the processing of step S161, the performance control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processing of steps S170 to S175 as described below, depending on the value of a performance process flag provided in, for example, RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is a process that is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process includes a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. If it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 should be started, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "1" and the variable display start waiting process ends.

The variable display start setting process of step S171 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern, whether or not various performances such as reach performances and various advance notice performances are executed, and the mode and execution start timing are determined based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the performance control command. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute a performance) that reflects the determined result is set. After that, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. In response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5.

The variable display performance process of step S172 is a process executed when the performance process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5, to drive the movable body 32, to output voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and to turn on/off/blink the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14, thereby executing various performance controls during the variable display of the decorative pattern. After performing such performance control, for example, in response to the reading of an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern from the performance control pattern, or the reception of a command specifying the stop display of the fixed decorative pattern from the main board 11, the fixed decorative pattern, which is the display result of the decorative pattern, is stopped. When the final decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "3" and the performance process during variable display ends.

The special winning wait process of step S173 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "3". In this special winning wait process, the presentation control CPU 120 judges whether or not a presentation control command designating the start of a jackpot game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when a presentation control command designating the start of a jackpot game state is received, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "4". Also, when a command designating the start of a jackpot game state is not received and the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed, it is judged that the display result in the special winning game was a "miss", and the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value of "0". When the value of the presentation process flag is updated, the special winning wait process is terminated.

The jackpot performance process of step S174 is executed when the performance process flag value is "6". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot gaming state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot gaming state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot performance process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the jackpot gaming state is to end, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "5", which is a value corresponding to the ending performance process, and the jackpot performance process ends.

The ending presentation process of step S175 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "7". In this ending presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a jackpot gaming state, and executes various presentation controls for the ending presentation at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the set contents. After that, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending presentation process is terminated.

(Modification of the basic explanation)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes when a prize is won, but it may also be an enclosed type gaming machine that encloses gaming media and awards points when a prize is won.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol showing "- ") may be displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be achieved by repeatedly turning on and off the pattern. Furthermore, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol showing "- " may not be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, a pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as the gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to slot machines (e.g., slot machines equipped with one or more of big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.)) that can play a game in which medals are inserted and a predetermined bet amount is set, multiple types of symbols are rotated in response to the player's operation of the control lever, and when the symbols are stopped in response to the player's operation of the stop button, a specific combination of symbols is formed, and a predetermined number of medals is paid out to the player.

The programs and data for implementing the present invention are not limited to being distributed or provided to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium, but may be distributed by being pre-installed in a storage device of the computer device or the like. Furthermore, the programs and data for implementing the present invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communications processing unit.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory, or by directly executing the game using the hardware resources of another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions of comparison of various percentages such as the execution percentage of effects (such as "high", "low", "different", etc.) may include one being a percentage of "0%". For example, they also include one being a percentage of "0%" and the other being a percentage of "100%" or a percentage less than "100%".

(Explanation regarding feature 069SG)
Next, the pachinko game machine 1 of the characteristic part 069SG in this embodiment will be described based on FIG. 11-1 to FIG. 11-64. In the description of each step of the flowchart in the characteristic part 069SG, for example, "step S1" may be abbreviated to "S1" or "069SGS1", "normal reach" may be abbreviated to "N reach" and "super reach" to "SP reach". In addition, in the characteristic parts 069SG, 099SG, and 018SG, "variable" may be referred to as "variable display". In addition, the same symbols are used to omit detailed description of the configurations that are similar to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description or have different forms, arrangement positions, etc. but have the same functions. In the following, the front side of FIG. 11-1 is the front (front, front) side of the pachinko game machine 1, and the back side is the back (rear) side, and the description will be based on the up, down, left, and right directions when the pachinko game machine 1 is viewed from the front side. In this embodiment, the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the surface facing a player who plays on the pachinko gaming machine 1 .

[First embodiment]
The following describes the first embodiment of the feature part 069SG. As described in FIG. 7, the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment is not set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6) with different rates at which the big win display result is displayed, but is described as a game machine in which the big win probability is set to about 1/319.

In addition, after the gaming machine is powered on (when the RAM clear process is executed) or after a jackpot occurs, if the variable display is executed a certain number of times (900 times in this example) in succession in a low probability state but the next jackpot does not occur, the machine may be controlled to time-saving state B (also called rescue time-saving state or rescue time-saving) out of the multiple types of time-saving states. This rescue time-saving state is provided to rescue players who have played for a long period of time but have not yet won a jackpot (for example, to reduce the amount of money invested in playing), and in this example, it is a gaming state called "Yu-time".

In this embodiment, if the multiple types of jackpots are controlled to jackpot A, 110 variable displays are performed in time-saving state A (low probability/high base state) out of the multiple types of time-saving states, so the number of variable displays remaining from the end of time-saving state A to the arrival of the rescue time-saving state is 790, while if the multiple types of jackpots are controlled to either jackpot B or jackpot C, 110 variable displays are performed in the probability variable state (high probability/high base state), so the number of variable displays remaining from the end of the probability variable state to the arrival of the rescue time-saving state is 900. Also, in this embodiment, the number of variable displays in time-saving state B (low probability/high base state) based on the value of the rescue time-saving count counter becoming "0" is 1100.

In this embodiment, in the variable display when the rescue time reduction is reached, a shutter image (see Figs. 11-23 (B) and (C)) is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5, thereby reducing the visibility of the first background image (see Fig. 11-23 (A)) corresponding to the normal state that was displayed as the background image in the variable display before the rescue time reduction is reached, and then a third background image (see Fig. 11-23 (D)) corresponding to the rescue time reduction is displayed as the background image.

In this embodiment, the left side of the image display device 5 on the game board 2 of the pachinko game machine 1 is formed in a left game area where game balls can flow down, and the right side of the image display device 5 on the game board 2 is formed in a right game area where game balls can flow down. Game balls that are weakly shot by the launching device flow down the first path in the left game area, and game balls that are strongly shot by the launching device flow down the second path in the right game area.

In this embodiment, the special variable winning ball device 7 has a first large winning opening and a second large winning opening formed along the flow direction of the game balls. The first large winning opening can be changed between an open state where game balls can enter and a closed state where game balls cannot enter by driving a large winning opening door (not shown) to open and close by driving a solenoid 069SG2A (see FIG. 11-2). The second large winning opening can be changed between an open state where game balls can enter and a closed state where game balls cannot enter by driving a large winning opening door (not shown) to open and close by driving a solenoid 069SG2B (see FIG. 11-3).

Furthermore, a first count switch 069SG023A capable of detecting a game ball is provided in the first large prize opening, and a second count switch 069SG023B capable of detecting a game ball is provided in the second large prize opening.

In other words, game balls flowing down the left game area (first path) can win in the general winning port 10 and the first start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A, and game balls flowing down the right game area (second path) can win in the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, the general winning port 10, and the first or second large winning port formed by the special variable winning ball device 7, and can also pass through the passing gate 41.

In addition, in this embodiment, the switch circuit 110 is connected to the first count switch 069SG023A, the second count switch 069SG023B, and the jackpot start switch 069SG024 built into the jackpot start gate 069SG042.

There are multiple obstacle nails between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7. For this reason, game balls flowing down the left game area cannot win in the second start winning hole or the large winning hole, and game balls flowing down the right game area cannot win in the first start winning hole.

As shown in FIG. 11-2, at a predetermined position on the game board 2 of the pachinko game machine 1 in this embodiment (for example, the lower left position of the game area), there are a first special pattern display device 069SG004A capable of variable display of the first special pattern, a second special pattern display device 069SG004B capable of variable display of the second special pattern, a first reserved indicator 069SG025A capable of displaying the first reserved memory number, a second reserved indicator 069SG025B capable of displaying the second reserved memory number, a normal pattern display device 069SG020 capable of variable display of normal patterns, a normal reserved indicator 069SG025C capable of displaying the normal reserved memory number, A game information display unit is provided in which a round indicator 069SG131 capable of displaying the number of rounds (jackpot type) of a jackpot game during the jackpot game, a right hit lamp 069SG132 that lights up in a game state in which a game ball is shot toward the right game area, such as a jackpot game state, a high probability/high base state (high probability state), or a low probability/high base state (time-saving state), a high probability/high base state (high probability state) lamp 069SG133 that lights up when the game is in a high probability/high base state (high probability state), and a time-saving lamp 069SG134 that lights up in a high probability/high base state (high probability state) and a low probability/high base state (time-saving state) are all arranged together. Note that, when the game state is normal, the right hit lamp 069SG132 exceptionally lights up from the timing when the variable display stops if the variable display result is a jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 11-2, the main board 11 is equipped with an information output circuit for outputting game information (signals) to an external device such as a management computer of the gaming center where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed, via a terminal board (not shown).

In this embodiment, the second large prize opening has a V prize opening and an outlet downstream of the V prize opening. A variable V prize opening device (V lid) is provided upstream of the V prize opening. The variable V prize opening device changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid. In other words, the game balls flowing down the second large prize opening can pass through the V prize opening when the variable V prize opening device is in the open state, and cannot pass through the V prize opening and instead flow down to the outlet when the variable V prize opening device is in the closed state.

As shown in FIG. 11-2, the main board 11 is provided with a V switch 069SG023B1 that can detect, via a switch circuit 110, that the game ball has passed through the V entry port located downstream of the second large entry port, and an ejection switch 069SG023B2 that can detect that the game ball has passed through the ejection port.

The performance control board 12 is also connected to a vibration motor 61 built into the push button 31B and a movable body motor 207 for operating the movable body 32. The lamp control board 14 is also connected to a right-hit LED 069SG031 for encouraging a right-hit operation, a first special symbol LED 069SG032 that lights up during the variable display of the first special symbol, a second special symbol LED 069SG033 that lights up during the variable display of the second special symbol, a first reserved LED 069SG034A that lights up when the first reserved memory number is 1 to 2, and a first reserved LED 069SG035A that lights up when the first reserved memory number is 3 to 4. 69SG034B, a second pending LED 069SG035A that lights up when the second pending memory number is 1 to 2, a second pending LED 069SG035B that lights up when the second pending memory number is 3 to 4, a button LED 62 built into the push button 31B, a movable body LED 208 built into the movable body 32, and frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12 provided on the gaming machine frame 3 are connected.

Figure 11-3 (A) is an explanatory diagram illustrating the random number values counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in Figure 11-3 (A), in this embodiment, on the main board 11 side, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, the random number value MR4 for determining the normal chart display result, and the random number value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 are controlled so that they can be counted. In addition, random number values other than these may be used to enhance the game effect. These random number values MR1 to MR5 may be counted by updating them by software using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built into the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also called game random numbers.

In this embodiment, the random numbers MR1 to MR5 are set to the ranges shown in FIG. 11-3(A), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the ranges of the random numbers MR1 to MR5 may be varied depending on the settings set in the pachinko game machine 1.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101 and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. The CPU 103 also executes a random number generation program to generate all of the various random numbers used on the main board 11.

The ROM 101 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data used to control the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of judgment tables prepared for the CPU 103 to make various judgments and decisions. The ROM 101 also stores table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and a variation pattern judgment table that stores a plurality of variation patterns that become the variable display mode of each pattern in the variable display of special patterns, normal patterns, etc.

Figure 11-3 (B) shows an example of the configuration of the special chart display result judgment table stored in ROM 101. In this feature section 069SG, a common special chart display result judgment table is used for the first special chart and the second special chart as the special chart display result judgment table, but the present invention is not limited to this, and separate special chart display result judgment tables may be used for the first special chart and the second special chart.

The special symbol display result determination table is a table that is referenced to determine whether or not to control the variable display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot" before a determined special symbol that is a variable display result is derived and displayed in a special symbol game using a first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A or a special symbol game using a second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B, based on a random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result.

In the special chart display result judgment table in this feature section 069SG, a numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result is assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" or "miss" depending on whether the game state of the pachinko game machine 1 is a normal state or time-saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state).

In the special chart display result judgment table, the table data indicating the judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result is judgment data assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control the special chart display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot". In the special chart display result judgment table in this feature part 069SG, when the game state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more judgment values are assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" than when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state). As a result, in the probability variable state (high probability state) in which the probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "jackpot" and that the game state is controlled to a jackpot game state is higher (about 1/80.02 in this feature part 069SG) than the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "jackpot" and that the game state is controlled to a jackpot game state when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state) (about 1/319.68 in this feature part 069SG). That is, in the special chart display result judgment table, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a probability variable state (high probability state), the judgment data is assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control to a jackpot gaming state so that the probability of deciding to control to a jackpot gaming state is higher than when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state.

The judgment tables stored in ROM 101 include the first special symbol display result judgment table and the second special symbol display result judgment table shown in FIG. 7, as well as the jackpot type judgment table (for the first special symbol) shown in FIG. 11-3 (C1) and the jackpot type judgment table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. 11-3 (C2), as well as a fluctuation pattern judgment table, a normal symbol display result judgment table (not shown), and a normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table (not shown).

The pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment is configured so that the probability of winning a jackpot (ball payout rate) does not change depending on the set value, but it may also be configured so that the probability of winning a jackpot (ball payout rate) changes depending on the set value.

(Big hit type determination table)
11-3(C1) and 11-3(C2) are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) and the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 101. Of these, FIG. 11-3(C1) is a table for determining the jackpot type using reserved memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning slot (i.e., when the first special symbol is variably displayed). Also, FIG. 11-3(C1) is a table for determining the jackpot type using reserved memory based on the game ball winning the second start winning slot (i.e., when the second special symbol is variably displayed).

The jackpot type determination table is a table that is referenced when a decision is made to make the variable display result a jackpot pattern, to determine the type of jackpot as one of jackpots A to C, based on the random number (MR2) for determining the jackpot type.

Now, the types of jackpots in this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 11-3 (D). In this embodiment, the jackpot types provided are jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C, for which time-saving control is executed for a maximum of 110 variable displays after the end of the jackpot game state. In addition, these jackpots A, B, and C are also jackpots for which special control is executed for a maximum of 110 variable displays after the end of the jackpot game by the game ball entering the V winning port after entering the second large winning port in the first round of the jackpot game state.

In this embodiment, the open state of the variable V winning ball device (V lid) can be a short open state (e.g., 0.1 seconds) in which the open state lasts for a short period of time, and a long open state (e.g., 15 seconds) in which the open state lasts for a long period of time. In the case of jackpot A, the variable V winning ball device is in a short open state in the first round of the jackpot game state, and in the cases of jackpot B and jackpot C, the variable V winning ball device is in a long open state in the first round of the jackpot game state.

The jackpot game state resulting from "jackpot A" is a normal opening jackpot that changes the second large prize entry port to an open state advantageous to the player in the first round, and changes the first large prize entry port to an open state advantageous to the player in the second to sixth rounds. In addition, with "jackpot A", the variable V prize entry device is in a short open state in the first round, making it extremely difficult to get the game ball to enter the V prize entry port, and it is not expected that the special bonus control will be executed, so it is essentially a normal jackpot.

The jackpot game state resulting from "jackpot B" is a normal opening jackpot that changes the second large prize entry port to an open state advantageous to the player in the first round, and changes the first large prize entry port to an open state advantageous to the player in the second to sixth rounds. In addition, with "jackpot B", the variable V prize entry device is in a long open state in the first round, making it extremely easy to get the game ball to enter the V prize entry port, and it is expected that the special chance control will be executed, making it a virtual special chance jackpot.

The jackpot game state resulting from "jackpot C" is a normal opening jackpot that changes the second large prize entry port to an open state advantageous to the player in the first round, and changes the first large prize entry port to an open state advantageous to the player in the second to tenth rounds. In addition, with "jackpot C", the variable V prize entry ball device is in a long open state in the first round, making it extremely easy to get the game ball to enter the V prize entry port, and it is expected that the special chance control will be executed, making it a virtual special chance jackpot.

In this embodiment, three types of jackpots, jackpot A to jackpot C, are provided as jackpot types, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or less types of jackpots, or four or more types of jackpots may be provided.

Also, as shown in FIG. 11-3 (C1), in the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol), of the range of MR2 determination values from 0 to 299, 0 to 149 is assigned to jackpot A, and 150 to 299 is assigned to jackpot B. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11-3 (C2), in the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol), of the range of MR2 determination values from 0 to 299, 0 to 99 is assigned to jackpot B, and 100 to 299 is assigned to jackpot C.

In other words, in this embodiment, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, there is a 50% probability that the game ball will enter the V winning hole in the first round of the jackpot game state, and both the special probability control and the time-saving control are implemented after the jackpot game ends. Furthermore, when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, there is a 100% probability that the game ball will enter the V winning hole in the first round of the jackpot game state, and both the special probability control and the time-saving control are implemented after the jackpot game ends.

In this example, even if a jackpot A occurs, it is possible for a V entry to occur when the V lid is in a short open state, but this is extremely rare, so in the case of a jackpot A, it will be explained as not having a V entry and the special rate control not being executed. Also, even if a jackpot B or jackpot C occurs, it is possible for a V entry not to occur when the V lid is in a long open state, but this is extremely rare, so in the case of a jackpot B or jackpot C, it will be explained as having a V entry and the special rate control being executed.

In this embodiment, the type of jackpot is determined using MR2, which is a random number value for determining the type of jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the type of jackpot may be determined using MR1, which is a random number value for determining the result of the special chart display.

In addition, in this embodiment, for example, as the jackpot type for the second special symbol, a form having jackpots B and C in which 110 times of probability variable control and time-saving control can be executed after the end of the jackpot game state has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a jackpot D in which time-saving control is executed 1009 times (probability variable state: 110 times + time-saving state A: 899 times) after the end of the jackpot game state may be provided. By doing so, it is almost certain that the next jackpot will be won, which increases interest, and even if a jackpot does not occur in the 110 times probability variable state after the end of jackpot D and the probability variable control ends, after 899 variable displays are executed without a jackpot occurring in time-saving state A (low probability/high base state), simply executing one variable display in the normal state will further control to time-saving state B (rescue time-saving state) described later, which increases interest.

(Time reduction)
FIG. 11-4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the number of time-saving times for each transition trigger. As shown in FIG. 11-4, in this example, if a jackpot A occurs and the game ball does not enter the probability variable area, (1) the time-saving control is performed 110 times, and (2) the low probability control is performed 110 times, and the game enters the probability variable area (in this example, the game enters the time-saving state A (in this example, the time-saving state B is controlled to a battle rush (BATTLE RUSH) with 110 times of time-saving). Also, if either a jackpot B or a jackpot C occurs and the game ball enters the probability variable area, (1) the time-saving control is performed 110 times, and (2) the probability variable control is performed 110 times (in this example, the time-saving state C is controlled to a battle rush (BATTLE RUSH) with 110 times of time-saving). In addition, when 900 variable displays are performed in a low probability state without being controlled to a jackpot, (1) time-saving control is performed 1100 times, and (2) low probability control is performed 1100 times, and the game is controlled to a time-saving state B (in this example, a time-saving state B of 1100 times (Yu-1100 Battle Rush (Yu-1100 Battle Rush))). However, even if 900 fluctuations are performed again in a low probability state without being controlled to a jackpot after the end of the time-saving state B, the game is not controlled to the time-saving state B again based on this.

In addition, when a losing symbol with time reduction is stopped and displayed in the normal state, (1) the time reduction control is performed 1100 times, and (2) the low probability control is performed 1100 times, so that the time reduction state B (in this example, the play state with 1100 time reductions and 1100 battle rushes) may be controlled. In this case, even if a losing symbol with time reduction is stopped and displayed in the high base state (probability change state, time reduction state), the transition control of the game state is not performed (it is not controlled to the time reduction state with 1100 time reductions). This is to avoid reducing the degree of relief for the player. For example, if a losing symbol with time reduction is stopped and displayed when the game is controlled in the probability change state where a jackpot is likely to occur, the game state is re-controlled to the time reduction state with 1100 time reductions, which is not preferable because it would be controlled from an advantageous state to an unfavorable state for the player. Therefore, the game can be configured to be controlled to a time-saving state of 1,100 times only if the game state controlled when the time-saving losing symbol is stopped and displayed is a normal state.

The rescue time-saving achievement rate is the percentage of control to the time-saving state via rescue time-saving. The time-saving state via rescue time-saving is controlled by performing variable display n times (900 times in this example) without being controlled to the jackpot game state, so the rescue time-saving achievement rate K can be calculated as follows.

K={(1-ML)^n}×100
(K = rescue time reduction achievement rate, ML = jackpot probability, n = variable display number)

Specifically, for example, if the jackpot probability ML in this embodiment is approximately 1/319, the rescue time reduction achievement rate K will be 5.9%. In addition, in the case of a gaming machine that allows the setting value to be set, if the rescue time reduction achievement rate is set to be higher as the jackpot probability is set to a lower value, the player can be rescued even if the jackpot probability is set to a low value.

(Fluctuation pattern)
11-5 to 11-8 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the fluctuation pattern determination table in this embodiment.

Figure 11-5 shows (A) a specific example of a fluctuation pattern determination table for a miss when the number of reserved memories in the normal state is 0 to 2, (B) a specific example of a fluctuation pattern determination table for a miss when the number of reserved memories is 3, and (C) a specific example of a fluctuation pattern determination table for a jackpot when the number of reserved memories is 0 to 3.

As shown in Figure 11-5 (A), in the fluctuation pattern determination table for misses when the number of reserved memories is 0 to 2, 97 judgment values are assigned to non-reach B, 2 judgment values are assigned to SP reach A, and 1 judgment value is assigned to SP reach B. Also, as shown in Figure 11-5 (B), in the fluctuation pattern determination table for misses when the number of reserved memories is 3, 97 judgment values are assigned to shortened non-reach B, 2 judgment values are assigned to SP reach A, and 1 judgment value is assigned to SP reach B.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 11-5 (C), in the fluctuation pattern judgment table for jackpots when the number of reserved memories is 0 to 3, 10 judgment values are assigned to SP non-via B, 40 judgment values are assigned to SP reach A, and 50 judgment values are assigned to SP reach B.

In addition, FIG. 11-6 shows (A) a specific example of a fluctuation pattern determination table for a miss when the number of reserved memories in the special bonus state is 0, (B) a specific example of a fluctuation pattern determination table for a miss when the number of reserved memories is 1 to 3, and (C) a specific example of a fluctuation pattern determination table for a jackpot when the number of reserved memories is 0 to 3.

As shown in Figure 11-6 (A), in the fluctuation pattern judgment table for misses when the number of reserved memories is 0, 95 judgment values are assigned to non-reach A, 2 judgment values are assigned to SP reach C, and 3 judgment values are assigned to SP reach D. Also, as shown in Figure 11-6 (B), in the fluctuation pattern judgment table for misses when the number of reserved memories is 1 to 3, 85 judgment values are assigned to shortened non-reach A, 10 judgment values are assigned to non-reach A, 2 judgment values are assigned to SP reach C, and 3 judgment values are assigned to SP reach D.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 11-6 (C), in the fluctuation pattern judgment table for a jackpot when the number of reserved memories is 0, 5 judgment values are assigned to SP non-via A, 80 judgment values are assigned to SP reach C, and 15 judgment values are assigned to SP reach D.

In addition, FIG. 11-7 shows (A) a specific example of a fluctuation pattern determination table for a miss when the number of reserved memories in time-saving state A is 0, (B) a specific example of a fluctuation pattern determination table for a miss when the number of reserved memories is 1 to 3, and (C) a specific example of a fluctuation pattern determination table for a jackpot when the number of reserved memories is 0 to 3.

As shown in Figure 11-7 (A), in the fluctuation pattern determination table for misses when the number of reserved memories is 0, 95 judgment values are assigned to non-reach A, and 5 judgment values are assigned to SP reach E. Also, as shown in Figure 11-7 (B), in the fluctuation pattern determination table for misses when the number of reserved memories is 1 to 3, 90 judgment values are assigned to shortened non-reach A, 5 judgment values are assigned to non-reach A, and 5 judgment values are assigned to SP reach E.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 11-7 (C), in the fluctuation pattern determination table for jackpots when the number of reserved memories is 0 to 3, 5 determination values are assigned to SP non-via A, and 95 determination values are assigned to SP reach E.

In addition, Figure 11-8 shows (A) a specific example of a fluctuation pattern determination table for a miss when the number of reserved memories is 0 in time-saving state B (rescue time-saving state), (B) a specific example of a fluctuation pattern determination table for a miss when the number of reserved memories is 1 to 3, and (C) a specific example of a fluctuation pattern determination table for a jackpot when the number of reserved memories is 0 to 3.

As shown in Figure 11-8 (A), in the fluctuation pattern determination table for misses when the number of reserved memories is 0, 97 determination values are assigned to non-reach A, and 3 determination values are assigned to SP reach D. Also, as shown in Figure 11-8 (B), in the fluctuation pattern determination table for misses when the number of reserved memories is 1 to 3, 97 determination values are assigned to super-shortened non-reach, and 3 determination values are assigned to SP reach D.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 11-8 (C), in the fluctuation pattern determination table for a jackpot when the number of reserved memories is 0 to 3, 100 determination values are assigned to SP Reach D.

As shown in Figures 11-6 (A) and (B), in the high probability state, when the number of reserved memories is 0, the average variable display time of the variable pattern for a loss that can be determined is approximately 8.2 seconds {((7 s x 95) + (40 s x 2) + (25 s x 3)) ÷ 100 = 8.2}, and when the number of reserved memories is 1 to 3, the average variable display time of the variable pattern for a loss that can be determined is approximately 4.8 seconds {((3 s x 85) + (7 s x 10) + (40 s x 2) + (25 s x 3)) ÷ 100 = 4.8}.

Assuming that the first variable display when the probability of a special state begins has a reserved memory number of 0, and that the 2nd to 110th variable display has a reserved memory number of 1 to 3, the average variable display time for a losing variable pattern that can be determined in the probability of a special state is approximately 4.83 seconds {(8.2 + (4.8 x 109)) ÷ 110 = 4.83}.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-6(C), the average time of the variable display time of the variable pattern for a jackpot that can be determined in the high probability state when the number of reserved memories is 0 to 3 is approximately 51.1 seconds {((22 s x 5) + (55 s x 80) + (40 s x 15)) ÷ 100 = 51.1}, so the average time of the variable display time of the variable pattern for a jackpot that can be determined in the high probability state is approximately 51.1 seconds.

As shown in Figures 11-7 (A) and (B), in time-saving state A, when the number of reserved memories is 0, the average variable display time of the variable pattern for a miss that can be determined is approximately 9.15 seconds {((7 s x 95) + (50 s x 5)) ÷ 100 = 9.15}, and when the number of reserved memories is 1 to 3, the average variable display time of the variable pattern for a miss that can be determined is approximately 5.55 seconds {((3 s x 90) + (7 s x 5) + (50 s x 5)) ÷ 100 = 5.55}.

Assuming that when time-saving state A starts, the first variable display has a pending memory count of 0, and the 2nd to 110th variable displays have a pending memory count of 1 to 3, the average variable display time of the variable display pattern for a miss that can be determined in time-saving state A is approximately 5.58 seconds {(9.15 + (5.55 x 109)) ÷ 110 = 5.58}.

Also, as shown in Figure 11-7 (C), the average variable display time of the variable pattern for a jackpot that can be determined when the number of reserved memories is 0 to 3 in time-saving state A is approximately 62.8 seconds {((22 s x 5) + (55 s x 95)) ÷ 100 = 62.85}.

As shown in Figures 11-8 (A) and (B), in time-saving state B, when the number of reserved memories is 0, the average variable display time of the variable pattern for a miss that can be determined is approximately 7.54 seconds {((7 s x 97) + (25 s x 3)) ÷ 100 = 7.54}, and when the number of reserved memories is 1 to 3, the average variable display time of the variable pattern for a miss that can be determined is approximately 2.205 seconds {((1.5 s x 97) + (25 s x 3)) ÷ 100 = 2.205}.

Assuming that when time-saving state B starts, the first variable display has a pending memory count of 0, and the 2nd to 1100th variable display has a pending memory count of 1 to 3, the average variable display time of the variable display pattern for a miss that can be determined in time-saving state B is approximately 2.2 seconds {(7.54 + (2.205 x 1099)) ÷ 1100 = 2.20985}.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-8 (C), the average time of the variable display time of the variable pattern for a jackpot that can be determined in time-saving state B when the number of reserved memories is 0 to 3 is approximately 40 seconds, so the average time of the variable display time of the variable pattern for a jackpot that can be determined in time-saving state B is approximately 40 seconds.

In this way, when the number of reserved memories is 0, the number of possible variation patterns for a miss is three for the special state, two for the time-saving state A, and two for the time-saving state B. When the number of reserved memories is 1 to 3, the number of possible variation patterns for a miss is four for the special state, three for the time-saving state A, and two for the time-saving state B.

The average variable display time of the determinable losing variation pattern is 4.83 seconds in the guaranteed bonus state, 5.58 seconds in time-saving state A, and 2.2 seconds in time-saving state B.

In addition, when the number of reserved memories is between 0 and 3, the number of jackpot variation patterns that can be determined is three for the special state, two for the time-saving state A, and one for the time-saving state B.

The average variable display time of the determinable jackpot fluctuation pattern is 51.1 seconds in the guaranteed bonus state, 62.8 seconds in time-saving state A, and 40 seconds in time-saving state B.

In other words, the number of types of variable patterns for misses that can be determined decreases in the order of high probability state, time-saving state A, and time-saving state B (high probability state > time-saving state A > time-saving state B), and the average time of the variable display time of the variable patterns for misses that can be determined decreases in the order of high probability state, time-saving state A, and time-saving state B (high probability state > time-saving state A > time-saving state B).

In addition, the types of variable patterns for big wins that can be determined decrease in the order of special probability state, time-saving state A, and time-saving state B (special probability state > time-saving state A > time-saving state B), and the average time of the variable display time of the variable patterns for big wins that can be determined decreases in the order of special probability state, time-saving state A, and time-saving state B (special probability state > time-saving state A > time-saving state B). In this way, the time-saving state B has fewer types of variable patterns and a shorter variable display period than the special probability state and time-saving state A. In other words, a monotonous and efficient variable display is performed.

In addition, the number of types of fluctuation patterns for misses and types of fluctuation patterns for big wins that can be determined is greater in the special state than in the time-saving state A, but the number of types of fluctuation patterns for big wins may be greater in the time-saving state A than in the special state, or may be the same in the special state and the time-saving state A.

The various fluctuation pattern determination tables shown in Figures 11-5 to 11-8 are used in common for the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In particular, in time-saving state B, the fluctuation pattern determination table shown in Figure 11-8 is used in common for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, so that even if the first start winning occurs in time-saving state B, the number of possible fluctuation pattern types is smaller than in the probability bonus state or time-saving state A, and the average variable display time is shorter, resulting in a monotonous and efficient variable display.

In addition, different variation pattern determination tables may be used for the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

When a V-winning occurs during a jackpot game state due to a "jackpot A", the game is controlled to a probability variable state in which probability variable control and time-saving control are executed after the end of the jackpot game state, as in the case of "jackpot B" and "jackpot C", so the fluctuation pattern is determined using the fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 11-6. When a V-winning does not occur during a jackpot game state due to a "jackpot B" or "jackpot C", the game is controlled to a time-saving state A in which only time-saving control is executed after the end of the jackpot game state, as in the case of "jackpot A", so the fluctuation pattern is determined using the fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 11-7. In other words, the fluctuation pattern determination table does not use a fluctuation pattern determination table according to the type of jackpot, but rather uses a fluctuation pattern determination table linked to the state after the end of the jackpot game state, since irregular states may occur during the jackpot game state.

In other words, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to a high probability state after the end of a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on the passage of a gaming ball through a specific area (e.g., a V winning hole, etc.) in the jackpot gaming state, if a V winning occurs in the jackpot gaming state where a V winning is possible, the machine is controlled to a high probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, while if a V winning does not occur in the jackpot gaming state where a V winning is possible, the machine is controlled to a first time-saving state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, and if a V winning does not occur in the jackpot gaming state where a V winning is difficult, the machine is controlled to a second time-saving state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, in which the first time-saving state and the second time-saving state are a common time-saving state, and it is preferable that the variable display period of 1 in the first time-saving state and the second time-saving state is shorter than the variable display period of 1 in the time-saving state B of this embodiment.

(Fluctuation pattern without reach)
In this embodiment, the variation pattern without a reach ("shortened non-reach A, shortened non-reach B", "ultra shortened non-reach", "non-reach A, non-reach B", "non-SP A, non-SP B") is a variation pattern in which a combination of decorative symbols indicating that a reach is not established after the variable display is started and the variable display result is a "miss" or "jackpot" is stopped and displayed. "Shortened non-reach A, shortened non-reach B", "ultra shortened non-reach", "non-reach A, non-reach B", and "non-SP A, non-SP B" are collectively referred to simply as "non-reach" or "non-reach variation pattern". Incidentally, "non-SP A, non-SP B" is a non-reach variation pattern for a jackpot that is a jackpot without the establishment of a reach or SP reach.

In this embodiment, among the fluctuation patterns not involving a reach, when it is determined to be a "non-reach A" fluctuation pattern, the variable display period is 7000 ms, when it is determined to be a "non-SP via A" fluctuation pattern, the variable display period is 7000 + 15000 ms, when it is determined to be a "non-reach B" fluctuation pattern, the variable display period is 12000 ms, when it is determined to be a "non-SP via B" fluctuation pattern, the variable display period is 12000 + 15000 ms, when it is determined to be a "shortened non-reach A" fluctuation pattern, the variable display period is 3000 ms, when it is determined to be a "shortened non-reach B" fluctuation pattern, the variable display period is 5000 ms, and when it is determined to be an "ultra-shortened non-reach" fluctuation pattern, the variable display period is 1500 ms. Of these, the "super-shortened non-reach" variation pattern is a variation pattern that can only be determined in time-shortened state B, and has a shorter variable display period than any of the variation patterns determined when the game is controlled in other game states in which time-shortened control is executed (time-shortened state A, special probability state).

(Fluctuating pattern with super reach)
In this embodiment, in the variation pattern with the super reach ("SP reach A", "SP reach B", "SP reach C", "SP reach D", "SP reach E"), after the reach state is established, as the SP reach performance, a bowling performance (SP reach A) in which the ally character and the enemy character bowl and notify whether or not the ally character has won the jackpot, and a battle performance (SP reach B to E) in which the ally character and the enemy character battle and notify whether or not the ally character has won the jackpot are executed, and the final display result is determined and stopped after the bowling performance or the battle performance ends. Here, if the final display result is a "miss", a performance (defeat performance) in which the ally character is defeated by the enemy character is executed. On the other hand, if the final display result is a "jackpot", a performance (victory performance) in which the ally character wins against the enemy character is executed, or a performance (defeat performance) in which the ally character is defeated by the enemy character is executed, and then a performance (revival performance) in which the ally character revives and wins against the enemy character is executed.

A "variation pattern without a reach" is a variation pattern in which the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern does not become a specified reach state and a variable display result is displayed. This includes a variation pattern in which even if there is a reach tease such as a "reach notice" described below, the variable display result is displayed without ultimately becoming a reach state. Also, a "variation pattern with a super reach" is a variation pattern in which, after the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a specified reach state, the reach performance develops and an SP reach performance is executed, and then the display result is displayed.

The Super Reach jackpot variation pattern (SP Reach A to E) also includes a variable display part in which a variable display of decorative symbols is executed, and a post-show performance part in which the number of balls expected to be awarded in the jackpot game state is notified in a specific manner after the victory and revival performances of the variable display part have ended.

The variable display period of the variable display part is different for each type of SP reach A to E: 45,000 ms for SP reach A, 80,000 ms for SP reach B, 40,000 ms for SP reach C, 25,000 ms for SP reach D, and 50,000 ms for SP reach E. On the other hand, the execution period of the post-performance part is the same for SP reaches A to E: 15,000 ms. In this embodiment, the post-performance part is assigned a predetermined period of time (for example, 15,000 ms) in the variable display period, but the predetermined period may be different depending on the type of SP reach. In addition, a fanfare period during a jackpot game state may be assigned to the post-performance part.

In this embodiment, all fluctuation patterns involving a reach are super reach fluctuation patterns, and an example is given of a form in which a normal reach fluctuation pattern is not set, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a normal reach fluctuation pattern may also be set.

(Performance control command)
FIG. 11-9(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the performance control command in this embodiment. The performance control command is, for example, a two-byte configuration, with the first byte indicating MODE (classification of command) and the second byte indicating EXT (type of command). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command form shown in FIG. 11-9(A) is only an example, and other command forms may be used. Also, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 11-9(A), command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A. Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. Command 81XXH is a variation pattern designation command that specifies the variation pattern (variation time) of the decorative symbols etc. that are variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that is set according to the instructions by the performance control command. In addition, in the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the specified variation pattern etc.

Command 8C00H is a variable display result specification command, which is a presentation control command that specifies a variable display result such as a special pattern or a decorative pattern. In the variable display result specification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-9 (B), different EXT data is set depending on the determination result (predetermined result) of whether the variable display result is a "miss" or a "jackpot" ("miss with time reduction"), and the determination result (jackpot type determination result) of which of several types of jackpot type should be used if the variable display result is a "jackpot."

For example, as shown in FIG. 11-9(B), command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command in which the variable display result is "miss". Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot A". Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot B". Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot C".

Command 8FXXH is a pattern confirmation command that stops (confirms) the variable display of decorative patterns in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5, and specifies the pattern confirmation period until the next variable display begins.

For example, as shown in FIG. 11-9 (C), command 8F00H is a pattern determination command A that ends the variation of the special pattern and sets the pattern determination period to 0.5 seconds. Command 8F01H is a pattern determination command B that ends the variation of the special pattern and sets the pattern determination period to 20 seconds.

In this embodiment, (i) when the rescue time reduction is reached after the RAM clear process is executed, and (ii) when the rescue time reduction is reached after 900 variable displays after a jackpot, a pattern determination command with different EXT data set is transmitted in the rescue time reduction reaching variation. Specifically, (i) when the rescue time reduction is reached after the RAM clear process is executed, a pattern determination A command is transmitted in which the pattern determination period is 0.5 seconds in the rescue time reduction reaching variation. Also, (ii) when the rescue time reduction is reached after 900 variable displays after a jackpot, a pattern determination B command is transmitted in which the pattern determination period is 20 seconds in the rescue time reduction reaching variation.

Command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, for example, different EXT data is set depending on the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a specific example, command 9500H is a first game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control is not performed (low base state, normal state), and command 9501H is a second game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control is performed (high base state, time-saving state).

Command E1XXH is a remaining time-saving count notification command that notifies the number of remaining time-saving control times in the time-saving state excluding rescue time-saving (time-saving state A). Command E2XXH is a remaining chance-change count notification command that notifies the number of remaining chance-change control times in the chance-change state.

Command F100H is a right-hit LED on notification command that notifies the right-hit LED069SG031 to light up. Command F101H is a right-hit LED off notification command that notifies the right-hit LED069SG031 to light up.

Command 91XXH is a command to specify the number of times rescue time-saving is performed upon recovery, and is a performance control command that converts the value of the rescue time-saving counter to a hexadecimal number and specifies it when the power is restored. With the command to specify the number of times rescue time-saving is performed upon recovery, different EXT data is set according to each digit (first, second, third, fourth digit) of the value (four-digit value) of the rescue time-saving counter when the power is restored, as shown in FIG. 11-9 (D), for example.

For example, as shown in FIG. 11-9 (D), commands 9100H to 910FH are recovery time reduction number specification 1 commands that specify the first digit of the value of the recovery time reduction number. Commands 9110H to 911FH are recovery time reduction number specification 2 commands that specify the second digit of the value of the recovery time reduction number. Commands 9130H to 913FH are recovery time reduction number specification 3 commands that specify the third digit of the value of the recovery time reduction number. Commands 9140H to 914FH are recovery time reduction number specification 4 commands that specify the fourth digit of the value of the recovery time reduction number.

Command 94XXH is a rescue time reduction count designation command, which is a presentation control command that designates the remaining number of variable display times (126 times or less) until rescue time reduction occurs. With the rescue time reduction count designation command, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-9 (E), different EXT data is set according to the remaining number of variable display times (126 times or less) until rescue time reduction occurs.

For example, as shown in FIG. 11-9 (E), command 9400H is a rescue time reduction count A designation command, which specifies that the rescue time reduction has been reached. Command 9401H is a rescue time reduction count B designation command, which specifies that 1 to 125 times remain until the rescue time reduction is reached. Command 947EH is a rescue time reduction count C designation command, which specifies that 126 times remain until the rescue time reduction is reached. Command 947FH is a rescue time reduction count D designation command, which specifies that 127 or more times remain until the rescue time reduction is reached.

Command 96XXH is a rescue time reduction number 2 designation command, which is a performance control command that designates the remaining number of variable displays (in units of 100) until the rescue time reduction occurs. In the rescue time reduction number 2 designation command, for example, a value corresponding to the remaining number of variable displays (in units of 100) until the rescue time reduction occurs is set in the EXT data of the rescue time reduction number 2 designation command. For example, if the remaining number of variable displays until the rescue time reduction occurs is 100, command 9601H is sent as the rescue time reduction number 2 designation command, and if the remaining number of variable displays is 700, command 9607H is sent as the rescue time reduction number 1 designation command. Command 9F00(H) is a customer waiting demonstration display designation command that designates a customer waiting demonstration.

(Game control main processing)
11-10 is a flowchart showing the game control main process in this embodiment. In this example, the processes in steps S1 to S7, S8 to S9, and S10 to S12 are the same as those shown in FIG.

In this example, when a performance control command instructing recovery from a power outage is sent in step S7, the CPU 103 checks the value of a rescue time reduction counter for counting the number of variable displays remaining until the rescue time reduction occurs, sets the current rescue time reduction counter value converted to a hexadecimal number, and controls the transmission of a rescue time reduction number designation command upon recovery to the performance control CPU 120 (step 069SGS0013).

Next, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the current value of the rescue time reduction counter and controls to send a rescue time reduction number designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 069SGS0014). For example, if the current value of the rescue time reduction counter is between 1 and 125 times, the CPU 103 controls to send command 9401H as the rescue time reduction number designation command. Therefore, in this example, if the RAM clear process is not performed when the gaming machine is turned on and the recovery process is performed, the rescue time reduction number designation command is sent and the remaining number of variable display times until the current rescue time reduction is notified.

In this example, when power is restored after a power outage, a command to specify the number of times to shorten the time for recovery and a command to specify the number of times to shorten the time for recovery are sent separately from the command at the time of recovery, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the EXT data of the command at the time of recovery (e.g., a command to specify power on) sent in step S7 may be configured to be set to a value corresponding to the number of times remaining until the time for recovery is shortened, and then sent.

In addition, when a RAM clear is requested in step S3, when there is no backup data in step S4, or when an abnormality is detected in the backup RAM in step S5, a clear process is performed on the area including the area of the rescue time reduction counter in the initialization process in step S8.

Also, when the CPU 103 transmits a presentation control command instructing initialization in step S9, it sets the rescue time reduction counter to "900" (step 069SGS0015). Therefore, in this example, if the RAM clear process is executed when the gaming machine is powered on, the rescue time reduction counter is set to "900". That is, in this example, if the RAM clear process is executed when the gaming machine is powered on and a jackpot is not generated even after 900 variable displays are executed, rescue time reduction is performed and the time reduction state B is controlled. Note that, in this example, since the presentation control command instructing initialization transmitted in step S9 corresponds to the initial value ("900") set in the rescue time reduction counter, the CPU 103 can also specify the initial value to be set in the rescue time reduction counter based on the transmission of the presentation control command instructing initialization.

Next, the CPU 103 checks the value of the rescue time reduction counter (which is "900" in this example), converts the current value of the rescue time reduction counter into a hexadecimal number, sets the value, and transmits a recovery time reduction count designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 069SGS0016).

In this way, the rescue time reduction counter is set before the timer interrupt process, which is the game progress process, is executed, so that the variable display does not start before the rescue time reduction counter is set, and the number of times until the rescue time reduction can be reliably managed.

In this example, the rescue time reduction counter is initially set to "900" when the RAM clear process is executed when the gaming machine is powered on, but this is not the only option, and the rescue time reduction counter may not be initially set when the RAM clear process is executed. If configured in this way, gameplay can be started from the continuation of the value of the rescue time reduction counter from the previous day, reducing the amount of investment required to reach the rescue time reduction, and the configuration can be made so as not to be disadvantageous to the player.

In addition, when configured as described above, the system may be configured so that the initial setting of the rescue time reduction counter is not performed only when the clear switch is detected to be on (step S3; Yes) and the RAM clear process is performed, and the initial setting of the rescue time reduction counter is performed when a RAM abnormality is detected (steps S4, S5; No) and the RAM clear process is performed.

(Time-saving flag, special flag)
In this embodiment, when any of the conditions for controlling to the time-saving state is satisfied, the time-saving flag can be set. The time-saving flag includes a time-saving flag A and a time-saving flag B. In the following description, erasing (or clearing) the flag may be described as resetting the flag.

The time-saving flag A is set when the game is controlled to the time-saving state A via the jackpot A. This time-saving flag A is set when the jackpot game state of the jackpot A ends, and is cleared when the time-saving state A ends (when a jackpot occurs during the time-saving state A, or when the 110 times of time-saving control end and the game is controlled to the normal state).

The time-saving flag B is set when the game is in the time-saving state B controlled via the rescue time-saving function. This time-saving flag B is set when 900 variable displays that do not result in a jackpot pattern have been executed since the RAM was cleared, or when 900 variable displays that do not result in a jackpot pattern have been executed in a low probability state after the jackpot game state ends, and is cleared when the time-saving state B ends (when a jackpot occurs during the time-saving state B, when the time-saving control ends after 1100 times and the game is controlled to the normal state, etc.).

The high probability flag is set when the game is controlled to the high probability state. In this embodiment, if a V is won in the first round of a jackpot game, the game state is controlled to the high probability state when the jackpot game ends, and the high probability flag is set accordingly. This high probability flag is erased when the high probability state ends (when a jackpot occurs during the high probability state, when the 110th high probability control is executed and the game is controlled to the normal state, etc.). For example, the high probability flag is erased when YES is determined in step 069SGS69A in FIG. 11-12 described later, based on the fact that it is the 110th time since the variable display has been controlled to the high probability state.

(Special pattern normal processing)
11-11 and 11-12 are flow charts showing the normal special symbol processing (step S110) in the special symbol processing. In the normal special symbol processing, the CPU 103 checks the value of the total reserved memory number (step 069SGS51). Specifically, the count value of the total reserved memory number counter for counting the total number of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is checked. If the total reserved memory number is not 0, the CPU 103 checks whether the second reserved memory number is 0 or not (step 069SGS52). Specifically, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the second reserved memory number counter for counting the second reserved memory number is 0 or not. If the second reserved memory number is not 0, the CPU 103 sets data indicating "second" to the special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether the special symbol processing is being performed for the first special symbol or the second special symbol) (step 069SGS53). If the second reserved memory count is 0 (i.e., if only the first reserved memory count is accumulated), the CPU 103 sets data indicating "first" to the special pattern pointer (step 069SGS54).

In this embodiment, the processing of steps 069SGS52 to S54 is executed, so that the variable display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special symbol. In other words, the second start condition for starting the variable display of the second special symbol is controlled to be satisfied with priority over the first start condition for starting the variable display of the first special symbol.

In addition, the present invention is not limited to the embodiment shown in this example, and may be configured to execute the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol in the order in which the game balls enter the first start winning hole and the second start winning hole, for example.

Next, the CPU 103 reads out each random number stored in the storage area in the RAM 102 corresponding to the reserved memory number=1 indicated by the special symbol pointer, and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102 (step 069SGS55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 reads out each random number stored in the storage area in the first reserved memory number buffer corresponding to the first reserved memory number=1, and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads out each random number stored in the storage area in the second reserved memory number buffer corresponding to the second reserved memory number=1, and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts one from the count value of the reserved memory number counter indicated by the special pattern pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 069SGS56). Specifically, when the special pattern pointer indicates "first," the CPU 103 subtracts one from the count value of the first reserved memory number counter, and shifts the contents of each storage area in the first reserved memory number buffer. When the special pattern pointer indicates "second," the CPU 103 subtracts one from the count value of the second reserved memory number counter, and shifts the contents of each storage area in the second reserved memory number buffer.

In other words, when the special symbol pointer indicates "1st", the CPU 103 stores each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 102 in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n-1. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "2nd", the CPU 103 stores each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 102 in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n-1.

Therefore, the order in which the random numbers stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to each first pending memory number (or each second pending memory number) are extracted always matches the order of the first pending memory number (or second pending memory number) = 1, 2, 3, 4.

Then, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the combined pending memory count by 1. That is, the count value of the combined pending memory count counter is decremented by 1 (step 069SGS57). The CPU 103 stores the value of the combined pending memory count counter before the count value is decremented by 1 in a specified area of the RAM 102.

Next, the CPU 103 reads the random number for hit determination from the random number buffer area (step 069SGS61) and executes the jackpot determination module (step 069SGS62). In this case, the CPU 103 reads the random number for hit determination extracted in the start winning determination process (step S101) and stored in advance in the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer, and performs a jackpot determination. The jackpot determination module is a program that executes a process to compare a predetermined jackpot determination value with the random number for hit determination, and decides that a jackpot has occurred if they match. In other words, it is a program that executes a jackpot determination process. In this case, if the probability variable flag indicating that the jackpot state is in a probability variable state is not set (if the state is in a low probability state), the CPU 103 performs a jackpot determination using the jackpot determination value for low probability. Also, if the probability variable flag is set (if the state is in a high probability state), the CPU 103 performs a jackpot determination using the jackpot determination value for high probability. When the value of the random number for determining a win matches any of the jackpot determination values, the CPU 103 determines that the special symbol is a jackpot.

If it is determined that a jackpot has been reached (step 069SGS63; Yes), the CPU 103 sets a jackpot flag indicating that a jackpot has been reached (step 069SGS64). The CPU 103 then determines the type of jackpot to be the type (jackpot A, jackpot B, or jackpot C) that corresponds to the value that matches the value of the type-determining random number stored in the random number buffer area (step 069SGS65). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the type-determining random number extracted in the start winning determination process (step S101) and stored in the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer in advance, and determines the type of jackpot. Then, the process proceeds to step 069SGS70. On the other hand, if it is not determined that a jackpot has been reached (step 069SGS63; No), the process proceeds to step 069SGS66.

In this example, by performing normal special pattern processing, a rescue time-saving condition (reducing the value of the rescue time-saving counter to "0") can occur to control to rescue time-saving regardless of the variable display result (jackpot, miss). In this example, the time-saving state A is entered based on a jackpot A being reached, and the time-saving state B is entered based on the fact that no next jackpot has occurred even after a predetermined number of variable displays (900 in this example) have ended, but it is assumed that the variable display result of the variable display for which the rescue time-saving condition is met will be a jackpot. Therefore, when the variable display result of the variable display for which the rescue time-saving condition is met is a jackpot, the system is configured to control to time-saving state A based on a jackpot being reached.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the time-saving counter for counting the number of times the variable display is executed during the time-saving state is 0 (step 069SGS66). If the value of the time-saving counter is not 0, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the time-saving counter (step 069SGS67), and checks whether the value of the time-saving counter after the subtraction is 0 (step 069SGS68). If the value of the time-saving counter after the subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 sets a time-saving end flag indicating that the time-saving state will end when the variable display ends (step 069SGS69).

In this example, steps 069SGS66 to 069SGSS69 are executed to perform the subtraction process of the time-saving counter before the count process of the variable display number until the time-saving relief from step 069SGS71 onwards, but the processing is not limited to this. For example, the subtraction process of the time-saving counter may be executed after the count process of the variable display number until the time-saving relief from step 069SGS71 onwards. In this case, for example, in the case of a variable display that is a time-saving relief, if the subtraction process is executed after setting the time-saving counter to "110" (see step 069SGS172), the value of the time-saving counter will be subtracted by 1 extra, so in the case of a variable display that is a time-saving relief, the value of the time-saving counter may be added by 1 again after the subtraction process. Also, the time-saving counter may be set to "111", which is 1 more than the previous value, in advance.

Then, the CPU 103 checks whether the high probability flag is set (step 069SGS69A). If the high probability flag is set (i.e., the game is in a high probability state), the process proceeds to step 069SGS84. In this example, the process of step 069SGS69A is executed, and if the game is in a high probability state, the process of steps 069SGS70 and after (particularly the process of step 069SGSS71) is not executed. Therefore, even if a variable display is executed when the game state is in a high probability state (in this example, during Extreme Battle Rush), the value of the rescue time reduction counter is not decremented. If the high probability flag is not set (i.e., the game is not in a high probability state), the process proceeds to step 069SGSS70.

In this embodiment, when the high probability flag is set, the process proceeds to step 069SGSS70 and subsequent steps without being executed, and the process proceeds to step 069SGSS84. However, this is not limited to the above. When the high probability flag is set, the process proceeds to step 069SGSS70, but the process of step 069SGSS71 may not be executed. In other words, the value of the rescue time reduction counter is not updated, but a rescue time reduction number designation command or rescue time reduction number 2 designation command corresponding to the value of the unupdated rescue time reduction counter may be sent.

Next, the CPU 103 judges whether the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 0 (step 069SGS70; Yes). If the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 0 (step 069SGS70; Yes), the process proceeds to step 069SGS84. If the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 0 at this point, it means that the game has already been controlled to the time reduction state (time reduction state B) via the rescue time reduction (time that is controlled to the time reduction state B, or time that is controlled to the normal state after 1100 fluctuations in the time reduction state B), and a jackpot has not occurred, which is the trigger for setting the rescue time reduction counter to 900. If the value of the rescue time reduction counter is not 0 (step 069SGS70; No), the value of the rescue time reduction counter is decremented by 1 (step 069SGS71). Also, in this example, by executing the processing of step 069SGS71, the value of the rescue time reduction counter is updated uniformly regardless of whether the variable display of the first special pattern is executed or the variable display of the second special pattern is executed.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is 127 or more (step 069SGS72). If the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is 126 or less (step 069SGS72; No), the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the value of the rescue time reduction counter to the EXT data and controls the transmission of a rescue time reduction number designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 069SGS73). For example, if the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 1, the CPU 103 controls the transmission of command 9401H as the rescue time reduction number designation command. Also, if the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 126, the CPU 103 controls the transmission of command 947EH as the rescue time reduction number designation command.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is 0 (step 069SGS74). If the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is not 0, the process proceeds to step 069SGS84. If the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 sets a rescue time reduction determination flag indicating that the rescue time reduction has occurred and that control will be made to time reduction state B at the end of the fluctuation (step 069SGS75). Then, the process proceeds to step 069SGS84.

On the other hand, if the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is 127 or more (step 069SGS72; Yes), the CPU 103 sets 7FH uniformly as the EXT data and controls to send the command 957FH as the rescue time reduction number designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 069SGS76). Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the remaining variable display number until the rescue time reduction is a number in units of 100 (in this example, 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, or 800) (step 069SGS77). Note that whether the remaining variable display number until the rescue time reduction is a number in units of 100 can be determined by checking the value of the rescue time reduction counter. If the remaining variable display count until the rescue time reduction is in units of 100, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the value of the rescue time reduction counter in the EXT data and controls the transmission of a rescue time reduction count 2 designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 069SGS78). For example, if the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 100, the CPU 103 controls the transmission of command 9601H as the rescue time reduction count 2 designation command. Also, if the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 800, the CPU 103 controls the transmission of command 9608H as the rescue time reduction count 2 designation command. Then, the process proceeds to step 069SGS84.

In this example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) counts the number of variable displays remaining until the rescue time reduction and transmits a rescue time reduction number designation command or a rescue time reduction number 2 designation command, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the presentation control CPU 120 may be configured to count the number of variable displays remaining until the rescue time reduction and execute the teasing presentation or countdown presentation described below.

In addition, for example, if the rescue time reduction counter is set (set to "900") at the time of the rescue time reduction so that rescue time reductions can occur continuously, the rescue time reduction number designation command or rescue time reduction number 2 designation command may be sent only the first time the rescue time reduction occurs, and the rescue time reduction number designation command or rescue time reduction number 2 designation command may not be sent the second or subsequent time the rescue time reduction occurs.

Then, the CPU 103 determines the stopping pattern of the special pattern according to the result of the determination of the jackpot type (step 069SGS84). In this case, for example, if it is determined to be a jackpot A, the stopping pattern of the special pattern is determined to be "2", if it is determined to be a jackpot B, the stopping pattern of the special pattern is determined to be "3", if it is determined to be a jackpot C, the stopping pattern of the special pattern is determined to be "7", and if it is determined to be a miss, the stopping pattern of the special pattern is determined to be "-". The CPU 103 also stores the determined stopping pattern of the special pattern in a stopping pattern storage area provided in the RAM 102 (step 069SGS85).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the variable pattern setting process (step S111) (step 069SGS86).

(Special symbol stop processing)
11-13 and 11-14 are flow charts showing the special symbol stop process (step S113) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 first subtracts 1 from the value of the symbol determination period timer (step 069SGS131), and checks whether the value of the symbol determination period timer after subtraction is 0 (step 069SGS132).

If the value of the pattern determination period timer after subtraction is not 0 (i.e., the determined display period of the stopped pattern of the first special pattern or the second special pattern has not yet ended), the special pattern stop process ends. If the value of the pattern determination period timer after subtraction is 0 (i.e., the determined display period of the stopped pattern of the first special pattern or the second special pattern has ended), the CPU 103 checks whether the jackpot flag is set (step 069SGS133). If the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 clears the probability hit flag, time-saving flag A, time-saving flag B, rescue time-saving decision flag, and the time-saving count counter for counting the number of times the variable display is executed during the time-saving state (step 069SGS134).

Next, the CPU 103 sets the rescue time reduction counter to "900" (step 069SGS135). Therefore, in this example, the rescue time reduction counter is set to "900" in response to a jackpot, and if the next jackpot does not occur even after 900 variable displays are executed in the low probability state after the jackpot game ends, rescue time reduction will occur and control will be performed to time reduction state B.

In this example, by executing the processing of step 069SGS135, when a jackpot is hit, the rescue time reduction counter is set to "900" at the start of the fanfare period of the jackpot to initialize it, but this is not the only possible embodiment. For example, the rescue time reduction counter may be set to "900" during a round of jackpot play, or may be configured to be initially set to "900" at the start or end of the ending period of the jackpot play.

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to start lighting the right hit lamp 069SG132 (step 069SGS136). The CPU 103 also performs control to send a right hit LED lighting notification command to the performance control CPU 120 to notify the lighting of the right hit LED 069SG031 (step 069SGS137).

Next, the CPU 103 controls the transmission of a jackpot start command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 069SGS138). Next, the CPU 103 sets a timer for time before the large prize opening to measure the time before the large prize opening (fanfare time) until the first large prize opening 069SG007A and the second large prize opening 069SG007B are controlled to be open (step 069SGS139). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening pre-processing (step S144) (step 069SGS140).

If the jackpot flag is not set (step 069SGS133; No), the CPU 103 checks whether the rescue time-shortening determination flag is set (step 069SGS170). If the rescue time-shortening determination flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the rescue time-shortening determination flag (step 069SGS171), and if it is set, sets the time-shortening flag B and controls the game to the time-shortening state (step 069SGS171A). Then, the time-shortening count counter is set to "1100" (step 069SGS172).

The CPU 103 also controls the transmission of a time-saving state B designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 069SGS174). The CPU 103 also controls the start of illumination of the right hit lamp 069SG132 (step 069SGS174A), and controls the transmission of a right hit LED illumination notification command to the performance control CPU 120 notifying illumination of the right hit LED 069SG031 (step 069SGS174B). Then, the process proceeds to step 069SGS175.

In this example, when the rescue time reduction occurs, the game is simply controlled to the time reduction state B, and the rescue time reduction counter is not set, but this is not the only possible embodiment. For example, the game may be configured to control to the time reduction state B when the rescue time reduction occurs, and also to set the rescue time reduction counter (set to "900"). With this configuration, it becomes possible to continuously generate rescue time reductions, and once a rescue time reduction occurs, the game can be configured to continue the time reduction state until a jackpot occurs.

In addition, in this example, the rescue time reduction counter is set to "900", and the value of the rescue time reduction counter is subtracted by one each time a variable display is executed, and a rescue time reduction occurs when the value of the rescue time reduction counter becomes "0", but this is not limited to the above. For example, the rescue time reduction counter may be set to "0", and the value of the rescue time reduction counter may be added by one each time a variable display is executed, and a rescue time reduction occurs when the value of the rescue time reduction counter becomes "900".

In addition, in this example, the processing of step 069SGS172 is executed to set the number of time-saving times to 1100, which is greater than the number of variable display times (900) until a rescue time-saving time is generated, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the time-saving time counter may be set to a value equal to or less than "900" in step 069SGS172.

In addition, in step 069SGS172, the time-saving counter may be configured to be able to set values corresponding to multiple types of time-saving times. For example, the time-saving counter may be configured to be set to "110" if a rescue time-saving is performed the first time, and to be set to "1100" if a rescue time-saving is performed the second time.

Also, for example, the number of time-saving times may be determined by performing a lottery process based on random numbers, and in step 069SGS172, a value corresponding to the number of time-saving times determined by the lottery process may be set in the time-saving times counter. In this case, for example, the number of time-saving times may be determined to be 110 times with a 10% probability, and 1100 times with a 90% probability. Also, when the number of time-saving times is determined by a lottery process, the number of time-saving times may be determined by using the type-determining random numbers used to determine the jackpot type and the time-saving time type, or the number of time-saving times may be determined by using a dedicated random number.

If the rescue time-saving determination flag is not set in step 069SGS170, the CPU 103 checks whether the time-saving end flag is set (step 069SGS141). If the time-saving end flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the time-saving end flag (step 069SGS142).

Next, the CPU 103 resets any of the time-saving flags that have been set (either time-saving flag A or B) and ends the time-saving state (step 069SGS145). Then, the CPU 103 performs control to end the illumination of the right-hit lamp 069SG132 (step 069SGS150). The CPU 103 also performs control to send a right-hit LED off notification command to the performance control CPU 120 to notify the right-hit LED 069SG031 that it has been turned off (step 069SGS151). The CPU 103 also performs control to send a normal state designation command (a type of game state designation command) to the performance control CPU 120 (step 069SGS152). Then, the process proceeds to step 069SGS175.

In this example, the process of steps 069SGS141 to S152 is executed to transition to the normal state at the end of the pattern determination period during the final time-saving fluctuation and to end the right-hit notification, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the system may be configured to transition to the normal state and end the right-hit notification at the start of the fluctuation or the start of the pattern determination period during the final time-saving fluctuation.

Also, if the time-saving end flag is not set in step 069SGS141 (step 069SGS141; No), the process proceeds to step 069SGS175.

In step 069SGS175, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the normal special pattern processing (step S110) (step 069SGS175).

(state transition)
Next, state transitions in this embodiment will be described below. Figures 11-15 are state transition diagrams for explaining state transitions in this embodiment.

As shown in Figure 11-15, in the normal state (low probability/low base state), if a jackpot B occurs and the game ball passes through the high probability region, the game is controlled to the high probability state, and if a jackpot A occurs, the game is controlled to the time-saving state A (time-saving state via jackpot (low probability/high base state)). Although not shown, even if a jackpot B occurs but the game ball does not pass through the high probability region, the game is also controlled to the time-saving state A (time-saving state via jackpot). Also, even if it is a miss, if the rescue time-saving state is activated ((P) (P-1) after the RAM clear process or (P-2) after the end of the high probability state, when the variable display count reaches 900 without the next jackpot occurring, or (Q) (Q-1) after the end of 110 variable displays in time-saving state A, when the variable display count reaches 790 without the next jackpot occurring), it will be controlled to time-saving state B (time-saving state via rescue time-saving state (low probability/high base state)).

Also, as shown in Figure 11-15, in the probability variable state (high probability/high base state), if either jackpot B or jackpot C occurs and the game ball passes through the probability variable area, the game is controlled to the probability variable state again. Although not shown, if either jackpot B or jackpot C occurs and the game ball does not pass through the probability variable area, the game is controlled to the time-saving state A (time-saving state via jackpot).

Also, as shown in FIG. 11-15, in time-saving state A (low probability/high base state), if either jackpot B or jackpot C occurs and the game ball passes through the probability variable area, the state is controlled to the probability variable state. Although not shown, if either jackpot B or jackpot C occurs and the game ball does not pass through the probability variable area, the state is controlled back to time-saving state A (time-saving state via jackpot). Also, in time-saving state A, if 110 variable displays end without a jackpot occurring, the state is controlled to the normal state.

Also, as shown in Figure 11-15, in time-saving state B (low probability/high base state), if either jackpot B or jackpot C occurs and the game ball passes through the probability variable area, the state is controlled to the probability variable state. Although not shown, if either jackpot B or jackpot C occurs and the game ball does not pass through the probability variable area, the state is controlled back to time-saving state A (time-saving state via jackpot). Also, in time-saving state B, if 1,100 variable displays end without a jackpot occurring, the state is controlled to the normal state. Furthermore, even if it is a miss, if the rescue time-saving state is activated ((P) (P-1) after the RAM clear process or (P-2) after the end of the special probability state, when the variable display count reaches 900 without the next jackpot occurring, or (Q) (Q-1) after the end of 110 variable displays in time-saving state A, when the variable display count reaches 790 without the next jackpot occurring), the game will be controlled to time-saving state B (time-saving state via rescue time-saving state).

In this example, if a jackpot occurs during time-saving state B and the game ball does not enter the special probability area, the game will always transition to time-saving state A, but this control mode is not limited to this. For example, the current remaining number of time-saving times may be compared with the number of time-saving times that would occur if the game ball did not enter the special probability area (110 times in this example), and if the current remaining number of time-saving times is greater, the game may be configured to continue in the current time-saving state B.

In this example, although it is possible to execute a variable display of the first special symbol during the time-saving state or the probability of a special bonus state, this would be disadvantageous to the player, so the state transition is explained without assuming that the variable display of the first special symbol will be executed during the time-saving state or the probability of a special bonus state.

(Explanation of Yu-Time)
Next, the characteristics of "Yu-Time", which is the time-saving state B (relief time-saving state) in this embodiment, will be explained based on Fig. 11-16 to Fig. 11-18. Fig. 11-16 shows an example of the case where "Yu-Time" is not installed, with (A1) and (A2), and shows an example of the case where "Yu-Time" is installed, with (B1) and (B2). Fig. 11-17 shows an example of deviation fluctuation in the normal state, with (A) to (D). Fig. 11-18 shows an explanatory diagram of Yu-Time in which the fluctuation efficiency is the same as in the normal state, with (E1) and (E2), and (F1) to (F4) showing the Yu-Time of this case in which the fluctuation efficiency is higher than in the normal state. Note that, for the convenience of explaining the characteristics of "Yu-Time", explanations will be given using explanatory images different from the performance images explained below in Fig. 11-16 to Fig. 11-18.

First, in the case of a pachinko game machine not equipped with the "Yu-Time" of this embodiment, for example, as shown in Fig. 11-16 (A1) (A2), even if the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times when the jackpot probability is about 1/300, which is about three times the jackpot probability denominator) without being controlled to a jackpot in the low probability state (for example, normal state (low probability/low base state)) after the jackpot ends, it will not be controlled to "Yu-Time", that is, the time-saving state. Since the player is already stuck at about three times the jackpot probability denominator at this point, the player continues playing without a jackpot for a long time and is making a lot of investment. However, this normal state (low probability/low base state) continues until a jackpot occurs, and further investment is required, which may significantly reduce the player's motivation to play.

On the other hand, in the case of a pachinko game machine equipped with the "Yu-Time" of this embodiment, as shown in Fig. 11-16 (B1) (B2), after the end of a jackpot, if the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (e.g., about 2.5 to 3 times the jackpot probability denominator) without being controlled to a jackpot in a low probability state (e.g., normal state (low probability/low base state)), the machine will enter "Yu-Time" and be controlled to time-saving state B for a specific number of variable displays (e.g., 1100 times, or up to about 3.8 times the jackpot probability denominator). At this point, the player is already stuck at about three times the jackpot probability, so he or she has been playing for a long time without a jackpot, and has invested a lot. However, by being controlled to "Yu-Time", that is, time-saving state B, additional investment is suppressed and the possibility of a jackpot occurring increases, so a decrease in motivation to play can be suppressed.

Also, as shown in Figures 11-17 (A) to (D), the player continues playing (is "addicted") without winning a jackpot during the period from the end of the jackpot until control enters "Yu-Time", and during that period various preview effects are executed, hyping the player up. In addition, when the variable display reaches 900 times, for example, when the variable display is executed the first number of times (e.g., 105 times) after the end of the jackpot (see FIG. 11-17(A)), when the variable display is executed the second number of times (e.g., 213 times) (see FIG. 11-17(B)), when the variable display is executed the third number of times (e.g., 506 times) (see FIG. 11-17(C)), when the variable display is executed the fourth number of times (e.g., 882 times) (see FIG. 11-17(D)), at least an SP reach or other effect with a high probability of a jackpot (e.g., the "super hot" SP reach effect) will be executed a certain number of times, and since these SP reach effects continue to fail, it is highly likely that the player will feel quite depressed.

As shown in Figure 11-18 (E1) (E2), even if the "Yu-Time" (time-saving state B) is finally controlled after 900 variable displays, if this time-saving state B is in a state with low variable efficiency such as the normal state (low probability/low base state), the number of wasted shots will increase, leading to further additional investment and prolonged play. Also, since the SP reach effects are all missed during the 900 variable displays, which is quite depressing, the desire to play will decrease if provocative effects occur frequently in "Yu-Time".

As shown in Fig. 11-18 (F1) to (F4), the "Yu-Time" (time-saving state B) of this embodiment is a time-saving state in which the variable efficiency is higher than the normal state (low probability/low base state), so that the player can continue playing while suppressing additional investment. In addition, the time-saving control executes the variable display a specific number of times (for example, 1100 times, which is a maximum of about 3.8 times the probability of a jackpot), so that the probability of being controlled to a jackpot during the period controlled in the time-saving state B is high (for example, about 97%), so that the player can play with peace of mind. For example, if the jackpot probability is 1/319.9, the probability of not winning a jackpot with one variable display is about 99% {(319.9-1)÷319.9=0.996874}, and the probability of not winning a jackpot within 1100 spins is about 3% (0.996874^1100=0.031937). Therefore, the probability of hitting the jackpot within 1,100 spins is approximately 97% (1-0.031937=0.968063).

In addition, in "Yu-Time", the variable display period of the selected variable pattern is short, so the variable efficiency is higher than in other time-saving states, and therefore there is a high possibility that the miss variable display will be efficiently consumed and a jackpot will be won in a short period of time, and a right-hit play will result in a jackpot in the second special game, so it is an advantageous state in which there is a high possibility that a jackpot advantageous to the player (for example, jackpot B or jackpot C) will be awarded. In addition, since it is difficult to execute the preview performance and SP reach performance described below, and there are few opportunities to be aroused by miss performance, it is possible to suitably suppress a decrease in motivation to play. In other words, unlike the game state for waiting for the next jackpot while enjoying the performance, such as the probability change state and time-saving state A, the "Yu-Time" of this embodiment is a game state in which efficiently consuming the miss variation and winning the next jackpot is prioritized over enjoying the performance. Details of the "Yu-Time" (time-saving state B) of this embodiment will be explained below.

(Battle Rush)
In this embodiment, when the time-saving state A is controlled via the big win A, the presentation mode is controlled to "Battle Rush". FIG. 11-19(A) is a diagram showing a presentation example in the image display device 5 when the presentation mode is controlled to "Battle Rush".

As shown in FIG. 11-19 (A1), when the game state is controlled to a low probability/high base state (time-saving state A) and the value of the time-saving count counter is 0 to 110, the second background image 069SG320 showing an evening cityscape is displayed as a background image for the decorative pattern, corresponding to the presentation mode being "Battle Rush", and a presentation mode display 069SG221 consisting of the characters "BATTLE RUSH" is displayed at the top of the screen of the image display device 5. Also, at the bottom left of the screen of the image display device 5, a time-saving remaining display 069SG201 (in this example, the characters "XX times remaining", XX = 0 to 110) is displayed in correspondence with the remaining variable display count controlled to the low probability/high base state, and a right-hit notification image 069SG400 and the characters "right hit" are displayed at the bottom right of the screen of the image display device 5.

At this time, active display 069SG003 is displayed in active display area 069SG013 in response to the execution of the variable display of the second special pattern, and four second reserved displays 069SG002 are displayed in second reserved display area 069SG012 in response to the value of the second reserved memory count being 4. In addition, a display area 5SL is provided in the upper left corner of the screen of image display device 5 for displaying the first reserved memory count (e.g., the number "0"), the second reserved memory count (e.g., the number "4"), and a small pattern (e.g., an arrow "↓↓↓") corresponding to the decorative pattern, and the small pattern is variably displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the decorative pattern.

The above-mentioned first reserved memory number, second reserved memory number, reserved display, small symbol, error display (not shown) indicating an error state that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1, time reduction remaining display 069SG201, right hit notification image 069SG400, etc. may be displayed in front of the performance images such as characters (upper layer) to prevent the performance images from overlapping and reducing the visibility of the first reserved memory number, second reserved memory number, small symbol, and error display, while the decorative symbols may be displayed behind the performance images (lower layer) to prevent the decorative symbols from overlapping and reducing the visibility of the performance images.

The small symbol is also called the fourth symbol. The fourth symbol is displayed variably by a certain operation in a manner that is always visible on a display device such as the image display device 5 as a symbol indicating that the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are variably displayed (see the small symbol displayed in the display area 5SL shown in FIG. 11-19 (A1)). By variably displaying the fourth symbol, it becomes possible to recognize whether or not the decorative symbol is currently being variably displayed even if it is difficult to recognize the decorative symbol, such as when a performance content including the variable display of the decorative symbol disappears from the screen for a moment, or when a performance is performed in which the movable body 32 covers all or part of the screen of the image display device 5. The performance control CPU operates the image display device 5 based on receiving the first variable display start command, thereby performing a variable display of the fourth symbol corresponding to the first special symbol. Also, the performance control CPU operates the image display device 5 based on receiving the second variable display start command, thereby performing a variable display of the fourth symbol corresponding to the second special symbol.

The pattern displayed on the fourth pattern display device provided at a location other than the image display device 5 (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7 at a specified location on the game board 2), such as the first special pattern LED069SG032 or the second special pattern LED069SG033, is also referred to as the fourth pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-19 (A2), when the game state is controlled to the low probability/low base state (normal state) after the 110th variable display is completed while the game state is controlled to the time-saving state A, the first background image 069SG310 showing a daytime cityscape is displayed as a background image for the decorative pattern, and the variable display count display 069SG202 (in this example, the characters "0 games") corresponding to the number of variable displays executed since the game state was controlled to the low probability/low base state is displayed in the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the performance mode display 069SG221 in the upper part of the screen of the image display device 5, the time-saving remaining display 069SG201 (in this example, the characters "XX games remaining", XX = 0 to 100) in the lower left corner of the screen of the image display device 5, and the right-hit notification image 069SG400 and the characters "right hit" in the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5 are erased.

When the game is controlled to a low probability/low base state (normal state), if the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 300 or less, a countdown effect will be executed, as described below, and a special number of times display 069SG203 (in this example, the text "Until Play/1100 BATTLE RUSH", the text "XXX times left", and a triangular object, XXX = 1 to 300) will be displayed in the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5.

(Yu-1100 Battle Rush [Yu-Time])
In this embodiment, when the time-saving state B via the rescue time-saving is controlled, the presentation mode is controlled to "Yu-1100 Battle Rush" (also called "Yu-Time"). Figure 11-19 (B) is a diagram showing an example of presentation in the image display device 5 when the presentation mode is controlled to "Yu-1100 Battle Rush".

As shown in FIG. 11-19 (B1), when the game state is controlled to a low probability/high base state (time-saving state B) and the value of the time-saving count counter is 0 to 1100, the third background image 069SG330 showing a nighttime cityscape is displayed as a background image for the decorative pattern in accordance with the presentation mode being "Yu-1100 Battle Rush," and a presentation mode display 069SG222 consisting of the characters "Yu-1100 Battle Rush" is displayed at the top of the screen of the image display device 5. Also, in the lower left corner of the screen of the image display device 5, a time-saving remaining display 069SG201 (in this example, the characters "XX times remaining," XX = 0 to 1100) is displayed in accordance with the remaining variable display count controlled to the low probability/high base state, and a right-hit notification image 069SG400 and the characters "right hit" are displayed at the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5. In addition, a display area 5SL is provided at the top left of the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying the first reserved memory number (e.g., the number "0"), the second reserved memory number (e.g., the number "4"), and a small pattern corresponding to the decorative pattern (e.g., an arrow "↓↓↓"), and the small pattern is displayed variably in synchronization with the variable display of the decorative pattern.

In addition, the display format (e.g., design, font, color, etc.) of the time-saving remaining display 069SG201 is the same for the special bonus state, time-saving state A, and time-saving state B, which allows costs to be reduced.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-19 (B2), after the 1100th variable display when the game state is controlled to time-saving state B ends, if the game state is controlled to a low probability/low base state, the first background image 069SG310 is displayed as a background image for the decorative pattern. At this time, the characters "PLAY/1100 BATTLE RUSH" at the top of the screen of the image display device 5, the time-saving remaining display 069SG201 at the bottom left of the screen of the image display device 5 (in this example, the characters "XX times remaining", XX = 0 to 1100), and the right-hit notification image 069SG400 and the characters "Right hit" at the bottom right of the screen of the image display device 5 are erased.

In this embodiment, even if 900 variable displays are executed without a jackpot occurring in the low probability state after 1100 variable displays are completed without a jackpot occurring in the time-saving state B, the time-saving state B will not be controlled. Therefore, after 110 variable displays are completed without a jackpot occurring in the time-saving state A or the probability state described below, the variable display count display 069SG202 is displayed in the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5, while after 1100 variable displays are completed without a jackpot occurring in the time-saving state B, the variable display count display 069SG202 is not displayed on the image display device 5. By doing this, it is possible to prevent the player from thinking that the time-saving state B will be controlled if 900 variable displays are executed without a jackpot occurring in the low probability state after 1100 variable displays are completed without a jackpot occurring in the time-saving state B.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-19 (B1), during the period controlled in time-saving state B, the active display 069SG003 is displayed in the active display area 069SG013, and the second hold display 069SG002 is displayed in the second hold display area 069SG012. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and during the period controlled in time-saving state B, the active display 069SG003 and the second hold display 069SG002 may not be displayed. Note that during time-saving state A or the probability bonus state, the active display 069SG003 and the second hold display 069SG002 may or may not be displayed.

In addition, when the game state is controlled to time-saving state A and then the 110th variable display is completed, if the game state is controlled to a low probability/low base state, it is possible to display text such as "BATL RUSH END" before controlling the game state to a low probability/low base state. On the other hand, when the game state is controlled to time-saving state B and then the 1100th variable display is completed, it is preferable not to display text such as "BATL RUSH END" as described above.

In addition, when the game state is controlled to time-saving state B, after the 1100th variable display is completed, if the game state is controlled to a low probability/low base state, the shutter effect (see FIG. 11-23 (B)) that is performed when transitioning to time-saving state B may be performed before controlling the game state to the low probability/low base state.

In addition, when the game state is controlled to time-saving state A, a countdown notification may be issued to indicate that there are 10 time-saving turns remaining when the 101st variable display begins, but when the game state is controlled to time-saving state B, no countdown notification may be issued even when the 1091st variable display begins. This prevents the player from being hyped up when time-saving state B (Yu-time) is about to end.

(Extreme Battle Rush)
In this embodiment, when the probability of a special state is reached via the jackpot B or the jackpot C, the presentation mode is controlled to "Extreme Battle Rush". FIG. 11-20 is a diagram showing a presentation example in the image display device 5 when the presentation mode is controlled to "Extreme Battle Rush".

As shown in FIG. 11-20(A), when the game state is controlled to a high probability/high base state (probability change state) and the value of the time-saving count counter is 11 to 110, the fourth background image 069SG340 showing a daytime wilderness landscape is displayed as a background image for the decorative pattern in accordance with the presentation mode being "Extreme Battle Rush", and a presentation mode display 069SG223 consisting of the characters "Extreme Battle Rush" is displayed at the top of the screen of the image display device 5. Also, a time-saving remaining display 069SG201 (in this example, the characters "XX times remaining", XX = 11 to 110) is displayed at the bottom left of the screen of the image display device 5 in accordance with the remaining variable display count controlled to the high probability/high base state, and a right-hit notification image 069SG400 and the characters "Right hit" are displayed at the bottom right of the screen of the image display device 5. In addition, a display area 5SL is provided at the top left of the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying the first reserved memory number (e.g., the number "0"), the second reserved memory number (e.g., the number "4"), and a small pattern corresponding to the decorative pattern (e.g., an arrow "↓↓↓"), and the small pattern is displayed variably in synchronization with the variable display of the decorative pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-20(B), when the game state is controlled to a high probability/high base state and the value of the time-saving count counter is 0 to 10, an emphasized time-saving remaining display 069SG201 (in this example, the characters "XX times remaining", XX = 0 to 10) is displayed in an enlarged form compared to the time-saving remaining display 069SG201 when the value of the time-saving count counter is 11 to 110, at the bottom left of the screen of the image display device 5. Note that the emphasized time-saving remaining display 069SG201 is not limited to an enlarged form of the time-saving remaining display 069SG201, and the display color of the time-saving remaining display 069SG201 may be changed, or an effect display may be added to the time-saving remaining display 069SG201. Also, a dedicated sound effect may be played from the speaker at the timing when the time-saving remaining display 069SG201 is switched from the time-saving remaining display 069SG201 to the emphasized time-saving remaining display 069SG201.

In addition, in time-saving state A and time-saving state B, the remaining time-saving display may be displayed in a manner similar to that of the special probability state. In addition, in time-saving state B, the highlighted time-saving remaining display may not be displayed to avoid causing stress to the player.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-20(C), when the game state is controlled to a high probability/high base state, when the 110th variable display in which the display result is "miss" is being executed, a result image 069SG500 is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5. The result image 069SG500 includes the characters "Extreme Battle Rush Ended" notifying that Extreme Battle Rush has ended, the characters "BONUS x x times" indicating the number of jackpots (x is the number of jackpots), and the characters "XXXX pt" indicating the total number of game balls that have been awarded (XXXX is the total number of game balls that have been awarded).

The number of jackpots included in this result image 069SG500 is the number of consecutive jackpots based on the variable display in a high probability state (the so-called consecutive jackpot count), and the total number of game balls awarded includes the number of prize balls awarded in the consecutive jackpots.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-20(D), when the game state is controlled to a low probability/low base state after 110 variable displays have been completed, the first background image 069SG310 is displayed as the background image for the decorative pattern, and the variable display count display 069SG202 (in this example, the characters "0 games") corresponding to the number of variable displays executed since the game state was controlled to a low probability/low base state is displayed in the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the performance mode display 069SG223 in the upper part of the screen of the image display device 5, the highlighted time reduction remaining display 069SG201 (in this example, the characters "XX games remaining", X = 0 to 10) in the lower left corner of the screen of the image display device 5, and the right hit notification image 069SG400 and the characters "right hit" in the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5 are erased.

When the game state is controlled to the normal state from the special state, time-saving state A, or time-saving state B, a left-hit notification effect may be executed to instruct the player to hit to the left based on the end of the time-saving control. The left-hit notification effect displays a left-hit notification image and the words "Hit to the left" or an arrow image in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and the sound "Please hit to the left" is played and output from speakers 8L and 8R.

In addition, after the 110th variable display has ended when controlled to time-saving state A as shown in FIG. 11-19 (A2), after the 1100th variable display has ended when controlled to time-saving state B as shown in FIG. 11-19 (B2), or after the 110th variable display has ended when controlled to the high probability state as shown in FIG. 11-20 (D), when control of the low probability/low base state (normal state) begins, the variable display count of the variable display count display 069SG202 is displayed as a common "0 times", making it difficult to grasp the state of the pachinko game machine 1 (such as the type of previous jackpot, and whether it was controlled to time-saving state A, time-saving state B, or high probability state), and increasing the expectation of being controlled to time-saving state B.

When control of the low probability/low base state (normal state) begins, the variable display count displayed by the variable display count display 069SG202 may be set to display the variable display count executed in each state, such as "110 times" when control of time-saving state A ends, "1100 times" when control of time-saving state B ends, and "110 times" when control of the high probability state ends. By doing this, it is possible to roughly check the state of the pachinko game machine 1 (the type of jackpot last time, and whether it was controlled to time-saving state A, time-saving state B, or high probability state), which makes it easier to predict the variable display count until it is controlled to time-saving state B, which can lead to increased motivation to play.

In addition, in time-saving state A and time-saving state B, a common song (e.g., song A) may be played as a fixed background music, and in the probability bonus state, one of a number of songs including song A (e.g., songs A to X) may be selectable, and the selected song may be played.

In addition, when music A is played during the time-saving state A and the probability bonus state, the game effect lamp 9, the movable body LED 208, etc. may be illuminated in a lighting pattern corresponding to the music A (such as a lighting pattern that matches the rhyme of the music).

In addition, when song A is played in the time-saving state B, the game effect lamp 9, the movable body LED 208, etc. may be made to emit light in a different lighting pattern (such as a lighting pattern that matches the background image) than when song A is played in the time-saving state A or the special probability state.
In addition, the light emission patterns of the game effect lamp 9, the movable body LED 208, etc. in the time-saving state A and the probability change state (patterns that match the rhyme of the music) are emphasized more than the light emission patterns of the game effect lamp 9, the movable body LED 208, etc. in the time-saving state B (patterns that match the background image), and the light emission patterns of the game effect lamp 9, the movable body LED 208, etc. in the time-saving state B are subdued. The emphasized light emission patterns include patterns with higher brightness than subdued light emission patterns, patterns with short switching intervals of light emission data, patterns with short blinking cycles, etc. In this way, since the player may be depressed in the time-saving state B as described in the above flow, the player's dissatisfaction can be suppressed by subduing the light emission patterns of the game effect lamp 9, the movable body LED 208, etc. without overemphasizing them.

In addition, for example, a common background image may be displayed in time-saving state A and time-saving state B, but the perspective (visibility) of the background image in time-saving state B may be made different from that in time-saving state A, so that even though the same background image is used, it is clear that the state is completely different (a different impression is given).

The size of the decorative pattern may also be different between time-saving state A and time-saving state B (for example, time-saving state A: normal, time-saving state B: large) so that it is clear (give the impression) that the states are completely different even though the background image is reused.

In addition, after the special chance entry effect/time-saving entry effect A is executed, a display to remind the player not to forget to take the prepaid card and a display of the gaming machine manufacturer may be displayed. In this case, it is preferable not to display the display to remind the player not to forget to take the prepaid card and the gaming machine manufacturer after the time-saving entry effect B is executed. In this way, it is possible to prevent the player from being stressed by the above-mentioned displays when entering the time-saving state B without going through a jackpot.

(Variable display count display, special display count display)
In this embodiment, when the game state is controlled to a low probability/low base state (normal state), a variable display count display 069SG202 (in this example, the characters "Game XXX times" or the like) corresponding to the number of variable displays executed since control to the low probability/low base state, and a special count display 069SG203 (in this example, the characters "Until Play/1100 BATTLE RUSH", the characters "XXX times left", and a triangular object or the like) corresponding to the remaining number of variable displays until the rescue time reduction is reached can be displayed at the bottom right of the screen of the image display device 5. In this embodiment, the effect in which the special count display is displayed is referred to as a countdown effect.

In this embodiment, whether the variable display count display or the special count display is displayed is determined according to the value of the rescue time reduction count counter. In addition, the display mode of the special count display can be changed according to the value of the rescue time reduction count counter. Figure 11-21 is a diagram showing an example of the presentation on the image display device 5 when the variable display count display or the special count display is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 11-21(A), when the value of the rescue time reduction counter is between 301 and 900, a variable display count display 069SG202 (in this example, the words "Game XXX times", where XXX = 0 to 699, etc.) is displayed in the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5. The number (XXX) in the variable display count display 069SG202 is incremented each time the variable display is executed.

As shown in FIG. 11-21(B), when the value of the rescue time reduction counter is between 31 and 300, a countdown effect is executed, and a white special number display 069SG203 (in this example, the text "Until PLAY-1100 BATTLE RUSH", the white text "XXX times remaining", and a white triangular object, XXX = 31 to 300) is displayed in the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5.

As shown in FIG. 11-21(C), when the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 30, a countdown effect is executed, and a red special number display 069SG203 (in this example, the text "Until Play-1100 BATTLE RUSH", the red text "XXX times remaining", and a red triangular object, XXX = 30) is displayed in an enlarged manner in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 for a predetermined period (for example, about 3 seconds), and then, as shown in FIG. 11-21(D), it is shifted to the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5 and displayed in a reduced manner. Then, when the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 1 to 30, a countdown effect is executed, and a red special number display 069SG203 (in this example, the text "Until Play-1100 BATTLE RUSH", the red text "XXX times remaining", and a red triangular object, XXX = 1 to 30) is displayed in the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5.

In this embodiment, the special number of times display is not displayed in the variable display when the value of the rescue time reduction counter becomes 0, but the present invention is not limited to this form, and the special number of times display may be displayed in the variable display when the value of the rescue time reduction counter becomes 0. For example, in the variable display where the rescue time reduction counter value becomes 1, after the special number of times display in red is displayed, when the variable display where the rescue time reduction counter value becomes 0 is executed, the special number of times display 069SG203 in gold (in this example, the characters "Until Play-1100 BATTLE RUSH" and the gold characters "0 times remaining", and a gold triangular object, etc.) may be displayed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the variable display count display 069SG202 is hidden during the period when the special count display 069SG203 is displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this. The special count display 069SG203 may be displayed while the variable display count display 069SG202 is displayed, and the variable display count display 069SG202 may be added and the special count display 069SG203 may be subtracted in accordance with the variable display. In this case, it is preferable to display the variable display count display 069SG202 in a manner that is less visible than the display manner of the special count display 069SG203 (for example, display the variable display count display 069SG202 in a less noticeable manner, such as by displaying it in a smaller size than the special count display 069SG203).

The trigger for starting the display of the special number of times display 069SG203 may be a fixed timing, such as when the variable display starts when the remaining number of variable display times before being controlled to the time-saving state B becomes a predetermined number (for example, 50 times remaining), or may be an irregular timing, such as when a lottery for starting the display of the special number of times display 069SG203 is executed and won, when the fluctuation pattern of the SP reach miss ends, or when the remaining number of variable display times before being controlled to the time-saving state B becomes a predetermined number (for example, 50 times remaining) is suggested by the execution of a remaining number suggestion effect. In addition, when the display of the special number of times display 069SG203 is started, the special number of times display 069SG203 may be highlighted by being displayed on a full screen, etc. In addition, instead of displaying the special number of times display 069SG203, a dedicated background effect that switches to a dedicated effect mode (for example, "Super hot when you reach it") may be executed.

In addition, when the value of the rescue time reduction counter reaches 301 to 900, the table may be switched to a variation pattern table in which the SP reach variation pattern is more difficult to determine than before the value of the rescue time reduction counter reached 301 to 900. By doing this, it is possible to allow the player to play with a variable display that reflects their intention to enter the rescue time reduction mode quickly.

In addition, during the display period of the special number of times display 069SG203 (including the above-mentioned full screen display period), the execution of various preview effects described below may be restricted (for example, not executed or displayed in an inconspicuous manner). In addition, if the execution time of the preview effect overlaps with the display period of the special number of times display 069SG203 (including the above-mentioned full screen display period), the special number of times display 069SG203 may be displayed in a manner that does not highlight, or if the execution time of the pre-reading preview effect described below overlaps with the display period of the special number of times display 069SG203 (including the above-mentioned full screen display period), the special number of times display 069SG203 may be displayed when the variable display after the pre-reading preview effect ends is started, or if a predetermined variable display during the display period of the special number of times display 069SG203 (including the above-mentioned full screen display period) is a jackpot, the display of the special number of times display 069SG203 may be restricted (for example, not displayed or displayed in an inconspicuous manner).

(Example of the presentation when the rescue time reduction is reached)
As described above, (i) when the rescue time reduction is reached after the RAM clear process is executed (when the rescue time reduction is reached without a single jackpot after the RAM is cleared), a pattern determination A designation command is sent in which the pattern determination period is 0.5 seconds in the rescue time reduction reaching variation, and (ii) when the rescue time reduction is reached after 900 variable displays after a jackpot (when a jackpot is hit once and the rescue time reduction is reached without a single jackpot thereafter), a pattern determination B designation command is sent in which the pattern determination period is 20 seconds in the rescue time reduction reaching variation. In this embodiment, since the pattern determination period is different between the case (i) and the case (ii), the presentation mode is different for the period from when the rescue time reduction reaching variation in the low probability/low base state ends until the game is controlled to the low probability/high base state (time reduction state B) and rescue time reduction play begins (i.e., the pattern determination period).

Next, an example of the performance when (i) the rescue time reduction is reached after the RAM clear process is executed will be explained using Fig. 11-22 to Fig. 11-25. In this example, a case where (i) the rescue time reduction is reached after the RAM clear process is executed and the fluctuation pattern is "non-reach (reduced non-reach B or non-reach B) miss" will be explained.

(Example of the performance in case (i))
Figure 11-22 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect when the rescue time reduction is reached after the RAM clear process is executed and the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "non-reach (shortened non-reach B or non-reach B) miss," and Figure 11-23 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a performance image related to each of these effects.

First, as shown in FIG. 11-23(A), when the game state is controlled to the normal state (low probability/low base state), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the first special pattern (variable display when the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 1) (at the timing of T1 shown in FIG. 11-22), the performance control CPU 120, which has received the pattern determination A designation command, determines and stops the decorative pattern combination (in this example, "146") in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. In other words, it determines and stops the decorative pattern combination that results in a "miss".

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays the active display 069SG003 in the active display area 069SG013, and displays the hold display 069SG001 in the first hold display area 069SG011 based on the first hold memory count being 1. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 displays the first background image 069SG310 as the background image for the decorative pattern based on the normal game state.

The performance control CPU 120 also displays the character "1" in the display area 5SL because the first reserved memory count is 1, and displays the character "0" because the second reserved memory count is 0. It also confirms and stops the combination of small symbols (in this example, "146") in the small symbol display area. In other words, it confirms and stops the combination of small symbols that will result in a "miss."

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-23(B), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special pattern (the variable display when the value of the rescue time reduction counter becomes 0) (at the timing of T2 shown in FIG. 11-22), the performance control CPU 120 executes a shutter performance and displays the shutter image 069SG250 on the entire screen of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-23 (C), at the timing when CPU 103 ends the variable display of the first special symbol (at the timing of T3 shown in FIG. 11-22), the performance control CPU 120, which has received the symbol determination A designation command, determines and stops the final small symbol combination (in this example, "234") in the small symbol display area of the image display device 5. In other words, the combination of small symbols that results in a "miss" is determined and stopped. In addition, in response to the end of the variable display, a right hit notification image 069SG400 and the characters "Right hit" are displayed in the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5, and a right hit notification image 069SG401 larger than the right hit notification image 069SG400 and the characters "Right hit" are faded in and displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. By doing this, if the shutter image 069SG250 is only displayed, the player will continue playing left-handed and their interest will decrease, so by quickly displaying the right-handed play notification image 069SG400 in the bottom right of the screen and then fading in the right-handed play notification image 069SG401, the player can be led to play right-handed in an optimal manner.

Next, as shown in Figure 11-23 (D), when the game state is controlled to the time-saving state B (low probability/high base state) at the timing when the pattern determination period (0.5 seconds) specified by the pattern determination A designation command has elapsed (at the timing of T4 shown in Figure 11-22), the presentation control CPU 120 displays the third background image 069SG330 as the background image for the decorative pattern, corresponding to the presentation mode becoming "Yu-1100 Battle Rush". At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays a performance mode display 069SG222 consisting of the characters "Play-1100 BATTLE RUSH" at the top of the screen of the image display device 5, displays a time reduction remaining display 069SG201 (in this example, the characters "XX times remaining", XX = 1100) at the bottom left of the screen of the image display device 5, and displays a right hit notification image 069SG400 and the characters "Right hit" at the bottom right of the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays the combination of decorative symbols executed immediately before (in this example, "234") in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. Also, displays the combination of small symbols executed immediately before (in this example, "234") in the small symbol display area.

Next, an example of the presentation when (ii) the rescue time reduction is reached after 900 variable displays after a jackpot is reached will be described using Figures 11-24(A) and 11-25. In this example, a case where (ii) the rescue time reduction is reached after 900 variable displays after a jackpot is described, in which the fluctuation pattern is "non-reach (reduced non-reach B or non-reach B) miss."

(Example of the performance in case (ii))
Fig. 11-24 shows (A) a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect when the variable pattern is determined to be "non-reach (reduced non-reach B or non-reach B) miss" when the rescue time-saving is reached after 900 variable displays after a big win, and (B) a time chart showing a modified example of the time-saving entry effect B. Fig. 11-25 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the effect image related to each of these effects.

First, the presentation configuration in Figures 11-25 (A) and (B) is the same as the presentation configuration in the "non-reach (shortened non-reach or non-reach) miss" variation pattern when the rescue time reduction is reached after the RAM clear process, as shown in Figures 11-23 (A) and (B), so a description will be omitted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-25(C), at the timing when CPU 103 ends the variable display of the first special symbol (at the timing of T3 shown in FIG. 11-24(A)), the performance control CPU 120, which has received the symbol determination B designation command, stops and confirms the final small symbol combination (in this example, "234") in the small symbol display area of the image display device 5. In other words, the combination of small symbols that results in a "miss" display result is stopped and confirmed. Also, in response to the end of the variable display, a right hit notification image 069SG400 and the characters "Right hit" are displayed in front of the shutter image 069SG250 in the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5, and a right hit notification image 069SG401 larger than the right hit notification image 069SG400 and the characters "Right hit" are faded in and displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. By doing this, if the shutter image 069SG250 is only displayed, the player will continue playing left-handed and their interest will decrease, so by quickly displaying the right-handed play notification image 069SG400 in the bottom right of the screen and then fading in the right-handed play notification image 069SG401, the player can be led to play right-handed in an optimal manner.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-25 (D), when 0.5 seconds have elapsed of the pattern determination period (20 seconds) specified by the pattern determination B designation command (at the timing of T4 shown in FIG. 11-24 (A)), the presentation control CPU 120 ends the shutter presentation, erases the shutter image 069SG250 from the entire screen of the image display device 5, and fades out the right-hit notification image 069SG401 while still displaying the right-hit notification image 069SG400. Thereafter, it executes the time-saving entry presentation B, and displays the entry image 069SG473 (described later in this example, an image including the words "Entering YU-1100 BATTLE RUSH") on the entire screen of the image display device 5. In time-saving entry performance B, the entry image 069SG473 containing the text "Entering Play-1100 BATTLE RUSH" is displayed to notify the player that the game state will be controlled to time-saving state B (low probability/high base state).

The entry image 069SG473 is also composed of an entry image 069SG470 that is displayed when the time-saving state A and the probability bonus state are started, a Yu-time image 069SG473A consisting of the characters "1100" displayed in the smallest size with 0% transparency in the bottom left of the display screen, and a Yu-time image 069SG473B consisting of the character "Yu".

Next, as shown in Figure 11-25 (E), when the pattern determination period (20 seconds) specified by the pattern determination B designation command has elapsed (at the timing of T5 shown in Figure 11-24 (A)), the game state is controlled to the time-saving state B (low probability/high base state), and the presentation control CPU 120 displays the third background image 069SG330 as the background image for the decorative pattern, corresponding to the presentation mode becoming "Yu-1100 Battle Rush". At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays a performance mode display 069SG222 consisting of the characters "Play-1100 BATTLE RUSH" at the top of the screen of the image display device 5, displays a time reduction remaining display 069SG201 (in this example, the characters "XX times remaining", XX = 1100) at the bottom left of the screen of the image display device 5, and displays a right hit notification image 069SG400 and the characters "Right hit" at the bottom right of the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays the combination of decorative symbols executed immediately before (in this example, "234") in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. Also, displays the combination of small symbols executed immediately before (in this example, "234") in the small symbol display area.

11-24(A) and 11-25 show an example in which the presentation mode becomes "Yu-1100 Battle Rush" and the third background image 069SG330 is displayed at the timing when the game state is controlled to the time-saving state B after the pattern determination period (20 seconds) specified by the pattern determination B designation command has elapsed, but the present invention is not limited to this form. The presentation mode may become "Yu-1100 Battle Rush" and the third background image 069SG330 may be displayed at a timing different from the timing when the game state is controlled to the time-saving state B after the pattern determination period (20 seconds) specified by the pattern determination B designation command has elapsed. For example, the presentation mode may become "Yu-1100 Battle Rush" and the third background image 069SG330 may be displayed at the timing when (A) a customer waiting demo display designation command is received after the game state is controlled to the time-saving state B, or at the timing when the first variable display is started after (B) the game state is controlled to the time-saving state B. Also, when 0.5 seconds have elapsed (in this example, the pattern determination period specified by the pattern determination A command) during the pattern determination period (20 seconds) specified by the pattern determination B command (time T4 in this example), the time-saving entry effect B (Figure 11-25 (D)) is not executed, and the effect mode becomes "Yu-1100 Battle Rush" and the third background image 069SG330 is displayed.

In addition, when the shutter image 069SG250 is displayed in FIG. 11-23(B) or FIG. 11-25(B), an image suggesting that control will be made to time-saving state B (for example, the character "Play") may be displayed. By doing so, it becomes easier to distinguish between the timing when control is made to time-saving state B and the timing other than the timing when control is made to time-saving state B (for example, the timing when the presentation mode is switched) when the shutter image 069SG250 is commonly displayed.

In addition, in this embodiment, as described in Figures 11-22 to 11-25, a different presentation mode is exemplified when (i) the rescue time-saving mode is reached after the RAM is cleared and (ii) the rescue time-saving mode is reached after 900 variable displays after a jackpot. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a common presentation mode may be executed in the cases of (i) and (ii). In other words, the time-saving mode entry presentation B may be executed in the cases of (i) and (ii), or the time-saving mode entry presentation B may not be executed in the cases of (i) and (ii). Also, a time-saving mode entry presentation B with a different mode may be executed in the cases of (i) and (ii).

In the examples of Fig. 11-24(A) and Fig. 11-25, a form in which the time-saving entry effect B is executed during the pattern determination period (20 seconds) specified by the pattern determination B designation command is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the time-saving entry effect B may be started after control is entered into the time-saving state B. Below, modified examples of the execution timing of each effect when the rescue time-saving state is reached are explained based on Fig. 11-24(B), Fig. 11-26, and Fig. 11-27.

Figure 11-24(B) is a modified time chart showing the execution timing of each effect when the rescue time reduction is reached. Figure 11-26 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the performance operation when the number of reserved memories is 0 when the rescue time reduction is reached.

First, the presentation configuration in FIG. 11-26(A) is the same as that shown in FIG. 11-25(A), so a description is omitted. Next, as shown in FIG. 11-26(B), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special pattern (the variable display when the value of the rescue time reduction counter becomes 0) (at the timing of T2 shown in FIG. 11-24(B)), the presentation control CPU 120 starts the variable display of the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in Figure 11-26 (C), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the first special pattern (at the timing of T3 shown in Figure 11-24 (B)), the performance control CPU 120, which has received the pattern confirmation B designation command, stops confirming the decorative pattern combination (in this example, "234") that will result in a "miss" display result in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5, and also stops confirming the small pattern combination that will result in a "miss" display result in the display area 5SL of the image display device 5. Next, as shown in FIG. 11-26 (D), based on receipt of the right hit LED lighting notification command, the right hit LED 069SG031 is lit, the special number display 069SG203 is hidden, and the right hit notification image 069SG400 and the text "Right hit" are displayed in the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5, while the right hit notification image 069SG401, which is larger than the right hit notification image 069SG400, and the text "Right hit" are faded in and displayed in front of the decorative pattern in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, starting the right hit notification.

Next, when the pattern determination period (0.5 seconds) specified by the pattern determination A designation command has elapsed (at the timing of T4 shown in Figure 11-24 (B)), control of the time-saving state B begins and variable display can begin, but if the number of reserved memories is 0, the display of the right-hit notification images 069SG400 and 069SG401 shown in Figure 11-26 (D) is maintained.

After that, as shown in FIG. 11-26(E), when right-hit play is started in time-saving state B and the second start winning (or the first start winning) occurs, the first variable display is started (at the timing of T5 shown in FIG. 11-24(B)), and the performance control CPU 120 starts the shutter performance and displays the shutter image 069SG250 on the entire screen of the image display device 5. Note that the right-hit notification images 069SG400 and 069SG401 remain displayed in front of the shutter image 069SG250.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-26 (F), the presentation control CPU 120 ends the shutter presentation when the second variable display starts after the first variable display has ended (at the timing of T6 shown in FIG. 11-24 (B)), hides the shutter image 069SG250 and the right-hit notification image 069SG401, and then displays the entry image 069SG473 to start the time-saving entry presentation B.

The time-saving entry performance B may be started at a timing other than the start timing of the second variable display in the time-saving state B (for example, in the middle of the first variable display or at the start of the second or subsequent variable display). In addition, if the variable display period is short (for example, 1500 ms) such that an ultra-short variable pattern is determined as the variable display variable pattern, it may be executed continuously over multiple variable displays. In this case, it is preferable that the image of the time-saving entry performance B is displayed continuously regardless of the variable display of the decorative pattern. In addition, if the variable display of a jackpot starts during the execution period of the time-saving entry performance B, the currently executed time-saving entry performance B may be interrupted or ended, and a performance corresponding to the variable pattern (for example, an SP reach performance) may be started, or a jackpot notification performance may be executed without going through a performance corresponding to the variable pattern.

Next, Figure 11-27 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the performance when the number of reserved memories is 1 or more when the rescue time reduction is reached.

First, the presentation configuration in Figures 11-27(A) to (C) is the same as the presentation configuration shown in Figures 11-26(A) to (C), so we will omit the explanation.

Next, as shown in Figure 11-27 (C), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the first special pattern (at the timing of T3 shown in Figure 11-24 (B)), the performance control CPU 120, which has received the pattern confirmation B designation command, stops confirming the decorative pattern combination (in this example, "234") that will result in a "miss" display in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, and also stops confirming the small pattern combination that will result in a "miss" display in the display area 5SL of the image display device 5. Next, as shown in FIG. 11-27(D), based on receipt of the right hit LED lighting notification command, the right hit LED 069SG031 is lit, the special number display 069SG203 is hidden, and the right hit notification image 069SG400 and the text "Right hit" are displayed in the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5, while the right hit notification image 069SG401, which is larger than the right hit notification image 069SG400, and the text "Right hit" are faded in and displayed in front of the decorative pattern in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, starting the right hit notification.

Here, if the number of reserved memories is 1 or more, control of the time-saving state B begins when the pattern determination period (0.5 seconds) specified by the pattern determination A designation command has elapsed (at the timing of T4 shown in FIG. 11-24(B)), and the first variable display begins, so that, as shown in FIG. 11-27(D), the performance control CPU 120 begins the shutter performance and displays the shutter image 069SG250 on the entire screen of the image display device 5. Also, the right-hit notification images 069SG400 and 069SG401 remain displayed in front of the shutter image 069SG250.

After that, as shown in FIG. 11-27(E), the presentation control CPU 120 ends the shutter presentation when the second variable display starts after the first variable display ends, hides the shutter image 069SG250 and the right-hit notification image 069SG401, and then displays the entry image 069SG473 to start the time-saving entry presentation B.

In this way, when the variable display of the rescue time-saving reaching fluctuation ends, the presentation control CPU 120 turns on the right-hit LED 069SG031 based on the reception of the right-hit LED lighting notification command, and starts the right-hit notification by displaying the right-hit notification images 069SG400, 069SG401 and the word "Right Hit" on the display screen of the image display device 5. Therefore, since the variable display does not start until the control of time-saving state B starts, even if the shutter presentation or time-saving entry presentation B, which indicates that the control of time-saving state B is starting, does not start, it is possible to prevent the player from starting disadvantageous left-hit play without knowing that the time-saving state B is being controlled.

In the above embodiment, the pattern determination period is set to 0.5 seconds when the rescue time reduction is reached after the RAM is cleared, and 20 seconds when the rescue time reduction is reached after 900 variable displays after a jackpot. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as described above, a common pattern determination period (e.g., 0.5 seconds) may be set when the rescue time reduction is reached after the RAM is cleared and when the rescue time reduction is reached after 900 variable displays after a jackpot. Even in this case, the right-hit notification and time-saving entry performance B are executed after the variable display starts after the control of time-saving state B has started, thereby preventing the player from starting the disadvantageous left-hit play without knowing that the time-saving state B has been controlled.

In the above embodiment, when the rescue time reduction is reached after the RAM is cleared, the shutter effect is terminated at the timing when the pattern determination period (0.5 seconds) specified by the pattern determination A designation command has elapsed, and the shutter image 069SG250 is terminated and the background image of the play-by-play 1100 Battle Rush is displayed. Here, if the performance control CPU 120 is unable to receive the pattern determination A designation command normally, for example, if it misses the pattern determination A designation command sent from the CPU 103, or if the pattern determination A designation command is corrupted and the received command cannot be recognized as the pattern determination A designation command, the shutter effect may be terminated at the timing when (A) a customer waiting demo display designation command is received, or (B) a command corresponding to the start of the first variable display after being controlled to the time reduction state B (for example, a variable display start command (first variable display start command, second variable display start command), a variable pattern designation command, etc.) is received, and the shutter effect may be terminated and the shutter image 069SG250 is terminated and the background image of the play-by-play 1100 Battle Rush is displayed. Furthermore, when another command (for example, a game state designation command, a pattern determination designation command, etc.) corresponding to the first variable display after control to time-saving state B is received, the shutter effect may be ended, the display of shutter image 069SG250 may be ended, and the background image of the Yu-1100 Battle Rush may be displayed.

In addition, in the above embodiment, when the rescue time-saving period is reached after 900 variable displays following a jackpot, an example is shown in which the shutter effect ends when 0.5 seconds have elapsed of the pattern determination period (20 seconds) specified by the pattern determination B designation command, the display of the shutter image 069SG250 ends, and the time-saving entry effect is executed. Here, if the performance control CPU 120 fails to receive the pattern determination B designation command normally, for example, if it misses the pattern determination B designation command sent from the CPU 103, or if it cannot recognize the received command as the pattern determination B designation command due to command corruption of the pattern determination B designation command, then (A) at the timing when a customer waiting demo display designation command is received, or (B) at the timing when a command corresponding to the start of the first variable display after being controlled to the time-saving state B (for example, a variable display start command (first variable display start command, second variable display start command), a variable pattern designation command, etc.) is received, the shutter performance may be terminated, the display of the shutter image 069SG250 may be terminated, and the time-saving entry performance B may be executed. Note that, at the timing when other commands corresponding to the first variable display after being controlled to the time-saving state B (for example, a game state designation command, a pattern determination designation command, etc.) are received, the shutter performance may be terminated, the display of the shutter image 069SG250 may be terminated, and the time-saving entry performance B may be executed.

In addition, in Fig. 11-22 to Fig. 11-25, when the rescue time-saving mode is reached after the RAM is cleared and when the rescue time-saving mode is reached after 900 variable displays after a jackpot, each of the effects that are executed when the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "non-reach (shortened non-reach B or non-reach B) miss" is explained. Although not specifically illustrated, when the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "SP reach A miss or SP reach B miss", an SP reach effect that corresponds to the SP reach type (for example, a bowling effect for SP reach A, and a battle effect for SP reach B) is executed, and after an image of an ally character being defeated by an enemy character in a bowling effect or battle effect is displayed to notify that the variable display result is a miss, a shutter effect is started, and a time-saving entry effect B may be started during the pattern determination period after the shutter effect ends.

In addition, if the variable display (rescue time reduction reaching fluctuation) where the value of the rescue time reduction counter becomes 0 is a jackpot, the following (1) to (3) may be performed.

(1) When the variable display where the rescue time reduction counter value becomes 0 has determined the jackpot variable pattern "SP Reach B (Battle SP)," a shutter effect is performed when the variable display starts (for example, the same as in FIG. 11-23 (B)), and the shutter effect ends at the timing when it develops into the SP Reach effect B (see the timing in FIG. 13-11 (A2)), after which the SP Reach effect B is executed and a jackpot is announced.

(2) If the variable display where the rescue time reduction counter value is 0 has determined the jackpot variable pattern "SP Reach B (Battle SP)," a winning effect may be executed in which the special count display remains at "1" and no shutter effect is executed, resulting in the execution of the SP Reach effect B.

(3) A special variation pattern for a jackpot when the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 0 (for example, shutter closes → shutter opens with decorative patterns aligned → jackpot) may be provided.

It is also preferable to restrict the execution of the look-ahead effect described below when the value of the rescue time reduction counter reaches 0 and a specific number of times remains, and to restrict the execution of the look-ahead effect in a variable display where the value of the rescue time reduction counter reaches 0.

(Example of customer waiting screen)
In this embodiment, when the performance control CPU 120 receives a customer waiting demo display designation command that designates a customer waiting state, a customer waiting demo performance is executed in which a demo image 069SG700 is displayed on the image display device 5. FIG. 11-28(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a screen in the customer waiting state.

As shown in FIG. 11-28(A), this demo image 069SG700 includes a character image 069SG100A showing an ally character, the words "Demo Video", and a notification image 069SG700a (in this example, an image in which the words "Yu-Time Equipped" are displayed on a triangular object). Also, when the value of the rescue time reduction counter is between 1 and 300, the demo image 069SG700 further includes a special number of times display 069SG203 (in this example, a special number of times display in white) in addition to the various images mentioned above (ally characters, the words "Demo Video", etc.).

This configuration makes it possible to notify players while they are waiting for customers that there are only a few variable display times remaining until the rescue time reduction is reached (in this example, the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 300 or less), thereby promoting operation.

(Variations of the waiting screen)
In the example of Figure 11-28 (A), a special number of times display 069SG203 is included in demo image 069SG700 when the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 1 to 300, but this is not limited to the above embodiment. Regardless of the value of the rescue time reduction counter, the special number of times display 069SG203 may not be included in demo image 069SG700 in either case where the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 301 or more or 300 or less.

For example, as shown in FIG. 11-28(B), when a customer waiting demo performance is executed, a demo image 069SG700 is displayed on the image display device 5. At this time, the demo image 069SG700 includes a character image 069SG100A showing an ally character, the words "Demo video", and a notification image 069SG700a (in this example, an image of a triangular object with the words "Yu-time installed"), but does not include a special count display regardless of the value of the rescue time reduction count counter.

Next, as shown in Figure 11-28 (C), when a new start winning occurs and the variable display of the first special symbol starts, the customer waiting demo performance ends and the special number of times display 069SG203 is displayed in the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5.

With this configuration, by not informing the player of the number of variable display times remaining until the rescue time reduction is reached while in the waiting state, it is possible to prevent only gaming machines with a small number of variable display times remaining until the rescue time reduction is reached from being selected, and to suppress excessive bias in the operation of gaming machines.

In addition, regardless of whether the RAM clear process is performed when the power is turned on, the variable display count display and special count display may be hidden until the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (e.g., 50 times) after the power is turned on.

For example, if the RAM clear process is not executed when the power is turned on, whether the value of the rescue time reduction counter at the time of power-on is 301 or more or 300 or less, the variable display count display and special count display are hidden until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times, thereby preventing players from playing solely for the purpose of rescue time reduction. Also, if the RAM clear process is executed when the power is turned on, whether the value of the rescue time reduction counter at the time of power outage is 301 or more or 300 or less, the variable display count display and special count display are hidden until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times, thereby preventing players from avoiding playing.

With this configuration, if the RAM clear process is not executed when the power is turned on at the opening of the store, it is possible to prevent players who aim to shorten the rescue time from selecting and playing on a gaming machine with a small number of variable display counts remaining until the rescue time is reached by referring to the final number of variable display counts at the time of the power outage on the previous day. Also, if the RAM clear process is executed when the power is turned on at the opening of the store, it is possible to prevent players who aim to shorten the rescue time from avoiding playing on a gaming machine with a large number of variable display counts remaining until the rescue time is reached by referring to the final number of variable display counts at the time of the power outage on the previous day.

In addition, without being limited to the above form, when the value of the rescue time reduction counter reaches a specific value, the variable display count display or special count display may be displayed even if the variable display has not been executed a predetermined number of times since the power was turned on.

For example, if the RAM clear process is not performed when the power is turned on and the value of the rescue time reduction counter at the time of power-on is a specific value (e.g., 20 or less) that is less than a value corresponding to a predetermined number of times (e.g., 50), the special number display may be displayed during the customer waiting state after the power is turned on or when the variable display of the special pattern is being executed. Also, if the RAM clear process is not performed when the power is turned on and the value of the rescue time reduction counter at the time of power-on is not a specific value, but the value of the rescue time reduction counter becomes a specific value (e.g., 20 or less) due to the variable display executed after the power is turned on, the special number display may be displayed even when the value of the rescue time reduction counter is not a value corresponding to the predetermined number of times.

(Feature 069SG Modification 1)
Next, a description will be given of a modified example 1 of the feature portion 069SG. Fig. 11-29 is a diagram showing an example of a performance operation related to a transition to a customer waiting screen as modified example 1 of the feature portion 069SG. Fig. 11-30 is a diagram showing a modified example of the performance operation related to a transition to a customer waiting screen as modified example 1 of the feature portion 069SG.

First, an example of the performance operation regarding the transition to the customer waiting screen in this embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 11-29 (A1), for example, when a predetermined time (e.g., about 30,000 ms) has elapsed since the variable display of the symbols stopped in the normal state (low probability/low base state) without a new variable display being started, the performance control CPU 120 executes the customer waiting demo performance by displaying the demo image 069SG700 on the image display device 5 based on the reception of a customer waiting demo display designation command (see FIG. 11-29 (A2)). After that, when a starting winning occurs, the demo image 069SG700 is hidden and the variable display is started (see FIG. 11-29 (A3)).

Next, an example of the performance operation regarding the transition to the customer waiting screen after the rescue time reduction is reached will be explained. As shown in FIG. 11-29 (B1), when the variable display of the pattern in the rescue time reduction reaching variation that has reached the rescue time reduction stops, if the number of reserved memories is 0, the performance control CPU 120 turns on the right hit LED 069SG031 based on receiving the right hit LED lighting notification command in response to the end of the variable display, displays the right hit notification image 069SG400 and the word "Right hit" in the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5, and displays the right hit notification image 069SG401 larger than the right hit notification image 069SG400 and the word "Right hit" in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, fading in front of the decorative pattern, to start the right hit notification. In addition, when the pattern determination period (0.5 seconds) specified by the pattern determination A designation command has elapsed, the control of the time reduction state B is started (see FIG. 11-29 (B2)).

Then, when a predetermined time (e.g., about 30,000 ms) has elapsed since the variable display of the symbols in the rescue time reduction reaching variation stopped without a new variable display being started, the performance control CPU 120, even if it receives a customer waiting demo display designation command, will maintain the state in which the right hit notification images 069SG400 and 069SG401 are displayed, without displaying the demo image 069SG700 on the image display device 5 and executing the customer waiting demo performance (see FIG. 11-29 (B3)).

After that, when a start winning occurs, the presentation control CPU 120 starts the shutter presentation at the timing when the first variable display starts based on the start of right-hand play in time-saving state B and the occurrence of the second start winning (or the first start winning), and displays the shutter image 069SG250 on the entire screen of the image display device 5. Note that the right-hand hit notification images 069SG400 and 069SG401 remain displayed in front of the shutter image 069SG250 (see FIG. 11-29 (B4)).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 ends the shutter performance when the first variable display ends, hides the shutter image 069SG250 and the right hit notification image 069SG401, and then displays the entry image 069SG473 when the second variable display starts (at the timing of T6 shown in FIG. 11-24 (B)), starting the time-saving entry performance B (see FIG. 11-29 (B5)).

Next, an example of the presentation operation regarding the transition to the customer waiting screen after the start of the right-hit notification will be explained. As shown in Figure 11-29 (C1), when the variable display of the pattern in the rescue time reduction reaching variation that has reached the rescue time reduction stops, if the number of pending memories is 1 or more (for example, 1), the presentation control CPU 120, based on receiving a right-hit LED lighting notification command in response to the end of the variable display, turns on the right-hit LED 069SG031, and displays a right-hit notification image 069SG400 and the text "Right hit" in the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5, and also displays a right-hit notification image 069SG401 larger than the right-hit notification image 069SG400 and the text "Right hit" in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, fading in the image in front of the shutter image 069SG250, thereby starting the right-hit notification. In addition, when the pattern determination period (0.5 seconds) specified by the pattern determination A designation command has elapsed, control of the time-saving state B is started, and the first reserved memory is consumed and the first variable display is started, so the performance control CPU 120 starts the shutter performance and displays the shutter image 069SG250 on the entire screen of the image display device 5. Note that the right-hit notification images 069SG400 and 069SG401 are maintained in front of the shutter image 069SG250 (see FIG. 11-29 (C2)).

After that, when the first variable display ends and the first reserved memory becomes 0, the right-hit notification images 069SG400 and 069SG401 will remain displayed in front of the shutter image 069SG250 (see Figure 11-29 (C3)).

Then, when a predetermined time (e.g., about 30,000 ms) has elapsed since the variable display of the pattern stopped during the first variable display after the control of the time-saving state B was started, without a new variable display being started, the performance control CPU 120, even if it receives a customer waiting demo display designation command, will maintain the state in which the right hit notification images 069SG400 and 069SG401 are displayed in front of the shutter image 069SG250, without displaying the demo image 069SG700 on the image display device 5 and executing the customer waiting demo performance (see FIG. 11-29 (C4)).

After that, when a start winning occurs, the presentation control CPU 120 ends the shutter presentation at the timing when the second variable display starts based on the start of right-hit play in time-saving state B and the occurrence of the second start winning (or the first start winning), and after hiding the shutter image 069SG250 and the right-hit notification image 069SG401, displays the entry image 069SG473 and starts the time-saving entry presentation B (see FIG. 11-29 (C5)).

In this way, in feature part 069SG variant 1, during the period from when the variable display of the rescue time-saving reaching fluctuation ends until the time-saving entry performance B ends, the performance control CPU 120 restricts the execution of the customer waiting demo performance and prioritizes the execution of the right-hit notification, so that the right-hit notification image 069SG400 and the right-hit notification image 069SG401, which is displayed larger than the right-hit notification image 069SG400, do not disappear. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 11-29 (A2), the demo image 069SG700 is displayed, which prevents the player from starting unfavorable left-hit play without knowing that the game is controlled to time-saving state B.

In addition, in this modified example, an embodiment is shown in which the execution of the customer waiting demo effect is restricted and the right hit notification is given priority during the period from the end of the variable display of the rescue time-saving reaching fluctuation to the end of the time-saving entry effect B, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the CPU 103 may restrict the execution of the customer waiting demo effect by not sending a customer waiting demo display designation command during the period from the end of the variable display of the rescue time-saving reaching fluctuation to the end of the time-saving entry effect B.

Next, we will explain another variation of the example of the presentation operation regarding the transition to the customer waiting screen when the rescue time reduction is reached.

As shown in FIG. 11-30 (D1), when the variable display of the pattern in the rescue time reduction reaching variation that has reached the rescue time reduction stops, if the number of reserved memories is 0, the performance control CPU 120 turns on the right hit LED 069SG031 based on receiving the right hit LED lighting notification command in response to the end of the variable display, displays the right hit notification image 069SG400 and the word "Right hit" in the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5, and displays the right hit notification image 069SG401 larger than the right hit notification image 069SG400 and the word "Right hit" in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, fading in front of the decorative pattern, to start the right hit notification. In addition, when the pattern determination period (0.5 seconds) specified by the pattern determination A designation command has elapsed, the control of the time reduction state B begins (see FIG. 11-30 (D2)).

Then, when a predetermined time (e.g., about 30,000 ms) has elapsed without a new variable display being started after the variable display of the symbols in the rescue time-saving reaching variation has stopped and been controlled to time-saving state B, the performance control CPU 120, based on having received a customer waiting demo display designation command, displays demo image 069SG700 on the image display device 5 to execute a customer waiting demo performance, and displays right hit notification image 069SG400 and the word "Right hit" in the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5 (see FIG. 11-30 (D3)).

After that, when a start winning occurs, the presentation control CPU 120 starts the shutter presentation at the timing when the first variable display starts based on the start of right-hit play in time-saving state B and the occurrence of the second start winning (or the first start winning), and displays the shutter image 069SG250 on the entire screen of the image display device 5. Note that the right-hit notification images 069SG400 and 069SG401 remain displayed in front of the shutter image 069SG250 (see FIG. 11-30 (D4)).

As shown in FIG. 11-30 (D3), when the demo image 069SG700 is displayed on the image display device 5 and the customer waiting demo performance is being performed, when the player touches the touch ring of the ball hitting operation handle 30, the demo image 069SG700 is made invisible and the customer waiting demo performance is terminated, and the right hit notification image 069SG400 and the word "Right hit" shown in FIG. 11-30 (D2) are displayed, and then the shutter performance is started when the first variable display is started.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 ends the shutter performance when the first variable display ends, hides the shutter image 069SG250 and the right-hit notification image 069SG401, and then displays the entry image 069SG473 and starts the time-saving entry performance B when the second variable display begins (see FIG. 11-30 (D5)).

In this way, during the period from when the variable display of the rescue time-saving achievement fluctuation ends until the time-saving entry performance B ends, the demo image 069SG700 may be displayed to enable the customer-waiting demo performance to be executed, but the right-hit notification image 069SG400 and the characters "right hit" may be displayed together with the demo image 069SG700 to execute the right-hit notification. In this way, the control for displaying the demo image 069SG700 on the image display device 5 to execute the customer-waiting demo performance is the same as in the normal state, reducing the processing burden, while the right-hit notification image 069SG400 and the characters "right hit" are displayed in the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5 to prevent the player from starting the disadvantageous left-hit game.

In addition, for example, the right hit notification image 069SG400 may be displayed in a state where it is more visible than the demo image 069SG700, for example by overlapping a right hit notification image 069SG401 that is larger than the right hit notification image 069SG400 in front of the demo image 069SG700.

(Feature 069SG Modification 2)
Next, the feature portion 069SG modified example 2 will be described. Fig. 11-31 is a flowchart showing a game control timer interrupt process as the feature portion 069SG modified example 2. Fig. 11-32 is a flowchart showing a special symbol stop process as the feature portion 069SG modified example 2. Fig. 11-33 is a flowchart showing a special symbol stop process as the feature portion 069SG modified example 2. Fig. 11-34 is a flowchart showing a display process as the feature portion 069SG modified example 2.

In the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 11-13 and 11-14, an example is given of a form in which the right hit lamp 069SG132 is turned on and off and a right hit LED on notification command and a right hit LED off notification command are sent to the performance control board 12 within the special pattern stop processing, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the processing of turning on and off the right hit lamp 069SG132 and the processing of sending the right hit LED on notification command and the right hit LED off notification command to the performance control board 12 may be executed outside the special pattern stop processing. Also, an example has been given in which the value of the rescue time reduction counter is decremented by the normal special pattern processing, and the rescue time reduction determination flag is set to the on state when the rescue time reduction is reached, but the value of the rescue time reduction counter may be decremented by the special pattern stop processing, and the right hit lamp 069SG132 may be turned on and off and a right hit LED on notification command and a right hit LED off notification command may be sent to the performance control board 12 without using the rescue time reduction determination flag.

For example, as shown in FIG. 11-31 as feature part 069SG variant 2, in the game control timer interrupt process, the CPU 103 executes a display process (step 069SGS24A) including a setting process for turning on and off the right hit lamp 069SG132 after executing the game random number update process (step S24) and a process for sending a right hit LED on notification command and a right hit LED off notification command to the performance control board 12, and also executes a display control process (step 069SGS26A) for turning on and off the right hit lamp 069SG132 in accordance with the setting process performed in the display process after executing the normal pattern process process (step S26).

In feature 069SG variant 2, in order to execute the display process (step 069SGS24A) and display control process (step 069SGS26A) described above, the CPU 103 executes the special symbol stop process shown in Figures 11-32 and 11-33.

In the special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 11-32 and FIG. 11-33, the CPU 103 first executes the processing of steps 069SGS131 to 069SGS135 in the same manner as the special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 11-13 and FIG. 11-14 when the jackpot flag is set. Then, the CPU 103 executes the processing of steps 069SGS138 and 069SGS139 without starting the illumination of the right hit lamp 069SG132 or sending a right hit LED illumination notification command, and then clears the memory of the state of the time-saving flag A and the time-saving flag B (step 069SGS139a), executes the processing of step 069SGS140, and ends the special symbol stop processing.

On the other hand, if the jackpot flag is not set, the CPU 103 executes the processes of steps 069SGS131 to 069SGS133, then identifies the state of time-saving flag A and time-saving flag B at that time, and updates and stores the state of time-saving flag A and time-saving flag B (step 069SGS160). It also determines whether or not the special probability flag is set (step 069SGS161). If the special probability flag is set (step 069SGS161; Yes), the process proceeds to step 069SGS174E, and if the special probability flag is not set (step 069SGS161; No), it further determines whether or not the value of the rescue time-saving counter is already 0 (step 069SGS162).

If the value of the rescue time reduction counter is already 0, that is, if the time reduction state is already B (step 069SGS162; Yes), proceed to step 069SGS174E. If the value of the rescue time reduction counter is not 0 (step 069SGS162; No), decrement the value of the rescue time reduction counter by 1 (step 069SGS163), and determine whether the value of the rescue time reduction counter after decrementing the value by 1 has become 0 (step 069SGS164).

If the value of the rescue time reduction counter is not 0 (step 069SGS164; No), the CPU 103 executes the processes of steps 069SGS141 to 069SGS145, and then executes the process of step 069SGS152 without turning off the right hit lamp 069SG132 or sending a right hit LED off notification command, and then proceeds to step 069SGS174E.

In addition, if the value of the rescue time reduction counter becomes 0 (step 069SGS164; Yes), the CPU 103 executes the processes of steps 069SGS172 to 069SGS174, and then sets a specific number (e.g., 4) to a specific number reaching information output counter indicating the number of times that the specific number reaching information, indicating that the variable display number has reached 1100 times without the variable display result being a jackpot, is output from an external output terminal (not shown) to a hall management computer or the like, without starting the illumination of the right hit lamp 069SG132 or sending a right hit LED start notification command, and sets a specific number (e.g., 4) to a specific number reaching information output counter indicating the number of times that the specific number reaching information is output from an external output terminal (not shown) to a hall management computer or the like, and sets a specific number reaching information output period timer indicating the output period for each specific number reaching information, and proceeds to step 069SGS174E (step 069SGS174C, step SGS174D).

In addition, in the information output process at the time of the next interrupt (step S23), the CPU 103 outputs the specific count reaching information for the period set in the specific count reaching information output period timer the number of times set in the specific count reaching information output number counter.

Then, in step 069SGS174E, the CPU 103 sets a transition flag for turning on/off the right hit lamp 069SG132 and sending a right hit LED on notification command and a right hit LED off notification command within the display process (step 069SGS24A) at the time of the next interrupt, and then executes the process of step 069SGS175 to end the special symbol stop process.

As shown in FIG. 11-34, in the display process, the CPU 103 first determines whether the transition flag is set, that is, whether the special symbol stop process that results in a miss in the variable display result was executed at the previous interrupt (step 069SGS181). If the transition flag is not set (step 069SGS181; No), the display process is terminated. If the transition flag is set (step 069SGS181; Yes), the transition flag is cleared (step 069SGS182), and the stored states of the time-saving flag A and the time-saving flag B are compared with the current states of the time-saving flag A and the time-saving flag B (step 069SGS183), and it is determined whether the time-saving flag A or the time-saving flag B has changed to the on state (set state) (step 069SGS184).

If the time-saving flag A or the time-saving flag B has changed to the on state, that is, if the time-saving state A or the time-saving state B has been newly controlled (step 069SGS184; Yes), the right-hit lamp 069SG132 and the time-saving lamp 069SG134 are set to light, and a right-hit LED lighting notification command is sent to the performance control board 12 to end the display process (step 069SGS185, step 069SGS186).

If the time-saving flag A or the time-saving flag B has not changed to the on state (step 069SGS184; No), it is further determined whether the time-saving flag A or the time-saving flag B has changed to the off state (cleared state) (step 069SGS187). If the time-saving flag A or the time-saving flag B has not changed to the off state (step 069SGS187; N), the display process is terminated, and if the time-saving flag A or the time-saving flag B has changed to the off state, that is, if the time-saving state A or the time-saving state B has been newly controlled to the normal state (step 069SGS187; Yes), the right-hit lamp 069SG132 and the time-saving lamp 069SG134 are set to be turned off, and a right-hit LED off notification command is sent to the performance control board 12, and the display process is terminated (step 069SGS188, step 069SGS189).

In addition, in the display control process (step 069SGS16A), the CPU 103 may turn on or off the right hit lamp 069SG132 and the time-saving lamp 069SG134 according to the lighting setting in step 069SGS185 or the lighting-off setting in the process of step 069SGS188.

Furthermore, the performance control CPU 120 starts displaying the right hit notification images 069SG400, 069SG401 and the text "Right Hit" on the screen of the image display device 5 in response to receiving a right hit LED lighting notification command from the CPU 103, and ends displaying the right hit notification images 069SG400, 069SG401 and the text "Right Hit" in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 in response to receiving a right hit LED turning off notification command from the CPU 103.

(Feature 069SG Modification 3)
In the above embodiment, when the value of the rescue time reduction counter is between 1 and 300, a special number display is displayed in the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5, suggesting that the number of variable displays remaining until the rescue time reduction is reached is decreasing. However, the present invention is not limited to this form, and a rescue time reduction suggestion display that suggests that the number of variable displays remaining until the rescue time reduction is reached is decreasing, which is different from the special number display, may also be executed.

First, the presentation configuration in Figures 11-35 (A) and (B) is the same as the presentation configuration for the variable display count display and special count display (white mode) shown in Figures 11-21 (A) and (B), so a description will be omitted. Also, the presentation configuration other than the rescue time reduction suggestion presentation in Figures 11-35 (C) and (D) is the same as the presentation configuration for the special count display (red mode) shown in Figure 11-21 (C), so a description will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 11-35(C), when the value of the rescue time reduction counter is between 11 and 30 and the first stage of the rescue time reduction suggestion performance is executed, the first suggestion image (in this example, the first suggestion image 069SG800A related to the shutter image 069SG250 at the time of reaching the rescue time reduction, which covers the upper 1/4 area of the background image) is superimposed on the first background image 069SG310. The first suggestion image is an image with a higher display priority than the background image (it has a higher display layer and appears to be displayed in front). Therefore, the player sees a decrease in visibility of the background image in the portion where the first suggestion image is superimposed. In other words, the background image at this time is displayed as the first background image 069SG310 including the first suggestion image 069SG800A.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-35(D), when the value of the rescue time reduction counter is between 1 and 10 and the second stage of the rescue time reduction suggestion performance is executed, a second suggestion image (in this example, a second suggestion image 069SG800B related to the shutter image 069SG250 at the time of reaching the rescue time reduction, which covers the upper 1/2 area of the background image) is superimposed on the first background image 069SG310. The second suggestion image has a higher display priority than the background image (it has a higher display layer and appears to be displayed in front). Therefore, the player sees a decrease in visibility of the background image in the portion where the second suggestion image is superimposed. In other words, the background image at this time is displayed as the first background image 069SG310 including the second suggestion image 069SG800B.

In this embodiment, the background image including the suggestion image (first suggestion image, second suggestion image) from the rescue time reduction suggestion performance is displayed as a background image on the image display device 5 even when the variable display of the special pattern is not being executed. In this way, by varying the display mode of the interface image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 according to the value of the rescue time reduction counter regardless of whether the variable display of the special pattern is being executed or not, it is possible to suggest that the number of variable displays remaining until the rescue time reduction is reached is getting low, and interest can be increased.

In this example, a suggestion image (first suggestion image, second suggestion image) related to the shutter image when the rescue time reduction is reached is superimposed on the background image as an image that changes the interface image, but the present invention is not limited to this form, and an image that is not related to the shutter image when the rescue time reduction is reached may be superimposed on the background image. For example, an effect image whose display area and display color differ according to the value of the rescue time reduction counter may be superimposed, and when the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 21 or more, the display area of the effect image may be a first area (e.g., 25% of the screen) and the display color may be blue, but when the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 20 or less, the display area of the effect image may be a second area (e.g., 50% of the screen) that is larger than the first area and the display color may be red.

(Explanation of various performances)
Next, various effects that can be executed by the effect control CPU 120 will be described with reference to Figs. 11-36 to 11-50. Fig. 11-36 is a diagram for explaining the contents of various effects. Fig. 11-37 is a diagram showing an example of the effect operation of the countdown notice. Fig. 11-38 is a diagram showing an example of the effect operation of the countdown notice. Fig. 11-39 is a diagram showing an example of the effect operation of the reserve change notice. Fig. 11-40 is a diagram showing an example of the effect operation of the pattern chance eye notice. Fig. 11-41 is a diagram showing an example of the effect display notice. Figs. 11-42 (A) to (D) are diagrams showing a look-ahead notice type determination table. Figs. 11-43 (A) to (F) are diagrams showing a look-ahead notice effect pattern determination table. Fig. 11-44 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start setting process. Fig. 11-45 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect processing during variable display. Fig. 11-46 (A) is a diagram showing a reach notice execution determination table, and (B) to (E) are diagrams showing a button notice performance pattern determination table. Fig. 11-47 (A) to (D) are diagrams showing a character notice pattern determination table. Fig. 11-48 (A) to (D) are diagrams showing a movable body operation pattern determination table. Fig. 11-49 (A) to (D) are diagrams showing a movable body notice pattern determination table. Fig. 11-50 (A) to (C) are diagrams for explaining the characteristics according to the game state.

As shown in FIG. 11-36, the presentation control CPU 120 can execute countdown notices, hold change notices, symbol chance notices, and effect display notices as pre-execution previews that predict the probability of a jackpot in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is pending).

In addition, the presentation control CPU 120 can execute a moving object preview, a character preview, a reach preview, and a button preview as preview presentations that indicate that a jackpot will be reached in the variable display.

The presentation control CPU 120 can also execute a hit/miss button presentation and a movable body presentation as a deciding presentation that notifies the player whether or not the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state in a variable display based on the super reach jackpot variation pattern (SP reach A to E).

In addition, after the variable display part ends, in which the variable display of the decorative symbols in the variable display based on the Super Reach jackpot variable pattern (SP Reach A to E) is executed, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a post-performance in the post-performance part that notifies the player of the expected number of balls to be awarded in the jackpot game state in a specific manner.

In addition, when control of one of the special states, the guaranteed bonus state, time-saving state A, or time-saving state B, begins, the presentation control CPU 120 can execute an entry presentation that notifies the start of control of each game state by displaying a state start indication.

(Preview preview performance)
Next, the foreseeing notice performance will be explained. In this embodiment, in the start winning judgment process of step S101 in FIG. 6, the CPU 103 detects the occurrence of the start winning, stores reserved information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and executes a process of updating the reserved memory number. When the start winning occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of big win) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as reserved information, and a process for predicting the display result and the variation pattern based on the extracted random number value is executed. After storing the reserved information and the reserved memory number, a performance control command is sent to the performance control board 12 to specify the judgment results such as the occurrence of the start winning, the reserved memory number, and the foreseeing judgment.

In the look-ahead notice setting process of step S161 in the look-ahead process of FIG. 10, the presentation control CPU 120, based on the information received from the main board 11, determines whether or not to execute a look-ahead notice presentation that suggests that the reserved memory stored in a specified area of the RAM 102 will be controlled to a jackpot game state, and if so, the type of look-ahead notice presentation to be executed (for example, whether to select "countdown notice," "reserved change notice," "pattern chance notice," or "effect display notice," and the presentation pattern of each notice).

In this embodiment, the execution of the look-ahead preview performance is determined on the condition that the number of reserved memories is "4", but it may also be determined when the number of reserved memories is other than "4". Also, although the type of look-ahead preview performance to be executed is determined to be one of countdown preview, reserved change preview, symbol chance preview, and effect display preview, the present invention is not limited to this, and multiple previews may be executed simultaneously.

The "countdown preview" is a performance that executes a countdown such as "3" → "2" → "1" → "0" each time the variable display of a reserved memory that was not the subject of the look-ahead preview performance begins, until the variable display of the reserved memory that was the subject of the look-ahead preview performance (hereinafter also referred to as the target reserved memory) begins.

In this embodiment, the presentation pattern of the countdown announcement is determined from among the following patterns: ending the countdown at "3", ending at "2", ending at "1", and ending at "0". The expectation level increases in the order of ending at "3", ending at "2", ending at "1", and ending at "0" (expectation level: ending at "3" < ending at "2" < ending at "1" < ending at "0").

For example, as shown in FIG. 11-37(A), when a start winning occurs, a countdown notice is executed and a pattern that ends at "0" is determined. After the variable display ends (see FIG. 11-37(B)), when the next variable display starts, a character image 069SG100D and a countdown display 069SG411 showing "3" are displayed (see FIG. 11-37(C)), and the variable display ends (see FIG. 11-37(D)). Next, when the next variable display starts, a character image 069SG100C different from the character image 069SG100D and a countdown display 069SG412 showing "2" are displayed (see FIG. 11-37(E)), and the variable display ends (see FIG. 11-37(F)).

Then, when the next variable display starts, a character image 069SG100A different from the character images 069SG100D and 069SG100C and a countdown display 069SG413 showing "1" are displayed (see FIG. 11-38(G)), and the variable display ends (see FIG. 11-38(H)). Then, when the next variable display starts, that is, a variable display of a pending target (for example, a super reach fluctuation pattern), a character image 069SG100B different from the character images 069SG100D to 069SG100A and a countdown display 069SG414 showing "0" are displayed (see FIG. 11-38(I)), and the countdown notice ends.

Although not specifically shown, if the "3" pattern is determined, the countdown preview ends when the character image 069SG100D and the countdown display 069SG411 showing "3" are displayed in FIG. 11-37 (C), if the "2" pattern is determined, the countdown preview ends when the character image 069SG100C and the countdown display 069SG412 showing "2" are displayed in FIG. 11-37 (E), and if the "1" pattern is determined, the countdown preview ends when the character image 069SG100A and the countdown display 069SG413 showing "1" are displayed in FIG. 11-38 (G).

The countdown presentation pattern is arbitrary, and five or more presentation patterns may be set. The countdown may also be allowed to start from a number other than "3." The countup may also go up from "0" → "1" → "2" → "3."

The "Hold Change Notice" is a display that changes the display color of the hold display of the target hold that is the subject of the pre-reading notice display until it is announced whether or not the target hold will be a jackpot in the variable display of the hold memory (target hold).

In this embodiment, the presentation patterns of the hold change notice include a pattern in which the display color of the hold display finally becomes "blue", a pattern in which it becomes "green", a pattern in which it becomes "red", and a pattern in which it becomes "gold", and one of these patterns is determined. Although detailed explanations are omitted in this embodiment, the change mode of the display color of the hold display (for example, at which timing the change occurs, such as at the time of the start winning, when the hold memory is consumed, or during the variable display period of the target hold, and if "red" is determined, whether to change to "red" from the beginning or to change gradually, such as "blue" → "green" → "red") can be determined arbitrarily. The expectation level increases in the order of "blue", "green", "red", and "gold" (expectation level: "blue" < "green" < "red" < "gold").

For example, as shown in FIG. 11-39(A), when a hold change notice is executed and a "red" pattern is determined following the occurrence of a start winning, the hold display of the target hold that was the subject of the hold change notice is displayed in white, and then the variable display ends. Then, when the next variable display starts, the display color of the target hold changes to "blue" (see FIG. 11-39(B)), and the variable display ends. Then, when the next variable display starts, the display color of the target hold changes from "blue" to "red" (see FIG. 11-39(C)), and the variable display ends. Then, the next variable display, that is, the variable display of the target hold (for example, a super reach fluctuation pattern), starts.

The number of presentation patterns for the pending change notice is arbitrary, and there may be five or more patterns. In addition, pending changes may not only involve a color change as described above, but may also involve changes to characters, items, etc.

"Pattern Chance Notice" is a display in which losing symbols are displayed as "even number symbol combinations" or "odd number symbol combinations" in the variable display of reserved memories that were not the subject of the pre-reading notice performance until the variable display of the reserved memories (target reserved) that became the subject of the pre-reading notice performance begins.

In this embodiment, the performance patterns of the symbol chance eye notice include a pattern in which the losing symbol is displayed as an "even symbol combination" (for example, "264") and a pattern in which the losing symbol is displayed as an "odd symbol combination" (for example, "135"), and based on the variable display result, it is decided whether the losing symbol is an "even symbol combination" or an "odd symbol combination". In addition, the symbol combination of the "even symbol combination" or the "odd symbol combination" may be decided from among a plurality of types. In addition, the display color of the pedestal display unit 069SG052 described later that constitutes the decorative symbol may be a "blue" pattern, a "green" pattern, a "red" pattern, or a "gold" pattern, and one of these patterns is decided. The expectation level is higher when the losing symbol is an "odd symbol combination" than when it is an "even symbol combination". Additionally, the colors of the base display increase in order of "blue," "green," "red," and "gold" (expectation level: "blue" < "green" < "red" < "gold").

For example, as shown in FIG. 11-40(A), when a start winning occurs and the execution of the symbol chance eye prediction and the presentation pattern are determined, the variable display ends and the symbol chance eye prediction starts from the next variable display.

If the losing symbol is determined to be an "even number symbol combination" and the base display unit 069SG052 is determined to be a "blue" pattern, the losing symbol will be displayed as an even number symbol combination of "246" and the base display unit 069SG052 will be displayed in "blue" (see Figures 11-40 (B1) (B2)). On the other hand, if the losing symbol is determined to be an "odd number symbol combination" and the base display unit 069SG052 is determined to be a "red" pattern, the losing symbol will be displayed as an odd number symbol combination of "375" and the base display unit 069SG052 will be displayed in "red" (see Figures 11-40 (C1) (C2)).

In this embodiment, the decorative design is composed of a number display section 069SG051 consisting of the numbers "1" to "9", and a base display section 069SG052 that is displayed on a lower display layer (back side) than the number display section 069SG051. The base display section 069SG052 is formed in a roughly rectangular shape so as to surround the numbers "1" to "9" displayed on the number display section 069SG051, and is displayed in a specified display color (such as white), which is a display mode common to all numbers ("1" to "9").

The number of patterns for the symbol chance prediction is arbitrary, and the number of symbol combinations and the display colors of the base display unit 069SG052 may have five or more patterns. Character images and decorative images may be displayed on the base display unit 069SG052. For example, individual character images corresponding to each number ("1" to "9") may be displayed.

The "effect display preview" is a performance in which an effect image is displayed in the area below the movable body 32 on the display screen of the image display device 5 when the variable display of a reserved memory that was not the subject of the look-ahead preview performance begins until the variable display of the reserved memory (target reserved) that is the subject of the look-ahead preview performance begins.

In this embodiment, the presentation patterns of the effect display preview include a "blue" pattern, a "green" pattern, a "red" pattern, and a "gold" pattern for the effect image, and one of these patterns is determined. Although detailed explanation is omitted in this embodiment, the manner in which the display color of the effect image changes (for example, if "red" is determined, the color may be changed to "red" from the beginning, or may be changed in stages such as "blue" → "green" → "red") can be determined arbitrarily. The expectation level increases in the order of "blue", "green", "red", and "gold" (expectation level: "blue" < "green" < "red" < "gold").

For example, as shown in FIG. 11-41(A), when an effect display preview is executed and a "red" pattern is determined in response to the occurrence of a start winning, the variable display ends (see FIG. 11-41(B)), the next variable display starts (see FIG. 11-41(C)), and when the decorative pattern is displayed in a static state, a "blue" effect image 069SG420 is displayed in the area below the movable body 32 on the display screen of the image display device 5 (see FIG. 11-41(D)). Next, when the next variable display starts, the effect image 069SG420 is hidden (see FIG. 11-41(E)), and when the decorative pattern is displayed in a static state, a "red" effect image 069SG420 is displayed in the area below the movable body 32 on the display screen of the image display device 5 (see FIG. 11-41(F)). Then, when the next variable display, that is, the variable display of the target hold (for example, the super reach variable pattern), begins, the effect image 069SG420 becomes hidden (see Figure 11-41 (G)).

The number of presentation patterns for the effect display preview is arbitrary, and there may be five or more presentation patterns. The size of the effect image 069SG420 may be varied depending on the degree of expectation. The effect image 069SG420 may be displayed not only at the end of the variable display, but also at the start of the variable display or at other times.

Next, the pre-reading notice performance type determination tables A to D used by the performance control CPU 120 in the pre-reading notice setting process of step S161 to determine whether or not to execute a pre-reading notice performance that suggests that the reserved memory stored in a specified area of the RAM 102 will be controlled to a jackpot game state based on information received from the main board 11, and the type of pre-reading notice performance to be executed if execution is determined will be described. In FIG. 11-42, (A) is the pre-reading notice performance type determination table A used in the normal state, (B) is the pre-reading notice performance type determination table B used in the probability change state, (C) is the pre-reading notice performance type determination table C used in the time-saving state A, and (D) is the pre-reading notice performance type determination table D used in the time-saving state B. In the following, random numbers from 0 to 99 are used as random numbers for determining the various performance types.

As shown in FIG. 11-42(A), in the notice performance type determination table A used when the game state is the normal state, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", 20 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 20 judgment values are assigned to "countdown notice", 20 judgment values are assigned to "hold change notice", 20 judgment values are assigned to "symbol chance eye notice", and 20 judgment values are assigned to "effect display notice". On the other hand, when the variable display result is a "miss", 50 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 10 judgment values are assigned to "countdown notice", 10 judgment values are assigned to "hold change notice", 15 judgment values are assigned to "symbol chance eye notice", and 15 judgment values are assigned to "effect display notice".

As shown in FIG. 11-42(B), in the notice performance type determination table B used when the game state is in the probability variable state, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", 20 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 20 judgment values are assigned to "countdown notice", 20 judgment values are assigned to "hold change notice", 20 judgment values are assigned to "symbol chance eye notice", and 20 judgment values are assigned to "effect display notice". On the other hand, when the variable display result is a "miss", 60 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 5 judgment values are assigned to "countdown notice", 5 judgment values are assigned to "hold change notice", 15 judgment values are assigned to "symbol chance eye notice", and 15 judgment values are assigned to "effect display notice".

As shown in FIG. 11-42(C), in the pre-notification performance type determination table C used when the game state is the time-saving state A, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", 40 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 20 judgment values are assigned to "reserved change pre-notification", 20 judgment values are assigned to "symbol chance eye pre-notification", and 20 judgment values are assigned to "effect display pre-notification". On the other hand, when the variable display result is a "miss", 70 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 10 judgment values are assigned to "reserved change pre-notification", 10 judgment values are assigned to "symbol chance eye pre-notification", and 10 judgment values are assigned to "effect display pre-notification".

As shown in FIG. 11-42 (D), in the advance notice performance type determination table D used when the game state is time-saving state B, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", 70 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", and 30 judgment values are assigned to "symbol chance eye advancement". On the other hand, when the variable display result is a "miss", 100 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution".

In this way, when the variable display result is a "miss," the rate of "not executing" the pre-reading preview performance increases in the following order: normal state, special chance state, time-saving state A, and time-saving state B. In other words, it is most likely to be executed in the special chance state, and not executed (least likely to be executed) in time-saving state B. In addition, the "countdown preview" is a preview that is not executed in time-saving state A and time-saving state B, and the "hold change preview" and "effect display preview" are previews that are not executed in time-saving state B.

Here, the type of pre-reading preview performance is determined by comparing the three game states in which time-saving control is executed (high probability state, time-saving state A, time-saving state B).

First, the execution rate of the pre-reading preview performance when the variable display result is a "jackpot" is 80% in the special state, 60% in time-saving state A, and 30% in time-saving state B. The number of types of pre-reading preview performance that can be determined when the variable display result is a "miss" is 40% in the special state, 30% in time-saving state A, and 0% (not executed) in time-saving state B.

In addition, the number of types of pre-reading preview performances that can be determined when the variable display result is a "jackpot" is "four types" in the special state, "three types" in time-saving state A, and "two types" in time-saving state B. The number of types of pre-reading preview performances that can be determined when the variable display result is a "miss" is "four types" in the special state, "three types" in time-saving state A, and "zero types (not executed)" in time-saving state B.

In this way, in time-saving state B, only if the variable display result is a "jackpot," the "symbol chance eye forecast" can be executed, and no other look-ahead forecast effects are executed, and if the variable display result is a "miss," no look-ahead forecast effects are executed. In other words, in time-saving state B, the execution rate of look-ahead forecast effects is lower than in the probability bonus state or time-saving state A, and the number of possible types of effects that can be determined is smaller.

In addition, in time-saving state B, a "Pattern Chance Eye Notice" can be executed as a look-ahead notice performance. This is because in time-saving state B, a change pattern with a short variable display time (such as an ultra-shortened non-reach) is likely to be determined, and when a look-ahead performance is executed in one variable display, the time is short, so it is easy to miss color changes in small reserved display areas such as "reserved change notices." In addition, while a "countdown notice" is executed in multiple variable displays, it is difficult to notice the change in count because the period for displaying the count in one variable display is short. In contrast, a "Pattern Chance Eye Notice" is executed in multiple variable displays, and the change in display color of the decorative pattern and the base can be suitably shown when the decorative pattern is stopped, so it can be said to be a look-ahead notice performance suitable for execution in time-saving state B.

In the present embodiment, the example shows a form in which the pre-reading preview performance is not executed when the variable display result is a "miss" in the time-saving state B, but the present invention is not limited to this. If the execution rate of the pre-reading preview performance when the variable display result is a "miss" in the time-saving state B is lower than the execution rate of the pre-reading preview performance when the variable display result is a "miss" in the special probability state or the time-saving state A, the pre-reading preview performance may be executed when the variable display result is a "miss" in the time-saving state B. Also, if the number of types of pre-reading preview performance that can be determined when the variable display result is a "miss" is less than the number of types of pre-reading preview performance that can be determined when the variable display result is a "miss" in the special probability state or the time-saving state A, two or more types of pre-reading preview performance may be executed in the time-saving state B.

Next, we will explain the effect pattern determination tables A to F that the effect control CPU 120 uses when determining the effect pattern of the pre-reading preview effect that has been decided to be executed. In Figure 11-43, (A) is effect pattern determination table A used in the normal state, (B) is effect pattern determination table B used in the special probability state, (C) is effect pattern determination table C used in the time-saving state A, (D) is effect pattern determination table D used in the time-saving state B, (E) is effect pattern determination table E used in the normal state, and (F) is effect pattern determination table F used in the special probability state.

As shown in FIG. 11-43(A), in the presentation pattern determination table A, which is commonly used to determine the presentation patterns of the reserved change notice, the symbol chance notice, and the effect display notice when the game state is normal, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", 10 judgment values are assigned to "blue", 20 judgment values are assigned to "green", 50 judgment values are assigned to "red", and 20 judgment values are assigned to "gold". On the other hand, when the variable display result is a "miss", 65 judgment values are assigned to "blue", 20 judgment values are assigned to "green", 10 judgment values are assigned to "red", and 5 judgment values are assigned to "gold".

As shown in FIG. 11-43(B), in the presentation pattern determination table B, which is commonly used to determine the presentation patterns of the reserved change notice, the symbol chance notice, and the effect display notice when the game state is in the probability change state, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", 10 judgment values are assigned to "blue", 20 judgment values are assigned to "green", 50 judgment values are assigned to "red", and 20 judgment values are assigned to "gold". On the other hand, when the variable display result is a "miss", 65 judgment values are assigned to "blue", 20 judgment values are assigned to "green", 10 judgment values are assigned to "red", and 5 judgment values are assigned to "gold".

As shown in FIG. 11-43(C), in the presentation pattern determination table C, which is commonly used to determine the presentation patterns of the reserved change notice, the symbol chance notice, and the effect display notice when the game state is the time-saving state A, when the variable display result is a "jackpot," 10 judgment values are assigned to "blue," 20 judgment values are assigned to "green," and 70 judgment values are assigned to "red." On the other hand, when the variable display result is a "miss," 70 judgment values are assigned to "blue," 20 judgment values are assigned to "green," and 10 judgment values are assigned to "red."

As shown in FIG. 11-43 (D), in the presentation pattern determination table D used to determine the presentation pattern of the symbol chance eye notice when the game state is time-saving state B, when the variable display result is a "jackpot," 90 judgment values are assigned to "red," and 10 judgment values are assigned to "gold." On the other hand, when the variable display result is a "miss," the "symbol chance eye notice" is not executed, and therefore no judgment values are assigned to any presentation patterns.

Also, as shown in FIG. 11-43(E), in the presentation pattern determination table E used to determine the presentation pattern of the countdown notice when the game state is in the normal state, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", 5 judgment values are assigned to the pattern ending in "3", 5 judgment values are assigned to the pattern ending in "2", 20 judgment values are assigned to the pattern ending in "1", and 70 judgment values are assigned to the pattern ending in "0". On the other hand, when the variable display result is a "miss", 65 judgment values are assigned to the pattern ending in "3", 20 judgment values are assigned to the pattern ending in "2", 10 judgment values are assigned to the pattern ending in "1", and 5 judgment values are assigned to the pattern ending in "0".

As shown in FIG. 11-43(F), in the presentation pattern determination table F used to determine the presentation pattern of the countdown notice when the game state is in the probability state, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", 5 judgment values are assigned to the pattern ending in "3", 5 judgment values are assigned to the pattern ending in "2", 20 judgment values are assigned to the pattern ending in "1", and 70 judgment values are assigned to the pattern ending in "0". On the other hand, when the variable display result is a "miss", 50 judgment values are assigned to the pattern ending in "3", 20 judgment values are assigned to the pattern ending in "2", 20 judgment values are assigned to the pattern ending in "1", and 10 judgment values are assigned to the pattern ending in "0".

In this way, the presentation patterns for the pending change notice, the symbol chance notice, and the effect display notice are set so that the expectation level increases in the order of "blue," "green," "red," and "gold" (expectation level: "blue" < "green" < "red" < "gold"). Also, the presentation patterns for the countdown notice are set so that the expectation level increases in the order of "end at 3," "end at 2," "end at 1," and "end at 0" (expectation level: "end at 3" < "end at 2" < "end at 1" < "0").

Here, the presentation patterns of various announcements are determined by comparing the three game states in which time-saving control is executed (high probability state, time-saving state A, time-saving state B).

In addition, the number of presentation patterns for various notices that can be determined when the variable display result is a "jackpot" is "four types" in the special state, "three types" in time-saving state A, and "two types" in time-saving state B. The number of presentation patterns for various notices that can be determined when the variable display result is a "miss" is "four types" in the special state, "three types" in time-saving state A, and "zero types (not executed)" in time-saving state B.

In this way, in time-saving state B, when the variable display result is a "jackpot," one of two types, "red" or "gold," can be determined as the presentation pattern for the "Pattern Chance Eye Notice." Also, when the variable display result is a "miss," no presentation pattern for the "Pattern Chance Eye Notice" is determined (not executed). In other words, in time-saving state B, there are fewer presentation patterns that can be determined than in the special state or time-saving state A.

(Preview performance)
Next, the preview performance will be described. As shown in Fig. 11-36, the preview performances "movable object preview", "character preview", "reach preview" and "button preview" can be executed at a predetermined time in the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the super reach fluctuation pattern, and the performance control CPU 120 determines whether to execute various preview performances in the variable display start setting process shown in Fig. 11-44, and if execution is determined, the performance pattern of the preview performance to be executed.

The "movable object preview" is a presentation that suggests that a jackpot will be controlled by vibrating the movable object 32 up and down when the variable display starts (see Figure 11-57 (A1) (B1)). The presentation patterns for the movable object preview include a "vibration (small) pattern" in which the amplitude of the vertical vibration is small, and a "vibration (large) pattern" in which the amplitude of the vertical vibration is larger than the vibration (small), and depending on the result of the variable display, it is decided whether to execute the "vibration (small) pattern" or the "vibration (large) pattern".

The movable body 32 can move vertically between an origin position above the display screen of the image display device 5 and a performance position approximately in the center of the display screen, and can fall from the origin position to the performance position under its own weight. The vibration in the movable body preview is a performance in which the movable body 32 vibrates vertically between the origin position and a specified position between the origin position and the performance position. Furthermore, the performance patterns are not limited to the above, and three or more types may be set.

In the "character preview," a specific character appears during the period from when the variable display begins until the variable display state of the decorative pattern becomes a reach state, and the character's lines are displayed while the audio of the displayed lines is output from speakers 8L, 8R to incite the player as to whether or not the reach state will occur (see Figure 11-57 (A2) (B2)). The reach preview presentation patterns include a "line A pattern" in which the character's lines are "Reach?" and a "line B pattern" in which the character's lines are "Maybe it's reach!!", and depending on the result of the variable display, either non-execution, "line A pattern," or "line B pattern" is determined. The content of the lines is arbitrary and may be lines other than those mentioned above.

The character's dialogue patterns are not limited to the above, and three or more types may be set. Also, the type of character does not change, but it may be possible to select one of multiple types of characters depending on the variable display result.

The "reach preview" is a presentation that indicates whether or not a decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative pattern displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L will be displayed in a stopped state in the right decorative pattern display area 5R after the variable display of decorative patterns has begun and the decorative pattern that was displayed in a stopped state in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is displayed in a stopped state in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, i.e., whether or not a reach state will occur (see Figures 11-57 (A3 to A5), (B3 to B5)).

Specifically, after the decorative pattern that was variably displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is stopped and displayed, the deceleration display of the decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative pattern stopped and displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L begins just before the stop display position in the variably displayed right decorative pattern display area 5R (see FIG. 11-57 (A4), (B4)). Then, when the operation by the player is detected within a predetermined operation effective period after the deceleration display begins, or when the operation is not detected and the operation effective period has elapsed, if the reach state does not occur, the decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative pattern stopped and displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L passes the stop display position and the next decorative pattern is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 11-57 (A5), (B5)), and if the reach state occurs, the decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative pattern stopped and displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is stopped and displayed at the stop display position.

The reach mode is a mode (also called a reach performance) in which, from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbols (identification information) until the display result is derived and displayed, all decorative symbols (e.g., the left and right symbols) excluding one decorative symbol (e.g., the middle symbol) from the combination of multiple decorative symbols (e.g., "333") that make up the jackpot display result are displayed stationary, and then the one decorative symbol (e.g., the middle symbol) is displayed variably.

When the fluctuation pattern is non-reach or SP reach, the performance control CPU 120 determines by lottery whether to execute the reach notice in the reach notice execution decision process of step 069SGS278 described below, regardless of whether the variable display result is a jackpot display result, and sets the performance control pattern (process table) according to the decision. Also, when the fluctuation pattern is non-reach, the reach mode does not appear after the reach notice is executed, and when the fluctuation pattern is SP reach, the reach mode appears after the reach notice is executed, and the SP reach performance is executed.

The "button notice" is an effect that is executed when the reach notice is executed, from the start of the deceleration display of the decorative pattern in the right decorative pattern display area 5R that has the same number as the decorative pattern displayed in a stopped state in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, until the specified effective operation period has elapsed (see Fig. 11-57 (A4) (B4)). Specifically, it is an operation promotion effect that encourages the operation of the push button 31B from the start of the deceleration display of the decorative pattern until the specified effective operation period has elapsed, and it starts with the display of the operation promotion display and a button image that resembles the push button 31B, and ends when the operation of the push button 31B is detected within the effective operation period, or when the effective operation period has elapsed without any operation being detected, with the operation promotion display and button image going invisible.

The presentation patterns (operation promotion modes) of the button preview include a "long press pattern" that encourages the user to press and hold the push button 31B for a specified operation period, a "repeated press pattern" that encourages the user to repeatedly press the push button 31B for a specified operation period, and a "single hit pattern" that encourages the user to press the push button 31B once. Depending on the variable display result, the non-execution, "long press pattern," "repeated press pattern," or "single hit pattern" is determined. Note that the presentation patterns are not limited to the above, and four or more types may be set, or two or less types may be set.

The operation prompt will say "Long press!" for the "long press pattern," "Continuous tap!" for the "rapid tap pattern," and "One hit!" for the "single hit pattern."

(Decisive performance)
Next, the deciding performance will be explained. As shown in Fig. 11-36, the deciding performance is a performance that is executed before informing whether or not the jackpot is controlled at the end of the SP reach performance in the variable display of the super reach variation pattern (see Fig. 11-58 (C4 to C8), Fig. 11-59 (A10 to D3), (B7 to D3)), and there are a "win/lose button performance" that is executed during a predetermined operation effective period, and a "movable body performance" that is executed after the "win/lose button performance".

The "win/lose button effect" is an operation promotion effect that encourages the operation of the push button 31B until a specified valid operation period has elapsed. It begins with the display of an operation promotion display consisting of the text "RELEASE!!" or "PRESS!!" and a button image that resembles the push button 31B, and ends when operation of the push button 31B is detected within the valid operation period, or when the valid operation period has elapsed without any operation being detected, with the operation promotion display and button image going invisible (see Figure 11-58 (C4), Figure 11-59 (A8-A10), (B7)).

The presentation patterns include a "white pattern" in which the button LED 62 emits white light and the button image is displayed in white, and a "red pattern" in which the button LED 62 emits red light and the button image is displayed in red. In the "movable body operation pattern determination process" described below, if "Pattern A-1", "Pattern A-2", "Pattern B-1", or "Pattern B-2" is determined, the "white pattern" is determined, and if "Pattern B-3" is determined, the "red pattern" is determined. It is also possible to determine either the "white pattern" or the "red pattern" depending on the variable display result, regardless of the "movable body operation pattern determination process". Furthermore, the presentation patterns are not limited to the above, and three or more types may be set, or only one type may be set.

The "movable body effect" is an effect that notifies whether or not the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state depending on whether or not the movable body 32 is dropped from the origin position to the effect position. Specifically, it is executed when the operation of the push button 31B is detected within the effective operation period in the "win/lose button effect", or when the effective operation period has elapsed without any operation being detected, and if the movable body 32 drops from the origin position to the effect position, it notifies that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state, and if the movable body 32 does not drop from the origin position to the effect position, it notifies that the game will not be controlled to a jackpot game state, that is, it notifies that it has been a miss (see Figure 11-58 (C6) and Figure 11-59 (D1)).

When the movable body 32 falls, the movable body LED 208 and game effect lamp 9 built into the movable body 32 light up in a predetermined manner, and an image of an enemy character being defeated and an effect image emphasizing the movable body 32 are displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5. When the movable body 32 does not fall, the movable body LED 208 and game effect lamp 9 do not light up, and the image of an enemy character being defeated and the effect image are not displayed.

In this way, in the "decisive effect," if the variable display result is a jackpot, the hit/lose button effect is performed, and then the movable body effect is executed to notify the jackpot, and if the variable display result is a miss, the hit/lose button effect is performed, and then the miss effect is not executed, but instead the movable body effect is executed.

(Post-show performance)
Next, the post-effect performance will be described. As shown in Fig. 11-36, the post-effect performance is a performance in which the expected number of balls to be awarded in the jackpot game state is specified in the post-effect performance part after the variable display part in which the variable display of the decorative pattern in the variable display of the super reach jackpot variable pattern is executed is notified that the jackpot game state will be controlled (see Fig. 11-60 (D4 to D10)).

The variable display part is the period from the start of the variable display in the variable display period of the Super Reach jackpot variable pattern to the announcement of the variable display result, and the post-performance part is the period from the end of the variable display part in the variable display period of the Super Reach jackpot variable pattern to the end of the variable display. In other words, the variable display period of the Super Reach jackpot variable pattern includes the variable display part period and the post-performance part period. The post-performance may be executed during the fanfare period from the start of the jackpot game state to the start of the round game, or during the pattern determination period after the decorative pattern is displayed stationary in the variable display of the Super Reach jackpot variable pattern.

In the post-show performance, the ally character and enemy character that appeared in the SP reach performance are displayed, along with a planned ball number counter display showing the planned number of balls to be awarded in the jackpot game state, and the planned ball number counter display increases each time the ally character attacks the enemy character. Next, during a specified operation valid period, an operation prompt display consisting of the characters "Push!" and a button image imitating the push button 31B are displayed, and when operation of the push button 31B is detected within the operation valid period, or when operation is not detected and the operation valid period has elapsed, the ally character defeats the enemy character, a specified number (e.g., 1000 or 1500) is displayed on the planned ball number counter display, and the planned number of balls to be awarded during the jackpot is announced. Then, after the post-show performance ends, the jackpot game state begins.

(Rush-in performance)
Next, the entry performance will be described. As shown in FIG. 11-36, the entry performance includes a "entry introduction performance" executed before the start of the "probability variable entry performance" and the "time-saving entry performance A", a "probability variable entry performance" executed when the control of the probability variable state starts after the end of the big win game state, a "time-saving entry performance A" executed when the control of the time-saving state A starts after the end of the big win game state, and a "time-saving entry performance B" executed when the control of the time-saving state B starts because 900 variable displays have been executed without being controlled to the big win game state in the low probability state. In addition, the timing at which the rescue time-saving reaching variation (the variable display when the value of the rescue time-saving counter becomes 0) at which the "time-saving entry performance B" is executed is started, that is, a "shutter performance" (see FIG. 11-23 (B) (C), FIG. 11-25 (B) (C)) is executed before the execution of the "time-saving entry performance B".

Specifically, the "high probability of winning" and "time-saving entry effect A" are executed during the ending period of the jackpot game state, and the "time-saving entry effect B" is executed during the pattern determination period (e.g., 20 seconds) after the 900th variable display (rescue time-saving arrival fluctuation) at which the start condition for control of time-saving state B is met has ended.

The "Time-saving entry effect A" is an effect that notifies the player that control of the time-saving state A will begin by displaying the words "Entering BATTLE RUSH!!" after the entry introduction effect (see Fig. 11-63 (A) to (C)) is executed (see Fig. 11-63 (D)).

The "high probability entry effect" is an effect that notifies players that control of the high probability state will begin by displaying the characters "Extreme" in addition to the characters "BATTLE RUSH ENTERED!!" after the entry introductory effect (see Fig. 11-63 (A) to (C)) (see Fig. 11-63 (D) and Fig. 11-64 (A1 to A4)).

The "Time-saving entry effect B" is an effect that indicates that the control of time-saving state B will begin by displaying the words "Entering BATTLE RUSH!!" plus "Play 1100" without displaying the entry introduction effect (see Fig. 11-63 (A) to (C)) (see Fig. 11-63 (D) and Fig. 11-64 (B1 to B4)).

In addition, for the special bonus entry effect/time-saving entry effect B, the words "Enter BATTLE RUSH!!" may be displayed after the words "Extreme" or "Play/1100" are displayed.

(Variable display start setting process)
Next, the operation of the performance control board 12 will be described. FIG. 11-44 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the performance control process shown in FIG. 7. In the variable display start setting process, the performance control CPU 120 first judges whether the first variable start command reception flag is on or not (step 069SGS271). If the first variable start command reception flag is on (step 069SGS271; Yes), the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special chart reservation memory in the start winning reception command buffer are shifted up by one buffer number at a time (step 069SGS272). Note that the contents of the buffer number "1-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift to, so they are erased.

Specifically, the various command data stored in association with buffer number "1-1" of the first special chart reserved memory is shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-0", the various command data stored in association with buffer number "1-2" of the first special chart reserved memory is shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-1", the various command data stored in association with buffer number "1-3" of the first special chart reserved memory is shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-2", and the various command data stored in association with buffer number "1-4" of the first special chart reserved memory is shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-3".

In addition, if the first variable start command reception flag is not on (off) in step 069SGS271 (step 069SGS271; No), it is determined whether the second variable start command reception flag is on (step 069SGS273). If the second variable start command reception flag is not on (step 069SGS273; No), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and if the second variable start command reception flag is on (step 069SGS273; Yes), the various command data stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special chart reservation memory in the start winning reception command buffer is shifted up by one buffer number (step 069SGS274). Note that the contents of buffer number "2-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift to, so it is erased.

Specifically, the various command data stored in association with buffer number "2-1" of the second special chart reserved memory is shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-0", the various command data stored in association with buffer number "2-2" of the second special chart reserved memory is shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-1", the various command data stored in association with buffer number "2-3" of the second special chart reserved memory is shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-2", and the various command data stored in association with buffer number "2-4" of the second special chart reserved memory is shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-3".

After execution of step 069SGS272 or step 069SGS274, the performance control CPU 120 reads out the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (step 069SGS275). The variation pattern designation command is stored in the variation pattern designation command storage area in response to reception of the variation pattern designation command in the command analysis process (S75) shown in FIG. 6, and is erased when the variable display ends. The variation pattern designation command may be erased in response to reading.

Then, the display result (stopping pattern) of the decorative pattern is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (i.e., the received display result designation command) (step 069SGS276). In this case, the performance control CPU 120 determines the stopping pattern of the decorative pattern according to the display result specified by the display result designation command, and stores data indicating the determined stopping pattern of the decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area. Note that in the command analysis process (S75) shown in FIG. 6, the display result designation command received in response to reception of the display result designation command is stored in the display result designation command storage area, and is erased when the variable display ends. Note that the display result designation command may be erased upon reading.

In this feature section 069SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the jackpot A, the performance control CPU 120 determines, for example, from among a plurality of combinations of even number symbols other than "7" (for example, combinations of decorative symbols such as "222", "444", "666", and "888") as the stopping symbols. When the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command corresponding to the jackpot B, the stopping symbols are determined from a plurality of combinations of odd number symbols other than "7" (for example, combinations of decorative symbols such as "111", "333", "555", and "999"). When the received variable display result designation command is the fourth variable display result designation command corresponding to the jackpot C, the stopping symbols are determined to be a combination of decorative symbols with three symbols aligned in "7" (jackpot symbol). Furthermore, if the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command, which corresponds to a miss, a decorative pattern in which three symbols are not aligned is determined as the stopping pattern.

In addition, in the pre-reading prediction setting process of step S161 in the performance control process processing of FIG. 10, if the performance control CPU 120 decides to execute the aforementioned pattern chance prediction, it decides whether the stopped patterns of the variable display until the variable display of the target hold starts will be a combination of even patterns or a combination of odd patterns.

When determining these stopping symbols, the performance control CPU 120 may, for example, extract a random number for determining the stopping symbol, and determine the stopping symbol of the decorative symbol using a stopping symbol determination table in which data indicating the combination of decorative symbols is associated with a numerical value. In other words, the stopping symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating the combination of decorative symbols that corresponds to the numerical value that matches the extracted random number.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a rescue time reduction count A designation command that specifies that the rescue time reduction has been reached is stored in the command storage area, that is, whether or not the fluctuation is a rescue time reduction reaching fluctuation (step 069SGS276A). If it is a rescue time reduction reaching fluctuation (step 069SGS276A; Yes), a shutter performance setting process is executed (step 069SGS276B), and if it is not a rescue time reduction reaching fluctuation (step 069SGS276A; No), the process proceeds to step 069SGS277. In the shutter performance setting process, a period until the performance start is set in the shutter performance start waiting timer, and the corresponding shutter performance starts when the performance start waiting timer times out.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether the fluctuation pattern stored in the fluctuation pattern designation command storage area is a shortened non-reach fluctuation pattern or a super shortened non-reach fluctuation pattern (step 069SGS277). If the fluctuation pattern is a shortened non-reach fluctuation pattern or a super shortened non-reach fluctuation pattern (step 069SGS277; Yes), proceed to step 069SGS283. If the fluctuation pattern is not a shortened non-reach fluctuation pattern or a super shortened non-reach fluctuation pattern, that is, if the fluctuation pattern is a non-reach fluctuation pattern or a super reach fluctuation pattern (step 069SGS277; No), a reach notice execution decision process is executed (step 069SGS278).

In the reach notice execution decision process, for example, a random number (0 to 99) for deciding whether to execute the reach notice is extracted, and a reach notice execution decision table shown in Figure 11-46 (A) is used to decide whether or not to execute the reach notice.

In the reach notice execution decision table, as shown in FIG. 11-46(A), different judgment values are assigned to "non-execution" and "execution" for the game state when it is "normal state", "high probability state", "time-saving state A", and "time-saving state B", respectively, so that the judgment value numbers are as shown in FIG. 11-46(A).

Specifically, when the gaming state is in the "normal state", 50 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution" and 50 judgment values are assigned to "execution". When the gaming state is in the "high probability state", 50 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution" and 50 judgment values are assigned to "execution". When the gaming state is in the "time-saving state A", 60 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution" and 40 judgment values are assigned to "execution". When the gaming state is in the "time-saving state B", 80 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution" and 20 judgment values are assigned to "execution".

In this way, when comparing the three gameplay states excluding the normal state, the reach notice is set so that its execution rate decreases in the order of the special state, time-saving state A, and time-saving state B (execution rate: special state > time-saving state A > time-saving state B).

In this embodiment, an example is given of a form in which a reach notice can be executed with a probability of 20% in time-saving state B, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the reach notice may not be executed in time-saving state B.

Returning to FIG. 11-44, in step 069SGS279A, it is determined whether or not a reach notice has been decided to be executed in step 069SGS278 (step 069SGS279A). If it is determined that a reach notice has not been decided to be executed (step 069SGS279A; No), the process proceeds to step 069SGS280. If it is determined that a reach notice has been decided to be executed (step 069SGS279A; Yes), a presentation control pattern (process table) corresponding to the reach notice is selected (step 069SGS279B), and then a button notice pattern decision process is executed (step 069SGS279C).

In the button preview pattern determination process, for example, a random number (0 to 99) for determining the button preview pattern is extracted, and the button preview pattern is determined using button preview pattern determination tables A to D corresponding to the game state, as shown in Figures 11-46 (B) to (E).

In the button preview pattern determination tables A to D, as shown in Figures 11-46 (B) to (E), for each pattern of "non-execution", "one hit", "repeated hit", and "long press", different judgment values are assigned for the variable display results of "jackpot", "missed reach", and "not missed reach", so that the judgment value numbers are as shown in Figures 11-46 (B) to (E).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-46(B), in the button preview pattern determination table A used when the game state is the "normal state", when the variable display result is a "jackpot", 20 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 40 judgment values are assigned to "one hit", 20 judgment values are assigned to "continuous hits", and 20 judgment values are assigned to "long press". Also, when the variable display result is a "missed reach", 70 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 15 judgment values are assigned to "one hit", 10 judgment values are assigned to "continuous hits", and 5 judgment values are assigned to "long press". Also, when the variable display result is a "non-missed reach", 70 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 5 judgment values are assigned to "one hit", 10 judgment values are assigned to "continuous hits", and 15 judgment values are assigned to "long press".

Also, as shown in FIG. 11-46(C), in the button preview pattern determination table B used when the game state is the "high probability state," when the variable display result is a "jackpot," 20 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution," 40 judgment values are assigned to "one hit," 20 judgment values are assigned to "continuous hits," and 20 judgment values are assigned to "long press." Also, when the variable display result is a "missed reach," 70 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution," 15 judgment values are assigned to "one hit," 10 judgment values are assigned to "continuous hits," and 5 judgment values are assigned to "long press." Also, when the variable display result is a "non-missed reach," 70 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution," 5 judgment values are assigned to "one hit," 10 judgment values are assigned to "continuous hits," and 15 judgment values are assigned to "long press."

Also, as shown in FIG. 11-46(D), in the button preview pattern determination table C used when the game state is "time-saving state A", when the variable display result is "jackpot", 20 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 40 judgment values are assigned to "one hit", 20 judgment values are assigned to "continuous hits", and 20 judgment values are assigned to "long press". Also, when the variable display result is "missed reach", 80 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 10 judgment values are assigned to "one hit", 5 judgment values are assigned to "continuous hits", and 5 judgment values are assigned to "long press". Also, when the variable display result is "not missed reach", 80 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 5 judgment values are assigned to "one hit", 5 judgment values are assigned to "continuous hits", and 10 judgment values are assigned to "long press".

Also, as shown in FIG. 11-46 (E), in the button preview pattern determination table D used when the game state is "time-saving state B," when the variable display result is "jackpot," 90 judgment values are assigned to "no execution," and 10 judgment values are assigned to "one hit." When the variable display result is "missed reach," 95 judgment values are assigned to "no execution," and 5 judgment values are assigned to "one hit." When the number of reserved memories is "0," and the variable display result is "miss," 100 judgment values are assigned to "no execution."

In this way, when comparing the three gameplay states excluding the normal state, the button preview is set so that its execution rate decreases in the order of the special state, time-saving state A, and time-saving state B (execution rate: special state > time-saving state A > time-saving state B).

In particular, in the case of time-saving state B, if the variable display result is "miss" when the number of reserved memories is "0", a non-reach or SP reach variation pattern is determined, but the execution rate of the reach prediction is low, and even if the reach prediction is executed, the button prediction is not executed.

In this embodiment, an example is given of a form in which, when the variable display result is "miss" when the reserved memory number is "0" in time-saving state B, a reach notice is executed but a button notice is not executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the button notice may be executed at a rate lower than the execution rate of the button notice when the variable display result is "miss" when the reserved memory number is "0" in the probability bonus state or time-saving state A.

In addition, in the example shown, when the number of reserved memories is other than "0" in the time-saving state B and the variable display result is "miss," the button prediction is executed at a rate of 5% in the reach prediction, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the button prediction may not be executed if the variable display result is "miss," regardless of the number of reserved memories.

In addition, in the case of a jackpot or a missed reach, a "one-hit" pattern that prompts the player to perform a single operation may be executed, but the execution rate is extremely low, and "repeated taps" or "long press" operations that prompt the player to perform an operation for a specified effective operation period, that is, "repeated taps" or "long press" operations that are more cumbersome to operate than "one-hit" operations that prompt the player to perform a single operation, are not promoted.

Returning to FIG. 11-44, if it is determined in step 069SGS279A that the execution of a reach prediction has not been decided (step 069SGS279A; No), or after executing the button prediction pattern determination process in step 069SGS279C, the performance control CPU 120 executes a character prediction pattern determination process (step 069SGS280). In the character prediction pattern determination process, a random number (0 to 99) for determining the character prediction pattern is extracted, and the character prediction pattern is determined using character prediction pattern determination tables A to D corresponding to the game state, as shown in FIG. 11-47 (A) to (D).

In the character preview pattern determination tables A to D, as shown in Figures 11-47(A) to (D), for each pattern of "No execution", "Line A (Reach?)", and "Line B (Maybe it's a reach!!)", different judgment values are assigned when the variable display result is "jackpot" and when it is "miss", so that the judgment value numbers are as shown in Figures 11-47(A) to (D).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-47(A), in the character preview pattern determination table A used when the game state is "normal state", when the variable display result is "jackpot", 20 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 30 judgment values are assigned to "line A", and 50 judgment values are assigned to "line B". Also, when the variable display result is "miss", 70 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 20 judgment values are assigned to "line A", and 10 judgment values are assigned to "line B".

Also, as shown in FIG. 11-47(B), in the character preview pattern determination table B used when the game state is the "high probability state," when the variable display result is a "jackpot," 20 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution," 30 judgment values are assigned to "line A," and 50 judgment values are assigned to "line B." Also, when the variable display result is a "miss," 70 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution," 20 judgment values are assigned to "line A," and 10 judgment values are assigned to "line B."

Also, as shown in FIG. 11-47(C), in the character preview pattern determination table C used when the game state is "Time-saving state A", when the variable display result is "jackpot", 20 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 30 judgment values are assigned to "line A", and 50 judgment values are assigned to "line B".Also, when the variable display result is "miss", 80 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 10 judgment values are assigned to "line A", and 10 judgment values are assigned to "line B".

Also, as shown in FIG. 11-47 (D), in the character preview pattern determination table D used when the game state is "Time-saving state B", when the variable display result is "Big hit", 90 judgment values are assigned to "No execution", and 10 judgment values are assigned to "Line B". When the variable display result is "Miss", 95 judgment values are assigned to "No execution", and 5 judgment values are assigned to "Line A". When the reserved memory count is "0", and the variable display result is "Miss", 100 judgment values are assigned to "No execution".

In this way, when comparing the three gameplay states excluding the normal state, the character preview is set so that its execution rate decreases in the order of the special state, time-saving state A, and time-saving state B (execution rate: special state > time-saving state A > time-saving state B).

In particular, in the case of time-saving state B, if the number of reserved memories is "0" and the variable display result is "miss," a non-reach or SP reach variable pattern is determined, but the character preview is not executed in the variable display of either variable pattern.

In this embodiment, an example is given of a form in which a character preview is not executed when the variable display result is a "miss" when the reserved memory number is "0" in time-saving state B, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be possible to execute a character preview at a rate lower than the execution rate of the character preview when the variable display result is a "miss" when the reserved memory number is "0" in the probability bonus state or time-saving state A.

In addition, in the example shown, when the number of reserved memories is other than "0" in the time-saving state B and the variable display result is "miss," the character announcement is executed at a rate of 5%, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the character announcement may not be executed if the variable display result is "miss," regardless of the number of reserved memories.

Returning to FIG. 11-44, after executing the character preview pattern determination process in step 069SGS280, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the fluctuation pattern stored in the fluctuation pattern designation command storage area is a super reach fluctuation pattern (step 069SGS281A). If the fluctuation pattern is not a super reach fluctuation pattern, that is, if it is a non-reach fluctuation pattern (step 069SGS281A; No), proceed to step 069SGS282. If the fluctuation pattern is a super reach fluctuation pattern (step 069SGS281A; Yes), execute the movable body operation pattern determination process (step 069SGS281B).

In the movable body motion pattern determination process, a random number (0 to 99) for determining the movable body motion pattern is extracted, and the movable body motion pattern is determined using movable body motion pattern determination tables A to D corresponding to the game state, as shown in Figures 11-48 (A) to (D).

In the movable body operation pattern determination tables A to D, as shown in Figures 11-48 (A) to (D), there is a "Pattern A-1" for a jackpot where the movable body announcement is not executed and the movable body 32 is dropped in the movable body performance (decisive performance), a "Pattern A-2" for a jackpot where the movable body announcement is a vibration (small) and the movable body 32 is dropped in the movable body performance, a "Pattern A-3" for a jackpot where the movable body announcement is a vibration (large) and the movable body 32 is dropped in the movable body performance, and a "Pattern A-4" for a jackpot where the movable body announcement is not executed and the movable body 32 is moved in the movable body performance of the decisive performance. For each of the patterns, "Pattern B-1" for a miss in which the body 32 does not fall, "Pattern B-2" for a miss in which the moving body announcement is a vibration (small) and the moving body performance does not cause the moving body 32 to fall, and "Pattern B-3" for a miss in which the moving body announcement is a vibration (large) and the moving body performance does not cause the moving body 32 to fall, different judgment values are assigned for when the variable display result is a "jackpot" and when it is a "miss" so that the judgment value numbers are as shown in Figures 11-48 (A) to (D).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-48(A), in the movable body operation pattern determination table A used when the game state is the "normal state," when the variable display result is a "jackpot," 10 judgment values are assigned to "pattern A-1," 20 judgment values are assigned to "pattern A-2," and 70 judgment values are assigned to "pattern A-3." Also, when the variable display result is a "miss," 70 judgment values are assigned to "pattern B-1," 20 judgment values are assigned to "pattern B-2," and 10 judgment values are assigned to "pattern B-3."

As shown in FIG. 11-48(B), in the movable body operation pattern determination table B used when the game state is the "high probability state," when the variable display result is a "jackpot," 20 judgment values are assigned to "pattern A-1," 10 judgment values are assigned to "pattern A-2," and 70 judgment values are assigned to "pattern A-3." When the variable display result is a "miss," 70 judgment values are assigned to "pattern B-1," 20 judgment values are assigned to "pattern B-2," and 10 judgment values are assigned to "pattern B-3."

As shown in FIG. 11-48(C), in the movable body operation pattern determination table C used when the game state is "time-saving state A," when the variable display result is a "jackpot," 10 judgment values are assigned to "pattern A-1," 10 judgment values are assigned to "pattern A-2," and 80 judgment values are assigned to "pattern A-3." When the variable display result is a "miss," 80 judgment values are assigned to "pattern B-1," 10 judgment values are assigned to "pattern B-2," and 10 judgment values are assigned to "pattern B-3."

As shown in FIG. 11-48(D), in the movable body operation pattern determination table D used when the game state is "time-saving state B," when the variable display result is a "jackpot," 90 judgment values are assigned to "pattern A-1," 5 judgment values are assigned to "pattern A-2," and 5 judgment values are assigned to "pattern A-3." When the variable display result is a "miss," 100 judgment values are assigned to "pattern B-1."

As such, when comparing the movable body operation patterns when the variable display result is a jackpot in the three game states excluding the normal state, the execution rate of "Pattern A-2" and "Pattern A-3," in which both the movable body announcement and the movable body performance are executed, is higher in the special probability state and time-saving state A than in time-saving state B. On the other hand, the execution rate of "Pattern A-1," in which the movable body announcement is not executed and only the movable body performance is executed, is higher in time-saving state B than in the special probability state and time-saving state A.

In addition, when comparing the movable body operation patterns when the variable display result is a miss in three game states excluding the normal state, the execution rate of "Pattern B-2" and "Pattern B-3," in which only the movable body prediction is executed, is higher in the special probability state and time-saving state A than in time-saving state B (not executed).

In other words, in the case of time-saving state B, the execution rate of the moving object announcement is lower than in the special chance state and time-saving state A (execution rate of the moving object announcement: special chance state > time-saving state A > time-saving state B).

In this embodiment, when the variable display of the Super Reach jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined in the time-saving state B, the execution rate of "Pattern A-1" in which the movable object preview is not executed and only the movable object performance is executed is 90%, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be 90% or less as long as it is higher than the execution rate of "Pattern A-1" when the variable display of the Super Reach jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined in the probability change state or the time-saving state A. Also, the execution rate when the variable display of the Super Reach jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined in the time-saving state B may be 100%.

Returning to FIG. 11-44, if it is determined in step 069SGS281A that the fluctuation pattern is not a super reach fluctuation pattern, that is, a non-reach fluctuation pattern (step 069SGS281A; No), the performance control CPU 120 executes a movable object prediction pattern determination process (step 069SGS282). In the movable object prediction pattern determination process, a random number (0 to 99) for determining the movable object prediction pattern is extracted, and the movable object prediction pattern is determined using movable object prediction pattern determination tables A to D corresponding to the game state, as shown in FIG. 11-49 (A) to (D).

In the movable object prediction pattern determination tables A to D, as shown in Figures 11-49 (A) to (D), for each pattern of "non-execution", "small vibration", and "large vibration", different judgment values are assigned when the variable display result is "jackpot" and when it is "miss", so that the number of judgment values shown in Figures 11-49 (A) to (D) is reached.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-49(A), in the movable object prediction pattern determination table A used when the game state is "normal state", when the variable display result is "jackpot", 10 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 30 judgment values are assigned to "small vibration", and 60 judgment values are assigned to "large vibration". Also, when the variable display result is "miss", 60 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 30 judgment values are assigned to "small vibration", and 10 judgment values are assigned to "large vibration".

Also, as shown in FIG. 11-49(B), in the movable object prediction pattern determination table B used when the game state is the "high probability state," when the variable display result is a "jackpot," 10 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution," 30 judgment values are assigned to "small vibration," and 60 judgment values are assigned to "large vibration."Also, when the variable display result is a "miss," 60 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution," 30 judgment values are assigned to "small vibration," and 10 judgment values are assigned to "large vibration."

Also, as shown in FIG. 11-49(C), in the movable body prediction pattern determination table C used when the game state is "Time-saving state A", when the variable display result is "jackpot", 10 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 30 judgment values are assigned to "small vibration", and 60 judgment values are assigned to "large vibration". Also, when the variable display result is "miss", 70 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 20 judgment values are assigned to "small vibration", and 10 judgment values are assigned to "large vibration".

Also, as shown in FIG. 11-49 (D), in the movable body prediction pattern determination table D used when the game state is "time-saving state B", when the variable display result is "jackpot", only the super reach fluctuation pattern is determined, so no judgment value is assigned to "non-execution", "small vibration", or "large vibration". Also, when the number of reserved memories is "0" and the variable display result is "miss", if a non-reach fluctuation pattern is determined, a judgment value of 100 is assigned to "non-execution".

In this way, when comparing the three game states excluding the normal state, the moving object prediction is set so that the execution rate decreases in the order of the special state, time-saving state A, and time-saving state B (execution rate: special state > time-saving state A > time-saving state B).

In particular, in the case of time-saving state B, if a non-reach fluctuation pattern is determined, the moving object announcement will not be executed, even when the number of reserved memories is "0".

In this embodiment, a form in which a movable object prediction is not executed when the variable display result is "miss" when the reserved memory number is "0" in time-saving state B is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be possible to execute a movable object prediction at a rate lower than the execution rate of the movable object prediction when the variable display result is "miss" when the reserved memory number is "0" in the probability bonus state or time-saving state A.

In addition, in the time-saving state B, when the reserved memory number is other than "0" and the variable display result is "miss", the movable object prediction is not executed as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this, and when the reserved memory number is other than "0" and the variable display result is "miss", the movable object prediction may be executed.

When the execution of any of the performance patterns is determined in the above-mentioned button preview pattern determination process, character preview pattern determination process, or movable object preview pattern determination process, a period until the preview start is set in the various preview start waiting timers, and the corresponding preview starts when the various preview start waiting timers time out.

Returning to FIG. 11-44, if the fluctuation pattern is a shortened non-reach fluctuation pattern or an ultra-shortened non-reach in step 069SGS277, if the movable body operation pattern determination process is executed in step 069SGS281B, or if the movable body preview pattern determination process is executed in step 069SGS282, then in step 069SGS283 the performance control CPU 120 selects a performance control pattern (process table) according to the fluctuation pattern designation command. Then, the process timer in process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step 069SGS284).

In addition, in the process table, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, sound control execution data for controlling the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A are arranged in chronological order in correspondence with each process data n (numbered 1 to N).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 executes control of the performance device (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, speakers 8L, 8R as performance components, and operation unit (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.)) according to the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1) (step 069SGS285). For example, to display an image corresponding to a fluctuation pattern on the image display device 5, it outputs a command to the display control unit 123. It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 to control the lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. It also outputs a control signal (sound number data) to the sound control board 13 to output sound from the speakers 8L, 8R.

In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display of the decorative pattern to vary according to a variation pattern that corresponds one-to-one to the variation pattern designation command, but the performance control CPU 120 may select a variation pattern to be used from multiple types of variation patterns that correspond to the variation pattern designation command.

Then, the variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variation pattern designation command (step 069SGS286). A predetermined time is also set to the variable display control timer (step 069SGS287). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the performance control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the left, center, and right decorative patterns to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses, the display control unit 123 outputs a signal corresponding to the image data written to the VRAM to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby realizing variable display (variation) of the decorative patterns. Next, the value of the performance control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the performance processing during variable display (step S172) (step 069SGS288), and the processing ends.

(Variable display performance processing)
Next, FIG. 11-45 is a flow chart showing the variable display performance processing (step S172) in the performance control process processing. In the variable display performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 decrements the values of the process timer, the variable display time timer, and the variable display control timer by 1 (step 069SGS301, step 069SGS302, step 069SGS303). In addition, when various performance start waiting timers are set (it is decided to perform a notice performance, etc.) or the notice performance execution flag is in an on state (a notice performance is being executed) (step 069SGS304; Y), the performance control CPU 120 executes various performance processing (step 069SGS305). When both the performance start waiting timer and the notice performance execution flag are off, the performance processing of step 069SGS305 is not executed and the process proceeds to step 069SGS306.

In step 069SGS306, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the process timer has timed out. If the process timer has timed out, the process data is switched (step 069SGS307). That is, the process timer is started again by setting the process timer to the next process timer setting value in the process table (step 069SGS308). In addition, the control state for the performance device (performance component) is changed based on the next set display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc. (step 069SGS309a). On the other hand, if the process timer has not timed out, the performance device (performance component) is controlled according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the process timer (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc.) (step 069SGS309b).

Next, it is confirmed whether the variable display control timer has timed out (step 069SGS310). If the variable display control timer has timed out (step 069SGS310; Y), the performance control CPU 120 creates image data for the next display screen of the left, center, and right decorative patterns (screens that should be displayed 30 ms after the previous display switching of the decorative patterns) and writes it to a specified area of the VRAM (step 069SGS311). In this way, variable display control of the decorative patterns is realized in the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 outputs a signal based on data that superimposes image data of a specified area such as a set background image and image data based on the display control execution data set in the process table to the image display device 5. In this way, the background image, character image, and decorative pattern in the change of the decorative pattern are displayed in the image display device 5. In addition, a specified value is reset to the variable display control timer (step 069SGS312).

If the variable display control timer has not timed out (step 069SGS310; N), after executing step 069SGS312, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the variable display time timer has timed out (step 069SGS313). If the variable display time timer has not timed out (step 069SGS313; No), it determines whether the confirmation command reception flag, which indicates that a pattern confirmation command has been received, is on (step 069SGS314). If the confirmation command reception flag is not on (step 069SGS314; No), the process ends.

If the variable display time timer has timed out in step 069SGS313 (step 069SGS313; Yes), or if the confirmation command reception flag is on in step 069SGS314 (step 069SGS314; Yes), it is determined whether the right hit LED lighting start command reception flag is on (step 069SGS315). If the right hit LED lighting start command reception flag is on (step 069SGS315; Yes), the right hit LED 069SG031 starts to light up, and right hit notification images 069SG400, 069SG401, etc. are displayed to start a right hit notification (step 069SGS316), and the value of the performance control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special chart hit waiting process (step S173) (step 069SGS319), and the process ends.

Also, if the right-hit LED lighting start command reception flag is not on (step 069SGS315; No), it is determined whether the right-hit LED lighting end command reception flag is on (step 069SGS317). If the right-hit LED lighting end command reception flag is on (step 069SGS317; Yes), the right-hit LED 069SG031 is turned off, and the right-hit notification image 069SG400 and the like are not displayed to end the right-hit notification (step 069SGS318), and the value of the performance control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special chart hit waiting process (step S173) (step 069SGS319), and the process is terminated. Also, if the right-hit LED lighting end command reception flag is not on (step 069 SGS317; No), the value of the performance control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special chart hit waiting process (step S173) (step 069 SGS319), and the process ends.

Although not shown in detail, after the processing from step 069SGS315 to step 069SGS318 is executed, the value of the performance control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special pattern hit waiting process (step S173) after the pattern determination period specified by the pattern determination command based on the determination command reception flag has elapsed.

In addition, even if the variable display time timer has not timed out, if a pattern determination command is received, the control will switch to one that stops the variation. Therefore, even if, for example, a variable pattern specification command indicating a long variation time is received due to noise between boards, the variable display of the decorative pattern can be ended when the regular variable display time has elapsed (when the variable display of the special pattern has ended).

The process table used for variable display control of the decorative pattern contains the process data during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In other words, the sum of the process timer settings of process data 1 to n in the process table corresponds to the variable display time of the decorative pattern. Therefore, when the process timer of the last process data n times out in the processing of step 069SGS306, there is no process data to switch (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, etc.), and the variable display control of the decorative pattern based on the process table ends.

(Examples of various actions depending on game state)
Next, various operation examples for the three game states of time-saving state B, probability-changing state, and time-saving state A will be described based on Fig. 11-50. Fig. 11-50 shows (A) an example of a variable operation for each game state, (B) an example of a presentation operation for each game state, and (C) a diagram for explaining the characteristics of time-saving state B.

First, as shown in Figure 11-50 (A), we compare the contents of each item "A1" to "A5" in the three game states of "Time-saving state B", "Certain bonus state", and "Time-saving state A".

<Item A1>
Regarding the number of miss variation patterns that the CPU 103 can select, in the "time-saving state B", as shown in Figures 11-8 (A) (B), when the number of reserved memories is 0 or 1 to 3, the number is "2", namely "super-shortened non-reach" and "SP reach D". In the "certain variable state", as shown in Figures 11-6 (A) (B), when the number of reserved memories is 1 to 3, the number is a maximum of "4", namely "shortened non-reach A", "non-reach A", "SP reach C", and "SP reach D". In the "time-saving state A", as shown in Figures 11-7 (A) (B), when the number of reserved memories is 1 to 3, the number is a maximum of "3", namely "shortened non-reach", "non-reach", and "SP reach E".

In other words, when the variable display result is a "miss," the number of miss variation patterns that the CPU 103 can determine in the "time-saving state B" (e.g., two) is less than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the "time-saving state A" (e.g., three), and is also less than the number of miss variation patterns that can be determined in the "probable bonus state" (e.g., four).

The number of miss variation patterns that the CPU 103 can determine increases in the order of time-saving state B, time-saving state A, and high probability state, or the above number can be changed in various ways as long as the number of time-saving state B is less than at least one of time-saving state A and high probability state.

<Item A2>
Regarding the average time of the variable display time of the miss fluctuation pattern determined by the CPU 103, in the "time-saving state B", as shown in Figures 11-8 (A) and (B), the average time of the variable display time of the miss fluctuation pattern that can be determined when the number of reserved memories is 0 is approximately 7.54 seconds {((7 s x 97) + (25 s x 3)) ÷ 100 = 7.54}, and the average time of the variable display time of the miss fluctuation pattern that can be determined when the number of reserved memories is 1 to 3 is approximately 2.205 seconds {((1.5 s x 97) + (25 s x 3)) ÷ 100 = 2.205}. Here, assuming that when time-saving state B begins, the first variable display has a pending memory number of 0, and that the 2nd to 1100th variable displays have a pending memory number of 1 to 3, the average variable display time of the variable pattern for a miss that can be determined in time-saving state B is approximately 2.2 seconds {(7.54 + (2.205 x 1099)) ÷ 1100 = 2.20985}.

As shown in Figure 11-6 (A) and (B), in the "probable bonus state", when the reserved memory number is 0, the average variable display time of the variable pattern for a loss that can be determined is about 8.2 seconds {((7s x 95) + (40s x 2) + (25s x 3)) ÷ 100 = 8.2}, and when the reserved memory number is 1 to 3, the average variable display time of the variable pattern for a loss that can be determined is about 4.8 seconds {((3s x 85) + (7s x 10) + (40s x 2) + (25s x 3)) ÷ 100 = 4.8}. Here, assuming that the reserved memory number is 0 for the first variable display when the probable bonus state starts and the reserved memory number is 1 to 3 for the 2nd to 110th variable displays, the average variable display time of the variable pattern for a loss that can be determined in the probable bonus state is about 4.83 seconds {(8.2 + (4.8 x 109)) ÷ 110 = 4.83}.

In the "time-saving state A", as shown in Fig. 11-7 (A) and (B), when the number of reserved memories is 0, the average time of the variable display time of the variable pattern for a miss that can be determined is about 9.15 seconds {((7s x 95) + (50s x 5)) ÷ 100 = 9.15}, and when the number of reserved memories is 1 to 3, the average time of the variable display time of the variable pattern for a miss that can be determined is about 5.55 seconds {((3s x 90) + (7s x 5) + (50s x 5)) ÷ 100 = 5.55}. Here, assuming that the number of reserved memories is 0 for the first variable display when the time-saving state A starts and the number of reserved memories is 1 to 3 for the 2nd to 110th variable displays, the average time of the variable display time of the variable pattern for a miss that can be determined in the time-saving state A is about 5.58 seconds {(9.15 + (5.55 x 109)) ÷ 110 = 5.58}.

In other words, when the variable display result is a "miss," the average time (e.g., about 2.2 seconds) of the variable display time of the miss fluctuation pattern determined by the CPU 103 in the "time-saving state B" is shorter than the average time (e.g., about 5.58 seconds) of the variable display time of the miss fluctuation pattern determined in the "time-saving state A," and is also shorter than the average time (e.g., about 4.83 seconds) of the variable display time of the miss fluctuation pattern determined in the "probable bonus state."

In addition, the average time (e.g., about 7.54 seconds) of the variable display time of the losing fluctuation pattern that can be determined when the number of reserved memories is 0 in the "time-saving state B" is shorter than the average time (e.g., about 9.15 seconds) of the variable display time of the losing fluctuation pattern that is determined when the number of reserved memories is 0 in the "time-saving state A," and is also shorter than the average time (e.g., about 8.2 seconds) of the variable display time of the losing fluctuation pattern that is determined when the number of reserved memories is 0 in the "probable change state."

In addition, the average time (e.g., about 2.205 seconds) of the variable display time of the losing variable pattern that can be determined in the "time-saving state B" when the number of reserved memories is 1 to 3 is shorter than the average time (e.g., about 5.55 seconds) of the variable display time of the losing variable pattern determined in the "time-saving state A" and is also shorter than the average time (e.g., about 4.8 seconds) of the variable display time of the losing variable pattern determined in the "probable bonus state."

According to items (A1) and (A2), in the time-saving state B controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, taking into consideration the fact that a long period of time continued in which it was not controlled to the jackpot game state, the variable display that is not determined to be controlled to the jackpot game state has fewer types of fluctuation patterns and a shorter average time for the variable display, and therefore the consumption speed of the variable display is faster than in the probability variable state or the time-saving state A, and therefore it is possible to provide a suitable time-saving state B.

The average time of the variable display time of the miss fluctuation pattern is longer in the order of time-saving state B, high probability state, and time-saving state A, or the above time can be changed in various ways as long as time-saving state B is shorter than at least one of time-saving state A and high probability state.

<Item A3>
Regarding the number of jackpot fluctuation patterns that the CPU 103 can select, in the "time-saving state B", as shown in Figure 11-8 (C), when the number of reserved memories is 0 to 3, the number is "1" of "SP reach D", and in the "certain variable state", as shown in Figure 11-6 (C), when the number of reserved memories is 0 to 3, the number is a maximum of "3" of "not via SP", "SP reach C", and "SP reach D", and in the "time-saving state A", as shown in Figure 11-7 (C), when the number of reserved memories is 0 to 3, the number is a maximum of "2" of "not via SP" and "SP reach E".

In other words, when the variable display result is a "jackpot," the number of jackpot fluctuation patterns that the CPU 103 can determine in the "time-saving state B" (e.g., 1) is less than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the "time-saving state A" (e.g., 2), and is also less than the number of miss fluctuation patterns that can be determined in the "probable bonus state" (e.g., 3).

The number of jackpot fluctuation patterns that the CPU 103 can determine increases in the order of time-saving state B, time-saving state A, and high probability state, or the above numbers can be changed in various ways as long as the number of time-saving state B is less than at least one of time-saving state A and high probability state.

<Item A4>
Regarding the average time of the variable display time of the jackpot fluctuation pattern determined by the CPU 103, in the "time-saving state B", as shown in Figure 11-8 (C), the average time of the variable display time of the jackpot fluctuation pattern that can be determined when the number of reserved memories is 0 to 3 is approximately 40 seconds.

As shown in Figure 11-6 (C), in the "high probability state," the average time for the variable display time of the variable pattern for a jackpot that can be determined when the number of reserved memories is 0 to 3 is approximately 51.1 seconds {((22 s x 5) + (55 s x 80) + (40 s x 15)) ÷ 100 = 51.1}, so the average time for the variable display time of the variable pattern for a jackpot that can be determined in the high probability state is approximately 51.1 seconds.

In "time-saving state A," as shown in FIG. 11-7 (C), the average variable display time of the variable pattern for a jackpot that can be determined when the number of reserved memories is 0 to 3 is approximately 62.8 seconds {((22 s x 5) + (55 s x 95)) ÷ 100 = 62.85}.

In other words, when the variable display result is a "jackpot," the average time of the variable display time of the jackpot fluctuation pattern determined by the CPU 103 in the "time-saving state B" (e.g., about 40 seconds) is shorter than the average time of the variable display time of the jackpot fluctuation pattern determined in the "time-saving state A" (e.g., about 62.8 seconds), and is also shorter than the average time of the variable display time of the jackpot fluctuation pattern determined in the "probable bonus state" (e.g., about 51.1 seconds).

According to items (A3) and (A4), in the time-saving state B controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, taking into consideration the fact that a long period of time continued in which the state was not controlled to a jackpot game state, the variable display that has been decided to be controlled to a jackpot game state has fewer types of fluctuation patterns and a shorter average time for the variable display, and therefore the consumption speed of the variable display is faster than in the probability variable state or the time-saving state A, and therefore a suitable time-saving state B can be provided.

The average time of the variable display time of the jackpot fluctuation pattern is longer in the order of time-saving state B, high probability state, and time-saving state A, or the above time can be changed in various ways as long as time-saving state B is shorter than at least one of time-saving state A and high probability state.

<Item A5>
Regarding the determination ratio of non-reach miss fluctuation patterns determined by the CPU 103, in the "time-saving state B", as shown in Figures 11-8 (A) and (B), the ratio is 95% when the number of reserved memories is 0 or 1 to 3, while in the "probable bonus state", as shown in Figures 11-6 (A) and (B), the ratio is 80% when the number of reserved memories is 0 or 1 to 3, and in the "time-saving state A", as shown in Figures 11-7 (A) and (B), the ratio is 70% when the number of reserved memories is 0 or 1 to 3.

In other words, the percentage (e.g., 97%) of times that the CPU 103 determines a "non-reach miss fluctuation pattern" when the variable display result is a "miss" in the "time-saving state B" is higher than the percentage (e.g., 95%) of times that the CPU 103 determines a "non-reach miss fluctuation pattern" when the variable display result is a "miss" in the "time-saving state A," and is also higher than the percentage (e.g., 95%) of times that the CPU 103 determines a "non-reach miss fluctuation pattern" when the variable display result is a "miss" in the "probable win state."

According to item (A5), in the time-saving state B controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, taking into consideration the fact that a long period of time has continued in which the state is not controlled to a jackpot game state, in the variable display in which it is not decided to control the state to a jackpot game state, the state of the variable display is set to a reach state, which makes it less likely that the player will be unnecessarily provoked, and therefore it is possible to provide a suitable time-saving state B.

In this embodiment, the percentage at which the CPU 103 determines a "non-reach miss variable pattern" when the variable display result is a "miss" is 97% for time-saving state B, and 95% for both the high probability state and time-saving state A, with the percentage decreasing in the order of time-saving state B, high probability state, and time-saving state A. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the percentage may decrease in the order of time-saving state B (e.g., 97%), high probability state (e.g., 95%), and time-saving state A (e.g., 94%), or the percentage can be changed in various ways as long as the percentage in the case of time-saving state B is higher than at least one of the time-saving state A and the high probability state.

In this embodiment, an example is given of a form in which the rate at which the CPU 103 determines a "non-reach miss fluctuation pattern" when the variable display result is "miss" in "time-saving state B" is 97%, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the rate at which the CPU 103 determines a "non-reach miss fluctuation pattern" when the variable display result is "miss" in "time-saving state B" may be 100%, in other words, the reach fluctuation pattern may not be determined when the variable display result is "miss" in "time-saving state B".

In addition, the miss variation pattern (e.g., "non-reach A") that the CPU 103 can determine in the "time-saving state B" when the variable display result is "miss" is the same as the miss variation pattern (e.g., "non-reach A") that the CPU 103 can determine in the "time-saving state A" and the "probable win state", thereby reducing development costs and program capacity.

In addition, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", the miss variation pattern (e.g., "SP Reach D") that the CPU 103 can determine in the "time-saving state B" is the same as the miss variation pattern (e.g., "SP Reach D") that can be determined in the "probable win state", thereby reducing development costs and program capacity.

Next, as shown in Figure 11-50 (B), the contents of each item "B1" to "B10" in the three game states of "Time-saving state B", "Probable bonus state", and "Time-saving state A" are compared.

<Item B1>
Regarding the execution rate of "moving object prediction" and "character prediction" as jackpot suggestive effects in the variable display of the miss fluctuation pattern determined when the number of reserved memories is 0, in "time-saving state B", as shown in Figure 11-49 (D), the execution rate of "moving object prediction" is 0% (not executed), and as shown in Figure 11-47 (D), the execution rate of "character prediction" is 0% (not executed); in "probable change state", as shown in Figure 11-49 (B), the execution rate of "moving object prediction" is 40%, and as shown in Figure 11-47 (B), the execution rate of "character prediction" is 30%; and in "time-saving state A", as shown in Figure 11-49 (C), the execution rate of "moving object prediction" is 30%, and as shown in Figure 11-47 (C), the execution rate of "character prediction" is 20%.

In other words, when the variable display is executed in the miss variation pattern determined when the number of reserved memories is 0 in the "time-saving state A," and when the variable display is executed in the miss variation pattern determined when the number of reserved memories is 0 in the "probable bonus state," suggestive effects such as "moving object preview" and "character preview" are executed in the variable display, whereas when the variable display is executed in the miss variation pattern determined when the number of reserved memories is 0 in the "time-saving state B," suggestive effects such as "moving object preview" and "character preview" are not executed in the variable display.

According to item (B1), in the time-saving state B controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, taking into consideration the fact that a long period of time has continued in which the state is not controlled to a jackpot game state, in the variable display of a variable pattern that can be determined when the number of reserved memories is 0 (for example, "non-reach" or "SP reach" other than the shortened non-reach), there is no unnecessary excitement due to the movable object preview or character preview, and therefore a suitable time-saving state B can be provided.

To explain in detail, when the control of the probability variable state, time-saving state A, and time-saving state B starts, it is possible that the first reserved memory may have reserved memory stored therein, since the left-handed play was performed in the normal state up until that point, but there is no reserved memory stored in the second reserved memory. In other words, when the probability variable state or time-saving state A starts with the first hit, or when the control of time-saving state B starts with the execution of 900 variable displays, in order to buy time to store reserved memory in the second reserved memory, the probability of deciding a miss variation pattern that can be determined when the number of reserved memories is 0 is high, which is a miss variation pattern with a longer variable display time than the shortened non-reach (for example, a non-reach with a variable time of 7 seconds, or an SP reach with a variable time of 25 seconds or 40 seconds). And when a miss variation pattern with a longer variable display time than the shortened non-reach is decided, a suggestive performance such as a "moving object announcement" or a "character announcement" can be executed in the variable display.

However, when the control of time-saving state B begins, it is highly likely that various miss predictions have been executed over the long period of play up to now, and therefore if a "moving object prediction" or "character prediction" is also executed in time-saving state B, the player will feel annoyed. Therefore, when a variable display is executed in the miss variation pattern determined when the number of reserved memories is 0 in time-saving state B, "moving object prediction" and "character prediction" are not executed.

In this embodiment, when the variable display is executed in a miss variation pattern determined when the reserved memory number is 0 in "time-saving state B", a form has been exemplified in which suggestive effects such as "movable object prediction" and "character prediction" are not executed in the variable display. However, for example, when the variable display is executed in a miss variation pattern determined when the reserved memory number is 0 in "time-saving state B", it is preferable that the execution rate of suggestive effects such as "movable object prediction" and "character prediction" in the variable display is lower than the execution rate of suggestive effects such as "movable object prediction" and "character prediction" in the "probable change state" and "time-saving state A".

In addition, when a variable display is executed in a miss variation pattern that is determined when the number of reserved memories is 0, the rate at which suggestive effects such as "moving object prediction" and "character prediction" are executed can be changed in various ways, so long as the execution rate of "moving object prediction" and "character prediction" in time-saving state B is lower than the execution rate of "moving object prediction" and "character prediction" in at least one of time-saving state A and the special state.

In addition, in the time-saving state B, if the fluctuation pattern is a miss, the "moving object announcement" or "character announcement" may not be executed, and if the fluctuation pattern is a jackpot, the "moving object announcement" or "character announcement" may be executed. By doing this, interest can be heightened by drawing attention to whether or not suggestive effects such as the "moving object announcement" or "character announcement" are executed in the time-saving state B.

In addition, the suggestive effects that suggest that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state may include a "reach notice" or a "button notice" as a teasing effect that teases whether or not the variable display state will be a reach state (whether or not a reach will be achieved). By doing this, interest can be heightened by drawing attention to whether or not the "reach notice" or "button notice" will be executed in the time-saving state B.

In addition, based on the variable display results, it is possible to execute multiple types of suggestive effects, including a first suggestive effect (e.g., line A or small vibration) and a second suggestive effect (e.g., line B or large vibration) that has a higher probability of being controlled into a jackpot game state than when the first suggestive effect is executed, thereby drawing attention to whether or not a suggestive effect will be executed in time-saving state B, thereby increasing interest.

<Item B2>
Regarding the number of types of pre-reading notices that the performance control CPU 120 can determine when the variable display result is a miss, in the "time-saving state B", none are determined, so the number is "0", as shown in Figure 11-42 (D); in the "certain bonus state", the number is "4", namely, "countdown notice", "hold change notice", "pattern chance eye notice", and "effect display notice", as shown in Figure 11-42 (B); and in the "time-saving state A", the number is "3", namely, "hold change notice", "pattern chance eye notice", and "effect display notice", as shown in Figure 11-42 (C).

In other words, the number of types of pre-reading forecasts that the performance control CPU 120 can determine when the variable display result is a miss in the "time-saving state B" (e.g., 0) is less than the number of types of pre-reading forecasts that the performance control CPU 120 can determine when the variable display result is a miss in the "time-saving state A" (e.g., 3), and is also less than the number of types of pre-reading forecasts that the performance control CPU 120 can determine when the variable display result is a miss in the "probable win state" (e.g., 4).

In this embodiment, the number of types of pre-reading predictions that the performance control CPU 120 can determine when the variable display result is a miss in the "time-saving state B" is 0, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as long as the number of types of pre-reading predictions that the performance control CPU 120 can determine when the variable display result is a miss in the "time-saving state B" is less than the number of types of pre-reading predictions that the performance control CPU 120 can determine when the variable display result is a miss in at least one of the "time-saving state A" and the "probable bonus state", one or more types of pre-reading predictions may be executed.

In addition, the number of types of pre-reading predictions that the performance control CPU 120 can determine when the variable display result is a miss in the "time-saving state B" can be changed in various ways, as long as it is less than the number of types of pre-reading predictions that the performance control CPU 120 can determine when the variable display result is a miss in at least one of the "time-saving state A" and the "probable bonus state."

<Item B3>
Regarding the execution rate of the "pre-reading notice" when the variable display result is a miss, in the "time-saving state B", as shown in Figure 11-42 (D), none of them are executed, so it is "0%". In the "probable bonus state", as shown in Figure 11-42 (B), the total execution rate of the "countdown notice", "hold change notice", "chance pattern notice", and "effect display notice" is "40%". In the "time-saving state A", as shown in Figure 11-42 (C), the total execution rate of the "hold change notice", "chance pattern notice", and "effect display notice" is "30%".

In other words, the execution rate of the pre-reading forecast when the variable display result is a miss in the "time-saving state B" (e.g., 0%) is lower than the execution rate of the pre-reading forecast when the variable display result is a miss in the "time-saving state A" (e.g., 30%), and is also lower than the execution rate of the pre-reading forecast when the variable display result is a miss in the "probable win state" (e.g., 40%).

According to items (B2) and (B3), in the time-saving state B controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, taking into consideration the fact that a long period of time had continued during which the state was not controlled to a jackpot game state, in the variable display in which it is not decided to control the state to a jackpot game state, the number of types of pre-reading preview performances that can be determined is small, which can reduce development costs, and there is little risk of being unnecessarily swayed by the pre-reading preview performances, making it possible to provide a suitable time-saving state B.

In this embodiment, the execution rate of the pre-reading prediction when the variable display result is a miss in "time-saving state B" is 0%, in other words, a form in which the pre-reading prediction is not executed is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, if the execution rate of the pre-reading prediction when the variable display result is a miss in "time-saving state B" is lower than the execution rate of the pre-reading prediction when the variable display result is a miss in at least one of "time-saving state A" and the "high probability state", the pre-reading prediction may be executed.

In addition, if the execution rate of the pre-reading prediction when the variable display result is a miss in "time-saving state B" is lower than the execution rate of the pre-reading prediction when the variable display result is a miss in at least one of "time-saving state A" and the "high probability state," the above rate can be changed in various ways.

Furthermore, as the pre-reading preview performance patterns that can be commonly executed by the performance control CPU 120 in the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the special probability state, there are a first pre-reading preview performance pattern (e.g., the "blue" pattern of "hold change preview", "pattern chance eye preview", and "effect display preview") and a second pre-reading preview performance pattern (e.g., the "red" pattern of "hold change preview", "pattern chance eye preview", and "effect display preview") that has a higher probability of being controlled to the advantageous state than when the first pre-reading preview performance pattern is executed. The percentage of the first pre-reading preview performance pattern executed in the time-saving state B (e.g., 0%, see FIG. 11-43(D)) is lower than the percentage of the first pre-reading preview performance pattern executed in the time-saving state A and the special probability state (e.g., 10%, see FIG. 11-43(C)). Therefore, the first pre-reading preview performance is less likely to unnecessarily induce excitement in the time-saving state B, and a suitable time-saving state B can be provided.

Furthermore, as the pre-reading notice performance patterns that can be commonly executed by the performance control CPU 120 in the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the special probability state, there are a first pre-reading notice performance pattern (e.g., the "blue" pattern of "hold change notice", "pattern chance eye notice", and "effect display notice") and a second pre-reading notice performance pattern (e.g., the "red" pattern of "hold change notice", "pattern chance eye notice", and "effect display notice") that has a higher probability of being controlled to the advantageous state than when the first pre-reading notice performance pattern is executed. The percentage of the second pre-reading notice performance pattern executed in the time-saving state B (e.g., 90%, see FIG. 11-43(D)) is higher than the percentage of the second pre-reading notice performance pattern executed in the time-saving state A and the special probability state (e.g., 50-70%, see FIG. 11-43(C)). Therefore, the second pre-reading notice performance is more likely to be executed in the time-saving state B, and a suitable time-saving state B can be provided.

In addition, the look-ahead preview performance patterns that can be executed by the performance control CPU 120 in the time-saving state A and the special probability state are common to the look-ahead preview performance patterns that can be executed by the performance control CPU 120 in the time-saving state B (for example, "pattern chance eye preview"), and by not setting look-ahead preview performance patterns that can be determined only in the time-saving state B, development costs can be reduced and program capacity can be reduced.

In addition, the look-ahead preview performance pattern that can be determined by the performance control CPU 120 in the time-saving state B is common to the look-ahead preview performance pattern that can be determined by the performance control CPU 120 in at least one of the time-saving state A and the special state (for example, "pattern chance eye forecast"). By not setting a look-ahead preview performance pattern that can only be determined in the time-saving state B, development costs can be reduced and the program capacity can be reduced.

In addition, the look-ahead preview performance pattern that can be determined by the performance control CPU 120 in the time-saving state B is common to the look-ahead preview performance pattern that can be determined by the performance control CPU 120 in both the time-saving state A and the special probability state (for example, "pattern chance eye forecast"). By not setting a look-ahead preview performance pattern that can only be determined in the time-saving state B, development costs can be reduced and the program capacity can be reduced.

<Item B4>
Regarding the execution rate of the "button notice" as an action-promoting effect to encourage the player to take action, in the "time-saving state B", as shown in Fig. 11-46(E), it is "10%" in the case of a jackpot and "5%" in the case of a miss, while in the "probable chance state", as shown in Fig. 11-46(C), it is "80%" in the case of a jackpot and "30%" in the case of a miss, while in the "time-saving state A", as shown in Fig. 11-46(D), it is "80%" in the case of a jackpot and "20%" in the case of a miss. Note that these execution rates are the rates when the "reach notice" is executed.

In other words, the execution rate of the button notice per variable display in the "time-saving state B" (e.g., 10% for a jackpot, 5% for a miss) is lower than the execution rate of the button notice per variable display in the "time-saving state A" (e.g., 80% for a jackpot, 20% for a miss), and is also lower than the execution rate of the button notice per variable display in the "probable bonus state" (e.g., 80% for a jackpot, 30% for a miss).

According to item (B4), in the time-saving state B controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, taking into consideration the fact that a long period of time has continued during which the game is not controlled to a jackpot game state, the number of times that the button preview, which is an operation promotion effect that encourages the player to operate the push button 31B in one variable display, is executed is small, so that a suitable time-saving state B can be provided.

In addition, in this embodiment, the execution rate of the button preview per variable display in "time-saving state B" is exemplified as being lower than the execution rate of the button preview per variable display in "time-saving state A" or "high probability state", but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, it may be possible to not execute the button preview in "time-saving state B" (execution rate 0%).

In addition, the execution rate of the button announcement per variable display in "Time-saving state B" can be changed in various ways, so long as it is lower than the execution rate of the button announcement per variable display in "Time-saving state A" or "Probable bonus state."

<Item B5>
In the button preview, with regard to the execution rate of the "single hit pattern" as the first action promotion effect that encourages the player to perform a single action, and the "repeated hit pattern, long press pattern" as the second action promotion effect that encourages the player to perform an action over a specified period of time, in the "time-saving state B", as shown in Figure 11-46 (E), the execution rate of the "single hit pattern" is "10%" in the case of a jackpot and "5%" in the case of a miss, and for the "repeated hit pattern, long press pattern", it is "0% (not executed)" in the case of a jackpot or a miss.

In the "high probability state," as shown in FIG. 11-46 (C), the execution rate of the "one-hit pattern" is "40%" in the case of a jackpot and "10%" on average in the case of a miss, while in the case of the "continuous hit pattern, long press pattern," it is "40%" in the case of a jackpot and "20%" on average in the case of a miss.

In "time-saving state A," as shown in FIG. 11-46 (D), the execution rate of the "one-hit pattern" is "40%" in the case of a jackpot and "7.5%" on average in the case of a miss, while in the case of the "continuous hit pattern, long press pattern," it is "40%" in the case of a jackpot and "17.5%" on average in the case of a miss.

In other words, the performance control CPU 120 can determine the execution of either the "one hit pattern" or the "repeated hit pattern, long press pattern" in the "high probability state" and "time-saving state A", and can determine the "one hit pattern" in the "time-saving state B", but does not determine the execution of the "repeated hit pattern, long press pattern".

In addition, the execution rate of "repeated tap patterns, long press patterns" per variable display in "time-saving state B" (e.g., 0% for a jackpot or miss) is lower than the execution rate of "repeated tap patterns, long press patterns" per variable display in the "high probability state" (e.g., 40% for a jackpot, 20% for a miss), and is also lower than the execution rate of "repeated tap patterns, long press patterns" per variable display in "time-saving state A" (e.g., 40% for a jackpot, 17.5% for a miss).

According to item (B5), in the time-saving state B controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, taking into consideration the fact that a long period has continued in which the game is not controlled to a jackpot game state, the player is less prompted to perform cumbersome operations such as "continuous tapping patterns, long press patterns" that require the player to continue operating the push button 31B throughout the effective operation period, and therefore a suitable time-saving state B can be provided.

In this embodiment, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance is capable of determining a "one-hit pattern" in the "time-saving state B" but is not capable of determining the execution of a "repeated hit pattern, long press pattern". However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if the determination rate of the "one-hit pattern" in the "time-saving state B" is lower than the determination rate of the "one-hit pattern" in at least one of the "time-saving state A" and the "high probability state", the "one-hit pattern" may be executable.

In addition, in time-saving state B, the percentage (e.g., 10%) at which the performance control CPU 120 executes a "button announcement" when the variable display result is a jackpot is higher than the percentage (e.g., 5%) at which the performance control CPU 120 executes a "button announcement" when the variable display result is a miss, thereby drawing attention to the fact that a "button announcement" is being executed in time-saving state B and increasing interest.

In addition, the "button preview" presentation patterns include a "hit" pattern and a "repeated tap" or "long press" pattern that has a higher probability of being controlled to a jackpot game state than when the "hit" pattern is executed. The probability that the "hit" pattern is executed in time-saving state B (e.g., 10%) is lower than the probability that the "repeated tap" or "long press" pattern is executed in time-saving state A or in a highly variable state (e.g., 40%), but the probability that the "hit" pattern is executed in time-saving state B may be higher than the probability that the "repeated tap" or "long press" pattern is executed in time-saving state A or in a highly variable state. By doing this, when an action promotion presentation is executed in time-saving state B, the "hit" pattern is often executed, which can increase interest.

In addition, the period during which the "button notice" is executed in time-saving state A and the special chance state is the same as the period during which the "button notice" is executed in time-saving state B (for example, the period during which the "reach notice" is executed), and by making the execution period of the "button notice" common between time-saving state A, the special chance state, and time-saving state B, development costs can be reduced.

In addition, when the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing an action promotion preparation effect (for example, not specifically shown, an effect in which the push button 31B to be operated is faded in or an effect display is displayed before the effective operation period begins) before executing the "button notice", it is preferable that the period in which the action promotion preparation effect is executed in the time-saving state A or the probability bonus state is the same as the period in which the action promotion preparation effect is executed in the time-saving state B. This can reduce development costs and can provide an appropriate notification that the "button notice" will be executed.

<Item B6>
Regarding the execution rate per variable display of the "moving object preview," which is a suggestive effect suggesting that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state, in the "time-saving state B," as shown in Figure 11-49 (D), it is 0% (not executed) in the case of a jackpot or a miss, while in the "high probability state," as shown in Figure 11-49 (B), it is 90% in the case of a jackpot and 40% in the case of a miss, while in the "time-saving state A," as shown in Figure 11-49 (C), it is 90% in the case of a jackpot and 30% in the case of a miss.

In other words, the execution rate of the "moving object announcement" per variable display in the "time-saving state B" (e.g., 0% jackpot, 0% miss) is lower than the execution rate of the "moving object announcement" per variable display in the "time-saving state A" (e.g., 90% jackpot, 30% miss), and is also lower than the execution rate of the "moving object announcement" per variable display in the "probable change state" (e.g., 90% jackpot, 40% miss).

According to item (B6), in the time-saving state B controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, the number of times the movable object preview, which suggests that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state, is executed is reduced, taking into consideration the fact that a long period of time has continued during which the game has not been controlled to a jackpot game state, and therefore a suitable time-saving state B can be provided.

In addition, in this embodiment, an example is given of a form in which the execution rate of the "movable object prediction" per one variable display in the "time-saving state B" is 0%, but the present invention is not limited to this.) If the execution rate of the "movable object prediction" per one variable display in the "time-saving state B" is lower than the execution rate of the "movable object prediction" per one variable display in at least one of the "time-saving state A" and the "probable bonus state", the "movable object prediction" may be made executable in the "time-saving state B".

In addition, the percentage (e.g., 0%) at which the "movable object announcement" is executed in time-saving state B when the variable display result is a jackpot is lower than the percentage (e.g., 90%) at which the "movable object announcement" is executed in time-saving state A or in the special probability state when the variable display result is a jackpot, but the percentage at which the "movable object announcement" is executed in time-saving state B when the variable display result is a jackpot may be higher than the percentage at which the "movable object announcement" is executed in time-saving state A or in the special probability state when the variable display result is a jackpot. In this way, interest can be increased by differentiating the degree of attention paid to the "movable object announcement" between time-saving state A, the special probability state, and time-saving state B.

In addition, the percentage (e.g., 0%) at which the "vibration (small)" pattern is executed in time-saving state B when the variable display result is a jackpot is lower than the percentage (e.g., 30%) at which the "vibration (small)" pattern is executed in time-saving state A or in the high probability state when the variable display result is a jackpot, but the percentage at which the "vibration (small)" pattern is executed in time-saving state B when the variable display result is a jackpot may be higher than the percentage (e.g., 30%) at which the "vibration (small)" pattern is executed in time-saving state A or in the high probability state when the variable display result is a jackpot. In this way, interest can be increased by differentiating the degree of attention paid to the "moving object announcement" between time-saving state A, the high probability state, and time-saving state B.

<Item B7>
Regarding the execution rate per variable display of the "character announcement" as a teasing effect to incite as to whether or not the variable display mode is to be a reach mode, in the "time-saving state B", as shown in Figure 11-47 (D), it is 10% in the case of a jackpot and 5% in the case of a miss, while in the "probable change state", as shown in Figure 11-47 (B), it is 80% in the case of a jackpot and 30% in the case of a miss, and in the "time-saving state A", as shown in Figure 11-47 (C), it is 80% in the case of a jackpot and 20% in the case of a miss.

In other words, the execution rate of the "character announcement" per variable display in the "time-saving state B" (e.g., 10% for a jackpot, 5% for a miss) is lower than the execution rate of the "character announcement" per variable display in the "time-saving state A" (e.g., 80% for a jackpot, 20% for a miss), and is also lower than the execution rate of the "character announcement" per variable display in the "probable change state" (e.g., 80% for a jackpot, 30% for a miss).

In addition, as shown in Figure 11-46 (A), the execution rate per variable display of the "reach notice," which is a teasing effect to inspire whether the variable display mode will be a reach mode, is 20% in "time-saving state B," 50% in "probable win state," and 40% in "time-saving state A."

In other words, the execution rate of the "Reach Notice" per variable display in the "Time-saving State B" (e.g., 20%) is lower than the execution rate of the "Reach Notice" per variable display in the "Time-saving State A" (e.g., 40%), and is also lower than the execution rate of the "Reach Notice" per variable display in the "Probable Change State" (e.g., 50%).

According to item (B7), in the time-saving state B controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, the number of reach predictions and button predictions that indicate whether or not a reach will be achieved is reduced in consideration of the long period during which the state is not controlled to a jackpot game, and therefore an optimal time-saving state B can be provided.

In this embodiment, the execution rate of the "character preview" per one variable display in the "time-saving state B" is lower than the execution rate of the "time-saving state A" and the "movable object preview", but the present invention is not limited to this, and the execution rate of the "character preview" per one variable display in the "time-saving state B" may be 0%, that is, not executed. Also, as long as the execution rate of the "character preview" per one variable display in the "time-saving state B" is lower than the execution rate of the "time-saving state A" and the "movable object preview", the above rate can be changed in various ways.

<Item B8>
The movable body operation patterns of "movable body announcement" and "movable body presentation" that can be executed by the presentation control CPU 120 in one variable display include "patterns A-2, A-3, B-2, B-3 (first presentation execution pattern)" which executes "movable body announcement" and "movable body presentation", and "pattern A-1 (second presentation execution pattern)" which executes only "movable body presentation" without executing "movable body announcement". In this case, the execution rate of "pattern A-1" when the variable display result is a jackpot is 90% in "time-saving state B" as shown in Figure 11-48 (D), 20% in "probable bonus state" as shown in Figure 11-48 (B), and 10% in "time-saving state A" as shown in Figure 11-48 (C).

In other words, the execution rate of "Pattern A-1" when the variable display result is a miss in "Time-saving state B" (e.g., 90%) is higher than the execution rate of "Pattern A-1" when the variable display result is a miss in "Time-saving state A" (e.g., 10%), and is also higher than the execution rate of "Pattern A-1" when the variable display result is a miss in "Probable hit state" (e.g., 20%).

According to item (B8), in the time-saving state B controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, when it is decided to control to the jackpot game state in consideration of the fact that a long period has continued during which the state is not controlled to the jackpot game state, it is possible to provide a suitable time-saving state B, since the movable body 32 is unlikely to be unnecessarily moved in the movable body announcement before the movable body performance in which the movable body 32 falls to notify of a jackpot is executed.

In this embodiment, the execution rate of "Pattern A-1" when the variable display result is a miss in "Time-saving state B" is lower than the execution rate of "Pattern A-1" when the variable display result is a miss in "Time-saving state A" or "Probable bonus state", but the present invention is not limited to this, and the execution rate of "Pattern A-1" when the variable display result is a miss in "Time-saving state B" may be set to 0%, in other words, not to be executed.

In addition, the percentage (e.g., 80 to 90%) of patterns A-2, A-3, B-2, and B-3 (first performance execution pattern) being executed when the variable display result is a jackpot in time-saving state A or in the high probability state is higher than the percentage (e.g., 10%) of patterns A-2, A-3, B-2, and B-3 (first performance execution pattern) being executed when the variable display result is a jackpot in time-saving state B. This allows players to focus on whether or not the movable body 32 moves in time-saving state A or in the high probability state, increasing interest.

In addition, the frequency of execution of the "movable body effect" in time-saving state B (e.g., about 10%) is lower than the frequency of execution of the "movable body effect" in time-saving state A or in the special probability state (e.g., 80-90%), and therefore the movable body 32 is less likely to be moved unnecessarily in time-saving state B, making it possible to provide a favorable time-saving state B.

<Item B9>
The presentation mode of the "post-performance" in which the performance control CPU 120 notifies the player of the planned number of balls to be awarded in the jackpot gaming state after notifying that the game will be controlled to the jackpot gaming state by the SP reach performance is common to the "time-saving state B,""high probability state," and "time-saving state A," as shown in Figure 11-60.

According to item (B9), in the time-saving state B controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, taking into consideration the fact that a long period of time had continued during which the state was not controlled to a jackpot game state, the variable display that has been decided to be controlled to a jackpot game state has a smaller variety of variable display patterns and a shorter average variable display time, thereby increasing the speed at which the variable display is consumed, and after it has been announced that the state will be controlled to a jackpot game state, it is possible to provide a suitable time-saving state B, since a common presentation can be used to liven things up in both the time-saving state A and the special probability state.

In addition, the "movable body effect" that is executed when the variable display result is a jackpot in the time-saving state A or the probability bonus state is the same as the "movable body effect" that is executed when the variable display result is a jackpot in the time-saving state B (see Figure 11-59 (D1)), which allows development costs to be reduced.

In addition, the control data used to control the movable body LED 208 that emits light in conjunction with the "post-event performance" in the time-saving state A or the special probability state is the same as the control data used to control the movable body LED 208 that emits light in conjunction with the "post-event performance" in the time-saving state B (e.g., light emission control data executed based on the extended command D300), thereby reducing development costs.

In addition, the vibration modes executed by the vibration motor 61 in conjunction with the "post-event performance" in the time-saving state A or the special probability state are the same as the vibration modes executed by the vibration motor 61 in conjunction with the "post-event performance" in the time-saving state B (for example, vibration control data executed based on the extended command S300), thereby reducing development costs.

<Item B10>
Regarding the "entry effect" as a special state start effect in which the effect control CPU 120 notifies the start of time-saving control by displaying an entry image 069SG470 (for example, the characters "BATTLE RUSH ENTER!!") as a special state start display when time-saving control is started, when the control of the special state starts, the entry image 069SG470 is displayed in the special state entry effect, and when the control of the time-saving state B starts, the entry image 069SG470 is displayed in the time-saving entry effect B, and images 069SG473A and 069SG473B for Yu-time (for example, the characters "Yu-1100") are displayed as special displays that are not displayed when the control of the special state or the time-saving state A starts (see Fig. 11-63 (D), Fig. 11-64 (A4) (B4)).

According to item (B10), in the time-saving state B, which is controlled after a predetermined number of variable displays, taking into consideration the fact that a long period of time has passed since the control was not controlled to the jackpot game state, the entry performance not only displays the entry image 069SG470, which is the same as when the control of the high probability state begins, but also displays the Yu-time images 069SG473A and 069SG473B, which are special displays that are not displayed when the control of the high probability state begins, thereby making it possible to liven up the start of the time-saving state B.

The CPU 120 for controlling the effects may also be capable of determining a special variation pattern having a variable display time that can execute a "break-in effect" during a rescue time-saving reaching variation. In this way, the "break-in effect" can be executed optimally.

Next, as shown in Figure 11-50 (C), we will explain the differences between "Time-saving state B" and the "High probability state" and "Time-saving state A".

<Item C1>
As explained in each item A1 to A5 shown in FIG. 11-50(A), the number of miss fluctuation patterns and big win fluctuation patterns that the CPU 103 can determine is the smallest in the time-saving state B, and the average time of the variable display time of the miss fluctuation patterns and big win fluctuation patterns is the shortest in the time-saving state B, and the determination ratio of non-reach misses is the highest in the time-saving state B. Therefore, the average consumption time per one variable display in each of the "time-saving state B", "probable variable state", and "time-saving state A" where the time-saving control is performed is the fastest in the time-saving state B, the medium speed in the probable variable state, and the slow speed in the time-saving state A.

In this way, of the time-saving state B, the probability variable state, and the time-saving state A, which have higher variable efficiency than the normal state due to the time-saving control, the probability variable state and the time-saving state A are controlled via a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, while the time-saving state B is controlled via the execution of the variable display a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times) in a low probability state without the occurrence of a jackpot.

In addition, in the special bonus state and time-saving state A, the variable display number of times at which time-saving control is executed is a first number (e.g., 110 times), whereas in the time-saving state B, the variable display number of times at which time-saving control is executed is a second number (e.g., 1,100 times) that is greater than the first number.

In other words, in the case of time-saving states such as the probability variable state and time-saving state A, the player can enjoy the reach and various effects while waiting for the next big hit with less investment than in the normal state, whereas in the case of time-saving state B, the player is controlled after a long period of play in a state unfavorable to the player without a big hit, and the number of variable displays of the time-saving control is greater than in the probability variable state and time-saving state A. By taking into consideration this, the number of wasted shots is reduced by increasing the variable efficiency as described above, and investment is reduced, while the priority is given to efficiently consuming the losing variable displays and hitting a big hit in a short period of time rather than enjoying the effects, and a decrease in the player's motivation to play can be suppressed.

<Item C2>
In addition, as explained in each item B1 to B10 shown in Figure 11-50 (B), the execution rate of the various preview effects described above is lowest in the time-saving state B, highest in the special state, and medium in the time-saving state A.

In other words, during the long period of play before being controlled to time-saving state B, various preview effects are executed and then repeatedly fail, which is likely to make the player feel quite depressed. Therefore, by making the execution rate of preview effects in time-saving state B lower than in other play states, it is possible to ideally prevent the player's motivation to play from decreasing due to failure effects.

<Item C3>
In this way, the time-saving state B is a game state characterized by having a higher variable efficiency and by having fewer opportunities to be enticed by advance notice performances, compared to other sure-variable states and the time-saving state A in which the time-saving control is similarly performed, thereby suppressing additional investment and a decrease in desire to play, while suitably consuming the variable display and waiting for a jackpot.

In more detail, while time-saving state B shares with other probability variable states and time-saving state A the average normal pattern change time (the period during which the normal pattern changes), the probability of hitting a "normal pattern" in a normal pattern game, and the control that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning hole (high opening control, high base control), it is a time-saving state that prioritizes change efficiency over presentation by shortening the average special pattern change time (the period during which the special pattern changes) more than other probability variable states and time-saving state A, thereby increasing the change efficiency while reducing the frequency of various presentations.

In addition, by making the miss variable pattern (e.g., non-reach, SP reach D) that the CPU 103 can determine in the time-saving state B common to the miss variable display pattern (e.g., non-reach, SP reach D) that can be determined in at least one of the time-saving state A and the guaranteed bonus state, it is possible to reduce development costs and program capacity by not setting a variable display pattern that can be determined only in the time-saving state B.

In addition, by making the miss variable pattern (e.g., non-reach, SP reach D) that the CPU 103 can determine in the time-saving state B common to the miss variable display pattern (e.g., non-reach, SP reach D) that can be determined in both the time-saving state A and the special state, it is possible to reduce development costs and program capacity by not setting a variable display pattern that can be determined only in the time-saving state B.

It is also preferable that the average time of the control period controlled to the time-saving state B is shorter than the average time of the control period controlled to the high probability state, and the average time of the control period controlled to the high probability state is shorter than the average time of the control period controlled to the time-saving state A. In this way, the average time of the control period in the time-saving state B is shorter than that in the high probability state, thereby increasing the speed at which the variable display is consumed, and a suitable time-saving state B can be provided, while the average time of the control period in the time-saving state A is longer, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, the number of miss variation patterns that the CPU 103 can determine in time-saving state B (e.g., two) is less than the number of miss variation patterns that can be determined in time-saving state A (e.g., three), and the number of miss variation patterns that can be determined in time-saving state A (e.g., three) is less than the number of miss variation patterns that can be determined in the special probability state (e.g., four). This reduces the number of miss variation patterns that can be determined in time-saving state B to prioritize consumption of the variable display, while increasing the number of miss variation patterns that can be determined in the special probability state, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, by making the jackpot fluctuation pattern (e.g., SP Reach D) that the CPU 103 can determine in the time-saving state B common to the jackpot variable display pattern (e.g., SP Reach D) that can be determined in at least one of the time-saving state A and the high probability state (e.g., the high probability state), it is possible to reduce development costs and program capacity by not setting a variable display pattern that can be determined only in the time-saving state B.

In addition, by making the jackpot fluctuation pattern (e.g., not via SP) that the CPU 103 can determine in time-saving state B common to the jackpot variable display pattern (e.g., not via SP) that can be determined in both time-saving state A and the special probability state, it is possible to reduce development costs and program capacity by not setting a variable display pattern that can be determined only in time-saving state B.

It is also preferable that the average time of the control period controlled to the time-saving state B is shorter than the average time of the control period controlled to the high probability state, and the average time of the control period controlled to the high probability state is shorter than the average time of the control period controlled to the time-saving state A. In this way, the average time of the control period in the time-saving state B is shorter than that in the high probability state, thereby increasing the speed at which the variable display is consumed, and a suitable time-saving state B can be provided, while the average time of the control period in the time-saving state A is longer, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, the number of jackpot fluctuation patterns that the CPU 103 can determine in time-saving state B (e.g., 1) is less than the number of jackpot fluctuation patterns that can be determined in time-saving state A (e.g., 2), and the number of jackpot fluctuation patterns that can be determined in time-saving state A (e.g., 2) is less than the number of jackpot fluctuation patterns that can be determined in the special probability state (e.g., 3). This reduces the number of jackpot fluctuation patterns that can be determined in time-saving state B to prioritize consumption of the variable display, while increasing the number of jackpot fluctuation patterns that can be determined in the special probability state, making the game more interesting.

In addition, the non-reach miss fluctuation pattern (e.g., non-reach) that the CPU 103 can determine in the time-saving state B is the same as the non-reach miss fluctuation pattern (e.g., non-reach) that can be determined in at least one of the time-saving state A and the special probability state. By not setting a non-reach miss that can be determined only in the time-saving state B, development costs can be reduced and the program capacity can be reduced.

In addition, the non-reach miss fluctuation pattern (e.g., non-reach) that the CPU 103 can determine in the time-saving state B is the same as the non-reach miss fluctuation pattern (e.g., non-reach) that can be determined in both the time-saving state A and the special probability state. By not setting a non-reach miss that can only be determined in the time-saving state B, development costs can be reduced and the program capacity can be reduced.

In addition, the non-reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (e.g., not via SP) that the CPU 103 can determine in time-saving state B is the same as the non-reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (e.g., not via SP) that can be determined in at least one of time-saving state A and the special state, so by not setting a non-reach jackpot that can only be determined in time-saving state B, development costs can be reduced and program capacity can be reduced.

In addition, the non-reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (e.g., not via SP) that the CPU 103 can determine in time-saving state B is the same as the non-reach miss fluctuation pattern (e.g., not via SP) that can be determined in both time-saving state A and the special probability state. By not setting a non-reach jackpot that can be determined only in time-saving state B, development costs can be reduced and the program capacity can be reduced.

In addition, in this embodiment, the execution rate of various effects that the performance control CPU 120 can execute in time-saving state B is lower than in the probability variable state or time-saving state A. However, for example, when the number of remaining variable display times until control to time-saving state B (rescue time-saving reaching change) in normal state (low probability/low base state) becomes a predetermined number (e.g., 100 times or 50 times remaining) or less, the execution rate of various effects that the performance control CPU 120 can execute may be set to be lower than the execution rate of various effects that the performance control CPU 120 can execute in the normal state. In this case, the execution rate of one effect may be lower than the execution rate in the normal state, but higher than the execution rate in time-saving state B (execution rate of one effect; normal state (101 times or more remaining times) > normal state (100 times or less remaining times) > time-saving state B).

In addition, when the number of remaining variable display times until control is made to time-saving state B (rescue time-saving reaching variation) in the normal state (low probability/low base state) becomes a predetermined number (for example, 100 times or 50 times remaining) or less, the contents of the above items A1 to A5 and B1 to B10 may be changed to the contents corresponding to time-saving state B. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the hassle of being controlled to time-saving state B.

In addition, in the normal state (low probability/low base state), if the remaining number of variable display times until the time-saving state B is controlled (rescue time-saving reaching change) is less than a specific number (e.g., 50 times or 10 times remaining) and the variable display result is a jackpot, the rate at which a low expectation effect (e.g., SP reach effect A or a weak pattern preview effect) is executed may be increased.

(Variable display mode of the design)
Next, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern and the small pattern will be explained based on Fig. 11-51 to Fig. 11-55. Fig. 11-51 is a timing chart showing the variable display mode of the pattern in (A) the probability variable state and the time-saving state A miss shortening non-reach fluctuation pattern, and (B) the time-saving state B miss shortening non-reach fluctuation pattern. Fig. 11-52 is an example of the performance operation of the probability variable state and the time-saving state A shortening non-reach miss fluctuation pattern. Fig. 11-53 is an example of the performance operation of the probability variable state and the time-saving state A shortening non-reach miss fluctuation pattern. Fig. 11-54 is an example of the performance operation of the time-saving state B shortening non-reach miss fluctuation pattern. Fig. 11-55 is an example of the performance operation of the SP reach E and the SP reach D.

In this embodiment, each decorative pattern variably displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5R, and 5R is composed of a number display section 069SG051 consisting of the numbers "1" to "9", and a base display section 069SG052 displayed on a lower display layer (back side) than the number display section 069SG051. On the other hand, the left small pattern, medium small pattern, and right small pattern displayed in the display area 5SL in the upper left of the display screen of the image display device 5 are each composed only of the numbers "1" to "9" displayed smaller than the decorative pattern. The decorative patterns and small patterns are variably displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the special patterns.

The variable display mode of the decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5R, and 5R of the decorative pattern (for example, non-reach type miss variable pattern, etc.) is different in the normal state, the high probability state/time-saving state A, and the time-saving state B. Below, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern based on the non-reach type miss variable pattern (including shortened non-reach A and non-reach A) in the normal state, the high probability state/time-saving state A will be explained based on the timing chart in Figure 11-51 (A) and with reference to Figures 11-52 and 11-53. Note that the variable display mode of the decorative pattern of the non-reach type miss in the normal state, the high probability state/time-saving state A is the same, so in Figure 11-52, the miss variable display mode of the shortened non-reach in the high probability state will be explained as an example.

As shown in FIG. 11-51(A), at the start timing ta1 of the variable display of the shortened non-reach miss in the probability change state and time-saving state A, the variable display of the decorative patterns and small patterns in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5R, 5R starts simultaneously (all at once) (see FIG. 11-52(A)). In other words, the start order of the variable display of each decorative pattern is the same. Also, each decorative pattern starts variable display at "low speed" and becomes "medium speed" at timing ta2 when a predetermined time has elapsed, and then becomes the maximum speed "high speed" at timing ta3 when a further predetermined time has elapsed, and is then variably displayed at a constant rotation speed. On the other hand, the small pattern is variably displayed at the maximum speed "high speed" from the start timing ta1 of the variable display. Incidentally, the maximum speed "high speed" of the decorative pattern and the maximum speed "high speed" of the small pattern may be the same or different.

Next, as the end of the variable display approaches, the variable display speed of the decorative patterns changes from "medium speed" to "slow speed" in the order of the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and the center decorative pattern display area 5C. Then, at timing ta4 when a predetermined decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, a predetermined pattern stop sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R (see FIG. 11-52 (B)). Next, a specific action display (stop display action) is performed in which the pedestal display unit 069SG052 is enlarged to a predetermined size and then returned to its original size (see FIG. 11-52 (C)), and the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L at the timing when it returns to its original size (see FIG. 11-52 (D)).

Next, at time ta5 when a predetermined decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, a predetermined pattern stop sound is output from the speakers 8L, 8R (see FIG. 11-52 (E)). Next, a specific action display (stop display action) is performed in which the base display unit 069SG052 is enlarged to a predetermined size and then returned to its original size (see FIG. 11-52 (F)), and the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R at the time when it returns to its original size (see FIG. 11-52 (G)).

Next, at timing ta6 when a predetermined decorative pattern is temporarily displayed in the center decorative pattern display area 5C, a predetermined pattern stop sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R (see FIG. 11-53 (H)). Next, a specific action display (stop display action) is performed in which the base display unit 069SG052 is enlarged to a predetermined size and then returned to its original size (see FIG. 11-53 (I)), and at timing ta6 when it returns to its original size, the decorative pattern is temporarily displayed in the center decorative pattern display area 5C (see FIG. 11-53 (J)). Although not shown in detail, the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are displayed in a temporary stop display mode (e.g., a swinging mode, etc.) from when they are temporarily displayed until they are stopped based on the reception of a pattern confirmation command.

Then, at time ta7 (the time when the pattern confirmation command is received) when a predetermined time has elapsed from time ta6 when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped in the center decorative pattern display area 5C, the left, middle, and right small patterns are simultaneously (all at once) displayed as stopped (see FIG. 11-53 (K)). In this way, the three small patterns are simultaneously displayed as stopped without any specific action being displayed. Also, at time ta7 when the small pattern is temporarily displayed, the three decorative patterns that were temporarily displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are simultaneously displayed as stopped.

Then, at timing ta8, when the pattern determination period (e.g., 0.5 ms) has elapsed since timing ta7 when the small pattern is displayed in a stopped state, the next variable display can begin.

Next, the variable display mode of the decorative symbols of non-reach-type losing symbols in the time-saving state B will be explained based on the timing chart of FIG. 11-51(B) and with reference to FIG. 11-54. Note that the variable display mode of the decorative symbols of non-reach-type losing symbols in the time-saving state B is common, so in FIG. 11-54, the variable display mode of the losing symbol of the shortened non-reach in the time-saving state B will be explained as an example.

As shown in FIG. 11-51(B), at the start timing tb1 of the variable display of the super-reduced non-reach miss in the time-saving state B, the variable display of the decorative patterns and small patterns in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5R, 5R starts simultaneously (all at once) (see FIG. 11-54(A)). In other words, the start order of the variable display of each decorative pattern is the same. Also, each decorative pattern is variably displayed at a constant rotation speed after reaching the maximum speed of "high speed" at timing tb2, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the variable display started at "medium speed". On the other hand, the small pattern is variably displayed at the maximum speed of "high speed" from the start timing tb1 of the variable display. Incidentally, the maximum speed of the decorative pattern, "high speed", and the maximum speed of the small pattern, "high speed", may be the same or different.

Next, as the end of the variable display approaches, the variable display speed of the decorative patterns in each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C simultaneously (all at once) becomes "medium speed", and at timing tb3 when the decorative patterns are simultaneously (all at once) temporarily stopped in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C, a predetermined pattern stop sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R (see FIG. 11-54 (B)). Note that the variable display speed of the decorative patterns may become "low speed" without passing through "medium speed" from "high speed". Next, a specific action display (stop display action) in which the pedestal display unit 069SG052 is enlarged to a predetermined size and then returned to its original size is not performed, and at timing tb4 (the timing when the pattern confirmation command is received) when a predetermined time has elapsed from timing tb3 when each decorative pattern was temporarily stopped, the left, center, and right small patterns are simultaneously (all at once) stopped (see FIG. 11-54 (C)). In this way, the three small symbols are displayed simultaneously without any specific action being displayed. Also, at timing tb4 when the small symbols are displayed, the three decorative symbols that were temporarily displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are displayed simultaneously.

Then, at timing tb5, which is the time when the pattern determination period (e.g., 0.5 ms) has elapsed since timing tb4 when the small pattern is displayed in a stopped state, the next variable display can begin.

In addition, in this embodiment, the period during which the variable display speed of the decorative symbols in the variable display is "medium speed" during acceleration or deceleration is common to the time-saving state B, the high probability state, and the time-saving state A, but it may be shorter in the time-saving state B than in the high probability state and the time-saving state A. Also, the period during which the variable display speed of the decorative symbols in the variable display is "high speed" is shorter in the time-saving state B than in the high probability state and the time-saving state A, but it may be common to the time-saving state B, the high probability state, and the time-saving state A.

In addition, in this embodiment, the stopped display mode of the decorative patterns variably displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is the same for the time-saving state B, the special probability state, and the time-saving state A (the left, center, and right decorative patterns are displayed stopped in a horizontal line), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the special probability state and the time-saving state A, the left, center, and right decorative patterns are displayed stopped in a horizontal line, while in the time-saving state B, the left, center, and right decorative patterns are displayed stopped in different positions in the vertical direction. In this way, the stopped display mode of the decorative patterns in the time-saving state B may be different from the stopped display mode of the decorative patterns in the special probability state and the time-saving state A.

In addition, in this embodiment, the variable display mode of the decorative patterns variably displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is exemplified as being common (variable display in the vertical direction) to the time-saving state B, the special probability state, and the time-saving state A, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the variable display may be vertical in the special probability state and the time-saving state A, while the variable display may be horizontal in the time-saving state B, or the variable display of the decorative patterns may be displayed in a reduced size in the display area 5SR, etc., and special effects by friendly characters, enemy characters, etc. may be continuously displayed on the display screen, and the variable display mode in the time-saving state B may be different from the variable display mode in the special probability state and the time-saving state A.

In this way, the start order of the variable display of the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C is the same for the non-reach miss variable pattern in the special probability state and time-saving state A, and the non-reach miss variable pattern in the time-saving state B, but the time it takes for the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C to reach maximum speed is shorter in time-saving state B than in the special probability state and time-saving state A (tb1-tb2<ta1-ta3). Therefore, different impressions can be given for each state, increasing interest.

The stopping order of the variable display of the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C is left → right → middle in the case of a non-reach miss variable pattern in the probability variable state and time-saving state A, and left, middle, and right are stopped simultaneously in the case of a non-reach miss variable pattern in time-saving state B. This gives a different impression for each state, increasing interest.

The stopping order of the variable display of the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C is the same for the case of a non-reach miss variable pattern in the high probability state and time-saving state A, and the case of a non-reach miss variable pattern in the time-saving state B, but the time from when a decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in one of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C until the next decorative symbol is stopped and displayed may be different for the case of a non-reach miss variable pattern in the high probability state and time-saving state A, and the case of a non-reach miss variable pattern in the time-saving state B. This makes it possible to give a different impression for each state and increase interest.

In addition, the number of times the pattern stop sound is output in variable display 1 is three times in the case of a non-reach miss variation pattern in the probability change state or time-saving state A, because the left, center, and right are displayed stopped at different times, and once in the case of a non-reach miss variation pattern in time-saving state B, because the left, center, and right are displayed stopped at the same time. This gives a different impression for each state, increasing interest.

In addition, the number of times the pattern stop sound is output in the variable display of 1 may be the same for the case of a non-reach miss variable pattern in the probability change state and time-saving state A, and for the case of a non-reach miss variable pattern in the time-saving state B. This makes it possible to give a different impression for each state and increase interest.

In addition, in the case of a non-reach miss variable pattern in the probability variable state and time-saving state A, a specific action display (pattern stopping action) is performed, whereas in the case of a non-reach miss variable pattern in time-saving state B, a specific action display (pattern stopping action) is not performed. Therefore, while the special action display enhances the presentation effect in the probability variable state and time-saving state A, a smooth variable display can be achieved by not executing the special action display in time-saving state B.

In addition, the specific action display (pattern stopping action) is common to both the non-reach miss fluctuation pattern in the high probability state and time-saving state A and the non-reach miss fluctuation pattern in time-saving state B, thereby enhancing the presentation effect with the specific action display, while commonizing the form of the specific action display between the high probability state and time-saving state A and time-saving state B can reduce development costs.

In addition, the period from when the decorative pattern is stopped to when the small pattern is stopped is shorter in the non-reach miss variable pattern in time-saving state B than in the non-reach miss variable pattern in the sure-win state and time-saving state A {t1 (ta6-ta7) > t2 (tb3-tb4)}. Therefore, a smooth variable display can be achieved in time-saving state B.

In addition, the pattern determination period (ta7 to ta8), which is the minimum period from when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed at a variable display of 1 in the probability variable state and time-saving state A until the variable display of the decorative pattern begins in the next variable display, and the pattern determination period (tb4 to tb5), which is the minimum period from when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed at a variable display of 1 in time-saving state B until the variable display of the decorative pattern begins in the next variable display, are the same. Therefore, by standardizing the control that takes into account the drawing process until the decorative pattern is completely stopped and displayed, it is possible to reduce development costs.

In addition, the specific action display of each decorative pattern is exemplified as an action display in which the display is enlarged to a specified size and then returns to the original size, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the action mode is not limited to the above and can be changed in various ways. In addition, in the specific action display, only the pedestal display unit 069SG052 displays the specific action, and the number display unit 069SG051 does not display the specific action, so that the special effect can be enhanced by the specific action display while ensuring the visibility of the identification information, but the number display unit 069SG051 may also display the specific action as well as the pedestal display unit 069SG052. In addition, the specific action mode may be different for each decorative pattern with a different number.

In addition, in the above, an example was given in which the variable display mode is common between the abbreviated non-reach miss fluctuation pattern and the non-abbreviated non-reach miss fluctuation pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display mode may be different between the abbreviated non-reach miss fluctuation pattern and the non-abbreviated non-reach miss fluctuation pattern.

In addition, the display position of the decorative pattern in time-saving state B may be made different when the variable display starts and when the variable display stops, allowing the variable display to be displayed optimally even during the short variable display period.

In addition, instead of accelerating the speed at which the decorative pattern's variable display reaches its maximum speed as in this embodiment, the decorative pattern may be changed to a form that is difficult to see (e.g., a dark form) during the variable display, and then changed from the difficult to see form to a normal form when the decorative pattern stops, thereby realizing a variable display that gives a sense of speed.

Next, the reach specific action display and the jackpot specific action display will be explained based on Figure 11-55.

First, in the variable display of the jackpot fluctuation pattern of SP Reach E, the variable display starts (see Figure 11-55 (A)), and after the decorative pattern is displayed stationary in the left decorative pattern display area 5L (see Figure 11-55 (B)), the decorative pattern is displayed decelerating in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and the reach notice and button notice are executed (see Figure 11-55 (C)). When the decorative pattern is temporarily displayed stationary in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, the base display part 069SG052 of the decorative pattern temporarily displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the right decorative pattern display area 5R is enlarged to a predetermined size and then returns to its original size, and a reach specific action display is performed (see Figure 11-55 (D)), and the variable display mode becomes the reach mode (see Figure 11-55 (E)).

Next, although not shown, when a jackpot announcement is made after the SP reach performance, the determined decorative patterns that will be a predetermined jackpot combination are temporarily displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C (see FIG. 11-55(F)). After that, the base display portion 069SG052 of the decorative patterns that are temporarily displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is enlarged to a predetermined size and then returns to its original size, and a jackpot specific action display is performed (see FIG. 11-55(G)), after which the determined decorative patterns are temporarily displayed (see FIG. 11-55(H)).

On the other hand, in the variable display of the jackpot fluctuation pattern of SP Reach D, the variable display starts (see FIG. 11-55 (I)), and without displaying the reach mode, the determined decorative pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination is temporarily displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C (see FIG. 11-55 (F)). After that, the base display portion 069SG052 of the decorative pattern that is temporarily displayed in each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is enlarged to a predetermined size and then returns to its original size, and then a jackpot specific action display is performed (see FIG. 11-55 (G)), and the determined decorative pattern is temporarily displayed (see FIG. 11-55 (H)).

In this way, in the case of the SP reach E fluctuation pattern, it is possible to execute a reach specific action display that causes the decorative symbols to perform a specific action when the variable display mode becomes a reach mode, and a second specific action display that causes the decorative symbols to perform a specific action when the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed as a confirmed decorative pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination. In the SP reach E fluctuation pattern that goes through a reach, the reach specific action display and the jackpot specific action display are executed, but in the SP reach D fluctuation pattern that does not go through a reach, the reach specific action display is not executed and the jackpot specific action display is executed. Therefore, in the SP reach D that can be executed in the time-saving state B, it is possible to provide a suitable time-saving state B because it is less likely to be unnecessarily stirred up.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-55(I), after the variable display starts, no reach state is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 11-55(F), the fixed decorative patterns that are the predetermined jackpot combination are temporarily displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a "movable body presentation" in which the movable body 32 falls may be executed without any operation by the player between the start of the variable display and the temporary display of the fixed decorative patterns that are the predetermined jackpot combination.

(Display mode of non-reach out fluctuation pattern)
Next, compare non-reach failure variation patterns. Figure 11-56 is a diagram comparing the performance operation example of non-reach failure variation patterns. Figure 11-57 is a diagram comparing the performance operation example of non-reach failure variation patterns. Note that, in the following, the detailed operation example of the specific operation display that is executed when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed is omitted.

As shown in Figure 11-56, comparing the non-reach missed fluctuation patterns of the shortened type, first, in the "ultra shortened non-reach" that can be determined in the time-saving state B, the variable display of the decorative patterns in each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is started simultaneously (see Figure 11-56 (A1)). The variable display of the decorative patterns in each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is stopped and displayed simultaneously (see Figure 11-56 (A2)). On the other hand, in the "shortened non-reach A" that can be determined in the special probability state and the time-saving state A, the variable display of the decorative patterns in each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is started simultaneously (see Figure 11-56 (B1)). Next, a decorative pattern is displayed statically in the left decorative pattern display area 5L (see FIG. 11-56 (B2)), a decorative pattern is displayed statically in the right decorative pattern display area 5R (see FIG. 11-56 (B3)), and a decorative pattern is displayed statically in the center decorative pattern display area 5C (see FIG. 11-56 (B4)).

As for the shortened non-reach variable pattern, in the sure-win state and time-saving state A, the variable display time is "3 seconds" in shortened non-reach A, and the decorative symbols are displayed in the order of left, right, and center, whereas in time-saving state B, the variable display time is "1.5 seconds" in super shortened non-reach, and the decorative symbols are displayed in the order of left, right, and center at the same time.

Next, as shown in Figure 11-57, comparing the non-reach missed fluctuation patterns, first, in "non-reach A" that can be determined in the high probability state, the variable display of the decorative symbols in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R starts simultaneously. At this time, a "movable body announcement" in which the movable body 32 moves up and down may be executed (see Figure 11-57 (A1)). Next, before the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in any of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, a "character announcement" may be executed in which a character image 069SG100C and a dialogue display 069SG431 consisting of text such as "reach?" are displayed (see Figure 11-57 (A2)).

Next, after a decorative pattern is displayed statically in the left decorative pattern display area 5L (see FIG. 11-57(A3)), a "reach notice" in which the decorative pattern is displayed decelerating in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, a button image 069SG441 imitating the push button 31B, and an operation prompting display 069SG442 such as "Long press!" are displayed to prompt the operation of the push button 31B may be executed (see FIG. 11-57(A4)). After that, a decorative pattern different from the left pattern is displayed statically in the right decorative pattern display area 5R (see FIG. 11-57(A5)), and the reach mode is not entered, and the decorative pattern is displayed statically in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C, ending the variable display (see FIG. 11-57(A6)).

In addition, the "non-reach A" (see Figure 11-57 (B1) to (B6)) that can be determined in the time-saving state A has a similar flow to the non-reach missed fluctuation pattern that can be determined in the high probability state (see Figure 11-57 (A1) to (A6)), so a description will be omitted.

On the other hand, in "non-reach A" which can be determined in time-saving state B, the variable display of the decorative symbols in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R starts simultaneously (see Figure C1), and then the variable display of the decorative symbols in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R stops simultaneously, ending the variable display (see Figure 11-57 (C2)).

As described above, for the non-reach fluctuation pattern, the variable display time is the same at "7 seconds" for the special probability state, time-saving state A, and time-saving state B, but in the special probability state and time-saving state A, the execution rate of various effects such as "moving object notice", "character notice", "reach notice", and "button notice" is high, whereas in time-saving state B, the execution rate of various effects such as "moving object notice", "character notice", "reach notice", and "button notice" is lower (or not executed) than in the special probability state or time-saving state A.

(Display mode of SP reach fluctuation pattern)
Next, the super reach fluctuation pattern is compared. Figure 11-58 is a diagram comparing the performance operation example of the super reach fluctuation pattern. Figure 11-59 is a diagram comparing the performance operation example of the super reach fluctuation pattern. Figure 11-60 is a diagram comparing the performance operation example of the post-event performance in the super reach fluctuation pattern.

Comparing the Super Reach fluctuation patterns based on Figures 11-58 and 11-59 below, first, in the fluctuation pattern of "SP Reach E" that can be determined in time-saving state A, the variable display of the decorative symbols in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R starts simultaneously (see Figure 11-58 (A1)). Next, before the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in any of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, a "character announcement" may be executed in which a character image 069SG100C and a dialogue display 069SG431 consisting of, for example, the text "Maybe it's a reach!!" are displayed (see Figure 11-58 (A2)).

Next, the variable display mode becomes the reach mode (see FIG. 11-58 (A3)). Although not specifically shown, when the reach mode is reached, a "reach notice" or "button notice" may be executed.

Next, a reach title image 069SG440 consisting of a character image and text such as "SP reach performance E" is displayed (see FIG. 11-58 (A4)). At this time, the decorative symbols that were variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R are displayed in a reduced size in the display area 5SR provided in the upper right corner of the display screen of the image display device 5. Then, a "battle performance" begins in which the character image 069SG100C of the ally character faces off against the character image 069SG100X of the enemy character (see FIG. 11-58 (A5)).

Next, a predetermined time has passed since the start of the battle presentation, and the final showdown begins (see FIG. 11-59 (A6) (A7)). Here, a button image 069SG451 that resembles the push button 31B, an operation prompting display 069SG452 such as "Start charging!", and a gauge display 069SG453 are displayed, and a "win/lose button presentation" is executed as an operation prompting display that prompts the player to press and hold the push button 31B (see FIG. 11-59 (A8)). If a long press by the player is detected during the valid operation period in which the operation prompting display 069SG452 is displayed, the level of the gauge display 069SG453 increases (see FIG. 11-59 (A9)).

In addition, before displaying the button image 069SG451 that resembles the push button 31B during or immediately before the performance period of the win/lose button performance, a pre-performance (such as a light gathering performance in which light gathers at the position where the button image 069SG451 is displayed) may be executed. In addition, it is preferable that such a pre-performance is not executed in the time-saving state B.

Next, when a predetermined time (e.g., 5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the operation prompting display 069SG452, the display of the operation prompting display 069SG452 changes to "RELEASE!!" to prompt the release of the push button 31B, and the operation time for releasing the operation is displayed by the gauge display 069SG453 (see FIG. 11-59 (A10)). Then, when the release of the push operation of the push button 31B is detected before the predetermined operation valid period has elapsed, or when the operation valid period has elapsed without the release of the push operation being detected, an image 069SG455 indicating that an ally character has attacked is displayed, and the movable body 32 falls from the origin position to near the intermediate position (see FIG. 11-59 (A11)).

Next, if the variable display result is a jackpot, a movable body presentation is executed, the movable body 32 falls from the origin position to the presentation position, and a movable body presentation image 069SG456 consisting of an image indicating that the ally character's attack has hit the enemy character and an effect image for highlighting the movable body 32 is displayed. After the movable body 32 falls from the origin position to the presentation position (see FIG. 11-59 (D1)), a notification image 069SG457 indicating that the enemy character has been defeated and the ally character has won the battle is displayed (see FIG. 11-59 (D2)). The fixed decorative patterns that are the predetermined jackpot combination are temporarily displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and it is announced that the variable display result is a jackpot (see FIG. 11-59 (D3)).

When a jackpot is announced, as shown in FIG. 11-60, the background image is switched to the fifth background image 069SG350, and a character image 069SG100C and a planned ball number counter display 069SG460 showing the planned number of balls to be awarded in the jackpot game state are displayed, and the post-event performance begins (see FIG. 11-60 (D4)).

Next, an image of an ally character attacking an enemy character is displayed, and an additional ball number display 069SG461 (e.g., "+50") is displayed in response to the attack, and the displayed planned number of balls is added to the counter value displayed on the planned number of balls counter display 069SG460 (see FIG. 11-60 (D5)). Then, when the counter value displayed on the planned number of balls counter display 069SG460 reaches a predetermined value (e.g., "300"), a button image 069SG451 imitating the push button 31B, an operation prompting display 069SG452 such as "Press!!", and a gauge display 069SG453 showing the remaining valid operation period are displayed, and an operation prompting effect is executed to prompt a single press of the push button 31B (see FIG. 11-60 (D6)).

Next, when the pressing of the push button 31B is detected before the specified operation valid period has elapsed, or when the operation valid period has elapsed without the pressing operation being detected, the friendly character attacks, and the counter value of the scheduled ball number counter display 069SG460 is displayed variably (see FIG. 11-60 (D7)), and the enemy character is faded out (see FIG. 11-60 (D8)). Then, the scheduled ball number counter display 069SG460 is enlarged and displayed in the center of the display screen, and a specified counter value (for example, "750", which is the scheduled number of balls that can be obtained in the case of a "6R jackpot") is displayed frozen (see FIG. 11-60 (D9)).

In the case of jackpot A or jackpot B (6R jackpot), the counter value displayed on the planned ball count counter display 069SG460 is not updated and the game is controlled to the jackpot game state, and in the case of jackpot C (10R jackpot), the counter value displayed on the planned ball count counter display 069SG460 is updated to a specified counter value (e.g., "1500") (see Figure 11-60 (D10)) and then the game is controlled to the jackpot game state.

In addition, if the variable display result is a miss, although this is not shown in detail, the attack of the ally character does not hit the enemy character, the movable body 32 does not fall from the origin position to the performance position, the enemy character is not defeated, the ally character loses the battle, and a combination of miss patterns is displayed stationary in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, thereby informing the player that the variable display result is a miss (see FIG. 11-59 (D4)).

Returning to FIG. 11-58, in the "SP Reach C" jackpot variation pattern that can be determined in the probability change state, the variable display of the decorative symbols in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R starts simultaneously (see FIG. 11-58 (B1)). Next, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the variable display started, a blackout effect starts in which the display screen turns into a black screen (see FIG. 11-58 (B2)). After that, the variable display mode does not become a reach mode, and the same effect as in FIG. 11-58, 50 (A3 to A7) is performed (see FIG. 11-58, 50 (B3 to B6)), and then the same effect as in FIG. 11-59 (A8 to A9) is not performed, and the same effect as in FIG. 11-59 (A10 to A11) is performed (see FIG. 11-59 (B7 to B8)). Then, the effects of FIG. 11-59 (D1 to D3) and FIG. 11-60 (D4 to D10) are performed.

Returning to FIG. 11-58, in the "SP Reach D" jackpot variation pattern that can be determined in the time-saving state B, the variable display of the decorative symbols in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R starts simultaneously (see FIG. 11-58 (C1)). Next, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the variable display started, a blackout effect starts in which the display screen turns into a black screen (see FIG. 11-58 (C2)). After that, the variable display mode does not become a reach mode, and the effect of FIG. 11-58 (A4) is not performed, and after the same effect as FIG. 11-58 (A5) is performed (see FIG. 11-58 (C3)), the effect of FIG. 11-59 (A8 to A9) is not performed, and the same effect as FIG. 11-59 (A10 to A11) is performed (see FIG. 11-59 (C4 to C5)). Then, the effects shown in Figure 11-59 (D1 to D3) and Figure 11-60 (D4 to D10) are performed.

(Example of control operation of Super Reach jackpot fluctuation pattern)
Next, examples of control operations for the jackpot fluctuation patterns of SP Reach E, C, and D will be compared based on FIG. 11-61. FIG. 11-61 is a timing chart showing examples of control operations in SP Reach E, C, and D.

As shown in Figures 11-61 (A) to (C), SP Reach E, C, and D are composed of a variable display part that executes a variable display of decorative symbols, and a post-performance part that notifies the player of the expected number of balls that can be won in a jackpot game state after the variable display part ends. In the variable display part, when the variable display begins, the aforementioned "movable object preview," "character preview," "reach preview," "button preview," etc. are executed, and after the reach state is reached, a "battle performance" or "short battle performance" is executed as an SP reach performance. Then, after the "win/lose button performance" is started as an operation promotion performance in the "decisive performance" at timing ta1, the "movable object performance" is started at timing ta2. Then, after the results of the "battle performance" or "short battle performance" are announced, at timing ta3, the determined decorative symbols that will be the predetermined jackpot combination are temporarily stopped and displayed, and a specific jackpot action display (jackpot symbol stopping action; see FIG. 11-55 (G)) is performed, and then at timing ta4, the combination of symbols that will determine the jackpot is temporarily stopped and a jackpot is announced. After that, during the period from timing ta5 to ta6, a post-performance is executed.

The variable display time (ta0 to ta5) of the variable display part is 50 seconds for SP Reach E, which can be determined in time-saving state A, 40 seconds for SP Reach C, which can be determined in the special state, and 25 seconds for SP Reach D, which can be determined in time-saving state B. On the other hand, the time of the post-performance part (ta5 to ta6) is the same for SP Reach E, C, and D, at 15 seconds.

In other words, while the variable display times of the variable display parts in time-saving state A and the special probability state are different from the variable display time of the variable display part in time-saving state B (25 seconds) (50 seconds, 40 seconds), the variable display times of the post-performance parts in time-saving state A and the special probability state are the same as the variable display time of the post-performance parts in time-saving state B (15 seconds). This allows for differences in the various performances in the variable display parts between time-saving state A and the special probability state and time-saving state B, and enhances the performance effect, while reducing development costs by standardizing the post-performance parts.

In addition, while the variable display times of the variable display parts in the time-saving state A and the probability bonus state (50 seconds, 40 seconds) are different from the variable display time of the variable display part in the time-saving state B (25 seconds), the display times of the jackpot specific action displays in the time-saving state A and the probability bonus state (ta3 to ta4) are the same as the display times of the jackpot specific action displays in the time-saving state B (ta3 to ta4). This allows for differences in the various effects in the variable display parts to be made, enhancing the effect of the effects, while reducing development costs by standardizing the display times of the jackpot specific action displays.

The execution period of the "win/lose button effect" (ta1 to ta2) is the same for SP Reach C and D, and is different only for SP Reach E.

In addition, when the display control unit 123 performs display processing to generate the image drawn in the image drawing area in the VRAM area as image data (display data) for displaying on the image display device 5 in the display image creation area and outputting the image data (display data) of the display image creation area as a video signal, it generates extended commands (e.g., extended commands DXXX, SXXX, etc. (where "X" is any number)) as movable body control information for operating the movable body 32, push button 31B, etc., and extended commands (e.g., extended commands BXXX, etc. (where "X" is any number)) as lamp control information for turning on/off the movable body LED 208 and frame LEDs 9L1-9L12, 9R1-9R12, etc., and transmits them to the performance control CPU 120.

Based on receiving the above-mentioned extended commands DXXX and SXXX, the performance control CPU 120 starts operation control to operate the movable body motor 207 of the movable body 32 and the vibration motor 61 that vibrates the push button 31B in an operation pattern corresponding to the extended commands DXXX and SXXX, separately from the operation control based on the operation control execution data of the vibration motor 61 that vibrates the movable body motor 207 of the movable body 32 and the push button 31B described in the process data.

In addition, based on receiving the above-mentioned extended command BXXX, etc., the performance control CPU 120 starts control to turn on/off the movable body LED 208 in a lighting pattern corresponding to the extended command BXXX, etc. (for example, see the lighting pattern shown in Figure 13-6 (B) in feature section 018SG), separately from the control based on the lamp control execution data of the movable body LED 208 described in the process data.

In addition, control data for operating the movable body 32 and the push button 31B, and control data for turning on the movable body LED 208 are stored in the ROM 121.

Here, the control data used to control the operation of the movable body 32 and the push button 31B in the "movable body presentation" in the event of a jackpot in the time-saving state A or the special probability state (e.g., control data corresponding to extended commands such as D100 and S200) is the same as the control data used to control the operation of the movable body 32 and the push button 31B in the "movable body presentation" in the event of a jackpot in the time-saving state B (e.g., control data corresponding to extended commands such as D100 and S200), thereby reducing development costs.

In this embodiment, an example has been given in which extended commands (e.g., extended commands DXXX, SXXX, etc. (where "X" is any number)) as control information for movable bodies for operating the movable body 32, push button 31B, etc., and extended commands (e.g., extended command BXXX, etc. (where "X" is any number)) as control information for lamps for turning on/off the movable body LED 208, frame LEDs 9L1-9L12, 9R1-9R12, etc., are generated separately. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, in a "movable body performance" or the like, the on/off control of the movable body LED 208, frame LEDs 9L1-9L12, 9R1-9R12, and the like, and the control for movable bodies such as the movable body 32 and push button 31B may be executed based on extended command B000 as control information for lamps for turning on/off the movable body LED 208, frame LEDs 9L1-9L12, 9R1-9R12, etc. In other words, lighting control and operation control may be performed using common control information (extended commands).

In addition, the vibration mode executed by the vibration motor 61 in conjunction with the movement of the movable body 32 in the "movable body performance" when a jackpot occurs in the time-saving state A or the special probability state, and the vibration mode executed by the vibration motor 61 in conjunction with the movement of the movable body 32 in the "movable body performance" when a jackpot occurs in the time-saving state B, are common, which allows development costs to be reduced.

In addition, the control data (e.g., control data corresponding to an extended command such as B000) used to control the movable body LED 208 and frame LEDs 9L1-9L12, 9R1-9R12 that emit light in conjunction with the movement of the movable body 32 in the "movable body performance" in the event of a jackpot in the time-saving state A or the special probability state is common to the control data (e.g., control data corresponding to an extended command such as B000) used to control the movable body LED 208 that emits light in conjunction with the movement of the movable body 32 in the "movable body performance" in the event of a jackpot in the time-saving state B, thereby reducing development costs.

In addition, by making the extension command B000 a common extension command for movable body operation control and LED lighting control, it is not necessary to separate the extension commands for movable body operation control and the extension commands for LED lighting control, which reduces the program capacity for performance control. If the extension commands used for movable body performance were separated into extension commands for movable body operation control and extension commands for LED lighting control, there is a risk that one of the extension commands will be missed due to a malfunction, but by sharing them, it is possible to perform movable body performances optimally.

In addition, the effect image displayed in conjunction with the movement of the movable body 32 in the "moving body performance" when a jackpot occurs in the time-saving state A or the special probability state (see movable body performance image 069SG456 in FIG. 11-59 (D1)) is the same as the effect image displayed in conjunction with the movement of the movable body 32 in the "moving body performance" when a jackpot occurs in the time-saving state B (see movable body performance image 069SG456 in FIG. 11-59 (D1)). This allows development costs to be reduced.

(Comparison between super reach fluctuation pattern and non-reach out fluctuation pattern)
Next, a comparison between the super reach fluctuation pattern and the non-reach miss fluctuation pattern will be described with reference to Fig. 11-62. Fig. 11-62 is a diagram comparing the super reach fluctuation pattern and the non-reach miss fluctuation pattern.

As shown in FIG. 11-62, the variable display period (tb0 to ta4) from when the variable display of the decorative pattern starts to when it stops in the super reach miss variable pattern is longer than the variable display period (tb0 to tb4) from when the variable display of the decorative pattern starts to when it stops in the non-reach miss variable pattern.

In addition, the variable display period (tb0 to tb1) of the non-reach miss variable pattern is shorter than the period (tb0 to tb3) from when the variable display of the decorative pattern starts in the super reach miss variable pattern until the variable display state becomes a reach state, so the variable display ends in a period shorter than the period until the reach state is reached, and a suitable time-saving state B can be provided.

In addition, in the non-reach miss fluctuation pattern, the period (tb0 to tb1) from when the variable display of the decorative pattern in the left decorative pattern display area 5L starts to when it stops is shorter than the period (tb0 to tb2) from when the variable display of the decorative pattern in the left decorative pattern display area 5L starts to when it stops in the super-reach miss fluctuation pattern, so that the variable display of the decorative pattern in a specified row ends in a short period of time, and a suitable time-saving state B can be provided.

(Rush-in performance)
Next, an example of the performance of the entry performance will be described based on Fig. 11-63 and Fig. 11-64. Fig. 11-63 shows an example of the performance of the entry introduction performance (A) to (C), and a time-saving entry performance (D) of the time-saving entry performance A. Fig. 11-64 shows an example of the performance of the probability-changing entry performance (A1) to (A4), and a time-saving entry performance (B1) to (B4) of the time-saving entry performance B.

As shown in FIG. 11-63(A) to (C), in the "introduction performance", the effect image 069SG470A is gradually enlarged and displayed in the center of the display screen, and the message "BATTLE
A predetermined number (for example, one character) of character images 069SG470B making up "RUSH rush in!!" are framed in from the right side of the display screen of image display device 5 and moved to the center of the display screen.

Then, a "time-saving entry effect A" is performed in which an entry image 069SG470 consisting of an effect image 069SG470A that is displayed at its maximum and has a changed display color, and a text image 069SG470B consisting of the text "BATTLE RUSH ENTER!!" gathered in the center of the display screen, is displayed, thereby announcing that control of time-saving state A has begun.

In the case of a "probability bonus entry performance," after the entry image 069SG470 in FIG. 11-63 (D) is displayed, as shown in FIG. 11-64 (A1), a probability bonus image 069SG471 with a predetermined transparency consisting of the character "極" and an effect image is displayed on a display layer higher than the entry image 069SG470, and then is moved and displayed while gradually shrinking toward the bottom left of the display screen and with a decreasing transparency (see FIG. 11-64 (A2-A3)).

Then, a "probability bonus entry effect" is performed in which a probability bonus entry image 069SG472 consisting of an entry image 069SG470 and a probability bonus image 069SG471 displayed in the smallest size with 0% transparency in the bottom left of the display screen is displayed, thereby announcing that control of the probability bonus state has begun (see FIG. 11-64 (A4)).

In the case of "Time-saving entry effect B", the "entry introduction effect" described in Fig. 11-63 (A) to (C) is not executed, and when the pattern determination period (e.g., 20 seconds) begins after the 900th variable display, when the start condition for the control of time-saving state B is met, the entry image 069SG470 in Fig. 11-63 (D) is displayed, and then, as shown in Fig. 11-64 (B1), a play-time image 069SG473A having a predetermined transparency and consisting of the characters "1100" and an effect image is displayed on a display layer higher than the entry image 069SG470, and then is moved and displayed while gradually shrinking and decreasing in transparency toward the bottom left of the display screen (see Fig. 11-64 (B2 to B3)).

Then, a "time-saving entry effect B" is performed, which displays an entry image 069SG473 consisting of an entry image 069SG470, a Yu-time image 069SG473A consisting of the characters "1100" displayed at the smallest size with 0% transparency in the bottom left of the display screen, and a Yu-time image 069SG473B consisting of the character "Yu", thereby announcing that control of time-saving state B has begun (see FIG. 11-64 (B4)).

In this way, when control of time-saving state A is started, the entry image 069SG470 is displayed in the time-saving entry performance A, and when control of the special probability state is started, the entry image 069SG472 consisting of the entry image 069SG470 and the special probability state image 069SG471 is displayed in the special probability state entry performance, while when control of time-saving state B is started, the entry image 069SG470 common to the entry image 069SG470 displayed when entering time-saving state A and the special probability state is displayed in time-saving entry performance B, and the play time images 069SG473A and 069SG473B are displayed as special displays that are not displayed when control of the special probability state or time-saving state A is started.

Therefore, in the time-saving state B, which is controlled after a predetermined number of variable displays, taking into consideration the fact that a long period of time has passed during which the game is not controlled to a jackpot game state, the time-saving entry performance B not only displays the entry image 069SG470, which is the same as when the control of the special probability state or the time-saving state A starts, but also displays the play-time image 069SG473B, which is not displayed when the control of the special probability state or the time-saving state A starts, thereby livening up the start of the time-saving state B.

[Embodiment 2]
Next, the second embodiment in the feature section 069SG will be described based on FIG. 11-65 to FIG. 11-69. FIG. 11-65 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a variable pattern determination table as the second embodiment in the feature section 069SG. FIG. 11-66 is a diagram showing a part of a variable display start setting process as the second embodiment in the feature section 069SG. FIG. 11-67 is a diagram showing a variable display performance pattern determination table. FIG. 11-68 is an example of the performance operation of SP Reach D. FIG. 11-69 is a diagram for explaining the features according to the game state. In the second embodiment, illustrations and detailed explanations of the same configuration as the pachinko game machine 1 of the first embodiment will be omitted, and differences will be mainly described.

Figure 11-65 shows (A) a specific example of a fluctuation pattern determination table for a miss when the number of reserved memories is 0 in time-saving state B (rescue time-saving state), (B) a specific example of a fluctuation pattern determination table for a miss when the number of reserved memories is 1 to 3, (C) a specific example of a fluctuation pattern determination table for a jackpot when the number of reserved memories is 0, and (B) a specific example of a fluctuation pattern determination table for a jackpot when the number of reserved memories is 1 to 3.

As shown in Figure 11-65 (A), in the fluctuation pattern determination table for misses when the number of reserved memories is 0, 100 judgment values are assigned to ultra-shortened non-reach. Also, as shown in Figure 11-65 (B), in the fluctuation pattern determination table for misses when the number of reserved memories is 1 to 3, 100 judgment values are assigned to ultra-shortened non-reach.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 11-65 (C), in the fluctuation pattern determination table for a jackpot when the number of reserved memories is 0 to 3, 10 determination values are assigned to SP Reach E, and 90 determination values are assigned to SP Reach D.

In this embodiment, when the variable display of the SP Reach D fluctuation pattern is determined in the special probability state and the time-saving state A, the performance control CPU 120 executes the "short battle effect" described in the first embodiment as the variable display effect, while when the variable display of the SP Reach D fluctuation pattern is determined in the time-saving state B, the performance control CPU 120 executes the "instant win effect" or "full spin effect" described below as the variable display effect, rather than the "short battle effect".

The SP Reach D fluctuation pattern that can be determined in the special probability state and the time-saving state A is a reach fluctuation pattern in which a "short battle effect" is executed after the variable display starts and the variable display mode becomes a reach mode, whereas the SP Reach D fluctuation pattern that can be determined in the time-saving state B is a non-reach fluctuation pattern in which an "instant win effect" or "full spin effect" is executed without the variable display mode becoming a reach mode after the variable display starts.

Next, FIG. 11-66 is a part of a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 11-44. In this embodiment, after executing the processes of steps S069SGS271 to S069SGS276 in the variable display start setting process, if the CPU 120 for performance control determines in step S069SGS277 that the fluctuation pattern stored in the fluctuation pattern designation command storage area is not a shortened non-reach fluctuation pattern or a super shortened non-reach fluctuation pattern, that is, if the fluctuation pattern is a non-reach fluctuation pattern or a super reach fluctuation pattern (step 069SGS277; No), it executes the processes of steps 069SGS277A to 069SGS277D before executing the reach notice execution decision process of step 069SGS278.

Specifically, the presentation control CPU 120 determines whether the variation pattern stored in the variation pattern designation command storage area is an SP Reach D variation pattern (step 069SGS277A), and if it is an SP Reach D variation pattern (step 069SGS277A; Yes), determines whether the game state is time-saving state B (step 069SGS277B). Then, if it is determined that the game state is time-saving state B (step 069SGS277B; Yes), it executes a variable display presentation pattern determination process (step 069SGS277C).

In the variable display performance pattern determination process, for example, a random number (0 to 99) for determining the variable display performance pattern is extracted, and the variable display performance pattern is determined using the variable display performance pattern determination table shown in Figure 11-67.

In the variable display effect pattern determination table, as shown in FIG. 11-67, for each of the "instant hit effect" and "full spin effect", different judgment values are assigned for the jackpot type of "jackpot C (10R)" and "jackpot A, B (6R)" so that the judgment value numbers are as shown in FIG. 11-67.

Specifically, when the jackpot type is "jackpot C (10R)", 10 judgment values are assigned to the "instant hit effect", and 60 judgment values are assigned to the "full spin effect". Also, when the jackpot type is "jackpot A, B (6R)", 70 judgment values are assigned to the "instant hit effect", and 30 judgment values are assigned to the "full spin effect".

In this way, when comparing the "instant win effect" and "full spin effect" in the three game states other than the normal state, they are not executed in the special probability state or time-saving state A, but are variable display effects that can only be executed in time-saving state B, and are executed by using the SP reach D variation pattern that can be determined in the special probability state and time-saving state A.

In addition, the execution rate of the "instant hit effect" when the jackpot type is "jackpot A, B (6R)" is higher than the execution rate of the "instant hit effect" when the jackpot type is "jackpot C (10R)", while the execution rate of the "full spin effect" when the jackpot type is "jackpot C (10R)" is higher than the execution rate of the "full spin effect" when the jackpot type is "jackpot A, B (6R)". In other words, when the jackpot type is "jackpot C (10R)", which has a higher expected number of balls that can be obtained in the jackpot game state than "jackpot A, B (6R)" and is more advantageous for the player, the "full spin effect" is executed at a higher rate than the "instant hit effect".

Next, examples of the "instant win effect" and "full spin effect" will be described. When the SP Reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined in the probability variable state and time-saving state A, the variable display starts, the variable display mode becomes a reach mode, and then a "short battle effect" is executed in which the friendly character wins against the enemy character in the battle effect, thereby announcing that the variable display result is a jackpot (see Figures 11-58 to 11-59). However, when the SP Reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined in time-saving state B, the variable display starts, and then an "instant win effect" or "full spin effect" is executed in which the variable display mode does not become a reach mode, and the variable display result is announced to be a jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 11-65, in the "instant hit effect", in the SP Reach D big win variation pattern, after the variable display of the decorative symbols in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is started simultaneously (see FIG. 11-68 (A1)), when a predetermined time has passed, the fixed decorative symbols that are the predetermined big win combination are temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (see FIG. 11-68 (A2)). After that, in the "decisive effect", a button image imitating the push button 31B, an operation promotion display such as "Press!!" and a gauge display are displayed to promote the operation of the push button 31B, and instead, a "movable body effect" is executed in which the attack of the ally character hits the enemy character and the movable body 32 falls from the origin position to near the middle position (see FIG. 11-68 (A3)). Then, the fixed decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed again in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (see FIG. 11-68 (A4)). After that, in the post-performance part, a post-performance similar to the post-performance described in FIG. 11-60 (D4 to D10) is executed (see FIG. 11-68 (C1 to C7)), and then the game is controlled to a jackpot game state.

As shown in FIG. 11-65, in the SP Reach D jackpot variation pattern, after a blackout effect in which the display screen is blacked out with the start of the variable display is executed for a predetermined period of time (see FIG. 11-68 (B1)), the variable display of the decorative symbols in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is simultaneously started in the third background image 069SG330 (see FIG. 11-68 (B2)). Then, when a predetermined time has elapsed, a full rotation display is started in which the decorative symbols in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are variably displayed in a state where they are aligned with the fixed decorative symbols that are the predetermined jackpot combination (see FIG. 11-68 (B3)). After that, the fixed decorative symbols that are the predetermined jackpot combination are provisionally displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (see FIG. 11-68 (B4)). After that, in the post-performance part (symbol determination period), a post-performance similar to that described in FIG. 11-60 (D4 to D10) is executed (see FIG. 11-68 (C1 to C7)), and then the game is controlled to a jackpot game state.

In this way, in time-saving state B, when the SP Reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined, the "instant hit effect" or "full spin effect" is executed as a variable display effect that notifies the player that the variable display result is a jackpot after the variable display starts, without going through the reach mode, so the player can enjoy the SP reach effect with peace of mind without worrying about being provoked by the reach effect.

In addition, in the "instant win effect" or "full rotation effect", unlike the "button preview" and "win/lose button effect" described in the first embodiment, no operation promotion effect is executed that encourages the operation of the push button 31B by displaying a button image that resembles the push button 31B, operation promotion displays such as "Press!!", and gauge displays, or operation effects that require the player to operate the push button 31B, so that in the time-saving state B, the player can conveniently consume the variable display without having to perform any cumbersome operation promotions or operations.

(Examples of various actions depending on game state)
Next, various operation examples for the three game states of the time-saving state B, the probability variable state, and the time-saving state A in this embodiment will be described based on FIG. 11-69. FIG. 11-69 is a diagram for explaining various operation examples for each game state. Below, as shown in FIG. 11-69, the contents of each item "D1" to "D4" in the three game states of "time-saving state B", "probability variable state", and "time-saving state A" will be compared.

<Item D1>
First, with regard to the rate at which the CPU 103 determines an SP reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern without going through a reach mode, in the "time-saving state B", as shown in Figure 11-65 (C), the determination rate of "SP reach D (instant hit effect or full spin effect)" that does not go through a reach mode when the number of reserved memories is 0, 1 to 3 is "90%", in the "probable change state", as shown in Figure 11-6 (C), the determination rate of "SP non-via A (non-reach)" that does not go through a reach mode when the number of reserved memories is 0 to 3 is "5%", and in the "time-saving state A", as shown in Figure 11-7 (C), the determination rate of "SP non-via A (non-reach)" that does not go through a reach mode when the number of reserved memories is 0 to 3 is "5%".

In addition, in the special probability state and time-saving state A, "SP Reach D" is a reach fluctuation pattern in which a "short battle performance" is executed via the reach mode, and is not a non-reach fluctuation pattern that does not go through the reach mode.

In other words, the percentage (e.g., 90%) of times that an "SP reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern (instant hit effect or full spin effect)" that does not go through a reach mode is determined in time-saving state B is higher than the percentage (e.g., 5%) of times that an "SP non-via A jackpot fluctuation pattern" that does not go through a reach mode is determined in time-saving state A, and is also higher than the percentage (e.g., 5%) of times that an "SP non-via A jackpot fluctuation pattern" that does not go through a reach mode is determined in the probability variable state.

According to item (D1), in the time-saving state B controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, taking into consideration the fact that a long period of time has continued during which the game has not been controlled to a jackpot game state, in the variable display for which it is not decided to control the game to a jackpot game state, the state of the variable display is set to a reach state, so that the game is controlled to a jackpot game state without being unnecessarily provoked, and therefore a suitable time-saving state B can be provided.

In this embodiment, the rate at which the "SP reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern (instant hit effect or full spin effect)" that does not go through the reach mode in time-saving state B is determined is higher than the rate at which the "SP non-through A jackpot fluctuation pattern" that does not go through the reach mode is determined in time-saving state A or in the probability variable state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the variable display result in time-saving state B is a jackpot, the "SP reach D fluctuation pattern (instant hit effect or full spin effect)" that does not go through the reach mode may be determined 100% of the time.

<Item D2>
The presentation control CPU 120 can execute, for example, a "win/lose button presentation" in a SP reach presentation as an action-promoting presentation to encourage the player to take action, and can execute, for example, a "movable body presentation" in a SP reach presentation as a specific presentation to notify the player of the variable display result.

Then, in the probability variable state or time-saving state A, when the SP Reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined, the performance control CPU 120 executes a first performance execution pattern in which a "win/lose button performance" is executed and then a "movable body performance" is executed in the "decisive performance" in the variable display of the SP Reach D, while in the time-saving state B, when the SP Reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined, the performance control CPU 120 executes a second performance execution pattern in which a "win/lose button performance" is executed and then a "movable body performance" is executed in the "instant win performance" in the variable display of the SP Reach D.

Therefore, when the SP Reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined, the execution rate of the "instant hit effect" in which the "moving body effect" is executed without executing the "hit/miss button effect" is "90%" in the "time-saving state B" when the number of reserved memories is 0 to 3, as shown in Figure 11-65 (C); in the "probable bonus state", when the number of reserved memories is 0 to 3, as shown in Figure 11-6 (C); and in the "time-saving state A", when the number of reserved memories is 0 to 3, as shown in Figure 11-7 (C).

In other words, the execution rate (e.g., 90%) of an "instant hit effect" in which a "moving body effect" is executed without executing a "win/lose button effect" in the SP reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern in the time-saving state B is higher than the rate (e.g., 0%) of a "moving body effect" in which a "win/lose button effect" is executed without executing a "win/lose button effect" in the SP reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern in the time-saving state A, and is also higher than the rate (e.g., 0%) of a "moving body effect" in which a "win/lose button effect" is executed without executing a "win/lose button effect" in the SP reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern in the probability variable state.

According to item (D2), in the time-saving state B controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, when it is notified that it has been decided to control to the jackpot game state, taking into consideration the fact that a long period has continued during which the game has not been controlled to the jackpot game state, the player is less likely to be prompted to operate the push button 31B, so that a suitable time-saving state B can be provided.

In this embodiment, the percentage of the SP reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern that executes the "instant hit effect" or "full spin effect" in the time-saving state B is higher than the percentage of the SP reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern that executes the "instant hit effect" or "full spin effect" in the time-saving state A or the probability variable state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the percentage of the SP reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern that executes the "instant hit effect" or "full spin effect" in the time-saving state B may be 100%.

<Item D3>
The percentage at which the CPU 103 will determine a shortened non-reach fluctuation pattern (for example, an "ultra-shortened non-reach" with a fluctuation time of 1.5 seconds or an "shortened non-reach A" with a fluctuation time of 3 seconds) when the number of reserved memories is 0 is "100%" in the "time-shortened state B" when the number of reserved memories is 0, as shown in Figure 11-65 (A); in the "probable change state," it is "0%" when the number of reserved memories is 0, as shown in Figure 11-6 (A); and in the "time-shortened state A," it is "0%" when the number of reserved memories is 0, as shown in Figure 11-7 (A).

On the other hand, when the number of reserved memories is 0, the percentage at which the CPU 103 determines a miss variation pattern with a longer variable display time than the shortened non-reach variation pattern (for example, non-reach A with a variation time of 7 seconds or SP reach variation with a variation time of 25 seconds or 40 seconds) is "0%" when the number of reserved memories is 0 in the "time-shortened state B" as shown in FIG. 11-65(A), "100%" when the number of reserved memories is 0 in the "probable variation state" as shown in FIG. 11-6(A), and "100%" when the number of reserved memories is 0 in the "time-shortened state A" as shown in FIG. 11-7(A).

In other words, when the number of reserved memories is 0 in the sure-change state or the time-saving state A, the CPU 103 can determine a miss variation pattern with a long variable display time (for example, a non-reach with a variation time of 7 seconds or an SP reach variation with a variation time of 25 seconds or 40 seconds) to buy time for reserved memories to be stored in the second reserved memory, while when the number of reserved memories is 0 in the time-saving state B, the CPU 103 can determine a shortened non-reach variation pattern with a shorter variable display time (for example, an ultra-shortened non-reach with a variation time of 1.5 seconds) than a miss variation pattern with a long variable display time (for example, a non-reach A with a variation time of 7 seconds or an SP reach variation with a variation time of 25 seconds or 40 seconds).

According to item (D3), in the time-saving state B controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, taking into consideration the fact that a long period of time has continued in which the state is not controlled to a jackpot game state, even if the number of reserved memories is 0, a miss fluctuation pattern with a longer variable display period than the shortened fluctuation pattern (for example, a non-reach with a fluctuation time of 7 seconds or an SP reach fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 25 seconds or 40 seconds) is determined, and the consumption speed of the variable display does not decrease, so a suitable time-saving state B can be provided.

<Item D4>
In this embodiment, the type of jackpot can be determined to be either "Jackpot A" or "Jackpot B", which involves a 6R round of play, or "Jackpot C", which is more advantageous to the player than "Jackpot A" and "Jackpot B" (e.g., has a greater number of rounds, i.e., a greater number of planned balls that can be won) (see Figure 11-3 (D)).

In addition, when the SP Reach D jackpot variable pattern is determined in the time-saving state B, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a "full rotation performance" as a special variable display pattern in which the jackpot symbols are displayed variably for a predetermined period of time when they are aligned and then displayed stationary.

In addition, when "Jackpot C (10R)" is determined as the jackpot type in the SP Reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern, the percentage at which the presentation control CPU 120 executes the "full spin presentation" is "90%" in the "time-saving state B" as shown in FIG. 11-67, "0%" (the "full spin presentation" is not executed) in the "probable bonus state" as shown in FIG. 11-6 (C), and "0%" (the "full spin presentation" is not executed) in the "time-saving state A" as shown in FIG. 11-7 (C).

In other words, the percentage (e.g., 100%) at which the presentation control CPU 120 executes the "full spin presentation" when "jackpot C (10R)" is determined as the jackpot type in time-saving state B is higher than the percentage (e.g., 0% (not executed)) at which the presentation control CPU 120 executes the "full spin presentation" when "jackpot C (10R)" is determined as the jackpot type in time-saving state A, and is also higher than the percentage (e.g., 0% (not executed)) at which the presentation control CPU 120 executes the "full spin presentation" when "jackpot C (10R)" is determined as the jackpot type in the probability variable state.

According to item (D4), in the time-saving state B controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, if it is decided to control to jackpot C, which has more rounds and is more advantageous to the player than jackpot A or jackpot B, taking into consideration the long period during which the state is not controlled to a jackpot game state, it becomes easier to execute the "full spin effect," a special variable display that is not executed (or has a low execution rate) in the normal state, the special variable state, or the time-saving state A, and therefore it is possible to provide a suitable time-saving state B.

In the present embodiment, the proportion of the performance control CPU 120 executing the "full spin performance" when "jackpot C (10R)" is determined as the jackpot type in the time-saving state B is 100%. However, the present invention is not limited to this. If the proportion of the performance control CPU 120 executing the "full spin performance" when "jackpot C (10R)" is determined as the jackpot type in the time-saving state B is higher than the proportion of the performance control CPU 120 executing the "full spin performance" when "jackpot C (10R)" is determined as the jackpot type in the time-saving state A or the probability variable state, the performance control CPU 120 may execute the "full spin performance" at a rate less than 100%. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 may be able to execute the "full spin performance" when "jackpot C (10R)" is determined as the jackpot type in the time-saving state A or the probability variable state.

(Explanation of Variations and Applications of Feature 069SG)
In the feature section 069SG, a form in which a big win game state is applied is exemplified as an example of an "advantageous state advantageous to the player", but the present invention is not limited to this, and may include a sure-win state, a small win game state, a reach state, a pseudo consecutive performance state, a reserved consecutive state, a chance-up performance, a foresight notice performance, a miss with time reduction, a ceiling time reduction control, etc.

In addition, in the characteristic section 069SG, a form is exemplified in which a so-called type 1 pachinko gaming machine that can be controlled to a high probability state for a predetermined period of time after the end of a jackpot game is applied, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be a pachinko gaming machine that is controlled to a high probability state from the end of a jackpot game until it is controlled to the next jackpot when the jackpot type is a high probability jackpot, or a pachinko gaming machine that is controlled to a high probability state from the end of a jackpot game until it wins a high probability drop lottery. Also, a so-called type 1/2 gaming machine that can be controlled to a jackpot game state by a V winning occurring as a result of a small win in the time-saving state after the end of a jackpot game may be applied, and the gameplay can be changed in various ways.

In addition, in the characteristic part 069SG, the example shows a form in which the time-saving state A, the probability bonus state, and the time-saving state B are applied as special states in which the variable display is executed more frequently than in a non-special state (for example, the normal state), but the present invention is not limited to this, and four or more types of game states other than the above may be applied.

In addition, in the feature part 069SG, a form is exemplified in which a low-probability, high-based time-saving state A (first special state) and a time-saving state B (rescue time-saving (second special state)) are applied as a first special state that is controlled when a favorable state controlled from a non-special state (e.g., a normal state, a low-probability/low-base state) ends, and a second special state that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays have been executed in a non-special state without being controlled to an advantageous state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a high-probability, high-based probability change state (first special state) and a low-probability, high-based time-saving state B (rescue time-saving (second special state)) may also be applied.

In addition, in the characteristic part 069SG, a form in which a probability variable state is applied as a third special state that is controlled when an advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, in the case of a type 1/type 2 pachinko gaming machine, a time-saving state different from the time-saving state as the first special state (for example, a time-saving state in which the time-saving state is executed more times (has a longer control period) than the first special state) may be applied.

In addition, in the feature part 069SG, at least one of the first special state, the second special state, and the third special state may have multiple types of special states that differ, for example, in the number of times the time-saving control is executed, the frequency with which the variable display is executed, etc.

In addition, in the feature portion 069SG, an example is given of a form in which a normal state (low probability/low base state) is applied as a non-special state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as long as the game state has a lower frequency of execution of variable display than the special state, it is not limited to the low probability/low base state, and may be a high probability base state, a low probability/high base state, etc.

In addition, in the characteristic part 069SG, the time-saving state B (rescue time-saving state) as the second special state is exemplified as being controlled on the condition that the variable display has been executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times) without being controlled to an advantageous state in a non-special state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the predetermined number of times can be changed in various ways. Also, it may be controlled when another condition is met in addition to the above-mentioned conditions.

In addition, in the characteristic part 069SG, in the time-saving state B, the time-saving state A, and the probability of winning, the average normal pattern change time (period for changing the normal pattern), the probability of winning the normal pattern in the normal pattern game, and the control that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning hole (high opening control, high base control) are not changed, and the average special pattern change time (period for changing the special pattern) in the time-saving state B is shortened compared to the probability of winning and the time-saving state A, without changing the control that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning hole (high opening control, high base control). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the time-saving state B, at least one of the average normal pattern change time (period for changing the normal pattern), the probability of winning the normal pattern in the normal pattern game, and the control that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning hole (high opening control, high base control) may be made different from the probability of winning and the time-saving state A to further improve the change efficiency of the special pattern (particularly the second special pattern).

In addition, in the feature part 069SG, an example has been given of a form in which the CPU 103 can determine, as a variable pattern, a first non-specific variable display pattern (e.g., "SP reach A-E miss") in which the variable display mode is a specific mode (e.g., a reach mode) and then a miss display result, and a second non-specific variable display pattern (e.g., "non-reach miss") in which the variable display mode is not a specific mode and a miss display result is displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first non-specific variable display pattern and the second non-specific variable display pattern may include types of variable patterns other than those described above. In addition, as a variation pattern, a first specific variable display pattern (for example, "SP Reach A-C, E jackpot") that displays a miss display result with the variable display mode as a specific mode (for example, a reach mode) and a second non-specific variable display pattern (for example, "SP Reach D (instant hit or full spin)", "not via SP", etc.) that displays a miss display result without setting the variable display mode as a specific mode have been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first specific variable display pattern and the second specific variable display pattern may include types of variation patterns other than those described above.

In addition, the "specific mode" is not limited to the "reach mode", but may include various modes such as a "chance mode (e.g., 133)", a "pseudo consecutive mode (e.g., 122)", a "normal reach mode", and a "super reach mode".

In addition, in the feature section 069SG, examples have been given of the application of "moving object prediction" and "character prediction" as indication effects that suggest that control will be made to a jackpot gaming state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as long as the indication is an indication that control will be made to a jackpot gaming state, it may include various indications such as, for example, a stop pattern prediction, a pseudo consecutive prediction, a dialogue prediction, an operation prediction, a reach prediction, and a look-ahead prediction effect.

In addition, in the feature section 069SG, examples have been given of forms in which a "countdown notice", "hold change notice", "pattern chance notice", and "effect display notice" are applied as pre-reading notice effects that suggest that the reserved memory stored in the reserved memory will be controlled to an advantageous state, but the present invention is not limited to these, and may include various other pre-reading notices, such as "continuous effects" and "omen effects".

In addition, in the characteristic section 069SG, a form in which a "button preview" or a "win/lose button effect" is applied as an example of an action promotion effect that encourages the player to take action has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this and may include various effects other than those described above. Furthermore, "player action" is not limited to the operation of the push button 31B, but may be an effect that encourages the operation of other operating means (such as a touch panel) provided other than the push button 31B, or an effect that encourages the player to take action (movement) rather than an operation.

In addition, in the characteristic part 069SG, "Patterns A-2 and A-3" are applied as an example of a first effect execution pattern in which a "movable object effect" is executed as a specific effect after the "win/lose button" is executed as a movement promotion effect, and "Pattern A-1" is applied as an example of a second effect execution pattern in which a specific effect is executed without executing a movement promotion effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and other operation promotion effects such as a "button preview" may be applied as a movement promotion effect, or an effect other than a "movable object effect" (for example, a battle result in a SP reach effect) may be applied as a specific effect.

In addition, in the characteristic part 069SG, an example was given of a form in which an operation promotion display for a "one-hit" operation is applied as the first action promotion effect that encourages the player to perform one action, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be something that encourages the player to perform not only one push operation but also one pull operation, rotation operation, back and forth operation, etc.

In addition, in the characteristic part 069SG, an example was given of a form in which an operation promotion display for "repeated taps" or "long press" operations was applied as a second action promotion effect that encourages the player to perform an action over a predetermined action period, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may also promote pull operations, rotation operations, back and forth operations, etc. over a predetermined action period. Furthermore, actions over a predetermined action period are not necessarily limited to actions detected continuously, and may include intermittent operations or operations according to a predetermined pattern, etc.

In addition, in the feature portion 069SG, a form in which a "character announcement" or a "reach announcement" is applied is exemplified as an effect including a teasing effect that teases whether or not the variable display state will be a specific state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may include various effects such as an effect that teases that it will be a "chance eye state (e.g., "133")," a "pseudo consecutive state (e.g., 122)," a "normal reach state," or a "super reach state."

In addition, in the feature section 069SG, in the post-performance, the expected number of balls to be dispensed is reported as the game value information that can specify the amount of game value to be awarded in the advantageous state that is notified of being controlled in the specific performance, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state (e.g., 6R or 10R) may be reported. In addition, in a state where jackpots are consecutive, such as when a jackpot occurs in a probability variable state, the expected total number of balls to be dispensed, which is the sum of the expected number of balls to be dispensed in the current jackpot and the total number of balls to be dispensed during a specified consecutive jackpot period, may be displayed.

In addition, in the characteristic part 069SG, when the control of the special state is started, a special state start display is displayed to notify the start of the control of the special state, and examples of the application of the entry introduction effect, the probability of entering a special state effect, the time-saving entry effect A, the time-saving entry effect B, and the shutter effect are given as examples of special state start effects, but the present invention is not limited to these, and various entry effects other than those described above may be executed. Also, the presentation form of each entry effect is not limited to the above, and can be changed in various ways.

In addition, in the characteristic part 069SG, an example was given of a form in which the special bonus entry effect and the time-saving entry effect A are separate effects, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the special bonus entry effect and the time-saving entry effect A may be a single common entry effect.

In addition, in the characteristic part 069SG, an example was given of a form in which the entry introduction effect is not executed when the time-saving entry effect B is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the entry introduction effect may be executed instead of the shutter effect. Also, the entry introduction effect may be executed when the time-saving entry effect B is executed. In this case, in order to eliminate the hassle of the effects, it is preferable to have an entry introduction effect with a shorter effect period than when the special rate entry effect or the time-saving entry effect A is executed.

In addition, in the feature section 069SG, as an example of the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state, a form in which jackpots A and B (first advantageous state) and jackpot C (second advantageous state) with different numbers of play rounds in the jackpot game state are applied is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the second advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state may be not only a jackpot that is more advantageous to the player in the jackpot game state in terms of the number of play rounds or the number of expected balls that can be obtained, but also a jackpot in which the game state after the jackpot game state ends is advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot with a long time-saving control after the jackpot game state, or a jackpot controlled in a "small jackpot rush" in which the frequency of execution of the small jackpot game state increases after the jackpot ends, etc.).

(Explanation regarding feature 099SG)
Next, the pachinko gaming machine 1 with the characteristic part 099SG in this embodiment will be described with reference to Figs. 12-1 to 12-22. Note that in this characteristic part 099SG, illustrations and detailed descriptions of the same configuration as the pachinko gaming machine 1 with the characteristic part 069SG will be omitted, and differences will be mainly described. Also, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 with the characteristic part 099SG described below can be applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 with the characteristic part 069SG.

In the pachinko game machine 1 in this characteristic part 099SG, like the pachinko game machine 1 shown in FIG. 11-1, the left side of the image display device 5 on the game board 2 is formed as a left game area where game balls can flow down, and the right side of the image display device 5 on the game board 2 is formed as a right game area where game balls can flow down. In other words, in the pachinko game machine 1 in this characteristic part 099SG, a game ball weakly shot out by the launching device because the game state is normal flows down the first path in the left game area, and a game ball strongly shot out by the launching device because the game state is either time-saving state A, time-saving state B, or probability variable state flows down the second path in the right game area. In addition, a part of the game ball flowing down the second path in the right game area can pass through a gate 41 provided on the second path (to the right of the image display device 5), and a variable display of a normal pattern is executed based on the passing of the gate 41. Then, when the variable display result of the normal pattern is a win (normal pattern win), the second start winning hole provided on the second path changes from a closed state to an open state, and the game ball can win in the second start winning hole. Note that in this feature part 099SG, "variable display" may be written as "variable" or "variable display".

Figure 12-1 (A) is an explanatory diagram illustrating the random number values counted on the main board 11 side in this feature section 099SG. As shown in Figure 12-1 (A), in this feature section 099SG, on the main board 11 side, the following numerical data is controlled so as to be countable: random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, random number value MR2 for determining the type of big win, random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, random number value MR4 for determining the normal chart display result, and random number value MR5 for determining the MR4 initial value. Note that random number values other than these may be used to enhance the gaming effect. Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also called gaming random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count the numerical data indicating some or all of these random number values MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 may count the numerical data indicating some of the random number values MR1 to MR4 by updating various numerical data by software using a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in a game control counter setting unit (not shown).

The random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result is a random number value used to determine whether or not to control the variable display result of a special symbol or other such in a special symbol game to a "jackpot" and to a jackpot game state, and takes a value in the range of "0" to "65535", for example. The random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is a random number value used to determine the jackpot type to be either "jackpot A", "jackpot B", or "jackpot C" when the variable display result is a "jackpot", and takes a value in the range of "0" to "299", for example.

The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of special patterns and decorative patterns to one of several types prepared in advance, and takes a value in the range of "0" to "99", for example.

The random number value MR4 for determining the normal symbol display result is a random number value used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display device 20 is a "normal symbol hit" or a "normal symbol miss", and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13", for example.

The random number value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 is a random number value used to determine the initial value of the random number value MR4, and takes a value in the range of "3" to "23".

Figure 12-1 (B) shows an example of the configuration of the special chart display result judgment table stored in ROM 101. In this feature section 099SG, a common special chart display result judgment table is used for the first special chart and the second special chart as the special chart display result judgment table, but the present invention is not limited to this, and separate special chart display result judgment tables may be used for the first special chart and the second special chart.

The special symbol display result determination table is a table that is referenced to determine whether or not to control the variable display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot" before a determined special symbol that is a variable display result is derived and displayed in a special symbol game using a first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A or a special symbol game using a second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B, based on a random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result.

In the special chart display result judgment table in this feature part 099SG, a numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result is assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" or "miss" depending on whether the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state or time-saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state).

In the special chart display result judgment table, the table data indicating the judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result is judgment data assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control the special chart display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot". In the special chart display result judgment table in this feature part 099SG, when the game state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more judgment values are assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" than when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state). As a result, in the probability variable state (high probability state) in which the probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "jackpot" and that the game state is controlled to a jackpot game state is higher (about 1/80.02 in this feature part 099SG) than the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "jackpot" and that the game state is controlled to a jackpot game state when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state) (about 1/319.68 in this feature part 099SG). That is, in the special chart display result judgment table, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a probability variable state (high probability state), the judgment data is assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control to a jackpot gaming state so that the probability of deciding to control to a jackpot gaming state is higher than when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state.

FIG. 12-1 (C1) and FIG. 12-1 (C2) show examples of the configuration of the jackpot type determination table stored in ROM 101. FIG. 12-1 (C1) is a table referenced to determine the jackpot type from jackpot A and jackpot B based on the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is to be "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled during variable display of the first special pattern, and FIG. 12-1 (C2) is a table referenced to determine the jackpot type from jackpot B and jackpot C based on the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is to be "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled during variable display of the second special pattern.

Now, the types of jackpots in this feature section 099SG will be explained with reference to FIG. 12-1 (D). In this feature section 099SG, the jackpot types provided are jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C, for which time-saving control is executed for a maximum of 110 variable displays after the end of the jackpot game state. In addition, these jackpots A, B, and C are also jackpots for which special control is executed for a maximum of 110 variable displays after the end of the jackpot game by the game ball entering the V winning port after entering the second large winning port in the first round of the jackpot game state.

In this feature part 099SG, the open state of the variable V winning ball device (V lid) can be a short open state (e.g., 0.1 seconds) in which the open state lasts for a short period of time, and a long open state (e.g., 15 seconds) in which the open state lasts for a long period of time. In the first round of the jackpot game state, jackpot A causes the variable V winning ball device to be in a short open state, and in the first round of the jackpot game state, jackpot B and jackpot C cause the variable V winning ball device to be in a long open state.

The jackpot game state resulting from "jackpot A" is a normal opening jackpot that changes the second large prize entry port to an open state advantageous to the player in the first round, and changes the first large prize entry port to an open state advantageous to the player in the second to sixth rounds. In addition, with "jackpot A", the variable V prize entry device is in a short open state in the first round, making it extremely difficult to get the game ball to enter the V prize entry port, and it is not expected that the special bonus control will be executed, so it is essentially a normal jackpot.

The jackpot game state resulting from "jackpot B" is a normal opening jackpot that changes the second large prize entry port to an open state advantageous to the player in the first round, and changes the first large prize entry port to an open state advantageous to the player in the second to sixth rounds. In addition, with "jackpot B", the variable V prize entry device is in a long open state in the first round, making it extremely easy to get the game ball to enter the V prize entry port, and it is expected that the special chance control will be executed, making it a virtual special chance jackpot.

The jackpot game state resulting from "jackpot C" is a normal opening jackpot that changes the second large prize entry port to an open state advantageous to the player in the first round, and changes the first large prize entry port to an open state advantageous to the player in the second to tenth rounds. In addition, with "jackpot C", the variable V prize entry ball device is in a long open state in the first round, making it extremely easy to get the game ball to enter the V prize entry port, and it is expected that the special chance control will be executed, making it a virtual special chance jackpot.

In this embodiment, three types of jackpots, jackpot A to jackpot C, are provided as jackpot types, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or less types of jackpots, or four or more types of jackpots may be provided.

As shown in FIG. 12-3 (B1), in the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol), of the range of MR2 determination values from 0 to 299, 0 to 149 is assigned to jackpot A, and 150 to 299 is assigned to jackpot B. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 12-3 (B2), in the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol), of the range of MR2 determination values from 0 to 299, 0 to 99 is assigned to jackpot B, and 100 to 299 is assigned to jackpot C.

In other words, in this feature part 099SG, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, there is a 50% probability that the game ball will enter the V winning hole in the first round of the jackpot game state, and both the special probability control and the time-saving control are implemented after the jackpot game ends. Furthermore, when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, there is a 100% probability that the game ball will enter the V winning hole in the first round of the jackpot game state, and both the special probability control and the time-saving control are implemented after the jackpot game ends.

In this feature 099SG, even if a jackpot A occurs, it is possible but extremely rare for a V entry to occur when the V lid is in a short open state, so in the case of a jackpot A, it will be described as not having a V entry and not having the variable probability control executed. Also, even if a jackpot B or jackpot C occurs, it is possible but extremely rare for a V entry not to occur when the V lid is in a long open state, so in the case of a jackpot B or jackpot C, it will be described as having a V entry and having the variable probability control executed.

In addition, in this feature section 099SG, the type of jackpot is determined using MR2, which is a random number value for determining the type of jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the type of jackpot may be determined using MR1, which is a random number value for determining the result of the special chart display.

Figure 12-2 (A) is a normal pattern hit determination table that is referenced when the game state is normal and the variable display of a normal pattern is executed to determine whether or not the variable display result of the normal pattern is a hit (normal hit), and Figure 12-2 (B) is a normal pattern hit determination table that is referenced when the game state is either time-saving state A, special state, or time-saving state B and the variable display of a normal pattern is executed to determine whether or not the variable display result of the normal pattern is a hit (normal hit).

The time-saving state B in this feature part 099SG is the game state that is controlled when 900 variable displays are executed without being controlled to a jackpot game state in the normal game state (low probability/low base state where neither special probability control nor time-saving control is executed), and is time-saving state A (low probability/high base state) where time-saving control is executed for a maximum of 1100 variable displays.

In the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 12-2(A), of the range of 3 to 13 for the random number value MR4 for determining whether a normal symbol is a hit, 3 is assigned to a hit, and 4 to 13 are assigned to a miss. On the other hand, in the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 12-2(B), of the range of 3 to 13 for the random number value MR4 for determining whether a normal symbol is a hit, 3 to 12 are assigned to a hit, and 13 is assigned to a miss. In other words, in this feature part 099SG, the rate of normal hits when the game state is either the time-saving state A, the probability change state, or the time-saving state B is set higher than the rate of normal hits when the game state is the normal state.

Also, as shown in FIG. 12-2(C), the normal symbol fluctuation time is set to 60 seconds when the game state is normal, whereas the normal symbol fluctuation time is set to 0.1 seconds when the game state is either time-saving state A, special probability state, or time-saving state B. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 12-2(D), the opening time of the second start winning hole when a normal symbol hit occurs when the game state is normal is set to 0.1 seconds, whereas the opening time of the second start winning hole when a normal symbol hit occurs when the game state is either time-saving state A, special probability state, or time-saving state B is set to 3 seconds.

In other words, in the time-saving state A, the probability of winning, and the time-saving state B in this feature part 099SG, compared to the normal state, the game ball is more likely to enter the second start winning hole because "the probability of winning with a normal pattern is high," "the variable display time of the normal pattern is short," and "the opening time of the second start winning hole when a winning with a normal pattern occurs is long," so that the frequency of variable display of the second special pattern is set high, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the time-saving state A, the probability of winning, and the time-saving state B may be set to have a high frequency of variable display of the second special pattern by satisfying at least one of the conditions "the probability of winning with a normal pattern is high," "the variable display time of the normal pattern is short," and "the opening time of the second start winning hole when a winning with a normal pattern occurs is long," compared to the normal state.

In the pachinko game machine 1 in this characteristic part 099SG, like the pachinko game machine in the characteristic part 069SG (see FIG. 11-1), when the game state is normal, the player can shoot the game ball toward the left game area 2L, which allows the game ball to enter the first start winning hole, but cannot enter the second start winning hole or the large winning hole or pass through the gate 41, and when the game ball is in the time-saving state A, the probability change state, or the time-saving state B, the player can shoot the game ball toward the right game area 2R, which allows the game ball to enter the second start winning hole and pass through the gate 41. Note that when the game state is the jackpot game state, the player can shoot the game ball toward the right game area, which allows the game ball to enter the second start winning hole and the large winning hole and pass through the gate 41.

As shown in FIG. 12-12(A), when the game state is normal, the game ball shot toward the left game area 2L is prevented from winning by multiple nails arranged on the game board 2, so the probability of the game ball winning in the first start winning hole is about 5.5% (condition is that the game ball is continuously shot into the left game area 2L by the player's operation of the ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30). In addition, when the game state is normal, even if the player shoots the game ball toward the right game area 2R, the variable display time of the normal pattern due to the game ball passing through the gate 41 is extremely long at 60 seconds, and the opening time of the second start winning hole when a normal winning occurs is extremely short at 0.1 seconds (see FIG. 12-2(C) and FIG. 12-2(D)), so the game ball almost never wins in the second start winning hole.

As shown in FIG. 12-12(B), when the game state is either Time-saving State A, Chance Bonus State, or Time-saving State B, the game ball shot toward the right game area 2R can pass through the gate 41, and the variable display time of the normal pattern due to passing through the gate 41 is short at 3 seconds, and the opening time of the second start winning hole when a normal pattern hit occurs is 3 seconds (see FIG. 12-2(C) and FIG. 12-2(D)). Therefore, the probability of the game ball winning the second start winning hole is about 55% (condition is that the game ball is continuously shot toward the right game area 2R by the player operating the ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30).

Figure 12-3 shows the variable pattern used in the variable display of the special pattern of this feature part 099SG. In this feature part 099SG, as shown in FIG. 12-3, as the variation patterns when the variable display result is a miss, there are provided the following variation patterns: super shortened non-reach miss with a special chart variation time of 1500 ms, shortened non-reach A miss with a special chart variation time of 3000 ms, shortened non-reach B miss with a special chart variation time of 5000 ms, non-reach A miss with a special chart variation time of 7000 ms, non-reach B miss with a special chart variation time of 12000 ms, super reach A miss with a special chart variation time of 45000 ms, super reach B miss with a special chart variation time of 80000 ms, super reach C miss with a special chart variation time of 4000 ms, super reach D miss with a special chart variation time of 25000 ms, and super reach E miss with a special chart variation time of 50000 ms. Furthermore, the variation pattern from Super Reach A Miss to Super Reach E Miss is also the variation pattern that executes the reach performance of the Super Reach during variable display.

In addition, the variation patterns when the variable display result is a jackpot are as follows: a Super Reach non-via A jackpot, which has a jackpot notification period of 15,000 ms after a variable display of 7,000 ms in which the reach performance of the Super Reach is not executed (the special chart variation time is 7,000 ms + 15,000 ms); a Super Reach non-via B jackpot, which has a jackpot notification period of 15,000 ms after a variable display of 12,000 ms in which the reach performance of the Super Reach is not executed (the special chart variation time is 12,000 ms + 15,000 ms); a Super Reach A jackpot, which has a jackpot notification period of 15,000 ms after a variable display of 45,000 ms in which the reach performance of the Super Reach is executed (the special chart variation time is 45,000 ms + 15,000 ms); a Super Reach B jackpot, which has a jackpot notification period of 15,000 ms after a variable display of 80,000 ms in which the reach performance of the Super Reach is executed (the special chart variation time is 15,000 ms + 15,000 ms); The following variation patterns are provided: a Super Reach B jackpot having a jackpot notification period of 0 ms (special chart fluctuation time is 80,000 ms+15,000 ms), a Super Reach C jackpot having a jackpot notification period of 15,000 ms (special chart fluctuation time is 40,000 ms+15,000 ms) after a variable display of 40,000 ms when the Super Reach reach performance is executed, a Super Reach D jackpot having a jackpot notification period of 15,000 ms after a variable display of 25,000 ms when the Super Reach reach performance is executed (special chart fluctuation time is 25,000 ms+15,000 ms), and a Super Reach E jackpot having a jackpot notification period of 15,000 ms after a variable display of 50,000 ms when the Super Reach reach performance is executed (special chart fluctuation time is 50,000 ms+15,000 ms). The Super Reach A variation pattern is a variation pattern that executes a bowling effect as a reach effect, in which an ally character and an enemy character bowl together to notify whether or not a jackpot has been won; the Super Reach B, Super Reach C, and Super Reach E variation patterns are a variation pattern that executes a battle effect as a reach effect, in which an ally character and an enemy character battle together to notify whether or not a jackpot has been won; and the Super Reach D variation pattern is a variation pattern that executes a short battle effect as a reach effect, in which an ally character and an enemy character battle together for a shorter period of time than the battle effect in the Super Reach B, Super Reach C, and Super Reach E variation patterns to notify whether or not a jackpot has been won.

The RAM 102 in this characteristic section 099SG is provided with a game control data holding area 099SG150 as shown in FIG. 12-4, for example, as an area for holding various data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. The game control data holding area 099SG150 shown in FIG. 12-4 includes a first special chart reserve memory section 099SG151A, a second special chart reserve memory section 099SG151B, a normal chart reserve memory section 099SG151C, a game control flag setting section 099SG152, a game control timer setting section 099SG153, a game control counter setting section 099SG154, and a game control buffer setting section 099SG155.

The first special symbol reservation memory unit 099SG151A stores reservation data of a special symbol game (a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A) in which a game ball has passed (entered) through the first start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A and a start winning (first start winning) has occurred but has not yet started. As an example, the first special symbol reservation memory unit 099SG151A associates reservation numbers with the order of winning (the order of detection of the game ball) in the first start winning port, and stores, as reservation data, random number values MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, random number values MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and numerical data indicating random number values MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc. based on the establishment of the first start condition when the game ball passes (enters), until the number of memories reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The upper limit of reserved data (reserved memory) that can be stored in the second special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151B is always 4, regardless of the game status. The reserved data stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151A in this way indicates that the execution of the special chart game using the first special chart is reserved, and becomes reserved information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a jackpot will be hit based on the variable display result (special chart display result) in this special chart game.

The second special symbol reservation memory unit 099SG151B stores reservation data of a special symbol game (a special symbol game using a second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B) in which a game ball has passed (entered) through the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and a start winning (second start winning) has occurred but has not yet started. As an example, the second special symbol reservation memory unit 099SG151B associates reservation numbers with the order of winning (the order of detection of the game ball) into the second start winning port, and stores, as reservation data, the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc. based on the establishment of the second start condition when the game ball passes (enters), until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The upper limit of reserved data (reserved memory) that can be stored in the second special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151B is always 4, regardless of the game status. The reserved data stored in the second special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151B thus indicates that the execution of a special chart game using the second special chart is reserved, and serves as reserved information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a jackpot will be hit based on the variable display result (special chart display result) in this special chart game.

In other words, this feature unit 099SG can store up to four reserved memories as first special chart reserved memories (reserved memories that can be stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151A), and can store up to four reserved memories as second special chart reserved memories (reserved memories that can be stored in the second special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151B).

The reserved information (first reserved information) based on the establishment of the first start condition by the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning port, and the reserved information (second reserved information) based on the establishment of the second start winning condition by the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning port may be stored in a common reserved memory unit in association with the reserved number. In this case, start port data indicating whether the game ball passed (entered) the first or second start winning port may be included in the reserved information and stored in association with the reserved number.

When variable display is executed, the CPU 103 first reads out the random numbers MR1 to MR3 from the second special symbol reservation memory 099SG151B if there is a second special symbol reservation memory in the normal special symbol processing (see FIG. 6), and then shifts the contents of the second special symbol reservation memory 099SG151B. In other words, if the random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored as reservation memory for reservation number 1 in the second special symbol reservation memory 099SG151B, the CPU 103 reads out the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored as the reservation memory for reservation number 1, erases the reservation memory for reservation number 1, and re-stores the reservation memory stored as reservation memory for reservation number 2 as reservation memory for reservation number 1, the reservation memory stored as reservation memory for reservation number 3 as reservation memory for reservation number 2, and the reservation memory stored as reservation memory for reservation number 4 as reservation memory for reservation number 3.

In addition, if no reserved memory is stored in the second special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151B, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first special chart reserved memory exists. If the first special chart reserved memory exists, the CPU 103 reads out the random number values MR1 to MR3 from the first special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151A and then shifts the memory contents of the first special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151A. In other words, when the random number values MR1 to MR3 are stored as the reserved memory of reserved number 1 in the first special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151A, the CPU 103 reads out the values of the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored as the reserved memory of reserved number 1, erases the reserved memory of reserved number 1, and re-stores the reserved memory stored as reserved memory of reserved number 2 as reserved memory of reserved number 1, the reserved memory stored as reserved memory of reserved number 3 as reserved memory of reserved number 2, and the reserved memory stored as reserved memory of reserved number 4 as reserved memory of reserved number 3.

Then, the CPU 103 judges the variable display result based on the random number value MR1 read from the first special symbol reserved memory unit 099SG151A or the second special symbol reserved memory unit 099SG151B (if the variable display result is a jackpot, it also judges the type of jackpot based on the random number value MR2), and then in the variable pattern judgment process (see Figure 6), it determines the variable pattern using a variable pattern judgment table that differs depending on the game state, the variable display result, and the number of reserved memories of the special symbols that perform the variable display.

In other words, in this feature part 099SG, the CPU 103 can determine the variation pattern in the variation pattern setting process according to the number of reserved memories subtracted by 1 from the number of reserved memories immediately before the variable display.

The normal symbol reserve memory unit 099SG151C stores reserve information for normal symbol games that have not yet been started by the normal symbol display device 20, even though the game ball that passed through the passing gate 41 has been detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the normal symbol reserve memory unit 099SG151C associates the game balls with reserve numbers in the order in which they passed through the passing gate 41, and stores numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for determining the normal symbol display result extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc. based on the passage of the game ball as reserved data, until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 099SG152 is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated depending on the progress of the game on the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 099SG152 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on or off state for each of multiple types of flags, including the ball output state flag described above.

The game control timer setting unit 099SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 099SG153 stores data indicating the timer values of multiple types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 099SG154 is provided with multiple types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 099SG154 stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 099SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting some or all of the game random numbers in a manner that allows the CPU 103 to update them by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 099SG154, random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR2 to MR4, are stored as random count values, and the numerical data indicating each random number is updated periodically or irregularly according to the execution of software by the CPU 103. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the updating operation of the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value by performing a predetermined process such as scrambling or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data extracted from the random number circuit 104.

The game control buffer setting unit 099SG155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 099SG155 stores data indicating the buffer values in each of multiple types of buffers.

Next, we will explain the variation pattern determination table used when executing the variable display of the special symbol. As shown in Figures 12-5 to 12-11, this feature part 099SG can determine the variation pattern using different variation pattern determination tables depending on the game state when the variable display of the special symbol is executed and the reserved memory number of the special symbol that executes the variable display of the special symbol.

Specifically, when the game state is normal, the variable display result is a miss, and the reserved memory number of special symbols that execute the variable display is 0 to 2, the variation pattern is determined from the variation patterns of non-reach B miss, super reach A miss, and super reach B miss using the miss variation pattern determination table A shown in Figure 12-5 (A). Note that in the miss variation pattern determination table A, of the values that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take, 97 values are assigned to the non-reach B miss variation pattern, 2 values are assigned to the super reach A miss variation pattern, and 1 value is assigned to the super reach B miss variation pattern. In other words, if the game state is normal, the variable display result is a miss, and the reserved memory number of special symbols that execute the variable display is 0 to 2, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a non-reach B miss fluctuation pattern 97% of the time, a super reach A miss fluctuation pattern 2% of the time, and a super reach B miss fluctuation pattern 1% of the time.

Also, when the game state is normal, the variable display result is a miss, and the reserved memory number of special symbols that execute the variable display is three, the variation pattern is determined from the variation patterns of shortened non-reach B miss, super reach A miss, and super reach B miss using the miss variation pattern determination table B shown in Figure 12-5 (B). Note that in the miss variation pattern determination table B, of the possible values of the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, 97 values are assigned to the shortened non-reach B miss variation pattern, 2 values are assigned to the super reach A miss variation pattern, and 1 value is assigned to the super reach B miss variation pattern. In other words, if the game state is normal, the variable display result is a miss, and the reserved memory number of special symbols that execute the variable display is three, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the shortened non-reach B miss fluctuation pattern 97% of the time, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the super reach A miss fluctuation pattern 2% of the time, and the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the super reach B miss fluctuation pattern 1% of the time.

In addition, when the game state is normal and the variable display result is a jackpot, regardless of the number of reserved memories of the special symbols that execute the variable display (this also applies when the number of reserved memories is 0 to 3), the fluctuation pattern is determined from the fluctuation patterns of the Super Reach Non-B Jackpot, the Super Reach A Jackpot, and the Super Reach B Jackpot using the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A. In addition, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A, of the possible values of the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, 10 values are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the Super Reach Non-B Jackpot, 40 values are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the Super Reach A Jackpot, and 50 values are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the Super Reach B Jackpot. In other words, when the game state is normal and the variable display result is a jackpot, regardless of the number of reserved memories, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the Super Reach non-through B jackpot fluctuation pattern 10% of the time, the Super Reach A jackpot fluctuation pattern 40% of the time, and the Super Reach B jackpot fluctuation pattern 50% of the time.

In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, the variable display result is a miss, and the reserved memory number of special symbols that execute the variable display is 0, the variation pattern is determined from the variation patterns of non-reach A miss, Super reach C miss, and Super reach D miss using the miss variation pattern determination table C shown in Figure 12-6 (A). Note that in the miss variation pattern determination table C, of the possible values of the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, 95 values are assigned to the non-reach A miss variation pattern, 2 values are assigned to the Super reach C miss variation pattern, and 3 values are assigned to the Super reach D miss variation pattern. In other words, if the game state is a probability variable state, the variable display result is a miss, and the reserved memory count for the special symbol that executes the variable display is 0, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a non-reach A miss fluctuation pattern 95% of the time, a super reach C miss fluctuation pattern 2% of the time, and a super reach D miss fluctuation pattern 3% of the time.

Also, when the game state is a probability variable state, the variable display result is a miss, and the reserved memory number of the special symbol that executes the variable display is one, as shown in FIG. 12-6 (B), the variation pattern is determined from the variation patterns of shortened non-reach A miss, non-reach A miss, super reach C miss, and super reach D miss using the miss variation pattern determination table D. Note that in the miss variation pattern determination table D, of the possible values of the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, 80 values are assigned to the shortened non-reach A miss variation pattern, 15 values are assigned to the non-reach A miss variation pattern, 2 values are assigned to the super reach C miss variation pattern, and 3 values are assigned to the super reach D miss variation pattern. In other words, if the game state is a probability variable state, the variable display result is a miss, and the reserved memory number of special symbols that execute the variable display is one, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a shortened non-reach A miss fluctuation pattern 80% of the time, a non-reach A miss fluctuation pattern 15% of the time, a super reach C miss fluctuation pattern 2% of the time, and a super reach D miss fluctuation pattern 3% of the time.

Also, when the game state is a probability variable state, the variable display result is a miss, and the reserved memory number of special symbols that execute the variable display is two, as shown in Figure 12-6 (C), the variation pattern is determined from the variation patterns of shortened non-reach A miss, non-reach A miss, super reach C miss, and super reach D miss using the miss variation pattern determination table E. Note that in the miss variation pattern determination table E, of the possible values of the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, 90 values are assigned to the shortened non-reach A miss variation pattern, 5 values are assigned to the non-reach A miss variation pattern, 2 values are assigned to the super reach C miss variation pattern, and 3 values are assigned to the super reach D miss variation pattern. In other words, if the game state is a probability variable state, the variable display result is a miss, and the reserved memory number of special symbols that execute the variable display is two, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a shortened non-reach A miss fluctuation pattern 90% of the time, a non-reach A miss fluctuation pattern 5% of the time, a super reach C miss fluctuation pattern 2% of the time, and a super reach D miss fluctuation pattern 3% of the time.

Also, when the game state is a probability variable state, the variable display result is a miss, and the reserved memory number of special symbols that execute the variable display is three, as shown in Figure 12-6 (D), the fluctuation pattern is determined from the fluctuation patterns of shortened non-reach A, Super reach C miss, and Super reach D miss using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table F. Note that in the miss fluctuation pattern determination table F, of the possible values of the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, 95 values are assigned to the shortened non-reach A miss fluctuation pattern, 2 values are assigned to the Super reach C miss fluctuation pattern, and 3 values are assigned to the Super reach D miss fluctuation pattern. In other words, if the game state is a probability change state, the variable display result is a miss, and the reserved memory number of special symbols that execute the variable display is three, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a shortened non-reach A miss fluctuation pattern 95% of the time, a super reach C miss fluctuation pattern 2% of the time, and a super reach D miss fluctuation pattern 3% of the time.

As described above, for variable displays in which the variable display result is a miss in the probability variable state, the determination ratio of each variable pattern differs depending on the reserved memory number of the special symbol that executes the variable display. In other words, in the probability variable state in this feature unit 099SG, the average variable display period for variable displays in which the variable display result is a miss differs depending on the reserved memory number of the special symbol that is executed (in the case of a variable display of the first special symbol, the reserved memory number stored in the first special symbol reserved memory unit 099SG151A, and in the case of a variable display of the second special symbol, the reserved memory number stored in the second special symbol reserved memory unit 099SG151B).

Furthermore, when the game state is a probability variable state and the variable display result is a jackpot, regardless of the number of reserved memories, the fluctuation pattern is determined from the fluctuation patterns of a Super Reach Non-A jackpot, a Super Reach C jackpot, and a Super Reach D jackpot using jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B, as shown in Figure 12-7. In addition, in jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B, of the possible values of random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, 5 values are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of a Super Reach Non-A jackpot, 80 values are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of a Super Reach C jackpot, and 15 values are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of a Super Reach D jackpot. In other words, when the game state is in a probability variable state and the variable display result is a jackpot, regardless of the number of reserved memories, there is a 5% chance that the variation pattern will be a Super Reach non-via A jackpot, an 80% chance that the variation pattern will be a Super Reach C jackpot, and a 15% chance that the variation pattern will be a Super Reach D jackpot.

In addition, when the game state is the time-saving state A, the variable display result is a miss, and the reserved memory number of special symbols that execute the variable display is 0, the variation pattern is determined from the non-reach A miss and super reach E miss variation patterns using the miss variation pattern determination table G as shown in FIG. 12-8 (A). In addition, in the miss variation pattern determination table G, of the possible values of the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, 95 values are assigned to the non-reach A miss variation pattern, and 5 values are assigned to the super reach E miss variation pattern. In other words, when the game state is the time-saving state A, the variable display result is a miss, and the reserved memory number of special symbols that execute the variable display is 0, the variation pattern is determined to be the non-reach A miss variation pattern 95% of the time, and the super reach E miss variation pattern 5% of the time.

Also, when the game state is time-saving state A, the variable display result is a miss, and the reserved memory number of the special symbol that executes the variable display is 1, as shown in Figure 12-8 (B), the fluctuation pattern is determined from the fluctuation patterns of shortened non-reach A miss, non-reach A miss, and super reach E miss using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table H. Note that in the miss fluctuation pattern determination table H, of the possible values of the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, 85 values are assigned to the shortened non-reach A miss fluctuation pattern, 10 values are assigned to the non-reach A miss fluctuation pattern, and 5 values are assigned to the super reach E miss fluctuation pattern. In other words, if the game state is time-saving state A, the variable display result is a miss, and the reserved memory number of special symbols that execute the variable display is 1, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the shortened non-reach A miss fluctuation pattern 85% of the time, the non-reach A miss fluctuation pattern 10% of the time, and the super reach E miss fluctuation pattern 5% of the time.

Also, when the game state is time-saving state A, the variable display result is a miss, and the reserved memory number of special symbols that execute the variable display is two, as shown in Figure 12-8 (C), the fluctuation pattern is determined from the fluctuation patterns of shortened non-reach A miss, non-reach A miss, and super reach E miss using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table I. Note that in the miss fluctuation pattern determination table I, of the possible values of the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, 90 values are assigned to the shortened non-reach A miss fluctuation pattern, 5 values are assigned to the non-reach A miss fluctuation pattern, and 5 values are assigned to the super reach E miss fluctuation pattern. In other words, if the game state is time-saving state A, the variable display result is a miss, and the reserved memory number of special symbols that execute the variable display is two, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the shortened non-reach A miss fluctuation pattern 90% of the time, the non-reach A miss fluctuation pattern 5% of the time, and the super reach E miss fluctuation pattern 5% of the time.

Also, when the game state is the time-saving state A, the variable display result is a miss, and the reserved memory number of special symbols that execute the variable display is three, as shown in FIG. 12-8 (D), the variation pattern is determined from the variation patterns of the shortened non-reach A miss and the super reach D miss using the miss variation pattern determination table J. Note that, in the miss variation pattern determination table J, of the possible values of the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, 95 values are assigned to the shortened non-reach A miss variation pattern, and 5 values are assigned to the super reach D miss variation pattern. In other words, when the game state is the time-saving state A, the variable display result is a miss, and the reserved memory number of special symbols that execute the variable display is three, the variation pattern is determined to be the shortened non-reach A miss variation pattern 95% of the time, and the super reach D miss variation pattern 5% of the time.

As described above, for variable displays in which the variable display result is a miss in time-saving state A, the determination ratio of each variation pattern differs depending on the reserved memory number of the special symbol that executes the variable display. In other words, in time-saving state A in this feature part 099SG, the average variable display period for variable displays in which the variable display result is a miss differs depending on the reserved memory number of the special symbol that is executed (in the case of a variable display of the first special symbol, the reserved memory number stored in the first special symbol reserved memory part 099SG151A, and in the case of a variable display of the second special symbol, the reserved memory number stored in the second special symbol reserved memory part 099SG151B).

In addition, when the game state is time-saving state A and the variable display result is a jackpot, regardless of the number of reserved memories, the fluctuation pattern is determined from the fluctuation patterns of the Super Reach Non-A jackpot and the Super Reach E jackpot using the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table C as shown in FIG. 12-9. In addition, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table C, of the possible values of the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, 5 values are assigned to the Super Reach Non-A jackpot fluctuation pattern, and 95 values are assigned to the Super Reach E jackpot fluctuation pattern. In other words, when the game state is time-saving state A and the variable display result is a jackpot, regardless of the number of reserved memories, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the Super Reach Non-A jackpot fluctuation pattern 5% of the time, and the Super Reach E jackpot fluctuation pattern 95% of the time.

In addition, when the game state is the time-saving state B, the variable display result is a miss, and the reserved memory number of special symbols that execute the variable display is 0, as shown in FIG. 12-10 (A), the variation pattern is determined from the variation patterns of non-reach B miss and super reach D miss using the variation pattern determination table K for miss. In addition, in the variation pattern determination table I for miss, of the possible values of the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, 97 values are assigned to the variation pattern of non-reach B miss, and 3 values are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach D miss. In other words, when the game state is the time-saving state B, the variable display result is a miss, and the reserved memory number of special symbols that execute the variable display is 0, the variation pattern is determined to be the non-reach B miss variation pattern 97% of the time, and the variation pattern is determined to be the super reach D miss variation pattern 3% of the time.

Also, when the game state is the time-saving state B, the variable display result is a miss, and the reserved memory number of the special symbol that executes the variable display is one, the variation pattern is determined from the variation patterns of the super-shortened non-reach miss and the Super Reach D miss using the miss variation pattern determination table L, as shown in FIG. 12-10 (B). In addition, in the miss variation pattern determination table L, of the possible values of the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, 97 values are assigned to the variation pattern of the super-shortened non-reach miss, and 3 values are assigned to the variation pattern of the Super Reach D miss. In other words, when the game state is the time-saving state B, the variable display result is a miss, and the reserved memory number of the special symbol that executes the variable display is one, the variation pattern is determined to be the super-shortened non-reach miss variation pattern 97% of the time, and the variation pattern is determined to be the Super Reach D miss variation pattern 3% of the time.

Also, when the game state is the time-saving state B, the variable display result is a miss, and the reserved memory number of the special symbol that executes the variable display is two, as shown in FIG. 12-10 (C), the variation pattern is determined from the variation patterns of the super shortened non-reach miss and the Super Reach D miss using the variation pattern determination table M for misses. In addition, in the variation pattern determination table M for misses, of the possible values of the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, 99 values are assigned to the variation pattern of the super shortened non-reach miss, and one value is assigned to the variation pattern of the Super Reach D miss. In other words, when the game state is the time-saving state B, the variable display result is a miss, and the reserved memory number of the special symbol that executes the variable display is two, the variation pattern is determined to be the variation pattern of the super shortened non-reach miss 99% of the time, and the variation pattern is determined to be the variation pattern of the Super Reach D miss 1% of the time.

In addition, when the game state is the time-saving state B, the variable display result is a miss, and the reserved memory number of special symbols that execute the variable display is three, as shown in FIG. 12-10 (D), the variation pattern is determined only from the super-shortened non-reach miss variation pattern using the miss variation pattern determination table N. In addition, in the miss variation pattern determination table N, 100 values out of the possible values of the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern are assigned to the super-shortened non-reach miss variation pattern. In other words, when the game state is the time-saving state B, the variable display result is a miss, and the reserved memory number of special symbols that execute the variable display is three, the variation pattern is determined to be the super-shortened non-reach miss variation pattern with a rate of 100%.

As described above, for variable displays in which the variable display result is a miss in time-saving state B, the determination ratio of each variation pattern differs depending on the reserved memory number of the special symbol that executes the variable display. In other words, in time-saving state B in this feature part 099SG, the average variable display period for variable displays in which the variable display result is a miss differs depending on the reserved memory number of the special symbol that is executed (in the case of a variable display of the first special symbol, the reserved memory number stored in the first special symbol reserved memory part 099SG151A, and in the case of a variable display of the second special symbol, the reserved memory number stored in the second special symbol reserved memory part 099SG151B).

In addition, when the game state is time-saving state B and the variable display result is a jackpot, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be only the Super Reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern using the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table D as shown in FIG. 12-11, regardless of the number of reserved memories. In addition, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table D, 100 values out of the possible values of the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination are assigned to the Super Reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern. In other words, when the game state is time-saving state B and the variable display result is a jackpot, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the Super Reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern 100% of the time, regardless of the number of reserved memories.

Here, the period values in time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and special state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this characteristic part 099SG will be explained based on Figures 12-13 to 12-23.

First, as shown in Figures 12-13 (A) and 12-23, if the average fluctuation time of one fluctuation when the game state is time-saving state A is taken as period value α, said period value α is calculated by the value of A x a + B x b + C x c + D x d. Here, A is the average fluctuation time when the fluctuation display result becomes a miss when the number of second special chart reserved memories is 0 in time-saving state A, a is the proportion of the fluctuation display when the number of second special chart reserved memories is 0 in time-saving state A to the 110 fluctuation displays in said time-saving state A, B is the average fluctuation time when the number of second special chart reserved memories is 1 in time-saving state A to the 110 fluctuation displays in said time-saving state A, and b is the proportion of the fluctuation display when the number of second special chart reserved memories is 1 in time-saving state A to the 110 fluctuation displays in said time-saving state A. , C is the average change time when the change display result becomes a miss when the number of second special pattern reserved memories is two in the time-saving state A, c is the proportion of the change display when the number of second special pattern reserved memories is two in the time-saving state A to the 110 change displays in the time-saving state A, D is the average change time when the number of second special pattern reserved memories is three in the time-saving state A to the 110 change displays in the time-saving state A, d is the proportion of the change display when the number of second special pattern reserved memories is three in the time-saving state A to the 110 change displays in the time-saving state A. Note that the change display period when the change display result in this feature part 099SG becomes a miss refers to the period from the start timing of the special pattern change display to the end timing of the change display.

Also, as shown in Figures 12-13(B) and 12-23, if the average fluctuation time of one fluctuation when the game state is time-saving state B is taken as period value β, said period value β is calculated by the value of E x e + F x f + G x g + H x h. Here, E is the average fluctuation time at which the fluctuation display result becomes a miss when the number of second special chart reserved memories is 0 in time-saving state B, e is the proportion of the fluctuation display when the number of second special chart reserved memories is 0 in time-saving state B to the 110 fluctuation displays in said time-saving state B, F is the average fluctuation time at which the fluctuation display result becomes a miss when the number of second special chart reserved memories is 1 in time-saving state B, f is the proportion of the fluctuation display when the number of second special chart reserved memories is 1 in time-saving state B to the 110 fluctuation displays in said time-saving state B, G is the average change time when the change display result becomes a miss when the number of second special chart reserved memories is two in the time-saving state B, g is the proportion of the change display when the number of second special chart reserved memories is two in the time-saving state B to the 110 change displays in the time-saving state B, H is the average change time when the change display result becomes a miss when the number of second special chart reserved memories is three in the time-saving state B, and h is the proportion of the change display when the number of second special chart reserved memories is three in the time-saving state B to the 110 change displays in the time-saving state B.

As shown in Figures 12-13(C) and 12-23, if the average fluctuation time of one fluctuation when the game state is the high probability state is taken as the period value γ, the period value γ is calculated by the value I x i + J x j + K x k + L x l. Here, I is the average fluctuation time when the fluctuation display result becomes a miss when the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 0 in the high probability state, i is the proportion of the fluctuation display when the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 0 in the high probability state to the 110 fluctuation displays in the high probability state, J is the average fluctuation time when the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 1 in the high probability state to the miss, j is the proportion of the fluctuation display when the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 1 in the high probability state to the 110 fluctuation displays in the high probability state, K is the average change time when the change display result becomes a miss when the number of second special reserved memories is two in the special chance state, k is the proportion of the change display when the number of second special reserved memories is two in the special chance state out of 110 change displays in the special chance state, H is the average change time when the change display result becomes a miss when the number of second special reserved memories is three in the special chance state, and l is the proportion of the change display when the number of second special reserved memories is three in the special chance state out of 110 change displays in the special chance state.

As described above, from Fig. 12-13(A) to Fig. 12-13(C), if the numerical values in this characteristic section are substituted into each algebra A to L and a to l to calculate the period value α in the time-saving state A, the period value β in the time-saving state B, and the period value γ in the special state, the period value α will be greater than the period value β, and the period value γ will be greater than the period value β (α>β, γ>β).

In addition, attention is focused on the average fluctuation time when the number of fluctuation displays in time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and special probability state each reach 1,100 times by controlling the game to be in time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and special probability state multiple times. As shown in Figures 12-14(A) and 12-23, if the average fluctuation time of 1,100 fluctuations when the game state is in time-saving state A is taken as period value α', the period value α' is calculated by the value of A x a' + B x b' + C x c' + D x d'. Here, A is the average change time when the change display result becomes a miss when the number of second special chart reserved memories is 0 in the time-saving state A, a' is the proportion of the change display when the number of second special chart reserved memories is 0 in the time-saving state A to the 1100 change displays in the time-saving state A, B is the average change time when the change display result becomes a miss when the number of second special chart reserved memories is 1 in the time-saving state A, b' is the proportion of the change display when the number of second special chart reserved memories is 1 in the time-saving state A to the 1100 change displays in the time-saving state A, C is the average change time when the change display result becomes a miss when the number of second special chart reserved memories is two in the time-saving state A, c' is the proportion of the change display when the number of second special chart reserved memories is two in the time-saving state A to the 1100 change displays in the time-saving state A, D is the average change time when the change display result becomes a miss when the number of second special chart reserved memories is three in the time-saving state A, and d' is the proportion of the change display when the number of second special chart reserved memories is three in the time-saving state A to the 1100 change displays in the time-saving state A.

As shown in Figures 12-14(B) and 12-23, if the average fluctuation time of one fluctuation when the game state is time-saving state B is taken as period value β', said period value β' is calculated by the value of E x e' + F x f' + G x g' + H x h'. Here, E is the average fluctuation time at which the fluctuation display result becomes a miss when the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 0 in time-saving state B, e' is the proportion of the fluctuation display when the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 0 in time-saving state B to the 1100 fluctuation displays in said time-saving state B, F is the average fluctuation time at which the fluctuation display result becomes a miss when the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 1 in time-saving state B, f' is the proportion of the fluctuation display when the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 1 in time-saving state B to the 1100 fluctuation displays in said time-saving state B, G is the average change time when the change display result becomes a miss when the number of second special chart reserved memories is two in the time-saving state B, g' is the proportion of the change display when the number of second special chart reserved memories is two in the time-saving state B to the 1100 change displays in the time-saving state B, H is the average change time when the change display result becomes a miss when the number of second special chart reserved memories is three in the time-saving state B, and h' is the proportion of the change display when the number of second special chart reserved memories is three in the time-saving state B to the 1100 change displays in the time-saving state B.

As shown in Figures 12-14(C) and 12-23, if the average fluctuation time of one fluctuation when the game state is the high probability state is taken as the period value γ', the period value γ' is calculated by the value I x i' + J x j' + K x k' + L x l'. Here, I is the average fluctuation time when the fluctuation display result becomes a miss when the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 0 in the high probability state, i' is the proportion of the fluctuation display when the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 0 in the high probability state to the 1100 fluctuation displays in the high probability state, J is the average fluctuation time when the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 1 in the high probability state to the miss, j' is the proportion of the fluctuation display when the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 1 in the high probability state to the 1100 fluctuation displays in the high probability state, K is the average time when the variable display result becomes a miss when the number of second special reserved memories is two in the variable state, k' is the proportion of the variable display when the number of second special reserved memories is two in the variable state out of 1100 variable displays in the variable state, H is the average time when the variable display result becomes a miss when the number of second special reserved memories is three in the variable state, and l' is the proportion of the variable display when the number of second special reserved memories is three in the variable state out of 1100 variable displays in the variable state.

As described above, from Fig. 12-14(A) to Fig. 12-14(C) and Fig. 12-23, when the numerical values in this characteristic section are substituted into each algebra A to L and a' to l' to calculate the period value α' in the time-saving state A, the period value β' in the time-saving state B, and the period value γ' in the special state, the period value α' is greater than the period value β', and the period value γ' is greater than the period value β (α'>β', γ'>β').

Next, let us look at the case where 110 fluctuation displays are executed in the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the probability variable state. First, as shown in Figures 12-15(A) and 12-23, if the player constantly shoots the game ball toward the right game area 2R, etc., to execute 110 fluctuations in the time-saving state A with each fluctuation and the number of reserved second special symbols being three, the average fluctuation time is taken as the period value δ, which is calculated as D x 110. Here, D is the average fluctuation time at which the fluctuation display result is a miss when the number of reserved second special symbols is three in the time-saving state A, as described above.

As shown in Figures 12-15(B) and 12-23, if the average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuations are performed in time-saving state A with three second special reserved memories by the player continually shooting the game ball toward the right game area 2R, the period value ε is calculated as H x 110. Here, H is the average fluctuation time at which the fluctuation display result is a miss when the number of second special reserved memories is three in time-saving state B, as described above.

As shown in Figures 12-15(C) and 12-23, if the player continually shoots the game ball towards the right game area 2R, causing 110 fluctuations in the probability variable state with three second special reserved memories, the average fluctuation time is taken as the period value ζ, which is calculated as L x 110. Here, L is the average fluctuation time at which the fluctuation display result is a miss when the number of second special reserved memories is three in the probability variable state, as described above.

As described above, from Figures 12-15(A) to 12-15(C), if the numerical values in this characteristic section are substituted into each algebra D, H, and L to calculate the period value δ in time-saving state A, the period value ε in time-saving state B, and the period value ζ in the special state, the period value δ is greater than the period value ε, and the period value ζ is greater than the period value ε (δ>ε, ζ>ε).

In addition, we will focus on the average change time when the number of change displays in the time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and special probability state reach 1100 times by controlling the time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and special probability state multiple times. First, as shown in Figures 12-16 (A) and 12-23, if the player constantly shoots the game ball toward the right game area 2R, etc., and executes 1100 changes in the time-saving state A with each change and the number of second special symbol reserved memories being 3, the average change time is taken as the period value δ', and the period value δ' is calculated as D x 1100. Here, D is the average change time at which the change display result is a miss when the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 3 in the time-saving state A, as described above.

As shown in Figures 12-16(B) and 12-23, if the player constantly shoots the game ball toward the right game area 2R, and 1100 fluctuations are performed in time-saving state B with three second special reserved memories, the average fluctuation time is taken as the period value ε', and the period value ε' is calculated as H x 1100. Here, H is the average fluctuation time at which the fluctuation display result is a miss when the number of second special reserved memories is three in time-saving state B, as described above.

As shown in Figures 12-16(C) and 12-23, if the player continually shoots the game ball towards the right game area 2R, causing 1100 fluctuations in the special chance state with three second special reserved memories, the average fluctuation time is taken as the period value ζ', which is calculated as L x 1100. Here, L is the average fluctuation time at which the fluctuation display result is a miss when the number of second special reserved memories is three in the special chance state, as described above.

As described above, from Figures 12-16(A) to 12-16(C), if the numerical values in this characteristic section are substituted into each algebra D, H, and L to calculate the period value δ' in time-saving state A, the period value ε' in time-saving state B, and the period value ζ' in the special state, the period value δ' will be greater than the period value ε, and the period value ζ' will be greater than the period value ε' (δ'>ε', ζ'>ε').

As shown in Figures 12-17(A) and 12-23, if the player continually shoots the game ball toward the right game area 2R, causing 110 fluctuations in time-saving state A with two second special reserved memory items, the period value η is the average fluctuation time. The period value η is calculated as C x 110.

As shown in Figures 12-17(B) and 12-23, when the player constantly and continuously shoots the game ball towards the right game area 2R, etc., 110 fluctuations are performed in the time-saving state B with each fluctuation and the number of second special pattern reserved memories being 2, if the average fluctuation time of the 110 fluctuation displays when the number of second special pattern reserved memories is always 2 when the fluctuation display is executed is taken as the period value θ, the period value θ is calculated by the value of G x 110.

As shown in Figures 12-17(C) and 12-23, if the player continually shoots the game ball toward the right game area 2R, causing 110 fluctuations in the probability fluctuation state with two second special reserved memory items, the average fluctuation time is taken as the period value ι, which is calculated as K x 110.

As described above, from Figures 12-17(A) to 12-17(C), if the numerical values in this characteristic section are substituted into each algebra C, G, and K to calculate the period value η in time-saving state A, the period value θ in time-saving state B, and the period value ι in the special state, the period value η is greater than the period value θ, and the period value ι is greater than the period value θ (η>θ, ι>θ).

Furthermore, we will focus on the average fluctuation time when the number of fluctuation displays in time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and special probability state reach 1100 times each by controlling the game multiple times in each of the time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and special probability state. First, as shown in Figures 12-18(A) and 12-23, if the player constantly and continuously shoots the game ball toward the right game area 2R, etc., and executes 1100 fluctuations in time-saving state A with each fluctuation and the number of second special reserved memories being 2, the period value η' is taken as the average fluctuation time, and the period value η' is calculated by the value of C x 1100.

As shown in Figures 12-18(B) and 12-23, if the player continues to shoot the game ball toward the right game area 2R, causing 1100 fluctuations in time-saving state B with each fluctuation and the number of second special chart reserved memories being 2, the average fluctuation time is taken as the period value θ', and the period value θ' is calculated as the value of G x 1100.

As shown in Figures 12-18(C) and 12-23, if the player continually shoots the game ball toward the right game area 2R, causing 1,100 fluctuations in the special probability state with two second special reserved memories, the average fluctuation time is taken as the period value ι', which is calculated as K x 1,100.

As described above, from Figures 12-18(A) to 12-18(C), when the numerical values in this characteristic section are substituted into each algebra C, G, and K to calculate the period value η' in the time-saving state A, the period value θ' in the time-saving state B, and the period value ι' in the special state, the period value η' is greater than the period value θ, and the period value ι' is greater than the period value θ' (η'>θ', ι'>θ').

As shown in Figures 12-19(A) and 12-23, if the player continues to shoot the game ball toward the right game area 2R, causing 110 fluctuations in time-saving state A with one second special reserved memory, the average fluctuation time is taken as the period value κ, and the period value κ is calculated as B x 110.

As shown in Figures 12-19(B) and 12-23, if the player continues to shoot the game ball toward the right game area 2R, causing 110 fluctuations in time-saving state B with one second special reserved memory, the average fluctuation time is taken as the period value λ, and the period value λ is calculated as F x 110.

As shown in Figures 12-19(C) and 12-23, if the player continually shoots the game ball toward the right game area 2R, causing 110 fluctuations in the probability fluctuation state with one second special reserved memory, the average fluctuation time is taken as the period value μ, and the period value μ is calculated as J x 110.

As described above, from Figures 12-19 (A) to 12-19 (C), if the numerical values in this characteristic section are substituted into each algebra B, F, and J to calculate the period value κ in time-saving state A, the period value λ in time-saving state B, and the period value μ in the special state, the period value κ will be greater than the period value λ, and the period value μ will be greater than the period value λ (κ>λ, μ>λ).

Furthermore, we will focus on the average fluctuation time when the number of fluctuation displays in time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and special probability state reach 1100 times each by controlling the game multiple times in each of the time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and special probability state. First, as shown in Figures 12-20 (A) and 12-23, if the player constantly and continuously shoots the game ball toward the right game area 2R, etc., and executes 1100 fluctuations in time-saving state A with one second special reserved memory, the average fluctuation time is taken as the period value κ', which is calculated by the value of B x 1100.

As shown in Figures 12-20(B) and 12-23, if the player continues to shoot the game ball toward the right game area 2R, causing 1100 fluctuations in time-saving state B with one second special reserved memory, the average fluctuation time is taken as the period value λ', and the period value λ' is calculated as F x 1100.

As shown in Figures 12-20(C) and 12-23, if the player continues to shoot the game ball toward the right game area 2R, causing 1100 fluctuations in the special probability state with one second special reserved memory, the average fluctuation time is taken as the period value μ', and the period value μ' is calculated as J x 1100.

As described above, from Figures 12-20(A) to 12-20(C), if the numerical values in this characteristic section are substituted into each algebra B, F, and J to calculate the period value κ' in the time-saving state A, the period value λ' in the time-saving state B, and the period value μ' in the special state, the period value κ' will be greater than the period value λ, and the period value μ' will be greater than the period value λ' (κ'>λ', μ'>λ').

As shown in Figures 12-21(A) and 12-23, if the player continues to shoot the game ball toward the right game area 2R, causing 110 fluctuations in the time-saving state A with 0 second special reserved memory, the average fluctuation time is taken as the period value ν, and the period value ν is calculated as A x 110.

As shown in Figures 12-21(B) and 12-23, if the player continues to shoot the game ball toward the right game area 2R, causing 110 fluctuations in the time-saving state B with 0 second special reserved memory, the average fluctuation time is taken as the period value ξ. The period value ξ is calculated as E x 110.

As shown in Figures 12-21(C) and 12-23, if the player continually shoots the game ball toward the right game area 2R, causing 110 fluctuations in the probability fluctuation state, with the number of reserved second special patterns being 0, the average fluctuation time is taken as the period value π, which is calculated as I x 110.

As described above, from Figures 12-21(A) to 12-21(C), if the numerical values in this characteristic section are substituted into each algebra A, E, and I to calculate the period value ν in the time-saving state A, the period value ξ in the time-saving state B, and the period value π in the special state, the period value ν is greater than the period value ξ, and the period value π is greater than the period value ξ (ν>ξ, π>ξ).

Furthermore, we will focus on the average fluctuation time when the number of fluctuation displays in the time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and special probability state reach 1100 times each by controlling the game multiple times in each of the time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and special probability state. First, as shown in Figures 12-22(A) and 12-23, if the average fluctuation time is set to the period value v' when 1100 fluctuations are executed in the time-saving state A with the number of reserved second special charts being 0 by the player constantly and continuously shooting the game ball toward the right game area 2R, the period value v' is calculated by the value of A x 1100.

As shown in Figures 12-22(B) and 12-23, if the player continues to shoot the game ball toward the right game area 2R, causing 1100 fluctuations in time-saving state B with 0 second special reserved memory, the average fluctuation time is taken as the period value ξ', and the period value ξ' is calculated as E x 1100.

As shown in Figures 12-22(C) and 12-23, if the player continually shoots the game ball towards the right game area 2R, causing 1100 fluctuations in the special probability state, with the number of reserved second special patterns being 0, the average fluctuation time is taken as the period value π', which is calculated as I x 1100.

As described above, from Fig. 12-22(A) to Fig. 12-22(C), if the numerical values in this characteristic section are substituted into each algebra A, E, and I to calculate the period value v' in the time-saving state A, the period value ξ' in the time-saving state B, and the period value π' in the special state, the period value v' will be greater than the period value ξ, and the period value π' will be greater than the period value ξ' (v'>ξ', π'>ξ').

Next, Figures 12-24(A) and 12-24(B) show the actual shooting values (number of game balls fired, number of times that the special chart 1 start hole is entered, number of times that the special chart 2 start hole is entered, number of times that the special chart 1 change display is displayed, number of times that the special chart 2 change display is displayed, total special chart 1 change time, total special chart 2 change time) in the normal state, time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and special probability state when a test firing test of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this characteristic part 099SG was conducted for 10 hours, and the design values of the pachinko gaming machine 1 obtained from these actual shooting values. Note that, as shown in Figure 12-24(A), the reason the total test firing test time in the normal state, time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and special probability state is less than 10 hours is because the remaining time is in a jackpot gaming state. In addition, the actual shot value in the normal state is based on the condition that the game ball is continuously shot into the left game area 2L by operating the ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30, and the actual shot value in the time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and probability-changing state is based on the condition that the game ball is continuously shot into the right game area 2R by operating the ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30.

As shown in Figure 12-24 (A), in the normal state, the test firing time is 346.08 minutes, the number of balls fired is 34,580, the number of times that the special chart 1 start port wins is 1,939, the number of times that the special chart 2 start port wins is 0, the number of times that the special chart 1 change display is 1,883, the number of times that the special chart 2 change display is 0, the total special chart 1 change time is 23,840 seconds, and the total special chart 2 change time is 0 seconds. Also, in the time-saving state A, the test firing time is 77.00 minutes, the number of balls fired is 7,676, the number of times that the special chart 1 start port wins is 0, the number of times that the special chart 2 start port wins is 4,371, the number of times that the special chart 1 change display is 0, the number of times that the special chart 2 change display is 658, the total special chart 1 change time is 0 seconds, and the total special chart 2 change time is 3,548 seconds. In the time-saving state B, the test shot time is 14.96 minutes, the number of balls fired is 1494, the number of times that the special chart 1 start hole is won is 0, the number of times that the special chart 2 start hole is won is 821, the number of times that the special chart 1 change display is 0, the number of times that the special chart 2 change display is 594, the total special chart 1 change time is 0 seconds, and the total special chart 2 change time is 954 seconds. In the probability change state, the test shot time is 116.00 minutes, the number of balls fired is 11515, the number of times that the special chart 1 start hole is won is 0, the number of times that the special chart 2 start hole is won is 6556, the number of times that the special chart 1 change display is 0, the number of times that the special chart 2 change display is 987, the total special chart 1 change time is 0 seconds, and the total special chart 2 change time is 4387 seconds.

From the above actual shooting values, the design values for the pachinko game machine 1 of this characteristic part 099SG are calculated as follows, as shown in Figure 12-24 (B): the number of game balls fired per minute in the normal state is 99.9 balls/minute, the winning rate of special chart 1 is 5.6 balls/minute, the winning rate of special chart 2 is 0 balls/minute, the average special chart 1 fluctuation time is 12.661 seconds, and the average special chart 2 fluctuation time is 0 seconds. Also, the number of game balls fired per minute in time-saving state A is calculated as 99.9 balls/minute, the winning rate of special chart 1 is 0 balls/minute, the winning rate of special chart 2 is 56.7 balls/minute, the average special chart 1 fluctuation time is 0 seconds, and the average special chart 2 fluctuation time is 5.393 seconds. In addition, the number of balls fired per minute in time-saving state B is calculated to be 99.9 balls/minute, the winning rate of special chart 1 is 0 balls/minute, the winning rate of special chart 2 is 54.8 balls/minute, the average special chart 1 fluctuation time is 0 seconds, and the average special chart 2 fluctuation time is 1.607 seconds. In addition, the number of balls fired per minute in the probability change state is calculated to be 99.9 balls/minute, the winning rate of special chart 1 is 0 balls/minute, the winning rate of special chart 2 is 56.7 balls/minute, the average special chart 1 fluctuation time is 0 seconds, and the average special chart 2 fluctuation time is 4.445 seconds.

When comparing the winning rates of Special Chart 2 in Time-Saving State A, Time-Saving State B, and the Special Chance State, only the winning rate of Special Chart 2 in Time-Saving State B is different in value, but this is due to an error caused by the number of game balls released in Time-Saving State B being less than the other two states.

Here, the average fluctuation time in the normal state, time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and special state is actually calculated based on the numerical values obtained from the design values shown in Figure 12-24.

First, as shown in Figure 12-25 (A), in the normal state, the average change time at which the change display result becomes a miss when the first special chart reserved memory number is 0, the average change time at which the change display result becomes a miss when the first special chart reserved memory number is 1, and the average change time at which the change display result becomes a miss when the first special chart reserved memory number is 2 are calculated as 12,000 (ms) x 97/100 + 45,000 (ms) x 2/100 + 80,000 (ms) x 1/100 = 13,340 (ms) from the change patterns that can be selected when the first special chart reserved memory number is 0 to 2 and the determination ratios of these change patterns (see Figure 12-5 (A)). In addition, the average change time at which the change display result is a miss when the number of first special chart reserved memories is 3 is calculated as 5000 (ms) x 97/100 + 45000 (ms) x 2/100 + 80000 (ms) x 1/100 = 6550 (ms) from the change patterns that can be selected when the number of first special chart reserved memories is 3 and the determination ratio of these change patterns (see Figure 12-5 (B)).

In addition, based on the normal state shown in Figure 12-24 (A), when calculating the percentage of variable displays executed when the number of first special chart reserved memories is 0 to 3, as shown in Figure 12-25 (B), the percentage of variable displays executed when the number of first special chart reserved memories is 0 is 10%, the percentage of variable displays executed when the number of first special chart reserved memories is 1 is 40%, the percentage of variable displays executed when the number of first special chart reserved memories is 2 is 40%, and the percentage of variable displays executed when the number of first special chart reserved memories is 3 is 10%.

As a result, as shown in Figure 12-25 (C), the average fluctuation time in the normal state is calculated as 13,340 (ms) x 10/100 + 13,340 (ms) x 40/100 + 13,340 (ms) x 40/100 + 6,550 (ms) x 10/100 = 12,661 (ms).

As shown in FIG. 12-26(A), in the time-saving state A, the average fluctuation time A at which the fluctuation display result becomes a miss when the number of second special pattern reserved memories is 0 is calculated as 7000 (ms) x 95/100 + 50000 (ms) x 5/100 = 9150 (ms) from the fluctuation patterns that can be selected when the number of second special pattern reserved memories is 0 and the determination ratio of these fluctuation patterns (see FIG. 12-8(A)), and the average fluctuation time B at which the fluctuation display result becomes a miss when the number of second special pattern reserved memories is 1 is calculated as 3000 (ms) x 85/100 + 7000 (ms) x 10/100 + 50000 (ms) x 5/100 = The average change time C at which the change display result is a miss when the number of second special pattern reserved memories is 2 is calculated as 3000 (ms) x 90/100 + 7000 (ms) x 5/100 + 50000 (ms) x 5/100 = 5550 (ms) from the change patterns that can be selected when the number of second special pattern reserved memories is 2 and the determination ratio of these change patterns (see FIG. 12-8 (C)). The average change time D at which the change display result is a miss when the number of second special pattern reserved memories is 3 is calculated as 3000 (ms) x 95/100 + 50000 (ms) x 5/100 = 5350 (ms) from the change patterns that can be selected when the number of second special pattern reserved memories is 3 and the determination ratio of these change patterns (see FIG. 12-6 (D)).

In addition, based on the time-saving state A shown in Figure 12-24 (A), when calculating the percentage of variable displays executed in each of the cases where the number of second special chart reserved memories is 0 to 3 in the 110th and 1100th variable displays in the time-saving state A, as shown in Figure 12-26 (B), the percentage of variable displays executed when the number of second special chart reserved memories is 0 (a and a') is 0.9090909%, the percentage of variable displays executed when the number of second special chart reserved memories is 1 (b and b') is 0.9090909%, the percentage of variable displays executed when the number of second special chart reserved memories is 2 (c and c') is 2.7272727%, and the percentage of variable displays executed when the number of second special chart reserved memories is 3 (d and d') is 95.4545455%.

As a result, as shown in Figure 12-26 (C), the average fluctuation time (α and α') for one fluctuation in time-saving state A is calculated as 9150 (ms) x 0.9090909 + 5750 (ms) x 0.9090909/100 + 5550 (ms) x 2.7272727/100 + 5350 (ms) x 95.4545455/100 = 5393.636 (ms).

As shown in FIG. 12-27(A), in the time-saving state B, the average change time E at which the change display result becomes a miss when the number of reserved second special charts is 0 is calculated as 5000 (ms) x 97/100 + 25000 (ms) x 3/100 = 5600 (ms) from the change patterns that can be selected when the number of reserved second special charts is 0 and the determination ratio of these change patterns (see FIG. 12-10(A)), and the average change time F at which the change display result becomes a miss when the number of reserved second special charts is 1 is calculated as 1500 (ms) x 97/100 + 25000 (ms) from the change patterns that can be selected when the number of reserved second special charts is 1 and the determination ratio of these change patterns (see FIG. 12-10(B)). x 3/100 = 2205 (ms), and the average change time G at which the change display result becomes a miss when the second special chart reserved memory number is 2 is calculated from the change patterns that can be selected when the second special chart reserved memory number is 2 and the determination ratio of these change patterns (see FIG. 12-10 (C)) as 1500 (ms) x 99/100 + 25000 (ms) x 1/100 = 1735 (ms), and the average change time H at which the change display result becomes a miss when the second special chart reserved memory number is 3 is calculated from the change patterns that can be selected when the second special chart reserved memory number is 3 and the determination ratio of these change patterns (see FIG. 12-10 (D)) as 1500 (ms) x 100/100 = 1500 (ms).

In addition, based on the time-saving state B shown in Figure 12-24 (A), when calculating the percentage of variable displays executed in each of the cases where the number of second special chart reserved memories is 0 to 3 in the 110th and 1100th variable displays in the time-saving state B, as shown in Figure 12-27 (B), the percentage of variable displays executed when the number of second special chart reserved memories is 0 (e and e') is 0.9090909%, the percentage of variable displays executed when the number of second special chart reserved memories is 1 (f and f') is 1.8181818%, the percentage of variable displays executed when the number of second special chart reserved memories is 2 (g and g') is 24.5454545%, and the percentage of variable displays executed when the number of second special chart reserved memories is 3 (h and h') is 72.7272727%.

As a result, as shown in Figure 12-27 (C), the average fluctuation time (β and β') of one fluctuation in time-saving state B is calculated as 5600 (ms) x 0.9090909 + 2205 (ms) x 1.8181818/100 + 1735 (ms) x 24.5454545/100 + 1500 (ms) x 72.7272727/100 = 1607.773 (ms).

As shown in Fig. 12-28(A), in the probability variable state, the average variable time I at which the variable display result becomes a miss when the number of reserved second special patterns is 0 is calculated from the variable patterns that can be selected when the number of reserved second special patterns is 0 and the determination ratio of these variable patterns (see Fig. 12-6(A)). The average change time J at which the change display result is a miss when the second special reserved memory number is 1 is calculated as 3000 (ms) x 80/100 + 7000 (ms) x 15/100 + 40000 x 2/100 + 25000 (ms) x 3/100 = 50 from the change patterns that can be selected when the second special reserved memory number is 1 and the determination ratio of these change patterns (see FIG. 12-6 (B)). The average change time K at which the change display result is a miss when the number of reserved second special charts is 2 is calculated as 3000 (ms) x 90/100 + 7000 (ms) x 5/100 + 40000 (ms) x 2/100 + 25000 (ms) x 3/100 from the change patterns that can be selected when the number of reserved second special charts is 2 and the determination ratio of these change patterns (see Figure 12-6 (C)). = 4600 (ms), and the average fluctuation time L at which the fluctuation display result is a miss when the number of second special chart reserved memories is 3 is calculated as 3000 (ms) x 95/100 + 40000 x 2/100 + 25000 (ms) x 3/100 = 4400 (ms) from the fluctuation patterns that can be selected when the number of second special chart reserved memories is 3 and the determination ratios of these fluctuation patterns (see Figure 12-6 (D)).

In addition, based on the probability of a special chance state shown in FIG. 12-24 (A), when calculating the percentage of variable displays executed in each of the cases where the number of second special reserved memories is 0 to 3 in the 110th and 1100th variable displays in the probability of a special chance state, as shown in FIG. 12-28 (B), the percentage of variable displays executed when the number of second special reserved memories is 0 (i and i') is 0.9090909%, the percentage of variable displays executed when the number of second special reserved memories is 1 (j and j') is 0.9090909%, the percentage of variable displays executed when the number of second special reserved memories is 2 (k and k') is 2.7272727%, and the percentage of variable displays executed when the number of second special reserved memories is 3 (l and l') is 95.4545455%.

As a result, as shown in Figure 12-28 (C), the average fluctuation time (γ and γ') of one fluctuation in the high probability state is calculated as 8200 (ms) x 0.9090909 + 5000 (ms) x 0.9090909/100 + 4600 (ms) x 2.7272727/100 + 4400 (ms) x 95.4545455/100 = 4445.455 (ms).

In view of the above, when comparing the average fluctuation time of one fluctuation in time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and special probability state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 with this feature part 099SG, as shown in FIG. 12-29, the average fluctuation time of one fluctuation in time-saving state B (β and β') is shorter than the average fluctuation time of one fluctuation in time-saving state A (α and α') (α>β and α'>β'), and the average fluctuation time of one fluctuation in time-saving state B (β and β') is set shorter than the average fluctuation time of one fluctuation in the special probability state (γ and γ') (γ>β and γ'>β').

Next, the total average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuation displays are executed in the time-saving state A, the total average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuation displays are executed in the time-saving state B, the total average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuation displays are executed in the high probability state, the total average fluctuation time when 1100 fluctuation displays are executed in the time-saving state A, the total average fluctuation time when 1100 fluctuation displays are executed in the time-saving state B, and the total average fluctuation time when 1100 fluctuation displays are executed in the high probability state are calculated.

12-30(A) and 12-35, if the total average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuation displays are executed in time-saving state A is taken as period value χ, then the period value χ is calculated as α (or α') x 110 = 5393.633 (ms) x 110 = 593299.63 (ms). If the total average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuation displays are executed in time-saving state B is taken as period value ψ, then the period value ψ is calculated as β (or β') x 110 = 1607.773 (ms) x 110 = 176855.03 (ms). In addition, if the total average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuation displays are executed in the high probability state is taken as the period value ω, the period value ω is calculated as γ (or γ') x 110 = 4445.455 (ms) x 110 = 489000.05 (ms).

In other words, in this feature part 099SG, the period value ψ obtained by multiplying the average fluctuation time of one fluctuation in the time-saving state B by 110 is set to be smaller than the period value ω obtained by multiplying the average fluctuation time of one fluctuation in the time-saving state A by 110, and the period value ψ is set to be smaller than the period value ω obtained by multiplying the average fluctuation time of one fluctuation in the high probability state by 110 (χ>ψ and ω>ψ).

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 12-31(A) and 12-36, if the total average fluctuation time when 1100 fluctuation displays are executed in time-saving state A is taken as period value χ', then the period value χ' is calculated as α (or α') x 1100 = 5393.633 (ms) x 1100 = 5932996.3 (ms). Also, if the total average fluctuation time when 1100 fluctuation displays are executed in time-saving state B is taken as period value ψ', then the period value ψ' is calculated as β (or β') x 1100 = 1607.773 (ms) x 1100 = 1768550.3 (ms). In addition, if the total average fluctuation time when 1100 fluctuation displays are executed in the high probability state is taken as the period value ω', the period value ω' is calculated as γ (or γ') x 1100 = 4445.455 (ms) x 1100 = 4890000.5 (ms).

In other words, in this feature part 099SG, the period value ψ' obtained by multiplying the average fluctuation time of one fluctuation in the time-saving state B by 1100 is set to be smaller than the period value ω' obtained by multiplying the average fluctuation time of one fluctuation in the time-saving state A by 110, and the period value ψ' is set to be smaller than the period value ω' obtained by multiplying the average fluctuation time of one fluctuation in the high probability state by 110 (χ'>ψ' and ω'>ψ').

In addition, the average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuations are performed in the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the probability variable state with 3 second special reserved memories is compared. First, as shown in FIG. 12-31 (A), the period value δ, which is the average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuations are performed in the time-saving state A with 3 second special reserved memories, is calculated as D×110=5350 (ms)×110=588500 (ms). In addition, the period value ε, which is the average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuations are performed in the time-saving state B with 3 second special reserved memories, is calculated as H×110=1500 (ms)×110=165000 (ms). Then, the period value ζ, which is the average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuations are performed in the probability fluctuation state with each fluctuation and the number of second special reserved memories being 3, is calculated as L x 110 = 4400 (ms) x 110 = 484000 (ms). In other words, in this feature part 099SG, as shown in Figure 12-15, the period value δ is greater than the period value ε, and the period value ζ is greater than the period value ε (δ > ε, ζ > ε).

In addition, the average fluctuation time when 1100 fluctuations are performed in the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the probability of a special change state with 3 second special reserved memories is compared. First, as shown in FIG. 12-31 (B), the period value δ', which is the average fluctuation time when 1100 fluctuations are performed in the time-saving state A with 3 second special reserved memories, is calculated as D x 1100 = 5350 (ms) x 1100 = 5885000 (ms). In addition, the period value ε', which is the average fluctuation time when 1100 fluctuations are performed in the time-saving state B with 3 second special reserved memories, is calculated as H x 1100 = 1500 (ms) x 1100 = 1650000 (ms). Then, the period value ζ', which is the average fluctuation time when 1100 fluctuations are performed in the probability fluctuation state with each fluctuation and the number of second special reserved memories being 3, is calculated as L x 1100 = 4400 (ms) x 1100 = 4,840,000 (ms). In other words, in this feature part 099SG, as shown in Figure 12-16, the period value δ' is a value larger than the period value ε', and the period value ζ' is a value larger than the period value ε' (δ' > ε', ζ' > ε').

In addition, the average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuations are performed in the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the probability variable state with 2 second special reserved memories is compared. First, as shown in FIG. 12-32 (A), the period value η, which is the average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuations are performed in the time-saving state A with 2 second special reserved memories, is calculated as C×110=5550 (ms)×110=610500 (ms). In addition, the period value θ, which is the average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuations are performed in the time-saving state B with 2 second special reserved memories, is calculated as G×110=1735 (ms)×110=190850 (ms). Then, the period value ι, which is the average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuations are performed in the probability fluctuation state with each fluctuation and the number of second special reserved memories being 2, is calculated as K x 110 = 4600 (ms) x 110 = 506000 (ms). In other words, in this feature part 099SG, as shown in FIG. 12-17, the period value η is a value greater than the period value θ, and the period value ι is a value greater than the period value θ (η>θ, ι>θ).

In addition, the average fluctuation time when 1100 fluctuations are performed in the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the probability variable state with 2 second special reserved memories is compared. First, as shown in FIG. 12-32 (B), the period value η', which is the average fluctuation time when 1100 fluctuations are performed in the time-saving state A with 2 second special reserved memories, is calculated as C x 1100 = 5550 (ms) x 1100 = 6105000 (ms). In addition, the period value θ', which is the average fluctuation time when 1100 fluctuations are performed in the time-saving state B with 2 second special reserved memories, is calculated as G x 1100 = 1735 (ms) x 1100 = 1908500 (ms). Then, the period value ι', which is the average fluctuation time when 1100 fluctuations are performed in the probability fluctuation state with each fluctuation and the number of second special reserved memories being 2, is calculated as K x 1100 = 4600 (ms) x 1100 = 5,060,000 (ms). In other words, in this feature part 099SG, as shown in Figure 12-18, the period value η' is a value greater than the period value θ', and the period value ι' is a value greater than the period value θ' (η' > θ', ι' > θ').

In addition, the average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuations are performed in the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the probability variable state with one second special reserved memory is compared. First, as shown in FIG. 12-33 (A), the period value κ, which is the average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuations are performed in the time-saving state A with one fluctuation and one second special reserved memory, is calculated as B x 110 = 5750 (ms) x 110 = 632500 (ms). In addition, the period value λ, which is the average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuations are performed in the time-saving state B with one fluctuation and one second special reserved memory, is calculated as F x 110 = 2205 (ms) x 110 = 242550 (ms). Then, the period value μ, which is the average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuations are performed in the probability fluctuation state with each fluctuation and the number of second special reserved memories being 1, is calculated as J x 110 = 5000 (ms) x 110 = 550,000 (ms). In other words, in this feature part 099SF, as shown in FIG. 12-19, the period value κ is greater than the period value λ, and the period value μ is greater than the period value λ (κ>λ, μ>λ).

In addition, the average fluctuation time when 1100 fluctuations are performed in the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the probability variable state with one second special reserved memory is compared. First, as shown in FIG. 12-33 (B), the period value κ', which is the average fluctuation time when 1100 fluctuations are performed in the time-saving state A with one fluctuation and one second special reserved memory, is calculated as B x 1100 = 5750 (ms) x 1100 = 6325000 (ms). In addition, the period value λ', which is the average fluctuation time when 1100 fluctuations are performed in the time-saving state B with one fluctuation and one second special reserved memory, is calculated as F x 1100 = 2205 (ms) x 1100 = 2425500 (ms). Then, the period value μ', which is the average fluctuation time when 1100 fluctuations are performed in the probability fluctuation state with each fluctuation and the number of second special reserved memories being 1, is calculated as J x 1100 = 5000 (ms) x 1100 = 5500000 (ms). In other words, in this feature part 099SF, as shown in FIG. 12-20, the period value κ' is a value larger than the period value λ', and the period value μ' is a value larger than the period value λ' (κ' > λ', μ' > λ').

In addition, the average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuations are performed in the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the probability variable state with 0 second special reserved memories is compared. First, as shown in FIG. 12-34 (A), the period value ν, which is the average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuations are performed in the time-saving state A with 0 second special reserved memories, is calculated as B×110=9150 (ms)×110=1006500 (ms). In addition, the period value ξ, which is the average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuations are performed in the time-saving state B with 0 second special reserved memories, is calculated as E×110=5600 (ms)×110=616000 (ms). Then, the period value π, which is the average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuations are performed in the probability fluctuation state with each fluctuation and the number of second special reserved memories being 0, is calculated as I x 110 = 8200 (ms) x 110 = 902000 (ms). In other words, in this feature part 099SE, as shown in FIG. 12-21, the period value ν is greater than the period value ξ, and the period value π is greater than the period value ξ (ν>ξ, π>ξ).

In addition, the average fluctuation time when 1100 fluctuations are performed in the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the probability of a special bonus state with 0 second special reserved memories is compared. First, as shown in FIG. 12-34 (B), the period value ν', which is the average fluctuation time when 1100 fluctuations are performed in the time-saving state A with 0 second special reserved memories, is calculated as B x 1100 = 9150 (ms) x 1100 = 10,065,000 (ms). In addition, the period value ξ', which is the average fluctuation time when 1100 fluctuations are performed in the time-saving state B with 0 second special reserved memories, is calculated as E x 1100 = 5,600 (ms) x 1100 = 6,160,000 (ms). Then, the period value π', which is the average fluctuation time when 1100 fluctuations are performed in the probability fluctuation state with each fluctuation and the number of second special reserved memories being 0, is calculated as I x 1100 = 8200 (ms) x 1100 = 9020000 (ms). In other words, in this feature part 099SE, as shown in FIG. 12-22, the period value v' is a value greater than the period value ξ', and the period value π' is a value greater than the period value ξ' (v' > ξ', π' > ξ').

In other words, in this feature part 099SG, when comparing the time required for 110 fluctuations in each of the time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and high probability state, as shown in Figure 12-30 (A), the time required for the 110 fluctuations is set to be the shortest in time-saving state B (χ>ψ, ω>ψ). Also, when comparing the time required for 1100 fluctuations in each of the time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and high probability state, as shown in Figure 12-30 (B), the time required for the 1100 fluctuations is also set to be the shortest in time-saving state B (χ'>ψ', ω'>ψ').

When comparing the time required to display 110 changes in the case where 110 changes are performed every time in the time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and the probability change state, and the number of second special reserved memories is 0, as shown in Figure 12-34 (A), the time required to display the 110 changes is set to the shortest in time state B (ν>ξ, π>ξ). When comparing the time required to display 1100 changes in the case where 1100 changes are performed every time in the time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and the probability change state, and the number of second special reserved memories is 0, as shown in Figure 12-34 (B), the time required to display the 1100 changes is set to the shortest in time state B (ν'>ξ', π'>ξ').

When comparing the time required to display 110 changes in the case where 110 changes are performed every time in the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the probability variable state, and the number of second special chart reserved memories is one, as shown in Figure 12-33 (A), the time required to display the 110 changes is set to the shortest in time state B (κ>λ, μ>λ). When comparing the time required to display 1100 changes in the case where 1100 changes are performed every time in the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the probability variable state, and the number of second special chart reserved memories is one, as shown in Figure 12-33 (B), the time required to display the 1100 changes is set to the shortest in time state B (κ'>λ', μ'>λ').

When comparing the time required to display 110 changes in the case where 110 changes are performed every time in the time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and the probability of a special bonus state, and the number of second special reserved memories is two, as shown in Figure 12-32 (A), the time required to display the 110 changes is set to the shortest in time state B (η>θ, ι>θ). When comparing the time required to display 1100 changes in the case where 1100 changes are performed every time in the time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and the probability of a special bonus state, and the number of second special reserved memories is two, as shown in Figure 12-32 (B), the time required to display the 1100 changes is set to the shortest in time state B (η'>θ', ι'>θ').

When comparing the time required to display 110 changes in the case where 110 changes are performed every time in the time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and probability variable state, and the number of second special reserved memories is three, as shown in Figure 12-31 (A), the time required to display the 110 changes is set to the shortest in time state B (δ>ε, ζ>ε). When comparing the time required to display 1100 changes in the case where 1100 changes are performed every time in the time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and probability variable state, and the number of second special reserved memories is three, as shown in Figure 12-31 (B), the time required to display the 1100 changes is set to the shortest in time state B (δ'>ε', ζ'>ε').

In other words, in the time-saving state A, time-saving state B and special probability state in this feature part 099SG, when 110 or 1100 fluctuations are made when the number of second special pattern reserved memories is 0, when 110 or 1100 fluctuations are made when the number of second special pattern reserved memories is 1, when 110 or 1100 fluctuations are made when the number of second special pattern reserved memories is 2, and when 110 or 1100 fluctuations are made when the number of second special pattern reserved memories is 3, time-saving state B is set to have the highest special pattern fluctuation efficiency (the average fluctuation display time required per fluctuation is shortest). In addition, even when the player plays in the time-saving state A, time-saving state B, or the special chance state without worrying about the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol (when the display changes 110 or 1100 times at each reserved memory number at the ratios shown in Figure 12-26 (B), Figure 12-27 (B), and Figure 12-28 (B)), the time-saving state B is set to have the highest special symbol change efficiency (the average display time required for one change is the shortest).

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 with this characteristic part 099SG, in addition to the time-saving state (time-saving state A) and the probability variable state of conventional pachinko gaming machines, it is possible to control the time-saving state B, which has a higher fluctuation efficiency of the special pattern than the time-saving state A and the probability variable state, making it possible to suppress a decrease in the player's motivation to play.

For example, in a conventional pachinko game machine, even if the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times when the jackpot probability is about 1/300, which is about three times the jackpot probability denominator) without being controlled to a jackpot in a low probability state (e.g., normal state (low probability/low base state)) after the jackpot is ended, the machine is not controlled to time-saving state B like the pachinko game machine 1 of this feature part 099SG. Since the player is already stuck at about three times the jackpot probability denominator at this point, the player continues playing without a jackpot for a long time and is making a lot of investment. However, this normal state (low probability/low base state) continues until a jackpot occurs, and further investment is required, which may significantly reduce the player's motivation to play.

On the other hand, in the case of a pachinko game machine 1 of this characteristic part 099SG that can be controlled to the time-saving state B, after the end of the jackpot, if the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (e.g., about 2.5 to 3 times the jackpot probability denominator) without being controlled to a jackpot in the low probability state (e.g., normal state (low probability/low base state)), the machine is controlled to the time-saving state B, and the variable display is controlled to the time-saving state B for a specific number of times (e.g., 1100 times, or up to about 3.8 times the jackpot probability denominator). At this point, the player is already stuck at about three times the jackpot probability, so the player has been playing for a long time without a jackpot, and has invested a lot. However, by being controlled to the time-saving state B, additional investment is suppressed and the possibility of a jackpot occurring increases, so the decrease in motivation to play can be suppressed.

In particular, in feature 099SG, the player has already invested a great deal of time and money when the game state is controlled to time-saving state B, so time-saving state B functions as a game state that rescues the player, so to speak, by executing the variable display of a miss in as short a time as possible to shorten the period until the game state is controlled to a jackpot game state.

In addition, in feature part 099SG, regardless of whether the number of reserved memories is fixed and consumed in any state between 0 and 3, in the case of time-saving state B, the fluctuation efficiency is the highest compared to time-saving state A or the special probability state, and in addition, the execution rate of the various effects (for example, pre-reading preview effects such as countdown preview, reserve change preview, pattern chance preview, effect display preview, and preview effects such as moving object preview, character preview, reach preview, button preview, etc.) described in Figure 11-36 of feature part 069SG (and the drawing showing the feature points related to said Figure 11-36) is lower than the execution rate of the various effects in time-saving state A or the special probability state (the execution rate of the various effects in feature part 099SG is the same as the execution rate of the various effects described in Figure 11-36 of feature part 069SG). Therefore, even if a player continues playing for a long time without hitting a jackpot and is feeling depressed due to increased investment, when controlled to time-saving state B, even if the number of reserved memories is fixed at any state between 0 and 3, or the fluctuation is absorbed at any state between 0 and 3, the fluctuation can be efficiently absorbed with little unnecessary excitement, so that an optimal time-saving state B can be provided.

In addition, in this feature part 099SG, as shown in Fig. 12-15, Fig. 12-17, Fig. 12-19, Fig. 12-21, the average fluctuation time in the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the high probability state is multiplied by 110 to calculate and compare the values. This indicates that the consumption time of 110 fluctuation displays (total time of 110 fluctuation displays) out of the 1100 fluctuation displays in the time-saving state B is shorter than the consumption time of 110 fluctuation displays in the time-saving state A and the high probability state. If the consumption time of 110 fluctuation displays in the time-saving state B is the same (or approximately the same) period as the consumption time of 110 fluctuation displays in the time-saving state A and the high probability state, the consumption time of 1100 fluctuation displays in the time-saving state B will take several times the consumption time of 110 fluctuation displays in the time-saving state B, and it is considered that when the game state is controlled to the time-saving state B, the consumption time will be prolonged, causing discomfort and dissatisfaction to the player. Therefore, the present invention aims to prevent players from feeling dissatisfied when controlled in time-saving state B by increasing the fluctuation efficiency in time-saving state B more than in time-saving state A or the high probability state, and as a result, to provide a pachinko gaming machine 1 that can conveniently control the gaming state to time-saving state B.

Furthermore, in this feature part 099SG, as shown in Fig. 12-16, Fig. 12-18, Fig. 12-20, Fig. 12-22, the average fluctuation time in the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the high probability state are multiplied by 1100 to calculate and compare the values. This is because, by controlling the time-saving state A or the high probability state multiple times, the fluctuation display in the time-saving state A or the high probability state is executed 1100 times, which is the same number as the maximum number of fluctuation display times in the time-saving state B, and by comparing the fluctuation time of 1100 times in the time-saving state A, the fluctuation time of 1100 times in the time-saving state B, and the fluctuation time of 1100 times in the high probability state, it is shown that the time-saving state B has the highest fluctuation efficiency, and it is shown that the fluctuation display can be suitably controlled to the time-saving state B so as not to cause dissatisfaction to the player.

This shows that by controlling the time-saving state A or the high probability state multiple times, when the fluctuation display in the time-saving state A or the high probability state is executed 1,100 times, which is the same number as the maximum number of fluctuation displays in the time-saving state B, the time-saving state B is designed to have the highest fluctuation efficiency, and therefore the time-saving state B has the highest fluctuation efficiency even when compared to the time-saving state A or the high probability state. Therefore, it is possible to avoid dissatisfaction with the fluctuation in the time-saving state B, and as a result, it is preferably controlled to the time-saving state B.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 12-30 (A), the period value ψ obtained by multiplying the period value β, which is the average fluctuation time of a fluctuation of 1 in the time-shortened state B, by 110 is smaller than the period value χ obtained by multiplying the period value α, which is the average fluctuation time of a fluctuation of 1 in the time-shortened state A, by 110, and the period value ψ is set to be smaller than the period value ω obtained by multiplying the period value γ, which is the average fluctuation time of a fluctuation of 1 in the special probability state, by 110. Therefore, since the fluctuation efficiency of the time-shortened state B is higher than the fluctuation efficiency of the time-shortened state A and the special probability state, the period until control is exerted into the jackpot game state can be shortened, thereby reducing the player's dissatisfaction in the time-shortened state B, and as a result, a preferable time-shortened state B can be provided. In particular, in this feature part 099SG, as described above, in the time-saving state B, by increasing the fluctuation efficiency more than in the time-saving state A or the high probability state, the period until the game is controlled to the jackpot game state can be shortened, reducing the player's dissatisfaction, and in the time-saving state A or the high probability state controlled via the jackpot game (the time-saving state A or the high probability state in which a fluctuation display with a longer special chart fluctuation time is more likely to be executed than in the time-saving state B), a predetermined presentation that suggests that the game will be controlled to the jackpot game state during the fluctuation display can be executed for an appropriate period of time.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 12-30 (B), the period value ψ' obtained by multiplying the period value β, which is the average fluctuation time of a fluctuation of 1 in the time-shortened state B, by 1100 is smaller than the period value χ' obtained by multiplying the period value α, which is the average fluctuation time of a fluctuation of 1 in the time-shortened state A, by 1100, and the period value ψ' is set to be smaller than the period value ω' obtained by multiplying the period value γ, which is the average fluctuation time of a fluctuation of 1 in the special probability state, by 1100. Therefore, since the fluctuation efficiency of the time-shortened state B is higher than the fluctuation efficiency of the time-shortened state A and the special probability state, the period until control is exerted into the jackpot game state can be shortened, thereby reducing the player's dissatisfaction in the time-shortened state B, and as a result, a preferable time-shortened state B can be provided. In particular, in this feature part 099SG, as described above, in the time-saving state B, by increasing the fluctuation efficiency more than in the time-saving state A or the high probability state, the period until the game is controlled to the jackpot game state can be shortened, reducing the player's dissatisfaction, and in the time-saving state A or the high probability state controlled via the jackpot game (the time-saving state A or the high probability state in which a fluctuation display with a longer special chart fluctuation time is more likely to be executed than in the time-saving state B), a predetermined presentation that suggests that the game will be controlled to the jackpot game state during the fluctuation display can be executed for an appropriate period of time.

Also, as shown in FIG. 12-21, the period value ξ obtained by multiplying the average change time of the losing change display executed when the number of reserved second special symbols is 0 in the time-saving state B by the number of 110 change displays in the time-saving state B is set to be smaller than the period value ν obtained by multiplying the average change time of the losing change display executed when the number of reserved second special symbols is 0 in the time-saving state A by the number of 110 change displays in the time-saving state B, and the period value ξ is set to be smaller than the period value π obtained by multiplying the average change time of the losing change display executed when the number of reserved second special symbols is 0 in the high probability state by the number of 110 change displays in the time-saving state B. Therefore, the change display in the time-saving state B can progress faster than the time-saving state A and the high probability state, and the interest in playing in the time-saving state B can be improved.

Also, as shown in FIG. 12-22, the period value ξ' obtained by multiplying the average change time of the losing change display executed when the number of reserved second special symbols is 0 in the time-saving state B by the number of 1100 change displays in the time-saving state B is set to be smaller than the period value ν' obtained by multiplying the average change time of the losing change display executed when the number of reserved second special symbols is 0 in the time-saving state A by the number of 1100 change displays in the time-saving state B, and the period value ξ' is set to be smaller than the period value π' obtained by multiplying the average change time of the losing change display executed when the number of reserved second special symbols is 0 in the high probability state by the number of 1100 change displays in the time-saving state B. Therefore, the change display in the time-saving state B can progress faster than the time-saving state A and the high probability state, and the interest in playing in the time-saving state B can be improved.

Also, as shown in FIG. 12-19, the period value λ obtained by multiplying the average change time of the losing change display executed when the number of reserved second special symbols is one in the time-saving state B by the number of 110 change displays in the time-saving state B is set to be smaller than the period value κ obtained by multiplying the average change time of the losing change display executed when the number of reserved second special symbols is one in the time-saving state A by the number of 110 change displays in the time-saving state B, and the period value λ is set to be smaller than the period value μ obtained by multiplying the average change time of the losing change display executed when the number of reserved second special symbols is one in the high probability state by the number of 110 change displays in the time-saving state B. Therefore, the change display in the time-saving state B can progress faster than the time-saving state A and the high probability state, and the interest in playing in the time-saving state B can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 12-20, the period value λ' obtained by multiplying the average change time of the losing change display executed when the number of reserved second special symbols is one in the time-saving state B by the number of 1100 change displays in the time-saving state B is set smaller than the period value κ' obtained by multiplying the average change time of the losing change display executed when the number of reserved second special symbols is one in the time-saving state A by the number of 1100 change displays in the time-saving state B, and the period value λ' is set smaller than the period value μ' obtained by multiplying the average change time of the losing change display executed when the number of reserved second special symbols is one in the high probability state by the number of 1100 change displays in the time-saving state B. Therefore, the change display in the time-saving state B can progress faster than the time-saving state A and the high probability state, and the interest in playing in the time-saving state B can be improved.

Also, as shown in FIG. 12-17, the period value θ obtained by multiplying the average change time of the losing change display executed when the number of reserved second special symbols is two in the time-saving state B by the number of 110 change displays in the time-saving state B is set to be smaller than the period value η obtained by multiplying the average change time of the losing change display executed when the number of reserved second special symbols is two in the time-saving state A by the number of 110 change displays in the time-saving state B, and the period value θ is set to be smaller than the period value ι obtained by multiplying the average change time of the losing change display executed when the number of reserved second special symbols is two in the high probability state by the number of 110 change displays in the time-saving state B. Therefore, the change display in the time-saving state B can progress faster than the time-saving state A and the high probability state, and the interest in playing in the time-saving state B can be improved.

Also, as shown in FIG. 12-18, the period value θ' obtained by multiplying the average change time of the losing change display executed when the number of reserved second special symbols is two in the time-saving state B by the number of 1100 change displays in the time-saving state B is set smaller than the period value η' obtained by multiplying the average change time of the losing change display executed when the number of reserved second special symbols is two in the time-saving state A by the number of 1100 change displays in the time-saving state B, and the period value θ' is set smaller than the period value ι' obtained by multiplying the average change time of the losing change display executed when the number of reserved second special symbols is two in the high probability state by the number of 1100 change displays in the time-saving state B. Therefore, the change display in the time-saving state B can progress faster than the time-saving state A and the high probability state, and the interest in playing in the time-saving state B can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 12-15, the period value ε obtained by multiplying the average change time of the losing change display executed when the number of reserved second special symbols is three in the time-saving state B by the number of 110 change displays in the time-saving state B is set smaller than the period value δ obtained by multiplying the average change time of the losing change display executed when the number of reserved second special symbols is three in the time-saving state A by the number of 110 change displays in the time-saving state B, and the period value ε is set smaller than the period value ζ obtained by multiplying the average change time of the losing change display executed when the number of reserved second special symbols is three in the high probability state by the number of 110 change displays in the time-saving state B. Therefore, the change display in the time-saving state B can progress faster than the time-saving state A and the high probability state, and the interest in playing in the time-saving state B can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 12-16, the period value ε' obtained by multiplying the average change time of the losing change display executed when the number of reserved second special symbols is three in the time-saving state B by the number of 1100 change displays in the time-saving state B is set smaller than the period value δ' obtained by multiplying the average change time of the losing change display executed when the number of reserved second special symbols is three in the time-saving state A by the number of 1100 change displays in the time-saving state B, and the period value ε' is set smaller than the period value ζ' obtained by multiplying the average change time of the losing change display executed when the number of reserved second special symbols is three in the high probability state by the number of 1100 change displays in the time-saving state B. Therefore, the change display in the time-saving state B can progress faster than the time-saving state A and the high probability state, and the interest in playing in the time-saving state B can be improved.

The pachinko game machine 1 in this characteristic part 099SG can display the normal symbol as well as the special symbol, and when the normal symbol display result is a win (normal symbol win), a game ball can enter the second start winning port that has changed from a closed state to an open state. Furthermore, the pachinko game machine 1 has a first special symbol reservation memory part 099SG151A and a second special symbol reservation memory part 099SG151B that can display the first special symbol based on the game ball entering the first start winning port, and can display the second special symbol based on the game ball entering the second start winning port, and can store information on the special symbol display that has not yet been executed as reservation memory. The maximum number of reserved memories is set to four for both the first special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151A and the second special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151B, and the upper limit of the maximum number of reserved memories does not change depending on the game status.

Furthermore, as shown in Fig. 12-2 (B) and Fig. 12-2 (D), the probability of a normal winning pattern occurring in the variable display of the normal pattern is the same whether the game state is time-saving state A or time-saving state B, and the opening time of the second start winning hole when a normal winning pattern occurs is set to 3 seconds, which is the same whether the game state is time-saving state A or time-saving state B, and when the game state is time-saving state A or time-saving state B, the game ball launched by the launching device toward the second path in the right game area can win (enter) the gate 41 or the second start winning hole. Therefore, in the pachinko game machine 1 of this characteristic part 099SG, many of the gameplay characteristics can be made common whether the game state is time-saving state A or time-saving state B, so that it is possible to prevent the player from becoming confused due to the large difference in gameplay between time-saving state A and time-saving state B.

In addition, in this characteristic part 099SG, when the game state is either the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, or the special probability state, the average fluctuation time is calculated as the period from the start timing of the special pattern fluctuation display to the end timing of the fluctuation display when the fluctuation display result is a miss, and each period value is calculated by multiplying the calculated average fluctuation time by "110" or "1100", which is the number of fluctuation displays when the game state is either the special probability state, the time-saving state B, or the special probability state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the average fluctuation time may be calculated as the period from the time when the game ball is shot out or the time when the shot game ball enters the start winning slot to the end timing of the fluctuation display based on the start winning, and each period value may be calculated by multiplying the calculated average fluctuation time by "110" or "1100", which is the number of fluctuation displays when the game state is either the special probability state, the time-saving state B, or the special probability state. By doing this, it is possible to obtain the period value for each game state more appropriately through measurement.

In addition, the upper limit of the number of reserved data (reserved memories) that can be stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151A and the second special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151B is four regardless of the game state, and as shown in Figure 12-13, each period value in the time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and special probability state is calculated by the total value obtained by multiplying the proportion of the variable display executed by each reserved memory number out of 110 variable displays by the average variable time of each reserved memory number, so that an accurate period value can be obtained corresponding to the reserved memory number.

In particular, if the game state is time-saving state A and the period value when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the time-saving state A is α, the period value α is calculated by the value of A×a+B×b+C×c+D×d. Here, A is the average variable time when the variable display result becomes a miss when the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 0 in the time-saving state A, a is the proportion of the variable display when the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 0 in the time-saving state A to the 110 variable displays in the time-saving state A, B is the average variable time when the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 1 in the time-saving state A to the 110 variable displays in the time-saving state A, and b is the proportion of the variable display when the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 1 in the time-saving state A to the 110 variable displays in the time-saving state A. , C is the average change time when the change display result becomes a miss when the number of reserved second special chart memories is two in the time-saving state A, c is the proportion of the change display when the number of reserved second special chart memories is two in the time-saving state A to the 110 change displays in the time-saving state A, D is the average change time when the number of reserved second special chart memories is three in the time-saving state A to the 110 change displays in the time-saving state A, and d is the proportion of the change display when the number of reserved second special chart memories is three in the time-saving state A to the 110 change displays in the time-saving state A. By calculating the period value α in the above manner, it is possible to obtain an accurate period value α of the time-saving state A corresponding to the number of reserved memories.

In addition, if the game state is time-saving state B and the period value when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the time-saving state B is β, the period value β is calculated by the value of E x e + F x f + G x g + H x h. Here, E is the average variable time when the variable display result becomes a miss when the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 0 in the time-saving state B, e is the proportion of the variable display when the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 0 in the time-saving state B to the 110 variable displays in the time-saving state B, F is the average variable time when the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 1 in the time-saving state B to the 110 variable displays in the time-saving state B, and f is the proportion of the variable display when the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 1 in the time-saving state B to the 110 variable displays in the time-saving state B. , G is the average change time when the change display result becomes a miss when the number of reserved second special chart memories is two in the time-saving state B, g is the proportion of the change display when the number of reserved second special chart memories is two in the time-saving state B to the 110 change displays in the time-saving state B, H is the average change time when the number of reserved second special chart memories is three in the time-saving state B to the 110 change displays in the time-saving state B, and h is the proportion of the change display when the number of reserved second special chart memories is three in the time-saving state B to the 110 change displays in the time-saving state B. By calculating the period value β in the above manner, it is possible to obtain an accurate period value β of the time-saving state B corresponding to the number of reserved memories.

In addition, if the game state is a probability variable state and the period value when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the probability variable state is γ, the period value γ is calculated by the value of I×i+J×j+K×k+L×l. Here, I is the average variable time when the variable display result becomes a miss when the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 0 in the probability variable state, i is the proportion of the variable display when the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 0 in the probability variable state to 110 variable displays in the probability variable state, J is the average variable time when the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 1 in the probability variable state to 100, and j is the proportion of the variable display when the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 1 in the probability variable state to 110 variable displays in the probability variable state. , K is the average time when the variable display result becomes a miss when the number of reserved second special chart memories is two in the variable state, k is the proportion of the variable display when the number of reserved second special chart memories is two in the variable state to the 110 variable displays in the variable state, L is the average time when the number of reserved second special chart memories is three in the variable state to the miss, and l is the proportion of the variable display when the number of reserved second special chart memories is three in the variable state to the 110 variable displays in the variable state. By calculating the period value γ in the above manner, it is possible to obtain an accurate period value γ of the variable state corresponding to the number of reserved memories.

In addition, the upper limit of the number of reserved data (reserved memories) that can be stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151A and the second special chart reserved memory unit 099SG151B is four regardless of the game state, and as shown in Figure 12-14, each period value in the time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and special probability state is calculated by the total value obtained by multiplying the proportion of the variable display executed by each reserved memory number out of 1,100 variable displays by the average variable time of each reserved memory number, so that an accurate period value can be obtained corresponding to the reserved memory number.

In particular, if the game state is time-saving state A and the period value when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the time-saving state A is α', the period value α' is calculated by the value of A x a' + B x b' + C x c' + D x d'. Here, A is the average variable time when the variable display result becomes a miss when the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 0 in the time-saving state A, a' is the proportion of the variable display when the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 0 in the time-saving state A to the 1100 variable displays in the time-saving state A, B is the average variable time when the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 1 in the time-saving state A to the 1100 variable displays in the time-saving state A, and b' is the proportion of the variable display when the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 1 in the time-saving state A to the 1100 variable displays in the time-saving state A. , C is the average change time when the change display result becomes a miss when the number of second special pattern reserved memories is two in the time-saving state A, c' is the proportion of the change display when the number of second special pattern reserved memories is two in the time-saving state A to the 1100 change displays in the time-saving state A, D is the average change time when the number of second special pattern reserved memories is three in the time-saving state A to the 1100 change displays in the time-saving state A, and d' is the proportion of the change display when the number of second special pattern reserved memories is three in the time-saving state A to the 1100 change displays in the time-saving state A. By calculating the period value α' in the above manner, it is possible to obtain an accurate period value α' of the time-saving state A corresponding to the number of reserved memories.

In addition, if the game state is time-saving state B and the period value when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the time-saving state B is β', the period value β' is calculated by the value of E x e' + F x f' + G x g' + H x h'. Here, E is the average variable time when the variable display result becomes a miss when the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 0 in the time-saving state B, e' is the proportion of the variable display when the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 0 in the time-saving state B to the 1100 variable displays in the time-saving state B, F is the average variable time when the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 1 in the time-saving state B to the 1100 variable displays in the time-saving state B, and f' is the proportion of the variable display when the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 1 in the time-saving state B to the 1100 variable displays in the time-saving state B. , G is the average change time when the change display result becomes a miss when the number of second special pattern reserved memories is two in the time-saving state B, g' is the proportion of the change display when the number of second special pattern reserved memories is two in the time-saving state B to the 1100 change displays in the time-saving state B, H is the average change time when the number of second special pattern reserved memories is three in the time-saving state B to the 1100 change displays in the time-saving state B, and h' is the proportion of the change display when the number of second special pattern reserved memories is three in the time-saving state B to the 1100 change displays in the time-saving state B. By calculating the period value β' in the above manner, it is possible to obtain an accurate period value β' of the time-saving state B corresponding to the number of reserved memories.

In addition, if the game state is a probability variable state and the period value when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the probability variable state is γ', the period value γ' is calculated by the value of I x i' + J x j' + K x k' + L x l'. Here, I is the average variable time when the variable display result becomes a miss when the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 0 in the probability variable state, i' is the proportion of the variable display when the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 0 in the probability variable state to 1100 variable displays in the probability variable state, J is the average variable time when the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 1 in the probability variable state to become a miss, and j' is the proportion of the variable display when the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 1 in the probability variable state to 1100 variable displays in the probability variable state. , K is the average time when the variable display result becomes a miss when the number of reserved memories of the second special chart is two in the variable state, k' is the proportion of the variable display when the number of reserved memories of the second special chart is two in the variable state of the 1100 variable displays of the variable state, L is the average time when the number of reserved memories of the second special chart is three in the variable state of the 1100 variable displays of the variable state, and l' is the proportion of the variable display when the number of reserved memories of the second special chart is three in the variable state of the 1100 variable displays of the variable state. By calculating the period value γ' in the above manner, it is possible to obtain an accurate period value γ' of the variable state corresponding to the number of reserved memories.

As described above, in the time-saving state A, time-saving state B and special probability state in this feature part 099SG, when 110 or 1100 fluctuations are made when the number of second special pattern reserved memories is 0, when 110 or 1100 fluctuations are made when the number of second special pattern reserved memories is 1, when 110 or 1100 fluctuations are made when the number of second special pattern reserved memories is 2, and when 110 or 1100 fluctuations are made when the number of second special pattern reserved memories is 3, time-saving state B is set to have the highest special pattern fluctuation efficiency (the average fluctuation display time required per fluctuation is shortest). In addition, even when the player plays in the time-saving state A, time-saving state B, or the special chance state without worrying about the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol (when the display changes 110 or 1100 times at each reserved memory number at the ratios shown in Figure 12-26 (B), Figure 12-27 (B), and Figure 12-28 (B)), the time-saving state B is set to have the highest special symbol change efficiency (the average display time required for one change is the shortest).

In addition, in this characteristic part 099SG, the average fluctuation time of 1 fluctuation in the time-saving state A, the average fluctuation time of 1 fluctuation in the time-saving state B, and the average fluctuation time of 1 fluctuation in the high probability state are multiplied by 110 or 1100 to compare the values obtained, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the values multiplied by the average fluctuation time of 1 fluctuation in the time-saving state A, the average fluctuation time of 1 fluctuation in the time-saving state B, and the average fluctuation time of 1 fluctuation in the high probability state may be values other than 110 or 1099, such as 109 or 1099. The reason for multiplying the average fluctuation time of 1 fluctuation in the time-saving state A, the average fluctuation time of 1 fluctuation in the time-saving state B, and the average fluctuation time of 1 fluctuation in the high probability state by 109 or 1099 is that the first fluctuation in the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the high probability state almost always starts with the number of reserved memories at 0. In addition, if the final 5 fluctuations of the 3 states of time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and high probability state, or the 2 states of time-saving state A and high probability state are to be fluctuations with a higher percentage of longer special chart fluctuation times than other fluctuations, the value may be multiplied by 104 or 1094, etc., excluding the total of 6 fluctuations, the first fluctuation and the final 5 fluctuations of each state.

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 018SG)
Next, an embodiment of the characteristic part 018SG will be described based on Fig. 13-1 to Fig. 13-23. Fig. 13-1 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a fluctuation pattern in the characteristic part 018SG. Fig. 13-2 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a fluctuation pattern determination table in a low base state (A), and a specific example of a fluctuation pattern determination table in a high base state (B). Note that in this characteristic part 018SG, illustrations and detailed explanations of the same configuration as the pachinko game machine 1 of the characteristic parts 069SG and 099SG are omitted, and differences are mainly described. In addition, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko game machine 1 of the characteristic part 018SG described below can be applied to the pachinko game machine 1 of the characteristic part 069SG or the characteristic part 099SG.

Figure 13-1 shows the variation patterns in this feature part 018SG. In this embodiment, a plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance for the cases where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is a "non-reach" and a "reach", and for the cases where the variable display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is a "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also called a "non-reach miss variation pattern"), and the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is a "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also called a "reach miss variation pattern"). The non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the miss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss". The variation pattern that corresponds to the variable display result being "jackpot" is called the jackpot variation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach performance is executed, and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a super reach reach performance is executed. In this embodiment, only one type of normal reach fluctuation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and multiple normal reach fluctuation patterns such as normal reach α, normal reach β, ... may be provided, just like the super reach fluctuation pattern, and in this case, the jackpot expectation (jackpot reliability) of each normal reach fluctuation pattern such as normal reach α, normal reach β, ... may be different. In addition, while super reach α and super reach β are provided as super reach fluctuation patterns, the present invention is not limited to this, and the super reach fluctuation pattern may be only one type, just like the normal reach fluctuation pattern.

As shown in FIG. 13-1, the special chart variable display time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the reach performance of the normal reach in this embodiment is executed is set to be shorter than that of the super reach variation pattern. Also, among the super reach variation patterns, the variable display period of the super reach β variation pattern is set to be longer (80 seconds) than that of the super reach α miss variation pattern (45 seconds). On the other hand, the super reach γ miss variation pattern is a miss variation pattern for a high base as described below, so the variable display period is set to be shorter (40 seconds) than that of the super reach α miss variation pattern (45 seconds).

In addition, in this embodiment, as described later, instead of first determining the type of the fluctuation pattern, such as the non-reach type, normal reach type, super reach type, etc., and then determining the fluctuation pattern to be executed from the fluctuation patterns belonging to the determined type, these fluctuation patterns are determined using only the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination without determining these types, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, in addition to the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, a random number value for fluctuation pattern type determination may be provided, and the type of fluctuation pattern may be determined first from these random number values for fluctuation pattern type determination, and then the fluctuation pattern to be executed may be determined from the fluctuation patterns belonging to the determined type.

Figure 13-2 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a method of determining a fluctuation pattern when the game state is normal (low base state). When the variable display result is "jackpot" in the normal state (low base state), the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined from PB1-1 (fluctuation pattern of normal reach jackpot), PB1-2 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach α jackpot), and PB1-3 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach β jackpot) using the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A. In the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A, 97 judgment values are assigned to PB1-1, 600 judgment values are assigned to PB1-2, and 300 judgment values are assigned to PB1-3. In other words, when the game state is low base state and the variable display result is "jackpot", the determination rate increases in the order of normal reach, Super Reach α, and Super Reach β.

On the other hand, if the variable display result is "miss" and the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart is two or less, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A is selected, and the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A is used to determine the fluctuation pattern from PA1-1 (non-reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α miss fluctuation pattern), and PA2-3 (super reach β miss fluctuation pattern). Specifically, in the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A, 600 judgment values are assigned to PA1-1, 300 judgment values are assigned to PA2-1, 90 judgment values are assigned to PA2-2, and 7 judgment values are assigned to PA2-3.

Also, if the variable display result is "miss" and the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart is three, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table B is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined from PA1-2 (shortened fluctuation pattern of non-reach miss), PA2-1 (fluctuation pattern of normal reach miss), PA2-2 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α miss), and PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β miss) using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table B. Specifically, in the miss fluctuation pattern determination table B, 700 judgment values are assigned to PA1-2, 200 judgment values are assigned to PA2-1, 90 judgment values are assigned to PA2-2, and 7 judgment values are assigned to PA2-3.

Figure 13-2 (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a method of determining a fluctuation pattern when the game state is in a time-saving state (high base state). When the variable display result is a "jackpot" in the time-saving state (high base state), the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined from PB1-1 (the fluctuation pattern of a normal reach jackpot) and PB1-4 (the fluctuation pattern of a super reach gamma jackpot) using the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B. In the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B, 197 determination values are assigned to PB1-1, and 800 determination values are assigned to PB1-4. In other words, when the game state is in a high base state and the variable display result is a "jackpot," the determination rate increases in the order of normal reach, followed by super reach gamma.

On the other hand, if the variable display result is "miss", then miss fluctuation pattern determination table D is selected, and using that miss fluctuation pattern determination table D, the fluctuation pattern is determined from PA1-4 (non-reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach miss fluctuation pattern), and PA2-4 (super reach γ miss fluctuation pattern). Specifically, in miss fluctuation pattern determination table D, 800 judgment values are assigned to PA1-4, 100 judgment values are assigned to PA2-1, and 97 judgment values are assigned to PA2-4.

(About the various performances)
Next, various effects executed in the super reach effect will be explained based on Fig. 13-3 to Fig. 13-5. Fig. 13-3 is a diagram showing the execution period of various effects in the jackpot fluctuation patterns of the super reach α, β, and γ. Fig. 13-4 is a diagram showing the execution period of various effects in the miss fluctuation patterns of the super reach α, β, and γ. Fig. 13-5 (A) is a diagram for explaining the contents of various effects, and (B) is a diagram for explaining the character types.

Although not specifically shown, in the variable display of decorative symbols based on the normal reach variation pattern, after starting the variable display, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance executes a normal reach performance (hereinafter abbreviated as "N reach performance") as a variable display performance based on the fact that the variable display mode is set to the normal reach display mode. After that, the CPU 120 ends the variable display of decorative symbols without progressing to a super reach performance (hereinafter abbreviated as "SP reach performance").

On the other hand, as shown in Figures 13-3 and 13-4, in the variable display of decorative symbols based on the Super Reach variable pattern, the decorative symbols are variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C during the period (ta0 to ta1) from the timing ta0 at which the variable display begins until a predetermined period has elapsed (see Figure 13-9 (N1)). Note that, as the light emission patterns of the game effect lamp 9 and the movable body LED 208 during this period (ta0 to ta1), in the low base state, the light emission patterns correspond to multiple types of normal background effects, and in the high base state, the light emission patterns correspond to multiple types of music. By combining the light emission patterns corresponding to the multiple types of normal background effects and the light emission patterns corresponding to the multiple types of music with light emission patterns corresponding to various SP Reach effects, the performance effect can be enhanced by a variety of light emission patterns.

At timing ta1, a predetermined period of time has elapsed since timing ta0 when the variable display started, the variable display mode is changed to the normal reach display mode, and an "N reach effect" is executed as a variable display effect for the predetermined period (ta1 to ta2). After that, at timing ta2, the variable display mode is changed to the super reach display mode, and an "SP reach effect" is executed as a variable display effect for the predetermined period (ta2 to ta5).

In this way, the "N reach performance" is a common performance that is executed in both the normal reach fluctuation pattern and the super reach fluctuation pattern, and in the case of the normal reach fluctuation pattern, it ends without progressing to the "SP reach performance", while in the case of the super reach fluctuation pattern, it progresses to the "SP reach performance". Therefore, even in the case of the normal reach fluctuation pattern, the player can expect the "N reach performance" to progress to the "SP reach performances A to E" described below by executing the "N reach performance".

As shown in Figures 13-3 and 13-4, "SP Reach Effects A to E" are effects that notify whether the variable display result is a "jackpot" or not, that is, whether it is a "jackpot" or a "miss", and during the SP Reach effect period, a "decisive effect" described later is executed for a predetermined period (ta3 to ta4). Then, as shown in Figure 13-3, if the variable display result is a jackpot, after the end of "SP Reach Effects A to E", a "post-effect" described later is executed for a predetermined period (ta5 to ta7), and then the variable display ends. In this way, the variable display based on the super reach variation pattern of SP Reach α, β, and γ is composed of a variable display part (ta0 to ta5) that executes the variable display of the decorative pattern, and a post-effect part (ta5 to ta7) that notifies the expected number of balls that can be won in the jackpot game state after the variable display part ends.

As shown in FIG. 13-4, if the variable display result is a miss, the variable display ends with the end of "SP Reach Effects A to E". After the miss notification ends (ta5 to ta5A), the screen returns to the normal background screen with the fixed decorative pattern of the specified reach combination that is not a jackpot combination temporarily stopped (shaking) and temporarily stopped until the pattern confirmation period begins.

Next, we will explain the various effects executed in the super reach fluctuation pattern. As shown in Figure 13-5 (A), when the fluctuation pattern is the super reach α fluctuation pattern, "SP reach effect A" is executed as the SP reach effect, when the fluctuation pattern is the super reach β fluctuation pattern, "SP reach effect B" or "SP reach effect C" is executed as the SP reach effect, and when the fluctuation pattern is the super reach α fluctuation pattern, "SP reach effect D" or "SP reach effect E" is executed as the SP reach effect.

Also, as shown in FIG. 13-5 (B), in "SP reach performances B to E" other than "SP reach performance A", ally character A-1, ally character A-2 different from ally character A-1, enemy character X-1, and enemy character X-2 different from enemy character X-1 can appear. Note that the number of types of ally characters and enemy characters is not limited to the above, and ally characters and enemy characters other than those described above may also be allowed to appear. Also, even for the same character, the expectation level may differ depending on the display mode.

"SP Reach Presentation A" is executed when the SP Reach α fluctuation pattern is determined while the game state is normal (low base state), and is a presentation in which a video of a bowling challenge is displayed. When all the pins fall, a "jackpot" is announced, and when all the pins do not fall, a "miss" is announced. Note that the friendly characters A-1 and A-2 and the enemy characters X-1 and X-2 are not displayed in the bowling challenge video.

"SP Reach Presentation B" is executable when the SP Reach β fluctuation pattern is determined while the game state is normal (low base state), and is a presentation in which a moving image of "Battle A" in which ally character A-1 and enemy character X-1 face off in the city is displayed. When ally character A-1 defeats enemy character X-1 and wins, a "jackpot" is announced, and when ally character A-1 fails to defeat enemy character X-1 and is defeated, a "miss" is announced.

"SP Reach Presentation C" is executable when the SP Reach β fluctuation pattern is determined while the game state is normal (low base state), and is a presentation in which a moving image of "Battle A" in which ally character A-2 and enemy character X-2 face off in the city is displayed. When ally character A-2 defeats enemy character X-2 and wins, a "jackpot" is announced, and when ally character A-2 fails to defeat enemy character X-2 and is defeated, a "miss" is announced.

"SP Reach Presentation D" is executable when the SP Reach γ fluctuation pattern is determined while the game state is either Time-saving State A, High-variable State, or Time-saving State B (high base state), and is a presentation in which a moving image of "Battle B" in which ally character A-1 and enemy character X-1 face off in the wilderness is displayed. When ally character A-1 defeats enemy character X-1 and wins, a "jackpot" is announced, and when ally character A-1 fails to defeat enemy character X-1 and is defeated, a "miss" is announced.

"SP Reach E" is executable when the SP Reach γ fluctuation pattern is determined while the game state is in either the time-saving state A, the probability change state, or the time-saving state B (high base state), and is an effect that displays a moving image of "Battle B" in which ally character A-1 and enemy character X-2 face off in the wilderness. When ally character A-1 defeats enemy character X-2 and wins, a "jackpot" is announced, and when ally character A-1 fails to defeat enemy character X-2 and is defeated, a "miss" is announced.

In addition, since the Super Reach β fluctuation pattern has a higher chance of winning than the Super Reach α fluctuation pattern, the SP Reach performance B and SP Reach performance C have a higher chance of winning than SP Reach performance A (jackpot chance: SP Reach performance A < SP Reach performance B < SP Reach performance C).

The "decisive effect" is an effect that is executed for a predetermined period of time (e.g., ta3 to ta5) from the timing when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the SP reach effects A to E (e.g., timing ta3 when the final bowling or battle showdown begins just before the end of the SP reach effect). Specifically, it includes a "win/lose button effect" that encourages the player to operate the push button 31B during the effective operation period when operation of the push button 31B is effectively detected, and a "movable body effect" that is executed when operation of the push button 31B is detected during the effective operation period, or when the effective operation period ends without operation of the push button 31B being detected.

The "movable body effect" is executed only when the variable display result is a jackpot, and is an effect in which the movable body 32 falls from the origin position to the effect position when the operation of the push button 31B is detected during the valid operation period, or when the valid operation period ends without the operation of the push button 31B being detected. If the variable display result is a miss, it is not executed when the operation of the push button 31B is detected during the valid operation period, or when the valid operation period ends without the operation of the push button 31B being detected.

In addition, in response to the execution of the movable body effect (the fall of the movable body 32), an effect image related to the movement of the movable body 32 is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5, and a light effect is performed in which the movable body LED 208 and the game effect lamp 9 are illuminated in a predetermined light color (for example, in rainbow colors), a vibration effect is performed in which the vibration motor 61 is driven for a predetermined period of time (for example, about 10 seconds) to vibrate the push button 31B, and a sound effect is performed in which a predetermined sound effect is output.

In addition, in SP Reach performance A, friendly characters and enemy characters are not displayed in the bowling showdown, so no characters are displayed in the moving body performance, whereas in SP Reach performances B to E, friendly characters and enemy characters are displayed in the battle showdown, so the enemy characters displayed in the battle showdown are displayed in the moving body performance.

In this way, in the "decisive effect," if the variable display result is a jackpot, the hit/lose button effect is performed, and then the movable body effect is executed to notify the jackpot, and if the variable display result is a miss, the hit/lose button effect is performed, and then the miss effect is not executed, but instead the movable body effect is executed.

"Post-performance A" is executed after the SP reach performances A to C notify that the game state will be controlled to the jackpot game state when the variable display result is a jackpot in the normal game state (low base state). Specifically, in the SP reach performances A to C, the determined decorative symbols that are predetermined jackpot combinations are temporarily stopped and displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R to notify the determined jackpot, and then the determined decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are displayed again in a re-selection variable part (ta5 to ta6), and the display result is notified by the determined decorative symbols being stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R after the re-variable display is executed in the re-selection variable part (ta6 to ta7). The execution period (ta5 to ta7) of the post-performance A is set to "10 seconds".

In this embodiment, in the SP reach performances A to C, a fixed decorative pattern consisting of a combination of even numbers (for example, 666) is temporarily displayed, and after the re-variable display begins in the re-draw variable part, a fixed decorative pattern consisting of a combination of even numbers or a fixed decorative pattern consisting of a combination of odd numbers is displayed in the re-draw result part. If a fixed decorative pattern consisting of a combination of even numbers is displayed in the re-draw result part, it is announced that there is a "jackpot A" that will be controlled to the time-saving state A after the jackpot game state ends, and if a fixed decorative pattern consisting of a combination of odd numbers is displayed (pattern upgrade), it is announced that there is a "jackpot B" that will be controlled to the probability variable state after the jackpot game state ends.

In addition, in the post-performance A of SP reach performance A, since no characters appear in SP reach performance A, no characters appear in post-performance A either. In addition, in the post-performance A of SP reach performances B and C, characters appear in SP reach performances B and C, but no characters appear in post-performance A. By doing this, even when an SP reach performance A in which no characters appear is executed, the post-performance A is executed in a manner in which no characters appear, thereby enhancing the effect of the performance.

"Post-performance B" is executed after it is notified that the game state will be controlled to the jackpot game state in the SP reach performances D and E when the variable display result is a jackpot in the time-saving state A, the probability change state, or the time-saving state B (high base state). Specifically, in the SP reach performances D and E, the fixed decorative symbols that are predetermined jackpot combinations are temporarily displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R to notify the confirmed jackpot, and then the planned ball output addition part (ta5 to ta6) in which the number of planned balls is added and displayed as the ally character that appeared in the SP reach performances D and E attacks the enemy character, and the planned ball output notification part (ta6 to ta7) in which the planned ball output number is displayed and notified after the ally character delivers a final blow to the enemy character, and then the fixed decorative symbols that are the jackpot combination are displayed and notified, and the variable display ends. Furthermore, the execution period of post-performance B (ta5 to ta7) is set to 15 seconds, which is longer than the execution period of post-performance A.

Also, as shown in Figures 13-3 and 13-4, the variable display part period ta0 to ta5 (ta5A) in SP reach α is 45 seconds, the variable display part period ta0 to ta5 (ta5A) in SP reach β is 80 seconds, and the variable display part period ta0 to ta5 (ta5A) in SP reach γ is 40 seconds. In other words, the variable display part periods are shorter in the order of SP reach β, SP reach α, and SP reach γ (variable display part period ta0 to ta5 (ta5A); SP reach β > SP reach α > SP reach γ).

In addition, the period (ta0 to ta1) from when the variable display starts to when N reach occurs is different for SP Reach α, β, and γ, and the period (ta0 to ta1) from when the variable display starts to when N reach occurs for SP Reach γ is shorter than the period (ta0 to ta1) from when the variable display starts to when N reach occurs for SP Reach α and β (ta0 to ta1; SP Reach γ < SP Reach α, β).

In addition, the execution period (ta1 to ta2) of the N reach performance in SP Reach α, β, and γ is different, and the execution period (ta1 to ta2) of the N reach performance in SP Reach γ is shorter than the execution period (ta1 to ta2) of the N reach performance in SP Reach α and β (ta1 to ta2; SP Reach γ < SP Reach α, β).

In addition, the execution periods (ta2 to ta5) of SP reach effects A to E in SP Reach α, β, and γ are different, with the execution periods being longer in the order of SP reach γ (SP reach effects D, E), SP reach α (SP reach effect A), and SP reach β (SP reach effects B, C) {ta2 to ta5; SP reach γ (SP reach effect D, E) < SP reach α (SP reach effect A) < SP reach β (SP reach effect B, C)}.

In addition, the variable display part period of SP Reach γ (40 seconds) is shorter than the variable display part period of SP Reach α (45 seconds) and the variable display part period of SP Reach β (80 seconds) (variable display period; SP Reach β > SP Reach α > SP Reach γ), while in SP Reach γ (SP Reach performances D and E), after the final performance ends, the fixed decoration patterns that are the predetermined jackpot combinations are displayed in each decoration pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R. The execution period (ta5 to ta7) of the post-event performance B until the winning combination is reached is longer than the execution period (ta5 to ta7) of the post-event performance A from the end of the deciding performance in SP reach α (SP reach performance A) and SP reach β (SP reach performance B, C) until the fixed decorative patterns that are the predetermined winning combination are stopped and displayed in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R (ta5 to ta7; SP reach γ (15 seconds) > SP reach α, β (10 seconds)).

In addition, the execution period (ta3 to ta5) of the "decisive performance" in SP reach performances A to E is common to SP reach performances A to E (ta3 to ta5; SP reach performance A = SP reach performance B = SP reach performance C = SP reach performance D = SP reach performance E). Therefore, the control data of the movable body 32, movable body LED 208, etc. in SP reach performances A to E can be common, which reduces manufacturing costs. Furthermore, the execution period of the "win/lose button performance" in the "decisive performance" and the execution period of the "movable body performance" are also common to SP reach performances A to E.

The execution period of "Post-performance A, B" in SP Reach α, β, γ is the variable display period (ta0 to ta7) from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbols, from timing ta5 when the fixed decorative symbols that are the predetermined jackpot combination are temporarily displayed in the jackpot confirmation notification of SP Reach performances A to E, to timing ta7 when the fixed decorative symbols that are the predetermined jackpot combination are stopped (the variable display ends) (ta5 to ta7). This makes it easier to recognize the timing when the post-performance is executed, and an example of a form that can increase attention to post-performance A and B is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and "Post-performance A, B" may be executed during the pattern determination period that begins after the fixed decorative symbols that are the predetermined jackpot combination are stopped and displayed, or during the jackpot fanfare period.

The variable display period of the SP Reach γ for a high base is shorter than that of the SP Reach β for a low base (ta0 to ta7: SP Reach γ < SP Reach β), and the period (ta4 to ta7) from the timing ta4 when the "movable body performance" ends in the SP Reach γ to the timing ta7 when the fixed decorative pattern that is the predetermined jackpot combination is stopped and displayed is longer than the period (ta4 to ta7) from the timing ta4 when the "movable body performance" ends in the SP Reach β to the timing ta7 when the fixed decorative pattern that is the predetermined jackpot combination is stopped and displayed (ta4 to ta7; SP Reach γ > SP Reach β). In this way, in the SP Reach γ that is executed in a short variable display period, the impression of the variable display can be enhanced by lengthening the period after the end of the "movable body performance".

In addition, the execution periods (ta5-ta7) of the "post-performance A" corresponding to each of the SP reach performances A to C are all the same, and the execution periods (ta5-ta7) of the "post-performance B" corresponding to each of the SP reach performances D and E are all the same. By doing this, it is easier to reuse the control data for post-performances A and B, and especially the character movement control data for post-performance B, which helps reduce manufacturing costs.

In addition, the execution period (ta5 to ta7) of the "post-performance A" corresponding to each of the SP reach performances A to C is all the same, and the execution period (ta5 to ta7) of the "post-performance B" corresponding to each of the SP reach performances D and E is all the same, but the execution period of "post-performance A" (10 seconds) is different from the execution period of "post-performance B" (15 seconds). By making the execution period of post-performance A corresponding to each of the SP reach performances A to C common, it is easier to standardize the performance content and control, which reduces manufacturing costs, and by executing post-performance B, which has a different execution period, it is possible to prevent post-performances A and B from becoming monotonous, thereby enhancing the performance effect of the post-performances.

(SP Reach Effects A to E and Post Effects A and B Operation Modes)
Next, the operation of the SP reach performances A to E and the post-performances A and B when the variable display result is a jackpot will be explained with reference to Fig. 13-6. Fig. 13-6 shows (A) the display mode of the characters in the SP reach performances A to E, (B) the lighting patterns of the LEDs in the SP reach performances A to E, and (C) the output patterns of the background music and sound effects in the SP reach performances A to E.

As shown in FIG. 13-6 (A), the display mode of characters in SP reach performances A to E will be explained. During the execution period (ta2 to ta3) of the bowling competition or battle competition in the SP reach performance, no characters are displayed in SP reach performance A, ally character A-1 and enemy character X-1 are displayed in SP reach performance B, ally character A-2 and enemy character X-2 are displayed in SP reach performance C, ally character A-1 and enemy character X-1 are displayed in SP reach performance D, and ally character A-1 and enemy character X-1 are displayed in SP reach performance E. In this way, SP reach performance A is a performance in which no characters are displayed, whereas SP reach performances B to E are performances in which characters are displayed.

In addition, during the execution period of the "win/lose button effect" of the deciding effect in the SP reach effect, no characters are displayed in any of the SP reach effects A to E, while during the execution period of the "moving body effect", no characters are displayed in SP reach effect A, the enemy character X-1 that was displayed in the battle showdown is displayed in SP reach effect B, the enemy character X-2 that was displayed in the battle showdown is displayed in SP reach effect C, the enemy character X-1 that was displayed in the battle showdown is displayed in SP reach effect D, and the enemy character X-2 that was displayed in the battle showdown is displayed in SP reach effect E.

In addition, during the execution period (ta4 to ta5) of the jackpot confirmation notification in the SP reach performance, no characters are displayed in SP reach performance A, ally character A-1 and enemy character X-1 are displayed in SP reach performance B, ally character A-2 and enemy character X-2 are displayed in SP reach performance C, ally character A-1 and enemy character X-1 are displayed in SP reach performance D, and ally character A-1 and enemy character X-1 are displayed in SP reach performance E.

In addition, in the re-drawing variable part (ta5-ta6) and the re-drawing result part (ta6-ta7) in the post-performance A corresponding to the SP reach performances A-C, in the SP reach performance A, no characters are displayed, in the SP reach performance B, the ally character A-1 and the enemy character X-1 are not displayed, and in the SP reach performance C, the ally character A-2 and the enemy character X-2 are not displayed.

In addition, in the planned ball output addition part (ta5-ta6) and the planned ball output notification part (ta6-ta7) in the post-performance B corresponding to the SP reach performances D and E, the ally character A-1 and the enemy character X-1 are displayed in the SP reach performance D, and the ally character A-1 and the enemy character X-2 are displayed in the SP reach performance E.

In this way, in SP Reach Performance A, no characters are displayed in the bowling showdown, so no characters are displayed in the moving body performance or post-performance A, whereas in SP Reach Performances B to E, enemy characters who face off against friendly characters in the battle showdown are displayed in the moving body performance and post-performances A and B.

In other words, in SP reach performance A, an image related to the bowling competition (an image in which no character is displayed) is displayed in the moving body performance before the jackpot confirmation notification is made, and in SP reach performances B to E, an image related to the battle competition (an image of the enemy character being faced off against) is displayed in the moving body performance before the jackpot confirmation notification is made, thereby enhancing the correlation between SP reach performances A to E and the moving body performances executed during the performance period of the SP reach performances A to E.

In addition, in SP reach performance A, an image of a mode related to SP reach performance A (an image in which characters are not displayed) is displayed in post-performance A, and in SP reach performances D and E, an image of a mode related to SP reach performances D and E (images of the friendly character and enemy character that were facing off) is displayed in post-performance B, thereby enhancing the correlation between SP reach performances A, D, and E and post-performances A and B which are executed after the end of SP reach performances A, D, and E.

Next, as shown in Figure 13-6 (B), the light emission patterns of the movable body LED 208 and frame LEDs 9L1-9L12, 9R1-9R12 in SP reach performances A-E will be explained. The numbers in parentheses for each pattern (e.g. B100, etc.) indicate the extended commands explained in feature section 069SG. Furthermore, the various light emission patterns explained below differ from the other light emission patterns in at least one of multiple elements, such as light color, brightness, lighting timing, lighting duration, lighting timing, lighting duration, blinking cycle, etc., and each light emission pattern can be modified in various ways.

During the execution period (ta2 to ta3) of the bowling showdown or battle showdown in the SP reach performance, in SP reach performance A, lighting is performed in lighting pattern LP1-1 based on extension command B100, in SP reach performance B and C, lighting is performed in lighting pattern LP1-2 based on extension command B101, and in SP reach performance D and E, lighting is performed in lighting pattern LP1-3 based on extension command B102.

In addition, during the execution period of the "win/lose button effect" in the SP reach effect, one of the light emission patterns LP2-1 to LP2-4 common to the SP reach effects A to E is lit based on the extended commands B200 to B203. Note that one of the light emission patterns LP2-2 to LP2-4 is selected based on the variable display result, with the expected results increasing in the order of light emission patterns LP2-2, LP2-3, and LP2-4.

In addition, during the execution period of the "movable body performance" and "jackpot notification" in the SP reach performance, the SP reach performances A to E are lit up with the common lighting pattern LP3-1 based on the extension command B000.In addition, during the execution period of the "miss notification" in the SP reach performance, the SP reach performances A to E are lit up with the common lighting pattern LP3-1 based on the extension command B300.

In addition, in the re-drawing variation part in post-performance A and the planned ball addition part in post-performance B (ta5 to ta6), in SP reach performances A to C, the lights are lit with the common lighting pattern LP4-1 based on the extension command BA00, and in SP reach performances D and E, the lights are lit with the common lighting pattern LP4-4 based on the extension command BB00.

In addition, in the re-draw result part in post-performance A and the planned ball release notification part in post-performance B (ta6 to ta7), in SP reach performances A to C, the lights are lit in the common lighting pattern LP4-2 based on the extension command BA01, or the common lighting pattern LP4-3 based on the extension command BA02, and in SP reach performances D and E, the lights are lit in the common lighting pattern LP4-5 based on the extension command BB01, or the common lighting pattern LP4-6 based on the extension command BB02.

The above-mentioned light emission patterns LP1-1 to 3, LP2-1 to 4, LP3-1 to 2, and LP4-1 to 6 are patterns that emit light in different light emission modes based on the light emission control data described below, and an overview of each light emission pattern is given below. Note that the parentheses corresponding to each light emission pattern indicate the extended commands.

As shown in FIG. 13-7(A), in the "Bowling/Battle" game, the illumination pattern LP1-1 (B100) is a pattern in which the frame LEDs (frame LEDs 9L1-9L12, 9R1-9R12) and the LEDs on the game board (movable body LED 208) illuminate in accordance with the introduction of the reach title and the moving image of the bowling battle (see FIG. 13-10). The illumination pattern LP1-2 (B101) is a pattern in which the frame LEDs and the LEDs on the game board illuminate in colors based on the colors of the town background when the reach title is introduced, and further in accordance with the colors of the allies A-1/A-2 , the frame LED and the LEDs on the game board light up in accordance with the actions (attack moves, etc.) of enemies X-1/X-2 (see Figs. 13-11 (A2) and (A3)), and lighting pattern LP1-3 (B102) is a pattern in which the frame LED and the LEDs on the game board light up in colors based on the title introduction and the colors of the wilderness background, and further the frame LED and the LEDs on the game board light up in accordance with the actions (attack moves, etc.) of ally A-1 and enemies X-1/X-2 (see Figs. 13-12 (A4) and (A5)).

In the "Win/lose button presentation," lighting pattern LP2-1 (B200) is a pattern in which the frame LED and the LEDs on the game board light up in accordance with the message "Keep pressing the button to build up power!", and then the frame LED and the LEDs on the game board light up in the default white color (see Figure 13-13), lighting pattern LP2-2 (B201) is for powering up when the button is pressed (first stage), and the frame LED and the LEDs on the game board light up in "blue" (see Figure 13-13), lighting pattern LP2-3 (B202) is for powering up when the button is pressed (second stage), and the frame LED and the LEDs on the game board light up in "green" (see Figure 13-13), and lighting pattern LP2-4 (B203) is for powering up when the button is pressed (third stage), and the frame LED and the LEDs on the game board light up in "red" (see Figure 13-13). The light emission patterns LP2-2 to LP2-4 change in stages from blue to green to red (MAX) depending on the player's long press operation (the amount of fill in the gauge display).

In the "Miss Notification" mode, the light-emitting pattern LP3-1 (B300) is a pattern in which the frame LED and the LEDs on the game board emit a low-luminance white light when a "Miss" is notified in the result notification, and continues until the next variation starts even after the display screen returns to the normal background (see Figure 13-16).

In the "movable body presentation & jackpot notification", the light-emitting pattern LP3-2 (B000) is a pattern in which, when a "jackpot" is notified in the result notification, in the movable body presentation (first period), the frame LED and the LED on the game board light up in a color that matches the background during the movable body presentation, and in the movable body presentation (second period), the frame LED and the LED on the game board light up in a rainbow color during the jackpot notification (see Figures 13-14 and 13-15). Note that the extended command (B000), unlike other extended commands, has both operation control data (setting the number of steps, speed, and time related to motor drive) for operating the movable body 32 and gradation control data for lighting the frame LED and the LED on the game board.

In addition, by making the extension command B000 a common extension command for movable body operation control and LED lighting control, it is not necessary to separate the extension commands for movable body operation control and the extension commands for LED lighting control, which reduces the program capacity for performance control. If the extension commands used for movable body performance were separated into extension commands for movable body operation control and extension commands for LED lighting control, there is a risk that one of the extension commands will be missed due to a malfunction, but by sharing them, it is possible to perform movable body performances optimally.

In addition, by controlling the movement of the moving body and the lighting of the LEDs with a single extended command rather than separating the extended commands for "moving body performance" and "jackpot notification", it is no longer necessary to separate the extended commands according to the performance, and the program capacity for performance control can be reduced. If the extended commands for "moving body performance" and "jackpot notification" were separate, there would be a risk that one of the extended commands would be missed due to a malfunction, but by sharing them, it is possible to optimally perform "moving body performance" and "jackpot notification".

In "redraw variation/planned ball addition," lighting pattern LP4-1 (BA00) is a pattern in which the frame LED and the LEDs on the game board light up in accordance with the moving image in the background (round and round) (see Figure 13-17 (F1)), and lighting pattern LP4-4 (BB00) is a pattern in which the frame LED and the KED on the game board light up in a color based on the color of the space background, and the frame LED and the LEDs on the game board light up in accordance with the actions of ally A-1 (such as an attacking move) (see Figure 13-18).

In the "Redraw Result/Scheduled Ball Release Notification", the light-emitting pattern LP4-2 (BA01) is a pattern in which the frame LED and the LEDs on the game board light up when an even number symbol combination (e.g., 666, etc.) is displayed (see FIG. 13-17 (F2)), the light-emitting pattern LP4-3 (BA02) is a pattern in which the frame LED and the LEDs on the game board light up with a higher brightness and a faster gradation cycle than the light-emitting pattern LP4-2 when an odd number symbol combination (e.g., 333, etc.) is displayed (see FIG. 13-17 (F3)), and the light-emitting pattern LP4-5 (BB01) is for the scheduled ball release notification "750", The frame LED and LEDs on the game board light up in accordance with the display of "750", and until "750" is displayed, this is a pattern in which the same gradation control data as "1500" is used (see Figure 13-19 (G1-3) to (G3)). The light-emitting pattern LP4-6 (BB02) is for the expected ball release notification "1500", and the frame LED and LEDs on the game board light up in accordance with the display of "1500" with a higher brightness and a faster gradation cycle than when "750" is displayed, and until "1500" is displayed, this is a pattern in which the same gradation control data as "750" is used (see Figure 13-19 (G1-4) to (G4)).

In addition, during the execution of SP reach performances A to E, in the later period after the movable body performance, it is possible to execute a jackpot confirmation notification as a later period performance, and in the jackpot confirmation notification, the light emission pattern of the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12 and the movable body LED 208 is common (for example, light emission pattern LP3-2) regardless of the type of SP reach performances A to E, so that the jackpot confirmation notification is executed with a common light emission pattern regardless of the type of SP reach performances A to E, further reducing manufacturing costs.

The light emission pattern may be different depending on the type of SP reach performance A to E. For example, the light emission pattern LP3-1 corresponding to the jackpot confirmation notification of SP reach performance A may be the rainbow lighting pattern (smooth rainbow lighting) shown in FIG. 13-21, the light emission pattern LP3-2 corresponding to the jackpot confirmation notification of SP reach performance B and C may be the rainbow blinking pattern (flash rainbow lighting) shown in FIG. 13-22, and the light emission pattern LP3-3 corresponding to the jackpot confirmation notification of SP reach performance D and E may change from the rainbow blinking pattern (flash rainbow lighting) shown in FIG. 13-22 to the rainbow lighting pattern (smooth rainbow lighting) shown in FIG. 13-21.

In addition, the lighting patterns of the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1-9L12 and 9R1-9R12 in the planned ball output addition part of post-performance B are common to SP reach performance D and SP reach performance E (lighting pattern LP4-4), so the lighting patterns can also be standardized, further reducing manufacturing costs.

In addition, the light emission patterns (light emission patterns LP4-5, LP4-6) of the movable body LED 208 and frame LEDs 9L1-9L12, 9R1-9R12 in the planned ball release notification part of post-performance B corresponding to SP reach performance D and SP reach performance E are the same, while the light emission patterns (light emission patterns LP4-2, LP4-3) of the movable body LED 208 and frame LEDs 9L1-9L12, 9R1-9R12 in post-performance A corresponding to SP reach performance A are different from the light emission patterns (light emission patterns LP4-5, LP4-6) of the movable body LED 208 and frame LEDs 9L1-9L12, 9R1-9R12 in post-performance B corresponding to SP reach performance D and SP reach performance E. This further reduces manufacturing costs, and by executing post-performance A with a different light emission pattern, the performance effect of the post-performance can be enhanced.

In this embodiment, the illumination pattern during the execution period of the movable body effect is the same illumination pattern LP3-2 even when the "movable body effect" is executed at any timing when the operation of the push button 31B is detected during the effective operation period in which the "win/lose button effect" is executed, or when the effective operation period ends without the operation of the push button 31B being detected. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12 may be made to illuminate in different illumination patterns depending on the timing when the operation of the push button 31B is detected during the effective operation period in which the "win/lose button effect" is executed. In this way, the illumination state can be changed depending on the timing of the player's operation, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

As shown in FIG. 13-6 (B), the LED lighting pattern in the SP reach performance is shared between SP reach performances B and C, with lighting pattern LP1-2 being used in common. For example, SP reach performance B uses lighting pattern LP1-2-1 (B200: city background color + image color of enemy character X-1, lights up in accordance with the action) and SP reach C uses lighting pattern LP1-2-2 (B200: city background color + image color of enemy character X-2, lights up in accordance with the action). By using the same brightness data for part of the LED lighting pattern (city background color part) for SP reach performances B and C to reduce development costs, while using dedicated brightness data for the parts relating to enemy characters X-1 and X-2, it is possible to create a difference in appearance at a minimum cost.

SP Reach performances D and E share the same lighting pattern LP1-3, but for example, SP Reach performance D uses lighting pattern LP1-3-1 (B300: wilderness background color + enemy character X-1's image color, lights up in accordance with the action) and SP Reach E uses lighting pattern LP1-3-2 (B300: wilderness background color + enemy character X-2's image color, lights up in accordance with the action). By using the same brightness data for part of the LED lighting patterns for SP Reach performances D and E (town background color part) to keep development costs down, while using dedicated brightness data for the parts related to enemy characters X-1 and X-2, it is possible to create a difference in appearance at the lowest possible cost.

In addition, one of the SP reach performances B and C in the low base state and the SP reach performances D and E in the high base state (for example, SP reach performances D and E) may be a common lighting pattern, and the other (for example, SP reach performances B and C) may be a different lighting pattern. By doing this, it is possible to reduce the manufacturing costs of one while favorably showing the difference in the performances in the other.

(Gradation control data)
Here, we will briefly explain the control data for realizing the light emission performance. Figure 13-21 is a diagram for explaining a data table for lighting the frame LED in a lighting pattern of smooth rainbow light emission. Figure 13-22 is a diagram for explaining a data table for lighting the frame LED in a lighting pattern of flash rainbow light emission.

As shown in FIG. 13-21, the "RGB" data output to each LED in the frame LED is sparsely specified with various brightness data corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) at 40 msec intervals. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on a data table for smooth rainbow light emission, causing the frame lamps to light up smoothly in the colors of the rainbow.

As shown in FIG. 13-22, the "RGB" data output to each LED included in the frame LED is specified as brightness data corresponding to a 20 msec off period between various brightness data corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) at 30 msec intervals. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on a data table of flash rainbow light emission, causing the frame lamps to light up intensely in rainbow colors.

The ROM 121 of the performance control board 12 stores a light emission control table that the performance control CPU 120 uses to control the light emission of each LED. The light emission control table defines, for example, the correspondence between light emission patterns (light emission patterns LP1-1 to 2, LP2-1, LP3-1 to 3, LP4-1 to 4, etc.), driver IDs, output terminal numbers, electrical components, and light emission control generation data.

For example, the driver ID associated with the light emission pattern stores an ID as identification information for identifying the light emitter driver, the output terminal number stores the number of the light emitter driver output terminal, the electrical component stores the light emitter driver and the electrical component corresponding to the output terminal number (e.g., frame LEDs 9L1-9L12, 9R1-9R12, movable body LED 208, etc.), and the light emission control generation data stores data for controlling a serial-parallel conversion circuit applied to the light emitter driver, and data used to generate light emission control data based on a control data format.

Each light emission control generation data includes, for example, a data name, a format type, an address, a data transmission period, a unit light emission time, a light emission control period, and format data. For example, the data name stores the data name of the format generation data corresponding to the light emission pattern of the light emission control table, the format type stores identification information ("basic" or "extended") indicating which format is to be applied between the basic format (EX = 0) and the extended format (EX = 1), the address stores an address to be set in the serial-parallel conversion circuit to be applied to the light emitter driver, the data transmission period stores the period for transmitting light emission control data from the performance control board 12 to the light emitter driver of the lamp board 14, and the unit light emission time stores the unit time for causing the LED 9 corresponding to the light emitter driver to emit light. In this embodiment, the data transmission period is described as 10 ms (milliseconds).

The light emission control period stores the time that is the control unit for one period of light emission (hereinafter, this period will be referred to as the "light emission control period"). This light emission control period differs depending on the light emission type. Specifically, if the light emission type is "continuous" or "blinking", a time such as "100 ms" can be set, and if the light emission type is "switching" (such as light emission of a special light color (rainbow color) with multiple color changes), a time such as "1800 ms" can be set.

The format data stores time-series Q data to be included in the light emission control data by applying the format of the format type. Specifically, the format data defines a correspondence between the light emission sequence and the Q data corresponding to the RGB values corresponding to the light emission sequence.

In this embodiment, the light emission of the frame LEDs 9L1-9L12 and 9R1-9R12 is controlled by Q data (color hexadecimal, RGB color value) expressed in hexadecimal. In color hexadecimal, RGB is expressed as two digits each for a total of six hexadecimal digits (0-F) to represent "16 x 16 = 256 gradations." However, in this specification, the two digits for each of RGB are the same value, and the notation is abbreviated to one digit each for a total of three digits, and is illustrated and explained. For simplicity, the notation "0x" that represents hexadecimal is omitted in the illustrations and explanations.

The Q data includes Q data for group 1, Q data for group 2, and Q data for group 3, which are output to the serial-parallel conversion circuit that constitutes the light emitter driver corresponding to the address. The Q data corresponding to each group stores the RGB values to be output from the four output terminals Q included in that group.

A more specific explanation will be given. For example, if the data transmission cycle is "10 ms", it is stipulated that data is transmitted from the performance control board 12 to the light emitter driver every 10 ms. Also, if the unit light emission time is "100 ms", it is stipulated that the target LED emits light for a unit light emission time of 100 ms. Also, if the light emission control cycle is "100 ms", the light emission type of the light emission pattern is "continuous", and in order to cause continuous light emission of a specific color, the same time as the unit light emission time is stipulated as the light emission control cycle.

For example, in the format data, the light emission sequence is set to "1" through "N," and if the Q data (RGB values) for each group is set to "0, 0, F" for each of the light emission sequences "1" through "N," then the R and G values of the Q data are set to "0," and the B value is set to "F" for all light emission sequences, achieving continuous blue light emission.

Next, we will explain the control data for controlling the gradation of the LED to achieve light emission by mixing colors. The Q data (RGB values) in the gradation control data explained here can be directly applied to the Q data of the format data included in the light emission control generation data described above.

Figure 13-22 shows an example of gradation control data, which is control data for performing gradation control to achieve rainbow blinking in the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 (corresponding to flash rainbow emission, emission pattern LP3-2, etc.). Note that the gradation control data for the frame LEDs 9R1 to 9R12 is not shown because it is the same as the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12. In this gradation control data, the left column shows the switching unit emission time Δtn, and the right column shows the Q data (RGB values) corresponding to each group (group 1 (9L1), group 2 (9L2), group 3 (9L3), group 4 (9L4), ...) expressed in hexadecimal.

In addition, in the light emission sequence 2 of the gradation control data shown in Figure 13-22, the switching unit light emission time Δtn is 20 ms, and the Q data (RGB values) of groups 1 to 12 (9L1 to 9L12) is set to "0, 0, 0", thereby turning off the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12.

In addition, in the light emission sequence 1 of the gradation control data shown in FIG. 13-22, the switching unit light emission time Δtn is 30 ms, and the Q data (RGB values) of groups 1 and 2 are "0, 4, F", the Q data (RGB values) of group 3 is "0, 8, F", the Q data (RGB values) of group 4 is "0, C, F", the Q data (RGB values) of group 5 is "0, F, D", the Q data (RGB values) of group 6 is "0, F, 9", and the Q data (RGB values) of group 7 is "0 , F, 5", the Q data (RGB values) of group 8 is "0, F, 1", the Q data (RGB values) of group 9 is "2, F, 0", the Q data (RGB values) of group 10 is "6, F, 0", the Q data (RGB values) of group 11 is "A, F, 0", and the Q data (RGB values) of group 12 is "F, F, 0", thereby achieving emission of different emission colors (different from the emission color of emission order 3) from frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12.

In this way, by controlling the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 to switch between multiple colors in sequence over a short switching unit light emission time Δts, and by interposing control to turn off the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, the colors can be visually perceived as flashing in rainbow colors by humans. Note that the interposing mode is not limited to turning off the lights, and can be, for example, white, which does not constitute a rainbow color. When emitting white light, low luminance RGB values such as "1, 1, 1" can be set so as not to impede the recognition of the colors that constitute the rainbow.

Figure 13-21 illustrates an example of gradation control data, which is control data for performing gradation control to achieve rainbow lighting of frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 (corresponding to smooth rainbow emission, emission pattern LP3-1, etc.).

The gradation control data shown in FIG. 13-21 differs from the gradation control data shown in FIG. 13-21 in that the control for turning off the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 is not inserted in between. This allows the human eye to visually perceive the lights as if they were lit in rainbow colors. In the light emission sequence 1 of the gradation control data, the switching unit light emission time Δtn is 40 ms, and the same light emission colors as those of the light emission sequence 2 of the gradation control data are achieved. Also, with the gradation control data, the light emission colors emitted by the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 are controlled to be switched between multiple colors in sequence in the short switching unit light emission time Δts, allowing the human eye to visually perceive the lights as if they were lit in rainbow colors.

Next, as shown in Figure 13-6 (C), the output patterns of background music and sound effects in SP reach performances A to E will be explained. Furthermore, the various sound patterns explained below differ from other sound patterns in at least one of multiple elements such as volume, sound quality, rhythm, tempo, and music, and each sound pattern can be modified in various ways.

During the execution period (ta2 to ta3) of the bowling showdown or battle showdown in the SP reach performance, in SP reach performance A, background music and sound effects are output in sound pattern BP1-1, in SP reach performance B, background music and sound effects are output in sound pattern BP1-2, in SP reach performance C, background music and sound effects are output in sound pattern BP1-3, in SP reach performance D, background music and sound effects are output in sound pattern BP1-4, and in SP reach performance E, background music and sound effects are output in sound pattern BP1-5.

In addition, during the execution period of the "Win/Loss Button Presentation" in the SP Reach Presentation, common sound patterns BP2-1 to BP2-4 are output for SP Reach Presentations A to E. Note that one of sound patterns BP2-2 to BP2-4 is selected based on the variable display result, with the expected results increasing in the order of sound patterns BP2-2, BP2-3, and BP2-4.

In addition, during the execution period of the "moving body effect" and "jackpot notification" in the SP reach performance, background music and sound effects are output in sound patterns BP0-1 to BP3-3 in the SP reach performances A to E. In addition, during the execution period of the "miss notification" in the SP reach performance, the common sound patterns BP3-1 to BP3-3 are lit up in the SP reach performances A to E.

In addition, in the re-drawing variation part in post-performance A and the planned ball addition part in post-performance B (ta5 to ta6), sound pattern BP4-1 is output in SP reach performances A to C, and background music and sound effects are output in sound pattern BP4-4 in SP reach performances D and E.

In addition, in the re-draw result part in post-performance A and the planned ball release notification part in post-performance B (ta6 to ta7), background music and sound effects are output using sound pattern BP4-2 or sound pattern BP4-3 in SP reach performances A to C, and background music and sound effects are output using sound pattern BP4-5 or sound pattern BP4-6 in SP reach performances D and E.

The above sound patterns BP1-1 to 4, BP2-1 to 4, BP0-1 to 3, BP3-1 to 3, and BP4-1 to 4 are patterns that output sounds in different ways based on the sound control data, and an overview of each sound pattern is provided below.

As shown in Figure 13-7 (B), in "Bowling/Battle", sound pattern BP1-1 is a pattern in which the voice when the reach title for SP reach performance A is introduced, the voice "Knock down the pins!", and the background music for SP reach performance A are output (see Figure 13-10), sound pattern BP1-2 is a pattern in which the voice when the reach title for SP reach performance B is introduced, the voice "Fight!", the voice of ally A-1 saying "It'll be decided next time!", the background music for SP reach performance B, and battle sound effects are output (see Figure 13-11 (A2)), and sound pattern BP1-3 is a pattern in which the voice when the reach title for SP reach performance C is introduced, the voice "Fight!", and the voice of ally A-1 saying "It'll be decided next time!" sound pattern BP1-4 is a pattern in which the voice of ally A-2 at the introduction of the reach title for SP reach performance D, the voice of ally A-1 saying "Fight!", the BGM for SP reach performance D, and battle sound effects are output (see FIG. 13-12 (A4)), and sound pattern BP1-5 is a pattern in which the voice of ally A-2 at the introduction of the reach title for SP reach performance E, the voice of ally A-1 saying "Fight!", the BGM for SP reach performance E, and battle sound effects are output (see FIG. 13-12 (A5)).

In the "win/lose button effect," sound pattern BP2-1 is a pattern in which the voice "keep pressing the button to build up power" and a sound effect of power level 0 are output (see Figure 13-13), sound pattern BP2-2 is a pattern in which a sound effect of power level 1 is output, sound pattern BP2-3 is a pattern in which a sound effect of power level 2 is output, and sound pattern BP2-4 is a pattern in which the voice of power level 3 (MAX) and a sound effect of power level 3 (MAX) are output.

In the "miss notification," sound pattern BP3-1 is a pattern in which a sound effect of failure is output (see FIG. 13-16 (H1)), sound pattern BP3-2 is a pattern in which a defeat (unfortunate) voice of ally A-1 and background music for a battle defeat are output (see FIG. 13-16 (H2) (H4) (H5)), and sound pattern BP3-3 is a pattern in which a defeat (unfortunate) voice of ally A-2 and background music for a battle defeat are output (see FIG. 13-16 (H3)).

In the "moving object effect & jackpot notification", sound pattern BP0-1 is a pattern in which the sound effects of the moving object effect, the sound effects of success, and the background music of success are output (see Fig. 13-15 (E1)), sound pattern BP0-2 is a pattern in which the sound effects of the moving object effect, the victory voice of ally A-1, and the background music of battle victory are output (see Fig. 13-15 (E2) (E4) (E5)), and sound pattern BP0-3 is a pattern in which the sound effects of the moving object effect, the victory voice of ally A-2, and the background music of battle victory are output (see Fig. 13-15 (E3)).

In "redraw variation/planned ball output addition," sound pattern BP4-1 is a pattern in which the background music for the redraw variation is output (see Figure 13-17 (F1)), and sound pattern BP4-4 is a pattern in which the background music for the planned ball output addition, the sound effect (attack) for the planned ball output addition, teammate A-1's voice for the planned ball output addition, and the voice "Push!" are output (see Figure 13-18).

In the "redraw result/planned ball release notification", sound pattern BP4-2 is a pattern in which the sound effect for even-numbered symbols and background music for the redraw result are output (see FIG. 13-17 (F2)), sound pattern BP4-3 is a pattern in which the sound effect for odd-numbered symbols and background music for the redraw result are output (see FIG. 13-17 (F3)), sound pattern BP4-5 is a pattern in which background music for the planned ball release notification and the sound effect of 750 are output (see FIG. 13-19 (G1-3) to (G3)), and sound pattern BP4-6 is a pattern in which background music for the planned ball release notification, the sound effect of 1500, and the voice of MAX are output (see FIG. 13-19 (G1-4) to (G4)).

In addition, the sound patterns during the execution period of the movable object performance are the same for all types of SP reach performances A to E (sound patterns BP0-1 to BP3), which further reduces manufacturing costs.

In this embodiment, the sound pattern during the execution period of the movable body effect is the same sound pattern BP2-1 to BP2-4 even when the "movable body effect" is executed at any timing when operation of the push button 31B is detected during the effective operation period in which the "win/lose button effect" is executed, or when the effective operation period ends without detection of operation of the push button 31B. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and sound effects may be output in different sound patterns depending on the timing when operation of the push button 31B is detected during the effective operation period in which the "win/lose button effect" is executed. In this way, it becomes possible to change the sound effects depending on the timing of the player's operation, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

(SP Reach Performance A to E Flow)
Next, the flow of the SP reach effects A to E will be described with reference to Fig. 13-8. Fig. 13-8 is a tree diagram showing the flow of the SP reach effects A to E.

As shown in FIG. 13-8, in the SP Reach α, β, and γ, when the SP Reach performance develops from the N Reach performance, in the case of SP Reach performance A, the start image of bowling is displayed as shown in (A1), in the case of SP Reach performance B, the start image of battle A between ally character A-1 and enemy character X-1 is displayed as shown in (A2), in the case of SP Reach performance C, the start image of battle A between ally character A-2 and enemy character X-2 is displayed as shown in (A3), in the case of SP Reach performance D, the start image of battle B between ally character A-1 and enemy character X-1 is displayed as shown in (A4), and in the case of SP Reach performance E, the start image of battle B between ally character A-1 and enemy character X-2 is displayed as shown in (A5). In this way, the performance style of the first half in each of the SP Reach performances A to E is different for each of the SP Reach performances A to E.

Then, at a predetermined timing towards the end of the SP reach performance, the win/lose button performance begins. Specifically, as shown in (B1), a first operation prompting performance is started to prompt the player to press and hold the push button 31B, and then, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the first operation prompting performance, a second operation prompting performance is started to prompt the player to release the long press of the push button 31B, as shown in (B2). In this way, the performance format of the win/lose button performance is the same for SP reach performances A to E.

Next, if the variable display result is a jackpot, an image showing the final throw in bowling or the final blow in battle is displayed as shown in (C) when the release operation of the long press of push button 31B is detected during the effective operation period of the hit/miss button presentation, or when the effective operation period has elapsed without the release operation of the long press of push button 31B being detected.

Next, in the case of SP reach performance A, as shown in (D1), the movable body 32 falls from the origin position to the performance position and an image is displayed indicating that the ball has hit the pin; in the case of SP reach performance B, as shown in (D2), the movable body 32 falls from the origin position to the performance position and an image is displayed indicating that enemy character X-1 has been attacked; in the case of SP reach performance C, as shown in (D3), the movable body 32 falls from the origin position to the performance position and an image is displayed indicating that enemy character X-2 has been attacked; in the case of SP reach performance D, as shown in (D4), the movable body 32 falls from the origin position to the performance position and an image is displayed indicating that enemy character X-1 has been attacked; and in the case of SP reach performance E, as shown in (D5), the movable body 32 falls from the origin position to the performance position and an image is displayed indicating that enemy character X-2 has been attacked. In this way, the presentation style of the movable body presentation differs between SP reach presentation A, SP reach presentation B and D, and SP reach presentation C and E.

Next, in the case of SP reach performance A, as shown in (E1), a result image indicating that the pins have fallen is displayed, in the case of SP reach performance B, as shown in (E2), a result image indicating that battle A has been won is displayed, in the case of SP reach performance C, as shown in (E3), a result image indicating that battle A has been won is displayed, in the case of SP reach performance D, as shown in (E4), and in the case of SP reach performance E, as shown in (E5), a result image indicating that battle A has been won is displayed. Note that the presentation mode of the result announcement differs for each of the SP reach performances A to E.

Next, in the case of SP reach effects A to C, post-effect A begins, and in the re-draw variable part shown in (F1), an image is displayed in which the decorative symbols that were temporarily stopped in (E1 to E3) are re-variably displayed, and then in the re-draw result part shown in (F2) and (F3), the fixed decorative symbols that will be the predetermined jackpot combination are displayed in a stopped state.

In addition, in the case of SP Reach performance D, post-performance B is started, and in the planned ball output addition part shown in (G1), an image is displayed of ally character A-1 displayed in (A4) attacking enemy character X-1 and adding up the planned balls, and in the case of SP Reach performance E, post-performance B is started, and in the planned ball output addition part shown in (G2), an image is displayed of ally character A-1 displayed in (A5) attacking enemy character X-2 and adding up the planned balls. Next, in the case of SP Reach performance D and E, the planned number of balls is displayed in the planned ball output notification part shown in (G3) and (G4).

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a miss, then at the timing when the release operation of the long press of push button 31B is detected during the effective operation period of the win/lose button effect, or at the timing when the effective operation period has elapsed without the release operation of the long press of push button 31B being detected, the images shown in (C) (D1 to D5) are not displayed, and in the case of SP reach effect A, a result image indicating a failed strike is displayed as shown in (H1), in the case of SP reach effect B, a result image indicating a loss in battle A is displayed as shown in (H2), in the case of SP reach effect C, a result image indicating a loss in battle A is displayed as shown in (H3), in the case of SP reach effect D, a result image indicating a loss in battle B is displayed as shown in (H4), and in the case of SP reach effect E, a result image indicating a loss in battle A is displayed as shown in (H5). The presentation style of the result announcement differs between SP reach presentation A, SP reach presentation B and D, and SP reach presentation C and E.

Next, in the case of SP reach effects A to E, as shown in (I1), the fixed decorative pattern of a specified reach combination that is not a jackpot combination (also called a "missed reach") is displayed stopped.

(Examples of SP reach effects A to E)
Next, the performance operation example of the SP reach performances A to E executed by the performance control CPU 120 will be described based on FIG. 13-9 to FIG. 13-20. FIG. 13-9 is a diagram showing a performance operation example from the start of the variable display of the SP reach α, β, and γ to the development into the SP reach performance. FIG. 13-10 is a diagram showing a performance operation example of the SP reach performance A. FIG. 13-11 is a diagram showing a performance operation example of the SP reach performances B and C. FIG. 13-12 is a diagram showing a performance operation example of the SP reach performances D and E. FIG. 13-13 is a diagram showing a performance operation example of the hit/miss button performance. FIG. 13-14 is a diagram showing a performance operation example of the movable body performance. FIG. 13-15 is a diagram showing a performance operation example of the big hit notification of the SP reach performances A to E. FIG. 13-16 is a diagram showing a performance operation example of the miss notification of the SP reach performances A to E. FIG. 13-17 is a diagram showing a performance operation example of the post-event performance A. 13-18 is a diagram showing an example of a performance operation of the post-event performance B. FIG. 13-19 is a diagram showing an example of a performance operation of the post-event performance B.

In the following explanation, the commonly executed SP reach effects A to E will be explained together, and the different effects will be explained separately. Also, some of the numbers (e.g. A to I) given to each frame will correspond to the numbers given to the frames shown in Figure 13-8.

As shown in FIG. 13-9 (N1), when a starting winning occurs, the variable display of the decorative symbols begins in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R based on the determination of one of the SP Reach α, β, or γ as the variable pattern.

In the following, active display area 018SG013 corresponding to active display area 069SG013 of feature part 069SG displays active display 018SG003 corresponding to active display 069SG003, first hold display area 018SG011 corresponding to first hold display area 069SG011 displays hold display 018SG001 corresponding to hold display 069SG001, and second hold display area 018SG012 corresponding to second hold display area 069SG012 displays hold display 018SG002 corresponding to hold display 069SG002.

After the variable display has started, as shown in FIG. 13-9 (N2), if the variable display mode becomes a reach mode, a normal reach performance is started as a variable display performance of the decorative symbols. As shown in FIG. 13-9 (N3), when a predetermined time has elapsed since the reach mode was entered, a decorative symbol with a number different from the decorative symbols displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R is temporarily displayed in the decorative symbol display area 5C, and then, as shown in FIG. 13-9 (N4), the variable display of the decorative symbol display area 5C is resumed, progressing to an SP reach performance.

As shown in FIG. 13-10 (A1), when the SP reach performance A is developed, the decorative pattern displayed in the center of the display screen is reduced in size in the display area 5SR in the upper right corner of the display screen, and a reach title image 018SG01A is displayed indicating that the SP reach performance A has started. The reach title image 018SG01A has a title display 018SG100 (for example, SP reach performance A) indicating the type of SP reach performance, an expectation display 018SG101 (for example, the number of stars) indicating the expectation of a jackpot, and a content display 018SG102 representing bowling.

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-10 (A1-1), an image 018SG103 is displayed, indicating that pins are lined up on the bowling lane and the challenge is about to begin, and as shown in FIG. 13-10 (A1-2), an image 018SG104 is displayed of the ball hitting a pin and knocking it down, and then, as shown in FIG. 13-10 (A1-3), an image 018SG105 is displayed, indicating that the next throw will be the last one, with an image of one pin remaining on the bowling lane and the words "One left!". In addition, as a light-emitting effect, the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12 are lit up based on the light-emitting pattern LP1-1, and as a sound effect, voices and background music are output from the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound pattern BP1-1.

As shown in FIG. 13-11 (A2), when the SP reach performance B is developed, the decorative pattern displayed in the center of the display screen is reduced in size in the display area 5SR in the upper right corner of the display screen, and a reach title image 018SG01B is displayed indicating that the SP reach performance B is about to start. The reach title image 018SG01B has a title display 018SG100 (for example, SP reach performance B) indicating the type of SP reach performance, an expectation display 018SG101 (for example, the number of stars, etc.) indicating the expectation of a big hit, and a content display 018SG102 indicating the ally character A-1. In addition, as a light-emitting performance, the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12 are lit up based on the light-emitting pattern LP1-2, and as a sound performance, voices and background music are output from the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound pattern BP1-2.

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-11 (A2-1), an image 018SG202 is displayed, which has a background image 018SG201 showing a town, a character image 018SGA1 showing friendly character A-1, and a character image 018SGX1 showing enemy character X-1, indicating that a showdown is about to begin. As shown in FIG. 13-11 (A2-2), an image 018SG203 showing friendly character A-1 and enemy character X-1 fighting is displayed, and then, as shown in FIG. 13-11 (A2-3), an image 018SG204 is displayed, which has character image 018SGA1 and character image 018SGX1, indicating that the next blow will be the final blow.

As shown in FIG. 13-11 (A3), when the SP reach performance C is developed, the decorative pattern displayed in the center of the display screen is reduced in size in the display area 5SR in the upper right corner of the display screen, and a reach title image 018SG01C is displayed to indicate that the SP reach performance C is about to begin. The reach title image 018SG01C has a title display 018SG100 (e.g., SP reach performance C) indicating the type of SP reach performance, an expectation display 018SG101 (e.g., the number of stars, etc.) indicating the expectation of a big hit, and a content display 018SG102 indicating the ally character A-2. In addition, as a light-emitting performance, the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12 are lit up based on the light-emitting pattern LP1-2, and as a sound performance, voices and background music are output from the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound pattern BP1-3.

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-11 (A3-1), an image 018SG212 is displayed, which has a background image 018SG201 showing a town, a character image 018SGA2 showing friendly character A-2, and a character image 018SGX2 showing enemy character X-2, indicating that a showdown is about to begin. As shown in FIG. 13-11 (A3-2), an image 018SG213 showing friendly character A-2 and enemy character X-2 fighting is displayed, and then, as shown in FIG. 13-11 (A3-3), an image 018SG214 is displayed, which has character image 018SGA2 and character image 018SGX2, indicating that the next blow will be the final blow.

As shown in FIG. 13-12 (A4), when the SP reach performance D is developed, the decorative pattern displayed in the center of the display screen is reduced and displayed in the display area 5SR in the upper right corner of the display screen, and a reach title image 018SG01D is displayed indicating that the SP reach performance D is starting. The reach title image 018SG01D has a title display 018SG100 (for example, SP reach performance D) indicating the type of SP reach performance, an expectation display 018SG101 (for example, the number of stars, etc.) indicating the expectation of a big hit, and a content display 018SG102 indicating the ally character A-1. In addition, as a light-emitting performance, the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12 are lit up based on the light-emitting pattern LP1-3, and as a sound performance, voices and background music are output from the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound pattern BP1-4.

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-12 (A4-1), an image 018SG222 is displayed, which has a background image 018SG221 showing a wilderness, a character image 018SGA1 showing friendly character A-1, and a character image 018SGX1 showing enemy character X-1, indicating that a showdown is about to begin. As shown in FIG. 13-12 (A4-2), an image 018SG223 showing friendly character A-1 and enemy character X-1 fighting is displayed, and then, as shown in FIG. 13-12 (A4-3), an image 018SG224 is displayed, which has character image 018SGA1 and character image 018SGX1, indicating that the next blow will be the final blow.

As shown in FIG. 13-12 (A5), when the SP reach performance E is developed, the decorative pattern displayed in the center of the display screen is reduced in size in the display area 5SR in the upper right corner of the display screen, and a reach title image 018SG01E is displayed to indicate that the SP reach performance E is about to begin. The reach title image 018SG01E has a title display 018SG100 (e.g., SP reach performance E) indicating the type of SP reach performance, an expectation display 018SG101 (e.g., the number of stars, etc.) indicating the expectation of a big win, and a content display 018SG102 indicating the ally character A-1. In addition, as a light-emitting performance, the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12 are lit up based on the light-emitting pattern LP1-3, and as a sound performance, voices and background music are output from the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound pattern BP1-5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-12 (A5-1), an image 018SG232 is displayed, which has a background image 018SG221 showing a wilderness, a character image 018SGA1 showing friendly character A-1, and a character image 018SGX2 showing enemy character X-2, indicating that a showdown is about to begin. As shown in FIG. 13-12 (A5-2), an image 018SG233 showing friendly character A-1 and enemy character X-2 fighting is displayed, and then, as shown in FIG. 13-12 (A5-3), an image 018SG234 is displayed, which has character image 018SGA1 and character image 018SGX2, indicating that the next blow will be the final blow.

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-13 (B1), when the win/lose button presentation starts, a button image 018SG241 that resembles the push button 31B and an operation prompting display 018SG242 such as "Keep pressing the button to build up power!" are displayed, and the operation prompting presentation that encourages the long press of the push button 31B starts. In addition, as a light emission presentation, the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12 light up based on the light emission pattern LP2-1, and as a sound presentation, voices and background music are output from the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound pattern BP2-1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-13 (B1-1), the operation prompt display 018SG242 switches to "Start charging!", the gauge display 018SG243 indicating the power level and the effect image 018SG244 are displayed, and when a long press operation is detected, the display state of the gauge display 018SG243 and the effect image 018SG244 changes. In addition, as a light effect, the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1-9L12, 9R1-9R12 light up based on the light emission patterns LP2-2-4, and as a sound effect, voices and background music are output from the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound patterns BP2-2-4.

As shown in FIG. 13-13 (B1-2), when a long press operation is detected for a predetermined period of time, the gauge display 018SG243 becomes MAX, and the operation prompting display 018SG242 switches to "Power MAX!" and is displayed. Even when a long press operation is detected for a predetermined period of time, the gauge display 018SG243 may not become MAX depending on the variable display result. Also, the manner in which the power level changes may differ depending on the variable display result.

Then, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the hit/lose button presentation, as shown in FIG. 13-13 (B1-3), the operation prompting display 018SG242 switches to "Let go!", prompting the player to release the long press of the push button 31B, and the gauge display 018SG243 switches to a gauge showing the remaining valid operation period. Also, the presentation operations in FIG. 13-13 (B1) to FIG. 13-13 (B1-3) are common to SP reach presentations A to E.

In this embodiment, as shown in Fig. 13-13 (B1) to Fig. 13-13 (B1-2), an example is given of a form in which a prompt to operate to accumulate power is displayed during the win/lose button presentation, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the prompt to operate does not have to be displayed.

Then, when the release of the long press of the push button 31B is detected during the valid operation period of the hit/miss button presentation, or when the valid operation period has elapsed without the release of the long press of the push button 31B being detected, if the variable display result is a hit, the movable body presentation shown in Figures 13-14 will start.

During the first period from when the movable body performance begins until a predetermined time (e.g., 1 to 3 seconds) has elapsed, the movable body 32 falls from the origin position to the performance position, and an attack image 018SG250 showing the final throw or final blow is displayed, as shown in Fig. 13-14 (C). Note that the attack image 018SG250 is made up of an object image 018SG250A that imitates the spherical operating part of the push button 31B, and an effect image 018SG250B that shows the object moving toward the back of the screen. In addition, as the movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the performance position, the movable body LED 208 and frame LEDs 9L1-9L12, 9R1-9R12 light up in a color that matches the background based on the light emission pattern LP3-2 as a light effect, sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound patterns BP0-1-3 as a sound effect, and the push button 31B vibrates due to the vibration motor 61 as a vibration effect.

As described above, during the first period of the movable body performance, a common performance is executed for SP reach performances A to E, but during the second period after the first period ends, different performances are executed for SP reach performances A to E, as follows:

As shown in FIG. 13-14 (D1), in the case of SP reach performance A, in the second period, the movable body 32 vibrates up and down at the performance position, and an impact image 018SG251 showing an object hitting something is displayed, which has an object image 018SG250A and an effect image 018SG250B showing an impact.

In the present embodiment, the impact image 018SG251 does not display the object (e.g., pins) that the object (ball) hits, but the present invention is not limited to this, and an image showing bowling pins may be displayed in the impact image 018SG251.

Also, as shown in Figures 13-14 (D2) and (D4), in the case of SP reach performance B and SP reach performance D, in the second period, the movable body 32 vibrates up and down at the performance position, and an impact image 018SG252 is displayed, which has an object image 018SG250A, an effect image 018SG250B indicating an impact, and a character image 018SGX1 indicating enemy character X1, and indicates that an attack has hit enemy character X-1.

Also, as shown in Figures 13-14 (D3) and (D5), in the case of SP reach performance C and SP reach performance E, in the second period, the movable body 32 vibrates up and down at the performance position, and an impact image 018SG253 is displayed, which has an object image 018SG250A, an effect image 018SG250B indicating an impact, and a character image 018SGX2 indicating enemy character X2, and indicates that an attack has hit enemy character X-2.

In addition, during the second period of the movable body performance shown in Figures 13-14 (D1) to (D5), common display performance, light emission performance, sound performance, and vibration performance are performed. In detail, the effect image 018SG250B is alternately displayed and hidden in response to the vibration of the movable body 32 (hide when the movable body 32 moves upward, display when the movable body 32 moves downward, etc.), and as a light emission effect, based on the light emission pattern LP3-2, the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12 basically emit light in a light emission pattern in which orange and red light flows outward from the movable body LED 208 to the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12 in that order, in accordance with the background of the movable body and the effect image 018SG250B, and when the effect image 018SG250B is displayed, light is emitted in a light emission pattern in which it flashes intensely white, and as a sound effect, predetermined sound effects are output from the speakers 8L, 8R based on the sound patterns BP0-1 to 3, and as a vibration effect, the push button 31B vibrates due to the vibration motor 61. In addition, in Figures 13-14 (D1) to (D5), displays may be performed using a light guide plate display device.

In addition, in FIG. 13-14 (D2 to D5), the effect image 018SG250B displayed in response to the vibration of the movable body 32 is displayed in a display color that is the same as or similar to the display color of the character images 018SGX1, 018SGX2 displayed at the same time (for example, a similar color). By doing so, the relationship between the character images 018SGX1, 018SGX2 showing enemy characters and the effect image 018SG250B can be improved, thereby improving the presentation effect of the movable body presentation.

After the movable body performance ends, as shown in FIG. 13-15, a jackpot is announced. Specifically, in the case of SP Reach performance A, as shown in FIG. 13-15 (E1), a result image 018SG260A is displayed, which includes an image 018SG261 showing a fallen bowling pin, a text display 018SG262 showing "Success!", and an effect image 018SG263, and indicates that the bowling challenge has been successful, and the movable body 32 moves from the performance position to the origin position. In addition, as a light emission performance, the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12 light up with smooth rainbow light emission based on the light emission pattern LP3-2, and as a sound performance, a victory voice and sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound pattern BP0-1, and the vibration performance ends.

In the case of SP Reach performance B, as shown in FIG. 13-15 (E2), a character image 018SGA1 showing ally character A-1, a character image 018SGX1Z showing enemy character X-1, a text display 018SG262 showing "Victory!", and an effect image 018SG263 are displayed, and a result image 018SG260B showing that ally character A-1 has won the battle against enemy character X-1 is displayed, and the movable body 32 moves from the performance position to the origin position. In addition, as a light emission performance, the movable body LED 208 and frame LEDs 9L1-9L12, 9R1-9R12 light up with smooth rainbow light emission based on the light emission pattern LP3-2, and as a sound performance, a victory voice and sound effects are output from speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound pattern BP0-2, and the vibration performance ends. Furthermore, character image 018SGX1Z is a special image in which the defeated enemy character X-1 fades out and becomes invisible. By displaying character image 018SGX1Z in this way, the end of the series of effects can be conveniently notified.

In the case of SP reach performance C, as shown in FIG. 13-15 (E3), a character image 018SGA2 showing ally character A-2, a character image 018SGX2 showing enemy character X-2, a text display 018SG262 showing "Victory!", and an effect image 018SG263 are displayed, and a result image 018SG260C showing that ally character A-2 has won the battle against enemy character X-2 is displayed, and the movable body 32 moves from the performance position to the origin position. In addition, as a light emission performance, the movable body LED 208 and frame LEDs 9L1-9L12, 9R1-9R12 light up with smooth rainbow light emission based on the light emission pattern LP3-2, and as a sound performance, a victory voice and sound effects are output from speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound pattern BP0-3, and the vibration performance ends. Furthermore, character image 018SGX2Z is a special image in which the defeated enemy character X-2 fades out and becomes invisible. By displaying character image 018SGX2Z in this way, the end of the series of effects can be conveniently notified.

In the case of SP reach performance D, as shown in FIG. 13-15 (E4), a result image 018SG260D is displayed, which includes a character image 018SGA1 showing ally character A-1, a character image 018SGX1 showing enemy character X-1, a text display 018SG262 showing "Victory!", and an effect image 018SG263, and indicates that ally character A-1 has won the battle against enemy character X-1, and the movable body 32 moves from the performance position to the origin position. In addition, as a light emission performance, the movable body LED 208 and frame LEDs 9L1-9L12, 9R1-9R12 light up with smooth rainbow light emission based on the light emission pattern LP3-2, and as a sound performance, a victory voice and sound effects are output from speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound pattern BP0-2, and the vibration performance ends.

In the case of SP Reach E, as shown in FIG. 13-15 (E5), a character image 018SGA1 showing ally character A-1, a character image 018SGX2 showing enemy character X-2, a text display 018SG262 showing "Victory!", and an effect image 018SG263 are displayed, and a result image 018SG260E showing that ally character A-1 has won the battle against enemy character X-2 is displayed, and the movable body 32 moves from the performance position to the origin position. In addition, as a light emission performance, the movable body LED 208 and frame LEDs 9L1-9L12, 9R1-9R12 light up with smooth rainbow light emission based on the light emission pattern LP3-2, and as a sound performance, a victory voice and sound effects are output from speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound pattern BP0-2, and the vibration performance ends.

Then, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the display of the result images 018SG260A-018SG260E, the result images 018SG260A-018SG260E are hidden, and as shown in FIG. 13-15 (E6), a fixed decorative pattern (such as 666) that is a predetermined jackpot combination is temporarily displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the word "jackpot" is displayed, thereby issuing a confirmed jackpot notification indicating that a jackpot has been confirmed.

On the other hand, when the release of the long press of the push button 31B is detected during the effective operation period of the win/lose button presentation shown in Figures 13-13 (B1) to 13-13 (B1-3), or when the effective operation period has elapsed without the release of the long press of the push button 31B being detected, if the variable display result is a miss, the movable body presentation is not executed, and a miss confirmation notification is executed to indicate that a miss has been confirmed, as shown in Figure 13-16.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 13-16 (H1), in the case of SP reach performance A, the movable body 32 remains at the origin position without moving, and a result image 018SG270A is displayed that has an image 018SG271 showing the bowling pins that remain unfallen and a text display 018SG272 showing "Failed...", indicating that the bowling challenge has failed. In addition, as a light emission performance, the movable body LED 208 and frame LEDs 9L1-9L12, 9R1-9R12 light up in low-luminance white based on the light emission pattern LP3-1, and as a sound effect, a sound effect of failure is output from the speakers 8L, 8R based on the sound pattern BP3-1, and the vibration performance ends.

In the case of SP Reach performance B and SP Reach performance D, as shown in FIG. 13-16 (H2) (H4), the movable body 32 is maintained at the origin position without moving, and a result image 018SG270B is displayed, which has a character image 018SGA1 showing the ally character A-1, a character image 018SGX1 showing the enemy character X-1, and a text display 018SG262 showing "Defeat...", and indicates that the ally character A-1 has been defeated in the battle against the enemy character X-1. In addition, as a light emission effect, the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1-9L12, 9R1-9R12 light up in low-luminance white based on the light emission pattern LP3-1, and as a sound effect, a sound effect of failure is output from the speakers 8L, 8R based on the sound pattern BP3-2, and the vibration effect ends.

In the case of SP reach performance C, as shown in FIG. 13-16 (H3), the movable body 32 remains at the origin position without moving, and a result image 018SG270C is displayed, which has a character image 018SGA2 showing ally character A-2, a character image 018SGX2 showing enemy character X-2, and a text display 018SG262 showing "Defeat...", and indicates that ally character A-2 has been defeated in the battle against enemy character X-2. In addition, as a light emission performance, the movable body LED 208 and frame LEDs 9L1-9L12, 9R1-9R12 light up in low-luminance white based on the light emission pattern LP3-1, and as a sound effect, a sound effect of failure is output from speakers 8L, 8R based on the sound pattern BP3-3, and the vibration performance ends.

In the case of SP reach effect E, as shown in FIG. 13-16 (H5), the movable body 32 remains at the origin position without moving, and a result image 018SG270E is displayed, which has a character image 018SGA1 showing the ally character A-1, a character image 018SGX2 showing the enemy character X-2, and a text display 018SG262 showing "Defeat...", and indicates that the ally character A-1 has been defeated in the battle against the enemy character X-2. In addition, as a light emission effect, the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1-9L12, 9R1-9R12 light up in a low-luminance white color based on the light emission pattern LP3-1, and as a sound effect, a sound effect of failure is output from the speakers 8L, 8R based on the sound pattern BP3-2, and the vibration effect ends.

Then, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the display of the result images 018SG270A-018SG270E, the result images 018SG270A-018SG270E are no longer displayed, and as shown in FIG. 13-16 (H6), a confirmed decorative pattern (such as 676) of a predetermined reach combination (also called a "missed reach") that is not a jackpot combination is statically displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, thereby issuing a confirmed miss notification indicating that a miss has been confirmed.

Next, if a jackpot confirmation notification is executed in SP reach effects A to C, the post-event effect A shown in Figure 13-17 will be executed.

Specifically, after the determined decorative symbols (such as 666) that are a predetermined jackpot combination are temporarily displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the jackpot confirmation notification, the decorative symbols are re-variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the re-lottery variation part shown in FIG. 13-17 (F1). In addition, as a light emission effect, the movable body LED 208 and frame LEDs 9L1-9L12, 9R1-9R12 are lit up based on the light emission pattern LP4-1, and as a sound effect, background music is output from the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound pattern BP4-1.

In the re-draw result part shown in FIG. 13-17 (F2), if the jackpot type is jackpot A (non-probable jackpot), when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the re-variable display, a combination of even numbers (such as 666) is displayed as a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination, and the variable display ends. In addition, as a light-emitting effect, the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1-9L12, 9R1-9R12 are lit up based on the light-emitting pattern LP4-2, and as a sound effect, BGM is output from the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound pattern BP4-2.

In addition, in the re-draw result part shown in FIG. 13-17 (F3), if the jackpot type is jackpot B (probable win), when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the re-variable display, a combination of odd numbers (such as 333) is displayed as a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination, and the variable display ends. In addition, as a light-emitting effect, the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12 are lit up based on the light-emitting pattern LP4-3, and as a sound effect, BGM is output from the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound pattern BP4-3.

Next, if a jackpot confirmation notification is executed in SP reach performances D and E, the post-event performance B shown in Figure 13-18 is executed.

Specifically, in the big win confirmation notification, after the fixed decorative pattern (for example, 666, etc.) that is a predetermined big win combination is temporarily displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the planned ball output addition part shown in FIG. 13-18 (G1-1) displays a background image 018SG280 representing space, a character image 018SGA1 representing the ally character A-1, and a planned ball output counter display 018SG281 representing the planned ball output number that will be awarded in the big win game state that displays the planned ball output number, and the post-event performance B begins. In addition, as a light-emitting performance, the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12 are lit up based on the light-emitting pattern LP4-4, and as a sound performance, BGM is output from the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound pattern BP4-4.

Next, in the case of SP reach performance D, as shown in FIG. 13-18 (G1), a character image 018SGA1 showing ally character A-1 and a character image 018SGX1 showing enemy character X-1 are displayed, an image of ally character A-1 attacking enemy character X-1 is displayed, and an additional ball count display 018SG282 (e.g., "+50") is displayed in response to the attack, and the displayed planned number of balls is added to the counter value displayed on the planned number of balls counter display 018SG281.

In the case of SP reach performance E, as shown in FIG. 13-18 (G2), a character image 018SGA1 showing ally character A-1 and a character image 018SGX2 showing enemy character X-2 are displayed, an image of ally character A-1 attacking enemy character X-2 is displayed, and an additional ball count display 018SG282 (e.g., "+50") is displayed in response to the attack, and the displayed planned number of balls is added to the counter value displayed on the planned number of balls counter display 018SG281.

Then, as shown in FIG. 13-18 (G1-2), when the counter value displayed on the planned ball count counter display 018SG281 reaches a predetermined value (e.g., "300"), a button image 018SG283 that resembles the push button 31B, an operation prompt display 018SG284 such as "Press!!", and a gauge display 018SG285 showing the remaining valid operation period are displayed, and an operation prompt display that encourages a single press of the push button 31B is executed.

Next, in the case of SP Reach performance D, as shown in FIG. 13-19 (G1-3), when the pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected before the specified operation valid period has elapsed, or when the operation valid period has elapsed without the pressing operation being detected, the character image 018SGA1 and the character image 018SGX1 are displayed, and the friendly character A-1 attacks the enemy character X-1, while the counter value of the expected number of balls to be played counter display 018SG281 is variably displayed. In addition, as a light-emitting performance, the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12 are lit up based on the light-emitting pattern LP4-5, and as a sound performance, background music and sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound pattern BP4-5.

On the other hand, in the case of SP Reach performance E, as shown in FIG. 13-19 (G1-4), when the pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected before the specified operation valid period has elapsed, or when the operation valid period has elapsed without the pressing operation being detected, the character image 018SGA1 and the character image 018SGX2 are displayed, and the friendly character A-1 attacks the enemy character X-2, while the counter value of the expected ball number counter display 018SG281 is variably displayed. In addition, as a light-emitting performance, the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12 are lit up based on the light-emitting pattern LP4-6, and as a sound performance, background music, sound effects, and voices are output from the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound pattern BP4-6.

Then, as shown in FIG. 13-19 (G1-5), a character image 018SGA1 and a special image 018SGXZ of the attacked enemy character X-2 disappearing and becoming a star after being blown away are displayed, and a planned ball number counter display 018SG281 is enlarged and displayed in the center of the display screen, and a predetermined counter value (for example, "750", which is the planned number of balls that can be obtained in the case of a "6R jackpot") is displayed frozen.

As shown in Figure 13-19 (G3), in the case of a jackpot B (6R jackpot), the counter value displayed on the planned ball count counter display 018SG281 is not updated and the game is controlled to the jackpot game state.

Also, as shown in FIG. 13-19 (G4), in the case of a jackpot C (10R jackpot), the counter value displayed on the expected ball count counter display 018SG281 is updated to a predetermined counter value (for example, "1500"), and then the game is controlled to the jackpot game state.

(SP reach performance type determination table)
Next, the SP reach performance type determination table used in determining the SP reach performance type in the SP reach performance type determination process executed by the performance control CPU 120 when the determined variation pattern is the SP reach variation pattern in the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the performance control process shown in Fig. 7 will be described. Fig. 13-20 shows (A) the SP reach performance type determination table A, (B) the SP reach performance type determination table B, and (C) the SP reach performance type determination table C.

In the SP reach performance type determination process, for example, a random number (0 to 99) for determining the SP reach performance type is extracted, and the SP reach performance type is determined using one of the SP reach performance type determination tables A to C shown in Figure 13-20.

In the SP reach performance type determination table, as shown in Figures 13-20 (A) to (C), different judgment values are assigned to each of the SP reach performance types for "jackpot C (10R)", "jackpot B (6R)", "jackpot A (6R)", and "miss", so that the number of judgment values shown in Figures 13-20 (A) to (C) is the number.

When the fluctuation pattern is SP Reach α, the SP Reach performance type determination table A shown in Figure 13-20 (A) is used. Specifically, in the case of "jackpot B (6R)", 100 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PA-1". In the case of "jackpot A (6R)", 100 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PA-1". In the case of "miss", 100 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PA-2".

When the fluctuation pattern is SP Reach β, the SP Reach performance type determination table B shown in FIG. 13-20 (B) is used. Specifically, in the case of "Big Hit B (6R)", 30 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PB-1", and 70 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PC-1". In the case of "Big Hit A (6R)", 70 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PB-1", and 30 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PC-1". In the case of "Miss", 70 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PB-2", and 30 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PC-2".

In other words, when the SP Reach β jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined in a low base state, if the jackpot type is "Jackpot B (6R)," which is more advantageous to the player than "Jackpot A (6R)," SP Reach presentation C is determined at a higher rate than SP Reach presentation B.

In addition, when the fluctuation pattern is SP Reach γ, the SP Reach performance type determination table C shown in FIG. 13-20 (C) is used. Specifically, in the case of "jackpot C (10R)", 40 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PD-1", and 60 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PE-1". In the case of "jackpot B (6R)", 60 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PD-1", and 40 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PE-1". In the case of "miss", 60 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PD-2", and 40 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PE-2".

In other words, when the SP Reach γ jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined in a high base state, if the jackpot type is "jackpot C (10R)," which is more advantageous to the player than "jackpot B (6R)," SP Reach performance E is determined at a higher rate than SP Reach performance D.

(Action and Effects)
As described above, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a first specific performance (for example, SP reach performance B) that displays the enemy character X-1 and notifies whether or not the game state is controlled to a jackpot game state using the enemy character X-1, and a second specific performance (for example, SP reach performance A) that notifies whether or not the game state is controlled to a jackpot game state without displaying an enemy character, and when a jackpot is notified in the SP reach performance, it can execute a "movable body performance" as a special performance during the execution period of the SP reach performance, and the execution of the movable body performance in the SP reach performance B can be executed. During this period, a character image 018SGX1 is displayed together with an effect image 018SG250B related to the movement of the movable body 32, and during the period in which the movable body performance in SP reach performance A is executed, an effect image 018SG250B in a manner common to SP reach performance B is displayed while the character image 018SGX1 is not displayed, and the lighting pattern of the movable body LED 208 in the movable body performance is lighting pattern LP3-2 which is common to both the case in which the movable body performance is executed in SP reach performance B and the case in which the movable body performance is executed in SP reach performance A.

By doing this, the operation mode of the movable body 32 in the movable body performance and the light emission mode of the movable body LED 208 are made common between SP reach performance B, in which an enemy character is displayed, and SP reach performance A, in which an enemy character is not displayed, thereby reducing manufacturing costs, while increasing the correlation between the SP reach performance and the movable body performance depending on whether or not an enemy character is displayed during the execution period of the movable body performance, thereby improving the performance effect.

More specifically, in the SP reach performance B and SP reach performance A, which have different performance modes, the execution timing and the operation mode of the movable body 32 for the movable body performance performed during the SP reach performance are common, while the display mode for the effect image 018SG250B corresponds to each SP reach performance, thereby preventing the flow of the SP reach performance from being interrupted by the movable body performance.

In this embodiment, an example is given in which SP reach performance B is applied as the first specific performance, but the present invention is not limited to this, and can also be applied to any of SP reach performances C to E.

The period during which the movable body performance is performed includes a first period and a second period that follows the first period, and while the performance mode in the first period is common to SP reach performances B to E and SP reach performance A (the attack image 018SG250 in FIG. 13-14(C) is common), the performance mode in the second period is different between SP reach performances B to E and SP reach performance A (the image shown in FIG. 13-14(D1) is different from the image shown in FIG. 13-14(D2 to D5)). By doing this, the performance mode is common up until the first period, which further reduces manufacturing costs, while it is unclear until the first period whether it is SP reach performance B to E or SP reach performance A, which increases the performance interest of the SP reach performance.

In addition, as an SP reach performance, it is possible to execute an SP reach performance E in which an enemy X-2 different from enemy character X-1 is displayed, and the rate at which it is controlled to the jackpot state differs when SP reach performance B is executed and when SP reach performance E is executed. In other words, when the variable display result is a jackpot in a low base state, the determination rate of the SP reach β fluctuation pattern that can execute the SP reach performance B is 300/997, and when the variable display result is a jackpot in a high base state, the determination rate of the SP reach γ fluctuation pattern that can execute the SP reach performance E is 800/997. In the SP reach performance C, during the execution period of the movable body performance executed when a jackpot is announced, an effect image 018SG250B common to the SP reach performance B according to the movement of the movable body 32 is displayed, and a character image 018SGX2 showing the enemy character X2 is displayed, and the light emission pattern of the movable body LED 208 in the movable body performance executed in the SP reach performance C is the light emission pattern LP3-2 common to the light emission pattern of the movable body LED 208 in the movable body performance executed in the SP reach performance B.

By doing this, the operating mode of the movable body 32 in the movable body performance and the light emission pattern of the movable body LED 208 can be standardized to reduce manufacturing costs, while increasing the number of SP reach performances with different rates of control to the jackpot state, allowing players to focus on which SP reach performance will be executed, thereby increasing interest in the game.

In addition, the enemy character X1 displayed in the movable body performance executed in the SP reach performance B is displayed in a manner similar to the effect image, thereby enhancing the relationship between the enemy character and the effect image, thereby enhancing the performance effect of the movable body performance.

In addition, the presentation control CPU 120 can execute a presentation in which an enemy character is displayed and whether or not the game state is controlled to a jackpot using the enemy character in a first mode (e.g., SP reach presentation B) and a second mode (e.g., SP reach presentation D), and can execute a movable body presentation during the execution period of the SP reach presentations B and D (ta3 to ta4 of ta2 to ta5), and during the execution period of the movable body presentation, in both the SP reach presentation B and the SP reach presentation D, a common event related to the movement of the movable body 32 is displayed. Character image 018SGX1 is displayed along with the usual effect image (for example, effect image 018SG250B), and in the case of SP reach performance B, post performance A in which no enemy character is displayed is executed instead of post performance B using enemy character X-1 that was displayed in the SP reach performance (see Figure 13-17), while in the case of SP reach performance D, post performance B using enemy character X-1 that was displayed in the SP reach performance (see Figures 13-18 and 13-19) is executed.

By doing this, the enemy characters and the movable body 32 in the movable body performance are made common between SP reach performance B and SP reach performance D, thereby reducing manufacturing costs, while displaying the common enemy character X-1 in different performances increases the correlation between the SP reach performances B, D and the movable body performance, and between the SP reach performances B, D and the post-performances A, B, improving the performance effect.

More specifically, even in the post-performance after the SP reach performance notifies the player of a confirmed jackpot, the character displayed in the SP reach performance is used to notify the player of the results of the re-change of the decorative pattern and the planned number of balls to be dispensed. Therefore, regardless of the type of SP reach performance, notifications such as the re-change result notification and the planned number of balls to be dispensed are made in common, while the display content corresponds to the type of SP reach performance, making it possible to show the SP reach performance to the post-performance as a continuous performance.

The performance control CPU 120 can also execute a special performance (for example, a performance in which the enemy character disappears) that changes the enemy character X-1 into a special form after the movable body performance executed in the SP reach performance. In the SP reach performance B, in the jackpot announcement before the post-performance A, a character image 018SGX1Z is displayed in which the defeated enemy character X-1 fades out and becomes invisible (see FIG. 13-15 (E2)). In the SP reach performance D, in the post-performance B, a special image 018SGXZ is displayed in which the attacked enemy character X-2 disappears and becomes a star after being blown away (see FIG. 13-19 (G1-5)). In this way, the timing at which the special performance is executed changes depending on the type of SP reach performance, improving the performance effect.

In this embodiment, the special effects are exemplified as those in which the defeated enemy character X-1 fades out and becomes invisible, and those in which the attacked enemy character X-2 disappears and becomes a star after being thrown away, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be those in which the enemy character is hidden by framing out, or those in which an image indicating that the character has been hidden (for example, a star or effect image) is displayed. Also, various modifications are possible as long as the effect does not make the character invisible, but rather increases transparency, decreases brightness, or changes the image, or otherwise changes the appearance.

In addition, if SP reach performance B is executed when the SP reach β jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined in a low base state, the probability that it will be controlled to "jackpot B (6R)" (second advantageous state), which is more advantageous to the player than "jackpot A (6R)" (first advantageous state), is 30%, and if SP reach performance D is executed when the SP reach γ jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined in a high base state, the probability that it will be controlled to "jackpot C (10R)" (second advantageous state), which is more advantageous to the player than "jackpot B (6R)" (first advantageous state), is 40%. By doing this, it is possible to draw attention to whether SP reach performance B or D will be executed, thereby increasing interest in the game.

In addition, the presentation control CPU 120 is capable of executing a first specific presentation (e.g., SP reach presentation D) that displays an enemy character X-1 and an ally character A-1 and notifies the player whether or not the player will be controlled to a jackpot game state using the enemy character X-1 and the ally character A-1, and a second specific presentation (e.g., SP reach presentation E) that displays an enemy character X-2 different from the enemy character X-1 and an ally character A-1 and notifies the player whether or not the player will be controlled to a jackpot game state using the enemy character X-2 and the ally character A-1, and when a movable body presentation is executed in the SP reach presentation D, the enemy character X-1 and the ally character A-1 displayed in the SP reach presentation D are displayed and operated. By this, it is possible to execute a post-performance B which announces the number of balls scheduled to be awarded in the jackpot game state which has been notified that it will be controlled in the SP reach performance D, and when a movable body performance is executed in the SP reach performance E, it is possible to execute a post-performance B which announces the number of balls scheduled to be awarded in the jackpot game state which has been notified that it will be controlled in the SP reach performance E by displaying and moving the enemy character X-2 and ally character A-1 displayed in the SP reach performance E, and at least the movement mode of the ally character A-1 is common between the post-performance B corresponding to the SP reach performance D and the post-performance B corresponding to the SP reach performance E (see Figures 13-18 to 13-19).

By doing this, the same ally character is used in the SP reach performance and the post-performance, which reduces manufacturing costs while making it easier to understand the relationship between the SP reach performance and the post-performance, thereby enhancing the performance effect.

In addition, the background image 018SG280 representing space is common to the post-performance B of SP reach performance D and the post-performance B of SP reach performance E (see Figures 13-18 to 13-19), so the background image can also be made common, further reducing manufacturing costs.

Also, ally character A-1 is common to both post-show B of SP reach show D and post-show B of SP reach show E (see Figures 13-18 to 13-19), which allows the special characters to be common as well, further reducing manufacturing costs.

In addition, in post-performance B corresponding to SP reach performance D, images of enemy character X-1 and ally character A-1 fighting are displayed simultaneously, and in post-performance B corresponding to SP reach performance E, images of enemy character X-2 and ally character A-1 fighting are displayed simultaneously (see Figures 13-18 to 13-19). As each character is displayed simultaneously, the impression of post-performance B is enhanced and the performance effect is improved.

The performance control CPU 120 can also execute, as post-performances, a first post-performance (e.g., post-performance B) of a performance aspect associated with the SP reach performance D when a movable body performance is executed in the SP reach performance D, a second post-performance (e.g., post-performance B) of a performance aspect associated with the SP reach performance E when a movable body performance is executed in the SP reach performance E, and a third post-performance (e.g., post-performance A) of a performance aspect associated with the SP reach performance A when a movable body performance is executed in the SP reach performance A, and the proportion controlled to the second advantageous state differs depending on whether the SP reach performance D, SP reach performance E, or SP reach performance A is executed.

In other words, when the SP Reach γ jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined in a high base state, the percentage of the player being controlled to "jackpot C (10R)" (second advantageous state), which is more advantageous to the player than "jackpot B (6R)" (first advantageous state), is 40% when SP Reach performance D is executed, and 60% when SP Reach performance E is executed, and when the SP Reach β jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined in a low base state, the percentage of the player being controlled to "jackpot B (6R)" (second advantageous state), which is more advantageous to the player than "jackpot A (6R)" (first advantageous state), is 100% when SP Reach performance A is executed.

By doing this, not only is a jackpot notified by the SP reach performance, but the proportion of the player being controlled to the second advantageous state differs depending on which SP reach performance is executed, so that the player's attention to the SP reach performance can be appropriately increased, increasing the player's interest in the game.

In the above embodiment, the ally character and enemy character displayed in the SP reach performance D are displayed as the first post-performance of the performance aspect related to the first specific performance, so that the first post-performance is related to the first specific performance, the ally character and enemy character displayed in the SP reach performance E are displayed as the second post-performance of the performance aspect related to the second specific performance, so that the second post-performance is related to the second specific performance, and the ally character and enemy character are not displayed in the SP reach performance A and the third post-performance is related to the third specific performance, so that the third post-performance is related to the third specific performance. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the third post-performance may be related to the third specific performance by displaying the characters displayed in the SP reach performance as the third post-performance of the performance aspect related to the third specific performance.

In other words, a post-performance related to a specific performance is a performance that has at least some of the display aspects in common with the specific performance, and the common performance aspects are that a character is displayed or not displayed, and the type of character displayed in the specific performance and the post-performance may be different. Also, there may be four or more types of specific performance and post-performance.

In addition, in this embodiment, an example is given in which the first and second specific effects are executable in a low base state, and the third specific effect is executable in a high base state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first, second, and third specific effects may all be effects that can be executed in a low base state, or may all be effects that can be executed in a high base state. In other words, the first, second, and third specific effects may be effects that can be determined regardless of the game state.

In addition, as the third specific effect, it may be possible to execute an SP reach effect F (for example, a battle effect with an enemy character X-3 different from enemy characters X-1 and X-2) performed in a high base state, in which case the proportion controlled to a jackpot C (10R) may be SP reach effect F (50%) > SP reach effect E (35%) > SP reach effect D (15%). Furthermore, the post-effect C (third post-effect) performed when a jackpot is announced in the SP reach effect F may have a longer effect period than the post-effects A and B.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned SP reach performance F, for example, it is preferable that the light emission pattern of the movable body performance shown in FIG. 13-6 (B) is the light emission pattern LP3-2 common to the SP reach performances A to E, and the sound pattern of the movable body performance shown in FIG. 13-6 (C) is the sound pattern BP0-1 to BP3 common to the SP reach performances A to E.

In the above embodiment, as a second advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state, for example, an advantageous state in which the jackpot game state is more advantageous than the first advantageous state (for example, a 10R jackpot C with a larger number of balls expected to be dispensed) or an advantageous state in which the control state after the jackpot game state is more advantageous than the first advantageous state (for example, a jackpot B or jackpot C that is controlled to a high probability state after the jackpot ends) is applied is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the second advantageous state may include a state in which the number of balls dispensed, the number of game rounds, the control period of the high probability state, the time-saving state, or the small jackpot state, the fall rate of the probability fluctuation, etc. are more advantageous than the first advantageous state. It may also be an advantageous state in which the presentation mode of the jackpot game state or the end of the jackpot game state is advantageous to the player.

In addition, when applying a pachinko gaming machine 1 with feature portion 018SG to a pachinko gaming machine 1 with feature portions 069G and 099G, for example, it is possible to apply the SP reach performance A in feature portion 018SG to the SP reaches A and B in feature portions 069G and 099G, apply the SP reach performances B and C in feature portion 018SG to the SP reach C in feature portions 069G and 099G, and apply the SP reach performances D and E in feature portion 018SG to the SP reach D in feature portions 069G and 099G.

(Explanation of Variations and Applications of Feature 018SG)
In the above-mentioned characteristic section 018SG, an example is given of a form in which a big win game state is applied as an advantageous state for the player, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a small win game state, a time-saving state (high base state), a special state, etc. may also be applied.

In addition, in the characteristic part 018SG, a form in which the movable body 32 is applied is exemplified as an example of a movable body, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a movable body other than the movable body 32 provided on the game board, a movable body provided on the game machine frame 3, etc. may be applied.

In addition, in the characteristic part 018SG, as a specific effect that notifies whether or not the game is controlled to an advantageous state, the SP reach effects A to E that notify whether or not the game is controlled to a jackpot game state are applied as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this, and normal reach effects, post-event effects, etc. may also be applied.

In addition, in the characteristic part 018SG, an example was given of a form in which enemy characters X-1 and X-2, who confront friendly characters A-1 and A-2, are used as specific characters or special characters, but the present invention is not limited to this, and enemy characters other than those mentioned above, or other characters that do not confront friendly characters, etc. may also be applicable. Also, characters made up of images of real people may be used.

In addition, in the characteristic part 018SG, an example is given in which ally characters A-1 and A-2 who face off against enemy characters X-1 and X-2 are used as special characters, but the present invention is not limited to this, and ally characters other than those mentioned above, other characters that do not face off against enemy characters, etc. may also be applicable. Also, characters made up of live-action images of people may also be used.

In addition, in the characteristic part 018SG, as a specific effect in which a character is displayed, an example is given of a form in which SP reach effects A to E are applied in which a special character (ally character) faces off against a specific character or special character (enemy character), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the special character, specific character, or special character may be multiple ally characters or enemy characters that cooperate with each other without facing each other, or multiple characters that do not face off against each other.

In addition, in the characteristic part 018SG, an example is given of a form in which a movable body effect is applied as a special effect in which a movable body is moved and an illuminating body is illuminated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and an effect in which a movable body other than the movable body 32 is moved may be applied. Also, the operating mode of the movable body 32 can be changed in various ways.

In addition, in the characteristic part 018SG, the timing of the movable body performance was set to be before the big win confirmation notification in the latter stages of the SP reach performances A to E, but this can be changed in various ways, such as to the middle stages of the SP reach performances A to E. Also, the movable body performance could be started in response to the player's operation of the push button 31B, but it may also be started at a predetermined timing regardless of operation.

In addition, in the characteristic part 018SG, in the movable body performance, the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1-9L12, 9R1-9R12 emit light, sound effects are output, and the push button 31B vibrates in response to the movement of the movable body 32. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be possible to execute a light guide plate light emitting performance using a light guide plate device in response to the movement of the movable body 32. In this case, it is preferable that the light emitting pattern of the light guide plate device is common to the SP reach performances A-E, like the light emitting pattern of the LEDs.

In addition, in the characteristic part 018SG, an example is given in which the effect image 018SG250B representing "impact" is applied as an effect image related to the movement of the movable body 32, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be, for example, an effect image in a manner related to the movement mode (e.g., vibration) of the movable body 32 (e.g., an effect image representing an impact) or an effect image in a manner emphasizing the vibrating movable body 32.

In addition, in the characteristic part 018SG, as a post-effect executed after the movable body effect as a special effect, a post-effect A that executes a re-variable display of the confirmed decorative pattern that is temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and a post-effect B that notifies the number of balls expected to be awarded in the jackpot game state that is notified using the friendly characters and enemy characters that appeared in the SP reach effect are exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect that is executed after the special effect is not limited to the above-mentioned post-effect, and for example, a jackpot mid-effect executed in the jackpot game state or a small jackpot mid-effect executed in the small jackpot game state may be applied.

Specifically, in the above embodiment, before the variable display ends, a post-event effect B is executed to announce the number of balls scheduled to be awarded in the notified jackpot game state, but it may be possible to execute a post-event effect to announce the number of balls scheduled to be awarded in the notified jackpot game state during the fanfare period from the start of the jackpot game state to the start of the round game, or during the round interval between game rounds.

In addition, in the characteristic part 018SG, in the post-performance B, the expected number of balls to be awarded in a jackpot is reported in an identifiable manner as the game value information that can identify the amount of game value to be awarded in the jackpot game state that is notified to be controlled by the SP reach performances D and E, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of game rounds, etc. may also be reported.

In addition, in the feature section 018SG, a form was exemplified in which the planned number of balls to be awarded in the jackpot game state that was notified to be controlled by the SP reach effects D and E in the post-performance B was notified, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the jackpot is consecutively won a predetermined number of times (e.g., 2 times) or more, the total number of balls won from the first jackpot game state to the current time may be notified instead of or in addition to the planned number of balls. Furthermore, when the total number of balls is added in the planned ball addition part in the post-performance B or when the planned number of balls is notified in the planned ball notification part, it may be possible to notify that the total number of balls has exceeded a predetermined number (e.g., 2500 balls, 5000 balls, 7500 balls, 10000 balls, etc.).

In addition, in the characteristic section 018SG, an example was given of a form in which the types of friendly and enemy characters faced in the SP reach performances A to E are different, but the movement mode of the movable body 32 in the movable body performance and the display mode of the effect image 018SG250B are common; however, the present invention is not limited to this, and the background image in the SP reach performances A to E, the type and execution rate of various preview performances such as chance up, the battle showdown period, the movement mode and display mode of the characters, etc. may be varied depending on the variable display result, and even in this case, it is preferable that the movement mode of the movable body 32 in the movable body performance and the display mode of the effect image 018SG250B are common.

In addition, in the characteristic part 018SG, an example was given in which the execution period of the planned ball output addition part and the planned ball output notification part in the post-event performance B is common to the SP reach performances D and E, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the execution period of the planned ball output addition part and the planned ball output notification part may be made different depending on the type of jackpot, that is, the size of the planned number of balls to be output.

In addition, in the characteristic part 018SG, the SP reach effects A to C are executable in a low base state, and the SP reach effects D and E are executable in a high base state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the various specific effects (SP reach effects) described above may all be effects that can be executed in a low base state, or may all be effects that can be executed in a high base state. In other words, they may be executable in any type of game state.

The characteristic parts 069SG, 099SG, and 018SG in the embodiment of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, but the specific configuration is not limited to these examples, and the present invention also includes changes and additions that do not deviate from the gist of the present invention.

In addition, in the above embodiment, a pachinko game machine 1 is given as an example of a game machine, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the present invention can also be applied to so-called enclosed game machines in which a predetermined number of game balls are enclosed inside the game machine so that they can be circulated, and the number of loaned balls loaned in response to a loan request by a player and the number of prize balls awarded in response to winning are added, while the number of game balls used in the game is subtracted and stored. In these enclosed game machines, scores or points are awarded to the player rather than game balls, and these awarded scores or points correspond to the game value.

In addition, in the above embodiment, spherical gaming balls (pachinko balls) were used as an example of gaming media, but the gaming media is not limited to spherical gaming media and may be non-spherical gaming media such as medals.

In addition, in the above embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine was applied as an example of a gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to a slot machine in which, for example, a game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using gaming value, one game ends when a variable display result is derived from a variable display device that can variably display multiple types of identifiable patterns, and a prize can be won depending on the variable display result derived from the variable display device.

The gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to slot machines and other enclosed gaming machines that enclose gaming media and award points based on winning. Furthermore, a gaming machine capable of playing games is one that at least allows playing games, and is not limited to pachinko gaming machines or slot machines, and may be a general game machine.

Below, as another embodiment, we will explain how time-saving control is performed when a time-saving pattern is displayed as a stopped variable display result, which was not implemented in the above embodiment. More specifically, when the result of the random number value determination process at the time of winning is "miss (time-saving)," the result of the variable display becomes a miss (time-saving) display result, and the game is controlled to the time-saving state.

The correspondence with the claims is as follows.
The non-special state is the normal state (a state based on low probability). The first special state is a time-saving state that is controlled after the favorable state (jackpot) ends. The second special state is a time-saving state that is controlled by executing a predetermined number of miss variations without being controlled by the favorable state. The third special state is a time-saving state that is controlled when a miss (time-saving) display result, which is part of the miss display result, appears.

In the other embodiments below, this is the time-saving state that is controlled when "Time-saving A" to "Time-saving D" are part of the bad display results, that is, a bad (time-saving) display result, and corresponds to the third special state.

The other embodiments described below have the same configuration as those shown in Figures 1 to 5 and 8 of the above-mentioned embodiment, and perform the same control.

Figure 14 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol process executed in step S25 shown in Figure 5. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning judgment process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a start winning, store the reserved information in a specified area of the RAM 102, and update the reserved memory number. When a start winning occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of big win) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as reserved information. In addition, a process for predicting and judging the display result and the variation pattern based on the extracted random number value may be executed. After the reserved information and the reserved memory number are stored, a transmission setting is performed to transmit a performance control command to the performance control board 12 to specify the judgment results such as the occurrence of a start winning, the reserved memory number, and the predictive judgment. The performance control command at the time of the start winning that has been transmitted and set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special pattern process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 5.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S120 depending on the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. Note that in each step of the special symbol process (steps S110 to S120), a transmission setting is made to transmit a performance control command corresponding to each step to the performance control board 12.

The normal special pattern processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "0" (initial value). In this normal special pattern processing, a determination is made as to whether or not to start the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game based on the presence or absence of reserved information. In addition, in the normal special pattern processing, based on a random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special pattern or the decorative pattern is to be a "big win" or a "small win", and if it is a "big win", the type of big win is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the normal special pattern processing, a determined special pattern (either a big win pattern, a small win pattern, or a miss pattern) to be stopped and displayed in the special pattern game is set in response to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "1", and the normal special pattern processing is terminated. Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed in priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also called special pattern 2 priority consumption). Also, the order in which the game balls enter the first start winning slot and the second start winning slot may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special game may be met in the order in which the balls enter (also called winning order consumption).

When making various decisions based on random number values, various tables stored in ROM 101 (tables in which decision values compared with random number values are assigned to decision results) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the performance control board 12. On the performance control board 12, various tables are stored in ROM 121.

The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of determining the fluctuation pattern to one of multiple types using a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a pre-determined result of whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when the fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "2" and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern specifies the execution time of the special game (special game variation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbols), the manner of the variable display of the decorative symbols (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the content of the presentation during the variable display of the decorative symbols (type of reach presentation, etc.), and is also called the variable display pattern.

The special pattern change process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "2". This special pattern change process includes a process for making settings to change the special pattern in the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B, and a process for measuring the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change. It also determines whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special pattern change time corresponding to the change pattern. Then, when the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change reaches the special pattern change time, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "3", and the special pattern change process ends.

The special pattern stop process of step S113 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "3". This special pattern stop process includes a process for setting the first special pattern display device 4A or the second special pattern display device 4B to stop the fluctuation of the special pattern and to stop displaying (deriving) the confirmed special pattern that is the display result of the special pattern. If the display result is a "big win", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, if the big win flag is off and the display result is a "small win", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is a "miss", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "0". If the display result is a "small win" or "miss", when the time-saving state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of times is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special pattern process flag is updated, the special pattern stop process ends.

The pre-opening process for the jackpot in step S114 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "4". This pre-opening process for the jackpot includes a process for setting the jackpot opening port to open by starting the execution of a round in the jackpot game state based on the display result being "jackpot". When the jackpot opening port is opened, a process for supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening port is executed. At this time, for example, depending on the type of jackpot, the maximum open period for the jackpot opening port and the maximum number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5" and the pre-opening process for the jackpot is completed.

The jackpot opening process of step S115 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process for measuring the time that has elapsed since the jackpot opening was opened, and a process for determining whether or not it is time to return the jackpot opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23. When the jackpot opening is to be returned to a closed state, a process for stopping the supply of a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening door is executed, and then the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "6", and the jackpot opening process is terminated.

The post-jackpot release process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "6". This post-jackpot release process includes a process for determining whether the number of times the round that opens the big prize opening has been executed has reached a set upper limit, and a process for making settings to end the jackpot game state when the upper limit has been reached. When the number of times the round has been executed has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5", whereas when the number of times the round has been executed has reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "7". When the value of the special chart process flag is updated, the post-jackpot release process ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "7". This jackpot end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which an ending presentation is executed as a presentation operation that notifies the end of the jackpot game state has elapsed, and a process of making various settings for starting special rate control or time-saving control in response to the end of the jackpot game state. When such settings are made, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The small win pre-opening process in step S118 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "8". This small win pre-opening process includes a process for setting the large prize opening to an open state in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "9", and the small win pre-opening process ends.

The small win open processing of step S119 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "9". This small win open processing includes a process for measuring the time that has elapsed since the large prize opening was opened, and a process for determining whether or not it is time to return the large prize opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time. When the large prize opening is returned to a closed state and it is time to end the small win game state, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "10" and the small win open processing ends.

The small win end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "10". This small win end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which the presentation operation that notifies the end of the small win game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small win game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before the small win game state is entered is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small win game state has elapsed, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0", and the small win end process ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured so that the winning probability of a jackpot and the ball payout rate change according to the setting value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the winning probability of a jackpot and the ball payout rate change by using a display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the setting value. For example, the setting value is made up of six levels from 1 to 6, with 6 being the highest winning probability of a jackpot, and the winning probability of a jackpot decreasing as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. In this example, when the setting value is set to 6, the player has the highest advantage, and the advantage decreases stepwise as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. If the winning probability of a jackpot changes according to the setting value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the setting value. The winning probability of a jackpot is constant regardless of the setting value, while the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may change according to the setting value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured to be able to set one of a number of setting values that have different degrees of advantage for the player. The setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is notified by sending a setting value designation command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

Figure 15 shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table. Figure 15 (A) shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, and Figure 15 (B) shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table for the second special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol. The display result judgment table is a collection of data stored in ROM 101. In the display result judgment table, a winning judgment value compared with the random number value MR1 according to a set value is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is updated randomly within the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result judgment table, a display result judgment table common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be used.

In the display result judgment table, when the game state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more judgment values are assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" than when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state). As a result, when the pachinko game machine 1 is in a high probability state such as a probability variable state in which probability variable control is performed, the probability of determining that the game state will be controlled to a jackpot game state is higher than when the game state is a low probability state such as a normal state or a time-saving state.

In the first special chart display result judgment table, judgment values are assigned so that the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "small hit" and controlled to a small hit game state is the same regardless of the game state or the setting value. In the second special chart display result judgment table, judgment values are assigned so that the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "small hit" and controlled to a small hit game state is the same value different from that in the first special chart display result judgment table, regardless of the game state or the setting value. Note that the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "small hit" and controlled to a small hit game state may be different depending on the setting value. The probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "small hit" and controlled to a small hit game state may be the same regardless of the variable special chart.

In the first special chart display result judgment table and the second special chart display result judgment table, when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit judgment values from 1020 to 1237 is set as the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining a jackpot regardless of the setting value. When the setting value is 1, 1020 to 1237 is assigned to "jackpot" and only the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining a jackpot is set, while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value.

In the first special chart display result judgment table and the second special chart display result judgment table, when the game state is a probability variable state, the hit judgment value range from 1020 to 1346 is set as the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining a jackpot regardless of the setting value. When the setting value is 1, 1020 to 1346 is assigned to "jackpot", and only the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining a jackpot is set, while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value from 1346 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value.

In the display result judgment table for the first special chart, when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit judgment values from 32767 to 33094 is set as the common numerical range of small hit judgment values for determining small hits regardless of the set value. The small hit judgment value is set to a numerical range that is different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit judgment value from overlapping with the range of the big hit judgment value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result judgment table for the first special chart, when the game state is a special probability state, the range of 32767 to 33094 among the hit judgment values is set as a common numerical range of small hit judgment values for determining small hits regardless of the set value, just as when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state. The small hit judgment value is set to a numerical range that is different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit judgment value from overlapping with the range of the big hit judgment value that changes according to each set value.

In the second special chart display result judgment table, when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit judgment values from 32767 to 33421 is set as the common numerical range of small hit judgment values for determining small hits regardless of the set value. The small hit judgment value is set to a numerical range that is different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit judgment value from overlapping with the range of big hit judgment values that changes depending on each set value.

In the second special chart display result judgment table, when the game state is a special probability state, the range of 32767 to 33421 among the hit judgment values is set as a common numerical range of small hit judgment values for determining small hits regardless of the set value, just as when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state. The small hit judgment value is set to a numerical range that is different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit judgment value from overlapping with the range of the big hit judgment value that changes according to each set value.

The set values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be five or less or seven or more. The smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it may be for the player. The game characteristics may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the game characteristics are such that the probability of a jackpot in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability of ... On the other hand, the game may be of a type in which the rate at which the game ball passes through a predetermined switch during a jackpot game varies depending on the variable special chart (so-called V-type), and when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the probability of a jackpot is 1/320 and the probability of a small jackpot is 1/50, and the game may be of a type in which the game ball passes through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 during a high base (during time-saving control) (so-called one-type two-type mixed type). When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any of 1 to 3, the game is the same, but a setting may be provided in which the probability of a jackpot or small jackpot is higher than when these set values are any of 1 to 3, but the number of prize balls that can be obtained during a jackpot game is smaller (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any of 4 to 6). When the game is changed depending on the set value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the setting value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as a presentation switch (a switch for executing a predetermined presentation each time the game ball passes through a predetermined area), and when the setting value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch may be used as a game switch (a switch for controlling the game state to a special bonus state or a jackpot game state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch).

The jackpot type may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of judgment values in the jackpot type judgment table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The fluctuation pattern may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of judgment values in the fluctuation pattern judgment table. Alternatively, the fluctuation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The execution rate of normal reaches and super reaches may differ depending on the set value, so that the setting value may be suggested by the frequency at which normal reaches and super reaches are executed. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reaches and super reaches may be common regardless of the set value. In addition, any setting suggestion performance may be possible at different rates depending on the set value.

Figure 16 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in step S76 of Figure 9 as the performance control process processing. In the performance control process processing shown in Figure 16, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a look-ahead preview setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead preview setting process, for example, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. for executing the look-ahead preview performance are made based on the performance control command at the time of the start winning transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, processing is executed to display the hold display based on the number of hold memories specified from the performance control command.

After executing the processing of step S161, the performance control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processing of steps S170 to S177 as described below, depending on the value of a performance process flag provided in, for example, RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is a process that is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process includes a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. If it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 should be started, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "1" and the variable display start waiting process ends.

The variable display start setting process of step S171 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern, whether or not various performances such as reach performances and various advance notice performances are executed, and the mode and execution start timing are determined based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the performance control command. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute a performance) that reflects the determined result is set. After that, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. In response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5.

The variable display performance process of step S172 is a process executed when the performance process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5, to drive the movable body 32, to output voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and to turn on/off/blink the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14, thereby executing various performance controls during the variable display of the decorative pattern. After performing such performance control, for example, in response to the reading of an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern from the performance control pattern, or the reception of a command specifying the stop display of the fixed decorative pattern from the main board 11, the fixed decorative pattern, which is the display result of the decorative pattern, is stopped. When the final decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "3" and the performance process during variable display ends.

The special winning waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "3". In this special winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether or not a performance control command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when a performance control command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state is received, if the command specifies the start of a big win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "6". On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of a small win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small win performance process. Also, when a command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state is not received and the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed, it is judged that the display result in the special game was "miss", and the value of the performance process flag is updated to the initial value "0". Once the value of the performance process flag is updated, the special drawing hit waiting process ends.

The small win presentation process of step S90174 is a process executed when the presentation process flag value is "4". In this small win presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets, for example, a presentation control pattern corresponding to the presentation content in the small win game state, and executes various presentation controls in the small win game state based on the set content. In addition, in the small win presentation process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the small win game state is to be ended, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "5", which is a value corresponding to the small win end presentation, and the small win presentation process is ended.

The small win end presentation process of step S90175 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "5". In this small win end presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a small win game state, and executes various presentation controls at the end of the small win game state based on the settings. After that, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small win end presentation process ends.

The jackpot performance process of step S176 is executed when the performance process flag value is "6". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot gaming state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot gaming state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot performance process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the jackpot gaming state is to end, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "7", which is a value corresponding to the ending performance process, and the jackpot performance process ends.

The ending presentation process of step S177 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "7". In this ending presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a jackpot gaming state, and executes various presentation controls for the ending presentation at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the settings. After that, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending presentation process is terminated.

(Modification of the basic explanation)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes when a prize is won, but it may also be an enclosed type gaming machine that encloses gaming media and awards points when a prize is won.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol showing "- ") may be displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be achieved by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the pattern. Furthermore, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the display result may not include the symbol showing "- ").

In the above basic explanation, a pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as the gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to slot machines (e.g., slot machines equipped with one or more of big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.)) that can play a game in which medals are inserted and a predetermined bet amount is set, multiple types of symbols are rotated in response to the player's operation of the control lever, and when the symbols are stopped in response to the player's operation of the stop button, a specific combination of symbols is formed, and a predetermined number of medals is paid out to the player.

The programs and data for implementing the present invention are not limited to being distributed or provided to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium, but may be distributed by being pre-installed in a storage device of the computer device or the like. Furthermore, the programs and data for implementing the present invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communications processing unit.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory, or by directly executing the game using the hardware resources of another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions of comparison of various percentages such as the execution percentage of a performance (such as "high", "low", "different", etc.) may include one being a percentage of "0%". For example, it also includes one being a percentage of "0%" and the other being a percentage of "100%" or a percentage less than "100%".

(Explanation of the features related to the setting suggestion production)
Hereinafter, a description will be given of a characteristic feature relating to the setting suggestion effect in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In this characteristic feature, a setting suggestion effect that suggests a setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 at a predetermined rate can be executed while the variable display is being executed.

Figure 17-1 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S171 of the performance control process as the variable display start setting processing. In the variable display start setting processing, a stop pattern determination processing is executed (step S201). In the stop pattern determination processing, a combination of decorative patterns that are stopped and displayed in the variable display of decorative patterns, such as the final stop pattern in the variable display of decorative patterns, is determined. Following the stop pattern determination processing, a preview performance determination processing is executed (step S202). The preview performance determination processing makes it possible to determine the preview performance included in the advantageous suggestion performance.

After the preview performance determination process is executed, the performance control pattern is determined to be one of multiple patterns prepared in advance (step S203). The performance control pattern may include a special chart change performance control pattern, a preview performance control pattern, and other control patterns for controlling the execution of various performances. For example, one of the multiple prepared special chart change performance control patterns is selected and set as the pattern to be used in response to the change pattern indicated by the change pattern designation command. Also, one of the multiple prepared preview performance control patterns may be selected and set as the pattern to be used in response to the result of the preview performance determination process in step S202. Note that the special chart change performance control pattern and the preview performance control pattern are not limited to being set as separate performance control patterns, and one performance control pattern corresponding to the combination of execution settings for each performance may be set.

When the performance control pattern is determined in step S203, the initial value of the performance control process timer provided in a predetermined area of RAM 122 (such as the performance control timer setting section) is set in accordance with the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command, for example (step S204). Also, settings are made to start the variation of the decorative patterns, etc. on the screen of the image display device 5 (step S205). At this time, the display control command specified by the display control data included in the performance control pattern (performance control pattern during special pattern variation) determined in step S203 is transmitted to the VDP of the display control section 123, and the variation of the decorative patterns can be started in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the screen of the image display device 5.

Next, the pending display update setting at the start of the variable display is performed (step S206). For example, in the pending display area provided on the screen of the image display device 5, the display part corresponding to the pending number "1" (the display part at the left end) is erased (consumed), and the pending displays in the display parts corresponding to the other pending numbers "2" to "4", etc. are moved (shifted) one by one to the left. This shifts the pending display. In the active display part provided on the screen of the image display device 5, an active display corresponding to the pending display erased (consumed) in the pending display area may be performed. Note that when the number of pending memories is "0", if the variable display is immediately started based on the occurrence of the first start winning or the second start winning, the setting for updating the active display in the active display area may be performed without updating the pending display. After that, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", which is a value corresponding to the performance process during the variable display (step S207), and the variable display start setting process is terminated.

Figure 17-2 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S201 of the variable display start setting process as the stopping symbol determination process. In the stopping symbol determination process, it is determined whether or not a reach performance of a super reach will be executed (step S221). Whether or not a reach performance of a super reach will be executed can be determined based on the fluctuation pattern indicated by the fluctuation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11, for example.

If the reach performance of the super reach is not executed (step S221; No), the final stop pattern in the case of non-reach or normal reach is determined (step S222), and the stop pattern determination process is terminated. In the case of non-reach, the variable display result is "miss". In the case of normal reach, the variable display result may be "jackpot" or may be "miss". In the case of non-reach, where the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern is not a reach state, the final stop pattern is displayed as the determined decorative pattern of the non-reach combination. The final stop pattern in the case of non-reach is determined to be different (mismatched) decorative patterns in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R. In the case of normal reach, where the variable display result is "miss", the final stop pattern in the case of reach miss is displayed as the determined decorative pattern of the reach miss combination. The final stopping pattern in the event of a missed reach is determined to be the same (matching) decorative pattern in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5R. In the event of a normal reach where the variable display result is a "jackpot", the final stopping pattern in the event of a jackpot is the confirmed decorative pattern of the jackpot combination. The final stopping pattern in the event of a jackpot is determined to be the same (matching) decorative pattern in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R.

When the reach effect of the super reach is executed (step S221; Yes), the final stop pattern at the time of the super reach is determined (step S223). At the time of the super reach, the variable display result may be either a "jackpot" or a "miss." At the time of the super reach where the variable display result is a "miss," the final stop pattern at the time of the reach miss is the determined decorative pattern of the reach miss combination. At the time of the jackpot where the variable display result is a "jackpot," the determined decorative pattern of the jackpot combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop pattern at the time of the jackpot.

During a super reach, regardless of whether the variable display result is a "jackpot" or a "miss," the same (matching) decorative symbols are displayed as fixed decorative symbols in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R. The left and right decorative symbols that constitute such a reach miss combination or a jackpot combination are also called reach symbols. The decorative symbols that can be determined as reach symbols may include multiple types of decorative symbols, such as seven types of decorative symbols corresponding to the numbers 1 to 7. The decorative symbols corresponding to the numbers may be only performance images showing the numbers, or may be performance images showing various characters in addition to the numbers. The reach symbol may be determined as one of multiple decorative symbols based on numerical data indicating random numbers for determining the reach symbol, by referring to a reach symbol determination table that is stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 121. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the reach symbol can be updated using one or both of the random counter and the random number circuit 124 provided in the RAM 122.

In the reach symbol determination table, the number of judgment values assigned to the decorative symbols that become the reach symbols may differ depending on whether the variable display result is a "miss" or a "jackpot". For example, when the variable display result is a "miss", the determination rate of the decorative symbol corresponding to the number 1 is the highest, the determination rate of the decorative symbol decreases as the numbers become 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6, and the determination rate of the decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7 is the lowest. In contrast, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", the determination rate of the decorative symbol corresponding to the number 1 is the lowest, the determination rate of the decorative symbol increases as the numbers become 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6, and the determination rate of the decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7 is the highest. In this determination ratio setting, when a decorative pattern corresponding to the number 7 is stopped and displayed as a reach pattern, the variable display result becomes "jackpot" and the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state is the highest, and as the numbers 6, 5, 4, 3, and 2 are displayed, the variable display result becomes "jackpot" and the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state decreases, and when a decorative pattern corresponding to the number 1 is stopped and displayed as a reach pattern, the variable display result becomes "jackpot" and the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state is the lowest. In addition, in the reach pattern determination table, regardless of whether the variable display result is "miss" or "jackpot", the number of judgment values assigned to the decorative pattern that becomes the reach pattern may be the same. The number of judgment values assigned to each decorative pattern that becomes the reach pattern may be different, or the number of judgment values assigned may be the same regardless of the decorative pattern that becomes the reach pattern. The determination ratio of the decorative pattern that becomes the reach pattern may differ depending on the type of jackpot.

Following step S223, it is determined whether the determined reach pattern is a decorative pattern corresponding to the number 7 (step S224). At this time, if the reach pattern is a decorative pattern corresponding to a number other than 7 (step S224; No), the stop pattern determination process is terminated. If the reach pattern is a decorative pattern corresponding to the number 7 (step S224; Yes), the presence or absence of a setting suggestion effect is determined according to whether or not to execute a setting suggestion effect (step S225). The presence or absence of the setting suggestion effect may be determined by referring to a setting suggestion effect execution determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 121 based on numerical data indicating a random number value for determining whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect may be updated using one or both of the random counter and the random number circuit 124 provided in the RAM 122. The presence or absence of the setting suggestion effect is determined to be either "no effect" in which the setting suggestion effect is not executed, or "effect" in which the setting suggestion effect is executed.

Based on the result of the determination in step S225, it is determined whether or not "effect" has been determined, in which a setting suggestion effect is executed (step S226). If "effect" has been determined, in which a setting suggestion effect is not executed (step S226; No), the process of determining the symbols to be stopped is terminated. If "effect" has been determined (step S226; Yes), the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is identified (step S227). The effect control CPU 120 receives a setting value notification command sent from the main board 11 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, and stores the notified setting value in a specified area of the RAM 122. As a result, in step S227, the setting value stored in the RAM 122 is identified.

Following step S227, the setting suggestion pattern is determined (step S228), and the stopping symbol determination process is terminated. The setting suggestion pattern may be determined to be one of a plurality of setting suggestion patterns, for example, by referring to a setting suggestion pattern determination table stored and prepared in advance in ROM 121, based on numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the setting suggestion pattern. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the setting suggestion pattern may be updated using one or both of the random counter and the random number circuit 124 provided in RAM 122.

Figure 17-3 shows an example of a setting for the setting suggestion effect execution decision table. For example, in ROM 121, table data constituting the decision table TA01 shown in Figure 17-3 is prestored as the setting suggestion effect execution decision table. In step S225 of the stop symbol determination process, the presence or absence of a setting suggestion effect is determined by referring to the decision table TA01. In the decision table TA01, the number of judgment values assigned to the presence or absence of a setting suggestion effect differs depending on whether the variable display result is a "miss" or a "jackpot". For example, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", the decision ratio of "presentation" for executing the setting suggestion effect is higher than when the variable display result is a "miss". With such a decision ratio setting, when the setting suggestion effect is executed, the percentage of the variable display result being a "jackpot" and being controlled to a jackpot game state is higher than when the setting suggestion effect is not executed. In addition, in the setting suggestion effect execution decision table, the number of judgment values assigned to the presence or absence of a setting suggestion effect may be the same regardless of whether the variable display result is a "miss" or a "jackpot."

Figure 17-4 (A) shows an example of the configuration of a setting suggestion pattern. In this embodiment, four patterns RE-0 to RE3 are provided as multiple setting suggestion patterns. These setting suggestion patterns have different suggestion contents depending on whether the symbol display color is changed and, if changed, the display color. The symbol display color is the display color of the decorative symbol stopped and displayed as a reach symbol, and can be changed to suggestion display colors including copper, silver, and gold in addition to the normal display color red. Pattern RE-0 does not change the symbol display color and suggests that the expectation level, which is an advantageous setting value for the player, is low. Pattern RE-1 changes the symbol display color to copper and suggests that the setting value is determined to be 2 or more. Pattern RE-2 changes the symbol display color to silver and suggests that the expectation level, which is an advantageous setting value for the player, is high. Pattern RE-3 changes the symbol display color to gold and suggests that the highest setting value is determined to be 6. In this way, in the setting suggestion effect using the reach symbol, it is possible to give suggestions regarding the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 depending on whether the symbol display color has changed and the symbol display color after the change.

Figure 17-4 (B) shows an example of settings for a setting suggestion pattern determination table. For example, table data constituting the determination table TA11 shown in Figure 17-4 (B) is stored in advance in the ROM 121 as the setting suggestion pattern determination table. In step S228 of the stopping symbol determination process, the setting suggestion pattern is determined by, for example, referring to the determination table TA11. In the determination table TA11, there are portions where the number of judgment values assigned to the determination result of the setting suggestion pattern differs depending on the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

When a setting suggestion effect using a reach pattern is executed, the reach pattern becomes a decorative pattern corresponding to the number 7, so there is a high probability of control to a jackpot game state. When the setting suggestion effect is executed in pattern RE-0, the expectation that the setting value is advantageous to the player is low, and when the setting suggestion effect is executed in pattern RE-1, the setting value is determined to be 2 or more. When the setting suggestion effect is executed in pattern RE-2, the expectation that the setting value is advantageous to the player is high, and when the setting suggestion effect is executed in pattern RE-3, the highest setting value is determined to be 6. In this way, the reach pattern when the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes a reach mode includes a pattern display mode that suggests control of the jackpot game state, such as a decorative pattern corresponding to a number other than 7, and a pattern display mode that suggests control of the jackpot game state, such as a decorative pattern corresponding to the number 7, and also suggests the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. In the case where the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7, the reach symbol is displayed in the normal display color to give a suggestion regarding control of the jackpot game state, and then the symbol display color is changed to continue giving a suggestion regarding control of the jackpot game state and also giving a suggestion regarding the setting value.

The setting suggestion presentation can be executed so that the presentation mode differs depending on the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, if the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the setting suggestion pattern is not determined to be pattern RE-1, and the symbol display color is not changed to copper. In this way, depending on whether the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is other than 1, the symbol display mode when the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7, whether the symbol display color is changed to copper, or not, differs. If the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is other than 6, the setting suggestion pattern is not determined to be pattern RE-3, and the symbol display color is not changed to gold. In this way, depending on whether the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine is 6, the symbol display mode when the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7, whether the symbol display color is changed to gold, or not, differs.

Instead of or in addition to changing the symbol display color, which is the display color of the decorative symbol stopped as a reach symbol, the setting suggestion effect may be to change any aspect of the reach state, such as the shape or pattern of the decorative symbol stopped as a reach symbol. Alternatively, it may be to change the performance mode by any performance device, such as displaying a background image, an outer frame image, or any other performance image, outputting sound from speakers 8L and 8R, lighting up decorative light-emitting bodies such as game effect lamps 9 and decorative LEDs, operating performance movable members, or a combination of some or all of these. The setting suggestion effect and other optional performances in the pachinko game machine 1 may be executable when any data related to performance control, any data not related to performance control, or a combination of these satisfies a single or multiple conditional expressions previously determined for performance execution. A performance that changes the symbol display color is also called a change performance.

The multiple setting suggestion patterns may include patterns that can be determined only when the game is controlled to a jackpot game state, and patterns that can be determined even when the game is not controlled to a jackpot game state. For example, patterns RE-0 and RE-1 may be determined at a predetermined rate even when the variable display result is a "miss," whereas patterns RE-2 and RE-3 may be determined at a predetermined rate only when the variable display result is a "jackpot," and cannot be determined when the variable display result is a "miss." In this case, pattern RE-2 may be determined at a common rate regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, whereas pattern RE-3 may be determined at a different rate depending on the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1.

Figure 17-5 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S172 of the performance control process processing as the variable display performance processing. In the variable display performance processing, it is determined whether or not the special chart fluctuation time, which is the variable display time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern, has elapsed based on, for example, the timer value of the performance control process timer (step S241). If it is determined that the variable display time has not elapsed (step S241; No), control is performed to execute various performances as the variable display progresses. The performance control CPU 120 creates various commands based on the control data read from the performance control pattern determined in step S203 of the variable display start setting processing. These commands are transmitted to the display control unit 123, the audio control board 13, the lamp control board 14, etc. This allows a variety of effects to be produced by a specified performance device, such as displaying a specified performance image on the screen of the image display device 5, outputting specified sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R, turning on, off, or blinking the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs, operating movable components for performance such as the movable body 32, or by combining some or all of these.

In the variable display performance process, it is determined whether or not it is the advance notice performance period (step S242). If it is the advance notice performance period (step S242; Yes), control is performed to execute the advance notice performance (step S243). If it is not the advance notice performance period (step S242; No) or after the control of step S243 is performed, it is determined whether or not it is the reach performance period (step S244). If it is the reach performance period (step S244; Yes), control is performed to execute the reach performance (step S245). By the control of step S245, when the decorative pattern that becomes the reach pattern is stopped and displayed, and then the reach performance is executed after the pattern display color is changed, it is possible to provide suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot game state and to provide suggestions regarding the setting values of the pachinko game machine 1.

If it is not the reach performance period (step S244; No) or after the control of step S245 has been performed, it is determined whether or not it is the change performance period (step S246). The change performance period may be determined in advance as a performance execution period in which the pattern display color is changed when a setting suggestion performance using a reach pattern is executed. If it is the change performance period (step S246; Yes), control is performed to execute the change performance (step S247). If it is not the change performance period (step S246; No) or after the control of step S247 has been performed, control is performed to execute performance during variable display, including the variable display operation of the decorative pattern, based on, for example, the settings in the performance control pattern determined corresponding to the variation pattern (step S248), and then the performance processing during variable display is terminated.

The change performance period may be set to a different time length depending on the performance mode of the change performance. For example, in the case of pattern RE-0, the change performance period may be set to the shortest first period, in the case of pattern RE-1, the change performance period may be set to the second period longer than the first period, in the case of pattern RE-2, the change performance period may be set to the third period longer than the second period, and in the case of pattern RE-3, the change performance period may be set to the longest fourth period. In general, when a performance that notifies an advantageous situation (advantageous performance) is executed, a player tends to take an image or video of the performance with a mobile terminal owned by the player and post it on a member registration website such as a social networking service (SNS) or an Internet video supply site. However, if the execution period of such an advantageous performance is short, a problem occurs in that an appropriate shooting time cannot be secured. On the other hand, for a performance (unfavorable performance) that is often performed even in unfavorable cases, there is a problem that a long execution period of the unfavorable performance gives a player a sense of discomfort because it does not stimulate the desire to take a photo. Therefore, the execution period of advantageous effects is lengthened to ensure time for shooting, and the execution period of unfavorable effects is shortened to reduce discomfort. This prevents the player from missing an advantageous effect when it is executed, and also ensures time for shooting. Furthermore, by ensuring time for shooting, the player can publish the captured images and videos on the Internet, which can increase public interest in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In addition, in many cases, the images and videos are published, including which pachinko gaming machine 1 at which gaming parlor they were taken, which means that the gaming parlor is advertised by the player. In this way, by ensuring time for shooting when a suggestion regarding the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is made, a synergistic effect is brought about not only for the player but also for the gaming parlor.

If the variable display time has elapsed (step S241; Yes), it is determined whether or not a pattern determination command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received (step S249). If the pattern determination command has not been received (step S249; No), the variable display performance process is terminated and standby is performed. In addition, if a predetermined time has elapsed without receiving a pattern determination command after the variable display time has elapsed, a predetermined error process may be executed in response to the fact that the pattern determination command could not be received normally. If a pattern determination command has been received (step S249; Yes), control is performed to derive and display the final stop pattern (determined decorative pattern) that is the display result in the variable display of the decorative pattern (step S250). Next, a certain time is set as a waiting time for receiving a jackpot start command (step S251). In addition, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "3", which is a value corresponding to the special pattern hit waiting process (step S252), and then the variable display performance process is terminated.

Figure 17-6 shows an example of the execution of a setting suggestion effect. Figure 17-6 (A) shows an effect execution example HD101 in which the variable display of the decorative symbols is in a reach state and a reach is established. The decorative symbols corresponding to the number 7 are displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, respectively, and a reach is established, and a normal reach reach effect is executed. Figure 17-6 (B) shows an effect execution example HD102 in which a normal reach reach effect transitions to a super reach reach effect, resulting in a reach development. The decorative symbols are displayed in a reduced size on the display screen of the image display device 5, and an effect image in the super reach reach effect is displayed. Figure 17-6 (C) shows an effect execution example HD103 in which a change effect is executed as a setting suggestion effect. An effect display corresponding to the change effect is displayed superimposed on the reach symbol that is displayed in a stopped state. In addition, an effect image announcing a message such as "Change in symbol display color!!" is displayed, suggesting a change in the symbol display color.

Figure 17-6 (D1) shows a performance execution example HD111 in which the pattern RE-0 does not change the symbol display color. Figure 17-6 (D2) shows a performance execution example HD112 in which the pattern RE-1 changes the symbol display color to copper. Figure 17-6 (D3) shows a performance execution example HD113 in which the pattern RE-2 changes the symbol display color to silver. Figure 17-6 (D4) shows a performance execution example HD113 in which the pattern RE-3 changes the symbol display color to gold. In performance execution example HD111, the pattern RE-0 does not change the display color of the reach symbol, and it remains the normal display color red. In this way, a failure performance (false performance) in which the symbol display color does not change is executed, suggesting that the expectation level, which is a setting value advantageous to the player, is low. In performance execution example HD112, pattern RE-1 changes the display color of the reach symbol to copper, suggesting that the set value is confirmed to be 2 or higher. In performance execution example HD113, pattern RE-2 changes the display color of the reach symbol to silver, suggesting that the player has a high expectation of a favorable set value. In performance execution example HD114, pattern RE-3 changes the display color of the reach symbol to gold, suggesting that 6, the highest set value, has been confirmed.

In addition to the change effect that can change the display color of the reach pattern, the setting suggestion effect may be an arbitrary effect such as a pseudo consecutive effect or a pre-reading notice effect that suggests the probability of a jackpot and also suggests the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It may be an effect that can make a suggestion regarding the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 after making a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state during the execution of the variable display. When an arbitrary effect is executed, it may include a case where a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state is made and then continued, or a case where a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state is made while suggesting the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1. When an arbitrary effect is executed, it may include a case where a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state is made and then ended, or a case where a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state is made while continuing, or a suggestion regarding the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The suggestion regarding the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to suggesting the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and may be, for example, a suggestion as to whether or not the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed. For example, the multiple setting suggestion patterns may include patterns with different determination rates depending on whether or not the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed. When the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed, a suggestion is made in the presentation mode of a pattern that is determined with a high probability, thereby diversifying the presentation and increasing interest in the game so that the player can recognize that the setting value has been changed.

While the variable display is being executed, suggestions regarding control of the jackpot game state may be made, but no suggestions regarding the setting values of the pachinko game machine 1 may be made. After that, when the display result of the variable display becomes "jackpot", suggestions regarding the setting values of the pachinko game machine 1 may be made in conjunction with the execution of the jackpot start performance (fanfare performance) or the performance during the jackpot (such as the performance corresponding to the first round or second round). There may also be cases where suggestions regarding the setting values of the pachinko game machine 1 are made without making suggestions regarding control of the jackpot game state.

Instead of some or all of the suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state, or in addition to some or all of the suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state, suggestions regarding the control of a state that is advantageous to the player and different from the jackpot gaming state may be given. For example, suggestions regarding a probability variable state that is controlled after the end of the jackpot gaming state may be given. In addition, suggestions regarding a state in which any game value that is advantageous to the player is awarded as an advantageous state may be given, depending on whether or not it is controlled.

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 059AK)
Next, the gaming machine in the characteristic part 059AK of this embodiment will be described with reference to Figs. 18-1 to 18-35. The pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic part 059AK of this embodiment performs time-saving control not only after a big win game state, but also when the time-saving pattern is stopped as a variable display result (time-saving state). And, although the time-saving pattern is stopped and displayed in the normal state and the time-saving state as a display result of the special chart game, the time-saving control is not newly performed even if the time-saving pattern is stopped and displayed in the time-saving state. On the other hand, for the decorative pattern, different patterns are stopped and displayed in the normal state and the time-saving state. Hereinafter, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic part 059AK having such a feature will be described. Note that the description of the same parts as those described in the basic description above will be omitted.

Figure 18-1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic part 059AK of this embodiment, showing the layout of the main components. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is broadly composed of a gaming board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes the gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the gaming board 2. A gaming area is formed on the gaming board 2, and gaming balls, which serve as gaming media, are launched and hit into this gaming area from a specified ball launching device.

Note that the "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, a variable display of multiple types of special symbols (the same applies to other symbols described below). Variations include updating the display of multiple symbols, scrolling the display of multiple symbols, transforming one or more symbols, and enlarging/reducing one or more symbols. When special or normal symbols vary, multiple types of special or normal symbols are updated. When decorative symbols vary, multiple types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative symbols are transformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that variations also include a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed flashing. At the end of the variable display, a specified special symbol is displayed stationary (also called derived or derived display) as the display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described below). Note that variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation. In addition, the "variable display" of the special symbol includes multiple LEDs lighting up or blinking in sequence, and includes the display of a specific combination of illuminated LEDs as a display result (also called a derived or derived display).

The special pattern variably displayed on the first special pattern display device 4A is also called the "first special pattern," and the special pattern variably displayed on the second special pattern display device 4B is also called the "second special pattern." A special pattern game using the first special pattern is also called the "first special pattern game," and a special pattern game using the second special pattern is also called the "second special pattern game." There may be only one type of special pattern display device that variably displays the special patterns.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the play area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or an organic EL (electro luminescence) device, and displays various presentation images. The image display device 5 may also be composed of a projector and a screen. Various presentation images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, multiple types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) that are different from the special patterns are variably displayed as decorative identification information. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, decorative patterns are variably displayed (for example, scrolled up and down or updated) in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. The special game and the variable display of decorative patterns that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

The screen of the image display device 5 may be provided with a display area for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display that is being executed. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display-compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of reserved variable displays is also called the reserved memory number. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also called the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also called the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also called the total reserved memory number.

A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B, each of which includes a plurality of LEDs, are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided to the right of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first start winning hole that is always kept in a constant open state so that game balls can enter, for example, by a specified ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a specified number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric device) forms a second start winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by the solenoid 81. The variable winning ball device 6B is, for example, an electric tulip-type device having a pair of movable wings, and when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable wings are in a vertical position, so that the tip of the movable wings approaches the winning ball device 6A, and the second start winning hole is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the on state, the movable wings of the variable winning ball device 6B are in a tilted position, so that the second start winning hole is in an open state in which the game ball can enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in an open state). When a game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the second special game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to devices that include an electric tulip-type device. In the time-saving state, control (high-open control, high-base control) is executed to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning hole, improving the efficiency of the variation of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol). In the time-saving state, a so-called right shot is performed in which the game ball is shot into the game area on the right side of the player so that the game ball enters the second start winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three locations are provided at the lower left of the game area and one location is provided above the variable winning ball device 6B), general winning openings 10 are provided which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when a game ball enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) are paid out as prize balls.

Between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning hole is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning hole door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82, and the large winning hole door forms a large winning hole as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state. In the big win game state, the player can obtain a prize ball by making the game ball enter the large winning hole. Therefore, the big win game state is an advantageous state for the player. The more rounds in the big win game state and the longer the upper limit opening period, the more advantageous it is for the player. In the big win game state, a so-called right hit is performed to shoot the game ball into the right game area so that the game ball enters the large winning hole formed by the special variable winning ball device 7.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door (for the special electric device) is in the OFF state, the large prize opening door closes the large prize opening, and game balls cannot enter (pass through) the large prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door is in the ON state, the large prize opening door opens the large prize opening, and game balls can easily enter the large prize opening.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 14 balls) are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large prize opening, more prize balls are paid out than when a game ball enters the first start prize opening, the second start prize opening, or the general prize opening 10, for example.

The entry of a game ball into each winning port, including the general winning port 10, is also referred to as a "winning". In particular, a winning ball into the starting port (first starting winning port, second starting winning port) is also referred to as a starting winning port.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (the lower left of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 18-1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is made up of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs a variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from the special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers showing "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbols may also include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal symbols is also called a normal symbol game.

A pass gate 41 through which the game ball can pass is provided to the right of the image display device 5. When the game ball passes through the pass gate 41, a regular game is executed.

A regular symbol pending display 25C is provided below the regular symbol display 20. The regular symbol pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the regular symbol pending memory number, which is the number of regular symbol games that are pending execution, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above features, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with windmills that change the direction and speed of the game balls, as well as numerous obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an outlet that takes in game balls that do not enter any of the winning holes.

Speakers 8L, 8R for playing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 on the gaming machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided on the left and right of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the playing area. Furthermore, an attacca lamp 9c is provided near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the gaming board 2.

A movable body 32 that operates according to the presentation is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (above the image display device 5 in FIG. 18-1). The movable body 32 is also provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable body lamp 9d and the aforementioned main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, and attacca lamp 9c may be collectively referred to as the game effect lamp 9. The main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d are each configured to include an LED.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided, which is operated by the player or the like to launch the gaming ball toward the gaming area using the ball-hitting device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area, a ball supply tray (upper tray) is provided to hold (store) gaming balls dispensed as prize balls or gaming balls loaned by a predetermined ball loaning machine so that they can be supplied to the ball launching device. In addition to the upper tray, the gaming machine frame 3 may also be provided with a payout section (ball supply tray) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. Operations on the stick controller 31A are detected by the controller sensor unit 35A.

At a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B is provided that allows the player to perform a predetermined command operation by pressing it. The operation of the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's actions (operations, etc.), but other detection means may also be provided.

Figure 18-2 is a flow chart showing an example of the start winning judgment process executed in step S101 of Figure 14. When the start winning judgment process is started, the CPU 103 first judges whether the first start hole switch 22A provided corresponding to the first start winning hole formed by the normal winning ball device 6A is on or not (step S1201). If it is judged that the first start hole switch 22A is on because it is judged that the first start hole switch 22A is on in the switch process (step S2101; Yes), the CPU 103 judges whether the first special symbol reserved memory number, which is the reserved memory number of the special symbol game using the first special symbol, has reached a predetermined upper limit value (e.g., "4") (step S1202). At this time, the CPU 103 can specify the number of reserved first special charts by reading the first special chart reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the first special chart reserved memory count counter (counter that counts the number of reserved first special charts) provided in a predetermined area (such as a game control counter setting section) of the RAM 102. If it is determined in step S1202 that the first special chart reserved memory count is not the upper limit value (step S1202; No), the CPU 103 sets the start port buffer value, which is the stored value of the start port buffer provided in a predetermined area (such as a game control buffer setting section) of the RAM 102, to "1" (step S1203).

If it is determined in step S1201 that the first start port switch 22A is off (step S1201; No) or if it is determined in step S1202 that the number of reserved first special symbols has reached the upper limit (step S1202; Yes), the CPU 103 determines whether the second start port switch 22B provided in correspondence with the second start port formed by the normal variable winning ball device 6B is on (step S1204). If it is determined that the second start port switch 22B is on because it is determined in the switch processing that the second start port switch 22B is on (step S1204; Yes), the CPU 103 determines whether the second special symbol reserved number, which is the number of reserved special symbols for the special symbol game using the second special symbol, has reached a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4") (step S1205). At this time, the CPU 103 can specify the number of reserved second special symbols by reading the second special symbol reservation memory count value, which is the stored value of the second special symbol reservation memory count counter (counter that counts the number of reserved second special symbols) provided in a predetermined area (such as a game control counter setting section) of the RAM 102. If it is determined in step S1205 that the number of reserved second special symbols is not the upper limit (step S1205; No), the CPU 103 sets the start port buffer value to "2" (step S1206). If it is determined that the second start port switch 22B is not on (step S1204; No) or if it is determined that the number of reserved second special symbols is the upper limit (step S1205; Yes), the CPU 103 ends the start winning determination process.

After executing either the process of step S1203 or S1206, the CPU 103 updates the special symbol reserved memory count value corresponding to the start port buffer value by adding 1 (step S207). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first special symbol reserved memory count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the second special symbol reserved memory count value is added by 1. Thus, the first special symbol reserved memory count value is updated to increase (increment) by 1 when the game ball enters the first start winning port and the first start condition corresponding to the special symbol game using the first special symbol is established. Also, the second special symbol reserved memory count value is updated to increase (increment) by 1 when the game ball enters the second start winning port and the second start condition corresponding to the special symbol game using the second special symbol is established. At this time, the total reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the total reserved memory count counter provided in a specified area of RAM 102 (such as the game control counter setting section), is updated to add 1 (step S1208).

After executing the process of step S1208, the CPU 103 extracts a predetermined game random number corresponding to the occurrence of the start winning (step S1209). As an example, in the process of step S1209, from among the numerical data updated by the random counter provided in the random number circuit 104 or a predetermined area (such as the game control counter setting section) of the RAM 102, the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern are extracted. The numerical data indicating each of the random numbers thus extracted is stored as reserved data by being set at the top of an empty entry in the special chart reserved memory section according to the start port buffer value (step S1210). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the reserved data is set in the first special chart reserved memory section. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2", the reserved data is set in the second special chart reserved memory section. In addition, at this time, when the reserved data is set in the first special chart reserved memory section, the CPU 103 may control the first reserved display 25A to make the first reserved display 25A perform a display that can identify the first special chart reserved memory number that has been increased by one (for example, by increasing the number of lit LEDs by one). In addition, when the reserved data is set in the second special chart reserved memory section, the CPU 103 may control the second reserved display 25B to make the second reserved display 25B perform a display that can identify the second special chart reserved memory number that has been increased by one (for example, by increasing the number of lit LEDs by one).

The first special symbol reservation memory unit stores reservation data for a special symbol game (a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A) that has not yet started even though a game ball has entered the first start winning port formed by the normal winning ball device 6A and a first start winning has occurred. As an example, the first special symbol reservation memory unit associates reservation numbers with the order of winning (the order of detection of the game ball) into the first start winning port, and stores, as reservation data, random number values MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, random number values MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and numerical data indicating random number values MR3 for determining the variation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc. based on the establishment of the first start condition by the game ball's entry, until the number of reserved data reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). Thus, the reserved data stored in the first special symbol reserved memory unit indicates that the execution (variable display) of the special symbol game using the first special symbol is reserved, and serves as reserved memory information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it is decided to control to a jackpot game state based on the variable display result (special symbol display result) in this special symbol game, and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol will be a specific mode (for example, a reach effect, etc.).

The reserved number in the first special chart reserved memory section and the display position of the reserved display pattern (controlled by the performance control board 12) basically correspond to each other. Therefore, when reserved data is stored in the first special chart reserved memory section, the reserved display pattern is displayed at the display position corresponding to the reserved number associated with this reserved data. For example, when reserved data is newly stored in association with reserved number "1", the reserved display pattern is displayed at the first display position on the far left side of the first reserved display section 5HL. For example, when reserved data is newly stored in association with reserved number "2", the reserved display pattern is displayed at the second display position located to the right of the first display position of the first reserved display section 5HL.

The second special symbol reservation memory unit stores reservation data for a special symbol game (a special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B) that has not yet started even though a game ball has entered the second start winning port formed by the normal variable winning ball device 6B and a second start winning has occurred. As an example, the second special symbol reservation memory unit associates reservation numbers with the winning order (the order of detection of the game ball) into the second start winning port, and stores numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc. based on the establishment of the second start condition by the game ball's entry, as reservation data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). Thus, the reserved data stored in the second special symbol reserved memory unit indicates that the execution (variable display) of the special symbol game using the second special symbol is reserved, and serves as reserved memory information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it is decided to control to a jackpot game state based on the variable display result (special symbol display result) in this special symbol game, and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol will be a specific mode (for example, a reach effect, etc.).

The reserved number in the second special chart reserved memory section and the display position of the reserved display pattern (controlled by the performance control board 12) basically correspond to each other. Therefore, when reserved data is stored in the second special chart reserved memory section, the reserved display pattern is displayed at the display position corresponding to the reserved number associated with this reserved data. For example, when reserved data is newly stored in association with reserved number "1", the reserved display pattern is displayed at the first display position on the far left side of the second reserved display section 5HR. For example, when reserved data is newly stored in association with reserved number "2", the reserved display pattern is displayed at the second display position located to the right of the first display position of the second reserved display section 5HR.

After executing the process of step S1210, the CPU 103 performs settings to send a prepared start gate winning designation command to the performance control board 12 (step S1211). After that, the CPU 103 performs settings to send a prepared pending memory count notification command to the performance control board 12 (step S1212).

Then, the CPU 103 executes the winning random number value determination process (step S1213). As described above, the winning random number value determination process is a process for determining when a start winning occurs, and is a process for determining whether the variable display result of the variable display of the execution target of the random number value will be a "big win" or a "small win" based on the random number values MR1 and MR3 of the random number values MR1 to MR3 extracted in step S1209, and the fluctuation pattern of the variable display (see FIG. 17-5). After that, the CPU 103 determines whether the starting port buffer value is "1" or "2" (step S1214). At this time, if it is determined that the starting port buffer value is "2" (step S1214; "2"), the CPU 103 clears the starting port buffer and initializes the stored value to "0" (step S1215), and then ends the starting winning determination process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the start port buffer value is "1" (step S1214; "1"), the CPU 103 clears the start port buffer and initializes its stored value to "0" (step S1216) before proceeding to step S1204. This ensures that even if both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B simultaneously detect a valid start winning of a game ball, processing based on the detection of both valid start winnings can be completed.

Figure 18-3 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S1213 of Figure 18-2 as a winning random number value determination process. In this embodiment, when the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is started, the normal special symbol process determines whether or not to control the special symbol display result (the variable display result of the special symbol) to a big hit game state or a small hit game state as a "big hit" or "small hit". In addition, the variable pattern setting process determines a variable pattern corresponding to the variable display mode of the decorative symbol. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, in the random number value determination process at the time of winning, at the start winning timing when the game ball is detected at the start winning port (first start winning port or second start winning port), it is determined whether the variable display result of the variable display to be executed of the random number value extracted at this timing (the random number value extracted in the process of step S1209) will be a "big win" or a "small win", and it is determined which variation pattern of the variable display of the decorative pattern will be (so-called "pre-reading"). As a result, before the variable display of the special pattern or the decorative pattern based on the detection of the game ball entering the start winning port starts (before the start condition of the special pattern game is established), it is pre-read that the special pattern display result will be a "big win" or a "small win", and that the variable display mode of the decorative pattern will be a predetermined display mode, and based on this pre-reading result, the display mode of the reserved display can be determined by the performance control CPU 120 on the performance control board 12 side.

In the winning random number value determination process shown in FIG. 18-3, the CPU 103 first identifies the current game state of the pachinko game machine 1 by, for example, checking the state of a time-saving flag (a flag that is turned on when in a time-saving state) or a probability variable flag (a flag that is turned on when in a probability variable state) provided in a predetermined area (such as a game control flag setting section) of the RAM 102 (step S351). The CPU 103 identifies whether the current game state of the pachinko game machine 1 is a jackpot game state or not by, for example, checking the value of a special chart process flag provided in a predetermined area (such as a game control flag control section) of the RAM 102. For example, if the value of the special chart process flag is between "4" and "7", it can be determined that the current game state of the pachinko game machine 1 is a jackpot game state.

Following the processing of step S351, the CPU 103 judges whether or not the specified game state is a jackpot game state (step S352). If it is judged that the game state is not a jackpot game state (step S352; No), the CPU 103 further judges whether or not the game state is a high base state in which high opening control is performed in conjunction with time-saving control in a probability variable state or time-saving state (step S353). If it is judged that the game state is a high base state (step S353; Yes), or if it is judged that the game state is a jackpot in the processing of step S352 (step S352; Yes), the CPU 103 judges whether or not the start port buffer value is "2" (step S354). If it is judged that the start port buffer value is not "2" (step S354; No), the CPU 103 performs settings to limit the judgment at the time of winning (step S356).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the start port buffer value is "2" (step S354; Yes), or if it is determined in the processing of step S353 that the game is not in a high base state (step S353; No), the CPU 103 selects a special chart display result determination table from the first special chart display result determination table or the second special chart display result determination table to be used to determine the special chart display result in accordance with the start port buffer value ("1" or "2") or the current game state (step S355).

Following the processing of step S355, the CPU 103 judges whether the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot determination range (step S357). For example, the CPU 103 may judge whether there is a determination value that matches the random number value MR1 by comparing each determination value included in the jackpot determination range with the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result extracted by the processing of step S1209 shown in FIG. 18-2 one by one. Alternatively, values indicating the minimum value (lower limit value) and maximum value (upper limit value) of the determination value included in the jackpot determination range may be set, and the CPU 103 may compare the random number value MR1 with the minimum value and maximum value of the jackpot determination range to judge whether the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot determination range. At this time, by judging that the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot determination range, it can be judged that the variable display result based on the reserved data including the random number value MR1 is determined to be a "jackpot" (jackpot start judgment).

In the process of step S357, for example, the CPU 103 may read the random number value MR1 stored in the special chart reserved memory unit in step S1210, and make the above judgment using the read random number value MR1. The CPU 103 may also store the random number value MR1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (an area other than the special chart reserved memory unit) or in a memory area of the CPU 103, separately from step S1210, and make the above judgment based on the stored random number value. This is also true for the random number value MR3 described below. In this way, the random number value used in the winning random number value judgment process does not have to be the random number value stored in the special chart reserved memory unit.

When it is determined in the processing of step S357 that it is within the jackpot determination range (step S357; Yes), the CPU 103 determines the jackpot type based on the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type (step S358). At this time, the CPU 103 selects table data for determining the jackpot type from the jackpot type determination table according to the variable special chart specified corresponding to the start port buffer value (the "first special chart" corresponding to "1" or the "second special chart" corresponding to "2"). The CPU 103 determines which of the multiple types of jackpot types the jackpot type is to be determined as by referring to the selected table data for determining the jackpot type.

Following the processing of step S358, the CPU 103 selects a jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table (see FIG. 18-11) that has been prepared in advance by storing it in a specified area of the ROM 101, which will be described later, and sets it as the table to be used (step S359). The jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table is a table for determining the fluctuation pattern of the variable display that results in a "jackpot", and each fluctuation pattern is assigned a determination value that is compared with the random number value MR3.

If it is determined in the processing of step S357 that the random number value MR1 is not within the big win determination range (step S357; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 is within a predetermined small win determination range (step S360). The CPU 103 can determine whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the small win determination range by performing the same processing as in the case of the big win determination range for the determination value assigned to the special display result of "small win" in the special display result determination table selected by the processing of step S305.

If it is determined that the value is within the small hit determination range (step S360; Yes), a small hit variation pattern determination table (see FIG. 18-11 (B)) that has been prepared in advance by storing the value in a specified area of ROM 101 is selected and set as the table to be used (step S362). The small hit variation pattern determination table is a table for determining the variation pattern of the variable display that results in a "small hit", and each variation pattern is assigned a determination value that is compared with the random number value MR3.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the random number MR1 is not within the small win determination range (step S360; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 is within a predetermined time-saving determination range (step 059AKS001). The CPU 103 can determine whether or not the random number MR1 is within the time-saving determination range by performing the same process as in the case of the big win determination range for the determination value assigned to the special chart display result of "miss (time-saving)" in the special chart display result determination table selected by the process of step S355. Note that although the special chart display result of "miss (time-saving)" is a "miss," it indicates a variable display result in which the time-saving pattern is stopped and the time-saving control is performed from the variable display that is performed after the stopped display.

If it is determined that the value is within the time-saving determination range (step 059AKS001; Yes), the CPU 103 determines the time-saving type based on the random number value MR2 (step 059AKS002). At this time, the CPU 103 selects table data for determining the time-saving type from the time-saving type determination table shown in FIG. 18-7 according to the variable special chart specified corresponding to the start port buffer value (the "first special chart" corresponding to "1" or the "second special chart" corresponding to "2"). The CPU 103 determines which of the multiple types of time-saving type is to be determined by referring to the selected table data for determining the time-saving type.

Following the processing of step 059AKS002, the CPU 103 selects a miss fluctuation pattern determination table (see Figs. 18-12 (A) and (D)) when the time-saving start flag is on, which is prepared in advance by storing it in a predetermined area of the ROM 101, and sets it as the table to be used (step 059AKS002A). The miss fluctuation pattern determination table when the time-saving start flag is on is a table for determining a fluctuation pattern of a variable display in which the variable display result is a "miss" but the time-saving pattern is stopped and displayed, and a determination value that is compared with the random number value MR3 is assigned to each fluctuation pattern. In step 059AKS002A, it is sufficient to select either the miss fluctuation pattern determination table when the time-saving start flag is on in Fig. 18-12 (A) or the miss fluctuation pattern determination table when the time-saving start flag is on in Fig. 18-12 (D) according to the type of time-saving.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the time-saving start flag is not within the time-saving determination range (step 059AKS001; No), a miss fluctuation pattern determination table for when the time-saving start flag is off (see Figure 18-12 (B)), which has been prepared by storing the table in advance in a specified area of ROM 101, is selected and set as the table to be used (step 059AKS002B).

After executing any one of steps S309, S312, S059AKS002A, and S059AKS002B, the CPU 103 refers to any one of the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, the small jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table when the time-saving start flag is on, and the miss fluctuation pattern determination table when the time-saving start flag is off, set in the usage table, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern extracted in S1209, and determines the fluctuation pattern assigned to the determination value that matches the random number value MR3 (S363). For example, the CPU 103 may determine the fluctuation pattern by comparing each individual determination value assigned to each fluctuation pattern with the random number value MR3 one by one to determine whether or not there is a determination value that matches the random number value MR3, or may determine the fluctuation pattern by setting values indicating the minimum value (lower limit value) and maximum value (upper limit value) of the determination values assigned to each fluctuation pattern and comparing the random number value MR3 with the minimum and maximum determination values.

After executing either the process of step S356 or S363, the CPU 103 sets the transmission of a start winning command whose contents correspond to the judgment results of step S358, step 059AKS002, or step S363 (step S364), and ends the winning random number judgment process. The start winning command is composed of a start winning designation command, a special reserved memory number designation command, a pattern judgment result designation command, and a fluctuation pattern judgment result designation command. When the start winning buffer value is "1", the first start winning designation command, the first special reserved memory number designation command, the pattern judgment result designation command, and the fluctuation pattern judgment result designation command are set to be sent as the start winning command. When the start winning buffer value is "2", the second start winning designation command, the second special reserved memory number designation command, the pattern judgment result designation command, and the fluctuation pattern judgment result designation command are set to be sent as the start winning command. Commands set for transmission are sent during command control processing.

The first special chart reserved memory count designation command and second special chart reserved memory count designation command to be set for transmission are commands that designate the current first special chart reserved memory count or second special chart reserved memory count (commands including EXT data corresponding to the relevant memory count), and the designated number of special chart reserved memories can be determined by the count value of the first special chart reserved memory count counter or the second special chart reserved memory count counter. The symbol designation command to be set for transmission is a command specifying that the judgment result of the variable display result is a "big win" (a command including EXT data corresponding to a "big win") when the judgment result of step S357 is within the big win determination range (step S357; Yes), a command specifying that the judgment result of the variable display result is a "small win" (a command including EXT data corresponding to a "small win") when the judgment result of step S357 is within the small win determination range (step S360; Yes), and a command specifying that the judgment result of the variable display result is a "small win" (a command including EXT data corresponding to a "small win") when the judgment result of step 059AKS001 is within the time-saving determination range (step 059AKS001; Yes). When the judgment result of step S354 is the start port buffer value = 1 (step S354; No), a command specifying that no judgment was made at the time of the start winning, namely "no judgment", may be used (a command including EXT data corresponding to "no judgment"). When the judgment result of step S354 is the start port buffer value = 1 (step S354; No), a command specifying that no judgment was made at the time of the start winning, namely "no judgment", may be used (a command including EXT data corresponding to "no judgment"). The fluctuation pattern determination result designation command to be set for transmission should be a command that designates the fluctuation pattern that is the determination result determined in step S363 (a command including EXT data corresponding to the fluctuation pattern that is the determination result), and when the determination result in step S354 is the start port buffer value = 1 (step S354; No), it should be a command that designates "no determination" that no determination was made at the time of the start winning (a command including EXT data corresponding to "no determination").

In the random number value judgment process at the time of winning, as described above, for the variable display corresponding to the random number values MR1 to MR3 extracted this time in step S1209, whether the variable display result of the variable display (special game) will be a "big win", a "small win", or a "miss (time reduction)", and the variable display's fluctuation pattern (see FIG. 18-10) are judged, and so-called pre-reading is performed. Note that in this process, the judgment is made based on the current game state, and not based on the game state when the variable display is actually executed, so the judgment is not necessarily accurate, but it is possible to predict the variable display result and the fluctuation pattern with a certain degree of accuracy. In addition, in the random number value judgment process at the time of winning, if it is judged in the process of step S352 that a big win is occurring, or based on the judgment in the process of step S353 that time reduction control is being performed, it is judged in the process of step S354 whether the start port buffer value is "2". At this time, if the start port buffer value is "1" and not "2", the process proceeds to step S364 without executing the process of step S355 and the like, and the judgment at the time of the start winning is not made. In this way, when high opening control accompanying time-saving control is performed or in a jackpot game state, the above judgments are restricted so that they are not made based on the occurrence of a start winning (first start winning) caused by the game ball entering the first start winning port. In this way, when the special chart game using the second special chart is executed in priority over the special chart game using the first special chart, when time-saving control is in progress or in a jackpot game state, the pre-reading based on the first start winning is restricted from being executed, ensuring the soundness of the game.

Figure 18-4 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in step S110 of Figure 14 as the normal special symbol processing. In the normal special symbol processing shown in Figure 18-4, the CPU 103 first judges whether or not the second special symbol reserved memory count is "0" (step S1231). The second special symbol reserved memory count is the reserved memory count of the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the processing of step S1231, the second reserved memory count value stored in the RAM 102 may be read, and it may be judged whether or not the read value is "0".

When the second special chart reserved memory number is other than "0" in step S1231 (step S1231; No), the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result and the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type are read out as reserved data stored in the second special chart reserved memory unit 151B corresponding to reserved number "1" (step S1232). The numerical data read out at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a variable random number buffer.

Following the processing of step S1232, the second reserved memory count is updated by subtracting 1 from the second reserved memory count, for example, and the reserved data indicating the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in entries lower than reserved number "1" in the second special chart reserved memory unit 151B (for example, entries corresponding to reserved numbers "2" to "4") are shifted to higher entries (step S1233). Also, in the processing of step S1233, the total reserved memory count stored in the total reserved memory counter in RAM 102 may be updated by subtracting 1 from the total reserved memory count. At this time, the variable special chart designation buffer value, which is the stored value of the variable special chart designation buffer, is updated to "2" (step S1234).

When the second special pattern reserved memory number is "0" in step S1231 (step S1231; Yes), it is determined whether the first special pattern reserved memory number is "0" (step S1235). The first special pattern reserved memory number is the reserved memory number of the special pattern game using the first special pattern by the first special pattern display device 4A. For example, in the process of step S1235, the first reserved memory number count value stored in the first reserved memory number counter in the RAM 102 is read, and it is determined whether the read value is "0". In this way, the process of step S1235 is executed when it is determined in step S1231 that the second special pattern reserved memory number is "0", and it is determined whether the first special pattern reserved memory number is "0". As a result, the special pattern game using the second special pattern is started in priority to the special pattern game using the first special pattern.

Note that the special chart game using the second special chart is not limited to being executed with priority over the special chart game using the first special chart, and for example, the special chart game may be started in the order in which the game ball enters (passes) the first start winning port or the second start winning port and the start winning occurs. In this case, a table may be provided that stores data that can identify the order in which the start winning occurs, and it may be possible to determine whether to start the special chart game using the first special chart or the second special chart from the stored data.

When the number of reserved first special charts is other than "0" in step S1235 (step S235; No), the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result and the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type are read out as reserved data stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit 151A corresponding to reserved number "1" (step S1236). The numerical data read out at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a variable random number buffer.

Following the processing of step S1236, for example, the first reserved memory count value is updated by subtracting 1 from the first special chart reserved memory count, and the reserved data indicated by the random numbers MR1 and MR2 stored in entries lower than reserved number "1" in the first special chart reserved memory unit 151A (for example, entries corresponding to reserved numbers "2" to "4") are shifted to higher entries (step S1237). Also, in the processing of step S1237, the total reserved memory count value stored in the total reserved memory counter in RAM 102 may be updated to subtract 1 from the total reserved memory count value. At this time, the variable special chart designation buffer value is updated to "1" (step S1238).

After executing either the process of step S1234 or S1238, the special symbol display result determination table corresponding to the variable special symbol designation buffer value is selected and set as the table to be used for determining whether the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, is a "jackpot" or a "miss" (step S1239). For example, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "1", the first special symbol display result determination table shown in FIG. 18-5 (A) is set as the table to be used. On the other hand, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "2", the second special symbol display result determination table shown in FIG. 18-5 (B) is set as the table to be used. The CPU 103 may also select the special symbol display result determination table data corresponding to the current game state.

The first special pattern display result determination table is a table which is referenced to determine, before a confirmed special pattern which is the variable display result in a special pattern game using the first special pattern by the first special pattern display device 4A is derived and displayed, whether or not the variable display result is to be controlled as a "jackpot" to a jackpot game state, whether or not the variable display result is to be controlled as a "small hit" to a small hit game state, or whether or not the variable display result is to be controlled as a "miss (time reduction)" to a time reduction state from the subsequent variable display, based on a random number value MR1 for determining the special pattern display result. The second special symbol display result determination table is a table that is referenced to determine, before a confirmed special symbol that is a variable display result in a special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B is derived and displayed, whether or not the variable display result is to be controlled as a "big hit" to a big hit game state, whether or not the variable display result is to be controlled as a "small hit" to a small hit game state, or whether or not the variable display result is to be controlled as a "miss (time reduction)" from the subsequent variable display to a time reduction state, based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result.

In the first special chart display result determination table, depending on whether the game state of the pachinko game machine 1 is normal or time-saving state (low probability state), or probability variable state (high probability state), a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result is assigned to the special chart display results of "jackpot", "small win", "miss (time-saving)", and "miss". In the second special chart display result determination table, depending on whether the game state is normal or time-saving state (low probability state), or probability variable state (high probability state), a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result is assigned to the special chart display results of "jackpot", "miss (time-saving)", and "miss".

In the first special chart display result determination table and the second special chart display result determination table, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result is the determination data assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the special chart display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot" or whether or not to control the special chart display result to a time-saving state from the next variable display as a "miss (time-saving)". In each of the first special chart display result determination table and the second special chart display result determination table, when the game state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more determination values are assigned to the special chart display result of a "jackpot" than when the game state is a normal state or time-saving state (low probability state). As a result, in the probability variable state (high probability state) in which probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "jackpot" and controlled to a jackpot game state is higher than when the game state is a normal state or time-saving state (low probability state). That is, in each of the first special chart display result determination table and the second special chart display result determination table, the determination data is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control to the jackpot game state so that when the game state of the pachinko game machine 1 is in the probability variable state, the probability of determining that it will be controlled to the jackpot game state is higher than when it is in the normal state or the time-saving state. Also, in the first special chart display result determination table and the second special chart display result determination table, the determination data is assigned so that the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "miss (time-saving)" and that the next variable display is controlled to the time-saving state is higher in the second special chart display result determination table. Therefore, the rate at which the special chart display result is a "miss (time-saving)" is higher in the variable display corresponding to the reserved second special chart stored at the end of the time-saving state.

In the example of the setting of the first special symbol display result determination table, a predetermined range of determination values (values in the range of "30000" to "30350") is assigned to the "small hit" special symbol display result. On the other hand, in the example of the setting of the second special symbol display result determination table 130B, no determination value is assigned to the "small hit" special symbol display result. With such a setting, the ratio at which the special symbol display result is determined to be a "small hit" and controlled to a small hit game state can be made different between the case where the variable display result is determined based on the first start condition being satisfied for starting a special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and the case where the variable display result is determined based on the second start condition being satisfied for starting a special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B.

In particular, in a special chart game using the second special chart, the special chart display result is not determined to be a "small win" and controlled to a small win game state, so that in game states where game balls are likely to enter the second starting winning hole formed by the normal variable winning ball device 6B, such as a time-saving state (low probability high base state) or a probability change state (high probability high base state), frequent occurrence of a small win game state in which it is difficult to obtain a prize ball can be avoided, and a decrease in interest in the game due to prolonged play can be prevented. In addition, in the second special chart display result determination table, a predetermined range of determination values different from the settings in the first special chart display result determination table may also be assigned to the special chart display result of a "small win". For example, in the second special chart display result determination table, a smaller determination value than that in the first special chart display result determination table may be assigned to the special chart display result of a "small win". In this way, when the game is in a high base state such as a time-saving state or a probability-changing state, the ratio of the game being determined to be controlled to a small win game state may be lower than when the game is in a low base state such as a normal state or a probability-changing state without time-saving. Alternatively, regardless of whether the first or second start condition is satisfied, the special chart display result may be determined by referring to a common special chart display result determination table.

Following the processing of step S1239 shown in FIG. 18-4, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result stored in the variable random number buffer is compared with the determination values assigned to each of the special chart display results of "big hit", "small hit", "miss (time reduction)", and "miss" to determine whether the special chart display result will be "big hit", "small hit", "miss (time reduction)", or "miss" (step S1240).

In step S1239, the table data for determining the special chart display result corresponding to the current game state is selected, so in the process of step S1240, depending on whether the game state when the variable display of the special chart game or the like is started is a probability variable state or not, different determination data is used to determine whether the special chart display result is a "jackpot". For example, when the game state when the variable display of the special chart game or the like is started is a normal state or a time-saving state, table data corresponding to the normal state or the time-saving state in the first special chart display result determination table or the second special chart display result determination table is selected as normal determination data, and the special chart display result corresponding to the random number value MR1 is determined by referring to this. On the other hand, when the game state when the variable display of the special chart game or the like is started is a probability variable state, table data corresponding to the case where the game state is a probability variable state in the first special chart display result determination table or the second special chart display result determination table is selected as special determination data, and the special chart display result corresponding to the random number value MR1 is determined by referring to this.

After the special chart display result is determined in step S1240, it is determined whether the special chart display result is a "jackpot" or not (step S1241). If it is determined to be a "jackpot" (step S1241; Yes), the jackpot flag provided in RAM 102 is set to an ON state (step S1242). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 18-6 is selected and set as the table to be used for determining the jackpot type as one of multiple types (step S1243).

The jackpot type determination table is a table that is referenced to determine the jackpot type as one of several types based on the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type when it is determined that the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" and the game state is controlled to a jackpot. In the jackpot type determination table, the number (determination value) compared with the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is assigned to several types of jackpot types, such as "non-probable jackpot", "probable jackpot", and "sudden jackpot", depending on whether the special symbol that is variably displayed (changed) in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B).

In the example of the setting of the jackpot type determination table, the allocation of the determination value for the jackpot type of "sudden certainty" differs depending on whether the variable special chart is the first special chart or the second special chart. In other words, when the variable special chart is the first special chart, a predetermined range of determination values (values in the range of "82" to "99") is assigned to the jackpot type of "sudden certainty", while when the variable special chart is the second special chart, no determination value is assigned to the jackpot type of "sudden certainty". With such a setting, the ratio of determining the jackpot type as "sudden certainty" can be made different between the case where the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the first start condition for starting a special chart game using the first special chart by the first special chart display device 4A being satisfied, and the case where the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the second start condition for starting a special chart game using the second special chart by the second special chart display device 4B being satisfied. In particular, in a special game using the second special chart, the jackpot type is not determined to be "suddenly confirmed" and controlled to a short-term opening jackpot state, so that, for example, in a game state where game balls are likely to enter the second start winning hole formed by the normal variable winning ball device 6B due to high opening control accompanying time-saving control, frequent occurrence of a short-term opening jackpot state in which it is difficult to obtain a prize ball can be avoided, and a decrease in interest in the game due to prolonged play can be prevented.

In addition, even when the variable special chart is the second special chart, a predetermined range of determined values different from when the variable special chart is the first special chart may be assigned to the "sudden" jackpot type. For example, when the variable special chart is the second special chart, a smaller determined value may be assigned to the "sudden" jackpot type compared to when the variable special chart is the first special chart. Alternatively, regardless of whether the variable special chart is the first special chart or the second special chart, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data.

By referring to the jackpot type determination table set in step S1243 shown in FIG. 18-4, the jackpot type is determined to be one of several types depending on whether the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type stored in the variable random number buffer matches any of the determination values assigned to each of the jackpot types of "non-certain variable", "certain variable", and "sudden certain variable" (step S1244).

By determining the jackpot type in the process of step S1244, it is determined before the derivation of the fixed special symbol as the variable display result whether the game state after the end of the jackpot game state will be controlled to a time-saving state or a sure-win state that is more advantageous to the player than the time-saving state. In response to the jackpot type thus determined, the determined jackpot type is stored by, for example, setting a jackpot type buffer value, which is a storage value of a jackpot type buffer provided in RAM 102 (step S1245). As an example, if the jackpot type is "non-sure-win", the jackpot type buffer value can be set to "0", if it is "sure-win", it can be set to "1", and if it is "sudden sure-win", it can be set to "2".

If it is determined in step S1241 that the result is not a "big win" (step S1241; No), it is determined whether the special chart display result is a "small win" or not (step S1246). Then, if it is determined that the result is a "small win" (step S1246; Yes), the small win flag provided in RAM 102 is set to ON (step S1247).

If it is determined in step S1246 that the result is not a "small win" (step S1246; No), it is determined whether the special chart display result is a "miss (time-saving)" (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as "time-saving") (step 059AKS003). Then, if it is determined that the result is a "time-saving" (step 059AKS003; Yes), the CPU 103 selects and sets the time-saving type determination table shown in FIG. 18-7 as the table to be used for determining the time-saving type as one of several types, and determines the time-saving type based on the random number value MR2, in the same way as when determining the big win type (step 059AKS004).

The time-saving type determination table shown in FIG. 18-7 is a table that is referenced to determine one of a number of types of time-saving type based on MR2, which is also the random number value for determining the jackpot type, when it is determined that the special symbol display result is a "miss (time-saving)" and that the time-saving state is to be controlled. In the time-saving type determination table, a number (determination value) that is compared with the random number value MR2 for determining the time-saving type is assigned to a number of types of jackpot types, such as "time-saving A" to "time-saving D," depending on whether the special symbol that is variably displayed (fluctuated) in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B). As shown in the figure, in the characteristic part 059AK of this embodiment, if the special pattern that has been variably displayed (changed) in the special pattern game is the first special pattern, the time-saving type is determined to be "Time-saving A" or "Time-saving B", and if the special pattern that has been variably displayed (changed) in the special pattern game is the second special pattern, the time-saving type is determined to be "Time-saving C" or "Time-saving D". "Time-saving A" and "Time-saving C" are time-saving types that are controlled to the time-saving state while 100 special pattern games are played. "Time-saving B" is a time-saving type that is controlled to the time-saving state while 50 special pattern games are played. "Time-saving D" is a time-saving type that is controlled to the time-saving state while 20 special pattern games are played.

After executing the process of step 059AKS004 in FIG. 18-4, the CPU 103 stores the determined time-saving type by, for example, setting a time-saving type buffer value, which is a value stored in a time-saving type buffer provided in the RAM 102, corresponding to the time-saving type determined in step 059AKS004 (step 059AKS005). As an example, if the time-saving type is "time-saving A", the time-saving type buffer value can be set to "0", if it is "time-saving B", "1", if it is "time-saving C", "2", and if it is "time-saving D", "3".

After executing the processing of step 059AKS005, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the time-saving flag stored in the RAM 102 is set to the ON state (step 059AKS006). The time-saving flag is a flag indicating that time-saving control is currently in progress (sometimes simply referred to as the time-saving flag). If the time-saving flag is in the OFF state (step 059AKS006; No), the time-saving start flag stored in the RAM 102 is set to the ON state (step 059AKS006A). The time-saving start flag is a flag indicating that time-saving control will start from the next special game to be played.

If step 059AKS003 determines that it is not a "miss (time-saving)" (step 059AKS003; No), if step 059AKS006 determines that the time-saving flag is on (step 059AKS006; Yes), or after executing any of the processes of steps S1245, S1247, and step 059AKS006A, a fixed special pattern is set in accordance with the pre-determined result of whether to control the game state to a jackpot game state or a small jackpot game state or whether to control the game state to the next time-saving state, and further, the determined result of the type of jackpot in the case of a jackpot game state, or the determined result of the type of time-saving state in the case of a time-saving state (step S1248). As an example, if it is determined in step 059AKS003 that the special display result is not a "miss (time-saving)", a special pattern showing the symbol "-", which is a missing pattern, is set as the confirmed special pattern in response to the pre-determined result that the special display result is a "miss". On the other hand, if it is determined in step 059AKS003 that the special display result is a "miss (time-saving)", one of the special patterns showing the numbers "1", "4", "6", and "8", which are time-saving patterns, is set as the confirmed special pattern according to the determination result of the time-saving type in step 059AKS004. That is, according to the determination result that the time-saving type is "time-saving A", a special pattern showing the number "1" is set as the confirmed special pattern. Also, according to the determination result that the time-saving type is "time-saving B", a special pattern showing the number "4" is set as the confirmed special pattern. Depending on the result of the decision to select the time-saving type as "Time-saving C," the special symbol showing the number "6" is set as the confirmed special symbol. Depending on the result of the decision to select the time-saving type as "Time-saving D," the special symbol showing the number "8" is set as the confirmed special symbol.

If the special chart display result is determined to be a "small win" in step S1246, the special chart showing the number "2" which is a small win pattern is set as the confirmed special pattern in response to the pre-determined result that the special chart display result is a "small win". Also, if the special chart display result is determined to be a "big win" in step S1241, one of the special charts showing the numbers "3", "5", or "7" which are the big win patterns is set as the confirmed special pattern according to the determination result of the big win type in step S1244. That is, according to the determination result of the big win type being "non-probability change", the special chart showing the number "3" which is the normal big win pattern among the normal opening round big win patterns is set as the confirmed special pattern. Also, according to the determination result of the big win type being "probability change", the special chart showing the number "7" which is the probability change pattern among the normal opening round big win patterns is set as the confirmed special pattern. Depending on the result of determining that the jackpot type is "suddenly confirmed," the special symbol showing the number "5," which is the symbol for a short-term opening jackpot, is set as the confirmed special symbol.

After the confirmed special symbol is set in step S1248, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1" which corresponds to the variable pattern setting process (step S1249), and the normal special symbol processing is terminated. If the number of reserved memories for the special symbol game using the first special symbol is "0" in step S1235 (step S1235; Yes), a predetermined demo display setting is performed (step S1250), and the normal special symbol processing is terminated. In this demo display setting, it is determined whether or not a performance control command (customer waiting demo designation command) that designates a demonstration display (demo screen display) by displaying a predetermined performance image on the image display device 5, for example, has been transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. At this time, if it has been transmitted, the demo display setting is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it has not been transmitted, a setting for transmitting the customer waiting demo designation command is performed, and then the demo display setting is terminated.

Figure 18-8 is a flow chart showing an example of the fluctuation pattern setting process executed in step S111 shown in Figure 14. When the fluctuation pattern setting process is started, the CPU 103 first determines whether the jackpot flag is on or not (step S261). If it is determined that the jackpot flag is on (step S261; Yes), the CPU 103 refers to the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table shown in Figure 18-11 (A) and determines a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a jackpot when the special chart display result is "jackpot" (step S262).

Figure 18-10 shows an example of a variation pattern in the characteristic part 059AK of this embodiment. In this embodiment, a plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance for the cases where the variable display result is "miss (time reduction)" and "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" and "reach", respectively, and for the case where the variable display result is "jackpot". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also called a "non-reach miss variation pattern"), and the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "miss (time reduction)" or "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also called a "reach miss variation pattern"). The non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the miss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "miss". The variation pattern corresponding to the variable display result being a "jackpot" is called a jackpot variation pattern. In the feature part 059AK, a variation pattern (the variation pattern of PB2-4 shown in the figure) dedicated to the time of a miss (time-saving) that is selected only when the variable display result is a "miss (time-saving)" and a variation pattern of a false time-saving that suggests that the variable display result will be a "miss (time-saving)" but is actually a "miss" are prepared. For the variation pattern dedicated to the time of a miss (time-saving) that is selected only when the variable display result is a "miss (time-saving)", for example, there may be a variation pattern of a super reach performance that is executed only when the variable display result is a "miss (time-saving)", such as the variation pattern of a super reach D.

There are two types of jackpot fluctuation patterns and reach fluctuation patterns: normal reach fluctuation patterns, in which a normal reach reach effect is executed, and super reach fluctuation patterns, in which a super reach reach effect is executed. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the variable display result being a "small hit" is called a small hit fluctuation pattern. The jackpot fluctuation pattern and small hit fluctuation pattern are included in the hit fluctuation patterns corresponding to the variable display result being a "jackpot" or a "small hit". The super reach fluctuation pattern includes reach effects such as Super Reach A, Super Reach B, and Super Reach C, regardless of whether the variable display result is a "jackpot" or a "miss".

The jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 18-11(A) is a table that is referenced to determine one of several types of fluctuation patterns based on the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, depending on the determination result of the jackpot type when it is determined (predetermined) that the special chart display result is a "jackpot". In the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 18-11(A), depending on whether the determination result of the jackpot type is "non-probability variable", "probability variable", or "sudden probability variable", the number (determination value) compared with the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is assigned to one of the fluctuation patterns PA4-1, PB4-1, PB4-2, PB4-3, and PC1-1 to PC1-3.

In the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table 132A shown in FIG. 18-11(A), there is a portion in which a determination value is assigned to each fluctuation pattern so that the proportion determined for each fluctuation pattern differs depending on which of the multiple types of jackpots is determined to be the jackpot type. For example, the allocation of determination values to fluctuation patterns PA4-1, PB4-1, PB4-2, and PB4-3 differs depending on whether the jackpot type is "non-probable variable" or "probable variable." This makes it possible to vary the proportion determined for the same fluctuation pattern depending on the result of determining which of the multiple types of jackpots to determine.

In addition, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, there is a portion in which a determination value is assigned to a different fluctuation pattern depending on which of the multiple types of jackpot types has been determined. For example, when the jackpot type is "non-probability change" or "probability change", a determination value is assigned to fluctuation pattern PA4-1, fluctuation pattern PB4-1, fluctuation pattern PB4-2, and fluctuation pattern PB4-3, while a determination value is not assigned to fluctuation pattern PC1-1 to fluctuation pattern PC1-3. In contrast, when the jackpot type is "sudden probability", a determination value is assigned to fluctuation pattern PC1-1 to fluctuation pattern PC1-3, while a determination value is not assigned to fluctuation pattern PA4-1, fluctuation pattern PB4-1, fluctuation pattern PB4-2, and fluctuation pattern PB4-3. As a result, when the special chart display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "sudden probability" and the state is controlled to a short-term opening jackpot state, a fluctuation pattern different from the case of being controlled to a normal opening jackpot state can be determined.

In addition, when the jackpot type is determined to be either "non-probability change", "probability change", or "sudden probability", the allocation of the determination value to each variation pattern may be made different depending on whether the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is in a normal state, a probability change state, or a time-saving state. This makes it possible to make the ratio of being determined to the same variation pattern different depending on whether the game state is in one of the multiple types. In addition, when the jackpot type is determined to be either "non-probability change", "probability change", or "sudden probability", the determination value may be assigned to a different variation pattern depending on whether the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is in a normal state, a probability change state, or a time-saving state. This makes it possible to determine a different variation pattern depending on whether the game state is in one of the multiple types. In this embodiment, more determination values are assigned to the variation pattern PA4-1, which indicates the variation pattern of the normal reach, when the jackpot type is "non-probability change", than when it is "probability change". Therefore, when the reach effect of the Super Reach is executed, the chance of the jackpot type being a "probable win" is higher than that of a "non-probable win", which gives the player hope and increases his/her interest in the game. In addition, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 18-11(A), more determination values are assigned to the fluctuation pattern PB4-2 that produces the reach effect of the Super Reach B than to the fluctuation pattern PB4-1 that produces the reach effect of the Super Reach C, and to the fluctuation pattern PB4-3 that produces the reach effect of the Super Reach A than to the fluctuation pattern PB4-2, that is, as the fluctuation time becomes longer (see the fluctuation time in FIG. 18-10).

Returning to FIG. 18-8, if it is determined in the processing of step S261 that the big win flag is off (step S261; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the small win flag is on (step S263). If it is determined that the small win flag is on (step S263; Yes), the CPU 103 refers to the small win fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 18-11 (B) and determines the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the small win when the special chart display result is "small win" (step S264).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the small hit flag is in the OFF state (step S263; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the time-saving start flag is in the ON state (step 059AKS007). If it is determined that the time-saving start flag is in the ON state (step 059AKS007; Yes), the CPU 103 selects the fluctuation pattern table when the time-saving start flag is ON, as shown in Figures 18-12 (A), (C), and (D) (step 059AKS008). On the other hand, if it is determined that the time-saving start flag is in the OFF state (step 059AKS007; No), the CPU 103 selects the fluctuation pattern table when the time-saving start flag is OFF, as shown in Figures 18-12 (B) and (E) (step 059AKS009).

After executing the processing of step 059AKS008 or step 059AKS009, the CPU 103 determines a variation pattern corresponding to a miss when the special chart display result is "miss (time reduction)" or "miss" depending on the type of special chart, such as whether the variable special chart is the first special chart or the second special chart, and whether or not the time reduction is in progress (step 059AKS010). Specifically, in step 059AKS010, when the special chart display result is "miss (time reduction)" and the variable special chart is the first special chart, regardless of whether or not the time reduction control is being performed, the time reduction start flag on time miss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 18-12 (A) is referenced, and the variation pattern is determined to be one of multiple types according to the type of time reduction based on, for example, numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern stored in the variation random number buffer. On the other hand, when the special chart display result is "miss (time-saving)" and the variable special chart is the second special chart, depending on whether or not time-saving control is being performed, the time-saving start flag on time-miss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 18-12 (C) or (D) is referenced, and the fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, etc. Also, when the special chart display result is "miss" and the variable special chart is the first special chart, depending on whether or not time-saving control is being performed in the time-saving state, depending on whether or not time-saving control is being performed in the time-saving state, depending on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3, etc., the fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of types. Also, when the special chart display result is "miss" and the variable special chart is the second special chart, if the time is shortened, the time-saving start flag OFF miss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 18-12 (B) is referenced, and the fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3. On the other hand, if the time is normal, the time-saving start flag OFF miss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 18-12 (E) is referenced, and the fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3. As shown in the figure, in the characteristic part 059AK of this embodiment, when the variable display result is "miss (time-saving)" (when the time-saving start flag ON miss fluctuation pattern determination table is selected), the determination value is assigned so that the time-saving type is determined at different rates according to the type of super reach. Specifically, the determination value is assigned so that the time-saving type with the higher expectation of a jackpot is the time-saving type with the higher number of time-saving times when the super reach B is executed (the determination value is assigned so that the rate of the time-saving type of "time-saving A" is higher than that of super reach C). Also, as shown in the figure, when the variable display result is "miss (time-saving)" (when the time-saving start flag-on miss variable pattern determination table is selected), the determination value is not assigned to the super reach A, which has the highest jackpot expectation. That is, in the feature part 059AK, the determination value is assigned so that the rate of "miss (time-saving)" varies depending on the type of super reach. Also, in the feature part 059AK, as shown in Figs. 18-11 and 11-12, for example, when the reach performance of the super reach B or super reach C is executed, the determination value is assigned so that a plurality of variable display results are obtained, such as a jackpot, a miss (time-saving), or a simple miss. Therefore, the variation of the performance results is increased, and the interest in the game can be improved. Also, as described above, the variable winning ball device 6B forming the second start winning hole is provided in the game area on the right side of the player, and the game ball wins only when the player hits the ball to the right. Therefore, in the feature part 059AK, when the player hits the right button in the time-saving state, the second special chart changes in the time-saving state. On the other hand, when the time-saving control ends and reserved memory corresponding to the second special chart remains, the second special chart changes in the normal state. In other words, the second special chart changes in the normal state only when the time-saving control ends and reserved memory corresponding to the second special chart remains. Therefore, in the feature part 059AK, as shown in FIG. 18-12(E), the variable display (variation) variation pattern determination table corresponds to the maximum number of variable displays performed after the time-saving ends, which is four times (corresponding to the maximum number of reserved memories corresponding to the second special chart, "4").

Returning to FIG. 18-8, after executing the processing of step 059AKS010, the CPU 103 judges whether the time-saving start flag is set to the ON state (step 059AKS011). If the time-saving start flag is in the ON state (step 059AKS011; Yes), the CPU 103 judges whether the determined fluctuation pattern is PB2-4 indicating that it is a fluctuation pattern of time-saving confirmation (i.e., a fluctuation pattern dedicated to the time-saving when it is a miss (time-saving)) (step 059AKS012). If the determined fluctuation pattern is not PB2-4, a time-saving promotion performance period as a period for executing the time-saving promotion performance described later is added to the special chart fluctuation time indicated by the determined fluctuation pattern (step 059AKS013). Specifically, in step 059AKS013, as shown in FIG. 18-9, a time-saving promotion performance period according to the time-saving type may be added. In addition, PB2-4, which is a special variation pattern for when you lose (time-saving), and PB2-5, which is a variation pattern for false time-saving, include a time-saving teasing performance period (10 seconds) in the special chart variation time shown in Figure 18-10. The time-saving teasing performance is a performance that teases whether or not the time-saving pattern, which is a decorative pattern that indicates that the time-saving state will be controlled from the next variable display, will be displayed as the final stopping pattern of the decorative patterns.

After executing any one of steps S262, S264, and 059AKS013 in FIG. 18-8, the CPU 103 sets the special symbol fluctuation time (also called the fluctuation time), which is the variable display time of the special symbol (step S266). The special symbol fluctuation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is the time required from when the fluctuation of the special symbol starts in the special symbol game until the determined special symbol, which is the variable display result (special symbol display result), is derived and displayed. As shown in FIG. 18-10, the special symbol fluctuation time is predetermined in accordance with multiple fluctuation patterns prepared in advance, but when the processing of step 059AKS013 is executed, it is a period to which a time-saving teasing performance period is added. The CPU 103 can set the timing at which the variable display result of the special pattern or the decorative pattern is derived by setting the special pattern variable time corresponding to the variable pattern selected in each process of steps S262, S264, and 059AKS013 (the period to which the time-saving teasing performance period is added when the process of step 059AKS013 is executed). The special pattern variable time is set, for example, by setting a timer value corresponding to the special pattern variable time to a game control process timer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102. In addition, in the characteristic part 059AK of this embodiment, when the time-saving start flag is in the on state and the determined variable pattern is not PB2-4, an example is shown in which the time-saving teasing performance period as a period for executing the time-saving teasing performance is added to the special pattern variable time indicated by the variation pattern, but in addition to this, for example, when the variable display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit", a predetermined period may be added to the special pattern variable time. In this case, just like the time-saving type, a period corresponding to the jackpot type can be added, and the processing can be the same as in step 059AKS013. Specifically, the periods corresponding to "Time-saving A," "Time-saving B," and "Time-saving C" shown in FIG. 18-9 can be added as periods corresponding to "Non-probability change," "probability change," and "sudden probability change."

Following the processing of step S266, a setting is made to start the variation of the special pattern so that either the special pattern game using the first special pattern in the first special pattern display device 4A or the special pattern game using the second special pattern in the second special pattern display device 4B, for which the start condition is satisfied, is started (step S267). As an example, if the variable special pattern designation buffer value is "1", a setting is made to send a drive signal to update the display of the first special pattern in the first special pattern display device 4A. On the other hand, if the variable special pattern designation buffer value is "2", a setting is made to send a drive signal to update the display of the second special pattern in the second special pattern display device 4B. This starts the special pattern game. Note that when the CPU 103 starts the variable display using the first special pattern, it may control the first reserved indicator 25A to make the first reserved indicator 25A perform a display that can identify the first special pattern reserved memory number that has been subtracted by one (for example, by reducing the number of lit LEDs by one). In addition, when the CPU 103 starts the variable display using the second special chart, it may control the second reserved display 25B to cause the second reserved display 25B to display an indication that identifies the second special chart reserved memory number that has been reduced by one (for example, by reducing the number of lit LEDs by one).

After executing the process of step S267, the CPU 103 performs a transmission setting for a command (variation start command) at the start of the variation of the special pattern in order to notify the performance control board 12 of the special pattern display result and the result of the determination of the variation pattern (step S268). For example, when the variable special pattern designation buffer value is "1", the CPU 103 performs a transmission setting for sequentially transmitting the first variation start designation command, the variation pattern designation command (a command including EXT data indicating the variation pattern determined in step S262, S264, or S265), the display result designation command (a command including EXT data indicating the determined variable display result), and the first special pattern reserved memory number designation command (the first special pattern reserved memory number count value reduced by 1, that is, a command including EXT data indicating the first special pattern reserved memory number when one reserved memory is consumed by the start of the special pattern game) as a variation start command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. On the other hand, when the variable special chart designation buffer value is "2", the CPU 103 performs transmission setting to sequentially transmit from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 as a variable start command, a second variable start designation command, a variable pattern designation command (a command including EXT data indicating the variable pattern determined in step S262, S264 or S265), a display result designation command (a command including EXT data indicating the determined variable display result), and a second special chart reserved memory number designation command (a command including EXT data indicating the second special chart reserved memory number count value reduced by 1, that is, the number of second special chart reserved memories when one reserved memory is consumed by the start of execution of the special chart game).

After executing the processing of step S268, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special chart process flag to "2" (step S267) and then ends the variation pattern setting processing.

Figure 18-13 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S113 of Figure 14 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop process shown in Figure 18-13, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not a special symbol confirmation display flag provided in a predetermined area (such as a game control flag setting section) of the RAM 102 is on (step S291). Here, the special symbol confirmation display flag is set to the on state by the process of step S295 described below in response to the derivation and display of a confirmed special symbol that is a variable display result in the special symbol game.

When the special pattern confirmation display flag is off in step S291 (step S291; No), settings are made to derive and display the confirmed special pattern (step S292). At this time, a decorative pattern stop command transmission setting process is performed to send a decorative pattern stop command to the performance control board 12 (step 059AKS021). The decorative pattern stop command is also called a pattern confirmation command, and is a command that specifies that the variable display (variation) of the decorative pattern is terminated and the display result (stop pattern) is derived and displayed, and is also a command that specifies the period (confirmation period) for which the derived and displayed decorative pattern is to be displayed.

Here, we will explain the main performance control commands sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 by the command control process with reference to Figure 18-14. Note that "(H)" indicates a hexadecimal number.

Command 80XX (H) is a presentation control command (variation pattern designation command) that designates the variation pattern of the decorative pattern that is variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special pattern. In this embodiment, a variation pattern designation command is set that corresponds to each variation pattern. For example, a unique number (variation pattern number) is assigned to each variation pattern, and this number is set as "XX" in the command (for example, "01" for variation pattern PA1-1). The variation pattern designation command is also a command for designating the start of the variation of the decorative pattern.

Command 8A01 (H) is a presentation control command (first start port winning designation command) that specifies that a first start winning has occurred due to a gaming medium entering the first start port. Command 8A02 (H) is a presentation control command (second start port winning designation command) that specifies that a second start winning has occurred due to a gaming medium entering the second start port. The first start port winning designation command and the second start port winning designation command are sometimes collectively referred to as start port winning designation commands.

Command 8CXX (H) is a presentation control command (display result specification command) that specifies whether or not to treat it as a jackpot or a miss (time-saving), and the type of jackpot or the type of time-saving, i.e., it is a performance control command that specifies a variable display result. In this embodiment, a display result specification command corresponding to each display result is set. For example, each display result is assigned a unique number, and that number is set to "XX" in the command (for example, "00" for "miss", "01" for "miss (time-saving A)" with time-saving type "time-saving A" and "jackpot" with "probable change", etc.).

Command 8D01 (H) is a presentation control command (first variation start designation command) that designates the start of the variable display (variation) of the first special symbol. Command 8D02 (H) is a presentation control command (second variation start designation command) that designates the start of the variable display (variation) of the second special symbol. The first variation start designation command and the second variation start designation command may be collectively referred to as the variation start designation command. Note that information indicating whether the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol is to be started may be included in the variation pattern determination result designation command described below.

Command 8FXX (H) is a presentation control command (pattern determination command) that specifies ending the variable display (fluctuation) of the decorative pattern and deriving and displaying the display result (stop pattern), and is also a command that specifies the period (determination period) for which the derived and displayed decorative pattern is to be displayed. In the characteristic part 059AK of this embodiment, display result determination commands are set that correspond to whether or not the variable display result is a "miss (time reduction)" and to each type of time reduction when the variable display result is a "miss (time reduction)". For example, if the variable display result is not "miss (time saving)", "XX" in the command is set to "00", and if the variable display result is "miss (time saving)", a unique number is assigned according to the time saving type, and that number is set to "XX" in the command (for example, if the time saving type is "time saving A", it is "01", if the time saving type is "time saving B", it is "02", if the time saving type is "time saving C", it is "03", if the time saving type is "time saving D", it is "04", etc.).

Command 95XX (H) is a presentation control command (game state designation command) that designates the game state. In this embodiment, a game state designation command corresponding to each game state is set. For example, if the game state is a normal state (low probability low base), "XX" is set to "00". For example, if the game state is a high probability low base state, "XX" is set to "01". For example, if the game state is a high probability high base state, "XX" is set to "02". For example, if the game state is a low probability high base state, "XX" is set to "03".

Command A000 (H) is an effect control command (jackpot start designation command) that specifies the start of a jackpot game state (start of fanfare). Note that a fanfare is an effect that is executed at the start of a jackpot game state to notify the player that a jackpot game state has been entered. Command A100 (H) is an effect control command (small jackpot start designation command) that specifies the start of a small jackpot game state.

Command A2XX(H) is a presentation control command (command to specify when the large prize opening is open) that specifies the opening of the special variable prize ball device 7 for the number of times (rounds) indicated by XX. A3XX(H) is a presentation control command (command to specify when the large prize opening is open) that specifies the closing of the special variable prize ball device 7 for the number of times (rounds) indicated by XX.

Command A601 (H) is a presentation control command (jackpot end designation command) that specifies the end of the jackpot game state (start of the ending). Note that an ending is a presentation that is executed when the jackpot game state ends, and notifies the player that the jackpot game state is ending. Command A602 (H) is a presentation control command (small jackpot end designation command) that specifies the end of the small jackpot game state.

Command C1XX (H) is a performance control command (first special chart reserved memory number designation command) that specifies the first special chart reserved memory number. "XX" indicates the first special chart reserved memory number. Command C2XX (H) is a performance control command (second special chart reserved memory number designation command) that specifies the second special chart reserved memory number. "XX" indicates the second special chart reserved memory number. The first special chart reserved memory number designation command and the second special chart reserved memory number designation command are sometimes collectively referred to as the special chart reserved memory number designation command.

Command C4XX (H) is a presentation control command (symbol determination result designation command) that specifies the display result among the determination results at the time of the start winning. Command C5XX (H) is a presentation control command (variation pattern determination result designation command) that specifies the variation pattern among the determination results at the time of the start winning. In this embodiment, in the processing of step S101 described later, when the first start winning or the second start winning occurs, random numbers MR1 to 3 are extracted. For the variable display corresponding to the extracted random numbers MR1 to 3, before the start condition of the variable display is established, it is determined whether the variable display result of the variable display will be a "jackpot" or not, and the variation pattern of the variable display, based on the random numbers MR1 and MR3 of the extracted random numbers MR1 to 3. The determination at the time of the start winning refers to these determinations, and is performed in the random number value determination processing at the time of winning in step S1213 (see FIG. 18-3). Note that in certain cases, this determination may not be made. A unique number is assigned to the judgment result (including no judgment) for the display result, and the number is set to "XX" in the pattern designation command (for example, "00" for "no judgment", "01" for "miss", etc. are set, a unique number is assigned according to the type of time-saving for "miss (time-saving)", and a unique number is assigned according to the type of jackpot for "jackpot"). A unique number is assigned to the judgment result (including no judgment) for the fluctuation pattern, and the number is set to "XX" in the fluctuation pattern designation command (for example, "00" for "no judgment", "11" for "PA1-1", "12" for "PA1-2", etc.).

Figure 18-15 (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 059AKS021 of Figure 18-13 as a decorative symbol stop command transmission setting process. The decorative symbol stop command transmission setting process is a process for making settings to transmit a decorative symbol stop command according to the variable display result and the time-saving type. In the decorative symbol stop command transmission setting process, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the time-saving flag is set to the on state (step 059AKS041). If the time-saving flag is set to the off state (step 059AKS041; No), it determines whether or not the time-saving start flag is set to the on state (step 059AKS042). If the time-saving start flag is on (step 059AKS042; Yes), the current variable display result is a "miss (time-saving)," so the CPU 103 sets the transmission of a decorative pattern stop command according to the type of time-saving (step 059AKS043), and ends the decorative pattern stop command transmission setting process.

Specifically, in step 059AKS043, as shown in FIG. 18-15(B), a decorative pattern stop command (pattern determination command) that is predetermined according to the time-saving type is set. As shown in the figure, the determination time is 10 seconds for "time-saving A" and "time-saving B", while the determination time is 5 seconds for "time-saving C" and 2 seconds for "time-saving D". The time-saving types of "time-saving A" and "time-saving B" are time-saving types that are determined only when the variable display result of the first special pattern is "miss (time-saving)", and the time-saving types of "time-saving C" and "time-saving D" are time-saving types that are determined only when the variable display result of the second special pattern is "miss (time-saving)". Therefore, the determination time differs between when the variable display result of the first special pattern is "miss (time-saving)" and when the variable display result of the second special pattern is "miss (time-saving)", and the variation of the variable display increases, which can improve the interest in the game. In addition, when the variable display result of the second special symbol is "miss (time shortening)", the fixed period differs depending on the type of time shortening, so that the player's attention can be drawn to the fixed period. In addition, in the feature part 059AK, the processing of step 059AKS043 is performed only when the time shortening state is not in effect, so that the processing of step 059AKS043 is performed only when the variable display result of the variable display corresponding to the reserved (remaining reserved) second special symbol remaining after the time shortening ends is "miss (time shortening)", resulting in a fixed time corresponding to the time shortening type of "time shortening C" and "time shortening D" shown in the figure. In other words, in a short period after the time shortening ends (at most after the end of the period of four variable displays of the maximum reserved memory number of the second special symbol), the fixed time is shorter than when the variable display result corresponding to the first special symbol in the normal state is "miss (time shortening)" ("time shortening A" and "time shortening B") as shown in the figure. Therefore, by lengthening the fixed period for the normal state and the variable display of the first special symbol, which is necessary to clearly inform the player that the game will be controlled to the time-saving state, it is possible to provide a period during which the player is clearly informed that the game will be controlled to the time-saving state. Also, if the game is to be controlled to the time-saving state again in a short period of time after the time-saving state ends, a long fixed period may reduce interest in the game, so the fixed period is shortened to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

If the time-saving flag is ON in step 059AKS041 of FIG. 18-15 (A) (step 059AKS041; Yes), or if the time-saving start flag is OFF in step 059AKS042 (step 059AKS042; No), the CPU 103 sets the decorative symbol stop command to send command 8F00 (fixed period 0.5 seconds) (step 059AKS044), and ends the decorative symbol stop command sending setting process.

Returning to FIG. 18-13, after executing the processing of step 059AKS021, the CPU 103 sets the fixed period (10 seconds, 5 seconds, 2 seconds, or 0.5 seconds) corresponding to the decorative symbol stop command (symbol fixed command) set in step 059AKS021 as the special symbol fixed display time (step 059AKS022). Note that in the processing of step 059AKS022, a timer initial value determined in advance according to the variable display result and the time-saving type may be set in the game control process timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153. Then, the special symbol fixed display flag is set to the ON state (step S295), and the special symbol stop processing is terminated. In this way, after the determined special pattern is derived and displayed by the processing of step S292, until the determined special pattern display time set in step 059AKS022 has elapsed, the determined special pattern display flag is determined to be on in step S291 each time the special pattern stop processing is executed in the special pattern process processing in response to the occurrence of a timer interrupt.

When the special symbol confirmation display flag is on in step S291 (step S291; Yes), it is determined whether the special symbol confirmation display time has elapsed (step S296). For example, in the process of step S296, the game control process timer value, which is the stored value of the game control process timer whose timer initial value was set in the process of step S294, is read, and whether the special symbol confirmation display time has elapsed can be determined depending on whether the timer value has become "0". Note that if the game control process timer value is a value other than "0", it can be updated so that 1 is subtracted each time the game control timer interrupt process is executed based on the occurrence of a timer interrupt. If the special symbol confirmation display time has not elapsed in step S296 (step S296; No), the special symbol stop process is terminated, and the special symbol confirmation display time is waited for to elapse.

When the special chart confirmation display time has elapsed in step S296 (step S296; Yes), the special chart confirmation display flag is cleared to the off state (step S297), and then it is determined whether the jackpot flag is on or not (step S298). At this time, if the jackpot flag is on (step S298; Yes), a predetermined fixed time is set as the jackpot start performance waiting time (step S299). In addition, a setting is made to send the jackpot start designation command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 (step S300). For example, in the process of step S300, the setting data indicating the storage address in ROM 101 of the jackpot start designation command table prepared in advance to send the jackpot start designation command according to the jackpot type buffer value may be stored in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer.

Following the processing of step S300, the jackpot flag is cleared to the OFF state (step S301). In addition, settings are made to end the special probability state, the time-saving state, and the remaining reserved period described below (step 059AKS023). For example, the processing of step 059AKS023 may include clearing the special probability flag, the time-saving flag, and the remaining reserved period flag to the OFF state, and clearing the time-saving counter for counting the remaining number of special games executed in the time-saving state. The value of the special symbol process flag is then updated to "4", which corresponds to the processing before the opening of the jackpot (step S303), and the special symbol stop processing is terminated.

If the big win flag is off in step S298 (step S298; No), it is determined whether the small win flag is on (step S304). At this time, if the small win flag is on (step S304; Yes), a predetermined fixed time is set as the small win start presentation waiting time (step S305). Next, a setting is made to send a hit start designation command corresponding to the special chart display result becoming "small win" from the main board 11 to the presentation control board 12 (step S306). After that, the small win flag is cleared to the off state (step S307). In addition, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "8", which is a value corresponding to the small win release pre-processing (step S308).

If the small hit flag is off in step S304 (step S304; No), it is determined whether the time-saving start flag is on (step 059AKS024). If the time-saving start flag is on (step 059AKS024; Yes), the time-saving start processing is executed (step 059AKS025). Details of the time-saving start processing will be described later. After executing the processing of step 059AKS025, or if the time-saving start flag is off in step 059AKS024 (step 059AKS024; No), the CPU 103 clears the special chart process flag and initializes its value to "0" (step S309). After executing either the processing of step S308 or S309, it is determined whether to end the time-saving state (step 059AKS027). Specifically, in the processing of step 059AKS027, when the time-saving flag is on, the time-saving count value, which is the stored value of the time-saving count counter, is updated, for example by subtracting 1. Then, it is determined whether the updated time-saving count value matches a predetermined time-saving end judgment value (for example, "0"). At this time, if it matches the time-saving end judgment value, it is determined as Yes. On the other hand, if it does not match the time-saving end judgment value, it is determined as No.

When the time-saving state is to be ended (step 059AKS027; Yes), the CPU 103 performs processing at the end of the time-saving state (step 059AKS028). Details of the processing at the end of the time-saving state will be described later. After executing the processing of step 059AKS028, or when the time-saving state is not to be ended in step 059AKS027 (step 059AKS027; No), the CPU 103 judges whether or not it is the remaining reserved period (step 059AKS030). Whether or not it is the remaining reserved period may be judged by checking whether or not the remaining reserved period flag described later is set to the on state. When it is the remaining reserved period, that is, when the remaining reserved period flag is on (step 059AKS030; Yes), the CPU 103 performs the remaining reserved period end judgment processing (step 059AKS031) and then ends the special pattern stop processing. Details of the remaining reserved period end judgment processing will be described later. On the other hand, if it is not the remaining reserved period, i.e., if the remaining reserved period flag is off (step 059AKS030; No), the CPU 103 ends the special symbol stop processing.

Figure 18-16 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in step 059AKS025 of Figure 18-13 as the time-saving start processing. The time-saving start processing is processing in which the variable display result is "miss (time-saving)" and settings are made to perform time-saving control from the next variable display. In the time-saving start processing shown in Figure 18-16, the CPU 103 first clears the time-saving start flag to the OFF state (step 059AKS051) and sets the time-saving in progress flag to the ON state (step 059AKS052). Next, it is determined whether the remaining reserved period flag is ON or not (step 059AKS053). The remaining reservation period flag is a flag indicating that a variable display corresponding to the reservation (remaining reservation) of the second special chart remaining after the time-saving period ends is in progress, and is set to the ON state by the processing of step 059AKS063 (see FIG. 18-17) described later, and is cleared to the OFF state when all the variable displays corresponding to the reservation (remaining reservation) of the second special chart remaining after the time-saving period ends (step 059AKS072 described later), or when the variable display result of the variable display corresponding to the reservation (remaining reservation) of the second special chart remaining after the time-saving period ends becomes a "miss (time-saving period)" (step 059AKS055 described later).

When it is determined in step 059AKS053 of FIG. 18-16 that the flag is in the OFF state during the remaining reserved period (step 059AKS053; No), the CPU 103 sets up to send a right hit command to instruct the player to hit the ball to the right, which is to launch the game ball into the game area on the right side (step 059AKS054), and ends the time-saving start processing. The right hit command set in the processing of step 059AKS054 is sent to the performance control board 12, and a right hit instruction display is displayed on the performance control board 12 in the manner shown in FIG. 18-33 (F).

On the other hand, if it is determined in step 059AKS053 of FIG. 18-16 that the remaining reserved period flag is in the ON state (step 059AKS053; Yes), the CPU 103 clears the remaining reserved period flag to the OFF state (step 059AKS055) and clears various count values (step 059AKS056). In the process of step 059AKS056, the remaining reserved count value and the time-saving end variable count value described later may be cleared to the initial value of "0". The time-saving end variable count value, like the remaining reserved count value, may be provided in a specified area of the RAM 102, and is a count value indicating the number of variable displays that have been performed since the time-saving state ended. Although not shown in the figure, the time-saving end variable count value may be incremented by +1 each time a variable display is performed when the remaining reserved period flag is in the ON state in the special pattern variable process in step S112 of FIG. 14, for example.

After executing the processing of step 059AKS056 in FIG. 18-16, the CPU 103 sets up to send a simple mode right-hit instruction command (step 059AKS057) and ends the processing at the start of the time-saving feature. The simple mode right-hit instruction command set up in the processing of step 059AKS057 is sent to the performance control board 12, and a right-hit instruction display of the mode shown in FIG. 18-35 (O) is displayed on the performance control board 12. The simple mode right-hit instruction command set up for sending in step 059AKS057 in FIG. 18-16 differs from the right-hit instruction command set up for sending in the processing of step 059AKS054, and this is because the variable display result during the remaining reserved period is a "miss (time-saving feature)." Specifically, since the game will be controlled back to the time-saving state again in a short period of time after the time-saving feature has ended (at most after the end of the period of four variable displays of the maximum reserved memory number of the second special chart), if the right-hit command set to be sent in the processing of step 059AKS054 is sent in the processing of step 059AKS057, it may be annoying to the player. Therefore, in the processing of step 059AKS057, a command for displaying the right-hit command in a simple manner is sent to prevent the game from being annoying to the player and reducing their interest in the game.

Figure 18-17 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in step 059AKS028 of Figure 18-13 as the time-saving end processing. The time-saving end processing is a processing to end the time-saving control and set the remaining reserved period. In the case of a probability variable state in which the time-saving flag is on and the probability variable flag is on, the time-saving control may be continued until the next variable display result becomes a "jackpot". Alternatively, a determination may be made as to whether or not to end the time-saving control even in the probability variable state, and the time-saving control may be ended based on the determination result that the time-saving control should be ended. When the time-saving control is ended in this way, the probability variable control may also be ended to return to the normal state, or the probability variable control may be continued until the next variable display result becomes a "jackpot" or until a predetermined number of special game games have been executed.

In the time-saving end processing shown in FIG. 18-17, the CPU 103 first clears the time-saving flag to the off state (step 059AKS061). Next, it is determined whether or not a second special symbol is reserved (remaining reservation) (step 059AKS062). In step 059AKS062, it is possible to determine whether or not a second special symbol is reserved (remaining reservation) by checking the reservation information corresponding to the second special symbol stored in a specified area of the RAM 102.

If there is a reserved second special chart (remaining reservation) (step 059AKS062; Yes), the remaining reservation period flag is set to the on state (step 059AKS063), and the remaining reservation number count value is set according to the number of reserved second special charts (remaining reservations) (step 059AKS064). Specifically, in step 059AKS064, if the number of reserved information corresponding to the second special chart stored in a specified area of RAM 102 is "4", the remaining reservation number count value is set to "4", if it is "3", it is set to "3", if it is "2", it is set to "2", and if it is "1", it is set to "1".

After executing the process of step 059AKS064, the CPU 103 initializes the fluctuation count value after the time-saving period ends by setting it to "0" (step 059AKS065). Since the fluctuation count value after the time-saving period ends is initialized to "0" in step 059AKS056 of FIG. 18-16, if it is "0", the process of step 059AKS065 may be skipped. After executing the process of step 059AKS065, the CPU 103 sets up to send a right-hit erase command to erase the right-hit instruction display (step 059AKS066), and ends the process at the end of the time-saving period. The right-hit erase command set in the process of step 059AKS066 is sent to the performance control board 12, and the process of step 059AKS136 shown in FIG. 18-30 is executed on the performance control board 12 side, and the right-hit instruction display is erased.

If it is determined in step 059AKS062 of FIG. 18-17 that there is no reserved (remaining reservation) for the second special chart (step 059AKS062; No), the CPU 103 sets up to send a left hit instruction command to instruct the player to return to so-called left hit, which fires the game ball into the game area on the left side (step 059AKS067), and ends the time-saving end processing.

Figure 18-18 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step 059AKS031 of Figure 18-13 as the remaining reservation period end judgment process. The remaining reservation period end judgment process is a process that judges whether the remaining reservation period has ended, that is, whether all variable displays corresponding to the reservation (remaining reservation) of the second special chart remaining after the time reduction has ended, and ends the remaining reservation period if they have ended. In the remaining reservation period end judgment process, the CPU 103 first judges whether the fluctuation count value after the time reduction ends matches the remaining reservation number count value set in step 059AKS064 of Figure 18-17 (step 059AKS071). If the fluctuation count value after the time reduction ends does not match the remaining reservation number count value (step 059AKS071; No), the CPU 103 ends the remaining reservation period end judgment process as it is.

On the other hand, if the variation count value after the time-saving period ends matches the remaining reserved number count value (step 059AKS071; Yes), the CPU 103 clears the remaining reserved period flag to the off state (step 059AKS072) and clears various count values (step 059AKS073). In the process of step 059AKS073, the remaining reserved count value and the variation count value after the time-saving period end may be cleared to the initial value of "0", similar to the process of step 059AKS056. After executing the process of step 059AKS074, the CPU 103 sets the left hit instruction command to be sent to instruct the player to return to the so-called left hit, which fires the game ball into the game area on the left side of the player (step 059AKS074), and ends the remaining reserved period end judgment process. The left hit instruction command set in the processing of step 059AKS074 is sent to the performance control board 12, and the left hit instruction is displayed on the performance control board 12 as shown in Figure 18-34 (N-2).

Figure 18-19 is a flow chart showing an example of the jackpot end processing executed in step S117 of Figure 14. In the jackpot end processing shown in Figure 18-19, the CPU 103 first judges whether the jackpot end performance waiting time has elapsed (step S321). As an example, in the jackpot release post-processing of step S116 shown in Figure 14, when the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "7", a timer initial value determined in advance corresponding to the jackpot end performance waiting time, which is the execution period of the ending performance, is set in the game control process timer. Then, in the processing of step S321, for example, the game control process timer value is updated by subtracting 1, and whether the jackpot end performance waiting time has elapsed may be judged depending on whether the updated game control process timer value matches a predetermined waiting time elapse judgment value (for example, "0"). If the jackpot end performance waiting time has not elapsed in step S321 (step S321; No), the jackpot end processing is terminated as it is.

In contrast, if the waiting time for the jackpot end presentation has elapsed in step S321 (step S321; Yes), the jackpot type buffer value stored in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is read (step S322) to determine whether the jackpot type was "non-probability change", "probability change", or "sudden probability change". At this time, it is determined whether the determined jackpot type is "non-probability change" (step S323).

If the jackpot type is determined to be "non-probability variable" in step S323 (step S323; Yes), settings are made to start control to change the game state to a time-saving state (step S324). For example, the CPU 103 sets the time-saving flag to the ON state, and sets a predetermined count initial value (e.g., "100") corresponding to the upper limit of the special game that can be executed in the time-saving state to the time-saving count counter. On the other hand, if the jackpot type is determined to be "probability variable" or "sudden probability variable" (step S323; No), settings are made to start control to change the game state to a probability variable state (step S325). For example, the CPU 103 sets both the probability variable flag and the time-saving flag to the ON state.

In addition, when the jackpot type is judged to be "high probability", settings may be made to control the state to different types of high probability states when the jackpot type is judged to be "sudden probability". As an example, when the jackpot type is judged to be "high probability", both the high probability flag and the time-saving flag are set to the ON state, the initial value of the time-saving count value is not set, and both the high probability control and the time-saving control are set to continue until the special chart display result is "high probability". On the other hand, when the jackpot type is judged to be "sudden probability", both the high probability flag and the time-saving flag are set to the ON state, the initial value of the time-saving count value is set as in the case of being controlled to the time-saving state, and the high probability control is continued until the special chart display result is "high probability", while the time-saving control is set to continue until the special chart game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, "100"). Alternatively, when the jackpot type is determined to be "sudden", if a predetermined sudden probability during time-saving flag is on, settings may be made to start time-saving control together with probability variable control, whereas if the sudden probability during time-saving flag is off, settings may be made to start only probability variable control. Here, the sudden probability during time-saving flag may be set to the on state when it is determined that the jackpot flag is on in step S298 shown in FIG. 18-13, for example, in response to the jackpot type being "sudden" and the time-saving flag being on and time-saving control being performed.

After executing either step S324 or S325, the special chart process flag is cleared and initialized to "0" (step S326), and the jackpot end process is terminated.

Next, the processing in the performance control board 12 of the feature unit 059AK in this embodiment will be described. Figures 18-20 are flowcharts showing an example of command analysis processing. In the command analysis processing, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a start winning command (start winning port designation command, special reserved memory number designation command, pattern determination result designation command, variation pattern determination result designation command) has been received from the main board 11 (step S401).

When it is determined that a start winning command has been received (step S401; Yes), the received command is stored in the start winning command buffer (step S402). When the first start winning command or the first special symbol reserved memory number designation command is received as the start winning command, the start winning command (first start winning command, first special symbol reserved memory number designation command, symbol determination result designation command, and variable pattern determination result designation command) is stored in the first start winning command buffer provided in a specified area of RAM 122. When the second start winning command or the second special symbol reserved memory number designation command is received as the start winning command, the start winning command (second start winning command, second special symbol reserved memory number designation command, symbol determination result designation command, and variable pattern determination result designation command) is stored in the second start winning command buffer provided in a specified area of RAM 122.

Figure 18-21 (A) shows an example of the configuration of the first start winning command buffer. The first start winning command buffer stores various command data constituting the start winning received command received at the first start winning. The first start winning command buffer is provided with a storage area (areas corresponding to each of the reserved display numbers 1 to 4) capable of storing various data in a number corresponding to the maximum number of reserved first special charts (for example, 4). Note that, as shown in the figure, the first start winning command buffer in feature part 059AK in this embodiment is provided with an area in which various command data corresponding to the variable display currently being executed is stored as reserved display number "0" (the same applies to the second start winning command buffer).

When a start win occurs at the first start win port, a set of four commands (start win command) is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12: a first start win designation command, a first special symbol reserved memory designation command, a symbol determination result designation command, and a variation pattern determination result designation command. In addition to the first start win command buffer, a storage area is reserved so that other information can be stored in association with each reserved memory information.

The performance control CPU 120 stores the data specifying the start winning command from the top of the free area of the first start winning command buffer in the order of reception. The free area of the first start winning command buffer, i.e., the data in the area where no data is stored, is "0000 (H)". Therefore, when a start winning command is received, the performance control CPU 120 stores each performance control command data in the storage area of the first start winning command buffer corresponding to the smallest reserved display number where all storage areas for start winning commands are "0000 (H)" in the order of the first start winning opening designation command, the first special pattern reserved storage designation command, the pattern determination result designation command, and the variation pattern determination result designation command.

Figure 18-21 (B) is an example of the configuration of the second start winning command buffer. The second start winning command buffer stores various command data constituting the start winning received command received at the second start winning. The second start winning command buffer is provided with a storage area (areas corresponding to each of the reserved display numbers 1 to 4) capable of storing various data in a number corresponding to the maximum number of reserved second special charts (for example, 4). As with the first start winning command buffer, the second start winning command buffer in feature unit 059AK in this embodiment is provided with an area in which various command data corresponding to the variable display being executed is stored as reserved display number "0" as shown in the figure.

When a start win occurs at the second start win port, a set of four commands (start win command) is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12: a second start win designation command, a second special symbol reserved memory designation command, a symbol determination result designation command, and a variation pattern determination result designation command. In addition to the second start win command buffer, a storage area is reserved so that other information can be stored in association with each reserved memory information.

The performance control CPU 120 stores the data specifying the start winning command from the top of the free area of the second start winning command buffer in the order of reception. The free area of the second start winning command buffer, i.e., the data in the area where no data is stored, is "0000 (H)". Therefore, when a start winning command is received, the performance control CPU 120 stores each performance control command data in the storage area of the second start winning command buffer corresponding to the smallest reserved display number where all the storage areas of the start winning command are "0000 (H)" in the order of the second start winning opening designation command, the first special pattern reserved storage designation command, the pattern determination result designation command, and the variation pattern determination result designation command.

The second start winning command buffer, like the first start winning command buffer, has a storage area for storing other information corresponding to each of the reserved display numbers, and a storage area for storing the display stage change patterns described below. The example shown in Figure 17-8 (B) shows a case where no performance control command data is stored in any of the storage areas for reserved display numbers "0" to "4".

Returning to the explanation of the flowchart of the command analysis process shown in Figures 18-20, after executing step S402, or if it is determined that the start winning command has not been received (step S401; No), the presentation control CPU 120 determines whether or not a game state designation command has been received (step S403). If it is determined that a game state designation command has been received (step S403; Yes), the presentation control CPU 120 switches the on/off state of the high probability flag and high base flag based on the content of the received game state designation command (step S404).

The high probability flag is provided, for example, in a predetermined area of RAM 122 (for example, in the performance control flag setting section), and is turned on in response to the occurrence of a high probability state, and is switched between on and off in response to the switching of the high probability flag on the main board 11 side between on and off. The high base flag is provided, for example, in a predetermined area of RAM 122 (for example, in the performance control flag setting section), and is turned on in response to the occurrence of a time-saving state, and is switched between on and off in response to the switching of the time-saving flag on the main board 11 side between on and off. For example, when the game state designation command designates a high probability high base state (for example, when designating that the high probability flag and the time-saving flag are in the on state), the performance control CPU 120 sets both the high probability flag and the high base flag to the on state (if they are already in the on state, the on state is maintained. The same applies below to the on and off states of both flags). If the game state designation command specifies a high probability low base state (for example, when specifying that the probability variable flag is on and the time-saving flag is off), the high probability flag is set to on and the high base flag is set to off. If the game state designation command specifies a low probability low base state (normal state) (for example, when specifying that the probability variable flag and the time-saving flag are off), both the high probability flag and the high base flag are set to off.

After executing step S404, or if it is determined that the start winning command has not been received (step S403; No), the performance control CPU 120 executes other analysis processing (step S405) and ends the command analysis processing.

Figure 18-22 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S161 of Figure 16 as the pre-reading notice setting process. In the pending display setting process shown in Figure 18-22, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether or not a performance control command (starting hole winning designation command, winning judgment result command, pending memory number notification command, etc.) transmitted at the time of the start winning has been received (step S1301). In the process of step S1301, for example, it is possible to determine whether or not a command has been received at the time of the start winning by checking whether a starting hole winning designation command, a winning judgment result command, or a pending memory number notification command has been newly stored in the first starting winning command buffer or the second starting winning command buffer.

If no command is received in step S1301 (step S1301; No), the advance notice setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that a command has been received (step S1301; Yes), the winning time judgment result corresponding to the received winning time judgment result command is identified (step S1302). At this time, it is determined whether or not "winning time judgment limited" has been identified (step S1303). If the winning time judgment result is other than "winning time judgment limited" (step S1303; No), it is determined whether or not the performance control command transmitted at the time of the start winning includes a first starting port winning designation command, i.e., whether or not the received starting port winning command is a first starting port winning designation command (step 059AKS081).

If it is a first start winning designation command (step 059AKS081; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 judges whether or not the reserved items stored contain a reserve for which the variable display result is a "jackpot" or "miss (time saving)", or a reserve for which the variable display result is a "miss" and is a time saving false fluctuation pattern (step 059AKS082). In the processing of step 059AKS082, by checking the contents of the first start winning buffer shown in FIG. 18-21(A), it is possible to judge whether or not a reserve for which the variable display result is a "jackpot" or "miss (time saving)", or a reserve for which the variable display result is a "miss" and is a time saving false fluctuation pattern, is stored.

If the hold for which the variable display result is a "jackpot" or "miss (time-saving)", or the hold for which the variable display result is a "miss" and which is a time-saving false fluctuation pattern, is not stored (step 059AKS082; No), the normal hold change determination table shown in Figure 18-23 (A) is selected as the table to be used (step 059AKS083).

On the other hand, if a hold for which the variable display result is a "jackpot" or "miss (time-saving)", or a hold for which the variable display result is a "miss" and a time-saving false fluctuation pattern is stored (step 059AKS082; Yes), the hold change determination table during time limit shown in FIG. 18-23 (B) is selected as the table to be used (step 059AKS084).

If it is determined in step 059AKS081 that the command is not the first start port winning command (step 059AKS081; No), since it is the second start port winning command and the time-saving state is in progress, the performance control CPU 120 selects the time-saving reserve change determination table for special chart 2 shown in Figure 18-23 (C) as the table to be used (step 059AKS085).

After executing any one of the processes in steps 059AKS083, 059AKS084, or 059AKS085, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute a pending display change performance as a pre-reading preview performance and the manner of execution, according to the determination ratio indicated in the pending display change determination table selected as the table to be used, and depending on the variable display result and the fluctuation pattern (step S1304).

The normal time reserve change determination table shown in FIG. 18-23(A) is a table that is selected when the received start port winning command is a first start port winning designation command, and the reserved stored does not include any reserves whose variable display result is a "jackpot" or a "miss (time saving)", or any reserve whose variable display result is a "miss" and a time saving false fluctuation pattern. As shown in the figure, in the normal time reserve change determination table, the determination ratios are assigned as shown in the figure so that the probability of a jackpot is higher when the variable display result is a "jackpot", when the variable display result is a "miss" and the fluctuation pattern is a super reach miss, or the variable display result is a "small hit", when the variable display result is a "miss (time saving)" or a "miss" and the fluctuation pattern is a time saving false fluctuation pattern, and in other cases, the probability of a jackpot is higher when the variable display result is executed than when the variable display result is not executed, and the probability of a jackpot is higher in the order of "red" > "green" > "blue" when the variable display result is executed. When the normal hold change determination table is selected, in step S1304 of FIG. 18-22, whether or not to execute the hold display change effect and the execution mode are determined according to the determination ratio shown in the normal hold change determination table.

The reserve change determination table during the limit shown in FIG. 18-23(B) is a table that is selected when the received start port winning command is the first start port winning designation command, and the reserved stored contains either a reserve with a variable display result of "jackpot" or "miss (time-saving)", or a reserve with a variable display result of "miss" and a time-saving false fluctuation pattern. In such a case, after the variable display executed first ends, that is, before the variable display corresponding to the reserved for the pre-reading notice is executed, the normal state changes to the time-saving state (which may become a probability variable state), so the variable display result and the fluctuation pattern may differ between the time of pre-reading and the time of executing the variable display corresponding to the reserved for the pre-reading notice. Therefore, the reserve change determination table during the limit shown in FIG. 18-23(B) restricts the execution of a reserve display change performance in which the probability of a jackpot is a certain value or more (in this example, "green" or more). In the illustrated example, the reserve display change performance in the form of "blue" can be executed, but it may be set to not be executed. For example, if the variable display result is "miss" in the stored hold and a hold that is a time-saving false fluctuation pattern is stored, the display mode of the hold display to be notified may be initially displayed in "blue", and after the variable display corresponding to the hold of the time-saving false fluctuation pattern ends, the display mode of the hold display to be notified (the hold displayed in "blue") may be changed to a hold display of "green" or higher. Also, it may change to a state of "green" or higher as an active display. When the hold change determination table during the limit is selected, in step S1304 of FIG. 18-22, whether or not to execute the hold display change performance and the execution mode are determined according to the determination ratio shown in the hold change determination table during the limit.

In addition, in the normal reserve change determination table shown in FIG. 18-23(A) and the limit reserve change determination table shown in FIG. 18-23(B), examples are shown in which the variable display result is a "miss (time-saving)" and the like, is the same as a "jackpot", but for example, there may be a unique state (such as "time?") when the variable display result is a "miss (time-saving)" or when the variable display result is a "miss" and the fluctuation pattern is a false time-saving one. This increases the variety of reserve display change presentations, making it possible to attract the player's attention.

The reserve change determination table during time-saving for special chart 2 shown in FIG. 18-23(C) is a table that is selected when the received start port winning command is a second start port winning designation command. As shown, unlike the reserve change determination table during normal time shown in FIG. 18-23(A) and the reserve change determination table during limit time shown in FIG. 18-23(B), the reserve change determination table during time-saving for special chart 2 does not assign a determination ratio when the variable display result is a "miss (time-saving)" or when the variable display result is a "miss" and is a time-saving false fluctuation pattern. When the received start port winning command is a second start port winning designation command and the winning time judgment limit is not in effect, the game state is in a time-saving state (high base control is in effect). In the characteristic part 059AK of this embodiment, even if the time-saving pattern (special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the time-saving state, the time-saving control is not newly performed, and further, since the return effect described later is performed to indicate whether or not the remaining reserve will be controlled to the time-saving state, there is no need to execute the reserve display change effect that notifies the time-saving state. Therefore, as shown in the figure, in the time-saving reserve change determination table for special pattern 2, a determination ratio is not assigned when the variable display result is "miss (time-saving)" or when the variable display result is "miss" and the time-saving false fluctuation pattern. When the time-saving reserve change determination table for special pattern 2 is selected, in step S1304 of FIG. 18-22, the execution of the reserve display change effect and the execution mode are determined according to the determination ratio shown in the time-saving reserve change determination table for special pattern 2.

Returning to FIG. 18-22, after executing the processing of step S1304, or if it is determined in step S1303 that the winning judgment restriction is in effect (step S1303; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 stores data that identifiably indicates the determination result of step S1304 in the reserve display data storage unit in association with the reserve number corresponding to the new starting winning (step S1311). At this time, if it is determined in step S1303 that the winning judgment restriction is in effect, data corresponding to "no execution (white)" in the reserve change determination table shown in FIG. 18-23 should be stored.

Following the processing of step S1311, the pending display update setting at the time of the start winning is performed (step S1313), and then the advance notice setting processing is terminated. For example, when the number of first special reserved patterns is increased by 1 due to the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning port, a new first reserved display is added so that the first reserved display in the first reserved display unit 5HR is increased by 1. On the other hand, when the number of second special reserved patterns is increased by 1 due to the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning port, a new second reserved display is added so that the second reserved display in the second reserved display unit 5HL is increased by 1. The first reserved display and second reserved display added at this time may be the reserved display determined in step S1304 and stored in step S1311.

Figure 18-24 is a flow chart showing an example of the variable display start setting process executed in step S171 of Figure 16. When the variable display start setting process is started, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the time-saving period is in progress (step 059AKS086). In step 059AKS086, it is possible to determine whether or not the time-saving period is in progress by checking whether or not a high base flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (for example, the performance control flag setting section) is set to the on state.

If the time-saving period is in progress (step 059AKS086; Yes), the presentation control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the time-saving period to update the number of time-saving periods (step 059AKS086A). The number of time-saving periods is set in the process of step 059AKS133 (see FIG. 18-30) described later and stored in a specified area of the RAM 122. After executing the process of step 059AKS086A, or if it is determined in step 059AKS086 that the time-saving period is not in progress (step 059AKS086; No), the presentation control CPU 120 determines whether or not a left-hit command has been received from the main board 11 (step 059AKS087), and if it has been received (step 059AKS087; Yes), it displays a left-hit command (see M6 in FIG. 18-34 (N-2)) to instruct the player to hit to the left (step 059AKS088). The left hit instruction display may continue for a period of time from when the left hit instruction command is received until, for example, four variable displays are performed, for five seconds each time. If the left hit instruction command is not received (step 059AKS087; No) or if the processing of step 059AKS088 is executed, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a right hit instruction command or a simplified mode right hit instruction command has been received from the main board 11 (step 059AKS089).

When either the right hit command or the simplified right hit command is received (step 059AKS089; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 displays a right hit command corresponding to the respective command (step 059AKS090). Specifically, when a right hit command is received, the right hit command display M3 shown in FIG. 18-33 (F) is displayed, and when a simplified right hit command is received, the right hit command display M3 shown in FIG. 18-35 (O) is displayed. After the right hit command display corresponding to each command is displayed in step 059AKS090, the right hit command display should be displayed in a manner that does not interfere with other performances, as shown in FIG. 18-33 (G), in the variable display for each time until the time-saving state ends.

After executing the processing of step 059AKS090, or if it is determined in step 059AKS089 that neither the right hit instruction command nor the simple mode right hit instruction command has been received (step 059AKS089; No), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the display result designation command and the variation pattern designation command have been received normally (step 059AKS090A). In step 059AKS090A, it can be determined whether the display result designation command and the variation pattern designation command have been received normally by checking the contents of a performance control command reception buffer provided in RAM 122, for example.

If either the display result specification command or the variation pattern specification command is not received correctly (step 059AKS090A; No), the performance control CPU 120 executes missed opportunity processing (step 059AKS090B).

Figure 18-25 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step 059AKS090B of Figure 18-24 as the missed-out process. In the missed-out process shown in Figure 18-25, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether or not the variable pattern designation command has been received normally, i.e., whether or not the missed command is a display result designation command (step 059AKS093). If the variable pattern designation command has not been received normally (step 059AKS093; No), the performance control CPU 120 ends the missed-out process. In this case, the display does not display the decorative pattern in a variable manner, and the display waits until a pattern determination designation command is sent from the main board 11 with the previous variable display result unchanged, and the decorative pattern corresponding to the display result designation command is stopped and displayed in accordance with the reception of the pattern determination designation command.

On the other hand, if the fluctuation pattern designation command has been received normally (step 059AKS093; Yes), i.e., if the missed command is a display result designation command, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is a time-saving confirmed fluctuation pattern or a time-saving false fluctuation pattern, i.e., whether it is a PB2-4 or PB2-5 fluctuation pattern (step 059AKS094). If it is a time-saving confirmed fluctuation pattern or a time-saving false fluctuation pattern (step 059AKS094; Yes), since the fluctuation pattern includes a time-saving teasing performance period, the stop symbol setting process described below is performed (step 059AKS095), and the missed processing is terminated. In this embodiment, in the characteristic part 059AK, even if the display result designation command is missed, if the variation pattern designation command is received normally, and the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is a variation pattern that confirms time-saving or a variation pattern that falsely indicates time-saving, the stop pattern setting process described below is performed, and the time-saving teasing performance can be executed. However, if either the display result designation command or the variation pattern designation command is missed, the execution of the time-saving related performance such as the time-saving teasing performance may be prohibited, such as by stopping the display of a decorative pattern that is determined in advance when the command is missed.

On the other hand, if the variation pattern is not a time-saving confirmed variation pattern or a time-saving false variation pattern (step 059AKS094; No), the performance control CPU 120 determines the combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command as the final stop pattern (step 059AKS096), and ends the missed-time processing. In step 059AKS096, the combination with the lowest degree of advantage for the player may be determined among the combinations of decorative symbols that can be selected in the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command. This can prevent inconsistencies such as a combination of decorative symbols with a high degree of advantage being displayed as a stopped display, but actually resulting in a low degree of advantage, and can prevent a decrease in interest in the game. In this case, since the display result designation command has been missed, the performance control board 12 cannot determine whether the variable display result is a "miss (time-saving)" or not. Therefore, after the effect control CPU 120 executes an effect (such as a reach effect for a super reach) according to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command, if the variable display result is a "miss (time-saving)," it may display, for example, a decorative pattern of "???" or a swaying display of a predetermined missing pattern until it receives a pattern determination designation command.

Returning to FIG. 18-24, if the display result designation command and the variation pattern designation command are received normally (step 059AKS090A; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 judges whether the special chart display result (variable display result) is a "miss" or not based on the display result designation command (command stored in the display result designation command storage area) transmitted from the main board 11 (step S551). If it is judged that the special chart display result (variable display result) is a "miss" (step S551; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 judges, for example, whether the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern determination result designation command (command stored in the variation pattern determination result designation command storage area) transmitted from the main board 11 is a non-reach variation pattern (PA1-1, PA1-2) corresponding to the "non-reach" case in which the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is not a reach mode (step S552).

If it is determined in the processing of step S552 that it is a non-reach fluctuation pattern (step S552; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 determines a combination of final decorative symbols that will be the final stop symbols that make up the non-reach combination (step S553). The performance control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating random numbers for determining the decorative symbols of the non-reach combination, which are updated by the random number circuit 124 or a performance random counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, for example, and determines the final decorative symbol (decorative symbol of the non-reach combination) by referring to a decorative symbol determination table for non-reach combinations that is stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 121.

If it is determined in the processing of step S552 that the pattern is not a non-reach fluctuation pattern (step S552; No), the performance control CPU 120 executes the stopping pattern setting process (step 059AKS092).

Figure 18-26 is a flow chart showing an example of the stop pattern setting process executed in step 059AKS092 of Figure 18-24. In the stop pattern setting process, the execution settings for the time-saving teasing effect and the return effect are performed, and if the special pattern display result (variable display result) is "miss (time-saving)", the time-saving pattern is processed to be the final stop pattern. Note that the time-saving pattern displayed as a decorative pattern is called the time-saving pattern to distinguish it from the time-saving pattern of the special pattern.

In the stopping pattern setting process in FIG. 18-26, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the special pattern display result is a "miss (time-saving)" or a "miss" with a false time-saving fluctuation pattern based on the display result designation command (the command stored in the display result designation command storage area) transmitted from the main board 11 (step 059AKS101).

If the special chart display result is "miss (time-saving)" or "miss" and the time-saving false fluctuation pattern (step 059AKS101; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 judges whether or not the time-saving is in progress (step 059AKS102). In step 059AKS102, it is sufficient to judge whether or not the time-saving is in progress by checking whether or not the high base flag provided in a predetermined area (for example, the performance control flag setting section) of the RAM 122 is set to the on state. If the time-saving is not in progress (step 059AKS102; No), the performance control CPU 120 determines the miss pattern of the reach combination as the temporary stop pattern (step 059AKS103). Specifically, in the feature section 059AK, if the special chart display result is "miss (time-saving)" or "miss" and the time-saving false fluctuation pattern, the reach performance of the super reach is executed, and then the time-saving teasing performance is executed. Therefore, in step 059AKS103, the symbol to be displayed as a provisional stop as a result of the reach effect of the super reach is determined to be the losing symbol of the reach combination. In step 059AKS103, for example, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the decorative symbol of the reach combination, which is updated by the random number circuit 124 or a random counter for effect, is extracted, and the provisional stop symbol (decorative symbol of the reach combination) is determined by referring to a decorative symbol determination table for the reach combination that is stored in advance in ROM 121 and prepared.

After executing the processing of step 059AKS103, the performance control CPU 120 executes a time-saving promotion performance setting process to set up the time-saving promotion performance (step 059AKS104).

Figure 18-27 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step 059AKS104 of Figure 18-26 as the time-saving prompting performance setting process. In the time-saving prompting performance setting process shown in Figure 18-27, the performance control CPU 120 determines the time-saving prompting performance pattern as shown in Figure 18-28 according to the time-saving type and the fluctuation pattern specified by the display result designation command and the fluctuation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 (step 059AKS113), and ends the time-saving prompting performance setting process. Although not shown in Figure 18-28, when the time-saving prompting performance setting process is executed by performing the stop pattern setting process in the missed-out processing in Figure 18-25, if the time-saving prompting performance setting process is executed because the time-saving type is unknown, if it is other than the time-saving false fluctuation pattern, it is sufficient to determine the time-saving prompting performance pattern of the missed-out pattern (for example, the performance pattern of "Success D" with a performance time of 5 seconds).

As shown in FIG. 18-28, when the time-saving type is "Time-saving A" or "Time-saving B", the time-saving promotion performance pattern "Success A" with a performance time of 10 seconds is determined. When the time-saving type is "Time-saving C", the time-saving promotion performance pattern "Success B" with a performance time of 2 seconds is determined. When the time-saving type is "Time-saving D", the time-saving promotion performance pattern "Success C" with a performance time of 1 second is determined. When the time-saving fluctuation pattern is a false time-saving fluctuation pattern, the time-saving promotion performance pattern "Failure" with a performance time of 10 seconds is determined. The performance time corresponds to the time-saving promotion performance period added in step 059AKS013 of FIG. 18-8 (see FIG. 18-9), and the performance control CPU 120 determines the time corresponding to the time-saving promotion performance period as the time-saving promotion performance time based on the display result designation command and the fluctuation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11. In the feature part 059AK, the time-saving prompting performance pattern of "success A" and the time-saving prompting performance pattern of "failure" have the same performance time, so for example, the same character is displayed, and "success A" is a success pattern in which the time-saving pattern is finally stopped and displayed, while "failure" is a failure pattern in which the time-saving pattern is not finally stopped and the decorative pattern of the reach combination is stopped and displayed. Therefore, it is possible to attract the attention of the player as to whether or not the time-saving pattern is successful (whether or not it is stopped and displayed). In addition, in the feature part 059AK, as shown in FIG. 18-12, the rate at which the variable display result becomes "miss (time-saving)" differs depending on the type of reach performance executed, so that the execution rate of the time-saving prompting performance is also different depending on the type of reach performance executed. That is, for the reach performance of the super reach A, which has a high expectation of a jackpot, the variable display result is not "miss (time-saving)" and the time-saving prompting performance is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the special performance from being executed excessively, and to maintain the expectation of a specific display result. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 18-12(B), for a time-saving false fluctuation pattern in which the variable display result is not a "miss (time-saving)" even when a time-saving teasing effect is executed, a reach effect with a low expectation of a jackpot, such as a Super Reach C, is executed. Therefore, the rate at which the time-saving teasing effect is executed varies depending on the type of reach effect executed, and the rate at which the time-saving pattern is stopped and displayed as a result of the execution of the time-saving teasing effect also varies.

Returning to FIG. 18-26, after executing the processing of step 059AKS104, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance judges whether the result of the special symbol display is "miss (time-saving)" or not (step 059AKS105). If the result of the special symbol display is "miss (time-saving)" (step 059AKS105; Yes), the CPU 120 for controlling the performance determines the decorative symbol of the reach combination including the time-saving symbol as the final stop symbol (step 059AKS106), and ends the stop symbol setting process. In step 059AKS106, the time-saving symbol of the type corresponding to the time-saving type may be determined as the final stop symbol (see FIG. 18-32 (D-1), FIG. 18-34 (M-1)).

In step 059AKS101, if the special symbol display result is "miss (time-saving)" or "miss" but not a time-saving false variation pattern (step 059AKS101; No), the CPU 120 for controlling the performance judges whether the variable display of the decorative symbol to be stopped this time is a variable display corresponding to the first (first) variation of the second special symbol performed after the time-saving has ended (step 059AKS107). For example, in step 059AKS107, after the number of time-saving times is reduced by 1 in step 059AKS086A of FIG. 18-24 to "0", the flag at the end of time-saving is set to ON, and whether the variable display performed immediately thereafter is a variable display corresponding to the second special symbol can be judged by whether the command to start the variation of the second symbol has been received.

If the variable display (change) corresponds to the first (first) second special chart performed after the time-saving feature has ended (step 059AKS107; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 executes a return performance setting process to execute a return performance indicating whether or not a reserve that results in a "miss (time-saving feature)" special chart display result is stored in the reserve memory corresponding to the variable display of the second special chart stored after the time-saving feature has ended (step 059AKS108).

Figure 18-29 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step 059AKS108 of Figure 18-26 as the return effect setting process. In the return effect setting process shown in Figure 18-29, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not there is a reserve in the reserve memory corresponding to the second special chart that will result in a "miss (time reduction)" special chart display result by checking the contents of the effect control command reception buffer corresponding to the second special chart among the effect control command reception buffers provided in RAM 122 (step 059AKS115).

If there is a reserve in the reserve memory corresponding to the second special chart that results in a "miss (time-saving)" display (step 059AKS115; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 sets a return success pattern that notifies that there is a reserve in the reserve memory corresponding to the second special chart that results in a "miss (time-saving)" display, i.e., that the time-saving pattern will be stopped again in one of the remaining reserves (step 059AKS116), and ends the return performance setting process. On the other hand, if there is no reserve in the reserve memory corresponding to the second special chart that results in a "miss (time-saving)" display (step 059AKS115; No), the performance control CPU 120 sets a return failure pattern that notifies that there is no reserve in the reserve memory corresponding to the second special chart that results in a "miss (time-saving)" display, i.e., that the time-saving pattern will not be stopped again in one of the remaining reserves (step 059AKS117), and ends the return performance setting process. In feature part 059AK, the return effect for both the successful return pattern and the failed return pattern both execute a common effect (an effect that teases whether or not the time-saving state will be entered again), and as a result, the combination of decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed is different.

Returning to FIG. 18-26, after executing the processing of step 059AKS108, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether the pattern of the return performance set in step 059AKS108 is a return success pattern (step 059AKS109). If it is a return success pattern (step 059AKS109; Yes), a decorative pattern of a reach combination including a time-saving return pattern is determined as the final stop pattern (step 059AKS110), and the stop pattern setting process is terminated. The time-saving return pattern is a pattern different from the time-saving pattern determined as the final stop pattern in step 059AKS106 according to the time-saving type (see FIG. 18-34 (K-1)). On the other hand, if it is not a successful return pattern (step 059AKS109; No), if it is determined in step 059AKS102 that the time-saving mode is in progress (step 059AKS102; Yes), if it is determined in step 059AKS105 that the special chart display result is not a "miss (time-saving mode)" (step 059AKS105; No), or if it is determined in step 059AKS107 that the variable display does not correspond to the first (first) change in the second special chart that occurred after the time-saving mode ended (step 059AKS107; No), the performance control CPU 120 determines a combination of confirmed decorative patterns that will be the final stopping patterns that make up the reach combination (step 059AKS111). Specifically, the performance control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the decorative pattern of the reach combination, which is updated by the random number circuit 124 or the performance random counter, and determines the final decorative pattern (the decorative pattern of the reach combination) by, for example, referring to a decorative pattern determination table for the reach combination that is stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 121. In this way, even if the special pattern display result is determined to be a "miss (time-saving)" in step 059AKS105 during the stopping pattern setting process, if the time-saving is in progress (step 059AKS102; Yes), the final stopping pattern of the decorative pattern becomes the decorative pattern of the reach combination through the processing of step 059AKS111.

Returning to FIG. 18-24, after executing the processing of step 059AKS092, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance performs settings for executing the performance during the variable display including the performance of changing the display mode of the active display and the variable display operation of the decorative pattern, such as a mini-game, based on the settings in the performance control pattern determined in response to the variation pattern (step S559), and then determines the performance control pattern to one of the multiple patterns prepared in advance (step S560). The CPU 120 for controlling the performance selects one of the multiple prepared performance control patterns (performance control patterns during special pattern variation) corresponding to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern determination result designation command, for example, and sets it as the pattern to be used. In addition, when it is determined that the time-saving promotion performance or the return performance is to be executed, the performance control pattern corresponding to the time-saving promotion performance or the return performance is selected and set as the pattern to be used. Note that, if it is determined that the variation pattern designation command has not been received normally in the missed-out processing of step 059AKS090B, it is not necessary to select a performance control pattern. In this case, the decorative pattern is not changed and the previous variable display result remains the same, but the display will wait until a pattern determination command is sent from the main board 11, and upon receiving the pattern determination command, the decorative pattern corresponding to the display result command is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the variable pattern designation command was not received correctly in the missed-out processing of step 059AKS090B, a performance control pattern dedicated to missed-out times may be selected in step S560.

Following the processing of step S560, the performance control CPU 120 sets the initial value of the performance control process timer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (such as the performance control timer setting section) in response to, for example, the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern determination result designation command or the performance time when the time-saving promotion performance is executed (step S561). Specifically, in step S561, if the execution setting of the time-saving promotion performance is set in the time-saving promotion performance setting process of step 059AKS104 in FIG. 18-26, the initial value of the performance control process timer is set by adding the performance time of the time-saving promotion performance to the time indicated by the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern determination result designation command. After executing step S561, the performance control CPU 120 performs settings to start the fluctuation of the decorative pattern, etc. on the display screen of the image display device 5 (step S562). At this time, the performance control CPU 120 can start changing the decorative patterns in the "left," "center," and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the display area of the image display device 5, for example, by transmitting a display control command specified by the display control data included in the performance control pattern (special pattern change performance control pattern) determined in the processing of step S560 to the VDP of the display control unit 123.

After executing the processing of step S562, the performance control CPU 120 updates the value of the performance process flag to "2", which corresponds to the performance processing during variable display (step S563), and then ends the variable display start setting processing.

Figure 18-30 is a flow chart showing an example of the variable display performance process executed in step S172 of Figure 16. When the variable display performance process shown in Figure 18-30 is started, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether the variable display time has elapsed based on the timer value of the performance control process timer, etc. (step S801). The performance control CPU 120 may, for example, update the timer value of the performance control process timer (e.g., subtract 1), and determine that the variable display time has elapsed when an end code is read out from the performance control pattern corresponding to the updated performance control process timer value.

When it is determined in the processing of step S801 that the variable display time has not elapsed (step S801; No), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the time-saving count display period in which the number of time-saving times is displayed (step 059AKS121). The time-saving count display period is the period in which the number of time-saving times updated in step 059AKS086A of FIG. 18-24 is displayed, and may be predetermined in the performance control pattern determined in step S560. When it is determined that it is the time-saving count display period (step 059AKS121; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 performs time-saving count display control to display the number of time-saving times updated in step 059AKS086A of FIG. 18-24 as the remaining number of time-saving times (step 059AKS122).

After executing the processing of step 059AKS122, or if it is determined in step 059AKS121 that it is not the time-saving count display period (step 059AKS121; No), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether it is a reach performance period for executing a reach performance (step 059AKS123). The reach performance period may be predetermined, for example, in a performance control pattern determined according to a fluctuation pattern. If it is determined that it is a reach performance period (step 059AKS123; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 performs control to execute a reach performance (step 059AKS124).

After executing the process of step 059AKS124, or if it is determined in step 059AKS123 that it is not the reach performance period (step 059AKS123; No), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether it is the pattern temporary stop timing, which is the timing to temporarily stop and display the decorative pattern (step 059AKS125). The pattern temporary stop timing may be predetermined in the performance control pattern determined when the temporary stop pattern of the reach combination is determined in the stop pattern setting process of FIG. 18-26 (step 059AKS103). If it is determined that it is the pattern temporary stop timing (step 059AKS125; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 performs the decorative pattern temporary stop display (step 059AKS126) and causes the decorative pattern of the reach combination determined in step 059AKS103 to be temporarily stopped and displayed.

After executing the processing of step 059AKS126, or if it is determined in step 059AKS125 that it is not the timing for the temporary stop of the symbols (step 059AKS125; No), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is a time-saving prompting performance period for executing a time-saving prompting performance (step 059AKS127). The time-saving prompting performance period may be predetermined, for example, in a performance control pattern determined according to the pattern set in the time-saving prompting performance setting processing of FIG. 18-27. If it is determined that it is a time-saving prompting performance period (step 059AKS127; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 performs time-saving prompting performance control for executing a time-saving prompting performance (step 059AKS128).

After executing the processing of step 059AKS128, or if it is determined in step 059AKS126 that it is not a time-saving teasing performance period (step 059AKS126; No), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether it is a return performance period for executing a return performance (step 059AKS129). The return performance period may be predetermined, for example, in a performance control pattern determined according to the pattern set in the return performance setting process of FIG. 18-29. If it is determined that it is a return performance period (step 059AKS129; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 performs return performance control to execute a return performance (step 059AKS130).

After executing the processing of step 059AKS130, or if it is determined that it is not the return performance period (step 059AKS129; No), the performance control CPU 120 performs control to execute performances during variable display, including performances that change the display mode of the active display, mini-games, and other performances during variable display, including variable display operations of decorative patterns, based on the settings in the performance control pattern determined corresponding to the variable display pattern (step S808), and ends the performance processing during variable display.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S801 that the variable display time has elapsed (step S801; Yes), it is determined whether or not the pattern determination command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received normally (step S809). At this time, if the pattern determination command has not been received normally (step 809; No), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not the special chart display result (variable display result) is a "miss (time reduction)" (step 059AKS137). If the special chart display result (variable display result) is not a "miss (time reduction)" (step 059AKS137; No), the performance control CPU 120 ends the performance processing during variable display.

On the other hand, if the special chart display result (variable display result) is "miss (time reduction)" (step 059AKS137; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 sets the time reduction count to "XXX" as the special time reduction count (step 059AKS138), performs special time reduction count notification control to display "??? times" as the time reduction count notification (059AKS139), and then ends the performance processing during variable display. Note that if the pattern determination command is not received normally, the performance notifying the time reduction count may not be executed. Similarly, even if the command is received normally, for example, if an inconsistency occurs such as a mismatch between the content indicated by the pattern determination command and the content indicated by the display result designation command, the special time reduction count notification control to display "??? times" as the time reduction count notification may be executed, or the performance notifying the time reduction count may not be executed.

If the pattern determination command is received normally in step S809 (step S809; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 performs control to derive and display the final stop pattern (determined decorative pattern) that is the display result in the variable display of the decorative pattern, for example by transmitting a specified display control command to the VDP of the display control unit 123 (step S810). After executing the processing of step 810, the performance control CPU 120 sets the determined pattern display time according to the received pattern determination command (step 059AKS131). In step 059AKS131, the determined time indicated by commands 8F00 to 8F04 sent and set in step 059AKS043 or step 059AKS044 shown in FIG. 18-15 may be set.

After executing the processing of step 059AKS131, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether the special chart display result (variable display result) is a "miss (time reduction)" or not (step 059AKS132). If the special chart display result (variable display result) is a "miss (time reduction)" (step 059AKS132; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 sets the number of time reductions (see FIG. 18-15 (B)) specified by the received pattern determination command (step 059AKS133), and performs time reduction number notification control to display the number of time reductions (notify the number of time reductions) (step 059AKS134).

After executing the process of step 059AKS134, or if it is determined in step 059AKS132 that the special chart display result (variable display result) is not "miss (time reduction)" (step 059AKS132; No), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a right-hit erase command has been received from the main board 11 (step 059AKS135), and if it has been received (step 059AKS135; Yes), it erases the right-hit instruction display (step 059AKS136). After executing the process of step 059AKS136, or if it is determined in step 059AKS135 that a right-hit erase command has not been received (step 059AKS135; No), the performance control CPU 120 updates the value of the performance process flag to "3", which corresponds to the special chart hit waiting process (step S812), and ends the performance process during variable display.

Figure 18-31 is a timing chart showing the timing of each of the timings during variable display when the time-saving symbol is displayed stationary and in other cases. Figures 18-31 (A) to (C) all show examples of cases where the variable display result is a "miss" (including miss (time-saving)). Specifically, Figure 18-31 (A) shows an example of a case where a time-saving symbol (time-saving type "time-saving A") is displayed stationary as the final decorative symbol, Figure 18-31 (B) shows an example of a case where a time-saving symbol is not displayed stationary as the final decorative symbol without a time-saving teasing performance being executed, and Figure 18-31 (C) shows an example of a time-saving false variable pattern. In addition, in the illustrated examples, for ease of understanding, all of Figures 18-31 (A) to (C) show an example in which Super Reach C is executed, and Figures 18-31 (A) and (B) show an example in which the PB2-1 fluctuation pattern is selected, while Figure 18-31 (C) shows an example in which the PB2-5 fluctuation pattern is selected.

As shown in FIG. 18-31(A), when the time-saving symbol is displayed as the final stop symbol of the decorative symbols, when the variable display starts, the game enters a reach state, and then the reach effect of the Super Reach C is executed. Then, when the symbol temporary stop timing is reached, the decorative symbols of the reach combination are displayed as temporary stops (in this example, the 757 decorative symbols). Then, the time-saving teasing effect is executed. The time-saving teasing effect period L4 is 10 seconds, similar to the time-saving teasing effect period L5 shown in FIG. 18-31(C) (see FIG. 18-9 and FIG. 18-10). After the time-saving teasing effect ends, when the symbol confirmation command is received, the time-saving symbol is displayed as the final stop symbol (in this example, the 7:7 decorative symbol combination), and the variation ends after the confirmation symbol display period L1 has elapsed. The confirmation symbol display period L1 is 10 seconds (see FIG. 18-15(B)).

As shown in Figure 18-31 (B), if the time-saving teasing effect is not executed and the time-saving pattern is not displayed as the final decorative pattern, the variable display starts, the game enters a reach state, and then the reach effect of Super Reach C is executed. After that, when the pattern confirmation command is received (767 in this example), the variation ends after the confirmation pattern display period L2 has elapsed. Note that the confirmation pattern display period L2 is 0.5 seconds (see Figure 18-15 (A)), and is the same as the confirmation pattern display period L3 shown in Figure 18-31 (C).

As shown in FIG. 18-31(C), when the variable display starts in the case of the time-saving false fluctuation pattern, the state becomes reach, and then the reach performance of the super reach C is executed. Then, when the timing for the pattern to temporarily stop is reached, the decorative pattern of the reach combination is temporarily stopped and displayed as shown in the figure (in this example, the decorative pattern of 757). Then, the time-saving teasing performance is performed. The time-saving teasing performance period L5 is 10 seconds, similar to the time-saving teasing performance period L4 shown in FIG. 18-31(A) (see FIG. 18-9 and FIG. 18-10). After the time-saving teasing performance ends, when the pattern confirmation command is received, the losing pattern of the reach combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop pattern (in this example, 767). Then, after the fixed pattern display period L3 has elapsed, the fluctuation ends. Note that the fixed pattern display period L3 is 0.5 seconds (see FIG. 18-15(A)), and is the same as the fixed pattern display period L2 shown in FIG. 18-31(B).

Next, we will explain examples of the effects and operation when the time-saving symbol is displayed in a stopped state or when a time-saving promotion effect is executed, with reference to Figures 18-32 to 18-35.

As shown in FIG. 18-32(A), when the game state is normal after the reach performance of Super Reach C is executed, when the timing for the symbols to be temporarily stopped is reached, the decorative symbols of the reach combination are temporarily stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 18-32(B-1). In the illustrated example, a "7" is displayed as the decorative symbol 5La, a "5" is displayed as the decorative symbol 5Ca, and a "7" is displayed as the decorative symbol 5Ra in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, respectively. As shown in the figure, the "5" symbol as the decorative symbol 5Ca may be displayed while shaking in a manner that makes it visible that it is temporarily stopped. In addition, this is not limited to the decorative symbol 5Ca in each of the "middle" decorative symbol display areas 5C, and all decorative symbols may be displayed while shaking. On the other hand, when the game state is in the time-saving state, since the determination is No in step 059AKS102 in FIG. 18-26, the processing of step 059AKS111 is performed without the decorative symbol of the reach combination being temporarily stopped, and as shown in FIG. 18-32 (B-2), the losing symbol of the reach combination is stopped and displayed as the final stopping symbol. Note that in the illustrated example, the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed as the special symbol display result (the illustrated example shows an example of the special symbol display result of "1", which is the time-saving type of time-saving A), while the decorative symbol shows an example in which the time-saving symbol is not stopped and displayed. Note that, as shown in FIG. 18-32 (B-2), after the losing symbol of the reach combination is stopped and displayed as the final stopping symbol, the fluctuation ends 0.5 seconds after the fixed symbol display period.

When the time-saving teasing performance period starts from the state shown in FIG. 18-32 (B-1), the time-saving teasing performance is executed as shown in FIG. 18-32 (C). In the illustrated example, the message M1 "Maybe it's time-saving!?" is displayed to tease whether or not the time-saving pattern will be displayed in a static state, but other methods may also be used to tease whether or not the time-saving pattern will be displayed in a static state, for example, depending on whether or not two characters battle and win.

When the pattern determination command is received, the final stop pattern is displayed as shown in FIG. 18-32 (D-1) or (D-2). FIG. 18-32 (D-1) shows an example in which the variable display result is "miss (time reduction)", the pattern determination command of 8F01 shown in FIG. 18-15 (B) is received as the pattern determination command, and the time-saving pattern 5Cb of the time-saving type "time reduction A" is stopped and displayed as the final stop pattern, and the special pattern display result is also an example in which the special pattern display result is a special pattern showing the number "1", which is the time-saving pattern of the time-saving type "time reduction A". Note that in the illustrated example, the display mode of the active display AHA changes to a "green" display mode before the time-saving pattern 5Cb is stopped and displayed, but for example, the display mode may change immediately after the start of the time-saving teasing performance, or may change during the reach performance of the super reach. On the other hand, in the case of a time-saving false fluctuation pattern, the symbol determination command of 8F00 shown in FIG. 18-15 (A) is received, and as shown in FIG. 18-32 (D-2), the losing symbol of the reach combination is stopped and displayed as the final stopping symbol. As a special symbol display result, a special symbol showing the symbol "-" which is the losing symbol is displayed as a special symbol display result as shown in the figure. Then, the fluctuation ends 0.5 seconds after the determined symbol display period. In the example shown in the figure, the display mode of the active display AHA changes to a "blue" display mode before the losing symbol of the reach combination is stopped and displayed, but for example, the display mode may change immediately after the start of the time-saving teasing performance, or may change during the reach performance of the super reach. In addition, for the active change performance that changes the display mode of the active display, the display mode of the active display may be changed so that the ratio of the time-saving symbols to be stopped and displayed differs even in the reach performance of the same type of super reach, depending on which display mode the display mode of the active display changes to. In addition, the destination of the change in the display mode in the active change performance may be the same as the determination ratio in the normal reserved change determination table shown in FIG. 18-23(A). Also, unlike the normal reserved change determination table shown in FIG. 18-23(A), when the variable display result is a "miss (time-saving)" and when the variable display result is a false time-saving fluctuation pattern, the ratio of the display mode to "green" or "red" may be higher when the variable display result is a "miss (time-saving)".

In the state shown in FIG. 18-32 (D-1), the process of step 059AKS134 in FIG. 18-30 is executed, and as shown in FIG. 18-33 (E), the time-saving count display M2 is performed as the time-saving count notification control. In this case, since the pattern determination command 8F01 shown in FIG. 18-15 (B) is received as the pattern determination command, "Time-saving 100 times!" is displayed as the time-saving count display M2. Note that, when the process of step 059AKS139 in FIG. 18-30 is executed, "Time-saving ??? times" is displayed as the special time-saving count notification control, and the notification of the time-saving count (time-saving count) may be limited. Then, when 10 seconds, which is the determined pattern display period specified by the pattern determination command 8F01, has elapsed, the time-saving state is controlled as shown in FIG. 18-33 (F), and a new variable display (variable display corresponding to the reserved display HL1) is started. At that time, the reserved indicators HL3 and HL2 shift to the right. Also, by processing step 059AKS122 in FIG. 18-30, the time-saving count indicator M4 of "99 time-saving times remaining" is displayed as shown in FIG. 18-33 (F). Also, in step 059AKS090 in FIG. 18-24, the right-hit instruction indicator M3 is displayed as shown in FIG. 18-33 (F).

After that, multiple variable displays will be performed in the time-saving state. Figure 18-33 (G) shows an example of the 81st variable display after the time-saving pattern is stopped and displayed. In the time-saving state, since it becomes easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning hole, the variable display corresponding to the second special pattern will be performed and the reservation corresponding to the second special pattern will be stored. In the example shown in Figure 18-33 (G), the maximum number of reservation memories corresponding to the second special pattern is stored, which is four, and an example is shown in which four reservation displays HR1 to HR4 are displayed. Also, an example is shown in which the time-saving number display M4 of "19 times remaining" is displayed. Note that the right-hit instruction display in the manner shown in Figure 18-33 (F) ends with the first variable display after the time-saving pattern is stopped and displayed, and from the second time onwards, as shown in Figure 18-33 (G), it is displayed as the right-hit instruction display M3 in a manner that does not interfere with other performances.

Then, when the 100th variable display (100th fluctuation in the time-saving state) is completed after the time-saving symbol is stopped, the time-saving state ends. Figure 18-33 (H) shows an example in which the decorative symbols 5La, 5Ca, and 5Ra, which are the final stop symbols constituting a non-reach combination, are stopped and displayed in the 100th variable display after the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed. After the decorative symbols 5La, 5Ca, and 5Ra, which are the final stop symbols, are stopped and displayed, the fluctuation ends 0.5 seconds after the fixed symbol display period specified by the symbol determination command of 8F00, and the time-saving state ends. When the time-saving state ends, a right-hit erase command is received from the main board 11, so the processing of step 059AKS136 shown in Figure 18-30 is performed, and the right-hit instruction display M3 is erased as shown in Figure 18-33 (H). In this state, as shown in the figure, the maximum number of reserved memories corresponding to the second special chart is four, and four reserved displays HR1 to HR4 are displayed, and the remaining reserved period is the period from the start of the variable display corresponding to reserved display HR1 to the end of the variable display corresponding to HR4).

Next, when the time-saving state ends and the normal state is restored, as shown in FIG. 18-33 (I), the variable display corresponding to the reserved display HR1 starts. Note that the illustrated example shows an example in which the variable display result is a "miss" (an example that is not a "miss (time-saving)"). In the characteristic part 059AK of this embodiment, although it is in the normal state, the rate at which the special display result is a "miss (time-saving)" in the variable display corresponding to the reserved second special chart stored at the end of the time-saving state is high (see FIG. 18-5 (A) and (B)), so there is a high rate of being controlled to the time-saving state again. Therefore, although it is in the normal state during the remaining reserved period, the left-hit instruction display is not performed as shown in the figure, and the instruction display of the right-hit instruction display and the left-hit instruction display are displayed in succession to prevent the player from being confused. Note that the left-hit instruction display is displayed in the first variable display performed after the remaining reserved period ends, as shown in FIG. 18-34 (N-2).

The variable display is the first variable display in the second special chart performed after the time-saving has ended, and since the execution setting of the return performance is performed in the processing of step 059AKS108 in FIG. 18-26, when the return performance period begins, the return performance is performed as shown in FIG. 18-34 (J). In the return performance, for example, depending on whether or not a specified mission is cleared, a performance may be performed that indicates whether or not a reservation in which the special chart display result is "miss (time-saving)" is stored (whether or not the variable display result corresponding to the remaining reservations HR2 to HR4 is "miss (time-saving)"), that is, whether or not the time-saving return pattern is stopped. In the case of a return success pattern, the specified mission is cleared and the time-saving return pattern is stopped, while in the case of a return failure pattern, the specified mission ends in failure, the time-saving return pattern is not stopped, and the combination of decorative patterns that make up the reach is stopped as the final stop. In addition, there may be multiple types of specified missions, and the success rate may differ depending on the type of the mission. If the variable display corresponding to the reserved display HR1 is a "miss (time-saving)", the return effect is not executed because the result is determined as Yes in step 059AKS101 of FIG. 18-26, but the return effect may be executed. In this case, the time-saving teaser effect may be executed after the return effect.

When a reserved pattern for which the special display result is "miss (time-saving)" is stored, i.e., when it is a successful return pattern, the processing of step 059AKS110 in FIG. 18-26 stops and displays a combination of decorative patterns including the time-saving return pattern 5Cc as the final stop pattern, as shown in FIG. 18-34 (K-1), and notifies the user that there is a reserved pattern for which the variable display result is "miss (time-saving)" among the reserved patterns stored. Note that this example shows the case where the variable display result of the variable display corresponding to the reserved display HR4 is "miss (time-saving)" (more specifically, the time-saving type of "time-saving D").

Next, as shown in FIG. 18-34 (L-1), a variable display corresponding to the reserved display HR2 is executed. At this time, as shown in the figure, the small time-saving return symbol M5, which allows the player to visually confirm that the time-saving return symbol 5Cc has stopped being displayed, is displayed in a manner that does not interfere with other effects. This provides the player with a sense of security, as it becomes visible that the time-saving symbol is stopped being displayed while there is still reserved time.

Then, in the variable display corresponding to the reserved display HR4, since the variable display result of the variable display corresponding to the reserved display HR4 is "miss (time-saving)" (time-saving type is "time-saving D"), the pattern determination command 8F04 shown in FIG. 18-15 (B) is received as a pattern determination command, and the time-saving pattern 5Cb for the time-saving type of "time-saving D" is stopped and displayed as the final stop pattern, as shown in FIG. 18-34 (M-1). As for the special pattern display result, unlike FIG. 18-32 (D-1), a special pattern showing the number "8" corresponding to the time-saving pattern for the time-saving type of "time-saving D" is displayed as the special pattern display result. Note that, in the illustrated example, an example is shown in which the display mode of the active display AHA changes to the display mode of "green" before the time-saving pattern 5Cb is stopped and displayed.

In the state shown in FIG. 18-34 (M-1), the processing of step 059AKS134 of FIG. 18-30 is executed, and as shown in FIG. 18-35 (N-1), the time-saving count display M2 is performed as the time-saving count notification control. In this case, since the pattern determination command 8F04 shown in FIG. 18-15 (B) is received as the pattern determination command, "Time-saving count 20 times!" is displayed as the time-saving count display M2. Then, when 2 seconds, which is the determined pattern display period specified by the pattern determination command 8F04, has elapsed, the fluctuation ends, and as shown in FIG. 18-35 (O), the time-saving state is controlled and a new variable display (variable display corresponding to the reserved display HL3) is started. Also, as shown in FIG. 18-30, the processing of step 059AKS122 causes the time-saving count display M4 of "Time-saving count remaining 19 times" to be displayed as shown in FIG. 18-35 (O). Also, in step 059AKS090 of FIG. 18-24, as shown in FIG. 18-35(O), a simplified right-hit instruction display M3, which is less noticeable than the display shown in FIG. 18-33(F), is displayed.

On the other hand, if there is no reserved symbol stored that results in a "miss (time-saving)" special symbol display result, i.e., if it is a return failure pattern, the processing of step 059AKS111 in FIG. 18-26 causes the decorative symbols 5La, 5Ca, and 5Ra of the reach combination to be stopped and displayed as the final stop symbols, as shown in FIG. 18-34 (K-2), and the variation ends 0.5 seconds after the determined symbol display period specified by the symbol determination command of 8F00. Next, as shown in FIG. 18-34 (L-2), a variable display corresponding to the reserved symbol HR2 is executed. At this time, since it was a return performance of a return failure pattern, unlike FIG. 18-34 (L-1), the time-saving return small symbol M5 is not displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 18-34 (M-2), the decorative symbols 5La, 5Ca, and 5Ra, which are the final symbols that make up the non-reach combination, are displayed stopped, and 0.5 seconds after the determined symbol display period specified by the symbol determination command of 8F00, the fluctuation ends and the remaining reserved period ends. With the remaining reserved period ending, a left-hit instruction command is sent from the main board 11 in step 059AKS074 of FIG. 18-18.

When the variable display corresponding to the reserved display HL3 is started, the processing of step 059AKS088 in FIG. 18-24 displays the left-hit instruction display M6 of "Return to left-hit!" as shown in FIG. 18-34 (N-2). In this way, the left-hit instruction display is displayed in the next variable display executed after the variable display corresponding to the reserved (remaining reserved) second special chart remaining after the time-saving feature ends.

Figure 18-36 is a flow chart showing an example of the information output process performed in the information output process of step S23 in Figure 5. The information output process shown in Figure 18-36 performs processing to output signals such as jackpot information, start information, probability fluctuation information, etc., which are supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. When the information output process shown in Figure 18-36 starts, the CPU 103 outputs a signal indicating the special chart display result and the normal chart display result as a display signal output process (step S1801). After executing the process of step S1801, the CPU 103 executes a drive signal output process (step S1802) and outputs drive signals for the solenoids 81 and 82.

Then, the CPU 103 executes an external information output process (step S1803), and ends the process in the information output process. In step S1803, various signals are output, such as a jackpot signal 1 indicating that a jackpot is occurring, a jackpot signal 2 indicating that a jackpot is occurring or that the time-saving state is in progress (special prize is in progress), a jackpot signal 3 indicating that the time-saving state is in progress, and a pattern confirmation signal indicating that the variation has ended.

Figure 18-37 is a timing chart showing the output timing of various signals output in the external information output process in step S1803 of Figure 18-36. Specifically, Figure 18-37 (A) shows the output timing of various signals when the time-saving state is entered due to the end of the jackpot gaming state, and Figure 18-37 (B) shows the output timing of various signals when the time-saving state is entered due to the stopping of the time-saving symbol.

As shown in FIG. 18-37(A), when the time-saving state is entered due to the end of the jackpot gaming state, first, a pattern confirmation signal indicating the jackpot pattern has stopped is output, and as a result (when the output of the pattern confirmation signal is stopped), jackpot signal 1 and jackpot signal 2 are output at the same timing. Then, in line with the end of the jackpot gaming state, jackpot signal 1 stops being output, but since the time-saving state is entered at that timing, jackpot signal 3 is output. Then, as time passes, a pattern confirmation signal indicating a losing pattern has stopped is output, and if a pattern confirmation signal indicating a jackpot pattern has stopped is output again without the time-saving state ending, jackpot signal 1 is output and jackpot signal 3 stops being output. Note that since this is a jackpot during the time-saving state, the output of jackpot signal 2 continues as shown in the figure. Then, in line with the end of the jackpot gaming state, jackpot signal 1 stops being output, but since the time-saving state is entered at that timing, jackpot signal 3 is output. Then, as time passes, when the final variable display of the predetermined number of time-saving times is completed, a pattern confirmation signal indicating the stop of a losing pattern is output, and the time-saving state ends when the output of the pattern confirmation signal stops, so the output of jackpot signal 2 and jackpot signal 3 are stopped at the same time.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 18-37(B), when the time-saving state is entered by the stopping of the time-saving pattern, first a pattern confirmation signal indicating the stop of the time-saving pattern is output, and as a result (when the output of the pattern confirmation signal is stopped), jackpot signal 2 and jackpot signal 3 are output at the same time. Then, as time passes, a pattern confirmation signal indicating the stop of a losing pattern is output, and when a pattern confirmation signal indicating the stop of a jackpot pattern is output without the time-saving state ending, jackpot signal 1 is output at the timing when the output of the pattern confirmation signal stops, and the output of jackpot signal 3 is stopped. Then, in line with the end of the jackpot game state, the output of jackpot signal 1 stops, but at that timing the time-saving state is entered again, so jackpot signal 3 is output. Note that, as shown in the figure, jackpot signal 2 continues to be output. Then, as time passes, when the final variable display of the predetermined number of time-saving times ends, a pattern confirmation signal indicating a losing pattern stop is output, and the time-saving state ends at the timing when the output of the pattern confirmation signal stops, so the output of jackpot signal 2 and jackpot signal 3 are stopped at the same timing. In this way, since the output of jackpot signal 2 and jackpot signal 3 is stopped at the same timing, it is possible to prevent a discrepancy from occurring and prevent confusion, and it is possible to suitably identify the time-saving state or consecutive win state with an external device. After that, when the pattern confirmation signal indicating the time-saving pattern stop is output again, jackpot signal 2 and jackpot signal 3 are output at the same timing when the output of the pattern confirmation signal stops.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 with characteristic part 059AK in this embodiment can achieve the following effects.

In processing step S1240 shown in FIG. 18-4, the CPU 103 can determine "Miss (time-shortened)" as the special chart display result regardless of whether the game state is in the time-shortened state or not, and if "Miss (time-shortened)" (special display result) is derived and displayed as the special chart display result, if the game state is normal, the game state is controlled to the time-shortened state (travel-specific state) in the next special chart game (variable display), whereas if the game state is in the time-shortened state, no control is performed regarding the game state based on the derived display of "Miss (time-shortened)" (no new time-shortened control is performed). In addition, when "Miss (time-saving)" is derived and displayed as the special display result, the performance control CPU 120 stops and displays the time-saving pattern as the final stopping pattern of the decorative patterns in step 059AKS106 of FIG. 18-26 in the normal state, while in the time-saving state, stops and displays the final stopping pattern that constitutes the reach combination in step 059AKS111 of FIG. 18-26. This allows control according to the game state when the special display result is displayed, and can increase interest in the game.

As shown in Fig. 18-32 (B-2) and (D-1), the special display result for "miss (time-saving)" (special display result) is a common display result (special display result showing the number "1" corresponding to the time-saving type of "time-saving A") when the game state is normal and when the game state is time-saving, while the variable display result of the decorative pattern is such that when the game state is normal, the time-saving pattern is stopped and displayed as the final stopping pattern for the decorative pattern in step 059AKS106 of Fig. 18-26, while when the game state is time-saving, the final stopping pattern that constitutes the reach combination is stopped and displayed in step 059AKS111 of Fig. 18-26. This makes it possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game when a special display result is displayed in a special state.

In addition, in the processing of step 059AKS104 in FIG. 18-26, the execution setting of the time-saving prompting effect, which prompts whether or not the time-saving pattern indicating that the time-saving state will be controlled from the next variable display is displayed in a stopped state, is performed, so that the performance control CPU 120 can execute the time-saving prompting effect. The performance control CPU 120 executes the processing of step 059AKS104 when the game state is the normal state, and does not execute the processing of step 059AKS104 when the game state is the time-saving state. Therefore, the time-saving prompting effect is not executed when the game state is the time-saving state (special state). This makes it possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game when a special display result is displayed in a special state.

In addition, when "Miss (time-saving)" (special display result) is derived and displayed as the special display result, if the CPU 103 is in the normal state, as shown in FIG. 18-15, in the processing of step 059AKS043, it transmits a decorative pattern stop command with the fixed time shown in FIG. 18-15(B), while if it judges Yes in step 059AKS041, it transmits a decorative pattern stop command with a fixed time of 0.5 seconds. In other words, when "Miss (time-saving)" (special display result) is derived and displayed as the special display result, the time from when the variable display result is displayed to when it is fixed (fixed time) differs between the normal state and the special state. This makes it possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game when a special display result is displayed in a special state.

In addition, in the processing of step S1240 shown in FIG. 18-4, the CPU 103 can determine "Miss (time-shortened)" as the special chart display result regardless of whether the game state is in the time-shortened state or not, and when "Miss (time-shortened)" (special display result) is derived and displayed as the special chart display result, if it is in the normal state, the next special chart game (variable display) is controlled to the time-shortened state (travel-specific state), while if it is in the time-shortened state, no control is performed regarding the game state based on the derived display of "Miss (time-shortened)" (no new time-shortened control is performed). And, as shown in FIG. 18-5, between the first special chart display result determination table and the second special chart display result determination table, determination data is assigned so that there is a higher probability that the special chart display result will be determined to be "Miss (time-shortened)" and controlled to the time-shortened state from the next variable display in the second special chart display result determination table. In addition, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance can execute a return performance based on whether or not a "miss (time-saving)" reservation is stored among the reservations stored at the end of the time-saving state by processing step 059AKS108 in FIG. 18-26. The CPU 120 for controlling the performance can display a right-hit instruction by processing step 059AKS090 in FIG. 18-24, and does not display a left-hit instruction until it receives a left-hit instruction command transmitted in step 059AKS074 in FIG. 18-18, that is, until all the variable displays corresponding to the reservations (remaining reservations) of the second special chart stored at the end of the time-saving state are completed. This allows control according to the game state when the special display result is displayed, and can increase the interest in the game.

In addition, by receiving a left hit instruction command in the normal state, the performance control CPU 120 can display a left hit instruction display in step 059AKS088 of FIG. 18-24. The left hit instruction command is then transmitted in step 059AKS074 of FIG. 18-18, that is, when all variable displays corresponding to the reserved second special charts stored at the time of the end of the time-saving state are completed. After receiving the left hit instruction command, that is, in the variable display that is performed after the variable displays corresponding to the remaining reserved charts are completed, the performance control CPU 120 displays a left hit instruction display in step 059AKS088 of FIG. 18-24. This allows for an appropriate launch notification, allowing the game to proceed smoothly.

The CPU 103 also transmits different right-hit instruction commands depending on whether or not it is the remaining reserved period, as in the processing of steps 059AKS054 and 059AKS057 in FIG. 18-16. Then, the performance control CPU 120 displays a right-hit instruction in a manner corresponding to the received command in step 059AKS090 in FIG. 18-24. This makes it possible to prevent the player from feeling annoyed and losing interest in the game.

In the return performance, the performance control CPU 120 indicates whether or not a reserved ball is stored that will result in a "miss (time-saving)" special symbol display result (whether or not the variable display result corresponding to the remaining reserved balls HR2 to HR4 will be a "miss (time-saving)"), i.e., whether or not the time-saving return symbol will be displayed in a stopped state, depending on whether or not a specified mission is cleared, for example. There are return performances for successful return patterns and return performances for unsuccessful return patterns, and both of them execute a common performance (for example, a performance that aims to clear a specified mission to see if the time-saving state will be entered again), and as a result, the combination of decorative symbols that are displayed in a stopped state differs depending on whether or not the specified mission is cleared. This makes it possible to attract the player's attention after the common performance is executed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 18-7, when the variable display result of the remaining reserved is "miss (time-saving)", the CPU 103 determines the time-saving type to be "time-saving C" or "time-saving D". Then, in the processing of step 059AKS113 of FIG. 18-27, the performance control CPU 120 determines the time-saving promotion performance pattern to execute different patterns of time-saving promotion performance depending on the time-saving type, as shown in FIG. 18-28. That is, the time-saving promotion performance executed when the variable display result corresponding to the first special chart in the normal state is "miss (time-saving)" and the time-saving promotion performance executed when the variable display result corresponding to the second special chart of the remaining reserved is "miss (time-saving)" execute different patterns of time-saving promotion performance. This allows different patterns of performance to be executed depending on the situation, thereby increasing interest in the game.

Also, the CPU 103 transmits a right-hit erase command in the variable display of the time-saving end round by processing step 059AKS066 in FIG. 18-17. Then, at the end of the variable display of the time-saving end round, the performance control CPU 120 erases the right-hit instruction display by processing step 059AKS136 in FIG. 18-30 based on the command. Therefore, the right-hit instruction display is erased during the remaining reserved period. Also, the CPU 103 transmits different right-hit instruction commands depending on whether or not it is the remaining reserved period, as in the processing of steps 059AKS054 and 059AKS057 in FIG. 18-16. Then, on the side of the performance control CPU 120, in the first variable display controlled to the time-saving state (the variable display performed next to the variable display in which the time-saving pattern is stopped and displayed), a right-hit instruction display in a manner corresponding to the received command is performed in step 059AKS090 in FIG. 18-24. This allows for optimal firing notification and allows the game to proceed smoothly.

The CPU 103 can also output various signals, such as jackpot signal 1 indicating that a jackpot is occurring, jackpot signal 2 indicating that a jackpot is occurring or that a time-saving state (special prize is occurring), jackpot signal 3 indicating that a time-saving state is occurring, and a pattern confirmation signal indicating that the variation has ended, to, for example, a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 by processing step S1803 in FIG. 18-36. When the time-saving state is entered due to the time-saving pattern stopping, a pattern confirmation signal indicating that the time-saving pattern has stopped is output, as shown in FIG. 18-37 (B), and a jackpot signal is output at the timing when the output of the pattern confirmation signal is stopped. This allows the external device to conveniently identify the time-saving state or consecutive win state.

As shown in FIG. 18-37(B), the CPU 103 stops outputting the jackpot signal 2 and the jackpot signal 3 at the same time that the output of the symbol determination signal corresponding to the end of the time-saving state stops. This allows the external device to conveniently identify the time-saving state or consecutive win state.

Also, the CPU 103 determines the variation pattern according to the variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 18-12. As shown in the figure, when the variable display result is "miss (time-saving)" (special display result) (when the time-saving start flag is on and the miss variation pattern determination table is selected), no determination value is assigned to the Super Reach A with the highest jackpot expectation, and the determination value is assigned so that the rate of "miss (time-saving)" varies depending on the type of Super Reach executed. Then, the CPU 103 transmits different right-hit instruction commands depending on whether or not it is the remaining reserved period, as in the processing of steps 059AKS054 and 059AKS057 in FIG. 18-16. Then, on the side of the performance control CPU 120, in the first variable display controlled to the time-saving state (the variable display performed next to the variable display in which the time-saving pattern is stopped and displayed), a right-hit instruction display in a manner corresponding to the received command is performed in step 059AKS090 in FIG. 18-24. This allows control according to the game state when the special display result is displayed, improving game enjoyment.

As shown in Figures 18-11 and 18-12, when the reach effect of Super Reach B or Super Reach C is executed, a decision value is assigned to result in multiple variable display results, such as a jackpot, a miss (time reduction), or a simple miss. This increases the variety of performance results, enhancing the interest in the game.

The CPU 103 also transmits a variation pattern designation command indicating the determined variation pattern and a display result designation command indicating the determined special chart display result (variable display result), and the performance control CPU 120 performs a performance based on these commands. For example, even if the performance control CPU 120 determines that the variation pattern is a variation pattern for performing a reach performance of Super Reach B based on the received variation pattern designation command and determines No in step S552 of FIG. 18-24, whether or not to execute the processing of step 059AKS104 or step 059AKS106 is different depending on whether or not it determines Yes in 059AKS101 of FIG. 18-26 based on the display result designation command and No. In other words, even if a variation pattern command with a common performance content, such as performing a reach performance of Super Reach B or Super Reach C, is received, a different performance is performed depending on the content of the display result designation command. This increases the variety of performance results and improves the interest in the game.

In addition, in the processing of step 059AKS104 in FIG. 18-26, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the time-saving prompting effect by setting the execution of a time-saving prompting effect (special effect) that prompts whether or not a time-saving pattern, which indicates that the time-saving state will be controlled from the next variable display, will be displayed in a stopped state. Then, the effect control CPU 120 executes the time-saving prompting effect after executing a reach effect that is common whether or not the time-saving prompting effect is executed. This executes a special effect, which can increase interest in the game.

As shown in FIG. 18-12, the rate at which the variable display result is a "miss (time-saving)" varies depending on the type of reach effect executed, and similarly, the execution rate of time-saving teasing effects also varies depending on the type of reach effect executed. This makes it possible to prevent special effects from being executed excessively, and to maintain the expectation of a specific display result.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 18-12(B), for a time-saving false variable pattern in which the variable display result is not a "miss (time-saving)" even when a time-saving teasing effect is executed, a reach effect with a low expectation of a jackpot, such as a Super Reach C, is executed. Therefore, the rate at which the time-saving teasing effect is executed varies depending on the type of reach effect executed, and the rate at which the time-saving pattern is stopped and displayed as a result of the execution of the time-saving teasing effect also varies. This makes it possible to prevent the special effect from being executed excessively, and to maintain the expectation of a specific display result.

The performance control CPU 120 also changes the display mode of the active display so that the rate at which time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed varies depending on which display mode the active display is changed to, even for the same type of Super Reach reach performance. This makes it possible to prevent special performances from being executed excessively, and to maintain the expectation of a specific display result.

The CPU 103 also transmits a variation pattern designation command indicating the determined variation pattern and a display result designation command indicating the determined special chart display result (variable display result), and the performance control CPU 120 performs a performance based on these commands. For example, even if the contents of the received display result designation command are different, the performance control CPU 120 executes a common Super Reach B reach performance regardless of the special chart display result (variable display result) if the received variation pattern designation command is a variation pattern that performs a Super Reach B reach performance. This allows the performance to be executed optimally.

As shown in FIG. 18-7, the number of times the time is reduced by controlling the time-saving state varies depending on the type of time-saving, and as shown in FIG. 18-12, the proportion of super reach effects that are executed varies depending on the type of time-saving. As shown in FIG. 18-28, the pattern of time-saving teasing effects that are executed varies depending on the type of time-saving. This makes it possible to attract the player's attention, as the number of times the time is reduced afterwards varies depending on the effect that is executed.

The CPU 103 also transmits a display result designation command in step S268 of FIG. 18-8, and sets up the transmission of a decorative symbol stop command in step 059AKS021 of FIG. 18-15. The performance control CPU 120 performs the stop symbol setting process of FIG. 18-26, and sets the execution of the performance based on the contents of the received display result designation command, and sets the number of time reductions specified by the received symbol determination command in the process of step 059AKS133 of FIG. 18-30. This allows for optimal performance control.

In addition, in the processing of step 059AKS090A in FIG. 18-24, the presentation control CPU 120 checks the contents of the presentation control command receiving buffer provided in RAM 122 to determine whether the display result designation command and the variation pattern designation command have been received normally, and if they have not been received normally, executes the missed-out processing shown in FIG. 18-25, and if either the display result designation command or the variation pattern designation command has been missed, prohibits the execution of presentations related to time-saving, such as time-saving teasing presentations, by stopping and displaying a decorative pattern that is predetermined for missed occasions. This makes it possible to execute presentations appropriately while preventing a decline in interest in the game.

On the other hand, if the CPU 120 for controlling the effects determines that the command was not received normally in the process of step 059AKS090A in FIG. 18-24, it can execute effects related to the time-saving state, such as time-saving teasing effects, by executing the stop symbol setting process in step 059AKS095 in FIG. 18-25 if it determines that the command was not received normally and the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is a fluctuation pattern that confirms time-saving or a fluctuation pattern that falsely indicates time-saving. This makes it possible to execute effects that are suitable for the time-saving state, such as time-saving teasing effects, by preventing a decline in interest in the game.

The presentation control CPU 120 also determines the number of time-saving times based on the received symbol determination command in the process of step 059AKS133 in FIG. 18-30. If the symbol determination command is not received correctly, the process of step 059AKS139 performs special time-saving number notification control to display "??? times" as a notification of the number of time-saving times, thereby restricting the execution of the time-saving number notification. This makes it possible to execute presentations in an optimal manner while preventing a decline in interest in the game.

The presentation control CPU 120 can also execute a reserve display change presentation in the pre-reading notice setting process shown in FIG. 18-22. If the currently stored reserve memory in step 059AKS082 contains a reserve with a variable display result of "jackpot", a reserve with a "miss (time-saving)", or a reserve with a "miss" and a "false time-saving" variation pattern, the reserve change determination table in FIG. 18-23(B) is selected and a reserve display change presentation is executed. In other words, if the currently stored reserve memory contains a reserve with a variable display result of "miss (time-saving)", the execution of the reserve display change presentation is restricted. This allows control according to the game state when the special display result is displayed, improving game interest.

In addition, in step 059AKS082, if the currently stored reserve memory contains a reserve with a variable display result of "jackpot", a reserve with a "miss (time-saving)", or a reserve with a "miss" and a "false time-saving" variation pattern, the reserve change determination table during limit shown in FIG. 18-23(B) is selected and the reserve display change presentation is executed. Therefore, even if the currently stored reserve memory contains a reserve with a variable display result of "jackpot", the reserve change determination table during limit shown in FIG. 18-23(B) is selected to restrict the execution of the reserve display change presentation, just as in the case where the currently stored reserve memory contains a reserve with a variable display result of "miss (time-saving)". This makes it possible to suppress the deviation in presentation due to state transitions and prevent a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, if the currently stored reserved memory in step 059AKS082 contains a reserved memory with a variable display result of "jackpot", a reserved memory with a "miss (time-saving)", or a reserved memory with a "miss" and a "fake time-saving" variation pattern, the reserved display change determination table during limit shown in FIG. 18-23(B) is selected and the reserved display change presentation is executed, so that the execution of the reserved display change presentation is also restricted if the currently stored reserved memory contains a reserved memory with a variable display result of "miss" and a "fake time-saving" variation pattern. This makes it possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game when a presentation related to a state transition is performed.

As shown in FIG. 18-23(B), when the hold display change presentation is restricted, the presentation control CPU 120 does not execute the hold display change presentation, or if it does execute it, executes a hold display change presentation with a "blue" display state. In other words, it does not execute a hold display change presentation that indicates a higher expectation level than the "green" display state. This makes it possible to suppress deviations in presentation due to state transitions and prevent a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 18-23(B), when the hold display change effect is restricted, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute hold display change effects that change the display state to "green" or "red." This restricts the execution of certain types of advance notice effects, preventing a decline in the player's interest in the game from being felt without giving the player unnecessary expectations.

(Modification of characteristic part 059AK)
In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 18-5, an example was shown in which the time-saving pattern as a result of the special pattern display is a part of the "miss", but this is just one example. For example, as shown in FIG. 18-38, a part of the small win pattern may be a time-saving pattern. In this case, the time-saving control is performed after the end of the small win game state, and a right-hit instruction display or the like is performed in the first variable display performed after the end of the small win game state. Also, as in the above embodiment, even if a small win pattern that is a time-saving pattern is stopped and displayed again in the special pattern game in the time-saving state, the time-saving state is not controlled again, and the performance control CPU 120 simply stops and displays a combination of decorative patterns that constitute a small win, not a small win pattern including a time-saving pattern.

In the above embodiment, when all the variable displays corresponding to the remaining reservations have been completed, a left hit instruction command is sent in the processing of step 059AKS074 in FIG. 18-18, and the performance control CPU 120 displays a left hit instruction display in the first variable display that is displayed after the variable displays corresponding to the remaining reservations have been completed. In addition to this, for example, the left hit instruction display may have a first mode that is noticeable to the player and a second mode that is not noticeable to the player, and the second mode of the left hit instruction display may be displayed in the first variable display that is displayed after the variable displays corresponding to the remaining reservations have been completed. The left hit instruction display is displayed for 5 seconds each time from the time the left hit instruction command is received until, for example, four variable displays are displayed, but it may change from the second mode to the first mode over time. In addition, the left hit instruction display is not limited to a simple display, and may include sound or the lighting of a lamp (i.e., it may be a left hit notification that notifies the player of a left hit). For example, in the first mode, the other output sounds are muted and a sound announcing a left hit is output, while in the second mode, the sound announcing a left hit is output without muting the other output sounds.

In the above embodiment, the return effect is performed when the variable display (change) corresponding to the first (first) second special chart performed after the time-saving period ends, but this is just one example. The execution timing of the return effect is not limited to the first variable display after the time-saving period ends, and for example, depending on which reserved memory corresponding to the variable display of the second special chart stored after the time-saving period ends becomes a "miss (time-saving)", the timing of one of the first to third variable displays performed after the time-saving period ends may be determined by lottery as the execution timing of the return effect. In addition, the return effect may be performed multiple times over multiple variable displays until a successful pattern is achieved, such as a pattern in which the return effect of a return failure pattern is switched to a return success pattern after the execution of a return effect of a return failure pattern, or a return effect of a return success pattern is performed in the next variable display after the execution of a return effect of a return failure pattern.

In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the pattern of the time-saving teasing effect differs depending on the type of time-saving effect, that is, the pattern of the time-saving teasing effect differs when the variable display result corresponding to the remaining reserve is a "miss (time-saving)" (time-saving type C or D) and when the variable display result of the first special chart during normal state is a "miss (time-saving)" (time-saving type A or B), but this is just one example. The pattern of the time-saving teasing effect may be the same when the variable display result corresponding to the remaining reserve is a "miss (time-saving)" and when the variable display result of the first special chart during normal state is a "miss (time-saving)".

In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 18-15, an example was shown in which the time from when the variable display result is displayed until it is confirmed (confirmation time) is different between when the variable display result corresponding to the remaining reservation is a "miss (time saving)" (time saving type of time saving C or D) and when the variable display result of the first special chart during the normal state is a "miss (time saving)" (time saving type of time saving A or B), but this is just one example. The confirmation time may be the same between when the variable display result corresponding to the remaining reservation is a "miss (time saving)" (time saving type of time saving C or D) and when the variable display result of the first special chart during the normal state is a "miss (time saving)" (time saving type of time saving A or B). This makes it possible to suppress an increase in control data.

For example, the confirmation time when the variable display result corresponding to the remaining reserve is "miss (time-saving)" may be the same as when the variable display result of the first special chart during the normal state is "miss (time-saving)." By doing so, by lengthening the period between the normal state and the time-saving state, it is possible to clearly notify the player that the time-saving state will be entered.

In addition, examples have been shown (Fig. 18-35 (N-1), Fig. 18-33 (E)) in which the number of time-saving times is notified in a common manner at the determined time when the variable display result corresponding to the remaining reserve is a "miss (time-saving)" (time-saving types C and D) and when the variable display result of the first special chart during the normal state is a "miss (time-saving)" (time-saving types A and B), but these may be in different manners.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the right-hit instruction display is erased after the time-saving state ends, and the right-hit instruction display is not displayed during the remaining reserved period, but this is just one example. The right-hit instruction display is not limited to a simple display, and may include sound or the lighting of a lamp (i.e., it is sufficient as long as it is a right-hit notification that notifies of a right hit), and during the remaining reserved period, no display or sound output is made on the image display device 5, and for example, the right-hit lamp indicating a right hit may be lit.

In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 18-37(B), when the final variable display of the predetermined number of time-saving times ends, a pattern confirmation signal indicating a losing pattern stop is output, and the time-saving state ends at the timing when the output of the pattern confirmation signal stops, so the output of the jackpot signal 3 is stopped at that timing, but this is just one example. For example, since the variable display result corresponding to the reserved (remaining reserved) of the second special pattern stored at the time of the time-saving end has a high probability of being "miss (time-saving)", even if the time-saving state ends, the output of the jackpot signal 3 may not be stopped until the variable display corresponding to the remaining reserved ends. The same applies to the jackpot signal 2. This allows the external device to appropriately identify the time-saving state or consecutive win state.

In addition, in the above embodiment, a time-saving teasing effect is performed after the reach effect of a super reach, and an example is shown in which it is suggested whether or not the time-saving pattern will stop, but this is just one example. For example, the results of the reach effect may be displayed as a big win (including a small win), the time-saving pattern will stop, or a miss. This increases the variety of the results of the reach effect execution, improving interest in the game.

In addition, in the above embodiment, an example was shown in which a time-saving teasing performance period is added to the variable pattern when the variable display result is "miss (time-saving)". In addition, for example, a variable display result of "revival jackpot" can be provided, and a variable pattern similar to that when the variable display result is "miss (time-saving)" can be selected, and a revival performance period executed after the reach performance can be added (for example, 20 seconds), and the symbols that constitute the jackpot (special symbols and corresponding decorative symbols) can be stopped and displayed after the revival performance. This increases the variety of performances and improves the interest in the game. Also, when the variable display result is "revival jackpot", a process of adding the revival performance period can be executed after step S262 in FIG. 18-8, and the variety of performances can be increased with simple processing.

In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which a super reach reach effect is used to tease whether the variable display result will be a jackpot, and then a time-saving teasing effect is used to tease whether a time-saving pattern will be displayed in a stopped state. However, in addition to this, for example, in the time-saving teasing effect, in addition to whether a time-saving pattern will be displayed in a stopped state, it is also possible to notify that there will be an advantage greater than the time saving effect, such as whether a jackpot pattern will be displayed in a stopped state. This makes it possible to maintain anticipation of a specific display result.

In the above embodiment, if the pattern determination command is not received normally in step S809 and step 059AKS137 in FIG. 18-30 and the special pattern display result (variable display result) is a pattern determination command for "miss (time reduction)", an example was shown in which the notification of the number of time reductions is restricted by performing special time reduction number notification control to display "??? times" as a notification of the number of time reductions in step 059AKS139. However, for example, even if special time reduction number notification control is performed, the player may be able to specify the number of time reductions to some extent by changing the background image according to the remaining number of time reductions. Specifically, the main board 11 may transmit a background designation command according to the remaining number of time reductions, and the performance control board 12 may display a background image specified by the received background designation command. This allows the player to specify the number of time reductions to some extent from the background image, thereby preventing a decline in interest in the game.

Furthermore, each time the variable display is executed, the main board 11 may transmit a time-saving number designation command indicating the remaining number of time-saving times, and the performance control board 12 may notify the remaining number of time-saving times in response to the time-saving number designation command. This allows the player to identify the remaining number of time-saving times even when special time-saving number notification control is performed, thereby preventing a decline in interest in the game. Also, for example, if the number of time-saving times is 100, a special variation pattern may be transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when 50 times remain, and the performance control board 12 may notify the remaining number of time-saving times of 50 times in response to receiving the special variation pattern. This allows the player to identify the remaining number of time-saving times even when special time-saving number notification control is performed, thereby preventing a decline in interest in the game.

In the above embodiment, when the currently stored reserve memory in step 059AKS082 of FIG. 18-22 contains a reserve with a variable display result of "jackpot", a reserve with a "miss (time-saving)", or a reserve with a "miss" and a "fake time-saving" variation pattern, an example is shown in which the reserve change decision table during limit shown in FIG. 18-23(B) is selected and the reserve display change presentation is executed; that is, when the currently stored reserve memory contains a reserve with a variable display result of "miss (time-saving)" or a reserve with a variable display result of "jackpot", an example is shown in which the common reserve change decision table during limit shown in FIG. 18-23(B) is selected and the execution of the reserve display change presentation is restricted, but this is just one example. When the currently stored reserve memory contains a reserve with a variable display result of "miss (time-saving)" and a reserve with a variable display result of "jackpot", different reserve change decision tables during limit may be selected to restrict the execution of the reserve display change presentation. For example, one may execute a pre-reading preview of the reserved display change performance, and the other may execute a pre-reading preview of the dialogue. In this case, it is sufficient to execute a type of performance with a low expectation in both cases. Also, if a reserved display whose variable display result is a "miss (time-saving)" is stored in the currently stored reserved memory, the reserved display change performance may not be executed, and if a reserved display whose variable display result is a "jackpot" is stored, the execution or non-execution of the reserved change performance may be determined based on the reserved change determination table shown in FIG. 18-23 (B) such that the display state is not "green" or higher.

In the above embodiment, when the reserve memory currently stored in step 059AKS082 of FIG. 18-22 contains a reserve with a variable display result of "jackpot", a reserve with a "miss (time-saving)", or a reserve with a "miss" and a "fake time-saving" variation pattern, the reserve change determination table during limit shown in FIG. 18-23(B) is selected, and an example is shown in which the reserve display change performance with an expectation level of "green" or higher is not executed, but this is just one example. For example, in addition to the reserve display change performance, multiple types of pre-reading preview performances such as a dialogue preview and a pre-reading zone preview may be executed as the pre-reading preview performance, and if the judgment is Yes in step 059AKS082 of FIG. 18-22, the pre-reading preview performance of the pre-reading zone preview type may not be executed. This prevents the player's attention from being distracted from the reserve stored before the pre-reading preview target.

In the above embodiment, the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B are made of 7-segment LEDs, and the special patterns are represented by lighting patterns such as numbers "0" to "9" and "-", but this is just one example. The first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B may be made of eight LEDs, as shown in FIG. 18-39, for example, and the special patterns may be represented by a combination of the lighting of these eight LEDs. Specifically, as shown in the figure, when the variable display result is a "big win" or a "small win", it may be represented by the lighting of three of the eight LEDs, and when the variable display result is a "miss (time reduction)" or a "miss", it may be represented by the lighting of two LEDs.

In the above embodiment, after the state shown in FIG. 18-34(L-1), the time-saving pattern 5Cb of the time-saving type "time-saving D" is displayed as the final stop pattern in the center of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 18-34(M-1), but this is just one example. For example, as shown in FIG. 18-40, after the state shown in FIG. 18-40(L-1) (similar to FIG. 18-34(L-1)), a time-saving return small pattern M5 is displayed to visually confirm that the time-saving return pattern 5Cc has stopped, and since it has already been notified that the time-saving pattern will stop during the remaining reserved period, as shown in FIG. 18-40(M-3), the variable display of the decorative pattern may be reduced and displayed (reduced pattern M8), and the result display M7, which is the result of whether the time-saving pattern has stopped or not, may be displayed large in the center of the image display device 5. This adds variety to the game and improves the interest in the game. In addition, since it has already been notified that the time-saving pattern will stop during the remaining reserved period, the execution of the active change effect that changes the display mode of the active display may be restricted during the remaining reserved period. Restrictions may include not executing it at all, executing it in a mode with low expectations, or executing it in an inconspicuous mode, such as making the display smaller or transparent.

(Explanation of Means Related to Characteristic Part 059AK)
(1) The gaming machine according to the characteristic part 059AK is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player when a specific display result is displayed as a variable display result,
A state control means (e.g., the CPU 103 that executes the process of step 059AKS025) that can control to a special state where variable display is more easily executed than in a normal state;
A performance execution means (such as a performance control CPU 120 that executes the process of step S172) capable of executing a performance corresponding to the variable display,
The state control means includes:
In the normal state, when a special display result different from the specific display result (for example, a special display result of "miss (time reduction)") is displayed as the variable display result, the normal state is controlled to the special state based on the special display result (for example, executing the processing of step 059AKS025, etc.),
When the special display result is displayed as the variable display result in the special state, control based on the special display result is not performed (for example, when the answer is Yes in step 059AKS006, the process of step 059AKS006A is not executed, etc.),
When the special display result is displayed as the variable display result, the performance execution means is capable of executing different performances in the normal state and in the special state (for example, executing the process of step 059AKS092, etc.),
It is characterized by:

This configuration allows control according to the game state when the special display result is displayed, improving game enjoyment.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
As the variable display, variable display of identification information is performed, and variable display of performance identification information is performed corresponding to the variable display of the identification information (for example, variable display of the first special chart and the second special chart or variable display of a decorative pattern, etc.),
When the special display result is displayed as the variable display result, the identification information common to the normal state and the special state is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 18-32 (B-2) and (D-1), when the game state is in the normal state and when the time-saving state, the special display result as "miss (time-saving)" (special display result) is a common display result (special display result showing the number "1" which is the time-saving pattern of the time-saving type of "time-saving A")), and the performance identification information different to the normal state and the special state is displayed (for example, for the variable display result of the decorative pattern, when the game state is in the normal state, in step 059AKS106 of FIG. 18-26, the time-saving pattern is stopped and displayed as the final stop pattern of the decorative pattern, while when the time-saving state is in the time-saving state, in step 059AKS111 of FIG. 18-26, the final stop pattern constituting the reach combination is stopped and displayed),
This may be done.

This configuration can prevent a decline in interest in the game when a special display result is displayed in a special state.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
When the effect execution means is in the normal state, it is capable of executing a special effect suggesting that the special display result will be displayed as the variable display result (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 judges No in step 059AKS102, it is capable of executing the processing of step 059AKS104), and when the effect execution means is in the special state, it does not execute the special effect (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 judges Yes in step 059AKS102, it does not execute the processing of step 059AKS104),
This may be done.

This configuration can prevent a decline in interest in the game when a special display result is displayed in a special state.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above,
When the special display result is displayed as the variable display result, the time from when the variable display result is displayed until when it is determined to be fixed differs between when the normal state is in effect and when the special state is in effect (for example, when the normal state is in effect, a decorative pattern stop command with the determined time shown in FIG. 18-15(B) is transmitted in the processing of step 059AKS043, whereas when it is determined to be Yes in step 059AKS041, a decorative pattern stop command with a determined time of 0.5 seconds is transmitted, etc.).
This may be done.

This configuration can prevent a decline in interest in the game when a special display result is displayed in a special state.

(Explanation of Means Related to Characteristic Part 060AK)
The feature portion 059AK includes the following feature portion 060AK.
(1) The gaming machine according to the characteristic part 060AK is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player when a specific display result is displayed as a variable display result,
A state control means (e.g., the CPU 103 that executes the process of step 059AKS025) that can control to a special state where variable display is more easily executed than in a normal state;
A performance execution means (such as a performance control CPU 120 that executes the process of step S172) capable of executing a performance corresponding to the variable display,
The state control means includes:
In the normal state, when a special display result different from the specific display result (for example, a special display result of "miss (time reduction)") is displayed as the variable display result, the normal state is controlled to the special state based on the special display result (for example, executing the processing of step 059AKS025, etc.),
When the special display result is displayed as the variable display result in the special state, control based on the special display result is not performed (for example, when the determination is Yes in step 059AKS006, the processing of step 059AKS006A is not executed, etc.),
As the variable display, a first identification information and a second identification information are variable displayed, and a performance identification information is variable displayed in response to the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information, and the special display result is displayed more frequently in the variable display result of the second identification information than in the variable display result of the first identification information (for example, between the first special chart display result determination table and the second special chart display result determination table, determination data is assigned such that the special chart display result is more likely to be determined as a "miss (time-saving)" and to be controlled to the time-saving state from the next variable display),
The performance execution means includes:
A different effect can be executed depending on whether or not the information about the variable display stored at the time of the end of the special state includes information that the variable display result is the special display result (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the process of step 059AKS108, etc.),
During control in the special state, a notification is made to launch the gaming medium to a specific path in the gaming area (for example, by executing the processing of step 059AKS090), and when the information regarding the variable display of the second identification information stored at the end of the special state includes information whose variable display result is the special display result and when the information regarding the variable display of the second identification information stored at the end of the special state does not include information whose variable display result is the special display result, a notification is not made to launch the gaming medium to a normal path different from the specific path until the variable display corresponding to the information regarding the variable display of the second identification information stored at the end of the special state is completed (for example, when a right-hit instruction display is possible by the processing of step 059AKS090, a left-hit instruction display is not performed until a left-hit instruction command transmitted in step 059AKS074 is received, i.e., until all the variable displays corresponding to the reservation of the second special chart stored at the end of the time-saving state are completed).
It is characterized by:

This configuration allows control according to the game state when the special display result is displayed, improving game enjoyment.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The performance execution means includes:
In a normal state different from the advantageous state and the special state, a notification is made that the game medium should be launched along the normal path (for example, the performance control CPU 120 that executes the process of step 059AKS088, etc.),
When the special state ends, a notification is given in the variable display of the first identification information that is executed first after the variable display corresponding to the information related to the variable display of the second identification information stored therein has ended, to notify the player that the gaming medium should be released along the normal path (e.g., in the variable display executed after the left hit instruction command is received, i.e., after the variable display corresponding to the remaining reserve has ended, a left hit instruction display is displayed in step 059AKS088).
This may be done.

This configuration allows for optimal firing notification and allows the game to proceed smoothly.

(3) The gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above,
The presentation execution means displays different notification modes for informing the player that the game medium should be launched along the specific path during control of the special state, depending on whether the special display result is displayed as a result of the variable display of the first identification information in a normal state different from the advantageous state and the special state, or whether the special display result is displayed as a result of the variable display of the second identification information stored at the end of the special state (for example, by displaying a right-hit instruction in a manner corresponding to the command received in step 059AKS090).
This may be done.

This configuration can prevent players from feeling annoyed and losing interest in the game.

(4) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above,
The effect execution means executes a common effect and then executes a different effect in the variable display corresponding to the information on the variable display of the second identification information stored at the end of the special state, in a case where the information on the variable display of the second identification information stored at the end of the special state includes information whose variable display result is the special display result and in a case where the information does not include information whose variable display result is the special display result (for example, the return effect includes a return effect for a successful return pattern and a return effect for a failed return pattern, both of which execute a common effect (for example, an effect aimed at clearing a specified mission), and as a result, the combination of decorative patterns displayed in a stopped state differs depending on whether the specified mission is cleared or not).
This may be done.

This configuration makes it possible to attract the player's attention after the common performance is executed.

(5) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above,
The performance execution means performs different performances when controlled in the special state between a case where the special display result is displayed as a variable display result of the first identification information in a normal state different from the advantageous state and the special state, and a case where the special display result is displayed as a variable display result corresponding to information on the variable display of the second identification information stored at the end of the special state (for example, the pattern of the time-saving promotion performance performed according to the time-saving type is different as shown in FIG. 18-28 ).
This may be done.

With this configuration, different patterns of presentation can be executed depending on the situation, which can increase the interest in the game.

(6) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above,
The display time of the special display result is common when the special display result is displayed as a variable display result of the first identification information in a normal state different from the advantageous state and the special state, and when the special display result is displayed as a variable display result corresponding to the information related to the variable display of the second identification information stored at the end of the special state (for example, the determination time is common when the variable display result corresponding to the remaining reserve is “miss (time reduction)” (time reduction type of time reduction C or D) and when the variable display result of the first special chart during the normal state is “miss (time reduction)” (time reduction type of time reduction A or B)).
This may be done.

This configuration makes it possible to prevent the amount of control data from increasing.

(7) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above,
The performance execution means includes:
During the execution of the variable display corresponding to the information on the variable display of the second identification information stored at the time of the end of the special state, no notification is made that the game medium should be released along the specific path (for example, by executing the process of step 059AKS136),
In the first variable display executed after the special display result is displayed, a notification is made that the game medium should be shot along the specific path (for example, by executing the process of step 059AKS090).
This may be done.

This configuration allows for optimal firing notification and allows the game to proceed smoothly.

(8) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7) above,
A first signal output means (e.g., a CPU 103 that outputs a big win signal 1) capable of outputting a first signal in response to being controlled to the advantageous state;
A second signal output means (e.g., a CPU 103 that outputs a big win signal 2) capable of outputting a second signal in response to being controlled to the advantageous state or the special state;
A third signal output means capable of outputting a third signal in response to being controlled to the special state (e.g., a CPU 103 outputting a big win signal 3, etc.);
A fourth signal output means (such as the CPU 103 that outputs a symbol determination signal) capable of outputting a fourth signal in response to the end of the variable display,
When the special display result is displayed as a variable display result, the fourth signal is output by the fourth signal output means at the end of the variable display, and the third signal is output by the third signal output means (for example, when a time-saving state is entered by stopping a time-saving pattern, as shown in FIG. 18-37(B), a pattern determination signal indicating the stop of the time-saving pattern is output, and a jackpot signal is output at the timing when the output of the pattern determination signal is stopped, etc.).
This may be done.

With this configuration, the external device can conveniently identify the time-saving state and consecutive win state.

(9) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (8) above,
A first signal output means (e.g., a CPU 103 that outputs a big win signal 1) capable of outputting a first signal in response to being controlled to the advantageous state;
A second signal output means (e.g., a CPU 103 that outputs a big win signal 2) capable of outputting a second signal in response to being controlled to the advantageous state or the special state;
and a third signal output means (e.g., a CPU 103 that outputs a big win signal 3) capable of outputting a third signal in response to being controlled to the special state,
The third signal output means continues to output the third signal until the variable display corresponding to the information on the variable display of the second identification information stored at the end of the special state ends (for example, even if the time-saving state ends, the output of the big win signal 3 is not stopped until the variable display corresponding to the remaining reservation ends),
This may be done.

With this configuration, the external device can conveniently identify the time-saving state and consecutive win state.

(10) The gaming machine according to (8) or (9) above,
The second signal and the third signal are stopped from being output at the same time (for example, at the timing when the output of the symbol determination signal corresponding to the end of the time-saving state is stopped, the output of the jackpot signal 2 and the jackpot signal 3 are stopped at the same timing, etc.).
This may be done.

With this configuration, the external device can conveniently identify the time-saving state and consecutive win state.

(Explanation of Means Related to Characteristic Part 061AK)
The feature portion 059AK includes the following feature portion 061AK.
(1) The gaming machine according to the characteristic part 061AK is
A gaming machine (such as a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player when a specific display result is displayed as a variable display result,
A state control means (e.g., the CPU 103 that executes the process of step 059AKS025) that can control to a special state where variable display is more easily executed than in a normal state;
A performance execution means (such as a performance control CPU 120 that executes the process of step S172) capable of executing a performance corresponding to the variable display,
When a special display result (such as a special display result of "miss (time reduction)") different from the specific display result is displayed as the variable display result in the normal state, the state control means controls from the normal state to the special state based on the special display result (for example, executes the processing of step 059AKS025, etc.),
The performance execution means includes:
A plurality of types of common specific effects can be executed when the variable display result is the specific display result and when the variable display result is the special display result (for example, a plurality of types of reach effects can be executed, etc.),
The rate at which the special display result is obtained varies depending on which of the multiple types of specific effects is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 18-12, the rate at which the result is a "miss (time reduction)" varies depending on the type of super reach),
During control in the special state, a notification is made that the gaming medium should be launched along a specific path in the gaming area, and a notification is started in the first variable display executed after the special display result is displayed that the gaming medium should be launched along the specific path (for example, a right-hit instruction display is made in a manner corresponding to the command received in step 059AKS090).
It is characterized by:

This configuration allows control according to the game state when the special display result is displayed, improving game enjoyment.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The effect execution means is capable of executing a plurality of types of common specific effects in cases where the variable display result becomes the specific display result, the special display result, and a predetermined display result different from the specific display result and the special display result (for example, as shown in Figs. 18-11 and 11-12, when a reach effect such as Super Reach B or Super Reach C is executed, a decision value is assigned to result in a plurality of variable display results, such as a jackpot, a miss (time reduction), or a simple miss).
This may be done.

This configuration increases the variety of presentation results and improves the enjoyment of the game.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
As the variable display, variable display of identification information is performed, and variable display of performance identification information is performed corresponding to the variable display of the identification information (for example, variable display of a decorative pattern, etc.),
A determination means for determining the variable display result (e.g., the CPU 103 executing the process of step S110, etc.);
a variable display pattern determination means (e.g., the CPU 103 executing the process of step S111) for determining a variable display pattern of the identification information based on a determination result of the determination means;
a command transmission means (e.g., the CPU 103 that transmits a variable display pattern designation command and a display result designation command in step S268) that transmits a variable display result command indicating the variable display result determined by the determination means and a variable display pattern command indicating the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination means,
The variable display pattern determination means is capable of determining a common variable display pattern in cases where the variable display result determined by the determination means becomes the specific display result, the special display result, and a predetermined display result different from the specific display result and the special display result (for example, it is capable of determining a variable display pattern that performs a super reach B or a super reach C regardless of the variable display result),
The presentation identification information is variably displayed based on the contents of the variable display result command and the variable display pattern command transmitted by the command transmission means (for example, by executing the processes of steps S171 and S172).
When the effect execution means receives a variable display pattern command indicating the common variable display pattern, the effect execution means executes different effects depending on the type of the received variable display result command (for example, even if the result of the determination in step S552 is No, different effects are executed depending on whether the result of the determination in 059AKS101 is Yes or No).
This may be done.

This configuration increases the variety of presentation results and improves gameplay enjoyment.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above,
The effect execution means is capable of executing a special effect suggesting whether or not the special display result will be obtained after executing the specific effect (for example, a time-saving teasing effect can be executed after executing a reach effect of a super reach, etc.),
This may be done.

With this configuration, special effects can be implemented, increasing the interest in the game.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above,
The effect execution means is capable of executing a special effect suggesting whether or not the special display result will be obtained after executing the specific effect, and whether or not the special effect will be executed varies depending on the type of the specific effect (for example, the rate at which a time-saving incentive effect is executed varies depending on the type of reach effect to be executed, etc.),
This may be done.

This configuration can prevent special effects from being executed excessively, and can maintain anticipation of a specific display result.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above,
The effect execution means is capable of executing a special effect that suggests whether or not the special display result will occur after executing the specific effect, and the rate at which the special display result will occur when the special effect is executed varies depending on the type of the specific effect (for example, the rate at which a time-saving hinting effect is executed varies depending on the type of reach effect executed, and the rate at which a time-saving pattern is stopped and displayed as a result of the execution of the time-saving hinting effect also varies).
This may be done.

This configuration can prevent special effects from being executed excessively, and can maintain anticipation of a specific display result.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above,
The performance execution means includes:
It is possible to further execute a predetermined effect (such as an effect that changes the display mode of the active display) different from the specific effect,
Depending on the execution mode of the predetermined performance, the rate at which the special display result is obtained when the specific performance is executed varies (for example, depending on which display mode the active display changes to, the rate at which the time-saving pattern is stopped and displayed varies even in the same type of reach performance of the super reach, etc.).
This may be done.

This configuration can prevent special effects from being executed excessively, and can maintain anticipation of a specific display result.

(8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7) above,
The effect execution means is capable of executing a special effect suggesting whether or not the special display result will be obtained after executing the specific effect, and is capable of executing an effect notifying the specific display result after executing the special effect (for example, in a time-saving teasing effect, in addition to whether or not a time-saving pattern is stopped and displayed, it is notified that the advantage will be greater than the time-saving effect, such as whether or not a jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed).
This may be done.

This configuration helps maintain the expectation of a specific display result.

(9) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (8) above,
As the variable display, variable display of identification information is performed, and variable display of performance identification information is performed corresponding to the variable display of the identification information (for example, variable display of a decorative pattern, etc.),
A determination means for determining the variable display result (e.g., the CPU 103 executing the process of step S110, etc.);
a variable display pattern determination means (e.g., the CPU 103 executing the process of step S111) for determining a variable display pattern of the identification information based on a result of the determination by the determination means;
a command transmission means (e.g., the CPU 103 that transmits a variable display pattern designation command and a display result designation command in step S268) that transmits a variable display result command indicating the variable display result determined by the determination means and a variable display pattern command indicating the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination means,
The variable display pattern determination means is capable of determining a common variable display pattern in cases where the variable display result determined by the determination means becomes the specific display result, the special display result, and a predetermined display result different from the specific display result and the special display result (for example, it is capable of determining a variable display pattern that performs a super reach B or a super reach C regardless of the variable display result),
In the variable display of the identification information, a variable display time of the identification information is set based on the variable display result determined by the determination means and the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination means (for example, the CPU 103 executes the process of step 059AKS013, etc.),
In the variable display of the performance identification information, a variable display time of the performance identification information is specified based on the contents of the variable display result command and the variable display pattern command transmitted by the command transmission means (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes the process of step S561, etc.),
When the types of the received variable display result commands are different, the performance execution means can execute a common performance if the received variable display pattern command is a variable display pattern command that indicates the common variable display pattern (for example, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a reach performance of Super Reach B even when the content indicated by the display result designation command is different).
This may be done.

This configuration allows for optimal performance.

(10) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (9),
There are multiple types of special display results (for example, "Time-saving A" to "Time-saving D"),
The state control means can control the special state to a different period depending on the type of the special display result (for example, can control the time-saving state to a time-saving number of times depending on the time-saving type),
The effect execution means is capable of executing different types of effects in the variable display that becomes the special display result according to the type of the special display result (for example, the execution rate of Super Reach C is higher for the time-saving type "time-saving B" than for the time-saving type "time-saving A", and the pattern of the time-saving teasing effect executed according to the time-saving type is different, etc.).
This may be done.

With this configuration, the number of times the time is reduced varies depending on the performance that is executed, which can attract the player's attention.

(11) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (10),
There are multiple types of special display results (for example, "Time-saving A" to "Time-saving D"),
The state control means can control the special state to a different period depending on the type of the special display result (for example, can control the time-saving state to a time-saving number of times depending on the time-saving type),
A first command indicating the number of times a variable display is executed during control in the special state can be transmitted, and a second command different from the first command can be transmitted after the first command is transmitted (for example, CPU 103 transmitting a display result designation command in step S268 and setting the transmission of a decorative pattern stop command in step S059AKS021, etc.).
The performance execution means determines the performance during the variable display based on the received first command, and specifies the number of times of the variable display to be executed during control in the special state based on the received second command (for example, executes a performance according to the content of the display result designation command, and sets the number of times of time reduction specified by the received pattern determination command in step 059AKS133, etc.).
This may be done.

This configuration allows for optimal performance control.

(12) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (11),
A determination means for determining the variable display result (e.g., the CPU 103 executing the process of step S110, etc.);
a variable display pattern determination means (e.g., the CPU 103 executing the process of step S111) for determining a variable display pattern of the identification information based on a result of the determination by the determination means;
a command transmission means (e.g., the CPU 103 that transmits a variable display pattern designation command and a display result designation command in step S268) that transmits a variable display result command indicating the variable display result determined by the determination means and a variable display pattern command indicating the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination means,
The performance execution means executes a performance based on the contents of the variable display result command and the variable display pattern command transmitted by the command transmission means, and when either one of the variable display result command and the variable display pattern command cannot be normally received, restricts the execution of the performance related to the special state (for example, the performance control CPU 120 that executes the process of step 059AKS090B, etc.).
This may be done.

This configuration allows for optimal presentation while preventing a decline in interest in the game.

(13) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (12) above,
A determination means for determining the variable display result (e.g., the CPU 103 executing the process of step S110, etc.);
a variable display pattern determination means (e.g., the CPU 103 executing the process of step S111) for determining a variable display pattern of the identification information based on a result of the determination by the determination means;
a command transmission means (e.g., the CPU 103 that transmits a variable display pattern designation command and a display result designation command in step S268) that transmits a variable display result command indicating the variable display result determined by the determination means and a variable display pattern command indicating the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination means,
The performance execution means includes:
Executing a performance based on the contents of the variable display result command and the variable display pattern command transmitted by the command transmitting means (for example, executing the process of step S171, etc.);
In the case where the variable display pattern command is normally received but the variable display result is not normally received, if the received variable display pattern command is a specific variable display pattern, a performance related to the special state can be executed (for example, the processing of step 059AKS095 can be executed).
This may be done.

This configuration allows for optimal presentation while preventing a decline in interest in the game.

(14) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (13) above,
There are multiple types of special display results,
The state control means can control the special state to a different period depending on the type of the special display result (for example, can control the time-saving state to a time-saving number of times depending on the time-saving type),
A first command indicating the number of times a variable display is executed during control in the special state can be transmitted, and a second command different from the first command can be transmitted after the first command is transmitted (for example, CPU 103 transmitting a display result designation command in step S268 and setting the transmission of a decorative pattern stop command in step S059AKS021, etc.).
The performance execution means determines a performance during the variable display based on the received first command, notifies the number of variable displays to be executed during control in the special state based on the received second command, and limits the notification of the number of variable displays to be executed during control in the special state if the second command is not normally received (e.g., performance control CPU 120 executing the process of step 059AKS139, etc.).
This may be done.

This configuration allows for optimal presentation while preventing a decline in interest in the game.

(Explanation of Means Related to Characteristic Part 062AK)
Feature portion 059AK includes the following feature portion 062AK.
(1) The gaming machine according to the characteristic part 062AK is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player when a specific display result is displayed as a variable display result,
A game control means (e.g., a CPU 103) for controlling the progress of a game;
A performance execution means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120 that executes a performance based on a performance control command, etc.) capable of executing a performance based on information from the game control means,
The game control means includes:
A determination means for determining whether to make the state advantageous (e.g., the CPU 103 that executes the process of step S110, etc.);
A determination means (e.g., the CPU 103 executing the process of step S213) for determining that the advantageous state will be achieved before the determination of the determination means;
A state control means (e.g., the CPU 103 that executes the process of step 059AKS025) that can control to a special state where variable display is more easily executed than in a normal state;
and an information transmitting means (e.g., a CPU 103 that transmits a performance control command) capable of transmitting to the performance executing means a plurality of types of information including determination result information that can specify that the advantageous state will be controlled when the determination means determines that the advantageous state will be achieved;
When a special display result different from the specific display result is displayed as the variable display result in the normal state, the state control means controls from the normal state to the special state based on the special display result (for example, by executing the processing of step 059AKS025),
The determination means is capable of determining that the special state will be entered before the state control means controls the special state (for example, by executing the process of step 059AKS001),
The information transmission means is capable of transmitting special information that can specify that the special state will be controlled when the determination means determines that the special state will be entered (for example, a display result designation command for "miss (time reduction)" can be transmitted, etc.),
The performance execution means includes:
When the determination result information is received, a pre-reading effect can be executed based on the determination result information (for example, the process of step S161 can be executed),
When the determination result information is received after the special information is received, the execution of the pre-reading performance based on the determination result information is restricted (for example, when the determination is Yes in step S059AKS082, the processing of steps S059AKS084 and S1304 is executed, etc.).
It is characterized by:

This configuration allows control according to the game state when the special display result is displayed, improving game enjoyment.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The performance execution means includes:
When new judgment result information is received after receiving the judgment result information indicating that the game is controlled to the advantageous state, the execution of the pre-reading performance based on the newly received judgment result information is further restricted (for example, when a reserve in which the variable display result is "jackpot" is stored in the currently stored reserve memory, the determination is made as Yes in step 059AKS082, etc.),
During the restriction of the look-ahead performance, the look-ahead performance can be executed in a manner similar to the look-ahead performance that can be executed when the determination result information is received after the special information is received (for example, by executing the processes of steps S059AKS084 and S1304),
This may be done.

This configuration can reduce misalignment of presentation due to state transitions and prevent a decline in interest in the game.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
The performance execution means includes:
When the determination result information is newly received after the determination result information indicating that a suggestive performance suggesting whether or not the game will be controlled to the special state is to be executed is received, the execution of the look-ahead performance based on the newly received determination result information is further restricted (for example, when a hold for executing a time-saving teasing performance is stored in the currently stored hold memory, the determination is made as Yes in step 059AKS082, etc.),
During the restriction of the look-ahead performance, the look-ahead performance can be executed in a manner similar to the look-ahead performance that can be executed when the determination result information is received after the special information is received (for example, by executing the processes of steps S059AKS084 and S1304),
This may be done.

This configuration can prevent a decline in interest in the game when a state transition effect is performed.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above,
The performance execution means does not execute the pre-reading performance in a manner indicating that the degree of advantage controlled to the advantageous state is equal to or greater than a specific degree of advantage during the restriction of the pre-reading performance (for example, does not execute a pending display change performance of "green" or greater as shown in FIG. 18-23(B) ),
This may be done.

This configuration can reduce misalignment of presentation due to state transitions and prevent a decline in interest in the game.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above,
The performance execution means does not execute a specific type of the look-ahead performance during the restriction of the look-ahead performance (for example, as shown in FIG. 18-23(B), when the hold display change performance is restricted, does not execute a hold display change performance of a type that changes to a display mode such as "green" or "red");
This may be done.

This configuration limits the execution of certain types of preview effects, preventing a decline in the player's interest in the game without giving the player unnecessary expectations.

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 063AK)
The following describes the characteristic part 063AK according to this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 19-1, the game area 2 formed on the surface of the game board is provided with a left game area 063AK1 to the left of the top edge of the image display device 5, and a right game area 063AK2 to the right of the top edge of the image display device 5. The left game area 063AK1 and the right game area 063AK2 may be separated, for example, by the end face of the image display device 5 or the nail arrangement PL inside the game area 2. When a game ball (game medium) is launched from a ball launching device and hit into the game area 2, if it is guided to the left game area 063AK1, it will be impossible or difficult to guide it to the right game area 063AK2 by being guided along the nail arrangement PL, for example. Furthermore, if a game ball is launched from the ball launching device and hit into the game area 2, and is guided to the right game area 063AK2, it will be guided along the nail arrangement PL, for example, making it impossible or difficult to guide it to the left game area 063AK1.

The left play area 063AK1 is provided with a general winning port 10 and a winning ball device 6A. Meanwhile, the right play area 063AK2 is provided with a variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric device) and a special variable winning ball device 7 (variable means). The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided below the variable winning ball device 6B.

The general winning opening 10 is kept in a constant open state by a specified ball receiving member so that game balls can always enter. When a game ball enters (enters) the general winning opening 10, a specified number of game balls (for example, 10) are paid out as prize balls.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first start winning port that is always kept in a constant open state where a game ball can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning port, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the first start condition, which is a condition for executing the first special game, can be established. The variable winning ball device 6B forms a second start winning port that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see Figure 2). When a game ball enters the second start winning port, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the second special game can be started.

As shown in FIG. 19-2, the special variable winning ball device 7 is equipped with a large winning opening door 063AK3 that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2) for the large winning opening door (for special electric device), and has a large winning opening 063AK4 that changes between an open state (first state) where it is easy for game balls to win and a closed state (second state) where it is impossible or difficult for game balls to win, by the large winning opening door 063AK3. FIG. 19-2 shows the state in which the large winning opening door 063AK3 has closed the large winning opening 064AK4.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is in the off state, the large winning opening door 063AK3 closes the large winning opening 063AK4, making it impossible or difficult for the game ball to win in the large winning opening 063AK4. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is in the on state, the large winning opening door 063AK3 opens the large winning opening 063AK4, making it easy for the game ball to win in the large winning opening 063AK4. When a game ball wins in the large winning opening 063AK4, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 14 balls) are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large prize opening 063AK4, more prize balls are paid out than when a game ball enters, for example, the first start prize opening, the second start prize opening, or the general prize opening 10.

The special variable winning ball device 7 controls the large winning hole 063AK4 to be open in a predetermined manner when the large winning pattern (specific display result) is derived (stopped) as a fixed special pattern in the special game, the variable display result becomes "large winning", and the large winning game state (advantageous state) is controlled. The open state continues until the timing of the passage of a predetermined period (29 seconds in this embodiment) or the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the large winning hole 063AK4 reaches a predetermined number (9 in this embodiment), whichever comes first. A cycle in which the large winning hole 063AK4 is open in this way is called a round (round game). In the large winning game state, the round can be repeated until the predetermined upper limit number of times (15 times in this embodiment) is reached.

In addition, the large prize opening 063AK4 formed by the special variable prize ball device 7 is controlled to an open state in a predetermined manner when a small prize pattern (special display result) is derived and displayed as a confirmed special pattern in a special game, the display result of the variable display becomes a "small prize", and the small prize game state is controlled. Specifically, in the small prize game state, the large prize opening 063AK4 formed by the special variable prize ball device 7 is repeatedly opened and closed. For example, in the small prize game state, an open state of 0.1 seconds and a closed state of 1.0 seconds are repeatedly performed. The action of repeatedly opening and closing the large prize opening 063AK4 is also called opening and closing the large prize opening. The opening and closing of the large prize opening ends when one of the following conditions is met: the 0.1 second open state is repeated a predetermined maximum number of times (10 times in this embodiment), or game balls enter the large prize opening 063AK4 up to a predetermined maximum number of winning balls (10 in this embodiment).

In the characteristic section 063AK, in the normal state (low probability, low base state), the player is made to perform a game method (hereinafter referred to as "left hit") in which the game ball is shot into the left game area 063AK1, aiming to win in the general winning port 10 or the first start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A, while in the time-saving state (low probability, high base state), the player is made to perform a game method (hereinafter referred to as "right hit") in which the game ball is shot into the right game area 063AK2, aiming to win in the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B.

In addition, the feature section 063AK is configured so that when the game is controlled to a big win game state or a small win game state, the player can aim to win in the big win opening 063AK4 formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 by hitting the ball to the right.

Feature 063AK performs a right-hit promotion effect to encourage the player to hit to the right during periods when the game is controlled to the time-saving state, big win game state, and small win game state, in which right-hitting is advantageous.

A game ball that enters the large prize opening 063AK4 formed in the special variable prize ball device 7 passes through (enters) the large prize opening switch 063AK5, is detected by the large prize opening switch 063AK5, and then falls into the recess 063AK6. The game ball that falls into the recess 063AK6 is guided rearward by a guide piece (not shown) and passes through the passage opening 063AK7. Behind the passage opening 063AK7, there is a distribution section supply path 063AK8 that extends downward to the left, and a discharge path 063AK9 that extends downward to the right.

In the big win game state, all game balls that enter the big win opening 063AK4 are discharged to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7 through the discharge path 063AK9. On the other hand, in the small win game state, only one game ball among the game balls that enter the big win opening 063AK4 flows down through the distribution section supply path 063AK8 to the distribution section 063AK18 described below, and all game balls other than that one game ball are discharged to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7 through the discharge path 063AK9.

Figures 19-3(a) to 19-3(c) show the configuration of the special variable winning ball device 7 with respect to the characteristic part 063AK, as seen from the arrow I-I in Figure 19-2. As shown in Figure 19-3(a), the special variable winning ball device 7 is equipped with a roughly L-shaped rotating piece 063AK10 and a distribution section supply solenoid 063AK12 that moves the plunger 063AK11 left and right by switching between an on state and an off state. The rotating piece 063AK10 has a connecting protrusion 063AK13 connected to the plunger 063AK11, and rotates around the rotating shaft 063AK14 by switching between the on state and the off state of the distribution section supply solenoid 063AK12.

As shown in FIG. 19-3(a), when the sorting section supply solenoid 063AK12 is in the on state, the curved surface 063AK15 of the rotating piece 063AK10 faces forward. Also, the bottom surface of the sorting section supply path 063AK8 is at a lower position (located lower) than the bottom surface of the discharge path 063AK9. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 19-3(a), the game ball A1 that first passes through the passage opening 063AK7 falls into the sorting section supply path 063AK8 and its movement is restricted by the curved surface 063AK15 of the rotating piece 063AK10. As a result, the game ball A1 is held by the rotating piece 063AK10. The game ball A2, which passed through 063AK7 following the game ball A1, is blocked by the game ball A1 and cannot enter the distribution section supply path 063AK8, so changes direction to the right as shown in FIG. 19-3(b). The game ball A2 continues to flow down the discharge path 063AK9. The discharge path 063AK9 is provided with a discharge count switch 063AK16, and the game balls that have passed through the discharge path 063AK9 are detected by the discharge count switch 063AK16. The game balls that have passed through the discharge path 063AK9 are discharged to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7. When the sorting section supply solenoid 063AK12 is controlled from the on state to the off state while the rotating piece 063AK10 is holding the game ball A1, the plunger 063AK11 pops out from the main body of the sorting section supply solenoid 063AK12, as shown in FIG. 19-3(c). This causes the rotating piece 063AK10 to rotate around the pivot 063AK14, flicking the game ball A1 toward the sorting section supply path 063AK8. The flicked game ball A1 flows down the sorting section supply path 063AK8.

As shown in FIG. 19-4(a), the game ball A3 that flows down the distribution section supply path 063AK8 passes through the distribution section passing switch 063AK17, and after being detected by the distribution section passing switch 063AK17, enters the distribution section 063AK18.

The distribution unit 063AK18 is provided in the special variable winning ball device 7, and guides the game balls that flow down through the distribution unit supply path 063AK8, and causes them to pass through either the jackpot area 063AK19 (specific area), the time-saving area 063AK20 (special area), or the loss area 063AK21.

The jackpot area 063AK19, the time-saving area 063AK20, and the loss area 063AK21 are all areas (components) that are configured to allow game balls to pass through, and are provided in the special variable winning ball device 7. The jackpot area 063AK19, the time-saving area 063AK20, and the loss area 063AK21 are provided below the distribution section 063AK18.

The game ball that enters the jackpot area 063AK19 passes through the jackpot area passage switch 063AK22, is detected by the jackpot area passage switch 063AK22, and is then discharged to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7 through the jackpot area discharge path (not shown). The game ball that is discharged to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7 through the jackpot area discharge path is detected by the jackpot area discharge count switch (not shown).

In the special game, a small win symbol is derived and displayed, and the game is controlled to a small win game state. When the large win opening 063AK4 is controlled to an open state, the game ball that entered the large win opening 063AK4 passes through the large win area 063AK19. Based on this, the game is controlled to a large win game state after the small win game state ends.

The game ball that enters the time-saving area 063AK20 passes through the time-saving area passage switch 063AK23, is detected by the time-saving area passage switch 063AK23, and is then discharged through a time-saving area discharge path (not shown) to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7. The game ball that is discharged through the time-saving area discharge path to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7 is detected by a time-saving area discharge count switch (not shown).

In the normal state, the small winning symbol is derived and displayed in the special game, and the game ball that entered the large winning port 063AK4 when the large winning port 063AK4 is controlled to be in the open state passes through the time-saving area 063AK20. Based on this, a time-saving transition control is performed to control the game to a time-saving state (special state) in which variable display is easier to execute than in the normal state for a predetermined period after the end of the small winning game state. On the other hand, in the time-saving state, the small winning symbol is derived and displayed in the special game, and the game ball that entered the large winning port 063AK4 when the large winning port 063AK4 is controlled to be in the open state passes through the time-saving area 063AK20. In this case, the time-saving transition control is not performed based on the passage of the game ball. In other words, if the game is already in the time-saving state, even if a game ball that entered the large prize opening 063AK4 during a small win game state passes through the time-saving area 063AK20, the game is configured so that the time-saving transition control is not performed to extend the period during which the game is in the time-saving state.

In this embodiment, in the normal state, when a small winning symbol is derived and displayed in the special game and the small winning game state is controlled and the large winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to an open state, if the game ball that entered the large winning opening 063AK4 passes through the time-saving area 063AK20, the large winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to a closed state and the small winning game state ends, and when the next variable display is started, time-saving transition control based on the passage is performed and the game is controlled from the normal state to the time-saving state. In other words, when the large winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to an open state, if the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20, it is configured not to be controlled to the time-saving state until the large winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to a closed state. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent a mismatch between the control of the game state and the presentation after the end of the small win game state due to another game ball passing through the big win area 063AK19 or the miss area 063AK21 after one game ball has passed through the time-saving area 063AK20, which can confuse the player and reduce their interest in the game. In other words, with this configuration, it is possible to perform appropriate control according to the state.

The game ball that enters the losing area 063AK21 passes through the losing area passage switch 063AK24, is detected by the losing area passage switch 063AK24, and is then discharged to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7 through the losing area discharge path (not shown). The game ball that is discharged to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7 through the losing area discharge path is detected by the losing area discharge count switch (not shown).

In the special game, when the small win symbol is derived and displayed and the game is controlled to a small win game state, and the large win opening 063AK4 is controlled to be open, if the game ball that entered the large win opening 063AK4 passes through the loss area 063AK21, after the small win game state ends, no control is performed to change the game state based on the passage.

The jackpot area light-emitting section 063AK25 is provided at the top and bottom of the jackpot area 063AK19. The time-saving area light-emitting section 063AK26 is provided at the top and bottom of the time-saving area 063AK20. The loss area light-emitting section 063AK27 is provided at the top and bottom of the loss area 063AK21. The jackpot area light-emitting section 063AK25, the time-saving area light-emitting section 063AK26, and the loss area light-emitting section 063AK27 are configured to be visible to the player, and are equipped with light-emitting elements such as LEDs (Light Emitting Diodes) and are configured to be able to emit light. Details will be described later, but in the feature section 063AK, a performance is performed in which the jackpot area light-emitting section 063AK25, the time-saving area light-emitting section 063AK26, and the loss area light-emitting section 063AK27 are illuminated in a predetermined manner. FIG. 19-4(a) shows a state in which the jackpot area light-emitting section 063AK25, the time-saving area light-emitting section 063AK26, and the loss area light-emitting section 063AK27 are all turned off.

The distribution unit 063AK18 is equipped with a distribution member 063AK28. The distribution member 063AK28 is formed with a left inclined surface 063AK29 facing diagonally upward to the right, and a right inclined surface 063AK30 facing diagonally upward to the left. A game ball that enters the distribution unit 063AK18 is guided by the distribution member 063AK28 and passes through either the jackpot region 063AK19, the time-saving region 063AK20, or the loss region 063AK21.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 19-4(b), the distribution unit 063AK18 is provided with a jackpot area entrance 063AK31, a time-saving area entrance 063AK32, and a miss area entrance 063AK33. The jackpot area entrance 063AK31, the time-saving area entrance 063AK32, and the miss area entrance 063AK33 are all configured to allow game balls to pass through, and are arranged in the left-right direction. The jackpot area entrance 063AK31 is connected to the jackpot area 063AK19, and a game ball that passes through the jackpot area entrance 063AK31 passes through the jackpot area 063AK19. The time-saving area entrance 063AK32 is connected to the time-saving area 063AK20, and a game ball that passes through the time-saving area entrance 063AK32 passes through the time-saving area 063AK20. The loss area entrance 063AK33 is connected to the loss area 063AK21, and a game ball that passes through the loss area entrance 063AK33 passes through the loss area 063AK21.

The distribution member 063AK28 is disposed above the jackpot area entrance 063AK31, the time-saving area entrance 063AK32, and the loss area entrance 063AK33. The distribution member 063AK28 is formed with a passage opening 063AK34 through which the game balls can pass. In the following, for ease of understanding, the P coordinate axis shown in FIG. 19-4(b) is set. The P coordinate axis is set parallel to the left-right direction. The distribution member 063AK28 is driven by a distribution member motor (not shown), and moves back and forth along the left-right direction between position P6 as the left end position shown in FIG. 19-4(b) and position P3 as the right end position. FIG. 19-4(b) shows a state in which the distribution member 063AK28 is located at position P0 as the center position (origin position).

When the distribution member 063AK28 is located at position P0 shown in Fig. 19-4(b), as shown in Fig. 19-5(a), the game ball A4 that enters the distribution unit 063AK18 passes through the passage opening 063AK34 formed in the distribution member 063AK28 and passes through the time-saving area entrance 063AK32. The game ball A4 that passes through the time-saving area entrance 063AK32 passes through the time-saving area 063AK20. When the distribution member 063AK28 is located at position P3 shown in Fig. 19-4(b), as shown in Fig. 19-5(b), the game ball A5 that enters the distribution unit 063AK18 hits the left inclined surface 063AK29 formed on the distribution member 063AK28, moves left along the inclination direction, and passes through the jackpot area entrance 063AK31 formed on the left side of the distribution unit 063AK18. The game ball A5 that passes through the jackpot area entrance 063AK31 passes through the jackpot area 063AK19. When the sorting member 063AK28 is located at position P6 shown in FIG. 19-4(b), as shown in FIG. 19-5(c), the game ball A6 that enters the sorting section 063AK18 hits the right-side inclined surface 063AK30 formed on the sorting member 063AK28, moves to the right along the inclination direction, and passes through the loss area entrance 063AK33 formed on the right side of the sorting section 063AK18. The game ball A6 that passes through the loss area entrance 063AK33 passes through the loss area 063AK21.

The distribution member 063AK28 is configured to be capable of executing operations according to the distribution member operation pattern shown in FIG. 19-6. FIG. 19-6 shows the change in the position of the distribution member 063AK28 over time when the distribution member 063AK28 is operating according to the distribution member operation pattern, and the change in the area through which the game balls pass over time. When the distribution member 063AK28 is not operating according to the distribution member operation pattern, it is stopped at position P0 shown in FIG. 19-4 (b).

As shown in FIG. 19-6, when the distributing member 063AK28 starts to operate according to the distributing member operation pattern, it stops at position P0 for a predetermined center waiting time, then moves from position P0 to the right at a constant speed, passes position P1 to the right of position P0 shown in FIG. 19-4(b), passes position P2 to the right of position P1 shown in FIG. 19-4(b), and reaches position P3 shown in FIG. 19-4(b). The time required for the distributing member 063AK28 to reach position P3 from position P0 may be predetermined as the center-right movement time. Having reached position P3, the distributing member 063AK28 stops at position P3 for a predetermined right-end waiting time. Next, the distributing member 063AK28 moves from position P3 to the left at a constant speed, passes position P2, passes position P1, and reaches position P0. The time required for the distribution member 063AK28 to reach position P0 from position P3 may be predetermined as a right-center movement time. The distribution member 063AK28 that has reached position P0 stops at position P0 for a center waiting time. Next, the distribution member 063AK28 moves leftward from position P0 at a constant speed, passes position P4 to the left of position P0 shown in FIG. 19-4(b), passes position P5 to the left of position P4 shown in FIG. 19-4(b), and reaches position P6 shown in FIG. 19-4(b). The time required for the distribution member 063AK28 to reach position P6 from position P0 may be predetermined as a center-left movement time. The distribution member 063AK28 that has reached position P6 stops at position P6 for a predetermined left-end waiting time. The distribution member 063AK28 then moves from position P6 to the right at a constant speed, passing through position P5, then through position P4, and reaches position P0. The time required for the distribution member 063AK28 to reach the central position P0 from position P6 may be predetermined as the left-center movement time. Once the distribution member 063AK28 has reached position P0, it repeats the above-described operation again. In this way, the distribution member 063AK28 moves back and forth in the left-right direction between positions P3 and P6 by operating according to the distribution member operation pattern.

When the distribution member 063AK28 is operating according to the distribution member operation pattern, as shown in FIG. 19-6, the game ball that has entered the distribution unit 063AK18 passes through either the jackpot region 063AK19, the time-saving region 063AK20, or the miss region 063AK21, depending on the change in the position of the distribution member 063AK28. Specifically, the period during which the distribution member 063AK28 is located between positions P2 and P3 is the jackpot region passing period during which the game ball that has entered the distribution unit 063AK18 passes through the jackpot region 063AK19 by being guided by the distribution member 063AK28. The period when the distribution member 063AK28 is located between positions P0 and P1 and the period when the distribution member 063AK28 is located between positions P0 and P4 are time-saving region passing periods during which the game balls that have entered the distribution unit 063AK18 are guided by the distribution member 063AK28 and pass through the time-saving region 063AK20. The period when the distribution member 063AK28 is located between positions P5 and P6 is a loss region passing period during which the game balls that have entered the distribution unit 063AK18 are guided by the distribution member 063AK28 and pass through the loss region 063AK21. The period when the distribution member 063AK28 is located between positions P1 and P2, and the period when the distribution member 063AK28 is located between positions P4 and P5 are uncertain passing area periods during which it is not certain whether the game ball that has entered the distribution unit 063AK18 will enter the jackpot area 063AK19, the time-saving area 063AK20, or the loss area 063AK21 as a result of being guided by the distribution member 063AK28.

In this embodiment, when a small win symbol is derived and displayed in the special game and the game is controlled to a small win game state, a small win start effect (small win fanfare effect) that notifies the player that control to the small win game state has begun is executable, and the distribution member 063AK28 is configured to start operating according to the distribution member operation pattern in response to the start of the small win start effect. As shown in FIG. 19-6, the small win start effect begins in response to the passage of a predetermined special win confirmation display time after the small win symbol is derived and displayed in the special game, and ends in response to the passage of the small win start effect time.

In this embodiment, in the small win game state, as shown in FIG. 19-6, the opening and closing of the large prize opening begins in response to the end of the small win start performance. As described above, the opening and closing of the large prize opening ends when one of the following conditions is met: the 0.1 second open state is repeated up to the specified upper limit of opening times, or game balls enter the large prize opening 063AK4 up to the specified upper limit of winning balls.

In this embodiment, in the small win game state, as shown in FIG. 19-6, when the small win start performance ends and the opening and closing of the large prize opening begins, the sorting section supply solenoid 063AK12 is controlled to the ON state, and the rotating piece 063AK10 is in a state where it can hold the game ball that has entered the sorting section supply path 063AK8. After being controlled to the ON state, the sorting section supply solenoid 063AK12 is controlled to the OFF state in response to the passage of a predetermined game ball holding time having elapsed. As a result, the rotating piece 063AK10 flicks the game ball it has been holding toward the sorting section supply path 063AK8, and the flicked game ball flows down the sorting section supply path 063AK8 and enters the sorting section 063AK18. With this configuration, in this embodiment, only one of the game balls that entered the large winning port 063AK4 in the small winning game state flows down to the distribution section 063AK18 through the distribution section supply path 063AK8, and the other game balls are discharged to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7 through the discharge path 063AK9. On the other hand, in this embodiment, in the big winning game state, the distribution section supply solenoid 063AK12 is not controlled to the on state. With this configuration, in this embodiment, all game balls that entered the large winning port 063AK4 in the big winning game state are discharged to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7 through the discharge path 063AK9. In the example shown in FIG. 19-6, at time t0, when the game ball holding time has elapsed since the distribution section supply solenoid 063AK12 was controlled to the on state, the distribution section supply solenoid 063AK12 is controlled to the off state, and the game ball that was deflected by the rotating piece 063AK10 enters the distribution section 063AK18. As shown in FIG. 19-6, the time t0 when the game ball entered the distribution section 063AK18 is included in the jackpot area passing period. Therefore, the game ball that entered the distribution section 063AK18 at time t0 passes through the jackpot area 063AK19 by being guided by the distribution member 063AK28.

The game ball holding time is set to be longer than the time required to open and close the large prize opening a predetermined maximum number of times during a small win game state. In other words, the game ball enters the distribution unit 063AK18 after the large prize opening has been opened and closed.

As shown in FIG. 19-6, the timing at which the gaming ball enters the distribution unit 063AK18 (time t0 in the example shown in FIG. 19-6) is specified by the special chart confirmation display time, the small win start presentation time, and the gaming ball holding time.

In this embodiment, when the game is controlled to a small win game state, the special chart confirmation display time and game ball holding time are set to the same time regardless of the type of small win, while the small win start performance time is set to one of several types of time depending on the type of small win. With this configuration, the timing at which the game ball enters the distribution unit 063AK18 is configured to differ depending on the type of small win.

Specifically, in this embodiment, when the game is controlled to a small win game state, the small win start presentation time is set to one of the predetermined first to third specific times shown in FIG. 19-7 depending on the type of small win. As shown in FIG. 19-7, the second specific time (e.g., 12 seconds) is longer than the first specific time (e.g., 11 seconds), and the third specific time (e.g., 13 seconds) is longer than the second specific time.

As shown in FIG. 19-7, when the small win start presentation time is set to the first specific time, the small win start presentation starts in response to the lapse of the special chart fixed display time after the small win pattern is derived and displayed in the special chart game, and then the distribution section supply solenoid 063AK12 is controlled to the ON state at the timing when the small win start presentation ends in response to the lapse of the first specific time. After that, at time t1 when the game ball holding time has elapsed since the distribution section supply solenoid 063AK12 was controlled to the ON state, the distribution section supply solenoid 063AK12 is controlled to the OFF state, and the game ball bounced by the rotating piece 063AK10 enters the distribution section 063AK18. As shown in FIG. 19-7, time t1 is included in the loss area passing period, so the game ball that entered the distribution unit 063AK18 at time t1 passes through the loss area 063AK21 by being guided by the distribution member 063AK28. In other words, if the small win start performance time is set to the first specific time, the game ball that enters the large winning hole 063AK4 in the small win game state passes through the loss area 063AK21.

When the small win start performance time is set to the second specific time, the small win start performance starts in response to the lapse of the special chart confirmation display time after the small win pattern is derived and displayed in the special chart game, and then the distribution section supply solenoid 063AK12 is controlled to the ON state at the timing when the small win start performance ends in response to the lapse of the second specific time. After that, at time t2 when the game ball holding time has elapsed since the distribution section supply solenoid 063AK12 was controlled to the ON state, the distribution section supply solenoid 063AK12 is controlled to the OFF state, and the game ball that has been deflected by the rotating piece 063AK10 enters the distribution section 063AK18. As shown in FIG. 19-7, since time t2 is included in the time-saving area passing period, the game ball that entered the distribution section 063AK18 at time t2 passes through the time-saving area 063AK20 by being guided by the distribution member 063AK28. In other words, if the small win start performance time is set to the second specific time, the game ball that enters the large winning hole 063AK4 during the small win game state passes through the time-saving area 063AK20.

When the small win start performance time is set to the third specific time, the small win start performance starts in response to the elapse of the special chart confirmation display time after the small win pattern is derived and displayed in the special chart game, and then the distribution section supply solenoid 063AK12 is controlled to the ON state at the timing when the small win start performance ends in response to the elapse of the third specific time. After that, at time t3 when the game ball holding time has elapsed since the distribution section supply solenoid 063AK12 was controlled to the ON state, the distribution section supply solenoid 063AK12 is controlled to the OFF state, and the game ball that has been deflected by the rotating piece 063AK10 enters the distribution section 063AK18. As shown in FIG. 19-7, since time t3 is included in the jackpot area passing period, the game ball that entered the distribution section 063AK18 at time t3 passes through the jackpot area 063AK19 by being guided by the distribution member 063AK28. In other words, if the small win start performance time is set to the third specific time, a game ball that enters the big win hole 063AK4 during a small win game state passes through the big win area 063AK19.

As described above, depending on whether the small win start performance time is set to the first specific time to the third specific time, the game ball that enters the large winning hole 063AK4 in the small win game state passes through the big win area 063AK19, the time-saving area 063AK20, or the miss area 063AK21. In the feature section 063AK, by setting the small win start performance time to one of the first specific time to the third specific time depending on the type of small win, the game ball that enters the large winning hole 063AK4 in the small win game state passes through the area that corresponds to the type of small win among the big win area 063AK19, the time-saving area 063AK20, and the miss area 063AK21.

In feature section 063AK, when a variable display (hereinafter referred to as "small win variation") is executed in which a small win pattern is derived and displayed in a special chart game and the display result of the variable display becomes "small win", as a performance corresponding to the small win variation, as shown in FIG. 19-8(a), in addition to the right hit promotion performance and small win start performance described above, a time-saving suggestion performance, a passing teasing performance, and a passing notification performance can be executed.

In this embodiment, as a right-hit promotion effect, a right-hit promotion image showing an arrow pointing to the right is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. As described above, the right-hit promotion effect is executed during the period controlled to the time-saving state and the big win game state, and is also executed during the period controlled to the small win game state, as shown in FIG. 19-8(a).

In addition, in this embodiment, as a small win start effect, an effect is executed in which a right arrow image and a small win start image are displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. The right arrow image has the shape of an arrow pointing to the right, and is an effect image showing the message "Aim right!". The small win start image shows the shape of the special variable winning ball device 7 and shows the message "Put the ball here!", and is an effect image that encourages the player to win the game ball into the special variable winning ball device 7. As described above, the small win start effect is started in response to the small win pattern being derived and displayed in the special chart game and control to the small win game state being started, and then ends in response to the small win start effect time having elapsed.

The time-saving suggestion effect is an effect that suggests that the game will be controlled to a time-saving state, and is configured to be executable during the execution of a small win variation. As described above, in the normal state, the game ball that entered the large winning port 063AK4 in the small win game state passes through the time-saving area 063AK20, and the game is controlled to a time-saving state after the end of the small win game state. In response to this, in the feature part 063AK, in the normal state, when a small win variation is executed, a time-saving suggestion effect is configured to be executable during the execution of the small win variation as an effect that suggests that a small win pattern will be derived and displayed as a confirmed special pattern in the special game. With this configuration, in the normal state, a variety of effects can be executed in the variable display when a small win pattern is derived and displayed as a confirmed special pattern in the special game, and interest in the game can be increased.

As shown in FIG. 19-8(a), when a normal reach effect, which is a reach effect of a normal reach, a super reach effect, which is a reach effect of a super reach, and a time-saving suggestion effect are executed in a small win fluctuation, the time-saving suggestion effect starts after a reach is established, a normal reach effect is executed, and a super reach effect is executed, and then ends when a small win pattern is derived and displayed in the special chart game and the small win fluctuation ends. Details of the time-saving suggestion effect are explained below with reference to FIG. 19-9(a) and FIG. 19-9(b).

19-9(a), when the time-saving suggestion effect starts, a predetermined losing symbol (in this embodiment, "767") is temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner different from that of the derived display in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R provided on the image display device 5. Next, a re-variable display of the decorative symbol is executed in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C, and then a time-saving suggestion symbol suggesting that the time will be controlled to the time-saving state shown in FIG. 19-9(b) is temporarily stopped and displayed in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. The time-saving suggestion symbol is a combination of decorative symbols in which a decorative symbol showing the number "7" is displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, and a decorative symbol showing the message "Chance" is displayed in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C. Returning to FIG. 19-9(a), after the time-saving suggestion symbol is temporarily displayed, the decorative symbol is re-variably displayed in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R, and the time-saving suggestion performance ends when the small win symbol is derived and displayed in the special game and the small win variation ends.

Returning to FIG. 19-8(a), the passing teasing effect is an effect suggesting that the game ball that entered the large prize opening 063AK4 in the small prize game state will pass through either the large prize area 063AK19, the time-saving area 063AK20, or the miss area 063AK21 (an effect that suggests passing through the large prize area 063AK19, the time-saving area 063AK20, and the miss area 063AK21). The passing teasing effect is started in response to the end of the small prize start effect and the start of the opening and closing of the large prize opening, and ends in response to the game ball that entered the large prize opening 063AK4 in the small prize game state passing through either the large prize area 063AK19, the time-saving area 063AK20, or the miss area 063AK21.

The passing notification effect is an effect that notifies the player whether a game ball that entered the large winning opening 063AK4 in a small winning game state has passed through the big winning area 063AK19, the time-saving area 063AK20, or the miss area 063AK21. In this embodiment, the passing notification effect is executed as a small winning end effect (small winning ending effect) that notifies the player that control to the small winning game state is ending. The passing notification effect is started in response to a game ball that entered the large winning opening 063AK4 in a small winning game state passing through the big winning area 063AK19, the time-saving area 063AK20, or the miss area 063AK21, and then ends in response to the passage of a predetermined passing notification effect time.

In this embodiment, the passing notification display time is set to any one of the predetermined first to third special times depending on whether the game ball that entered the big winning port 063AK4 in the small winning game state passed through the big winning area 063AK19, the time-saving area 063AK20, or the miss area 063AK21. Specifically, when the game ball passes through the miss area 063AK21, the passing notification display time is set to the first special time (for example, 5 seconds). Also, in the time-saving state, when the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20, the passing notification display time is set to the first special time in the same manner as when the game ball passes through the miss area 063AK21, in response to the fact that the time-saving transition control is not performed based on the passing. In the normal state, when the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20, the passing notification display time is set to the second special time (for example, 20 seconds). When the game ball passes through the big win area 063AK19, the passing notification performance time is set to the third special time (e.g., 10 seconds). With this configuration, it is possible to perform appropriate control depending on the situation.

As shown in FIG. 19-8(b), in feature section 063AK, the presence or absence of the time-saving suggestion effect, the passing teasing effect, and the passing notification effect, or the performance mode, are configured to differ depending on whether a small win fluctuation is executed in the normal state or when a small win fluctuation is executed in the time-saving state.

Specifically, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 19-8(b), when a small hit variation is executed in the normal state, the time-saving suggestion effect can be executed during the small hit variation, whereas when a small hit variation is executed in the time-saving state, the time-saving suggestion effect is not executed during the small hit variation. In other words, in the feature part 063AK, it is configured to be possible to execute different effects during the small hit variation when a small hit variation is executed in the normal state and a small hit pattern is derived and displayed, and when a small hit variation is executed in the time-saving state and a small hit pattern is derived and displayed.

In the characteristic section 063AK, when in the normal state, a time-saving indication effect can be executed when a small win variation is executed, so that the player can have a sense of anticipation that the time-saving transition control will be performed based on the game ball passing through the time-saving area 063AK20 and the game will be controlled to the time-saving state, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

On the other hand, in the feature part 063AK, when the time-saving state is reached, the time-saving indication effect is not executed when a small win variation is executed. This prevents the player from having expectations that the time-saving state will be entered based on the game ball passing through the time-saving area 063AK20, even though time-saving transition control based on the game ball's passage through the time-saving area 063AK20 is not executed, and thus prevents a decline in interest in the game.

In this way, in feature unit 063AK, when a small win variation is executed in the normal state and a small win pattern is derived and displayed, and when a small win variation is executed in the time-saving state and a small win pattern is derived and displayed, different effects can be executed during the execution of the small win variation, so that suitable effects can be executed depending on the state.

In the characteristic part 063AK, as shown in FIG. 19-8(b), when a small win variation is executed in the normal state, when the small win variation is ended and the game is controlled to the small win game state and the large prize opening is performed, a normal time passing prompting effect (special effect) is executed as a passing prompting effect, which is an effect that suggests passing through the big win area 063AK19, the time-saving area 063AK20, and the miss area 063AK21. On the other hand, when a small win variation is executed in the time-saving state, when the small win variation is ended and the game is controlled to the small win game state and the large prize opening is performed, a time-saving time passing prompting effect (special effect) is executed as a passing prompting effect, which is an effect that suggests passing through the big win area 063AK19 and the miss area 063AK21, without suggesting passing through the time-saving area 063AK29.

In this embodiment, the normal time passing teasing effect is an effect that suggests that the game ball will pass through the jackpot area 063AK19, the time-saving area 063AK20, and the loss area 063AK21. In contrast, in this embodiment, the time-saving time passing teasing effect is an effect that suggests that the game ball will pass through the jackpot area 063AK19 and the loss area 063AK21, without suggesting that the game ball will pass through the time-saving area 063AK20.

In the feature section 063AK, when the small win game state is entered after the small win fluctuation ends in the normal state and the large prize opening 063AK4 is controlled to an open state, a normal time passing incentive performance is executed, so that the player feels a sense of anticipation for the time-saving state being entered based on the game ball passing through the time-saving area 063AK20, and interest in the game can be increased.

On the other hand, in the characteristic part 063AK, when the game is controlled to a small win game state after the small win fluctuation ends in the time-saving state and the large prize opening 063AK4 is controlled to an open state, a time-saving time passage stimulation effect is executed, thereby preventing the player from having expectations that the game will be controlled to the time-saving state based on the game ball passing through the time-saving area 063AK20, even though no control based on the game ball's passage is performed when the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20, and thus preventing a decline in interest in the game.

In this way, in the characteristic section 063AK, when the small win fluctuation is ended in the normal state and the small win game state is controlled and the large prize opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state, the normal time passing prompting effect is executed, while when the small win fluctuation is ended in the time-saving state and the small win game state is controlled and the large prize opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state, the time-saving time passing prompting effect is executed, so that an appropriate effect can be performed according to the state.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 19-10(a), the normal time passing prompting image AK1 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, the jackpot area light emitting unit 063AK25, the time saving area light emitting unit 063AK26 and the loss area light emitting unit 063AK27 provided on the special variable winning ball device 7 are illuminated, and a normal time passing prompting sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, indicating the message "Is it a jackpot? Is it a time saving? Is it a loss?".

The normal passing teaser image AK1 includes a jackpot area passing teaser image AK2 that displays the message "jackpot" and suggests that the game ball will pass through the jackpot area 063AK19, a time-saving area passing teaser image AK3 that displays the message "time-saving" and suggests that the game ball will pass through the time-saving area 063AK20, and a miss area passing teaser image AK4 that displays the message "miss" and suggests that the game ball will pass through the miss area 063AK21.

In the characteristic part 063AK, the display mode of the normal time passing teasing image AK1 is configured to suggest the expectation (proportion) of being controlled to a big win game state after the end of the small win game state based on the game ball passing through the big win area 063AK19 in the small win game state, the expectation of being controlled to a time-saving state after the end of the small win game state based on the game ball passing through the time-saving area 063AK20 in the small win game state, and the expectation of the game ball passing through the miss area 063AK21 in the small win game state. With this configuration, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the display mode of the normal time passing teasing image AK1 and increase the interest in the game. Specifically, in this embodiment, in the normal time passing teasing image AK1, the big win area passing teasing image AK2 is displayed in a display area according to the expectation that the game ball will pass through the big win area 063AK19 in the small win game state (the expectation that the game state will be controlled to the big win game state after the small win game state ends), the time-saving area passing teasing image AK3 is displayed in a display area according to the expectation that the game ball will pass through the time-saving area 063AK20 in the small win game state (the expectation that the game state will be controlled to the time-saving state after the small win game state ends), and the miss area passing teasing image AK4 is displayed in a display area according to the expectation that the game ball will pass through the miss area 063AK21 in the small win game state.

As described later, in this embodiment, when a small win symbol is derived and displayed in the second special symbol game (special symbol game using the second special symbol), the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20 in the small win game state at a higher rate than when a small win symbol is derived and displayed in the first special symbol game (special symbol game using the first special symbol), and the game is controlled to the time-saving state after the end of the small win game state. Correspondingly, in this embodiment, in the normal state, when a small win symbol is derived and displayed in the first special symbol game and the game is controlled to the small win game state, the normal time passing prompting image AK1 is displayed in the display mode shown in FIG. 19-10(a) in the normal time passing prompting performance, while when a small win symbol is derived and displayed in the second special symbol game and the game is controlled to the small win game state, the normal time passing prompting image AK1 is displayed in the display mode shown in FIG. 19-10(b) in the normal time passing prompting performance. In the display mode shown in FIG. 19-10(b), the display area of the time-saving area passing prompting image AK2 is larger than that in the display mode shown in FIG. 19-10(a). The normal time passing prompting effect shown in FIG. 19-10(b), which is executed when the small win pattern is derived and displayed in the second special chart game and the game is controlled to a small win game state, is the same as the normal time passing prompting effect shown in FIG. 19-10(a), which is executed when the small win pattern is derived and displayed in the first special chart game and the game is controlled to a small win game state, except that the display mode of the normal time passing prompting image AK1 is different.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 19-10(c), the time-saving time passage teasing effect is performed by displaying a time-saving time passage teasing image AK5 on the screen of the image display device 5, illuminating the jackpot area light-emitting unit 063AK25 and the miss area light-emitting unit 063AK27 without illuminating the time-saving area light-emitting unit 063AK26 provided in the special variable winning ball device 7, and outputting a time-saving time passage teasing sound showing the message "Is it a jackpot? Is it a miss?" from the speakers 8L and 8R. The time-saving time passage teasing image AK5 includes a jackpot area passage teasing image AK2 and a miss area passage teasing image AK4, but does not include a time-saving area passage teasing image AK3.

Returning to FIG. 19-8(b), in the normal state, when a game ball that entered the large prize opening 063AK4 in a small win game state passes through the jackpot area 063AK19, a normal-time jackpot area passing notification effect is executed as a passing notification effect, notifying the player that the game ball has passed through the jackpot area 063AK19 and will be controlled to the jackpot game state after the small win game state ends. In this embodiment, as the normal-time jackpot area passing notification effect, a normal-time jackpot area passing notification image showing the message "V" is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

In the normal state, when a game ball that has entered the large prize opening 063AK4 during a small win game state passes through the time-saving area 063AK20, a time-saving area passing notification effect is executed as a passing notification effect to notify the player that the game ball has passed through the time-saving area 063AK20 and will be controlled to the time-saving state after the small win game state ends. In this embodiment, as the time-saving area passing notification effect, a time-saving area passing notification image showing the message "Lucky!" is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

In the normal state, when a game ball that has entered the large prize opening 063AK4 passes through the loss area 063AK21 during a small win game state, a loss area passing notification effect is executed as a passing notification effect to notify the player that the game ball has passed through the loss area 063AK21 and that no control to change the game state will be performed after the small win game state ends. In this embodiment, as the loss area passing notification effect, a performance is executed in which a loss area passing notification image showing the message "Too bad!" is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

In contrast, in the time-saving state, as shown in FIG. 19-8(b), when a game ball that entered the large prize opening 063AK4 in a small win game state passes through the jackpot area 063AK19, a time-saving jackpot area passing notification effect different from the normal jackpot area passing notification effect is executed as a passing notification effect, notifying the player that the game ball has passed through the jackpot area 063AK19 and will be controlled to the jackpot game state after the small win game state ends. In this embodiment, as the time-saving jackpot area passing notification effect, a time-saving jackpot area passing notification image showing the message "BONUS!" is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

In the time-saving state, when a game ball that entered the large prize opening 063AK4 during a small win game state passes through the time-saving area 063AK20, the above-mentioned loss area passing notification effect is executed as a passing notification effect in response to the fact that time-saving transition control based on the passing is not performed.

In the time-saving state, when a game ball that entered the large prize opening 063AK4 during a small win game state passes through the loss area 063AK21, a loss area passage notification effect is executed as a passing notification effect.

As shown in FIG. 19-8(a) and FIG. 19-8(b), in the feature portion 063AK, a small winning pattern is derived and displayed as a confirmed special pattern in the special game, and when the large winning opening 063AK4 formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to an open state and then the large winning opening 063AK is controlled to a closed state, different effects can be executed when the game ball passes through the large winning area 063AK19 and when the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20. This configuration allows the player to pay attention to the effects executed when the large winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to a closed state, increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in the characteristic section 063AK, as shown in FIG. 19-8(b), in the normal state, a small win pattern is derived and displayed as a confirmed special pattern in the special game, and when the large prize opening 063AK4 is controlled to an open state, if the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20, a time-saving area passing notification effect is executed, so that the player is made aware that the game will be controlled to the time-saving state after the small win game state ends based on the game ball having passed through the time-saving area 063AK20, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

On the other hand, in the characteristic part 063AK, when a small win pattern is derived and displayed as a confirmed special pattern in the special game during the time-saving state, and the large prize opening 063AK4 is controlled to an open state, if the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20, a notification of passing through a losing area is executed. This prevents the player from having expectations that the game ball will be controlled to the time-saving state after the end of the small win game state based on the game ball passing through the time-saving area 063AK20, even though no time-saving transition control is performed based on the game ball passing through the time-saving area 063AK20, and suppresses a decrease in interest in the game.

In this way, the feature unit 063AK is configured to be able to execute different effects depending on whether a small win pattern is derived and displayed as a confirmed special pattern in the special game in the normal state and the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20 when the large prize opening 063AK4 is controlled to be in an open state, or whether a small win pattern is derived and displayed as a confirmed special pattern in the special game in the time-saving state and the large prize opening 063AK4 is controlled to be in an open state and the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20, thereby allowing suitable control to be performed depending on the state when the small win pattern is derived and displayed.

More specifically, the characteristic part 063AK is configured to be able to execute the same miss area passing notification effect when the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20 in the time-saving state and when the game ball passes through the miss area 063AK21 in the time-saving state and does not pass through either the big win area 063AK19 or the time-saving area 063AK20. With this configuration, when the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20 in the time-saving state, even though no control is performed based on the game ball passing through the time-saving area 063AK20, it is possible to prevent the player from having expectations that the game will be controlled to the time-saving state after the small win game state ends based on the game ball passing through the time-saving area 063AK20, and to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 19-8(b), the feature section 063AK is configured to be able to execute a time-saving jackpot area passage notification effect that differs from the normal time jackpot area passage notification effect executed when the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19 in the normal state when the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19 in the time-saving state. This configuration allows the player to pay attention to the effect executed when the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19, increasing the player's interest in the game.

In this embodiment, as described later, when a small win symbol is derived and displayed in the second special game that is likely to be executed in the time-saving state, and the game ball passes through the big win area 063AK19 when the big prize opening 063AK4 is controlled to be in the open state, a small win symbol is derived and displayed in the first special game that is likely to be executed in the normal state, and the game ball is controlled to a "big win A" that is more advantageous to the player than a "big win B" after the end of the small win game state at a higher rate than when the game ball passes through the big win area 063AK19 when the big prize opening 063AK4 is controlled to be in the open state. With this configuration, the player is made to pay attention to whether the time-saving big win area passing notification effect or the normal big win area passing notification effect is executed when the game ball passes through the big win area 063AK19, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Figure 19-11 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S110 of the special symbol process processing as normal processing of the special symbol for feature part 063AK.

When the normal special symbol processing starts, the CPU 103 first judges whether the second special symbol reserved memory count is "0" or not (step 063AKS101). The second special symbol reserved memory count is the reserved memory count of the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the processing of step 063AKS101, the second reserved memory count value stored in the second reserved memory count counter in the RAM 102 may be read, and it may be judged whether the read value is "0" or not.

In this embodiment, for example, a second special symbol reservation memory unit is provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102. The second special symbol reservation memory unit stores reservation data of a special symbol game (a special symbol game using a second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B) in which a game ball enters the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and a second start winning occurs, but has not yet started. As an example, the second special symbol reservation memory unit associates the reserved number with the winning order (the order of detection of the game ball) in the second start winning port, and stores numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc. based on the establishment of the second start condition by the game ball's entry, as reserved data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). Thus, the reserved data stored in the second special symbol reserved memory unit indicates that the execution (variable display) of the special symbol game using the second special symbol is reserved, and serves as reserved memory information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it is decided to control to a jackpot game state based on the variable display result (special symbol display result) in this special symbol game, and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol will be a specific mode (for example, a reach effect, etc.).

When the second special chart reserved memory number is other than "0" in step 063AKS101 (step 063AKS101; No), the CPU 103 reads out numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern as reserved data stored in the second special chart reserved memory section corresponding to the reserved number "1" (step 063AKS102). The numerical data read out at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a fluctuation random number buffer.

Following the processing of step 063AKS102, for example, the second reserved memory count value is updated by subtracting 1 from the second special chart reserved memory count, and the reserved data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in entries lower than reserved number "1" in the second special chart reserved memory section (for example, entries corresponding to reserved numbers "2" to "4") are shifted by one entry to the higher entry (step 063AKS103). Also, in the processing of step 063AKS103, the total reserved memory count value stored in the total reserved memory counter in RAM 102 may be updated by subtracting 1 from the total reserved memory count value. After that, the CPU 103 updates the variable special chart designation buffer value, which is the stored value of the variable special chart designation buffer, to "2" (step 063AKS104).

When the second special pattern reserved memory number is "0" in step 063AKS101 (step 063AKS101; Yes), it is determined whether the first special pattern reserved memory number is "0" (step 063AKS114). The first special pattern reserved memory number is the reserved memory number of the special pattern game using the first special pattern by the first special pattern display device 4A. For example, in the process of step 063AKS114, the first reserved memory number count value stored in the first reserved memory number counter in RAM 102 is read and it is determined whether the read value is "0". In this way, the process of step 063AKS114 is executed when it is determined in step 063AKS101 that the second special pattern reserved memory number is "0", and it is determined whether the first special pattern reserved memory number is "0". As a result, the special pattern game using the second special pattern (special pattern 2) is started in priority to the special pattern game using the first special pattern (special pattern 1).

Note that the special chart game using the second special chart is not limited to being executed with priority over the special chart game using the first special chart, and for example, the special chart game may be started in the order in which the game ball enters (passes) the first start winning port or the second start winning port and the start winning occurs. In this case, a table may be provided that stores data that can identify the order in which the start winning occurs, and it may be possible to determine whether to start the special chart game using the first special chart or the second special chart from the stored data.

In this embodiment, for example, a first special symbol reservation memory unit is provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102. The first special symbol reservation memory unit stores reservation data of a special symbol game (a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A) in which a game ball enters the first start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A and a first start winning occurs, but has not yet started. As an example, the first special symbol reservation memory unit associates the reserved number with the winning order (the order of detection of the game ball) in the first start winning port, and stores the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc. based on the establishment of the first start condition by the game ball's entry, as reserved data, until the number of memories reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). Thus, the reserved data stored in the first special symbol reserved memory unit indicates that the execution (variable display) of the special symbol game using the first special symbol is reserved, and serves as reserved memory information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it is decided to control to a jackpot game state based on the variable display result (special symbol display result) in this special symbol game, and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol will be a specific mode (for example, a reach effect, etc.).

When the number of reserved first special charts is other than "0" in step 063AKS114 (step 063AKS114; No), the reserved data stored in the first special chart reserved memory section corresponding to reserved number "1" is read out as numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 063AKS115). The numerical data read out at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a fluctuation random number buffer or the like.

Following the processing of step 063AKS115, for example, the first reserved memory count value is updated by subtracting 1 from the first reserved memory count, and the reserved data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in entries lower than reserved number "1" in the first special pattern reserved memory unit (for example, entries corresponding to reserved numbers "2" to "4") are shifted to higher entries (step 063AKS116). Also, in the processing of step 063AKS116, the total reserved memory count value stored in the total reserved memory counter in RAM 102 may be updated to subtract 1 from the total reserved memory count value. After that, the CPU 103 updates the variable special pattern designation buffer value to "1" (step 063AKS117).

After executing either the process of step 063AKS104 or 063AKS117, the CPU 103 selects and sets the special symbol display result determination table corresponding to the variable special symbol designation buffer value as the table to be used for determining whether the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, is a "big hit," "small hit," or "miss" (step 063AKS105). For example, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "1," the first special symbol display result determination table shown in FIG. 19-12(a) is set as the table to be used. On the other hand, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "2," the second special symbol display result determination table shown in FIG. 19-12(b) is set as the table to be used.

The first special symbol display result determination table shown in FIG. 19-12(a) is a table that is referenced to determine whether or not to control the variable display result as a "big hit" to a big hit game state or whether or not to control the variable display result as a "small hit" to a small hit game state before the determined special symbol that is the variable display result is derived and displayed in the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A, based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result. The second special symbol display result determination table shown in FIG. 19-12(b) is a table that is referenced to determine whether or not to control the variable display result as a "big hit" to a big hit game state or whether or not to control the variable display result as a "small hit" to a small hit game state before the determined special symbol that is the variable display result is derived and displayed in the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B, based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result.

In the first special chart display result determination table shown in FIG. 19-12(a) and the second special chart display result determination table shown in FIG. 19-12(b), the numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result is assigned to the special chart display results of "big hit", "small hit", and "miss".

In the first special chart display result determination table shown in FIG. 19-12(a) and the second special chart display result determination table shown in FIG. 19-12(b), the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result is determination data assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the special chart display result as a "big win" to a big win game state, or whether or not to control the special chart display result as a "small win" to a small win game state.

In addition, in the second special chart display result determination table shown in FIG. 19-12(b), a larger determination value is assigned to the special chart display result of "small win" compared to the first special chart display result determination table shown in FIG. 19-12(a). In other words, in the first special chart display result determination table shown in FIG. 19-12(a) and the second special chart display result determination table shown in FIG. 19-12(b), determination data is assigned so that there is a higher probability that the special chart display result will be determined to be a "small win" and controlled to a small win game state in the second special chart display result determination table.

Returning to FIG. 19-11, following the processing of step 063AKS105, the CPU 103 compares the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result stored in the variable random number buffer with the determination value assigned to "jackpot" in the special chart display result determination table selected in step 063AKS105 to determine whether or not the special chart display result is a "jackpot" (step 063AKS106).

After executing the processing of step 063AKS106, the CPU 103 judges whether or not it has been determined in step 063AKS106 that the special chart display result is a "jackpot" (step 063AKS107). If it is determined that the special chart display result is a "jackpot" (step 063AKS107; Yes), the jackpot flag provided in the RAM 102 is set to an ON state (step 063AKS108). After that, the CPU 103 selects and sets the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 19-13(b) as the table to be used for determining the jackpot type as one of multiple types (step 063AKS109). The CPU 103 performs a random number lottery using the jackpot type determination table set in step 063AKS109 to determine the jackpot type as either "jackpot A" or "jackpot B" shown in FIG. 19-13(a) depending on whether the special pattern ("variable special pattern") variably displayed in the special pattern game is the first special pattern or the second special pattern (whether the variable special pattern buffer value is "1" or "2") (step 063AKS110).

Both "Jackpot A" and "Jackpot B" shown in Figure 19-13 (a) are "non-probable jackpots" that are not controlled to a probable variable state after the end of the jackpot gaming state. When controlled to "Jackpot A", the game is controlled to a time-saving state for the period until the variable display is executed five times after the end of the jackpot gaming state. When controlled to "Jackpot B", the game is controlled to a time-saving state for the period until the variable display is executed once after the end of the jackpot gaming state. "Jackpot A", which is controlled to a time-saving state for a longer period after the end of the jackpot gaming state than "Jackpot B", is more advantageous to the player than "Jackpot B". In the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 19-13(b), when the variable special chart is the first special chart, the jackpot type is determined to be either "jackpot A" or "jackpot B", while when the variable special chart is the second special chart, the jackpot type is determined to be "jackpot A" and not "jackpot B". With this configuration, when the jackpot pattern is derived and displayed in the second special chart game, it is controlled to "jackpot A", which is more advantageous to the player than "jackpot B", at a higher rate than when the jackpot pattern is derived and displayed in the first special chart game.

Returning to FIG. 19-11, after executing the processing of step 063AKS110, the CPU 103 stores the determined jackpot type by, for example, setting a jackpot type buffer value, which is the stored value of a jackpot type buffer provided in the RAM 102, corresponding to the jackpot type determined in step 063AK110 (step 063AKS111). As an example, if the jackpot type is "jackpot A", the jackpot type buffer value can be set to "0", and if it is "jackpot B", the value can be set to "1".

In step 063AKS107, if it is determined that the variable display result was not determined to be a "big hit" in step 063AKS106 (step 063AKS107; No), the CPU 103 compares the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result stored in the variable random number buffer with the determination value assigned to "small hit" in the special chart display result determination table selected in step 063AKS105, thereby determining whether or not the special chart display result is a "small hit" (step 063AKS118).

After executing the processing of step 063AKS118, the CPU 103 judges whether or not it has been determined in step 063AKS118 that the special chart display result is a "small win" (step 063AKS119). Then, when it is determined that the special chart display result is a "small win" (step 063AKS119; Yes), the small win flag provided in the RAM 102 is set to an ON state (step 063AKS120). After that, the CPU 103 selects and sets the small win type determination table shown in FIG. 19-14 (b) as a table to be used for determining the small win type as one of multiple types (step 063AKS121). The CPU 103 performs a random number lottery using the small win type determination table set in step 063AKS121 to determine the small win type as one of "small win A" to "small win E" shown in FIG. 19-14(a) depending on whether the variable special chart is the first special chart or the second special chart (whether the variable special chart buffer value is "1" or "2") (step 063AKS122).

As shown in FIG. 19-14(a), "small hit A" and "small hit B" are small hit types in which a game ball that has entered the large winning hole 063AK4, which is controlled to be in an open state in a small hit game state, passes through the large winning area 063AK19 by being guided by the distribution member 063AK28. Specifically, in this embodiment, when the small hit type is "small hit A" or "small hit B", the small hit start presentation time is set to the third specific time described above. As described above, when the small hit start presentation time is set to the third specific time, the game ball that has entered the large winning hole 063AK4 passes through the large winning area 063AK19. Therefore, when the small hit type is "small hit A" or "small hit B", the game ball that has entered the large winning hole 063AK4 passes through the large winning area 063AK19. If a game ball that entered the large prize entry port 063AK4 during the small prize game state of "small prize A" passes through the large prize area 063AK19, the game state will be controlled to the large prize game state of "large prize A" after the small prize game state ends. In contrast, if a game ball that entered the large prize entry port 063AK4 during the small prize game state of "small prize B" passes through the large prize area 063AK19, the game state will be controlled to the large prize game state of "large prize B" after the small prize game state ends.

"Small hit C" and "Small hit D" are small hit types in which a game ball that has entered the large winning port 063AK4, which is controlled to be in an open state during a small hit game state, passes through the time-saving area 063AK20 by being guided by the distribution member 063AK28. Specifically, in this embodiment, when the small hit type is "small hit C" or "small hit D", the small hit start presentation time is set to the above-mentioned second specific time. As described above, when the small hit start presentation time is set to the second specific time, the game ball that has entered the large winning port 063AK4 passes through the time-saving area 063AK20. Therefore, when the small hit type is "small hit C" or "small hit D", the game ball that has entered the large winning port 063AK4 passes through the time-saving area 063AK20. When a game ball that entered the large winning hole 063AK4 passes through the time-saving area 063AK20 during the small win game state of "small win C," the game is controlled to the time-saving state for a period until the variable display is executed five times after the small win game state ends. In contrast, when a game ball that entered the large winning hole 063AK4 passes through the time-saving area 063AK20 during the small win game state of "small win D," the game is controlled to the time-saving state for a period until the variable display is executed one time after the small win game state ends.

"Small win E" is a type of small win in which a game ball that has entered the large winning hole 063AK4, which is controlled to be open in a small win game state, passes through the miss area 063AK21 by being guided by the distribution member 063AK28. Specifically, in this embodiment, when the small win type is "small win E", the small win start presentation time is set to the first specific time described above. As described above, when the small win start presentation time is set to the first specific time, the game ball that has entered the large winning hole 063AK4 passes through the miss area 063AK21. Therefore, when the small win type is "small win E", the game ball that has entered the large winning hole 063AK4 passes through the miss area 063AK21.

In the small win type determination table shown in Figure 19-14 (b), when the variable special chart is the second special chart, the small win type is determined to be "small win A" which is controlled to be "jackpot A", which is more advantageous to the player than "jackpot B", when the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19, at a higher rate than when the variable special chart is the first special chart. With this configuration, if a small win pattern is derived and displayed in the second special game and the game ball passes through the big win area 063AK19 when the big win opening 063AK4 is controlled to be open, the game ball is controlled to a "big win A" that is more advantageous to the player than a "big win B" after the small win game state ends at a higher rate than if a small win pattern is derived and displayed in the first special game and the game ball passes through the big win area 063AK19 when the big win opening 063AK4 is controlled to be open.

In the small hit type determination table shown in FIG. 19-14(b), the sum of the percentage at which the small hit type is determined to be "small hit A" and the percentage at which the small hit type is determined to be "small hit B" corresponds to the expectation that the game state will be controlled to a large hit game state after the end of the small hit game state, based on the game ball passing through the large hit area 063AK19 in the small hit game state. Also, the sum of the percentage at which the small hit type is determined to be "small hit C" and the percentage at which the small hit type is determined to be "small hit D" corresponds to the expectation that the game state will be controlled to a time-saving state after the end of the small hit game state, based on the game ball passing through the time-saving area 063AK20 in the small hit game state. In addition, the rate at which the small hit type is determined to be "small hit E" corresponds to the expectation that no control will be performed to change the game state after the small hit game state ends, based on the game ball passing through the miss area 063AK21 during the small hit game state.

As shown in FIG. 19-14(b), when the variable special chart is the second special chart, the ratio (15%) at which the small hit type is determined to be "small hit C" and the ratio (15%) at which the small hit type is determined to be "small hit D" are combined (30%), which is greater than the ratio (15%) at which the small hit type is determined to be "small hit C" and the ratio (10%) at which the small hit type is determined to be "small hit D" when the variable special chart is the first special chart, which is greater than the ratio (25%) at which the small hit type is determined to be "small hit C" and the ratio (10%) at which the small hit type is determined to be "small hit D". In other words, in the feature part 063AK, when the small hit pattern is derived and displayed in the second special chart game, the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20 in the small hit game state at a higher ratio than when the small hit pattern is derived and displayed in the first special chart game, and the game ball is controlled to the time-saving state after the end of the small hit game state. This configuration allows the player to focus on whether a small win symbol is derived and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the second special game, increasing the player's interest in the game.

Returning to FIG. 19-11, after executing the processing of step 063AKS122, the CPU 103 stores the determined small hit type by, for example, setting a small hit type buffer value, which is the stored value of a small hit type buffer provided in the RAM 102, corresponding to the small hit type determined in step 063AK122 (step 063AKS123). As an example, if the small hit type is "small hit A", the small hit type buffer value can be set to "0", if it is "small hit B", it can be set to "1", if it is "small hit C", it can be set to "2", if it is "small hit D", it can be set to "3", and if it is "small hit E", it can be set to "4".

In step 063AKS119, if it is determined that the special symbol display result has not been determined to be a "small win" in step 063AKS118 (step 063AKS119; No), or after executing the processing of step 063AKS111 or step 063AKS123, the CPU 103 determines the determined special symbol (step 063AKS112) in response to the result of a prior determination of whether or not to control the game state to a big win or a small win, or the result of determining the type of big win if the game state is a big win.

After executing the processing of step 063AKS112, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to "1", which is a value corresponding to the variable pattern setting processing (step 063AKS113), and then ends the normal processing of the special symbol. If the first special symbol reserved memory count is "0" in step 063AKS114 (step 063AKS114; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a predetermined demo display setting (step 063AKS124), and then ends the normal processing of the special symbol.

In this embodiment, in the variation pattern setting process executed in step S111 of the special pattern process processing, the variation pattern is determined to be one of the variation patterns PA1-1 to PB5-3 shown in FIG. 19-15.

As shown in FIG. 19-15, in this embodiment, there are preset variation patterns PA1-1 to PB2-3 corresponding to the variable display result being a "miss," variation patterns PA3-1 to PB3-3 corresponding to the variable display result being a "big hit," and variation patterns PA4-1 to PB5-3 corresponding to the variable display result being a "small hit."

In this embodiment, there are three types of super reaches: Super Reach A, Super Reach B, and Super Reach C. The fluctuation patterns shown in Figure 19-15 include fluctuation patterns PA2-1, PA3-1, PA4-1, PA5-1 in which normal reach performance is executed, as well as fluctuation patterns PB2-1, PB3-1, PB4-1, PB5-1 in which the reach performance of Super Reach C is executed, fluctuation patterns PB2-2, PB3-2, PB4-2, PB5-2 in which the reach performance of Super Reach B is executed, and fluctuation patterns PB2-3, PB3-3, PB4-3, PB5-3 in which the reach performance of Super Reach A is executed. In this embodiment, the reach performance of Super Reach A is performed by displaying a character image of character A on the screen of the image display device 5, the reach performance of Super Reach B is performed by displaying a character image of character B on the screen of the image display device 5, and the reach performance of Super Reach C is performed by displaying a character image of character C on the screen of the image display device 5.

Furthermore, the variation patterns PA4-1 to PB5-3 corresponding to the variable display result being a "small win" include variation patterns PA4-1, PB4-1 to PB4-3 in which a time-saving suggestion effect is executed, and variation patterns PA5-1, PB5-1 to PB5-3 in which a time-saving suggestion effect is not executed.

Figure 19-16 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing executed in step S111 of the special pattern process processing as a variation pattern setting process for feature part 063AK.

When the fluctuation pattern setting process starts, the CPU 103 first determines whether the jackpot flag is on or not (step 063AK201). If it is determined that the jackpot flag is on (step 063AKS201; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a random number lottery using the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 19-17 to determine the fluctuation pattern to be one of the fluctuation patterns PA3-1 to PB3-3 that corresponds to the case where the variable display result is "jackpot" (step 063AK202).

As shown in FIG. 19-17, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be fluctuation pattern PB3-1, in which the reach performance of Super Reach C is executed at a higher rate than fluctuation pattern PA3-1, in which the normal reach performance is executed, fluctuation pattern PB3-2, in which the reach performance of Super Reach B is executed at a higher rate than fluctuation pattern PB3-1, and fluctuation pattern PB3-3, in which the reach performance of Super Reach A is executed at a higher rate than fluctuation pattern PB3-2. With this configuration, the jackpot expectation rate is higher when the reach performance of Super Reach A is executed than when the reach performance of Super Reach B is executed, higher when the reach performance of Super Reach B is executed than when the reach performance of Super Reach C is executed, and higher when the reach performance of Super Reach C is executed than when the normal reach performance is executed.

Returning to FIG. 19-16, if it is determined in step 063AK201 that the big win flag is not on (step 063AKS201; No), the CPU 103 determines whether the small win flag is on or not (step 063AKS207). If it is determined that the small win flag is not on (step 063AK207; No), the CPU 103 performs a random number lottery using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 19-18 to determine the fluctuation pattern to be one of the fluctuation patterns PA1-1 to PB2-3 corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "miss" (step 063AKS208).

As shown in FIG. 19-18, in the miss fluctuation pattern determination table, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be fluctuation pattern PB2-1, in which the reach performance of Super Reach C is executed at a lower rate than fluctuation pattern PA2-1, in which the normal reach performance is executed, fluctuation pattern PB2-2, in which the reach performance of Super Reach B is executed at a lower rate than fluctuation pattern PB2-1, and fluctuation pattern PB2-3, in which the reach performance of Super Reach A is executed at a higher rate than fluctuation pattern PB2-2.

Returning to FIG. 19-16, if it is determined in step 063AKS207 that the small win flag is on (step 063AKS207; Yes), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the time-saving flag provided in the RAM 102 is set to the on state (step 063AKS209). The time-saving flag is a flag that indicates that the reel is being controlled to the time-saving state.

When it is determined that the time-saving flag is not set to the on state (step 063AKS209; No), the CPU 103 performs a random number lottery using the time-saving fluctuation pattern determination table for normal state shown in FIG. 19-19(a) to determine the fluctuation pattern to be one of the fluctuation patterns PA4-1 to PB4-3 in which the time-saving suggestion performance is executed, corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "small hit", depending on whether the small hit type is "small hit A" to "small hit E" (step 063AKS210). Whether the small hit type is "small hit A" to "small hit E" can be determined based on the small hit type buffer value. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time-saving flag is set to the ON state (step 063AKS209; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a random number lottery using the time-saving fluctuation pattern determination table for the time-saving state shown in FIG. 19-19(b) to determine the fluctuation pattern to be one of the fluctuation patterns PA5-1 to PB5-3 in which the variable display result is a "small hit" and the time-saving suggestion effect is not executed, depending on whether the small hit type is "small hit A" to "small hit E" (step 063AKS211). With this configuration, when a small hit fluctuation is executed in the normal state, the time-saving suggestion effect can be executed during the execution of the small hit fluctuation, while when a small hit fluctuation is executed in the time-saving state, the time-saving suggestion effect is not executed during the execution of the small hit fluctuation.

In both the time-saving fluctuation pattern determination table for the normal state shown in Figure 19-19 (a) and the time-saving fluctuation pattern determination table for the time-saving state shown in Figure 19-19 (b), when the small hit type is "small hit A" or "small hit B" in which the game ball passes through the large hit area 063AK19, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be fluctuation patterns PB4-2, PB5-2 in which the reach performance of Super Reach B is executed at a higher rate than fluctuation patterns PB4-1, PB5-1 in which the reach performance of Super Reach C is executed, and is determined to be fluctuation patterns PB4-3, PB5-3 in which the reach performance of Super Reach A is executed at a higher rate than fluctuation patterns PB4-2, PB5-2. With this configuration, the expectation of the game ball passing through the jackpot area 063AK19 (expectation of passing through the jackpot area) is higher when the reach performance of Super Reach A is executed than when the reach performance of Super Reach B is executed, and is higher when the reach performance of Super Reach B is executed than when the reach performance of Super Reach C is executed. With this configuration, the player is made to pay attention to which of the reach performances from Super Reach A to Super Reach C will be executed, which can increase the player's interest in the game.

In both the time-saving fluctuation pattern determination table for the normal state shown in Figure 19-19 (a) and the time-saving fluctuation pattern determination table for the time-saving state shown in Figure 19-19 (b), when the small hit type is "small hit C" or "small hit D" in which the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be fluctuation patterns PB4-2, PB5-2 in which the reach performance of Super Reach B is executed at a higher rate than fluctuation patterns PB4-3, PB5-3 in which the reach performance of Super Reach A is executed, and is determined to be fluctuation patterns PB4-1, PB5-1 in which the reach performance of Super Reach C is executed at a higher rate than fluctuation patterns PB4-2, PB5-2. With this configuration, the expectation of the game ball passing through the time-saving area 063AK20 (expectation of passing through the time-saving area) is higher when the reach performance of Super Reach C is executed than when the reach performance of Super Reach B is executed, and is higher when the reach performance of Super Reach B is executed than when the reach performance of Super Reach A is executed. With this configuration, the player is made to pay attention to which of the reach performances from Super Reach A to Super Reach C will be executed, which can increase the player's interest in the game.

Returning to FIG. 19-16, after executing the processing of step 063AKS202, 063AKS208, 063AKS210 or 063AKS211, the CPU 103 sets the special symbol variation time corresponding to the determined variation pattern (step 063AKS203). The special symbol variation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is the time required from the start of the variation of the special symbol in the special symbol game until the determined special symbol, which is the variable display result (special symbol display result), is derived and displayed. By setting the special symbol variation time corresponding to the variation pattern, the CPU 103 can set the timing at which the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is derived. The special symbol variation time is set, for example, by setting a timer value corresponding to the special symbol variation time in a game control process timer provided in a specified area of the RAM 102.

Following the processing of step 063AKS203, the CPU 103 performs settings to start the variation of the special symbols so that either the special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A or the special symbol game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B will be started when the start condition is met (step 063AKS204). As an example, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "1", a setting is performed to send a drive signal to update the display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A. On the other hand, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "2", a setting is performed to send a drive signal to update the display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B. This starts the special symbol game. When starting a variable display using the first special symbol, the CPU 103 may control the first reserved indicator 25A to make the first reserved indicator 25A display a number that identifies the first reserved symbol memory number that has been subtracted by one (for example, by reducing the number of lit LEDs by one). When starting a variable display using the second special symbol, the CPU 103 may control the second reserved indicator 25B to make the second reserved indicator 25B display a number that identifies the second reserved symbol memory number that has been subtracted by one (for example, by reducing the number of lit LEDs by one).

After executing the processing of step 063AKS204, the CPU 103 sets up the transmission of a command (change start command) at the start of the change in the special pattern in order to notify the performance control board 12 of the special pattern display results, the change pattern determination results, etc. (step 063AKS205). For example, when the variable special chart designation buffer value is "1", the CPU 103 performs transmission setting to sequentially transmit from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 as variation start commands, a first variation start designation command, a variation pattern designation command (a command including EXT data indicating the variation pattern determined in steps 063AKS202, 063AKS208, 063AKS210 or 063AKS211), a display result designation command (a command including EXT data indicating the determined variable display result), and a first special chart reserved memory number designation command (a command including EXT data indicating the first special chart reserved memory number count value reduced by 1, i.e., the number of first special chart reserved memories when one reserved memory is consumed by the start of execution of the special chart game). On the other hand, when the variable special chart designation buffer value is "2", the CPU 103 performs transmission setting to sequentially transmit from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 as variation start commands, a second variation start designation command, a variation pattern designation command (a command including EXT data indicating the variation pattern determined in steps 063AKS202, 063AKS208, 063AKS210 or 063AKS211), a display result designation command (a command including EXT data indicating the determined variable display result), and a second special chart reserved memory number designation command (the second special chart reserved memory number count value reduced by 1, i.e., a command including EXT data indicating the number of second special chart reserved memories when one reserved memory is consumed by the start of execution of the special chart game). In this embodiment, in the display result designation command (variable display result notification command), different EXT data is set depending on the determination result (predetermined result) of whether the variable display result is a "miss", a "big hit", or a "small hit", the determination result of which of multiple types of big hits the big hit type will be when the variable display result is a "big hit" (big hit type determination result), and the determination result of which of multiple types of small hits the small hit type will be when the variable display result is a "small hit" (small hit type determination result).

After executing the processing of step 063AKS205, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special pattern process flag to "2", which corresponds to the special pattern variation processing (step 063AKS206), and then ends the normal special pattern processing.

Figures 19-20 are flowcharts showing an example of processing executed in step S113 of the special symbol process processing as special symbol stop processing for feature portion 063AK.

When the special symbol stop process is started, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not a special symbol confirmation display flag, for example, provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, is ON (step 063AKS301). Here, the special symbol confirmation display flag is set to the ON state by the process of step 063AKS305 described later in response to the derivation and display of a confirmed special symbol that is a variable display result in the special symbol game.

When the special pattern confirmation display flag is off (step 063AKS301; No), the CPU 103 performs settings to derive and display the confirmed special pattern (step 063AKS302) and performs settings to send a decorative pattern stop command to the performance control board 12 (step 063AKS303). The decorative pattern stop command is also called a pattern confirmation command, and is a command that specifies that the variable display (variation) of the decorative pattern is terminated and the display result (stopped pattern) is derived and displayed.

After executing the processing of step 063AKS303, the CPU 103 sets a predetermined time as the special pattern confirmation display time (step 063AKS304). In the processing of step 063AKS304, the special pattern confirmation display time timer value, which is the stored value of the special pattern confirmation display time timer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, is set to a value corresponding to the predetermined special pattern confirmation display time. Thereafter, the CPU 103 sets the special pattern confirmation display in progress flag to the on state (step 063AKS305), and then ends the special pattern stop processing.

In step 063AKS301, when the special pattern confirmation display in progress flag is on (step 063AKS301; Yes), the CPU 103 determines whether the special pattern confirmation display time has elapsed (step 063AKS306). For example, in the processing of step 063AKS306, the special pattern confirmation display time timer value is updated by subtracting 1, and whether the special pattern confirmation display time has elapsed can be determined depending on whether the updated special pattern confirmation display time timer value is "0". If the special pattern confirmation display time has not elapsed in step 063AKS306 (step 063AKS306; No), the special pattern stop processing is terminated, and the process waits until the special pattern confirmation display time has elapsed.

When the special chart confirmation display time has elapsed in step 063AKS306 (step 063AKS306; Yes), the CPU 103 clears the special chart confirmation display flag to an off state (step 063AKS307), and then determines whether the jackpot flag is on (step 063AKS308). At this time, if the jackpot flag is on (step 063AKS308; Yes), a predetermined time is set as the jackpot start performance waiting time (step 063AKS309). The jackpot start performance waiting time corresponds to the jackpot start performance time during which the jackpot start performance (jackpot fanfare performance) is executed. In the process of step 063AK309, the jackpot start performance waiting time timer value, which is the stored value of the jackpot start performance waiting time timer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, is set to a value corresponding to a predetermined jackpot start performance time. After executing the processing of step 063AKS309, the CPU 103 performs settings to send a jackpot start command (jackpot fanfare command) corresponding to the jackpot from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 (step 063AKS310).

After executing the process of step 063AKS310, the CPU 103 clears the jackpot flag to the OFF state (step 063AKS311) and clears the time-saving flag to the OFF state (step 063AKS312). After that, the CPU 103 performs settings to send a game state designation command indicating the normal state (a presentation control command that designates the current game state in pachinko game 1) from the main board 11 to the presentation control board 12 (step 063AKS313).

Next, the CPU 103 sets the opening count value, which is the stored value of the opening counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, to a value (in this embodiment, "15") corresponding to the upper limit number of rounds in the jackpot game state (in this embodiment, 15 times) (step 063AKS314).

After executing the process of step 063AKS314, the CPU 103 clears the time-saving count counter (063AKS315). The time-saving count counter is provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and counts the number of time-saving times, which is the remaining number of times of the variable display controlled in the time-saving state. In the process of step 063AKS315, the time-saving count counter is cleared, and the time-saving count value, which is the stored value of the time-saving count counter, is set to the initial value of "0". After that, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to "4", which is the value corresponding to the process before the opening of the jackpot (step 063AKS316), and then ends the special symbol stop process.

If it is determined in step 063AKS308 that the big win flag is not on (step 063AKS308; No), the CPU 103 determines whether the small win flag is on or not (step 063AKS317). If it is determined that the small win flag is not on (step 063AKS317; No), the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to "0", which is the value corresponding to the normal processing of the special symbol (step 063AKS318).

In step 063AKS317, if it is determined that the small hit flag is on (step 063AKS317; Yes), the CPU 103 sets the small hit start performance waiting time to one of the above-mentioned first specific time to third specific time (step 063AKS319). The small hit start performance waiting time corresponds to the small hit start performance time. Specifically, in step 063AKS319, the CPU 103 determines the small hit start performance waiting time to one of the first specific time to third specific time depending on whether the small hit type is "small hit A" to "small hit E" by referring to the small hit start performance waiting time determination table shown in FIG. 19-21, and sets the small hit start performance waiting time timer value, which is the stored value of the small hit start performance waiting time timer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, to a value corresponding to the determined small hit start performance waiting time. The type of small hit can be determined based on the small hit type buffer value.

As shown in Figures 19-21, in this embodiment, when the small hit type is "small hit A" or "small hit B", the small hit start presentation time is set to the third specific time, and the small hit start presentation waiting time is also determined to the third specific time. When the small hit type is "small hit C" or "small hit D", the small hit start presentation time is set to the second specific time, and the small hit start presentation waiting time is also determined to the second specific time. When the small hit type is "small hit E", the small hit start presentation time is set to the first specific time, and the small hit start presentation waiting time is also determined to the first specific time.

After executing the processing of step 063AKS319, the CPU 103 performs settings to send a hit start designation command (small hit fanfare command) corresponding to a small hit from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 (step 063AKS320).

After executing the process of step 063AKS320, the CPU 103 controls the distribution member 063AK28 to start operating according to the distribution member operation pattern (step 063AKS321). After that, the CPU 103 clears the small win flag to the off state (step 063AKS322), and sets the opening count value to a value (in this embodiment, "10") corresponding to the upper limit opening number (in this embodiment, 10 times) of the large prize opening opening and closing in the small win game state (step 063AKS323). After executing the process of step 063AKS323, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special chart process flag to "8", which is a value corresponding to the small win pre-opening process (step 063AKS324).

After executing the processing of step 063AKS318 or step 063AKS324, the CPU 103 determines whether the time-saving flag is on or not (step 063AKS325). If it is determined that the time-saving flag is not on (step 063AKS325; No), the CPU 103 ends the special symbol stop processing.

When it is determined that the time-saving flag is on (step 063AKS325; Yes), the CPU 103 updates the time-saving count value by subtracting 1 (step 063AKS326), and determines whether the updated time-saving count value is "0" (step 063AKS327). When it is determined that the time-saving count value is not "0" (step 063AKS327; No), the CPU 103 ends the special symbol stop process.

If it is determined that the time-saving count value is "0" (step 063AKS327; Yes), the CPU 103 clears the time-saving flag and sets it to the off state (step 063AKS328), performs settings to send a game state designation command indicating the normal state (step 063AKS329), and ends the special symbol stop processing.

Figure 19-22 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing executed in step S118 of the special pattern process processing as pre-processing for the small win release for feature part 063AK.

When the small win release pre-processing starts, the CPU 103 first determines whether the small win start performance waiting time has elapsed (step 063AKS401). In the processing of step 063AKS401, the small win start performance waiting time timer value is updated by subtracting 1, and whether the small win start performance waiting time has elapsed is determined depending on whether the updated small win start performance waiting time timer value is "0". If it is determined that the small win start performance waiting time has not elapsed (step 063AKS401; No), the CPU 103 ends the small win release pre-processing.

In step 063AKS401, if it is determined that the small win start performance waiting time has elapsed (step 063AKS401; Yes), the CPU 103 controls the distribution section supply solenoid 063AK12 to the on state (step 063AKS402). After that, the CPU 103 sets a predetermined time as the game ball holding time (step 063AKS403). In step 063AKS403, the CPU 103 sets the game ball holding time timer value, which is the stored value of the game ball holding time timer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, to a value corresponding to the predetermined game ball holding time. After executing the processing of step 063AKS403, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special chart process flag to "9", which is a value corresponding to the small win opening processing (step 063AKS404), and ends the small win opening pre-processing.

Figure 19-23 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing executed in step S119 of the special symbol process processing as processing during the opening of a small win for feature part 063AK.

When the small win opening process starts, the CPU 103 first determines whether the opening count value is "0" (step 063AKS501). If it is determined that the opening count value is not "0" (step 063AKS501; No), the CPU 103 determines whether the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening 063AK4 in the small win game state is equal to or greater than a predetermined upper limit number of winning balls in the small win game state (10 balls in this embodiment) (step 063AKS502). In step 063AKS502, the CPU 103 determines whether the number of game balls detected by the large prize opening switch 063AK5 (the number of times game balls have been detected by the large prize opening switch 063AK5) is equal to or greater than the upper limit number of winning balls.

In step 063AKS502, if it is determined that the number of game balls entering the large prize opening 063AK4 is less than the upper limit number of winning balls (step 063AKS502; No), the CPU 103 determines whether it is time to open the large prize opening 063AK4 (step 063AKS503). If it is determined that it is time to open the large prize opening 063AK4 (step 063AKS503; Yes), the CPU 103 controls the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door to the on state, thereby controlling the large prize opening 063AK4 to an open state (step 063AKS504), and performs settings for sending a command to specify that the large prize opening is open (step 063AKS505). After performing the processing of step 063AKS505, the CPU 103 updates the opening count value by subtracting 1 (step 063AKS506).

After executing the processing of step 063AKS506, or when it is determined in step 063AKS503 that it is not the timing to open the large prize opening 063AK4 (step 063AKS503; No), the CPU 103 determines whether it is the timing to close the large prize opening 063AK4 (step 063AKS507). When it is determined that it is not the timing to close the large prize opening 063AK4 (step 063AKS507; No), the CPU 103 ends the small win opening processing. When it is determined that it is the timing to close the large prize opening 063AK4 (step 063AKS507; Yes), the CPU 103 controls the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door to the off state, thereby controlling the large prize opening 063AK4 to the closed state (step 063AKS508). After executing the processing of step 063AKS508, the CPU 103 performs settings to send a designated command after the large prize opening is opened (step 063AKS509), and ends the processing during the opening of the small prize.

If it is determined in step 063AKS501 that the opening count value is "0" (step 063AKS501; Yes), or if it is determined in step 063AKS502 that the number of game balls that have entered the large winning port 063AK4 is equal to or greater than the upper limit number of winning balls (step 063AKS502; Yes), the CPU 103 determines whether the game ball holding time has elapsed (step 063AKS510). In step 063AKS510, the CPU 103 updates the game ball holding time timer value by subtracting 1, and determines whether the game ball holding time has elapsed depending on whether the updated game ball holding time timer value is "0". If it is determined that the game ball holding time has not elapsed (step 063AKS510; No), the CPU 103 ends the small winning opening process.

If it is determined in step 063AKS510 that the game ball holding time has elapsed (step 063AKS510; Yes), the CPU 103 controls the distribution section supply solenoid 063AK12 to the off state (step 063AKS511).

After executing the process of step 063AKS511, the CPU 103 judges whether the game ball that entered the large prize opening 063AK4 in the small prize game state passed through any of the big prize area 063AK19, the time-saving area 063AK20, or the miss area 063AK21 (step 063AKS512). In step 063AKS512, the CPU 103 judges whether the game ball that entered the large prize opening 063AK4 in the small prize game state passed through any of the big prize area 063AK19, the time-saving area 063AK20, or the miss area 063AK21 depending on whether any of the big prize area passing flag, the time-saving area passing flag, or the miss area passing flag, all of which are provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, is on.

When it is determined that the game ball has not passed through any of the jackpot area 063AK19, the time-saving area 063AK20, or the miss area 063AK21 (step 063AKS512; No), the CPU 103 determines whether the jackpot area passing switch 063AK22 has been turned on (whether the jackpot area passing switch 063AK22 has detected the game ball) (step 063AKS518). When it is determined that the jackpot area passing switch 063AK22 has been turned on (step 063AKS518; Yes), the CPU 103 sets the jackpot area passing flag to the on state (step 063AKS519) and ends the small jackpot opening process.

In step 063AKS518, if it is determined that the big win area passage switch 063AK22 is not on (step 063AKS518; No), the CPU 103 determines whether the time-saving area passage switch 063AK23 is on (whether the time-saving area passage switch 063AK23 detects a game ball) (step 063AKS520). If it is determined that the time-saving area passage switch 063AK23 is on (step 063AKS520; Yes), the CPU 103 determines whether the time-saving flag is on (step 063AKS521). If it is determined that the time-saving flag is not on (step 063AKS521; No), the CPU 103 sets the time-saving area passage flag to the on state (step 063AKS522) and ends the small win opening process.

If it is determined in step 063AKS520 that the time-saving area passage switch 063AK23 is not on (step 063AKS520; No), the CPU 103 determines whether the miss area passage switch 063AK24 is on (whether the miss area passage switch 063AK24 has detected a game ball) (step 063AKS523). If it is determined that the miss area passage switch 063AK24 is not on (step 063AKS523; No), the CPU 103 ends the small win opening process.

If it is determined in step 063AKS523 that the miss area passage switch 063AK24 is on (step 063AKS523; Yes), or if it is determined in step 063AKS521 that the time-saving flag is on (step 063AKS521; Yes), the CPU 103 sets the miss area passage flag to the on state (step 063AKS524) and ends the small win opening process.

In this way, in this embodiment, even if it is determined that the time-saving area passage switch 063AK24 is on (step 063AKS520; Yes), when it is determined that the time-saving flag is on (step 063AKS521; Yes), the time-saving area passage flag is not set to the on state, and the failure area passage flag is set to the on state.

In step 063AKS512, if it is determined that the gaming ball has passed through either the jackpot area 063AK19, the time-saving area 063AK20 or the miss area 063AK21 (step 063AKS512; Yes), the CPU 103 determines whether all gaming balls that entered the large prize opening 063AK4 during the small prize game state have been discharged outside the special variable prize ball device 7 (step 063AKS513). In step 063AKS513, the CPU 103 determines whether all of the game balls that entered the large prize opening 063AK4 have been discharged outside the special variable prize ball device 7, depending on whether the total of the number of game balls detected by the discharge count switch 063AK16 (the number of times game balls are detected by the discharge count switch 063AK16), the number of game balls detected by the jackpot area discharge count switch (the number of times game balls are detected by the jackpot area discharge count switch), the number of game balls detected by the time-saving area discharge count switch (the number of times game balls are detected by the time-saving area discharge count switch), and the number of game balls detected by the loss area discharge count switch (the number of times game balls are detected by the loss area discharge count switch) matches the number of game balls detected by the large prize opening switch 063AK5.

If it is determined in step 063AKS513 that all of the game balls that entered the large winning opening 063AK4 have not been discharged outside the special variable winning ball device 7 (step 063AKS513; No), the CPU 103 ends the small win open process. On the other hand, if it is determined that all of the game balls that entered the large winning opening 063AK4 have been discharged outside the special variable winning ball device 7 (step 063AKS513; Yes), the CPU 103 controls the distribution member 063AK28 to end its operation according to the distribution member operation pattern (step 063AKS514).

After executing the processing of step 063AKS514, the CPU 103 performs settings to send a hit end designation command (small hit ending command) corresponding to the small hit from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 (step 063AKS515).

In step 063AKS515, the CPU 103 transmits a performance control command as a hit end designation command corresponding to a small hit, indicating whether the game state will be controlled to a big hit game state or a time-saving game state after the small hit game state ends, the type of big hit if the game state is controlled to a big hit game state after the small hit game state ends, and the number of variable displays that will be controlled to the time-saving game state if the game state is controlled to the time-saving game state after the small hit game state ends.

Specifically, in step 063AK515, the CPU 103 refers to the hit end designation command determination table shown in FIG. 19-24 to select one of small hit end designation commands 1 to 5 as the hit end designation command corresponding to the small hit, depending on the state of the big hit area passing flag, the time-saving area passing flag, and the miss area passing flag, and the type of small hit, and performs settings to send the selected command.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 19-24, when the big win area passing flag is set to the ON state and the small win type is "small win A", a small win end designation command 1 is selected, which indicates that the game state will be controlled to the big win A big win game state after the small win game state ends. When the big win area passing flag is set to the ON state and the small win type is "small win B", a small win end designation command 2 is selected, which indicates that the game state will be controlled to the big win B big win game state after the small win game state ends. When the time-saving area passing flag is set to the ON state and the small win type is "small win C", a small win end designation command 3 is selected, which indicates that the game state will be controlled to the time-saving state for the period until the variable display is executed five times after the small win game state ends. If the time-saving area passing flag is set to the on state and the small win type is "small win D", a small win end command 4 is sent after the small win game state ends, indicating that the time-saving state will be controlled for the period until the variable display is executed once. If the loss area passing flag is set to the on state, regardless of the small win type, a small win end command 5 is sent after the small win game state ends, indicating that no control to change the game state will be performed.

Returning to FIG. 19-23, after executing the processing of step 063AKS515, the CPU 103 sets the passing notification effect waiting time to one of the above-mentioned first to third special times (step 063AKS516). The passing notification effect waiting time corresponds to the passing notification effect time. In step 063AKS516, the CPU 103 determines the passing notification effect waiting time to one of the first to third special times according to the state of the jackpot area passing flag, the time-saving area passing flag, and the miss area passing flag by referring to the passing notification effect waiting time determination table shown in FIG. 19-25, and sets the passing notification effect waiting time timer value, which is the stored value of the passing notification effect waiting time timer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, to a value corresponding to the determined passing notification effect waiting time.

As shown in FIG. 19-25, in this embodiment, when the jackpot area passing flag is set to the on state, the passing notification effect waiting time is set to the third special time, when the time-saving area passing flag is set to the on state, the passing notification effect waiting time is set to the second special time, and when the loss area passing flag is set to the on state, the passing notification effect waiting time is set to the first special time.

Returning to FIG. 19-23, after executing the processing of step 063AKS516, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special chart process flag to "10", which corresponds to the small win end processing (step 063AKS517), and ends the small win open processing.

Figure 19-26 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing executed in step S120 of the special pattern process processing as a small win end processing for feature part 063AK.

When the small win end process starts, the CPU 103 first determines whether the passing notification effect waiting time has elapsed (step 063AKS601). In step 063AKS601, the CPU 103 updates the passing notification effect waiting time timer value by subtracting 1, and determines whether the passing notification effect waiting time has elapsed depending on whether the updated passing notification effect waiting time timer value is "0". If it is determined that the passing notification effect waiting time has not elapsed (step 063KS601; No), the CPU 103 ends the small win end process.

When it is determined that the waiting time for the passing notification effect has elapsed (step 063AKS617), the CPU 103 determines whether the jackpot area passing flag is on or not (step 063AKS602). When it is determined that the jackpot area passing flag is on (step 063AKS602; Yes), the CPU 103 clears the jackpot area passing flag and sets it to the off state (step 063AKS603).

After executing the process of step 063AKS603, the CPU 103 sets the jackpot type buffer value according to the small jackpot type (step 063AKS604). Specifically, in step 063AKS604, if the small jackpot type is "small jackpot A" that is controlled to the jackpot game state of "jackpot A" after the small jackpot game state ends, the jackpot type buffer value is set to "0" corresponding to "jackpot A", while if the small jackpot type is "small jackpot B" that is controlled to the jackpot game state of "jackpot B" after the small jackpot game state ends, the jackpot type buffer value is set to "1" corresponding to "jackpot B". The small jackpot type may be identified based on the small jackpot type buffer value.

After executing the process of step 063AKS604, the CPU 103 sets a predetermined time as the jackpot start performance waiting time (step 063AKS605), and sets the main board 11 to send a jackpot start designation command corresponding to the jackpot to the performance control board 12 (step 063AKS606). After executing the process of step 063AKS606, the CPU 103 clears the time-saving flag to the off state (step 063AKS607), and sets the main board 11 to send a game state designation command indicating the normal state to the performance control board 12 (step 063AKS608). Next, the CPU 103 sets the opening count value to a value corresponding to the upper limit number of rounds in the jackpot game state (step 063AKS609), and clears the time-saving count counter (063AKS610). After that, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special chart process flag to "4", which corresponds to the pre-big win release processing (step 063AKS611), and then ends the small win end processing.

If it is determined in step 063AKS602 that the jackpot area passing flag is not on (step 063AKS602; No), the CPU 103 determines whether the time-saving area passing flag is on or not (step 063AKS612). If it is determined that the time-saving area passing flag is on (step 063AKS612; Yes), the CPU 103 clears the time-saving area passing flag and sets it to the off state (step 063AKS613).

After executing the process of step 063AKS613, the CPU 103 sets the time-saving flag to the ON state (step 063AKS614) and sets the time-saving count value according to the small win type (step 063AKS615). Specifically, in step 063AKS615, if the small win type is "small win C" in which the time-saving state is controlled for the period until the variable display is executed five times after the small win game state ends, the time-saving count value is set to "5", while if the small win type is "small win D" in which the time-saving state is controlled for the period until the variable display is executed one time after the small win game state ends, the time-saving count value is set to "1". The small win type may be specified based on the small win type buffer value. After executing the processing of step 063AKS615, the CPU 103 performs settings to send a game state designation command indicating the time-saving state from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 (step 063AKS616).

If it is determined in step 063AKS612 that the time-saving area passage flag is not on (step 063AKS612; No), the CPU 103 clears the failure area passage flag and sets it to the off state (step 063AKS617).

After performing the processing of step 063AKS616 or step 063AKS617, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special pattern process flag to "0", which is the value corresponding to the normal processing of the special pattern (step 063AKS618), and then ends the small win end processing.

As described above, in this embodiment, the small win end process is started in response to the end of the small win open process in which the large prize opening is opened, and when the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20 (step 063AKS612; Yes), the time-saving flag is set to the ON state in the small win end process (step 063AKS614). With this configuration, when the large prize opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state, if the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20, it is configured not to be controlled to the time-saving state until the large prize opening 063AK4 is controlled to the closed state.

In the feature section 063AK, in the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. 4, the above-mentioned processes are executed as processes in the special symbol process processing of step S25, and in the information output processing of step S23, the process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 18-36 is executed as in the feature section 059AK. With this configuration, in the information output processing of step S23, in the feature section 063AK, in addition to the jackpot signal 1 indicating that a jackpot is occurring, and the jackpot signal 2 indicating that a jackpot is occurring or that a time-saving state is occurring (that a special prize is occurring), the jackpot signal 3 indicating that a time-saving state is occurring is output to an external device such as a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko game machine 1, as in the feature section 059AK.

With this configuration, the external device can suitably identify the time-saving state or consecutive win state in either case, whether the time-saving state is controlled based on the end of a big win game state, or the time-saving state is controlled after the end of a small win game state based on the game ball that entered the big win port 063AK4 during a small win game state passing through the time-saving area 063AK4 in the normal state.

Figure 19-27 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing executed in step S171 of the performance control process as variable display start setting processing for feature part 063AK.

When the variable display start setting process is started, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether the sub-side time-saving flag provided in a specified area of the RAM 122 is on or not (step 063AKS701). The sub-side time-saving flag is a flag indicating that the display is controlled to a time-saving state. If the sub-side time-saving flag is determined to be on (step 063AKS701; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 updates the sub-side time-saving count value, which is the stored value of the sub-side time-saving count counter provided in a specified area of the RAM 122, by subtracting 1 (step 063AKS702). The sub-side time-saving count counter counts the number of time-saving times (the remaining number of times the variable display is controlled to a time-saving state).

After executing the processing of step 063AKS702, the performance control CPU 120 performs settings to execute a time-saving count notification performance that notifies the number of time-saving times (step 063AKS703). In this embodiment, as the time-saving count notification performance, the device is configured to be able to execute a performance in which a time-saving count notification image indicating the number of time-saving times is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. In the time-saving count notification performance, the time-saving count notification image is displayed in a display mode indicating the current number of time-saving times based on the sub-side time-saving count value. In this embodiment, the time-saving count notification performance is executed when a variable display is being executed in the time-saving state.

After executing the processing of step 063AKS703, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether or not the right-hit promotion performance flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 is on (step 063AKS704). If it is judged that the right-hit promotion performance flag is not on (step 063AKS704; No), the performance control CPU 120 sets the right-hit promotion performance flag to the on state (step 063AKS705) and performs control to start the right-hit promotion performance (step 063AKS706).

After executing the process of step 063AKS706, the presentation control CPU 120 performs settings to execute a time-saving entry presentation that notifies the player that control to the time-saving state has started (control from the normal state to the time-saving state) (step 063AKS707). In this embodiment, as the time-saving entry presentation, a presentation is executed in which a first time-saving entry image showing the message "Time-saving!" and a second time-saving entry image showing the message "Aim to the right and put the ball in the electric chute!" are displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. The second time-saving entry image is a presentation image that encourages the player to place a game ball in the variable winning ball device 6B. In this embodiment, the time-saving entry presentation is executed when the variable display is executed for the first time after control from the normal state to the time-saving state.

After executing the processing of step 063AKS707, or if it is determined in step 063AKS701 that the sub-side time-saving flag is not on (step 063AKS701; No), or if it is determined in step 063AKS704 that the right-hit promotion performance flag is on (step 063AKS704; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the special chart display result is a "jackpot" or not based on the display result designation command sent from the main board 11 (step 063AKS708). If it is determined that the special chart display result is a "jackpot" (step 063AKS708; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 determines the combination of decorative patterns that will be a jackpot combination as the final stop pattern that will be the final decorative pattern, which is the variable display result of the decorative patterns (step 063AKS709). In step 063AKS709, the performance control CPU 120 determines the decorative symbol of the jackpot combination as the confirmed decorative symbol, for example by performing a random number lottery with reference to a decorative symbol determination table for the jackpot combination that is stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 121.

In step 063AKS708, if it is determined that the special chart display result is not a "big win" (step 063AKS708; No), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the special chart display result is a "small win" or not based on the display result designation command sent from the main board 11 (step 063AKS710). If it is determined that the special chart display result is not a "small win" (step 063AKS710; No), the performance control CPU 120 determines a combination of decorative patterns that will be a losing combination as the confirmed decorative pattern (step 063AKS711). In step 063AKS711, the performance control CPU 120 determines the decorative patterns of the losing combination as the confirmed decorative pattern, for example, by performing a random number lottery with reference to a decorative pattern determination table for losing combinations that is stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 121.

If it is determined in step 063AKS710 that the special chart display result is a "small win" (step 063AKS710; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the sub-side time-saving flag is on (step 063AKS712).

If it is determined that the sub-side time-saving flag is not set to the on state (step 063AKS712; No), the performance control CPU 120 performs a random number lottery using the normal state small win fixed decoration pattern determination table shown in FIG. 19-28(b) to determine one of the first small win pattern to the fifth small win pattern shown in FIG. 19-28(a) as the fixed decoration pattern (final stop pattern) that will be the small win combination, depending on whether the small win type is "small win A" to "small win E" (step 063AKS713). Whether the small win type is "small win A" to "small win E" can be determined based on the display result designation command sent from the main board 11. On the other hand, if it is determined that the sub-side time-saving flag is set to the on state (step 063AKS712; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 performs a random number lottery using the time-saving state small win fixed decorative pattern determination table shown in FIG. 19-28(c) to determine one of the first small win pattern to the fifth small win pattern shown in FIG. 19-28(a) as the fixed decorative pattern (final stopping pattern) that will be the small win combination, depending on whether the small win type is "small win A" to "small win E" (step 063AKS714).

The first small win pattern shown in FIG. 19-28(a) is a combination of decorative patterns in which a decorative pattern showing the number "7" is displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R, and a rectangular decorative pattern in red showing the message "V" suggesting that the game will be controlled to a big win game state is displayed in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C. The second small win pattern is a combination of decorative patterns in which a decorative pattern showing the number "7" is displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R, and a rectangular decorative pattern in blue showing the message "V" suggesting that the game will be controlled to a big win game state is displayed in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C. The third small win pattern is a combination of decorative patterns in which a decorative pattern showing the number "7" is displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R, and a rectangular decorative pattern in red showing the message "time" suggesting that the game will be controlled to a time-saving state is displayed in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C. The fourth small win pattern is a combination of a number "7" displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R, and a blue rectangular decorative pattern showing the message "time" in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C, which suggests that the game will be controlled to a time-saving state. The fifth small win pattern is a combination of a number "7" displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R, and a white rectangular decorative pattern showing the message "small" in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C. The first small win pattern and the second small win pattern are combinations of decorative patterns suggesting that the game will be controlled to a big win game state. The third small win pattern and the fourth small win pattern are combinations of decorative patterns suggesting that the game will be controlled to a time-saving state.

In the determined decorative pattern determination table for small wins in the normal state shown in Figure 19-28 (b), when the small win type is "small win A" or "small win B" in which the game ball passes through the large win area 063AK19, the determined decorative pattern is determined to be the fourth small win pattern at a higher rate than the fifth small win pattern, the third small win pattern at a higher rate than the fourth small win pattern, the second small win pattern at a higher rate than the third small win pattern, and the first small win pattern at a higher rate than the second small win pattern. With this configuration, the expectation of the game ball passing through the big win area 063AK19 and being controlled to the big win game state after the small win game state ends is higher when the first small win pattern is derived and displayed as the determined decorative pattern than when the second small win pattern is derived and displayed, higher when the second small win pattern is derived and displayed as the determined decorative pattern than when the third small win pattern is derived and displayed, higher when the third small win pattern is derived and displayed as the determined decorative pattern than when the fourth small win pattern is derived and displayed, and higher when the fourth small win pattern is derived and displayed as the determined decorative pattern than when the fifth small win pattern is derived and displayed. With this configuration, the player is made to pay attention to which of the first small win pattern to the fifth small win pattern is derived and displayed as the determined decorative pattern, which can increase the interest in the game.

In addition, the normal state small win fixed decoration pattern determination table is configured so that the fixed decoration pattern can be determined to be the third small win pattern and the fourth small win pattern, which suggest that the game will be controlled to the time-saving state, as shown in FIG. 19-28(b). With this configuration, in the normal state, the third small win pattern or the fourth small win pattern, which suggests that the game will be controlled to the time-saving state, is derived and displayed as the fixed decoration pattern, so that the player can have a sense of anticipation that the game will be controlled to the time-saving state by the game ball passing through the time-saving area 063AK20 and time-saving transition control is performed, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Specifically, in the table for determining the confirmed decorative pattern when a small win occurs in the normal state, as shown in Figure 19-28 (b), when the type of small win is "small win C" or "small win D" in which the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20, the confirmed decorative pattern is determined to be the first small win pattern at a higher rate than the fifth small win pattern, the second small win pattern at a higher rate than the first small win pattern, the fourth small win pattern at a higher rate than the second small win pattern, and the third small win pattern at a higher rate than the fourth small win pattern. With this configuration, the expectation of the game ball passing through the time-saving area 063AK20 and being controlled to the time-saving state after the end of the small win game state is higher when the third small win symbol is derived and displayed as the determined decorative symbol than when the fourth small win symbol is derived and displayed, higher when the fourth small win symbol is derived and displayed as the determined decorative symbol than when the second small win symbol is derived and displayed, higher when the second small win symbol is derived and displayed as the determined decorative symbol than when the first small win symbol is derived and displayed, and higher when the first small win symbol is derived and displayed as the determined decorative symbol than when the fifth small win symbol is derived and displayed. With this configuration, the player is made to pay attention to which of the first small win symbol to the fifth small win symbol is derived and displayed as the determined decorative symbol, which can increase the interest in the game.

In contrast, the time-saving state small win fixed decoration pattern determination table shown in FIG. 19-28(c) is configured so that the fixed decoration pattern is not determined to be the third small win pattern or the fourth small win pattern, which suggest that the game will be controlled to the time-saving state. With this configuration, in the time-saving state, even though time-saving transition control based on the game ball passing through the time-saving area 063AK20 is not performed, the third small win pattern or the fourth small win pattern, which suggests that the game will be controlled to the time-saving state, is derived and displayed as the fixed decoration pattern, preventing the player from having expectations that the game will be controlled to the time-saving state based on the game ball passing through the time-saving area 063AK20, and suppressing a decline in interest in the game. In this way, in this embodiment, the third small win pattern or the fourth small win pattern, which indicates that the game will be controlled to the time-saving state, can be derived and displayed as a confirmed decorative pattern in the normal state, while the game is configured so that the third small win pattern or the fourth small win pattern is not derived and displayed as a confirmed decorative pattern in the time-saving state, allowing for a suitable presentation depending on the state.

Returning to FIG. 19-27, after executing the processing of step 063AKS709, step 063AKS711, step 063AKS713 or step 063AKS714, the performance control CPU 120 determines the performance control pattern (step 063AKS715). In step 063AKS715, the performance control CPU 120 selects one of the multiple types of performance control patterns (performance control patterns during special chart fluctuation) prepared (set) in advance according to the fluctuation pattern indicated by the fluctuation pattern designation command received from the main board 11, and sets it as the performance control pattern to be used. If the setting for executing the time-saving count notification performance is performed in step 063AKS703, in step 063AKS715, the performance control pattern corresponding to the time-saving count notification performance (time-saving count notification performance control pattern) is selected and set as the performance control pattern to be used. If the setting for executing time-saving entry performance control is performed in step 063AKS707, in step 063AKS715, a performance control pattern corresponding to the time-saving entry performance is selected and set as the performance control pattern to be used (time-saving entry performance control pattern).

After executing the processing of step 063AKS715, the performance control CPU 120 sets the initial value of the performance control process timer provided in a specified area of RAM 122 according to the fluctuation pattern indicated by the fluctuation pattern designation command received from the main board 11 (step 063AKS716).

After executing the processing of step 063AKS716, the performance control CPU 120 performs settings to start variable display of decorative patterns, etc. on the screen of the image display device 5 (step 063AKS717). In step 063AKS717, the performance control CPU 120 starts variable display of decorative patterns in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the screen of the image display device 5 by, for example, sending a display control command specified by the display control data included in the performance control pattern determined in step 063AKS715 to the VDP of the display control unit 123.

After executing the processing of step 063AKS717, the performance control CPU 120 performs settings to update the pending display and active display displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 in response to the start of the variable display (step 063AKS718).

After executing the processing of step 063AKS718, the performance control CPU 120 updates the value of the performance process flag to "2", which corresponds to the performance processing during variable display (step 063AKS719), and ends the variable display start setting processing.

Figure 19-29 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S172 of the performance control process as a variable display performance process for feature part 063AK.

When variable display performance processing is started, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether the special chart fluctuation time, which is the variable display time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern, has elapsed, for example, based on the timer value of the performance control process timer (step 063AKS801). Specifically, in step 063AKS801, the performance control CPU 120 updates the timer value of the performance control process timer, for example by subtracting 1, and determines whether an end code has been read out corresponding to the updated timer value from the performance control pattern (performance control pattern during special chart fluctuation) determined in step 063AKS715, thereby determining whether the variable display time has elapsed.

If it is determined that the variable display time has not elapsed (step 063AKS801; No), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is a reach performance period in which a reach performance is executed based on the timer value of the performance control process timer, etc. (step 063AKS802). The reach performance period may be predetermined, for example, in the performance control pattern (performance control pattern during special chart change) determined in step 063AKS715. If it is determined that it is a reach performance period (step 063AKS802; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 performs control to execute the reach performance (step 063AKS803).

After executing the processing of step 063AKS803, or if it is determined in step 063AKS802 that it is not a reach display period (step 063AKS802; No), the display control CPU 120 determines whether it is a time-saving count notification display period in which a time-saving count notification display is executed based on the timer value of the display control process timer, etc. (step 063AKS804). The time-saving count notification display period may be predetermined, for example, in the display control pattern (time-saving count notification display control pattern) determined in step 063AKS715. If it is determined that it is a time-saving count notification display period (step 063AKS804; Yes), the display control CPU 120 controls the execution of the time-saving count notification display (step 063AKS805).

After executing the processing of step 063AKS805, or if it is determined in step 063AKS804 that it is not the time-saving count notification display period (step 063AKS804; No), the display control CPU 120 determines whether it is the time-saving suggestion display period in which the time-saving suggestion display is executed based on the timer value of the display control process timer or the like (step 063AKS806). The time-saving suggestion display period may be predetermined, for example, in the display control pattern (special chart change time display control pattern) determined in step 063AKS715. If it is determined that it is the time-saving suggestion display period (step 063AKS806; Yes), the display control CPU 120 controls the execution of the time-saving suggestion display (step 063AKS807).

After executing the processing of step 063AKS807, or if it is determined in step 063AKS806 that the time-saving indication effect period is not in progress (step 063AKS806; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the time-saving entry effect period in which the time-saving entry effect is executed is in progress based on the timer value of the effect control process timer, etc. (step 063AKS808). The time-saving entry effect period may be predetermined, for example, in the effect control pattern (time-saving entry effect control pattern) determined in step 063AKS715. If it is determined that the time-saving entry effect period is in progress (step 063AKS808; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 controls the execution of the time-saving entry effect (step 063AKS809).

After executing the processing of step 063AKS809, or if it is determined in step 063AKS808 that the time-saving performance period is not in progress (step 063AKS808; No), the performance control CPU 120 performs control to execute performance during variable display, including the variable display operation of the decorative pattern, based on the settings in the performance control pattern determined in step 063AKS715 (step 063AKS810), and ends the performance processing during variable display.

If it is determined in step 063AKS801 that the variable display time has elapsed (step 063AKS801; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a pattern determination command has been received from the main board 11 (step 063AKS811). If it is determined that a pattern determination command has not been received (step 063AKS811; No), the performance control CPU 120 ends the performance processing during variable display.

When it is determined that a pattern determination command has been received (step 063AKS811; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 derives and displays the determined decorative pattern as the final stopping pattern determined in step 063AKS709, step 063AKS711 or step 063AKS712 in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R by transmitting a predetermined display control command to the VDP of the display control unit 123 (step 063AKS812).

After executing the processing of step 063AKS812, the performance control CPU 120 sets a predetermined time as the waiting time for receiving the hit start designation command (step 063AKS813), updates the value of the performance process flag to "3", which is the value corresponding to the special chart hit waiting processing (step 063AKS814), and ends the variable display performance processing.

Figure 19-30 (a) is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S173 of the performance control process as a special chart hit waiting process for feature section 063AK.

When the special winning wait process starts, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether the waiting time for receiving the winning start command has elapsed (step 063AKS901). If it is determined that the waiting time for receiving the winning start command has elapsed (step 063AKS901; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the sub-side time-saving flag is on (step 063AKS902).

When it is determined that the sub-side time-saving flag is on (step 063AKS902; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the sub-side time-saving count value is "0" or not (step 063AKS903). When it is determined that the sub-side time-saving count value is "0" (step 063AKS903; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 clears the sub-side time-saving flag and sets it to the OFF state (step 063AKS904), clears the right-hit promotion performance flag and sets it to the OFF state (step 063AKS905), and then controls to end the right-hit promotion performance (step 063AKS906).

After executing the processing of step 063AKS906, or if it is determined in step 063AKS902 that the sub-side time-saving flag is not on (step 063AKS902; No), or if it is determined in step 063AKS903 that the sub-side time-saving count value is not "0" (step 063AKS903; No), the performance control CPU 120 updates the value of the performance process flag to "0", which is the value corresponding to the variable display start waiting process (step 063AKS907), and ends the special chart hit waiting process.

If it is determined in step 063AKS901 that the waiting time for receiving the winning start command has not elapsed (step 063AKS901; No), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a winning start command corresponding to a jackpot has been received (step 063AKS908).

When it is determined that a hit start designation command corresponding to a jackpot has been received (step 063AKS908; Yes), the CPU 120 for controlling the presentation sets a predetermined time as the jackpot start presentation time (step 063AKS909). In step 063AKS909, the jackpot start presentation time timer value, which is the stored value of the jackpot start presentation time timer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, is set to a value corresponding to the predetermined jackpot start presentation time. After executing the processing of step 063AKS909, the CPU 120 for controlling the presentation starts the jackpot start presentation (step 063AKS910), updates the value of the presentation process flag to "6", which is the value corresponding to the presentation processing during the jackpot (step 063AKS911), and ends the special chart hit waiting process.

If it is determined in step 063AKS908 that a hit start command corresponding to a big hit has not been received (step 063AKS908; No), the CPU 120 for controlling the performance determines whether or not a hit start command corresponding to a small hit has been received (step 063AKS912). If it is determined that a hit start command corresponding to a small hit has not been received (step 063AKS912; No), the CPU 120 for controlling the performance ends the special chart hit waiting process.

When it is determined that a hit start designation command corresponding to a small hit has been received (step 063AKS912; Yes), the presentation control CPU 120 sets the small hit start presentation time to one of the first to third specific times (step 063AKS913). Specifically, in step 063AKS913, the presentation control CPU 120 determines the small hit start presentation time to one of the first to third specific times depending on whether the small hit type is "small hit A" to "small hit E" by referring to the small hit start presentation time determination table shown in FIG. 19-30 (b), and sets the small hit start presentation time timer value, which is the stored value of the small hit start presentation time timer provided in a specified area of the RAM 122, to a value corresponding to the determined small hit start presentation time. The small hit type may be determined based on the display result designation command transmitted from the main board 11.

As shown in FIG. 19-30(b), in this embodiment, if the small hit type is "small hit A" or "small hit B", the small hit start presentation time is set to the third specific time, if the small hit type is "small hit C" or "small hit D", the small hit start presentation time is set to the second specific time, and if the small hit type is "small hit E", the small hit start presentation time is set to the first specific time.

Returning to FIG. 19-30(a), after executing the processing of step 063AKS913, the presentation control CPU 120 performs control to start the small win start presentation (step 063AKS914), updates the value of the presentation process flag to "4", which corresponds to the small win mid-presentation processing (step 063AKS915), and then ends the special chart winning wait processing.

Figure 19-31 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S174 of the presentation control process as a presentation process during a small win for feature part 063AK.

When the small win mid-performance processing starts, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether the small win start performance time set in step 063AKS913 has elapsed (step 063AKS1001). In step 063AKS1001, the small win start performance time timer value is updated by subtracting 1, and whether the small win start performance time has elapsed is determined depending on whether the updated small win start performance time timer value is "0". If it is determined that the small win start performance time has not elapsed (step 063AKS1001; No), the performance control CPU 120 ends the small win mid-performance processing.

If it is determined that the small win start presentation time has elapsed (step 063AKS1001; Yes), the presentation control CPU 120 determines whether the small win start presentation end flag provided in a specified area of the RAM 122 is on or not (step 063AKS1002). If it is determined that the small win start presentation end flag is not on (step 063AKS1002; No), the presentation control CPU 120 performs control to end the small win start presentation (step 063AKS1004) and sets the small win start presentation end flag to the on state (step 063AKS1005).

After executing the processing of step 063AKS1005, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether the sub-side time-saving flag is on or not (step 063AKS1006). If it is judged that the sub-side time-saving flag is not on (step 063AKS1006; No), the performance control CPU 120 performs control to start the normal time passing prompting performance (step 063AKS1007) and ends the small win performance processing. On the other hand, if it is judged that the sub-side time-saving flag is on (step 063AKS1006; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 performs control to start the time-saving time passing prompting performance (step 063AKS1008) and ends the small win performance processing.

If it is determined in step 063AKS1002 that the small win start presentation end flag is on (step 063AKS1002; Yes), the presentation control CPU 120 determines whether or not a win end designation command corresponding to the small win has been received (step 063AKS1003). If it is determined that a win end designation command corresponding to the small win has not been received (step 063AKS1003; No), the presentation control CPU 120 ends the small win presentation processing.

If it is determined that a hit end designation command corresponding to a small hit has been received (step 063AKS1003; Yes), the presentation control CPU 120 clears the small hit start presentation end flag and sets it to the off state (step 063AKS1009), performs control to end the normal time passing prompting presentation or the time-saving time passing prompting presentation that is being executed as the passing prompting presentation (step 063AKS1010), and then updates the value of the presentation process flag to "5", which is the value corresponding to the small hit end presentation processing (step 063AKS1011).

After executing the processing of step 063AKS1011, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether it has received either small hit end designation command 1 or small hit end designation command 2 as the hit end designation command corresponding to the small hit (step 063AKS1012).

When it is determined that either the small win end designation command 1 or the small win end designation command 2 has been received (step 063AKS1012; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 sets the passing notification performance time to the third special time (step 063AKS1013). In step 063AKS1013, the passing notification performance time timer value, which is the stored value of the passing notification performance time timer provided in a specified area of the RAM 122, is set to a value corresponding to the third special time.

After executing the processing of step 063AKS1013, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance judges whether the sub-side time-saving flag is on or not (step 063AKS1014). If it is judged that the sub-side time-saving flag is not on (step 063AKS1014; No), the CPU 120 for controlling the performance performs control to start the notification of passage of the jackpot area during normal play (step 063AKS1015) and ends the processing of the performance during the small win. If it is judged that the sub-side time-saving flag is on (step 063AKS1014; Yes), the CPU 120 for controlling the performance performs control to start the notification of passage of the jackpot area during time-saving play (step 063AKS1016) and ends the processing of the performance during the small win.

If it is determined in step 063AKS1012 that neither small win end designation command 1 nor small win end designation command 2 has been received (step 063AKS1012; No), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has received either small win end designation command 3 or small win end designation command 4 as the win end designation command corresponding to the small win (step 063AKS1017).

When it is determined that either the small win end designation command 3 or the small win end designation command 4 has been received (step 063AKS1017; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 sets the passing notification performance time to the second special time (step 063AKS1018). In step 063AKS1018, the passing notification performance time timer value is set to a value corresponding to the second special time. After executing the processing of step 063AKS1018, the performance control CPU 120 performs control to start the time-saving area passing notification performance (step 063AKS1019), and ends the small win performance processing.

If it is determined in step 063AKS1017 that neither the small win end designation command 3 nor the small win end designation command 4 has been received (step 063AKS1017; No), the performance control CPU 120 sets the passing notification performance time to the first special time (step 063AKS1020). In step 063AKS1020, the passing notification performance time timer value is set to a value corresponding to the first special time. After executing the processing of step 063AKS1020, the performance control CPU 120 performs control to start the miss area passing notification performance (step 063AKS1021), and ends the small win performance processing.

Figure 19-32 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing executed in step S175 of the presentation control process as a small win end presentation process for feature part 063AK.

When the small win end presentation processing is started, the presentation control CPU 120 judges whether the passing notification presentation time set in step 063AKS1013, step 063AKS1018, or step 063AKS1020 has elapsed (step 063AKS1101). In step 063AKS1101, the passing notification presentation time timer value is updated by subtracting 1, and whether the passing notification presentation time has elapsed is judged depending on whether the updated passing notification presentation time timer value is "0". If it is judged that the passing notification presentation time has not elapsed (step 063AKS1101; No), the presentation control CPU 120 ends the small win end presentation processing.

When it is determined that the passing notification presentation time has elapsed (step 063AKS1101; Yes), the presentation control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has received either the small win end designation command 1 or the small win end designation command 2 as the hit end designation command corresponding to the small win (step 063AKS1102). When it is determined that either the small win end designation command 1 or the small win end designation command 2 has been received (step 063AKS1102; Yes), the presentation control CPU 120 sets a predetermined time as the hit start designation command reception waiting time (step 063AKS1103), updates the value of the presentation process flag to "3", which is the value corresponding to the special chart hit waiting process (step 063AKS1104), and ends the small win end presentation process.

If it is determined in step 063AKS1102 that neither the small hit end designation command 1 nor the small hit end designation command 2 has been received (step 063AKS1102; No), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has received either the small hit end designation command 3 or the small hit end designation command 4 as the hit end designation command corresponding to the small hit (step 063AKS1105). If it is determined that either the small hit end designation command 3 or the small hit end designation command 4 has been received (step 063AKS1105; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 sets the sub-side time reduction flag to the on state (step 063AKS1106).

After executing the process of step 063AKS1106, the performance control CPU 120 sets the sub-side time-saving count value based on whether it has received the small win end designation command 3 or the small win end designation command 4 as the win end designation command corresponding to the small win (step 063AKS1107). If it has received the small win end designation command 3 indicating that the time-saving state will be controlled for the period until the variable display is executed five times after the end of the small win game state, then in step 063AKS1107, it sets the sub-side time-saving count value to "5". If it has received the small win end designation command 4 indicating that the time-saving state will be controlled for the period until the variable display is executed one time after the end of the small win game state, then in step 063AKS1107, it sets the sub-side time-saving count value to "1".

If it is determined in step 063AKS1105 that neither the small win end designation command 3 nor the small win end designation command 4 has been received (step 063AKS1105; No), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the sub-side time-saving flag is on (step 063AKS1108). If it is determined that the sub-side time-saving flag is on (step 063AKS1108; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the sub-side time-saving count value is "0" (step 063AKS1109).

If it is determined that the sub-side time-saving count value is "0" (step 063AKS1109; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 clears the sub-side time-saving flag and sets it to the OFF state (step 063AKS1110), clears the right-hit promotion performance flag and sets it to the OFF state (step 063AKS1111), and then controls the right-hit promotion performance to end (step 063AKS1112).

After executing the processing of step 063AKS1107 or step 063AKS1112, or if it is determined in step 063AKS1108 that the sub-side time-saving flag is not on (step 063AKS1108; No), or if it is determined in step 063AKS1109 that the sub-side time-saving count value is not "0" (step 063AKS1109; No), the presentation control CPU 120 updates the value of the presentation process flag to "0", which is the value corresponding to the variable display start waiting process (step 063AKS1113), and ends the small win end presentation process.

Below, examples of performance operations related to feature part 063AK are explained with reference to Figures 19-33 to 19-36.

First, referring to Fig. 19-33 and Fig. 19-34, an example of the performance operation when a small win variation is executed in the normal state will be described. Specifically, below, an example will be described in which a small win variation is executed in the normal state, and during the small win variation, the reach performance of Super Reach A and the time-saving suggestion performance are executed, and the third small win pattern is derived and displayed as the confirmed decoration pattern.

Figure 19-33(a) shows a state in which a losing symbol ("135") is displayed stationary in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 in the normal state. Figure 19-33(b) shows a state in which a small win fluctuation has started in the normal state, and variable display of decorative symbols is being performed in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Figure 19-33 (c) shows a state in which a reach has been achieved and a reach effect for Super Reach A is being performed in which a character image AK6 representing character A is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

Figure 19-33(d) shows a state in which a time-saving suggestion effect has started and a predetermined losing symbol ("767") is temporarily displayed in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Figure 19-24(e) shows a state in which the decorative symbol is re-variably displayed in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C during the time-saving suggestion effect. Figure 19-33(f) shows a state in which a time-saving suggestion symbol is temporarily displayed in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R during the time-saving suggestion effect. Figure 19-33(g) shows a state in which the decorative symbol is re-variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R during the time-saving suggestion effect.

Figure 19-33 (h) shows the state in which the third small win pattern is derived and displayed as a confirmed decorative pattern in each of the "left", "center", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the small win variation has ended.

Figure 19-33(i) shows a state in which control to the small win game state has begun, and a small win start effect is being executed in which a right arrow image AK8, which has the shape of an arrow pointing to the right and shows the message "Aim to the right!", and a small win start image AK9, which shows the shape of the special variable winning ball device 7 and shows the message "Put the ball here!" are displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. In the state shown in Figure 19-33(i), in response to the start of control to the small win game state, a right hit promotion effect is started, and a right hit promotion image AK7, which shows an arrow pointing to the right, is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

In the normal state, the performance operation shown in FIG. 19-33(i) is executed, and then the performance operation shown in FIG. 19-34(a) is executed. FIG. 19-34(a) shows the state in which the normal time passing prompting performance is executed. In the normal time passing prompting performance, as shown in FIG. 19-34(a), the screen of the image display device 5 displays the normal time passing prompting image AK1 including the jackpot area passing prompting image AK2, the time-saving area passing prompting image AK3, and the miss area passing prompting image AK4, and the jackpot area light emitting unit 063AK25, the time-saving area light emitting unit 063AK26, and the miss area light emitting unit 063AK27 provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 are illuminated, and the normal time passing prompting sound showing the message "Is it a jackpot? Is it a time-saving? Is it a miss?" is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

The following describes the performance that occurs when the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19 during the normal passing incentive performance in the normal state.

In the normal state, when the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19, the presentation operation shown in FIG. 19-34(a) ends, and the presentation operation shown in FIG. 19-34(b) is executed. FIG. 19-34(b) shows the state in which the normal jackpot area passage notification presentation is executed, and the normal jackpot area passage notification image AK10 showing the message "V" is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

Figure 19-34(c) shows a state in which, after the small win game state ends, the game is controlled to the big win game state, and a performance is executed on the screen of the image display device 5 to display, as a big win start performance, a first big win start image AK11 in the shape of an arrow pointing to the right and showing the message "Aim right!", and a second big win start image AK12 showing the message "Put the ball in the attacker!". The second big win start image AK12 is a performance image that encourages the player to win the game ball in the special variable winning ball device 7. In the state shown in Figure 19-34(c), the right hit promotion performance is executed following the time when the game was controlled to the small win game state, and the right hit promotion image AK7 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

Next, we will explain the presentation operation that occurs when the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20 while the normal passing incentive presentation is being executed in the normal state.

In the normal state, when the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20, the presentation operation shown in FIG. 19-34(a) ends, and the presentation operation shown in FIG. 19-34(d) is executed. FIG. 19-34(d) shows a state in which the time-saving area passage notification presentation is executed, and a time-saving area passage notification image AK13 showing the message "Lucky!" is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

Figure 19-34 (e) shows a state in which, after the small win game state ends, the normal state is controlled to the time-saving state in response to the start of the next variable display, and a time-saving entry effect is executed in which a first time-saving entry image AK14 showing the message "Time-saving!" and a second time-saving entry image AK15 showing the message "Aim to the right and put the ball in the electric chute!" are displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. In the state shown in Figure 19-34 (e), a right-hit promotion effect is executed following the control to the small win game state, and a right-hit promotion image AK7 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. Also, in the state shown in Figure 19-34 (e), a time-saving count notification effect is executed in response to the control to the time-saving state, and a time-saving count notification image AK16 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 in a display mode indicating that the number of time-saving times is four.

Next, we will explain the presentation operation that occurs when the game ball passes through the miss area 063AK21 while the normal passing incentive presentation is being executed in the normal state.

In the normal state, when the game ball passes through the losing area 063AK21, the presentation operation shown in FIG. 19-34(a) ends and the presentation operation shown in FIG. 19-34(f) is executed. FIG. 19-34(f) shows the state in which the losing area passing notification presentation is executed and the losing area passing notification image AK17 showing the message "Too bad!" is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

Figure 19-34 (g) shows the state in which, after the small win game state ends, when the game state is controlled to the normal state without any change, the next variable display starts and variable display is being performed in each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the "left," "center," and "right."

Below, referring to Figures 19-35 and 19-36, we will explain an example of the performance operation when a small win variation is executed in the time-saving state. Specifically, we will explain the case where a small win variation is executed in the time-saving state, the reach performance of Super Reach A is executed during the small win variation, and the third small win pattern is derived and displayed as the confirmed decoration pattern.

Figure 19-35(a) shows a state in which a losing symbol ("135") is displayed in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5 during time-saving mode. In the state shown in Figure 19-35(a), a right-hit promotion effect is being executed, and a right-hit promotion image AK7 is being displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. Also, in the state shown in Figure 19-35(a), a time-saving count notification effect is being executed, and a time-saving count notification image AK16 is being displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 in a display mode indicating that the number of time-saving times is four.

Figure 19-35(b) shows a state in which, in the time-saving state, small win fluctuation has started and variable display of decorative symbols is being executed in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In the state shown in Figure 19-35(b), the display mode of the time-saving count notification image AK16 is updated in response to the start of variable display, and is displayed in a display mode indicating that the time-saving count is 3.

Figure 19-35 (c) shows a state in which a reach has been achieved, the reach performance of super reach A is executed, and a character image AK6 representing character A is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

Figure 19-35 (d) shows the state where the second small win pattern is derived and displayed as a confirmed decorative pattern in each of the "left", "center", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the small win variation has ended.

Figure 19-35 (e) shows a state in which control to a small win game state has begun, a small win start effect has been executed, and a right arrow image AK8 and a start image AK9 are displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. In the state shown in Figure 19-35 (e), in response to the start of control to a small win game state, the right hit promotion effect continues to be executed, and a right hit promotion image AK7 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

In the time-saving state, the performance operation shown in FIG. 19-35(e) is executed, and then the performance operation shown in FIG. 19-36(a) is executed. FIG. 19-36(a) shows the state in which the time-saving time passing prompting performance is executed. In the time-saving time passing prompting performance, as shown in FIG. 19-36(a), a time-saving time passing prompting image AK5 including a jackpot area passing prompting image AK2 and a miss area passing prompting image AK4 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, and the jackpot area light-emitting unit 063AK25 and the miss area light-emitting unit 063AK27 are illuminated without illuminating the time-saving area light-emitting unit 063AK26 provided in the special variable winning ball device 7, and a time-saving time passing prompting sound showing the message "Is it a jackpot? Is it a miss?" is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

The following describes the performance that occurs when the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19 during the time-saving mode while the time-saving passage teasing performance is being executed.

When the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19 during the time-saving mode, the presentation operation shown in FIG. 19-36(a) ends, and the presentation operation shown in FIG. 19-36(b) is executed. FIG. 19-36(b) shows the state in which the time-saving jackpot area passing notification presentation is executed, and the time-saving jackpot area passing notification image AK18 showing the message "BONUS!" is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

Figure 19-36 (c) shows a state in which, after the small win game state ends, the game state is controlled to a big win game state, a big win start effect is executed, and the first big win start image AK11 and the second big win start image AK12 are displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. In the state shown in Figure 19-36 (c), the right hit promotion effect is executed following the state when the game state was controlled to a small win game state, and the right hit promotion image AK7 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

Next, we will explain the presentation operation when the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20 or the miss area 063AK21 while the time-saving time passing teasing presentation is being executed in the time-saving state. In the time-saving state, the same presentation operation is executed when the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20 and when the game ball passes through the miss area 063AK21.

When the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK or the loss area 063AK21 in the time-saving state, the presentation operation shown in FIG. 19-36(a) ends, and the presentation operation shown in FIG. 19-36(d) is executed. FIG. 19-36(d) shows the state in which the loss area passing notification presentation is executed and the loss area passing notification image AK17 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

Figure 19-36 (e) shows a state in which, after the small win game state ends, when the game state is controlled to the time-saving state without changing, the next variable display starts, and the variable display is executed in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In the state shown in Figure 19-36 (e), the display mode of the time-saving count notification image AK16 is updated in response to the start of the variable display, and is displayed in a display mode indicating that the time-saving count is two. Also, in the state shown in Figure 19-36 (e), the right-hit promotion performance is executed following the control of the small win game state, and the right-hit promotion image AK7 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

As explained above, in the characteristic part 063AK, when in the normal state, a small win pattern (special display result) is derived and displayed as a confirmed special pattern in the special chart game, and when the large winning opening 063AK4 formed in the special variable winning ball device 7 (variable means) is controlled to an open state, if the game ball (game medium) passes through the time-saving area 063AK20 (special area), time-saving transition control is performed based on the passage, and control is performed from the normal state to the time-saving state (special state); on the other hand, when in the time-saving state, a small win pattern is derived and displayed as a confirmed special pattern in the special chart game, and when the large winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to an open state, if the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20, time-saving transition control is not performed based on the passage. Furthermore, in the characteristic section 063AK, when a small winning symbol is derived and displayed in the special game in the normal state and the large winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to be in an open state, and the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20, different effects can be executed, and when a small winning symbol is derived and displayed in the special game in the time-saving state and the large winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to be in an open state, and the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20, the characteristic section 063AK is configured to be able to execute different effects. With this configuration, it is possible to perform suitable control according to the state.

In addition, the feature section 063AK is configured to be able to execute the same effect when the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20 in the time-saving state and when the game ball does not pass through either the jackpot area 063AK19 or the time-saving area 063AK20 in the time-saving state. This configuration can prevent a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, the feature section 063AK is configured to be able to execute different effects when the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19 in the time-saving state and when the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19 in the normal state. This configuration can increase interest in the game.

In addition, in the feature section 063AK, different effects can be executed during variable display when a small win symbol is derived and displayed in the special game in the normal state and when a small win symbol is derived and displayed in the special game in the time-saving state. With this configuration, it is possible to execute an appropriate effect according to the state.

In addition, in the feature section 063AK, when a small win symbol is derived and displayed in the special game in the normal state, a time-saving suggestion effect that suggests that the game will be controlled to a time-saving state can be executed during execution of the variable display as an effect that suggests that the small win symbol will be derived and displayed as a confirmed special symbol. With this configuration, a variety of effects can be executed, increasing interest in the game.

In addition, in feature unit 063AK, when a small win pattern is derived and displayed as a confirmed special pattern in the second special game, the time-saving state is controlled at a higher rate than when a small win pattern is derived and displayed as a confirmed special pattern in the first special game. This configuration allows the player to pay attention to whether a small win pattern is derived and displayed as a confirmed special pattern in the second special game, thereby increasing interest in the game.

This invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 does not have to have all of the technical features shown in the above embodiment, but may have a part of the configuration shown in the above embodiment so as to solve at least one problem in the prior art.

In the above embodiment, as a pre-reading preview performance, the display mode of the reserved display displayed on the image display device 5 may be displayed in a display mode different from the display mode during normal times, so that a reserved display change performance can be executed that notifies the player that the variable display corresponding to the reserved display will be controlled to a small win game state, or that a game ball that has entered the large winning opening 063AK4, which is controlled to an open state in the small win game state, will pass through either the large win area 063AK19, the time-saving area 063AK20, or the loss area 063AK21.

For example, the display color of the reserve display corresponding to the variable display that has not yet started can be changed from the normal white color to blue, green, or red by the reserve display change effect, thereby making it possible to recognize the change in the display state of the reserve display and to indicate that the game is being controlled to a small win game state, or that the game ball that has entered the large winning hole 063AK4, which is controlled to an open state in the small win game state, will pass through either the large win area 063AK19, the time-saving area 063AK20, or the loss area 063AK21.

Specifically, when the reserve display change performance is configured to be executable as a pre-reading notice, a pre-reading judgment may be made in the start winning judgment process executed in step S101 of the special pattern process processing based on the occurrence of a start winning. In the pre-reading judgment, for example, a random number lottery may be performed by referring to the first special pattern display result determination table shown in FIG. 19-12(a) or the second special pattern display result determination table shown in FIG. 19-12(b) to perform a pre-reading judgment process as to whether the variable display result is a "big win", a "small win", or a "miss", or if the variable display result is pre-read and judged to be a "small win", a random number lottery may be performed by referring to the small win type determination table shown in FIG. 19-14(b) to perform a pre-reading judgment process as to which of "small win A" to "small win E" the small win type will be. After that, in the start winning judgment process, a setting may be made to send a start winning command indicating the result of the pre-reading judgment.

The start winning command that has been set for transmission in the start winning determination process is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 by, for example, executing a command control process in step S27 of the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 4. The start winning command transmitted from the main board 11 may be stored in a start winning command buffer provided in a specified area of RAM 122 by, for example, executing a command analysis process in step S75 of the performance control main process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 14.

In this case, in the pre-reading preview setting process executed in step S161 of the performance control process, depending on the reception of the start winning command from the main board 11, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the hold display change performance as a pre-reading preview performance, and the execution mode.

When the hold memory stored when deciding whether or not to execute the hold display change performance and the execution mode includes a hold for which the variable display result is a "big hit" and a hold for which the variable display result is a "small hit" and the small hit type is a "small hit C" or "small hit D" in which the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20, the variable display result and the change pattern may differ between the time of the pre-read and the time of the execution of the variable display corresponding to the hold that is the pre-reading target, due to the change from the normal state to the time-saving state after the end of the variable display that is executed first, that is, before the execution of the variable display corresponding to the hold that is the pre-reading target. In such a case, an inconsistency occurs between the suggested content of the hold display change performance as a pre-reading notification performance and the actual variable display result and change pattern, which may cause the player to distrust and reduce interest in the game.

Therefore, if the stored reserves include either a reserve for which the variable display result is a "big win" or a reserve for which the variable display result is a "small win" and the small win type is "small win C" or "small win D", the execution of the reserve display change presentation may be restricted. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

For example, in the pre-reading notice setting process, if the reserved items stored do not include either a reserved item whose variable display result is a "big hit" or a reserved item whose variable display result is a "small hit" and whose small hit type is "small hit C" or "small hit D", the execution or non-execution of the reserved display change presentation and the execution mode may be determined according to the variable display result and the small hit type in accordance with the determination ratio shown in the normal reserve change determination table shown in FIG. 19-37(a). On the other hand, if the reserved items stored include either a reserved item whose variable display result is a "big hit" or a reserved item whose variable display result is a "small hit" and whose small hit type is "small hit C" or "small hit D", the execution or non-execution of the reserved display change presentation and the execution mode may be determined according to the variable display result and the small hit type in accordance with the determination ratio shown in the normal reserve change determination table shown in the limit reserve change determination table shown in FIG. 19-37(b). Whether the stored reserves include reserves for which the variable display result is a "big win" and reserves for which the variable display result is a "small win" and the small win type is "small win C" or "small win D" can be determined by checking the contents of the start winning buffer.

In the normal reserve change determination table, as shown in FIG. 19-37(a), when the variable display result is a "jackpot", the display mode of the reserve display is determined to be blue at a higher rate than when the reserve display change performance is not executed (white), the display mode of the reserve display is determined to be green at a higher rate than when the reserve display is blue, and the display mode of the reserve display is determined to be red at a higher rate than when the reserve display is green. With this configuration, the jackpot expectation is higher when the reserve display is displayed in red than when it is displayed in green, higher when the reserve display is displayed in green than when it is displayed in blue, and higher when the reserve display is displayed in blue than when it is displayed in white (when the reserve display change performance is not executed). In contrast, in the restricted reserve change determination table, as shown in FIG. 19-37(b), the execution of the reserve display change performance in which the jackpot expectation is green or higher is restricted. Note that in the example shown in FIG. 19-37(b), the reserve display change performance in which the reserve display is displayed in blue can be executed, but it may be restricted to "no execution" only.

In the normal reserve change determination table shown in FIG. 19-37(a) and the limit reserve change determination table shown in FIG. 19-37(b), an example is shown in which when the variable display result is a "small win", the display mode is determined to be the same as when the variable display result is a "big win", but this is only one example, and there may be a display mode (such as "big win?") that is unique when the variable display result is a "small win" and the small win type is "small win A" or "small win B", or a display mode (such as "time?") that is unique when the variable display result is a "small win" and the small win type is "small win C" or "small win D". With this configuration, the variety of reserve display change presentations increases, making it possible to attract the attention of players.

In the above embodiment, the reserved memory corresponding to the second special game stored after the time-saving state ends may be configured to execute different effects depending on whether the reserved memory contains a reserved memory in which the special game display result is a "small win" and the small win type is a "small win C" or "small win D" in which the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20, or whether such a reserved memory is not contained. Such a configuration can increase interest in the game.

For example, if the reserved memory corresponding to the second special game stored after the time-saving state has ended contains a reserved memory in which the special game display result is a "small hit" and the small hit type is "small hit C" or "small hit D," a successful return display can be executed to notify that one of the reserved second special game games (remaining reserved) remaining after the time-saving state has ended will be controlled back to the time-saving state (there is a reserved memory in the reserved memory corresponding to the second special game in which the special game display result is a "small hit" and the small hit type is "small hit C" or "small hit D"). On the other hand, if the reserved memory corresponding to the second special game stored after the time-saving state ends does not contain a reserved memory in which the special display result is "small hit" and the small hit type is "small hit C" or "small hit D", a return failure effect may be executed to notify that none of the remaining reserved memory will be controlled to the time-saving state again (there is no reserved memory in the reserved memory corresponding to the second special game in which the special display result is "small hit" and the small hit type is "small hit C" or "small hit D"). As an example, both the return success effect and the return failure effect may be an effect in which a combination of different decorative patterns is stopped and displayed after executing an effect that teases whether or not the time-saving state will be controlled again as a common effect.

In the above embodiment, as a performance corresponding to the small win fluctuation, a big win teasing performance that suggests that the game ball that entered the big winning opening 063AK4 controlled to an open state in the small win game state will pass through the time-saving area 063AK20 and that the game ball will pass through the big win area 063AK19 and the miss area 063AK21 may be configured to be executable, and a rescue performance that suggests that the game ball will pass through the time-saving area 063AK20 and will be controlled to the time-saving state after the end of the small win game state based on the game ball passing through the time-saving area 063AK20 in the normal state after a miss performance that suggests that the game ball did not pass through the big win area 063AK19 may be configured to be executable. With such a configuration, it is possible to increase interest in the game.

For example, as a jackpot teasing effect, as shown in Fig. 19-38(a), a performance may be configured to be executable in which a jackpot teasing image AK19 including a jackpot suggesting image AK20 showing the message "jackpot" and suggesting that the gaming ball will pass through the jackpot region 063AK19, and a miss suggesting image AK21 showing the message "miss" and suggesting that the gaming ball will pass through the miss region 063AK21 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. In this case, as a miss effect, a performance may be executed in which the miss suggesting image AK21 included in the jackpot teasing image AK19 is highlighted, as shown in Fig. 19-38(b), based on the gaming ball having passed through the time-saving region 063AK20. In the state shown in Fig. 19-38(b), the frame of the failure suggestion image AK21 is displayed thicker than the frame of the non-highlighted big win suggestion image AK20, so that the failure suggestion image AK21 is highlighted. After performing the presentation operation shown in Fig. 19-38(b) as a failure presentation, as a rescue presentation, as shown in Fig. 19-38(c), a message "time reduction" is displayed in a part of the area where the failure suggestion image AK21 is displayed, a time reduction suggestion image AK22 is displayed that suggests that the game ball passes through the time reduction area 063AK20, and the highlighting of the failure suggestion image AK21 is ended, and a presentation that highlights the time reduction suggestion image AK22 may be performed. In the state shown in FIG. 19-38(c), the border of the time-saving suggestion image AK22 is displayed thicker than the borders of the jackpot suggestion image AK20 and the miss suggestion image AK21, which are not highlighted, thereby highlighting the time-saving suggestion image AK22.

In the above embodiment, in the normal processing of the special pattern shown in the flowchart of FIG. 19-11, after determining whether or not the special pattern display result is a "big hit" (step 063AKS106), when it is determined in step 063AKS106 that the special pattern display result is not determined to be a "big hit" (step 063AKS107; No), it is determined whether or not the special pattern display result is a "small hit" (step 063AKS118). However, this is only one example, and the process of determining whether or not the special pattern display result is a "big hit" and the process of determining whether or not the special pattern display result is a "small hit" can be executed in any order. For example, after executing the process of determining whether or not the special pattern display result is a "small hit", when it is not determined in the process that the special pattern display result is a "small hit", the process of determining whether or not the special pattern display result is a "big hit" may be executed. Alternatively, the process for determining whether the special chart display result is a "big hit," "small hit," or "miss" may be executed simultaneously with the process for determining whether the special chart display result is a "big hit" and the process for determining whether the special chart display result is a "small hit."

In the above embodiment, it has been explained that only one of the game balls that enter the large winning port 063AK4 in a small winning game state flows down through the distribution section supply path 063AK8 to the distribution section 063AK18, and the game balls other than that one game ball are discharged to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7 through the discharge path 063AK9. However, this is merely one example, and it is also possible to configure the game so that multiple game balls that enter the large winning port 063AK4 in a small winning game state enter the distribution section 063AK18 through the distribution section supply path 063AK8. Such a configuration can increase the interest in the game.

When configured in this manner, after one game ball enters the distribution unit 063AK18 and passes through one of the jackpot region 063AK19, the time-saving region 063AK20, and the miss region 063AK21, at least one other game ball may enter the distribution unit 063AK18 and pass through another of the jackpot region 063AK19, the time-saving region 063AK20, and the miss region 063AK21. In this case, the game state after the end of the small win game state may be controlled based on whether the game ball that first entered the distribution unit 063AK18 passed through the jackpot region 063AK19, the time-saving region 063AK20, or the miss region 063AK21 among the multiple game balls that entered the distribution unit 063AK18 during the small win game state. For example, if the first game ball to enter the distribution unit 063AK18 in a small win game state passes through the big win area 063AK19, even if other game balls pass through the time-saving area 063AK20 or the miss area 063AK21 after that passage, the game state can be controlled to the big win game state after the end of the small win game state based on the first game ball passing through the big win area 063AK19.

Alternatively, the game state after the end of the small win game state may be controlled based on whether the last game ball to enter the distribution unit 063AK18 among the multiple game balls that entered the distribution unit 063AK18 in the small win game state passed through the big win area 063AK19, the time-saving area 063AK20, or the miss area 063AK21. For example, if the last game ball to enter the distribution unit 063AK18 in the small win game state passes through the big win area 063AK19, even if other game balls passed through the time-saving area 063AK20 or the miss area 063AK21 before the passing, the game state may be controlled to the big win game state after the end of the small win game state based on the last game ball passing through the big win area 063AK19.

Alternatively, a priority order may be set in advance between the jackpot area 063AK19, the time-saving area 063AK20, and the miss area 063AK21, and when a plurality of game balls that have entered the distribution section 063AK18 in a small win game state pass through a plurality of areas among the jackpot area 063AK19, the time-saving area 063AK20, and the miss area 063AK21, the game state after the small win game state ends may be controlled based on the passage of the game balls through the area with the highest priority among the areas through which they have passed. For example, the priority order of the jackpot area 063AK19 may be set higher than the priority order of the time-saving area 063AK20, and the priority order of the time-saving area 063AK20 may be set higher than the priority order of the miss area 063AK21. In this case, when multiple game balls that have entered the distribution unit 063AK18 pass through the big win area 063AK19, the time-saving area 063AK20, and the miss area 063AK21, respectively, the game ball is controlled to a big win game state after the small win game state ends based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the big win area 063AK19, which has the highest priority.

In the above embodiment, it has been described that in the time-saving state, when a game ball that has entered the large prize winning port 063AK4, which has been controlled to be open in the small win game state, passes through the time-saving area 063AK20, time-saving transition control based on the passage is not performed. However, this is merely one example, and in the time-saving state, when a game ball that has entered the large prize winning port 063AK4, which has been controlled to be open in the small win game state, passes through the time-saving area 063AK20, time-saving transition control is performed based on the passage, and the period controlled to the time-saving state can be extended by controlling the state to the time-saving state for a predetermined period after the small win game state ends. With such a configuration, interest in the game can be increased.

In this case, the game may be configured to be capable of implementing an effect that notifies the player that the period controlled to the time-saving state has been extended based on the game ball that entered the large prize opening 063AK4 passing through the time-saving area 063AK20 while in the time-saving state. Such a configuration can increase interest in the game. For example, a time-saving count recovery effect that increases the number of time-saving times indicated by the time-saving count notification image AK16 may be implemented as an effect that notifies the player that the period controlled to the time-saving state has been extended.

In this case, when in the time-saving state, instead of a time-saving passage teasing effect that suggests passage through the jackpot region 063AK19 and the miss region 063AK21 without suggesting passage through the time-saving region 063AK20 (suggesting that the game ball will pass through the jackpot region 063AK19 and the miss region 063AK21 without suggesting that the game ball will pass through the time-saving region 063AK20), a normal time passage teasing effect that suggests passage through the jackpot region 063AK19, the time-saving region 063AK20 and the miss region 063AK21 (suggesting that the game ball will pass through the jackpot region 063AK19, the time-saving region 063AK20 and the miss region 063AK21). This configuration can increase the interest in playing games.

In the above embodiment, as a presentation corresponding to the small win fluctuation, a presentation suggesting whether the game ball that enters the large prize winning hole 063AK4, which is controlled to be in an open state in the small win game state, will pass through the large win area 063AK19, the time-saving area 063AK20, or the loss area 063AK21 may be configured to be executable during the execution of the small win fluctuation. With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game. For example, if the small hit type is "small hit A" or "small hit B" where the game ball passes through the big hit area 063AK19, a presentation suggesting that the game ball will pass through the big hit area 063AK19 is executed during the small hit variation, if the small hit type is "small hit C" or "small hit D" where the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20, a presentation suggesting that the game ball will pass through the time-saving area 063AK20 is executed during the small hit variation, and if the small hit type is "small hit E" where the game ball passes through the miss area 063AK21, a presentation suggesting that the game ball will pass through the miss area 063AK21 is executed during the small hit variation.

In the above embodiment, the normal time passing prompting effect and the time-saving time passing prompting effect were described as being started after the small win fluctuation has ended, the small win start effect has ended, and the opening and closing of the large prize opening has started. However, this is merely one example, and the normal time passing prompting effect and the time-saving time passing prompting effect may be configured to be able to start while the small win fluctuation is being executed. Such a configuration can increase the interest in playing the game. In particular, if the normal time passing prompting effect can be executed during the execution of a small win fluctuation, the normal time passing prompting image AK1 can be displayed during the execution of a small win fluctuation to suggest the degree of expectation that the game state will be controlled to a big win game state after the end of the small win game state based on the game ball passing through the big win area 063AK19 during the small win game state, the degree of expectation that the game state will be controlled to a time-saving state after the end of the small win game state based on the game ball passing through the time-saving area 063AK20 during the small win game state, and the degree of expectation that the game ball will pass through the miss area 063AK21 during the small win game state, thereby increasing interest in the game.

In the above embodiment, when the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20 in the normal state, a time-saving area passing notification effect is executed in which a time-saving area passing notification image AK13 showing a message "Lucky!" is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, while when the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20 in the time-saving state, a failure area passing notification effect is executed in which a failure area passing notification image AK17 showing a message "Too bad!" is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. However, this is merely one example, and the effect executed when the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20 in the normal state may be any effect different from the effect executed when the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20 in the time-saving state. For example, when the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20 in the normal state, the time-saving area light-emitting unit 063AK26 may be illuminated, whereas when the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20 in the time-saving state, the time-saving area light-emitting unit 063AK26 may not be illuminated (turned off). Alternatively, when the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20 in the normal state, a notification sound indicating the message "Time-saving!" may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, whereas when the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20 in the time-saving state, the notification sound may not be output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In the above embodiment, the special variable winning ball device 7 has been described as having a jackpot area 063AK19, a time-saving area 063AK20, and a miss area 063AK21, but this is merely one example. The special variable winning ball device 7 may be configured to have a time-saving area 063AK20, but not have a jackpot area 063AK19 or a miss area 063AK21. Such a configuration can reduce manufacturing costs.

In the above embodiment, the special variable winning ball device 7 may be configured to have a plurality of time-saving areas 063AK20. In this case, depending on which of the plurality of time-saving areas 063AK20 the game ball has passed through in the small win game state, the device may be configured to be controlled to a time-saving state for different periods after the small win game state ends. For example, the time-saving area 063AK20 may be configured to have a first time-saving area and a second time-saving area, and when the game ball passes through the first time-saving area in the small win game state, the device may be controlled to a time-saving state for a period until the variable display is executed five times after the small win game state ends, while when the game ball passes through the second time-saving area in the small win game state, the device may be controlled to a time-saving state for a period until the variable display is executed one time after the small win game state ends. This configuration allows the player to pay attention to which of the multiple time-saving areas 063AK20 the game ball will pass through during a small win game state, increasing the player's interest in the game.

In the above embodiment, it has been described that in the low probability low base state as the normal state, time-saving transition control is performed based on the game ball passing through the time-saving area 063AK20 in the small win game state, and the game is controlled to the time-saving state after the small win game state ends. However, this is merely one example, and it may be configured such that in the high probability low base state, time-saving transition control is performed based on the game ball passing through the time-saving area 063AK20 in the small win game state, and the game is controlled to the time-saving state after the small win game state ends.

Any part or all of the above configurations may be combined with each other in any manner.

Each configuration of feature 063AK may be combined with some or all of the configurations of the other features, as appropriate. Features combined in this way, or individual features that are not combined, may be combined with some or all of the configurations of the other features, as appropriate.

For example, the feature 079SG may be introduced into the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the feature 063AK. Specifically, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the feature 063AK, during a first period of a predetermined effect such as a normal time passing prompting effect, a time-saving time passing prompting effect, or a reach effect such as Super Reach A to Super Reach C, a performance video in which the performance progresses at a first speed can be displayed on the image display device 5 as a display means, and during a second period of the predetermined effect after the first period, a performance video in which the performance progresses at a second speed slower than the first speed can be displayed on the image display device 5, and the performance sound corresponding to the predetermined effect may be configured to be output by the speakers 8L and 8R as sound output means at the same speed for the performance sound in both the first period and the second period. With this configuration, the progression speed of the effect video of the specified effect changes between the first and second periods, but the speed of the effect sounds corresponding to the normal time passing prompting effect, the time-saving time passing prompting effect, the reach effects of Super Reach A to Super Reach C, etc., as the specified effects, does not change between the first and second periods, preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable.

(Explanation of Means Related to Characteristic Part 063AK)
(1) The gaming machine according to the characteristic part 063AK is
In a gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing a variable display and capable of controlling a player to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) when a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern) is derived and displayed as a variable display result,
A state control means (e.g., a CPU 103, etc.) capable of controlling the display to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state, etc.) in which the variable display is more easily executed than in a normal state;
A variable means (e.g., a special variable winning ball device 7) that has a special area (e.g., a time-saving area 063AK20) and can be controlled between a first state (e.g., an open state) in which a game medium (e.g., a game ball) can easily enter and a second state (e.g., a closed state) in which the game medium cannot enter or has difficulty entering;
A performance execution means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120, etc.) capable of executing a performance corresponding to a variable display;
The variable means is controlled to the first state when a special display result (e.g., a small winning pattern, etc.) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as a variable display result (e.g., FIG. 19-6, FIG. 19-8, FIG. 19-23, etc.),
The state control means includes:
When the special display result is derived and displayed as a variable display result in the normal state and the variable means is controlled to the first state, if the game medium passes through the special area, the normal state is controlled to the special state based on the passage (e.g., FIG. 19-23, FIG. 19-26, etc.);
When the special display result is derived and displayed as a variable display result in the special state, and the variable means is controlled to the first state, if the game medium passes through the special area, no control based on the passage is performed (for example, Figures 19-23 and 19-26, etc.),
The performance execution means can execute different performances in a case where the special display result is derived and displayed as a variable display result in the normal state and the game medium passes through the special area when the variable means is controlled to the first state, and in a case where the special display result is derived and displayed as a variable display result in the special state and the game medium passes through the special area when the variable means is controlled to the first state (e.g., Figures 19-8, 19-23, 19-24, 19-31, 19-34, 19-36, etc.).
It is characterized by:
With this configuration, appropriate control can be performed according to the state.

(2) In the gaming machine according to the above (1) relating to the characteristic part 063AK,
The variable means has a specific area (for example, a big win area 063AK19, etc.),
The state control means is capable of controlling the game medium to the advantageous state when the game medium passes through the specific area (for example, FIG. 19-23, FIG. 19-26, etc.),
The effect execution means is capable of executing the same effect when the game medium passes through the special area in the special state and when the game medium does not pass through either the specific area or the special area in the special state (e.g., FIG. 19-8, FIG. 19-23, FIG. 19-24, FIG. 19-31, FIG. 19-36, etc.),
This may be done.
With this configuration, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

(3) In the gaming machine according to the above (2) relating to the characteristic part 063AK,
The performance execution means can execute different performances when the game medium passes through the specific area in the special state and when the game medium passes through the specific area in the normal state (e.g., FIG. 19-8, FIG. 19-23, FIG. 19-24, FIG. 19-31, FIG. 19-34, FIG. 19-36, etc.),
This may be done.
This configuration can increase the player's interest in the game.

(4) In any one of the gaming machines according to (1) to (3) above relating to the characteristic part 063AK,
The performance execution means is capable of executing different performances during execution of the variable display when the special display result is derived and displayed as a variable display result in the normal state and when the special display result is derived and displayed as a variable display result in the special state (e.g., FIG. 19-8, FIG. 19-9, FIG. 19-15, FIG. 19-16, FIG. 19-19, FIG. 19-33, FIG. 19-35, etc.),
This may be done.
With this configuration, it is possible to provide suitable effects depending on the situation.

(5) In any one of the gaming machines according to (1) to (4) above relating to the characteristic part 063AK,
The effect execution means is capable of executing an effect (e.g., a time-saving suggestion effect, etc.) that suggests that the special display result is controlled to the special state as an effect that suggests that the special display result is derived and displayed as a variable display result when the special display result is derived and displayed as a variable display result in the normal state during execution of the variable display (e.g., FIG. 19-8, FIG. 19-9, FIG. 19-15, FIG. 19-16, FIG. 19-19, FIG. 19-33, FIG. 19-35, etc.),
This may be done.
With this configuration, a variety of effects can be implemented, increasing the enjoyment of the game.

(6) In any one of the gaming machines according to (1) to (5) above relating to the characteristic part 063AK,
A variable display of the first identification information (e.g., a first special game, etc.) and a variable display of the second identification information (e.g., a second special game, etc.) can be executed.
When the special display result is derived and displayed as a result of the variable display of the second identification information, the special state is controlled at a higher rate than when the special display result is derived and displayed as a result of the variable display of the first identification information (for example, FIG. 19-14, etc.),
This may be done.
According to this configuration, the player can pay attention to whether the special display result is derived and displayed as the variable display result of the second identification information, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

(Explanation of Means Related to Characteristic Part 064AK)
The characteristic portion 063AK includes the characteristic portion 064AK shown below.
(1) The gaming machine according to the characteristic part 064AK is
In a gaming machine (such as a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can execute variable display and can be controlled to a favorable state (such as a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means (e.g., a CPU 103, etc.) capable of controlling the display to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state, etc.) in which the variable display is more easily executed than in a normal state;
A variable means (e.g., a special variable winning ball device 7) that has a specific area (e.g., a big win area 063AK19) and a special area (e.g., a time-saving area 063AK20) and can be controlled between a first state (e.g., an open state) in which a game medium (e.g., a game ball) can easily enter and a second state (e.g., a closed state) in which the game medium cannot enter or has difficulty entering;
A performance execution means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120, etc.) capable of executing a performance corresponding to a variable display;
The state control means includes:
The advantageous state can be controlled based on the game medium passing through the specific area (for example, FIG. 19-23, FIG. 19-26, etc.),
The game medium can be controlled from the normal state to the special state based on the passage of the special area (for example, FIG. 19-23, FIG. 19-26, etc.),
The effect execution means is capable of executing a special effect (such as a normal passing-through effect) that suggests passage between the specific area and the special area when the variable means is controlled to the first state (e.g., FIG. 19-8, FIG. 19-10, FIG. 19-31, FIG. 19-34, etc.),
When the game medium passes through the special area when the variable means is controlled to the first state, the state control means does not control the game medium to the special state until the variable means is controlled to the second state (for example, Figures 19-23 and 19-26, etc.),
It is characterized by:
With this configuration, appropriate control can be performed according to the state.

(2) In the gaming machine according to the above (1) relating to the characteristic part 064AK,
The performance execution means includes:
In the normal state, when the variable means is controlled to the first state, the special performance is executed (for example, FIG. 19-8, FIG. 19-10, FIG. 19-31, FIG. 19-34, etc.),
In the special state, when the variable means is controlled to the first state, a specific performance (e.g., a time-saving time-passing incentive performance) is executed to suggest passage of the specific area without suggesting passage of the special area (e.g., FIG. 19-8, FIG. 19-10, FIG. 19-31, FIG. 19-36, etc.),
This may be done.
With this configuration, it is possible to provide suitable effects depending on the situation.

(3) In the gaming machine according to the above (1) or (2) relating to the characteristic part 064AK,
The performance execution means can execute different performances when the game medium passes through the specific area in the special state and when the game medium passes through the specific area in the normal state (e.g., FIG. 19-8, FIG. 19-23, FIG. 19-24, FIG. 19-31, FIG. 19-34, FIG. 19-36, etc.),
This may be done.
This configuration can increase the player's interest in the game.

(4) In the gaming machine according to the above (3) relating to the characteristic part 064AK,
The variable means is controlled to the first state when a special display result (e.g., a small winning pattern, etc.) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as a variable display result (e.g., FIG. 19-6, FIG. 19-8, FIG. 19-23, etc.),
The performance execution means is capable of executing different performances during execution of the variable display when the special display result is derived and displayed as a variable display result in the normal state and when the special display result is derived and displayed as a variable display result in the special state (e.g., FIG. 19-8, FIG. 19-9, FIG. 19-15, FIG. 19-16, FIG. 19-19, FIG. 19-33, FIG. 19-35, etc.),
This may be done.
With this configuration, it is possible to provide suitable effects depending on the situation.

(5) In the gaming machine according to the above (3) or (4) relating to the characteristic part 064AK,
The effect execution means is capable of executing an effect (e.g., a time-saving suggestion effect, etc.) that suggests that the special display result is controlled to the special state as an effect that suggests that the special display result is derived and displayed as a variable display result when the special display result is derived and displayed as a variable display result in the normal state during execution of the variable display (e.g., FIG. 19-8, FIG. 19-9, FIG. 19-15, FIG. 19-16, FIG. 19-19, FIG. 19-33, FIG. 19-35, etc.),
This may be done.
With this configuration, a variety of effects can be implemented, increasing the enjoyment of the game.

(6) In any one of the gaming machines according to (3) to (5) above relating to the characteristic part 064AK,
The effect execution means is capable of executing different effects when the game medium passes through the specific area and when the game medium passes through the special area when the special display result is derived as a variable display result and the variable means is controlled to the first state and then the variable means is controlled to the second state (e.g., FIG. 19-8, FIG. 19-23, FIG. 19-24, FIG. 19-31, FIG. 19-34, FIG. 19-36, etc.).
This may be done.
According to this configuration, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the presentation that is executed when the variable means is controlled to the second state, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 065AK)
The characteristic part 065AK will be described. In the characteristic part 065AK, the description of the parts (configuration, processing, etc.) common to the basic description will be omitted.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the basic description, after being controlled to a jackpot gaming state, it is possible to control it to a high base state (time-saving state). In the pachinko gaming machine 65AK1 of the characteristic part 065AK, when in the low base state (normal state), if the display result of the variable display of the normal pattern on the normal pattern display device 20 becomes a predetermined "time-saving pattern" among "normal pattern misses", it is controlled to the high base state (time-saving state) regardless of the display result of the variable display of the special pattern. This allows the game to transition from the low base state to the high base state without passing through the jackpot gaming state, providing an element of surprise in the game.

In the pachinko game machine 65AK1 of the characteristic part 065AK, when the display result of the normal pattern becomes a "time-saving pattern," the state transitions from a low base state to a high base state even if the variable display of the special pattern is being performed.

In addition, the pachinko game machine 65AK1 with feature part 065AK can execute a predetermined effect that suggests or notifies the player of the display result of a normal pattern or a special pattern. The predetermined effect can suggest or notify the player that the display result of a normal pattern will be a "normal hit" or a "time-saving pattern," or that the display result of a special pattern will be a "jackpot." Such a predetermined effect can make the player anticipate which display result will be suggested or notified, increasing the player's interest.

(Configuration of characteristic part 065AK)
Fig. 20-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 65AK1 of the characteristic part 065AK, showing the layout of the main components. The pachinko gaming machine 65AK1 of the characteristic part 065AK has a different layout of some components from the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the basic explanation shown in Fig. 1. Note that here, mainly the parts that are different from Fig. 1 will be described, and the same components will be assigned the same numbers and will not be described.

In the pachinko game machine 65AK1 with characteristic part 065AK shown in FIG. 20-1, the game ball launched from the ball launching device is guided to the lower side of the game area via the first path, which is the path on the left side of the frame surrounding the image display device 5, or the second path, which is the path on the right side of the frame surrounding the image display device 5, and either enters (enters) each winning hole or is taken into the outlet without entering any winning hole.

Shooting a game ball so that it passes through the first path on the left side of the image display device 5 is called a left hit, and shooting a game ball so that it passes through the second path on the right side of the image display device 5 is called a right hit. The area to which a game ball hit from the left can be guided is called the left area, and the area to which a game ball hit from the right can be guided is also called the right area.

In the pachinko game machine 65AK1 of the characteristic part 065AK, the winning ball device 6A is located below the image display device 5 in the left area of the game area, as in the pachinko game machine 1 of the basic explanation, while the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7 are located below and to the right of the image display device 5 in the right area of the game area. Therefore, in the high base state where the variable winning ball device 6B (second start winning port) is in an open state, or in the jackpot game state where the special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning port) is in an open state, the game is played by hitting from the right, and in the low base state where the winning port is not in an open state, the game is played by hitting from the left.

In addition, in the pachinko game machine 65AK1 of the characteristic part 065AK, the pass gate 41 is provided in the left and right areas, so that the normal game can be easily played even in a low base state where the game is played by hitting from the left. This ensures that in the low base state, the display result of the normal pattern becomes a "time-saving pattern", and there is an opportunity to transition to a high base state.

In addition, in the pachinko game machine 65AK1 of the characteristic part 065AK, the general winning opening 10 is provided in the left area and the right area. Note that the general winning opening 10 may be provided in either one of the areas.

In addition, in the pachinko game machine 65AK1 of the characteristic part 065AK, a main lamp 9a, a frame lamp 9b, an attacca lamp 9c, and a movable body lamp 9d are provided as game effect lamps 9. The main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the game machine frame 3, the frame lamp 9b is provided so as to surround the game area, and the attacca lamp 9c is provided in a position near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2. A movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided above the image display device 5 of the game board 2, and the movable body lamp 9 is provided on the movable body 32.

Next, the operation of the pachinko game machine 65AK1 of the characteristic part 065AK will be described. FIG. 20-2 is a flow chart showing an example of the normal symbol process executed in step S26 of FIG. 5. In the normal symbol process, when the CPU 103 detects that the gate switch 21 has been turned on, i.e., that the gaming ball has passed through the gate 41 (step S411; Yes), it executes the gate switch passing process (step S412).

In the gate switch passing process of step S412, the CPU 103 checks whether the count value of the gate passing memory counter (gate passing memory number) has reached the maximum value ("4" in this example). If the maximum value has not been reached, the CPU 103 increments the count value of the gate passing memory counter by +1, extracts the value of the random number for determining normal symbols, which is a software random number, and stores it in a storage area corresponding to the value of the gate passing memory number. The CPU 103 also increments the number of lit normal symbol reserve indicators 25C by 1. After that, depending on the value of the normal symbol process flag, the CPU 103 executes one of the processes in steps S400 to S404 as shown below.

In the normal processing of normal symbols in step S400, if the state is such that the normal symbol variation can be started (for example, the normal symbol display device 20 is not displaying the normal symbol variation and the variable winning ball device 6B is not in the open state) and the gate passing memory number is not 0, the CPU 103 uses the value of the normal symbol winning judgment random number stored in the storage area and the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 20-3 to determine whether or not there is a win (whether or not the stopped normal symbol is to be the winning symbol) and whether or not it is to be the time-saving symbol. If the game state is in a low base state (if the time-saving flag is not set), the table shown in FIG. 20-3 (A) is used, and if it is in a high base state (if the time-saving flag is set), the table shown in FIG. 20-3 (B) is used. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (in this example, "1") indicating the normal symbol variation pattern setting process (step S401).

In the normal symbol variation pattern setting process of step S401, the CPU 103 starts the normal symbol process timer by setting the normal symbol process timer to a value equivalent to the variable display time (normal symbol variation time) from when the normal symbol is variably displayed until it is derived and displayed. The CPU 103 also executes control to send a command specifying the start of normal symbol variation to the performance control board 12. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value ("2" in this example) corresponding to the normal symbol variation process (step S402).

The CPU 103 executes the variable display (variation) of the normal pattern in the normal pattern variation process of step S402. Then, it checks whether the normal pattern process timer has timed out, and if so, updates the value of the normal pattern process flag to a value (in this example, "3") indicating the normal pattern stop processing (step S403).

In the normal pattern stop processing of step S403, the CPU 103 stops the fluctuation of the normal pattern on the normal pattern display 20. Then, the normal pattern process timer is started by setting a value equivalent to the normal pattern pattern determination time (stop pattern display time) to the normal pattern process timer, and when the timer times out, it is confirmed whether the stopped normal pattern is a winning pattern or not. If it is not a winning pattern (if it is a losing pattern), if it is a time-saving pattern, a process is executed to start the time-saving state. Also, if it is not a winning pattern (if it is a losing pattern), the value of the normal pattern process flag is updated to a value (in this example, "0") indicating normal pattern normal processing (step S400). If the stopped normal pattern is a winning pattern, the normal pattern process timer is started by setting a value equivalent to the normal electric role release time to the normal pattern process timer. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (in this example, "4") indicating normal electric device release processing (step S404).

During the normal electric device open process in step S404, the CPU 103 sets the variable winning ball device (normal electric device) 6B to an open state. When the normal symbol process timer times out, the CPU 103 sets the variable winning ball device 6B to a closed state and updates the value of the normal symbol process flag to a value (in this example, "0") indicating normal symbol normal processing (step S400).

Figure 20-3 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a normal pattern determination table in which a judgment value is set for the normal pattern display result that determines the display result of the normal pattern in the normal normal pattern processing of step S400. In this embodiment, the range of the normal pattern judgment random number is 1 to 250, and a judgment value is set in the normal pattern determination table to be compared with the normal pattern judgment random number value.

Figure 20-3 (A) shows the normal symbol determination table used in the low base state. As shown in Figure 20-3 (A), in the low base state, if the random number value for determining the normal symbol is 1 or 2, it is determined to be a win (normal symbol win). If it is determined to be a normal symbol win, the variable winning ball device 6A is in an open state for 5 seconds. If the random number value for determining the normal symbol is 3 to 230, it is determined to be a miss (normal symbol miss). If it is determined to be a normal symbol miss, the variable winning ball device 6A is not in an open state. In the case of a normal symbol win or a normal symbol miss, the normal symbol variation time is 10 seconds, and the symbol determination time is 0.5 seconds.

In addition, if the random number value for determining the normal pattern is between 231 and 240, it is determined to be a miss (time-saving pattern A). If it is determined to be time-saving pattern A, the variable winning ball device 6A does not enter an open state, but is controlled to a high base state (time-saving state). In the case of time-saving pattern A, the normal pattern fluctuation time is 10 seconds, and the pattern determination time is 10 seconds.

Also, if the random number value for determining the normal pattern is between 241 and 250, it is determined to be a miss (time-saving pattern B). If it is determined to be time-saving pattern B, the variable winning ball device 6A does not enter an open state, but is controlled to a high base state (time-saving state). In the case of time-saving pattern B, the normal pattern fluctuation time is 15 seconds, and the pattern determination time is 10 seconds.

In this way, the time-saving symbol is part of a miss (a regular miss), and part of the judgment value corresponding to a regular miss is assigned to the time-saving symbol.

In addition, in the normal processing of the normal symbols in step S400, after judging (deciding) whether or not a normal symbol is a winning symbol, a judgement is made as to whether or not to make it a time-saving symbol. By doing this, in cases where a normal symbol is both a winning symbol and a time-saving symbol is judged due to a random number error, etc., the normal symbol can be prioritized. Note that in a low base state, since it is more advantageous for the player to have a time-saving symbol than a normal winning symbol, it is also possible to first judge whether or not to make it a time-saving symbol, and then judge whether or not to make it a normal winning symbol.

In this embodiment, two types of time-saving patterns are provided, and the period of the high base state (ending condition, number of time-saving times) differs between when time-saving pattern A is displayed and when time-saving pattern B is displayed. As shown in FIG. 20-4(A), when the display result of the normal pattern becomes "time-saving pattern A" in a low base state, the high base state continues until the special pattern changes 50 times (the number of time-saving times becomes 50). Also, when the display result of the normal pattern becomes "time-saving pattern B" in a low base state, the high base state continues until the special pattern changes 100 times (the number of time-saving times becomes 100). Therefore, time-saving pattern B is more advantageous for the player than time-saving pattern A.

In this embodiment, whether or not a time-saving symbol is to be used in the event of a normal miss and the type of time-saving symbol are determined by the random number value for determining normal symbols, but a different random number may be used to determine whether or not a time-saving symbol is to be used and the type of time-saving symbol. Also, the number of types of time-saving symbols is not limited to two, and there may be one type or three or more types. When there is one type of time-saving symbol, the process of determining the display result is made easier by determining whether or not a time-saving symbol is to be used by the random number value for determining normal symbols.

As shown in FIG. 20-3(A), the pattern determination time for normal hits and misses is 0.5 seconds, while the pattern determination time for time-saving patterns is longer at 10 seconds. In this way, by lengthening the pattern determination time for time-saving patterns, it is possible to execute notifications for a transition to a high base state (time-saving state) or a right hit during that pattern determination time, thereby preventing or reducing a sudden transition to a high base state that puts the player at a disadvantage due to lack of preparation. Note that the pattern determination time may be constant regardless of the display result.

The change time when the time-saving pattern B is displayed is 15 seconds, and when other display results are displayed is 10 seconds. This allows the display result to be predicted by the change time of the normal pattern. The change time may be determined according to the display result, or the change time for all display results may be the same (for example, 10 seconds).

Figure 20-3 (B) shows a normal symbol determination table used in the high base state. As shown in Figure 20-3 (B), in the high base state, if the random number value for determining the normal symbol is 1 to 229, it is determined to be a hit (normal symbol hit). If it is determined to be a normal symbol hit, the variable winning ball device 6A is in an open state for 7.5 seconds. If the random number value for determining the normal symbol is 230, it is determined to be a miss (normal symbol miss). If the random number value for determining the normal symbol is 231 to 240, it is determined to be a miss (time-saving symbol A). If the random number value for determining the normal symbol is 241 to 250, it is determined to be a miss (time-saving symbol B). Even if the time-saving symbol (time-saving symbol A, B) appears in the high base state, as shown in Figure 20-4 (B), the number of time-saving times (termination condition of the high base state) is not updated, and the high base state is not affected during control. In other words, in the high base state, the time-saving pattern is treated the same as a normal miss. If it is determined to be a normal miss, the variable winning ball device 6A will not be in the open state.

When in a high base state, regardless of the display result, the normal pattern change time is 1.5 seconds, and the pattern determination time is 0.5 seconds. This allows the normal pattern to change repeatedly and quickly.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 20-3, the change time is determined according to the display result of the normal pattern, but the change time (change pattern) of the normal pattern may be determined based on the display result of the determined normal pattern. In this case, if the display result is a normal miss, the change time determination ratio may be different depending on whether or not it is a time-saving pattern. In this way, it is possible to suggest whether or not the normal pattern will become a time-saving pattern depending on the change time of the normal pattern.

As shown in Figures 20-3 (A) and (B), the time required for the time-saving symbol to be determined in the high base state is 0.5 seconds, whereas the time required for the time-saving symbol to be determined in the low base state is longer at 10 seconds. In this way, by lengthening the time required for the time-saving symbol to be determined in the low base state, a notification that the player will transition to the high base state (time-saving state) or hit to the right can be issued during the pattern determination time, which can prevent or reduce the player from suddenly transitioning to the high base state and being at a disadvantage due to lack of preparation. Also, since such a notification is not necessary even if the normal symbol is displayed as a time-saving symbol in the high base state, the pattern determination time can be shortened to quickly execute the change of the next normal symbol. Note that the pattern determination time may be constant regardless of the game state.

In this embodiment, the game is controlled to the time-saving state even after the display result of the special symbol becomes a jackpot and the game is controlled to the jackpot game state. As shown in FIG. 20-5(A), "jackpot A" and "jackpot B" are provided as jackpot types when the display result of the first special symbol becomes a jackpot, and after the jackpot game state of "jackpot A" is reached, the high base state continues until the special symbol is changed 50 times (the number of time-saving times becomes 50), and after the jackpot game state of "jackpot B" is reached, the high base state continues until the special symbol is changed 100 times (the number of time-saving times becomes 100). The display result of the first special symbol becomes a jackpot basically when the base state is low. Also, as shown in FIG. 20-5(B), when the display result of the second special chart is a jackpot, a "jackpot C" is set as the jackpot type, and after the "jackpot C" jackpot game state is reached, the high base state continues until the special chart changes 100 times (the number of time-saving cycles becomes 100). Note that the display result of the second special chart is basically a jackpot when the high base state is reached.

In this way, in this embodiment, the end conditions (number of time-saving cycles) of the high base state (time-saving state) are more favorable when the display result of the second special symbol is a jackpot than when the display result of the first special symbol is a jackpot. This prevents the end conditions of the high base state from being disadvantageous to the player when the normal symbol becomes a time-saving symbol and transitions to the high base state, thereby reducing disappointment for the player. Also, during a high base state, the end conditions of the high base state (time-saving state) in the event of a jackpot are more favorable than those of the low base state, making it easier to maintain the high base state for a long time once the high base state has been reached.

In addition, in the feature section 065AK, it is sufficient that the game is controlled to at least the time-saving state after being controlled to the jackpot game state, and the number of rounds of "jackpot A" to "jackpot C" and the presence or absence of the probability variable control may be arbitrary. Also, the jackpot types and the number of time-saving times shown in FIG. 20-5 are examples, and there may be more or fewer jackpot types than in FIG. 20-5, or the number of time-saving times may be the same for all, for example.

Figure 20-6 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing when a normal pattern stops in step S403 in Figure 20-2. In the processing when a normal pattern stops, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the normal pattern confirmation display flag is set (step 065AKS001). The normal pattern is displayed from the time the display result is derived and displayed until the pattern confirmation time has elapsed. In other words, the pattern confirmation time can be said to be the period from the time the display result of the normal pattern is derived and displayed until the next normal pattern change begins. If it is the pattern confirmation time, the normal pattern confirmation display flag is set.

If the normal pattern confirmation display flag is not set (step 065AKS001; No), the normal pattern display 20 derives and displays the normal pattern display result (confirmed normal pattern) (step 065AKS002), and executes settings to send a normal pattern stop designation command that designates the stop of normal pattern fluctuation to the performance control board 12 (step 065AKS003). In step 065AKS003, settings are made so that a normal pattern stop designation command corresponding to the display result is sent so that the display result of the normal pattern can be specified on the performance control board 12. Then, the game state (high base state, low base state) and the pattern confirmation period (see Figure 20-3) corresponding to the normal pattern display result are set (step 065AKS004), and the normal pattern confirmation display flag is set to the ON state (step 065AKS005). After that, the normal pattern stop processing is terminated.

If the normal pattern confirmation display flag is set (step 065AKS001; Yes), it is determined whether the pattern confirmation period for the normal pattern has elapsed (step 065AKS011). In the processing of step 065AKS011, for example, a timer value corresponding to the pattern confirmation period set in step 065AKS004 is subtracted and it is determined whether it has become 0. If the pattern confirmation period has not elapsed (step 065AKS011; No), the processing when the normal pattern has stopped is terminated.

If the pattern determination period has elapsed (step 065AKS011; Yes), it is determined whether the display result is a normal winning pattern (step 065AKS012). If the display result is a normal winning pattern (step 065AKS012; Yes), the normal pattern process timer is set to the normal electric role opening time (step 065AKS013), the value of the normal pattern process flag is updated to a value indicating processing during the opening of the normal electric role (e.g., "4") (step 065AKS014), and the processing when the normal pattern has stopped is terminated.

If the display result is not a normal winning pattern (step 065AKS012; No), it is determined whether the display result is a time-saving pattern (step 065AKS015). If the display result is a time-saving pattern (step 065AKS015; Yes), it is determined whether the high base state is present by determining whether the time-saving flag is set (step 065AKS016). If the high base state is not present (step 065AKS016; No), it is determined whether the jackpot game state is present by, for example, checking the value of the special pattern process flag (step 065AKS017). In this embodiment, if the jackpot game state is present, the state is controlled to the time-saving state after the jackpot game state ends, so that the transition to the time-saving state based on the time-saving pattern is not performed. In addition, if the special pattern is changing and the display result of the change is a jackpot, the game will be controlled to a time-saving state after the jackpot game state based on the jackpot ends, so it is possible not to transition to the time-saving state based on the time-saving pattern.

If the game is not in a jackpot game state (step 065AKS017; No), the time-saving flag is set to the ON state (step 065AKS018), and the time-saving count counter is set to the number of time-saving times corresponding to the time-saving symbol (see FIG. 20-4 (A)) (step 065AKS019). This allows a transition to the high base state (time-saving state). In addition, in response to the transition to the time-saving state, settings are made to send a game state designation command specifying that the game is in the time-saving state to the performance control board 12 (step 065AKS020).

If the display result is not a time-saving pattern but a normal miss (step 065AKS015; No), if the game is in a high base state (step 065AKS016; Yes), if the game is in a jackpot game state (step 065AKS017; Yes), or after the processing of step 065AKS020 has been executed, the value of the normal pattern process flag is updated to a value indicating normal processing of normal patterns (e.g., "0") (step 065AKS021), and processing when the normal pattern stops is terminated.

Figure 20-7 is a flow chart showing an example of the performance control process processing (step S76) shown in Figure 9 of characteristic part 065AK. In addition to the performance control process processing of the basic explanation shown in Figure 16, the performance control process processing of characteristic part 065AK also includes a general map linked performance control process (step 065AKS1) and a time-saving notification setting process (step 065AKS2) after the advance notice setting process (step S161).

Figure 20-8 is a flow chart showing an example of the normal symbol linked performance control process (step 065AKS1) executed in the performance control process of Figure 20-7. The normal symbol linked performance is a performance that suggests and notifies the display result of the normal symbol in conjunction with the execution of the normal symbol variation. The normal symbol linked performance is included in the predetermined performance. In the normal symbol linked performance control process, control is performed to execute the normal symbol linked performance.

In the normal picture linking performance control process, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the normal picture linking performance execution flag is set (step 065AKS031). The normal picture linking performance execution flag is set when the execution of the normal picture linking performance is started as a specified performance. If the normal picture linking performance execution flag is not set (step 065AKS031; No), it is checked whether the special picture linking performance execution flag is set (step 065AKS032). The special picture linking performance execution flag is set when the execution of the special picture linking performance is started. In this embodiment, it is also possible to execute a special picture linking performance that suggests and notifies the display result of the special picture in conjunction with the execution of the variation of the special picture (decorative picture) as a specified performance. The special picture linking performance will be described later. If the special chart linked performance execution flag is set (step 065AKS032; Yes), that is, if a special chart linked performance is being executed as a specified performance, a new specified performance (regular chart linked performance) will not be executed, and the regular chart linked performance control process will end.

If the special symbol linked performance execution flag is not set in step 065AKS032 (step 065AKS032; No), it is confirmed whether or not a normal symbol change start command has been received (step 065AKS051). If a normal symbol change start command has not been received (step 065AKS051; No), the normal symbol linked performance control process is terminated.

When the normal symbol variation start command is set (step 065AKS051; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 checks whether or not the high base state is present by determining whether or not the sub time-saving flag is on (step 065AKS052). When the high base state is present (step 065AKS052; Yes), the frequency of normal symbol variation is high and the display results are almost always normal hits, so the normal symbol linked performance control process is terminated without executing the normal symbol linked performance.

If it is not in the high base state (step 065AKS052; No), it is checked whether it is in the jackpot game state (step 065AKS053). Whether it is in the jackpot game state is checked, for example, by the value of the performance control process flag. In that case, it is considered to be in the jackpot game state when the value of the performance control process flag is 6 or more. If it is in the jackpot game state (step 065AKS053; Yes), in order not to interfere with the performance during the jackpot and because it will be controlled to the high base state after the jackpot game state ends, the normal map linked performance control process is terminated without executing the normal map linked performance.

If the game is not in a jackpot game state (step 065AKS053; No), it is determined whether or not the reach effect of the Super Reach is being executed (step 065AKS056). Here, the fluctuation is being executed according to a fluctuation pattern accompanied by the Super Reach, and it may be determined by whether or not the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation exceeds the start timing of the Super Reach. If the reach effect of the Super Reach is being executed (step 065AKS056; Yes), the normal map linked effect control process is terminated without executing the normal map linked effect in order to draw attention to the reach effect of the Super Reach. Note that the normal map linked effect may not be executed even during the execution of effects other than the reach effect of the Super Reach (such as the advance notice effect on the image display device 5, the action effect of the movable body 32, and effects with a high expectation of a jackpot).

If the reach effect of the Super Reach is not being executed (step 065AKS056; No), a predetermined effect pattern is determined according to whether or not to execute the normal symbol linked effect and the effect type if executed (step 065AKS059). In step 065AKS059, as shown in FIG. 20-8 (B), whether or not to execute the normal symbol linked effect and the predetermined effect pattern are determined according to the display result of the normal symbol specified by the normal symbol variation start command.

Figure 20-8 (C) is a diagram showing the predetermined performance patterns. The predetermined performance is a performance that suggests and notifies the display result of a normal pattern or a special pattern, and the predetermined performance pattern SP1 is a pattern that suggests that both the normal pattern and the special pattern will be a miss, the predetermined performance pattern SP2 is a pattern that notifies that it will be a "normal hit", and the predetermined performance pattern SP3 is a pattern that notifies that it will be a "time-saving pattern". The predetermined performance patterns SP4 and SP5 are patterns that suggest that the special pattern will be a jackpot pattern, and the expected probability of a jackpot is higher for the predetermined performance pattern SP5 than for the predetermined performance pattern SP4. In this embodiment, the predetermined performance of all the predetermined performance patterns starts in the same manner, and then the result according to the predetermined performance pattern is notified. Therefore, even if the predetermined performance pattern SP1 suggests a miss, it can be expected that the other predetermined performance patterns will be displayed at the start of the performance.

In addition, after suggesting the display result or the display result of the special pattern, a false pattern may be set to suggest that it will be a miss. For example, after displaying an image such as "Maybe it's time-saving?" to execute an effect suggesting that the display result of the normal pattern will be a time-saving pattern, a pattern may be set to display an image such as "Too bad" to indicate that it will not be a time-saving pattern.

The predetermined performance patterns corresponding to the normal map linked performance are SP1 to SP3, and in step 065AKS059, the execution of the normal map linked performance and which of the predetermined performance patterns SP1 to SP3 will be selected are determined at the determination ratio as shown in FIG. 20-8 (B). As shown in FIG. 20-8 (B), when the display result of the normal pattern (normal map display result) is "normal map hit", the ratio of the predetermined performance pattern SP2 is high, when it is "normal map miss", the ratio of the predetermined performance pattern SP1 is high, and when it is "time-saving pattern A" or "time-saving pattern B", especially when it is "time-saving pattern B" with a large number of time-saving times, the ratio of the predetermined performance pattern SP3 is high. This allows the normal map linked performance (predetermined performance) to suggest and notify the normal map display result. Note that the determination ratio shown in FIG. 20-8 (B) is one example, and any ratio may be used as long as the normal map linked performance (predetermined performance) can suggest and notify the normal map display result. In addition, a predetermined presentation pattern other than the predetermined presentation patterns SP1 to SP3 may be set as a predetermined presentation pattern for the normal map linked presentation.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether it has been decided to execute the normal map linked performance (step 065AKS064). If it has not been decided to execute the normal map linked performance (step 065AKS064; No), the normal map linked performance control process ends.

If it has been decided to execute the normal map linked performance (step 065AKS064; Yes), the normal map linked performance timer is set to a value corresponding to the execution time of the normal map linked performance according to the decision result (predetermined performance pattern) in step 065AKS059 (step 065AKS078). Then, the normal map linked performance (predetermined performance) is started based on the performance control data corresponding to the predetermined performance pattern (step 065AKS079). Then, in response to the start of the normal map linked performance, the normal map linked performance execution flag is set (step 065AKS080), and the normal map linked performance control process is terminated.

If the normal map linked performance execution flag is set (step 065AKS031; No), the value of the normal map linked performance timer is subtracted by 1 (step 065AKS034), and it is determined whether the value of the normal map linked performance timer has become 0 (step 065AKS035). If the value of the normal map linked performance timer is not 0 (step 065AKS035; No), the normal map linked performance control process is terminated.

When the value of the normal map linked performance timer becomes 0 (step 065AKS035; Yes), the normal map linked performance is ended (step 065AKS036), the normal map linked performance execution flag is reset to the off state (step 065AKS037), and the normal map linked performance control process is ended.

Figure 20-9 (A) is a flowchart showing an example of a special chart linked performance determination process for determining whether or not a special chart linked performance is executed as a predetermined performance, and the predetermined performance pattern when it is executed. The special chart linked performance determination process is executed within the variable display start setting process (step S171) of the performance control process shown in Figure 20-7 before the decorative pattern starts to change. In the special chart linked performance determination process, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the normal chart linked performance execution flag is set (step 065AKS091). If the normal chart linked performance execution flag is set (step 065AKS091; Yes), that is, if a normal chart linked performance is being executed as a predetermined performance, the special chart linked performance determination process is terminated since a new predetermined performance (special chart linked performance) is not executed. If the normal chart linked performance execution flag is not set (step 065AKS091; No), it is checked whether or not the high base state is in place by determining whether or not the sub time reduction flag is on (step 065AKS092). If the base state is high (step 065AKS092; Yes), the average special chart change time is short and the period for executing the special chart linked performance cannot be secured, so the special chart linked performance is not executed and the special chart linked performance decision process is terminated.

The special chart linked performance determination process is executed when the decorative pattern starts to change, so the special chart linked performance is not determined and executed in the case of a big win game state or a small win game state. If the high base state is not in place (step 065AKS092; No), it is confirmed whether the current start of the change is a Super Reach Miss or a Super Reach Big Win change pattern (step 065AKS093). It is possible to determine whether the change pattern is a Super Reach Miss or a Super Reach Big Win change pattern by checking the change pattern specified by the change pattern designation command. If the change pattern is not a Super Reach Miss or a Super Reach Big Win change pattern (step 065AKS093; No), the special chart linked performance determination process is terminated. In this way, in this embodiment, if the change pattern is not accompanied by a Super Reach, the special chart linked performance is not executed, but even if the change pattern is not accompanied by a Super Reach, the special chart linked performance (for example, the specified performance of the specified performance pattern SP1) may be executed at a specified rate.

If the fluctuation pattern is a Super Reach Miss or Super Reach Big Hit (Step 065AKS093; Yes), a predetermined presentation pattern is determined according to whether or not to execute a special symbol linked presentation and the presentation style if executed (Step 065AKS094). In Step 065AKS094, as shown in FIG. 20-9(B), whether or not to execute a special symbol linked presentation and the predetermined presentation pattern are determined according to the display result of the special symbol (decorative symbol).

The predetermined presentation patterns corresponding to the special chart linked presentation are SP1, SP4, and SP5, and in step 065AKS094, it is determined whether or not to execute the special chart linked presentation and which of the predetermined presentation patterns SP1, SP4, or SP5 will be used, based on the determination ratio shown in FIG. 20-9 (B). As shown in FIG. 20-9 (B), when the special chart display result is a "jackpot," the predetermined presentation pattern SP5 is determined more frequently, and when the special chart display result is a "miss," the predetermined presentation pattern SP4 is determined more frequently. This makes the predetermined presentation pattern SP5 higher in jackpot expectation (reliability) than the predetermined presentation pattern SP4. The predetermined presentation patterns SP4 and SP5 are determined when they are variable patterns accompanied by a super reach, so when the special chart linked presentation of these predetermined presentation patterns is executed, it can be notified that a super reach will occur. In addition, in the determination ratio shown in FIG. 20-9, even in the case of the predetermined performance pattern SP1, a jackpot may be obtained, so that an unexpected performance can be executed. The determination ratio shown in FIG. 20-9 (B) is an example, and any ratio can be used as long as the special chart linkage performance (predetermined performance) can suggest and notify the special chart display result. In addition, a predetermined performance pattern other than the predetermined performance patterns SP1, SP4, and SP5 may be set as the predetermined performance pattern for the special chart linkage performance.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether it has been decided not to execute the special chart linked performance (step 065AKS095). If it has been decided not to execute the special chart linked performance (step 065AKS095; Yes), the special chart linked performance decision process is terminated. If it has been decided to execute the special chart linked performance (step 065AKS095; No), settings are made to execute the special chart linked performance corresponding to the determined predetermined performance pattern (step 065AKS096). In step 065AKS096, for example, performance control data corresponding to the predetermined performance pattern is set as usage data in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. Then, the special chart linked performance execution flag is set to the ON state (step 065AKS097), and the special chart linked performance decision process is terminated.

Figure 20-10 is a flow chart showing an example of the time-saving notification setting process (step 065AKS2) executed in the performance control process of Figure 20-7. The time-saving notification setting process is a process for notifying the user of a transition to the time-saving state when the display result of the normal pattern becomes a time-saving pattern and the high base state (time-saving state) is controlled accordingly.

In the time-saving notification setting process, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a regular pattern stop designation command specifying that the time-saving pattern has stopped has been received (step 065AKS101). If a regular pattern stop designation command specifying that the time-saving pattern has stopped has not been received (step 065AKS101; No), the time-saving notification setting process ends.

If a normal symbol stop command specifying that the time-saving symbol has stopped is received (step 065AKS101; Yes), it is determined whether the sub time-saving flag is on to confirm whether the high base state is in effect (step 065AKS102). If the high base state is in effect (step 065AKS102; Yes), control based on the time-saving symbol being activated is not executed, and the time-saving notification setting process is terminated.

If the high base state is not reached (step 065AKS102; No), the sub time-saving flag is set to the ON state (step 065AKS103). The sub time-saving flag is also set to the ON state when the jackpot game state ends and control is exercised to the time-saving state.

Next, it is determined whether or not the game is in a jackpot game state (step 065AKS104). If the game is in a jackpot game state (step 065AKS104; Yes), the game is controlled to a time-saving state after the jackpot game state, and the time-saving notification setting process is terminated without notifying the gamer that the game has transitioned to the time-saving state.

If the jackpot game state is not reached (step 065AKS104; No), a right-hit display instructing the player to hit to the right is displayed at a specified position on the image display device 5 (step 065AKS105).

Then, it is determined whether or not the reach effect of the Super Reach is being executed (step 065AKS106). If the reach effect of the Super Reach is not being executed (step 065AKS106; No), settings are made to start a notification of the transition to the time-saving state (time-saving transition notification) and a notification of the right hit (right hit notification) (step 065AKS107).

Also, if the reach performance of the Super Reach is being executed (step 065AKS106; Yes), a setting is made to start a right-hit notification at the start of the next fluctuation (step 065AKS108). Thus, in this embodiment, when the reach performance of the Super Reach is being executed, in order to draw attention to the reach performance of the Super Reach, the time-saving transition notification and right-hit notification are not executed, and the right-hit notification is executed at the next fluctuation. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the reach performance of the Super Reach from being hindered. Note that the time-saving transition notification and right-hit notification may not be executed even during the execution of a performance other than the reach performance of the Super Reach (such as a notice performance on the image display device 5, a performance of the movable body 32, a performance with a high expectation of a jackpot, etc.). Also, although the time-saving state may already have been entered at the start of the next fluctuation, the time-saving transition notification may be executed at the next fluctuation.

Although the time-saving transition notification and right-hit notification are not executed, the right-hit display is displayed, so that at the very least it is possible to indicate that the transition has been made to the time-saving state, reducing the disadvantages suffered by players due to not being able to grasp the game state.

After executing the processing of step 065AKS107 or step 065AKS108, the time-saving notification setting process ends.

Figure 20-11 is a timing chart showing the effects when the time-saving transition occurs. In Figure 20-11, "Special pattern change" ON indicates that the special pattern is changing, and OFF indicates that the special pattern is stopped. "Regular pattern change" ON indicates that the regular pattern is changing, and OFF indicates that the regular pattern is stopped. "Right-hit image" ON indicates that the right-hit image is displayed on the image display device 5, and OFF indicates that the right-hit image is not displayed.

Figure 20-11 (A) is a timing chart for when the reach effect of the super reach is not being executed when the time-saving pattern stops. As shown in Figure 20-11 (A), when the time-saving pattern stops as a result of the display of the normal pattern while the special pattern is changing, the time-saving transition notification and the right-hit notification are executed. Also, the right-hit image is displayed at the timing when the time-saving pattern stops. Then, the pattern determination time of the time-saving pattern has passed, and the time-saving control will start when the next normal pattern starts to change. In this way, by executing the time-saving transition notification and the right-hit notification during the pattern determination time of the time-saving pattern before the time-saving control actually starts, it is possible to appropriately notify that the time-saving state will be transitioned to and that the game will be played by right-hitting, even if the time-saving state is transitioned to while the special pattern is changing.

Figure 20-11 (B) is a timing chart for when the Super Reach reach effect is not being executed when the time-saving pattern stops. As shown in Figure 20-11 (B), when a Super Reach occurs during the fluctuation of a special pattern, and the time-saving pattern stops as a result of the display of a normal pattern during the reach effect of the Super Reach, a right-hit image is displayed at the timing when the time-saving pattern stops, but the time-saving transition notification and the right-hit notification are not executed. Then, at the start of the next fluctuation after the end of the fluctuation accompanied by the Super Reach, the right-hit notification is executed. Note that if the timing of the start of the next fluctuation is after the pattern determination time of the time-saving pattern, the time-saving state is already in effect, so in this embodiment, when the time-saving pattern stops during the reach effect of the Super Reach, the time-saving notification is not executed at the start of the next fluctuation. In contrast, the time-saving notification may be executed at the start of the next fluctuation. For example, as shown in FIG. 20-11(B), if the pattern determination time for the time-saving pattern has elapsed since the start of the next fluctuation, a time-saving notification may be executed at the start of the next fluctuation.

In addition, if the timing of the end of the special pattern change that is being performed when the time-saving pattern stops is before the time for the time-saving pattern to be determined, which is the timing when the time-saving control actually starts, there is no need to hastily execute the time-saving transition notification or right-hit notification while the current special pattern is changing, so the time-saving transition notification or right-hit notification may be executed in the period after the start of the next special pattern change but before the time for the time-saving pattern to be determined has passed.

Next, an example of the performance of the characteristic part 065AK will be described. Figures 20-12 to 20-14 show an example of the performance of the predetermined performance of the characteristic part 065AK. In Figure 20-12 (A), a downward arrow indicates that the decorative pattern is being changed in each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". A small pattern that is always visible to the player is also changed in the upper left of the image display device 5. In addition, a predetermined performance area 65AK11 is provided in the lower center of the image display device 5. In this embodiment, a predetermined performance (normal pattern linked performance, special pattern linked performance) is executed in the predetermined performance area 65AK11. The predetermined performance area 65AK11 may be displayed on the image display device 5 at all times, or may be displayed when the predetermined performance is executed. For example, the predetermined performance area 65AK11 may be erased in a high base state or a jackpot game state in which the predetermined performance is not executed.

When it is decided to execute a specified performance, as shown in FIG. 20-12(B), a performance image is scrolled in the specified performance area 65AK11 and the specified performance begins. In FIG. 20-12(B), a downward arrow indicates that the performance image is being scrolled. After that, the performance result according to the specified performance pattern is announced.

When the specified performance pattern SP1 is selected, as shown in FIG. 20-12(C), an "X" performance image is displayed in the specified performance area 65AK11 and stops. This notifies the user that the specified performance has failed and that the expected probability of the normal or special pattern display being a winning combination is low.

When the specified performance pattern SP2 is selected, as shown in FIG. 20-12(D), a "○" performance image is displayed in the specified performance area 65AK11 and stops. This notifies the user that the specified performance has been successful and that the normal pattern is a winning combination.

When the specified performance pattern is SP4, as shown in FIG. 20-12(E), a musical note performance image is displayed and stops in the specified performance area 65AK11. This notifies the user that the specified performance has been successful, and that there is a high probability that the special symbol will result in a jackpot, or that a super reach will be executed.

When the specified effect pattern is SP5, as shown in FIG. 20-12(F), an effect image of the character "Heat" is displayed in the specified effect area 65AK11 and stops. This notifies the user that the specified effect has been successful, and that there is a higher chance of the special symbol becoming a jackpot, or that a super reach will be executed.

In the case of the specified performance patterns SP4 and SP5, for example as shown in Figures 20-12 (E) and (F), decorative symbols of the same number stop in the left and right decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, respectively, and after a reach is reached, the performance result of the specified performance (a performance image of a musical note or the character "heat") is displayed. By doing this, if a specified performance is executed during a reach, it can be expected that a super reach will occur.

The predetermined performance patterns SP1 and SP2 are executed as normal pattern linked performances, and the predetermined performance patterns SP1, SP4, and SP5 are executed as special pattern linked performances. The normal pattern linked performances are executed regardless of the change in the special pattern (decorative pattern), so they can be executed at any timing while the special pattern (decorative pattern) is changing.

Figure 20-13 is an example of the presentation operation when the specified presentation (normal symbol linked presentation) of the specified presentation pattern SP3 is executed. Figure 20-13 (A) shows that the decorative symbols are changed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R. Small symbols that are always visible to the player are also changed in the upper left of the image display device 5. In addition, a specified presentation area 65AK11 is provided in the lower central part of the image display device 5.

When it is decided to execute a specified performance, as shown in FIG. 20-13 (B), a performance image is scrolled in the specified performance area 65AK11 and the specified performance begins.

If the specified effect pattern is SP3, as shown in FIG. 20-13(C), the "hour" effect image is displayed and stops in the specified effect area 65AK11. This notifies the user that the specified effect has been successful and that the normal pattern display will be a time-saving pattern.

When the time-saving pattern stops, as shown in FIG. 20-13 (D), a right-hit display instructing the player to hit right is displayed in the lower right portion of the image display device 5, and a time-saving transition notification is executed in which an image of the words "Entering time-saving mode!" is displayed in the center portion of the image display device 5. At this time, the number of times the time-saving mode has been activated is displayed in the upper left portion of the image display device 5. Here, "100 times" is displayed in response to the time-saving pattern B being activated.

After that, as shown in FIG. 20-13(E), a right-hit notification is executed, in which an image of the text "Aim right!" is displayed in the center of the image display device 5. Then, as shown in FIG. 20-13(F), the right-hit notification image is erased, and the right-hit notification ends. At this time, the "time" effect image is also erased in the predetermined effect area 65AK11. Thus, in this embodiment, even if the special pattern (decorative pattern) is fluctuating, if the display result of the normal pattern becomes a time-saving pattern, the time-saving state is transitioned to. In that case, a predetermined effect that notifies the time-saving pattern that it will stop can be executed, and a time-saving transition notification or a right-hit notification as shown in FIG. 20-13(D) and (E) is executed, so that the transition to the time-saving state can be conveniently notified. This allows the player to continue playing without confusion.

Figure 20-14 shows an example of the performance operation when a specified performance (normal symbol linked performance) of the specified performance pattern SP3 is executed during the reach performance of a super reach. Figure 20-14 (A) shows that the decorative symbols showing the number "7" have stopped in the left and right decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the decorative symbols in the central decorative symbol display area 5C have changed, resulting in a reach. Small symbols that are always visible to the player are also changed in the upper left of the image display device 5. In addition, a specified performance area 65AK11 is provided in the lower center part of the image display device 5.

When it is decided to execute the specified performance, as shown in FIG. 20-14 (B), the performance image is scrolled in the specified performance area 65AK11 and the specified performance starts. At this time, the reach performance of the super reach starts on the image display device 5.

If the specified effect pattern is SP3, as shown in Figure 20-14 (C), the "hour" effect image is displayed and stops in the specified effect area 65AK11. This notifies the user that the specified effect has been successful and that the normal pattern display will be a time-saving pattern.

When the time-saving symbol stops during the Super Reach performance, as shown in FIG. 20-14 (D), a right-hit display instructing the player to hit right is displayed in the lower right portion of the image display device 5, but no time-saving transition notification or right-hit notification is given on the image display device 5, and the Super Reach performance continues.

After that, as shown in FIG. 20-14(E), the decorative symbol showing the number "6" stops in the decorative symbol display area 5C in the middle, resulting in a miss. At this time, the "hour" effect image is also erased from the predetermined effect area 65AK11. Then, as shown in FIG. 20-14(F), as the next decorative symbol starts to change, a right-hit notification is executed in which an image of the words "Aim right!" is displayed in the center of the image display device 5. At this time, the number of time-saving times is displayed in the upper left part of the image display device 5. Here, "49 times" is displayed in response to the time-saving symbol A. Note that here, the time-saving state was entered during the previous change, and as one change has been consumed, the number of time-saving times has been reduced from 50 to 49.

In this embodiment, if the display result of the normal pattern during the reach performance of the Super Reach becomes a time-saving pattern, the time-saving transition notification or right-hit notification is not executed, and the reach performance of the Super Reach is executed with priority. If the Super Reach results in a jackpot, the game will be controlled to the time-saving state after the jackpot game state corresponding to the jackpot. Therefore, even if a time-saving transition notification is executed during the reach performance of the Super Reach, there is a possibility that the notification will be wasted or the performance will be uninteresting, so the reach performance of the Super Reach is prioritized. And if the display result is a miss, a right-hit notification is executed at the time of the next change, so that it is possible to appropriately notify that the game has transitioned to the time-saving state and that a right hit will be performed. In addition, if the display result of the normal pattern becomes a time-saving pattern during the reach performance of the super reach, and the display result of the change accompanying the super reach becomes a jackpot, the notification corresponding to the display result of the normal pattern becoming a time-saving pattern (time-saving transition notification, right-hit notification) may not be executed, or a notification corresponding to the display result of the normal pattern becoming a time-saving pattern may be executed in the first change after the jackpot game state ends.

(Modification of characteristic part 065AK)
This characteristic part is not limited to this embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible, and further features may be added. The process contents and determination ratios of the flowcharts shown in the above embodiment and modified examples, and the method of determining various effects are only examples, and any method may be used as long as it can achieve the same effect as the above embodiment and can perform the effects shown in the above embodiment. In addition, the example of the performance operation shown in the above embodiment is only an example, and can be changed as appropriate as long as it can achieve the same performance effect. In addition, not all of the configurations described in the above embodiment are essential configurations, and some of them may be missing. In addition, this characteristic part may be combined with other characteristic parts as appropriate.

When the display result of the special pattern is read in advance and a pre-reading preview performance is executed, if the display result of the normal pattern is a time-saving pattern, the execution of the pre-reading preview performance may be restricted. For example, if the display result of the normal pattern is a time-saving pattern, the pre-reading preview performance may not be executed until the time-saving pattern stops and the game transitions to the time-saving state. In addition, the display result of the normal pattern before the start of the fluctuation is read in advance, and if there is reserved data of a normal pattern that will become a time-saving pattern, the pre-reading preview performance that predicts the display result of the special pattern may be restricted. In this way, it is possible to prevent the game state from being changed after the pre-reading preview performance is executed, which causes the fluctuation pattern to change between the time of the pre-reading and the time of the actual fluctuation execution, resulting in a situation where the performance content of the pre-reading preview performance is not consistent.

In addition to the jackpot signal (output during a jackpot) and special prize signal (output during a jackpot and during time-saving), a time-saving signal (output only during time-saving) may be provided as a signal to be output externally to the hall computer or data display device.

In the above embodiment, if the display result of the normal pattern becomes a time-saving pattern in the jackpot game state, control to the time-saving state is not performed, but if a jackpot occurs in a low base state, control to the time-saving state may be performed based on the time-saving pattern in the jackpot game state corresponding to the jackpot. In this case, the order is jackpot game state start → time-saving control start based on the time-saving pattern → jackpot game state end, and the base changes before and after the jackpot game state. Therefore, the setting of the number of time-saving times based on the control to the jackpot game state may be performed at the start of the change after the jackpot game state ends. For example, if the number of time-saving times when a jackpot occurs in a low base state is 50 times or 100 times, and the number of time-saving times when a jackpot occurs in a high base state is 100 times, if the time-saving pattern stops during the jackpot game state, the number of time-saving times after the jackpot game state ends is set to 100 times. By setting the number of time-saving times when the fluctuation starts after the end of the jackpot game state, it is possible to transition to a suitable state even if the game state changes during the jackpot. Note that when the jackpot game state is reached, the number of time-saving times may be constant regardless of the game state, or the number of time-saving times may be determined at a fixed rate.

In the above embodiment, the predetermined effects (normal pattern linked effects, special pattern linked effects) that suggest or notify the display result of a normal pattern or a special pattern were effects that scrolled the effect image in the predetermined effect area 65AK11 to display the effect result (Figs. 20-12 to 20-14), but any effect that can suggest or notify the display result of a normal pattern or a special pattern may be used. In addition, the predetermined effect may be at least an effect that suggests or notifies whether or not a normal pattern becomes a time-saving pattern, or the display result of a special pattern.

In addition, in the above embodiment, if the display result of the normal pattern is a time-saving pattern in a high base state, the number of time-saving times is not updated, but if the display result of the normal pattern is a time-saving pattern in a high base state, the number of time-saving times may be updated or added. Also, the number of time-saving times and the determination ratio of the number of time-saving times may be different when the display result of the normal pattern is a time-saving pattern in a low base state and when the display result of the normal pattern is a time-saving pattern in a high base state.

In the above embodiment, the execution of the time-saving transition notification and right-hit notification was restricted in certain cases, such as during the reach performance of a super reach, but if a transition to a time-saving state occurs in response to a time-saving pattern being formed regardless of the performance content during execution, the time-saving transition notification and right-hit notification may be executed. For example, if the time-saving transition notification and right-hit notification are executed on a display means other than the image display device 5, the time-saving transition notification and right-hit notification may be executed regardless of the performance content on the image display device 5.

(Means relating to characteristic part 065AK)
(1) The gaming machine according to the characteristic part 065AK is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 65AK1) that performs variable display of special identification information (e.g., special symbols), and is controllable to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) in which a gaming medium is likely to enter a special variable means (e.g., a special variable winning ball device 7 (a big winning hole)) based on the result of the variable display of the special identification information becoming a specific display result (e.g., a big winning symbol),
A variable control means (e.g., CPU 103 for executing the process of step S404) for performing a variable display of normal identification information (e.g., normal symbols), and changing the normal variable means (e.g., variable winning ball device 6B (second start winning port)) to a predetermined state (e.g., open state) in which the game medium can easily enter the normal variable means (e.g., variable winning ball device 6B (second start winning port)) based on the result of the variable display of the normal identification information becoming a predetermined result (e.g., a normal winning pattern);
A state control means (e.g., a CPU 103 that executes the process of step 065AKS018) capable of controlling the normal variable means to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which the normal variable means is more likely to change to the predetermined state than the normal state;
A performance execution means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a performance;
The state control means can control from the normal state to the special state based on the variable display result of the normal identification information becoming a special result (e.g., a time-saving pattern) different from the predetermined result (e.g., executing the process of step 065AKS018),
The effect execution means is capable of executing a specific effect (e.g., a specific effect of a specific effect pattern SP4, a specific effect of a specific effect pattern SP5, a special picture linkage effect) that suggests that a variable display result of the special identification information will be the specific display result, and a special effect (e.g., a specific effect of a specific effect pattern SP3, a normal picture linkage effect) that suggests that a variable display result of the normal identification information will be the special result,
The state control means is capable of controlling from the normal state to the special state (for example, executing the processing of step 065AKS018) even if the variable display of special identification information is being executed when the variable display result of normal identification information becomes the special result.
According to such a configuration, the state transition can be performed appropriately, and interest in the game can be increased.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
A predetermined notification means for performing a predetermined notification (for example, a time-saving transition notification, a right-hit notification) based on the normal variable means changing to the predetermined state;
It may also be possible to provide a predetermined notification limiting means (for example, a performance control CPU 120 that executes the processing of steps 065AKS106 and 065AKS108) that limits the predetermined notification depending on the performance content during the variable display of the special identification information.
With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the predetermined notification from interfering with the presentation during the variable display of the special identification information.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
The effect execution means may be capable of executing an effect that suggests that, in the normal state, the variable display result of the normal identification information will be the specified result, the variable display result of the normal identification information will be the special result, or the variable display result of the special identification information will be the specific display result (for example, capable of executing a specified effect of specified effect patterns SP1 to SP5; Figures 20-12 and 20-13).
According to this configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the display results of both the normal identification information and the special identification information.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above,
The state control means can control the state to the special state based on the fact that the state control means has been controlled to the advantageous state (for example, FIG. 20-5 );
When starting the variable display of the special identification information after control to the advantageous state, the termination condition of the special state, which is controlled based on control to the advantageous state, may be made different depending on whether the state is the normal state or the special state.
With this configuration, the state transition can be performed appropriately.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above,
When the variable display result of the normal identification information is the special result, the time from when the variable display result is displayed to when it is confirmed may be longer (for example, Figure 20-3 (A)) than when the variable display result of the normal identification information is the specified result.
With this configuration, the state transition can be performed appropriately.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above,
In the normal state, the time from when the special result is displayed as a variable display result of the normal identification information to when it is determined may be longer than when the special state is selected (e.g., Figures 20-3 (A) and (B)).
With this configuration, the state transition can be performed appropriately.

(Explanation regarding association of characteristic parts)
Each configuration of the characteristic portion may be combined with some or all of the configurations of other characteristic portions as appropriate. The combined characteristics or individual uncombined characteristics may be combined with some or all of the configurations of other characteristic portions as appropriate.

The embodiments disclosed herein should be considered to be illustrative and not restrictive in all respects. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims, not by the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope of the claims.

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 079SG)
Next, a characteristic part 079SG in the embodiment of the present invention (hereinafter, abbreviated as the present characteristic part 079SG) will be described. Fig. 21-1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko game machine 1 in the present characteristic part 079SG. As shown in FIG. 21-1, the audio control board 13 in this characteristic part 079SG is equipped with a voice synthesis IC 079SG132 that works in cooperation with the performance control CPU 120 to generate sound (performance sound) to be output from the speakers 8L, 8R, an amplification circuit (amplifier) 079SG134 that amplifies the output sound generated by the voice synthesis IC 079SG132, and an audio data ROM 079SG133. The performance control CPU 120 outputs sound number data to the voice synthesis IC 079SG132 based on a performance control command from the main board 11, and causes the voice synthesis IC 079SG132 to generate a sound corresponding to the sound number data.

When sound number data is input from the performance control CPU 120, the voice synthesis IC 079SG132 generates voice and sound effects corresponding to the input sound number data individually for each speaker 8L, 8R and outputs them to the amplifier circuit 079SG134. The amplifier circuit 079SG134 amplifies the voice and sound effects output from the voice synthesis IC 079SG132 and outputs them to each speaker 8L, 8R.

The sound data ROM 079SG133 stores control data for each speaker 8L, 8R, which is associated with sound number data and is used to output sounds corresponding to the performance executed by the performance command to which the sound number data corresponds. In other words, this control data is a collection of data including sound data that chronologically describes the output mode (frequency characteristics, timing (delay), etc.) of sounds such as sound effects and BGM (music) output from each speaker 8L, 8R during the performance period (for example, the decorative pattern variable display period).

Figure 21-2 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the image display device 5 in this characteristic part 079. The display area of the image display device 5 in this characteristic part 079SG is formed in a rectangular shape with a height L and a left-right width L when viewed from the front. Most of the display area constitutes a first display area 079SG005F for displaying effects such as variable display of decorative patterns, reach effects, operation promotion effects and still image display effects described later. In addition, the lower end of the image display device 5 constitutes a second display area 079SG005Sa including a first reserved memory display area 079SG005D that can display the first reserved memory number by the number of reserved displays in white circles, a second reserved memory display area 079SG005U that can display the second reserved memory number by the number of reserved displays in white circles, and a caption display area 079SG005T that can display a caption indicating the game status.

In other words, the entire display area of the image display device 5 excluding the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb becomes the first display area 079SG005F.

The second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb are display areas that display information related to the game (reserved display, subtitle display, fourth symbol display, and reserved memory count display) at the periphery of the display area of the image display device 5, closer to the first display area 079SG005F. In other words, the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb in this characteristic part 079SG are also UI (user interface) display areas in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The upper right corner of the image display device 5 constitutes a third display area 079SG005Sb that includes a fourth pattern 079SG005J, which indicates that the special pattern is being variably displayed, and a display of the number of reserved first special patterns and the number of reserved second special patterns.

Of these, the second display area 079SG005Sa is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, with a height that is less than half the height H of the entire display area of the image display device 5, and a left-right width that is the same as the left-right width L of the entire display area of the image display device 5. The third display area 079SG005Sb is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, but its height and left-right width are much shorter than the height H and left-right width L of the entire display area of the image display device 5.

For this reason, in this characteristic part 079SG, the area of the first display region 079SG005F relative to the entire display region of the image display device 5 is larger than the combined area of the second display region 079SG005Sa and the third display region 079SG005Sb.

As shown in FIG. 21-2 (B), in the first pending memory display area 079SG005D and the second pending memory display area 079SG005U, the performance control CPU 120 executes the pending display operation process (see FIG. 21-13) described below, which allows each pending display to be rotated around the vertical axis at a constant speed (for example, rotation speed V3).

As shown in FIG. 21-2 (C), in the caption display area 079SG005T, the performance control CPU 120 executes the caption operation process (see FIG. 21-13) described below, which makes it possible to display a message according to the game status or the performance being performed (for example, if a specific reach performance is in progress, a message according to the status of the performance such as "XX mode in progress!") while moving from left to right at a constant speed (for example, movement speed V3).

When the characters included in the message corresponding to the game status reach the right end of the caption display area 079SG005T and cease to be displayed, they are simultaneously displayed again at the left end of the caption display area 079SG005T and moved again from left to right. Therefore, when a message corresponding to the game status is displayed while moving in the caption display area 079SG005T, the entire message corresponding to the game status is always displayed in the caption display area 079SG005T, making it easier for the player to recognize the current game status.

Note that, in this characteristic section 079SG, an example is shown in which the pending display in the first pending memory display area 079SG005D and the second pending memory display area 079SG005U and the message in the caption display area 079SG005T are rotated and moved at a common constant speed (V3), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pending display in the first pending memory display area 079SG005D and the second pending memory display area 079SG005U and the message in the caption display area 079SG005T may each be rotated and moved at different constant speeds.

As shown in Figure 21-2 (D), the fourth symbol 079SG005J has an upper symbol 079SG005Ja and a lower symbol 079SG005Jb, and these upper symbol 079SG005Ja and lower symbol 079SG005Jb flash alternately at a regular interval to indicate that the special symbol is being variable displayed. Also, if the variable display result is a miss, both of these upper symbol 079SG005Ja and lower symbol 079SG005Jb are turned off (OFF) at the end of the variable display, whereas if the variable display result is a jackpot or miss, both are lit (ON) at the end of the variable display.

The display of the first special pattern reserved memory count and the display of the second special pattern reserved memory count in the third display area 079SG005Sb are displays that change only when a new reserved memory occurs and when a new variable display starts. In other words, unlike the fourth pattern 079SG005J, the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the caption display area 079SG005T, the display mode of the display of the first special pattern reserved memory count and the second special pattern reserved memory count in the third display area 079SG005Sb does not change except when the variable display starts.

Next, the display control unit 123 in this feature unit 079SG will be described. The CGROM in the display control unit 123 stores multiple types of image data for displaying an image on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 can display a specific image on the image display device 5 based on one image data stored in the CGROM based on an instruction from the performance control CPU 120, and can display a specific performance screen by arranging multiple types of image data and displaying an image on the image display device 5. When preventing a specific image from being displayed on the image display device 5, depending on the situation, there are cases where other image data is arranged in front of the image data of the specific image with a transmittance of 0%, thereby controlling so that an image based on the image data of the specific image is not displayed on the performance screen, and cases where an image is displayed on the image display device 5 that has created display data in which the image data of the specific image is not arranged, thereby controlling so that the specific image is not displayed on the performance screen.

As shown in Figures 21-3 (A) to 21-3 (D), for example, when an image is displayed on the image display device 5, the image is displayed on the image display device 5 based on display data created by arranging multiple image data including image data 1 to 3.

As shown in FIG. 21-3 (A), image data 1 is data that is drawn to display the first pending memory display area 079SG005D, the second pending memory display area 079SG005U, and the caption display area 079SG005T in the second display area 079SG005Sa, and the fourth pattern 079SG005J in the third display area 079SG005Sb. It is also data that is drawn to display the small pattern of the image data 1 decorative pattern in the first display area 079SG005F (to the left of the third display area 079SG005Sb).

As shown in FIG. 21-3 (B), image data 2 is data that is drawn to display images of chance-up effects, still image display effects, and operation promotion effects, which will be described later, in the first display area 079SG005F.

As shown in FIG. 21-3 (C), image data 3 is data that is drawn to display variable decorative symbols and reach effects in the first display area 079SG005F.

As shown in Fig. 21-3(A) to Fig. 21-3(C), display priorities are set for these image data 1, image data 2, and image data 3 for displaying images on the image display device 5. The display priority is set highest for image data 1, and lowest for image data 3 (image display priority on the image display device 5: image data 1>image data 2>image data 3). That is, on the image display device 5, an image based on image data 1 is displayed as the topmost image, an image based on image data 2 is displayed as an image lower than an image based on image data 1, and an image based on image data 3 is displayed as an image lower (lowest layer) than images based on image data 1 and image data 2. Therefore, on the image display device 5, an image based on image data 2 is displayed with priority over an image based on image data 3, and an image based on image data 1 is displayed with priority over images based on image data 2 and image data 3, as shown in Fig. 21-3(D).

As shown in FIG. 21-3 (D), when an image based on image data 1, an image based on image data 2, and an image based on image data 3 are simultaneously displayed on the image display device 5, the image based on image data 3 is displayed as the image at the lowest hierarchical level, and therefore at least a portion of the image based on image data 3 may be difficult to view or may be impossible to view due to the image based on the first data and the image based on image data 2.

In addition, in this feature section 079SG, the details of which will be described later, images based on image data 1 and image data 2 are always displayed on the image display device 5 as moving images with a constant progression speed, while images based on image data 3 are displayed on the image display device 5 as moving images or still images with multiple progression speeds based on data previously stored in the CGROM.

In particular, in this feature section 079SG, the details of which will be described later, during the reach performance of a super reach, the video of the reach performance can be displayed at the normal progression speed V1 and at a progression speed V2 (slow motion) slower than V1. This is because data for the performance video to be displayed at the progression speed V1 and data for the performance video to be displayed at the progression speed V2 are stored in advance in the CGROM, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to store in advance only the data for the performance video to be displayed at the progression speed V1 in the CGROM, and perform a specified process on that data to make it possible to display part of the performance video of the reach performance at the progression speed V2.

In this way, in this characteristic part 079SG, the video progression speed, which is the speed at which the presentation video changes, is set to V1, resulting in a non-slow motion period in which the player perceives the progress of the reach presentation as being a first speed that is fast, and the video progression speed is set to V2, which is slower than V1, resulting in a slow motion period in which the player perceives the progress of the reach presentation as being a second speed that is slower. In other words, the slow motion video, which is a presentation video with a slow presentation progress speed in this characteristic part 079SG, is any video video whose video progress speed is slower than the non-slow motion video, which is displayed before the slow motion video and has a video progress speed of V1.

Note that, in this feature section 079SG, an example is shown in which a slow motion period is provided in all super reach performances (see Figs. 21-18 to 21-25), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the content of the performance video displayed on the image display device 5 as a super reach performance is the same as the content of the super reach performance shown in Figs. 21-18 to 21-25, but by executing a super reach performance in which the video progression speed does not change from V1 to V2, in other words, there is no slow motion period, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that a slow motion period has begun in the super reach performance shown in Figs. 21-18 to 21-25.

In other words, when a super reach performance is executed in which the content of the performance video is the same but the video progression speed does not change to V2, the performance video with the second speed slower than the first speed in this invention corresponds to a performance video with the same content that is displayed at a video progression speed V2 that is slower than the video progression speed V1 in a non-slow motion super reach performance, and thus is displayed for a longer period of time than a non-slow motion super reach performance.

As described above, in this feature section 079SG, the image progression speed of the effect video is slowed down to create a slow-motion effect in which the player feels that the reach effect is progressing slowly, and an example is given in which the sound output from speakers 8L, 8R does not change from the playback speed V3, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to create a pseudo-slow-motion effect in which the player feels that the reach effect is progressing slowly by not changing the image progression speed of the effect video (keeping it at V1) and instead speeding up the playback speed of the sound output from speakers 8L, 8R and the light emission cycle of game effect lamp 9.

In other words, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this characteristic part 079SG is provided with a plurality of effect output means, including a display means capable of displaying effect videos, and by making the speed at which the effect is performed by at least one of these effect output means differ between slow motion periods and non-slow motion periods, it is possible to make the player recognize that the effect being performed is in slow motion during the slow motion period.

Note that in this feature section 079SG, an example is given of a form in which the display of the reach effect video is always executed at a progression speed V2 during the slow motion period, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the progression speed of the display of the reach effect video during the slow motion period may be variable (for example, the progression speed may gradually decrease over time, or the progression speed may increase or decrease within a predetermined range).

Figure 21-4 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of a performance control command used in this feature section 079SG. The performance control command is, for example, two bytes long, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (type of command). The first bit of the MODE data (bit 7) is always set to "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command format shown in Figure 21-4 (A) is just one example, and other command formats may also be used. Also, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 21-4(A), command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A. Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. Command 81XXH is a variable pattern designation command that specifies the variable pattern (variable time (variable display time)) of the decorative symbols (also called performance symbols) that are variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol game. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that is set arbitrarily according to the contents of the instruction by the performance control command. In addition, in the variable pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the specified variable pattern, etc.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result specification command, a presentation control command that specifies a variable display result such as a special pattern or a decorative pattern. In the variable display result specification command, different EXT data is set depending on the result of the determination (predetermination result) of whether the variable display result (also called the variable display result) is a "miss", "jackpot", or "minor hit", and the result of the determination of which of several types of jackpot type should be selected when the variable display result is a "jackpot", as shown in FIG. 21-4 (B), for example.

For example, as shown in FIG. 21-4(B), in the variable display result designation command, command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating a pre-determined result that the variable display result will be "miss". Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot A". Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot B". Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot C". Command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result specification command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "non-variable jackpot" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result specification command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "small jackpot".

Command 8F00H is a pattern determination command that specifies the stop (determination) of the change in the decorative patterns in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5. Command 95XXH is a game state designation command that specifies the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, command 9500H is a first game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which neither time-saving control nor probability variable control is performed (low probability low base state, normal state), and command 9501H is a second game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control is performed but probability variable control is not performed (low probability high base state, time-saving state). In addition, command 9502H is a third game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which high probability bonus control is performed but time-saving control is not performed (high probability low base state, high probability bonus state without time-saving), and command 9503H is a fourth game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control and high probability bonus control are both performed (high probability high base state, high probability bonus state with time-saving).

Command A0XXH is a start of jackpot command (also called a "fanfare command") that specifies the display of an effect image indicating the start of a jackpot or small jackpot game. Command A1XXH is a large prize opening open notification command that notifies the player that the large prize opening is in an open state during a jackpot game. Command A2XXH is a large prize opening post-open notification command that notifies the player that the large prize opening has changed from an open state to a closed state during a jackpot game. Command A3XXH is a end of jackpot command that specifies the display of an effect image at the end of a jackpot game or small jackpot game.

In the hit start specification command and hit end specification command, for example, EXT data similar to that of the variable display result specification command may be set, so that different EXT data is set according to the pre-determined result and the result of the big win type determination. Alternatively, in the hit start specification command and hit end specification command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the big win type determination result and the EXT data set may be made different from the correspondence in the variable display result specification command. In the big win opening notification command and the big win opening after notification command, for example, different EXT data is set according to the number of rounds executed in the big win state (for example, "1" to "10") described later.

Command B100H is a first start port entry designation command that notifies the first start condition for executing a special symbol game using a first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A has been established based on the occurrence of a start winning (first start winning) caused by a game ball passing through (entering) the first start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A being detected by the first start port switch 22A. Command B200H is a second start port entry designation command that notifies the second start condition for executing a special symbol game using a second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B has been established based on the occurrence of a start winning (second start winning) caused by a game ball passing through (entering) the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B being detected by the second start port switch 22B.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved memory number notification command that notifies the first reserved memory number so that the reserved memory number of special charts can be specified. Command C2XXH is a second reserved memory number notification command that notifies the second reserved memory number so that the reserved memory number of special charts can be specified. The first reserved memory number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when the first start port entry designation command is transmitted based on, for example, the game ball passing (entering) the first start port and the first start condition being satisfied. The second reserved memory number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when the second start port entry designation command is transmitted based on, for example, the game ball passing (entering) the second start port and the second start condition being satisfied. In addition, the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command may be sent in response to the start of execution of the special game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is met (when the pending memory number is reduced).

Instead of the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command, a total pending memory number notification command that notifies the total pending memory number may be sent. In other words, the total pending memory number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total pending memory number.

The commands shown in FIG. 21-4(A) are merely examples, and some of these commands may not be included, or different commands may be used instead of these commands, or different commands may be added to these commands. For example, a prize ball number notification command may be provided to enable the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the game balls entering each winning port to be specified, a gate passage notification command to notify that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41, and a notification command to notify the remaining number of times that the special bonus control or time-saving control will be executed.

Figure 21-5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the random number values counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in Figure 21-5, in this feature section 079SG, on the main board 11 side, the numerical data indicating each of the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the random number value MR4 for determining the normal chart display result are controlled so as to be countable. Note that random number values other than these may be used to enhance the gaming effect. Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also called gaming random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count the numerical data indicating some or all of these random number values MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 may count the numerical data indicating some of the random number values MR1 to MR4 by updating various numerical data by software using a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 079SG154 shown in FIG. 21-10.

The random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result is a random number value used to determine whether or not to control the game state to a jackpot by treating the variable display result of a special symbol or the like in a special symbol game as a "jackpot", and takes a value in the range of "1" to "65536", for example. The random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is a random number value used to determine the jackpot type as either "Probable jackpot A", "Probable jackpot B", "Probable jackpot C", or "Non-probable jackpot" when the variable display result is a "jackpot", and takes a value in the range of "1" to "100", for example.

The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of special patterns and decorative patterns to one of several types prepared in advance, and can take a value in the range of "1" to "997", for example.

The random number value MR4 for determining the normal symbol display result is a random number value used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display device 20 is a "normal symbol hit" or a "normal symbol miss", and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13", for example.

Figure 21-6 (A) shows an example of the configuration of the special chart display result judgment table 1 stored in the ROM 101. In this feature part 079SG, a common special chart display result judgment table is used for the first special chart and the second special chart as the special chart display result judgment table, but the present invention is not limited to this, and separate special chart display result judgment tables may be used for the first special chart and the second special chart.

The special pattern display result determination table 1 is a table that is referenced to determine whether or not to control the variable display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot" before a determined special pattern that is a variable display result is derived and displayed in a special pattern game using a first special pattern by the first special pattern display device 4A or a special pattern game using a second special pattern by the second special pattern display device 4B, based on a random number value MR1 for determining the special pattern display result.

In the special chart display result judgment table 1 in this feature part 079SG, a numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result is assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" or "miss" depending on whether the game state of the pachinko game machine 1 is a normal state or time-saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state).

In the special chart display result judgment table 1, the table data indicating the judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result is judgment data assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control the special chart display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot". In the special chart display result judgment table 1 in this feature part 079SG, when the game state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more judgment values are assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" than when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state). As a result, in the probability variable state (high probability state) in which the probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "jackpot" and controlled to a jackpot game state is higher (about 1/30 in this feature part 079SG) than the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "jackpot" and controlled to a jackpot game state when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state) (about 1/300 in this feature part 079SG). That is, in the special chart display result judgment table 1, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a probability variable state (high probability state), the judgment data is assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control to a jackpot gaming state so that the probability of deciding to control to a jackpot gaming state is higher than when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state.

In addition, FIG. 21-6(B) shows an example of the configuration of the special symbol display result determination table 2 stored in the ROM 101. The special symbol display result determination table 2 is a table that is referenced to determine whether or not to control the variable display result to a small win game state as a "small win" based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result before a determined special symbol that is a variable display result is derived and displayed in a special symbol game using a first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A or a special symbol game using a second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B.

In the special chart display result judgment table 2 in this feature part 079SG, regardless of whether the game state of the pachinko game machine 1 is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state), a numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result is assigned to the special chart display result of "small win".

In the special chart display result determination table 2, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result is the determination data assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control the special chart display result to a small win game state as a "small win". In the special chart display result determination table 2 in this feature part 079SG, the number of determination values assigned to a "small win" differs between the first special chart special chart game and the second special chart game. Specifically, in the first special chart special chart game, a determination value is assigned to a "small win", but in the second special chart special chart game, no determination value is assigned to a "small win". Therefore, as described below, the variable display of the second special chart is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special chart, and in a high base state in which time-saving control is executed, a win occurs in the second start winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, and the variable display of the second special chart is executed frequently, so that "small wins" hardly occur. In a high base state in which game balls are likely to enter the second start winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, the occurrence of small wins in which many game balls cannot be obtained can be avoided, and a decrease in interest in the game can be prevented.

Figure 21-7 (A) shows an example of the configuration of a jackpot type determination table stored in ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table in this feature section 079SG is a table that is referenced to determine the jackpot type as one of multiple types based on the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination when it is determined that the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled. In the jackpot type determination table, a number (determination value) that is compared with the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination is assigned to multiple types of jackpot types such as "non-variable jackpot", "variable jackpot A", "variable jackpot B", and "variable jackpot C" depending on whether the special symbol that is variably displayed (variably displayed) in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B).

Now, the types of jackpots in this feature section 079SG will be explained using FIG. 21-7 (B). In this feature section 079SG, the jackpot types are set to "Probable variable jackpot A", "Probable variable jackpot B", and "Probable variable jackpot C", in which high probability control and time-saving control are executed after the jackpot gaming state ends, transitioning to a high probability, high base state, and "Non-probable variable jackpot", in which only time-saving control is executed after the jackpot gaming state ends, transitioning to a low probability, high base state.

The jackpot game state by "probable jackpot A" is a jackpot that repeats 10 rounds (so-called 10 rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player. The jackpot game state by "probable jackpot B" is a jackpot that repeats 5 rounds (so-called 5 rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player. The jackpot game state by "probable jackpot C" is a jackpot that repeats 2 rounds (so-called 2 rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player. The jackpot game state by "non-probable jackpot" is a jackpot that repeats 2 rounds (so-called 2 rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player. Therefore, "probable chance jackpot A" may be referred to as a 10-round (10R) probable chance jackpot, "probable chance jackpot B" may be referred to as a 5-round (5R) probable chance jackpot, "probable chance jackpot C" may be referred to as a 2-round (2R) probable chance jackpot, and "non-probable chance jackpot" may be referred to as a 2-round (2R) non-probable chance jackpot.

Although not shown in the figure, the small win game state in this feature part 079SG changes the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state, which is advantageous to the player, twice, and the opening time is the same as the opening period of the special big win C (0.1 seconds in this feature part 079SG). After the small win game ends, the game state immediately before the small win game is carried over.

The high probability control and time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot game state of the special jackpot A, special jackpot B, or special jackpot C will continue to be executed until another jackpot occurs after the end of the jackpot game state. Therefore, if the jackpot that occurs again is special jackpot A or special jackpot B, the high probability control and time-saving control will be executed again after the end of the jackpot game state, resulting in a so-called consecutive jackpot state in which the jackpot game state occurs continuously without going through the normal state.

On the other hand, the time-saving control that is executed after the end of the jackpot game state due to a "non-variable jackpot" ends when a specified number of special games (100 times in this feature part 079SG) are played, or when the jackpot game state is reached before the specified number of special games are played.

In the example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 21-7(A), the allocation of determination values to the jackpot types "Probable variable jackpot A", "Probable variable jackpot B", "Probable variable jackpot C", and "Non-probable variable jackpot" differs depending on whether the variably displayed special chart is the first special chart or the second special chart. In other words, when the variably displayed special chart is the first special chart, a predetermined range of determination values (values in the range of "81" to "100") are assigned to the jackpot types "Probable variable jackpot B" and "Probable variable jackpot C" with fewer rounds, whereas when the variably displayed special chart is the second special chart, no determination value is assigned to the jackpot types "Probable variable jackpot B" and "Probable variable jackpot C". With this setting, the ratio of determining the jackpot type to "probable jackpot B" or "probable jackpot C" with fewer rounds can be made different between the case where the first start condition for starting a special game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied and the case where the jackpot type is determined to be one of the multiple types based on the second start condition for starting a special game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B being satisfied. In particular, in a special game using the second special symbol, the jackpot type is not determined to be "probable jackpot B" or "probable jackpot C" and controlled to a jackpot state with fewer rounds, so that, for example, in a game state where game balls are likely to enter the second start winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B due to high opening control accompanying time reduction control, frequent occurrence of a jackpot state with fewer winning balls can be avoided, preventing a decline in game interest.

In the example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 21-7(A), the allocation of the determination value for the "non-probability variable" jackpot type is the same regardless of whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart game, so the probability of a non-probability variable jackpot and the probability of a probability variable jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart game.

As described above, the allocation of judgment values for "Probable Variable Jackpot B" and "Probable Variable Jackpot C" differs depending on whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart, and accordingly, the allocation of judgment values for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart, and for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" which has a larger number of rounds, it is set up so that it is easier to determine in the second special chart game than in the first special chart game.

In addition, in the case of the special chart game of the second special chart, a predetermined range of judgment values different from that in the case of the special chart game of the first special chart may be assigned to the jackpot type of "Probable jackpot B" or "Probable jackpot C". For example, in the case of the special chart game of the second special chart, a smaller judgment value than that in the case of the special chart game of the first special chart may be assigned to the jackpot type of "Probable jackpot B" or "Probable jackpot C" compared to the case of the special chart game of the first special chart. Alternatively, regardless of whether it is the special chart game of the first special chart or the second special chart, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data.

Figure 21-8 shows the variation patterns in this feature part 079SG. In this feature part 079SG, a plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance for the cases where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is a "non-reach" and a "reach", and for the cases where the variable display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is a "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also called a "non-reach miss variation pattern"), and the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is a "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also called a "reach miss variation pattern"). The non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the miss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss". The variation pattern that corresponds to the variable display result being "jackpot" is called the jackpot variation pattern.

There are two types of jackpot fluctuation patterns and reach fluctuation patterns: a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach performance is executed, and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a super reach reach performance is executed. Note that in this feature section 079SG, only one type of normal reach fluctuation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and multiple normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided, such as normal reach α, normal reach β, .... Also, multiple super reach fluctuation patterns may be provided in the super reach fluctuation pattern, such as super reach α, super reach β, ....

The variation patterns in this feature part 079SG also include a special winning variation pattern (PC1-1) that corresponds to the case where the variable display result is a "small winning".

As shown in Figure 21-8, the special chart variable display time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach performance of the normal reach in this feature part 079SG is executed is set shorter than that of the super reach fluctuation pattern.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, as described later, instead of first determining the type of the fluctuation pattern, such as the non-reach type, normal reach type, super reach type, etc., and then determining the fluctuation pattern to be executed from the fluctuation patterns belonging to the determined type, the fluctuation pattern is determined using only the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination without determining these types, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, in addition to the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, a random number value for fluctuation pattern type determination may be provided, and the type of fluctuation pattern may be determined first from these random number values for fluctuation pattern type determination, and then the fluctuation pattern to be executed may be determined from the fluctuation patterns belonging to the determined type.

Figure 21-9 is an explanatory diagram of how the variation pattern is determined in this feature part 079SG. In this feature part 079SG, the variation pattern determination table to be selected varies depending on the display result of the variable display to be executed and the number of reserved memories.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 21-9, if the variable display result is a non-probability jackpot, the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined from PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-2 (super reach α1 jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-3 (super reach α3 jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-4 (super reach β1 jackpot fluctuation pattern), and PB1-5 (super reach β3 jackpot fluctuation pattern) using the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A. Also, if the variable display result is a probability jackpot A or probability jackpot B, the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined from PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern) and PB1-2 (super reach jackpot fluctuation pattern) using the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A.

As shown in Figure 21-9, the number of judgment values assigned to PB1-2 to PB1-5 is different between jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table A and jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table. Specifically, in jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table A, 45 judgment values are assigned to PB1-2, 150 to PB1-3, 300 to PB1-4, and 500 to PB1-5, while in jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table B, 30 judgment values are assigned to PB1-2, 135 to PB1-3, 315 to PB1-4, and 515 to PB1-5. In other words, in this feature part 079SG, when the variable display result is a jackpot with a high probability of occurring, the Super Reach β variation patterns PB1-3 and PB1-4 are determined at a higher rate than when the variable display result is a non-jackpot with a high probability of occurring, making it possible to draw the player's attention to the variation patterns in the variable display.

In addition, if the variable display result is a small win, the special win fluctuation pattern determination table is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PC1-1 (special win fluctuation pattern) using the special win fluctuation pattern determination table.

In addition, in the normal game state (low base state), if the variable display result is "miss" and the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart is two or less, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A is selected, and the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A is used to determine the fluctuation pattern from PA1-1 (non-reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α2 miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach α3 miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-4 (super reach β2 miss fluctuation pattern), and PA2-5 (super reach β3 miss fluctuation pattern).

In addition, in the normal game state (low base state), if the variable display result is "miss" and the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart is three, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table B is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table B from PA1-2 (shortened fluctuation pattern of non-reach miss), PA2-1 (fluctuation pattern of normal reach miss), PA2-2 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α2 miss), PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α3 miss), PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β2 miss), and PA2-5 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β3 miss).

In addition, in the normal game state (low base state), if the variable display result is "miss" and the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart is four, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table C is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table C from PA1-3 (shortened fluctuation pattern of non-reach miss), PA2-1 (fluctuation pattern of normal reach miss), PA2-2 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α2 miss), PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α3 miss), PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β2 miss), and PA2-5 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β3 miss).

In addition, if the variable display result is "miss" in the time-saving state (high base state), the miss fluctuation pattern determination table D is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table D from PA1-4 (time-saving shortened fluctuation pattern for non-reach miss), PA2-1 (normal reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α2 miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach α3 miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-4 (super reach β2 miss fluctuation pattern), and PA2-5 (super reach β3 miss fluctuation pattern).

In other words, if the variable display result in this feature part 079SG is a "miss," the percentage of variable display being executed using a shortening variable pattern (PA1-2, PA1-3, PA1-4) in which the special chart variable display time is shorter than the normal non-miss variable pattern (PA1-1) based on the number of reserved memories of the variable chart being 3 or 4, or the time-saving state, is high, making it possible to prevent the game from becoming protracted while shortening the period until the next variable display result is a jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 21-8, the reach effect of super reach α1 (a reach effect executed by the variable display of the variation pattern PB1-2) is a reach effect in which the variable display result is a jackpot after the first half of the first reach effect described below is executed, the reach effect of super reach α2 (a reach effect executed by the variable display of the variation pattern PA2-2) is a reach effect in which the variable display result is a miss after the first and second half of the first reach effect described below is executed, and the reach effect of super reach α3 (a reach effect executed by the variable display of the variation pattern PA2-3 or PB1-3) is a reach effect in which the variable display result is a jackpot or miss after the first and second half of the first reach effect described below is executed and then the second reach effect described below is executed.

The variable display of these variable patterns PA2-2, PA2-3, PB1-2, and PB1-3 is set so that the longer the special chart variable display time is, the higher the probability that the variable display result will be a jackpot (the probability of a jackpot being expected), as shown in Figures 21-8 and 21-9. In other words, the variable display of these variable patterns PA2-2, PA2-3, PB1-2, and PB1-3 is set so that the probability that the variable display result will be a jackpot when the second reach performance is performed is higher than the probability that the variable display result will be a jackpot when the first reach performance is performed.

The reach effect of Super Reach β1 (a reach effect executed by the variable display of the variation pattern PB1-4) is a reach effect in which the variable display result is a jackpot after the first half of the third reach effect described below is executed, the reach effect of Super Reach β2 (a reach effect executed by the variable display of the variation pattern PA2-4) is a reach effect in which the variable display result is a miss after the first and second half of the third reach effect described below is executed, and the reach effect of Super Reach β3 (a reach effect executed by the variable display of the variation pattern PA2-5 or PB1-5) is a reach effect in which the variable display result is a jackpot or miss after the first and second half of the third reach effect described below is executed, and then the fourth reach effect described below is executed.

The variable display of these variable patterns PA2-4, PA2-5, PB1-4, and PB1-5 is set so that the longer the special chart variable display time is, the higher the probability that the variable display result will be a jackpot (expected jackpot probability) is, as shown in Figures 21-8 and 21-9. In other words, the variable display of these variable patterns PA2-4, PA2-5, PB1-4, and PB1-5 is set so that the probability that the variable display result will be a jackpot when the fourth reach performance is performed is higher than the probability that the variable display result will be a jackpot when the third reach performance is performed.

In addition, in this feature part 079SG, an example has been given in which the second reach performance is always executed after the first reach performance, and the fourth reach performance is always executed after the third reach performance, but the present invention is not limited to this, and there may be cases in which the second reach performance and the fourth reach performance are executed by themselves.

In addition, in this feature section 079SG, during variable display, each reach performance can be executed in a combination of the first reach performance and the second reach performance, and also in a combination of the third reach performance and the fourth reach performance, but the present invention is not limited to this, and there may be cases where the reach performance is executed in combinations other than these (for example, a combination of the first reach performance and the fourth reach performance, the second reach performance and the third reach performance, etc.).

In addition, in this feature section 069SG, as shown in FIG. 21-9, the Super Reach β system fluctuation patterns (fluctuation patterns PA2-4, PA2-5, PB1-4, PB1-5) are generally set to have a higher probability of the variable display result being a jackpot (jackpot expectation rate) than the Super Reach α system fluctuation patterns (fluctuation patterns PA2-2, PA2-3, PB1-2, PB1-3), but the present invention is not limited to this, and some of the Super Reach β system fluctuation patterns (fluctuation patterns PA2-4, PA2-5, PB1-4, PB1-5) may have a lower jackpot expectation rate than any of the Super Reach α system fluctuation patterns (fluctuation patterns PA2-2, PA2-3, PB1-2, PB1-3).

The RAM 102 in this characteristic section 079SG is provided with a game control data holding area 079SG150 as shown in FIG. 21-10, for example, as an area for holding various data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. The game control data holding area 079SG150 shown in FIG. 21-10 includes a first special chart reserve memory section 079SG151A, a second special chart reserve memory section 079SG151B, a normal chart reserve memory section 079SG151C, a game control flag setting section 079SG152, a game control timer setting section 079SG153, a game control counter setting section 079SG154, and a game control buffer setting section 079SG155.

The first special symbol reservation memory unit 079SG151A stores reservation data of a special symbol game (a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A) in which a game ball has passed (entered) through the first start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A and a start winning (first start winning) has occurred but has not yet started. As an example, the first special symbol reservation memory unit 079SG151A associates reservation numbers with the order of winning (the order of detection of the game ball) in the first start winning port, and stores, as reservation data, random number values MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, random number values MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and numerical data indicating random number values MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc. based on the establishment of the first start condition when the game ball passes (enters), until the number of memories reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The reserved data stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit 079SG151A thus indicates that the execution of a special chart game using the first special chart is reserved, and serves as reserved information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a jackpot will be reached based on the variable display result (special chart display result) in this special chart game.

The second special symbol reservation memory unit 079SG151B stores reservation data of a special symbol game (a special symbol game using a second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B) in which a game ball has passed (entered) through the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and a start winning (second start winning) has occurred but has not yet started. As an example, the second special symbol reservation memory unit 079SG151B associates reservation numbers with the order of winning (the order of detection of the game ball) into the second start winning port, and stores, as reservation data, the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc. based on the establishment of the second start condition when the game ball passes (enters), until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The reserved data stored in the second special chart reserved memory unit 079SG151B thus indicates that the execution of a special chart game using the second special chart is reserved, and serves as reserved information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a jackpot will be reached based on the variable display result (special chart display result) in this special chart game.

The reserved information (first reserved information) based on the establishment of the first start condition by the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning port, and the reserved information (second reserved information) based on the establishment of the second start winning condition by the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning port may be stored in a common reserved memory unit in association with the reserved number. In this case, start port data indicating whether the game ball passed (entered) the first or second start winning port may be included in the reserved information and stored in association with the reserved number.

The regular symbol reserve memory unit 079SG151C stores reserve information for regular symbol games that have not yet been started by the regular symbol display device 20, even though the game ball that passed through the passing gate 41 has been detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the regular symbol reserve memory unit 079SG151C associates the game balls with reserve numbers in the order in which they passed through the passing gate 41, and stores numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for determining the regular symbol display result extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc. based on the passage of the game ball as reserved data, until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 079SG152 is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated depending on the progress of the game on the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 079SG152 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit 079SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 079SG153 stores data indicating the timer values of multiple types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 079SG154 is provided with multiple types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 079SG154 stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 079SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting some or all of the game random numbers in a manner that allows the CPU 103 to update them by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 079SG154, random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR2 to MR4, are stored as random count values, and the numerical data indicating each random number is updated periodically or irregularly according to the execution of software by the CPU 103. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the updating operation of the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value by performing a predetermined process such as scrambling or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data extracted from the random number circuit 104.

The game control buffer setting unit 079SG155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 079SG155 stores data indicating the buffer values in each of multiple types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in Figure 3 is provided with a performance control data holding area 079SG190 as shown in Figure 21-11 (A) as an area for holding various data used to control performance operations. The performance control data holding area 079SG190 shown in Figure 21-11 (A) includes a performance control flag setting unit 079SG191, a performance control timer setting unit 079SG192, a performance control counter setting unit 079SG193, and a performance control buffer setting unit 079SG194.

The performance control flag setting unit 079SG191 is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated according to the performance operation state, such as the display state of the performance image on the screen of the image display device 5, and the performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11. For example, the performance control flag setting unit 079SG191 stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The performance control timer setting unit 079SG192 is provided with multiple types of timers that are used to control the progress of various performance operations, such as the display operation of a performance image on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the performance control timer setting unit 079SG192 stores data indicating the timer values of each of the multiple types of timers.

The performance control counter setting unit 079SG193 is provided with multiple types of counters used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control counter setting unit 079SG193 stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting unit 079SG194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control buffer setting unit 079SG194 stores data indicating the buffer values for each of multiple types of buffers.

In this feature section 079SG, data constituting the start winning time receiving command buffer 079SG194A as shown in FIG. 21-11 (B) is stored in a predetermined area of the performance control buffer setting section 079SG194. The start winning time receiving command buffer 079SG194A has a storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum value of the total reserved memory number of the first special symbol reserved memory (for example, "4") and a storage area (area corresponding to buffer number "1-0") corresponding to the first special symbol being displayed variably. In addition, the start winning time receiving command buffer 079SG194A has a storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") corresponding to the maximum value of the total reserved memory number of the second special symbol reserved memory (for example, "4") and a storage area (area corresponding to buffer number "2-0") corresponding to the second special symbol being displayed variably. When a start win occurs at the first start win port or the second start win port, two commands, a start win designation command (first start win designation command or second start win designation command) and a reserved memory number notification command (first reserved memory number notification command or second reserved memory number notification command), are sent as a set from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. The storage area corresponding to the first special chart reserved memory and the storage area corresponding to the second special chart reserved memory in the start win reception command buffer 079SG194A are provided with storage areas (entries) for storing these start win designation commands and reserved memory number notification commands separately as the first special chart reserved memory and the second special chart reserved memory.

The contents of these storage areas (entries) are shifted up one at a time when the start condition is met and the variable display of the top reserved memory (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") begins, as described below, and the contents of buffer number "1-0" or buffer number "2-0", which stores the contents of the reserved memory for which the start condition is met, are cleared in the special chart hit waiting process that is executed when the variable display ends.

When a start win is made to the first start win port, the performance control CPU 120 stores the command from the top (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the free entry corresponding to the first special chart reserved memory in the start win reception command buffer 079SG194A, and when a start win is made to the second start win port, the CPU 120 stores the command from the top (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the free entry corresponding to the second special chart reserved memory in the start win reception command buffer 079SG194A. When a start win is made, the start win port designation command to the reserved memory number notification command are sent in sequence. Therefore, when a command is received, the start win port designation command and the reserved memory number notification command are stored in the storage area corresponding to the last "1" to "4" of the buffer number corresponding to the first special chart reserved memory or the second special chart reserved memory, in that order.

Whenever the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the commands stored in the start winning time reception command buffer 079SG194A shown in FIG. 21-11(B) are deleted from the entry corresponding to the reserved memory of the variable display that just ended (the entry with buffer number "1-0" or "2-0"), and the contents stored in the entry corresponding to the reserved memory of the variable display that is about to start (the entry corresponding to buffer number "1-1" or "2-1") and the contents stored in the entries after the reserved memory of the variable display that is about to start are shifted. For example, when the variable display of the decorative pattern of the first special pattern reserved memory is ended in the storage state shown in FIG. 21-11(B), the commands stored in buffer number "0" are deleted, the commands stored in buffer number "1" are shifted to buffer number "0", the commands stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "2" are shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "1", and the commands stored in the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "3" and "4" are shifted to the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, buffer number "0" becomes the area (entry) for storing each command related to the pending memory that is variably displayed at that time.

Next, the start winning judgment process of this feature part 079SG executed in step S101 of Fig. 14 will be described based on Fig. 21-12. In the start winning judgment process, the CPU 103 first judges whether the first start hole switch 22A, which is provided corresponding to the first start winning hole formed by the winning ball device 6A, is in the ON state based on the detection signal from the first start hole switch 22A (step 079SGS101). At this time, if the first start hole switch 22A is in the ON state (step 079SGS101; Y), it judges whether the first special symbol reserved memory number, which is the reserved memory number of the special symbol game using the first special symbol, is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4" as the upper limit memory number) (step 079SGS102). The CPU 103 can specify the number of reserved first special symbols by, for example, reading the first reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the first reserved memory count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 079SG154. When the first reserved memory count is not the upper limit value in step 079SGS102 (step 079SGS102; N), for example, the storage value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 079SG155 is set to "1" (step 079SGS103).

When the first start port switch 22A is off in step 079SGS101 (step 079SGS101; N) or when the first special symbol reserved memory number has reached the upper limit in step 079SGS102 (step 079SGS102; Y), the second start port switch 22B, which is provided corresponding to the second start hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, is judged to be on or not (step 079SGS104). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is on (step 079SGS104; Y), it is judged to be whether the second special symbol reserved memory number, which is the reserved memory number of the special symbol game using the second special symbol, has reached a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4" as the upper limit memory number) (step 079SGS105). The CPU 103 can specify the number of reserved second special symbols by, for example, reading the second reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the second reserved memory count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 079SG154. When the second reserved memory count is not the upper limit value in step 079SGS105 (step 079SGS105; N), for example, the storage value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 079SG155 is set to "2" (step 079SGS106).

After executing either the process of step 079SGS103 or step 079SGS106, the number of reserved memories corresponding to the start port buffer value, which is the stored value of the start port buffer, is updated to add 1 (step 079SGS107). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first reserved memory count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the second reserved memory count value is added by 1. Thus, the first reserved memory count value is updated to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning port and the first start condition corresponding to the special game using the first special game is established. In addition, the second reserved memory count value is updated to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning port and the second start condition corresponding to the special game using the second special game is established. At this time, the total reserved memory number is also updated to add 1 (step 079SGS108). For example, the total reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the total reserved memory count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 079SG154, can be updated to add 1.

After executing the process of step 079SGS108, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of big win, and the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 079SG154 (step 079SGS109). The numerical data indicating each random number value thus extracted is stored by being set as reserved information at the beginning of an empty entry in the special chart reserved memory unit according to the start port buffer value (step 079SGS110). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 are stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit 079SG151A, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 are stored in the second special chart reserved memory unit 079SG151B.

The numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result and the random number value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot are used to determine whether the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "jackpot" or not, and further to determine the type of jackpot if the variable display result is a "jackpot". The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbol or decorative symbol. By executing the processing of step 079SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random number values used to determine the variable display mode including the variable display result and the variable display time of the special symbol or decorative symbol.

Following the processing of step 079SGS110, the sending setting of the start port winning designation command according to the start port buffer value is performed (step 079SGS111). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the storage address of the first start port winning designation command table in ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, and the setting is performed to send the first start port winning designation command to the performance control board 12. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second start port winning designation command table in ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, and the setting is performed to send the second start port winning designation command to the performance control board 12. The start port winning designation command thus set is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, by executing the command control processing of step S27 shown in FIG. 5 after the special pattern process processing is completed.

Following the processing of step 079SGS111, settings are made to send the pending memory count notification command to the performance control board 12, for example by storing the storage address of the pending memory count notification command table in ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer (step 079SGS113). The pending memory count notification command thus set is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example by executing the command control processing of step S27 shown in FIG. 5 after the special pattern process processing is completed.

After executing the process of step 079SGS113, it is determined whether the start port buffer value is "1" (step 079SGS114). At this time, if the start port buffer value is "1" (step 079SGS114; Y), the start port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (step 079SGS115), and the process proceeds to step 079SGS104. On the other hand, if the start port buffer value is "2" (step 079SGS114; N), the start port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (step 079SGS116), and the start winning process is terminated. As a result, even if both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B simultaneously detect the start winning of a valid game ball, the process based on the detection of both valid start winnings can be completed reliably.

Figure 21-13 is a part of a flowchart showing the performance control process processing in this feature unit 079SG. In the performance control process, the performance control CPU 120 executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161), then updates the hold display in the first hold memory display area 079SHSG005D and the second hold memory display area 079SG005U, executes a hold display operation process (step 079SG162) to operate (rotate display) the hold display displayed in the first hold memory display area 079SHSG005D and the second hold memory display area 079SG005U, executes a telop operation process (step 079SGS163) to perform a telop operation display in the telop display area 079SG005T, and executes a fourth pattern display process (step 079SG164) to perform a variable display of the fourth pattern 079SG005J, and then executes one of the processes in steps S170 to S177 depending on the value of the performance control process flag.

Figure 21-14 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the performance control process shown in Figure 16. In the variable display start setting process, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether the first variable start command reception flag is on (step 079SGS271). If the first variable start command reception flag is on (step 079SGS271; Y), the various command data and various flags stored in association with buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special chart reserved memory in the start winning reception command buffer 079SG194A are shifted up by one buffer number (step 079SGS272). Note that the contents of buffer number "1-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift to, so it is erased.

Specifically, the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-1" of the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-0", the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-2" of the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-1", the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-3" of the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-2", and the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-4" of the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-3".

Also, if the first variable start command reception flag is off in step 079SGS271 (step 079SGS271; N), it is determined whether the second variable start command reception flag is on (step 079SGS273). If the second variable start command reception flag is off (step 079SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and if the second variable start command reception flag is on (step 079SGS273; Y), the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special chart reservation memory in the start winning reception command buffer 079SG194A are shifted up by one buffer number (step 079SGS274). Note that the contents of buffer number "2-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift to, so it is erased.

Specifically, the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-1" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-0", the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-2" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-1", the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-3" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-2", and the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-4" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-3".

After executing step 079SGS272 or step 079SGS274, the performance control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (step 079SGS275).

Then, the display result (stopping pattern) of the decorative pattern is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (i.e., the received display result designation command) (step 079SGS276). In this case, the performance control CPU 120 determines the stopping pattern of the decorative pattern according to the display result designated by the display result designation command, and stores data indicating the determined stopping pattern of the decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area.

In this feature section 079SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable jackpot A, the performance control CPU 120 determines, for example, a combination of decorative patterns (jackpot pattern) in which three symbols are aligned to "7" as the stopping symbol. When the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command or the fourth variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable jackpot B or the probability variable jackpot C, the stopping symbol is determined from among a plurality of combinations of odd symbols other than "7" (for example, combinations of decorative symbols such as "111", "333", "555", and "999"). When the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to a non-probability variable jackpot, the performance control CPU 120 determines, for example, a combination of decorative symbols (jackpot pattern) in which three symbols are aligned to even symbols as the stopping symbol. In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is the sixth variable display result designation command, which corresponds to a small win, the stopping pattern is determined from among the chance combinations "334", "778", etc. In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command, which corresponds to a loss, the stopping pattern is determined to be a decorative pattern in which three patterns are not aligned, and is a combination other than the chance combinations described above (a loss pattern).

When determining these stopping symbols, the performance control CPU 120 may, for example, extract a random number for determining the stopping symbol, and determine the stopping symbol of the decorative symbol using a stopping symbol determination table in which data indicating the combination of decorative symbols is associated with a numerical value. In other words, the stopping symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating the combination of decorative symbols that corresponds to the numerical value that matches the extracted random number.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether the change pattern of the variable display is a super reach change pattern (step 079SGS277). If the change pattern of the variable display is a non-reach or normal reach change pattern (step 079SGS277; N), the process proceeds to step 079SGS283, and if the change pattern of the variable display is a super reach change pattern (step 079SGS277; Y), the process executes a chance up performance decision process (step 079SGS278) to decide whether to execute a chance up performance in the latter half of the first reach performance or the latter half of the third reach performance.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 21-15, if the variable display result is a miss, there is a 20% chance that the chance up effect will be executed, and an 80% chance that the chance up effect will not be executed. Also, if the variable display result is a jackpot, there is an 80% chance that the chance up effect will be executed, and an 20% chance that the chance up effect will not be executed. In other words, in the variable display of the reach of this feature part 079SG, when the chance up effect is executed, the expectation of a jackpot is set higher than when the chance up effect is not executed.

In addition, in this feature section 079SG, as shown in Figures 21-27 and 21-32, only one presentation pattern is provided as the presentation mode of the chance up effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and multiple presentation patterns may be provided as the presentation mode of the chance up effect, and the expectation of a jackpot may differ depending on which presentation pattern the chance up effect is executed with.

Furthermore, in this feature part 079SG, as shown in Figures 21-27 and 21-32, there is only one timing for starting the Chance Up effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and multiple timings for starting the Chance Up effect may be provided, and the probability of winning may differ depending on which timing the Chance Up effect starts from.

After determining whether or not to execute the chance-up effect in step 079SGS278, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the change pattern of the variable display is the change pattern of Super Reach α3 (PA2-3 or PB1-3) (step 079SGS279). If the change pattern of the variable display is the change pattern of Super Reach α3 (PA2-3 or PB1-3) (step 079SGS279; Y), a still image display effect determination process (step 079SGS280) is executed to determine the effect pattern of the still image display effect that displays the still image that was displayed at the end of the second reach effect on the image display device 5 during the period from the end of the second reach effect to the start of the notification effect (jackpot notification effect or miss notification effect), and proceeds to step 079SGS283.

In the still image display effect determination process, as shown in FIG. 21-16(A), if the variable display result is a miss, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect pattern of the still image display effect to be pattern SG-1 with a probability of 100%, and if the variable display result is a jackpot, determines the effect pattern of the still image display effect to be pattern SG-1 with a probability of 80%, and pattern SG-2 with a probability of 20%.

As shown in FIG. 21-16(B), still image display pattern SG-1 is a presentation pattern in which the image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 at the end of the second reach performance is displayed as a still image, and still image display pattern SG-2 is a presentation pattern in which the image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 at the end of the second reach performance is displayed as a still image, and then the color of the still image is changed.

In particular, pattern SG-2 is a presentation pattern that is executed only when the variable display result is a jackpot, so when the second reach presentation is executed, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the still image display presentation is executed with pattern SG-2 (whether or not the color of the still image changes).

In addition, if the variation pattern of the variable display is not a Super Reach α3 in step S079SGS281 (step S079SGS281; N), it is further determined whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display is a Super Reach β3 (PA2-5 or PB1-5) (step S079SGS282). If the variation pattern of the variable display is a variation pattern other than a Super Reach β3 (step S079SGS282; N), the process proceeds to step S079SGS283. If the variation pattern of the variable display is a variation pattern of a Super Reach β3 (step S079SGS281; Y), the process executes an operation promotion effect determination process (step S079SGS282) for determining the presentation pattern of an operation promotion effect that prompts the player to operate the push button 31B during the execution of the fourth reach presentation, and then proceeds to step S079SGS283.

In the operation promotion effect determination process, as shown in FIG. 21-17(A), if the variable display result is a miss, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect pattern of the operation promotion effect to be pattern SS-1 with a probability of 80% and pattern SS-2 with a probability of 20%. Also, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the effect pattern of the operation promotion effect is determined to be pattern SS-1 with a probability of 20% and pattern SS-2 with a probability of 80%.

As shown in FIG. 21-17 (B), operation promotion presentation pattern SS-1 is a presentation pattern in which an image of push button 31B is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, and operation promotion presentation pattern SS-2 is a presentation pattern in which an image of push button 31B is displayed in a larger size than pattern SS-1 in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5.

In other words, as for the operation promotion effect in this characteristic part 079SG, when a large-sized image of the push button 31B is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 (when the operation promotion effect is executed in pattern SS-2), there is a higher probability that the variable display result will be a jackpot (a jackpot notification effect will be executed) than when a normal-sized image of the push button 31B is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 (when the operation promotion effect is executed in pattern SS-1). Therefore, the player can be drawn to the size of the image of the push button 31B displayed on the image display device 5 when the operation promotion effect is executed, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In step 079SGS283, the performance control CPU 120 selects whether or not to execute each of the aforementioned chance-up performances, still image display performances, operation promotion performances, etc., and selects a performance control pattern (process table) according to the performance pattern and the variable pattern designation command. Then, the process timer in process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step 079SGS284).

In addition, in the process table, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, sound control execution data for controlling the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A are arranged in chronological order in correspondence with each process data n (numbered from 1 to N).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 executes control of the performance device (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, speakers 8L, 8R as performance components, and operation unit (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.)) according to the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1) (step 079SGS285). For example, to display an image corresponding to a fluctuation pattern on the image display device 5, it outputs a command to the display control unit 123. It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 to control the lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. It also outputs a control signal (sound number data) to the sound control board 13 to output sound from the speakers 8L, 8R.

In this feature section 079SG, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display of the decorative pattern to vary according to a variation pattern that corresponds one-to-one to the variation pattern designation command, but the performance control CPU 120 may select the variation pattern to be used from multiple types of variation patterns that correspond to the variation pattern designation command.

Then, the variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variation pattern designation command (step 079SGS286). A predetermined time is also set to the variable display control timer (step 079SGS287). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the performance control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the left, center, and right decorative patterns to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses, the display control unit 123 outputs a signal corresponding to the image data written to the VRAM to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby realizing the variable display (variation) of the decorative patterns. Next, the value of the performance control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the performance processing during variable display (step S172) (step 079SGS288).

In addition, in the variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 subtracts (-1) the value of the process timer each time the variable display performance process is executed, and determines whether the process timer after the subtraction has timed out. If the process timer after the subtraction has not timed out, the performance device is controlled according to the contents of the process data corresponding to that process timer, and if the process timer after the subtraction has timed out, the process data is switched and the next process timer is started, and the performance device is controlled according to the contents of the next process data.

Next, the presentation of the variable display of Super Reach α1 to α3 and Super Reach β1 to β3 in this feature part 079SG will be explained based on Figures 21-18 to 21-35.

First, for the variable display of Super Reach α1 to α3 shown in Figures 21-18, 21-19, and 21-26(A) to 21-26(G), when the variable display starts, a performance video such as a variable display of decorative symbols starts at the normal progression speed V1 in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. At this time, in the second display area 079SG005Sa, the rotation of the reserved display and the movement of the telop from left to right (the progression speed of the video in the second display area 079SG005Sa) are executed at the normal progression speed V3, and BGM and performance sounds corresponding to the variable display start from the speakers 8L and 8R at the normal playback speed V4.

In the third display area 079SG005Sb, the upper pattern 079SG005Ja and the lower pattern 079SG005jb in the fourth pattern 079SG005J start to alternately light (blink) at a fixed cycle, and the game effect lamp 9 starts to blink at a fixed cycle. Hereinafter, the blinking or lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in this characteristic part 079SG means that the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d are all synchronously blinked or lit, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the blinking or lighting of the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d do not necessarily have to be synchronized.

As shown in Figures 21-18, 21-19, and 21-26(A) to 21-26(C), when the timing for the reach effect to develop comes as a result of the progression of the variable display, the first reach effect first half execution period is entered, and a battle effect between ally character A and enemy character A begins. As the battle effect progresses and approaches the second half of the first reach effect first half execution period, a video of ally character A attacking enemy character A begins to be displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. When the display of the video begins, the progression speed of the video displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the video switches from the aforementioned V1 to V2, which is slower than V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the ally character A punching enemy character A is displayed in slow motion.

In addition, during the period when friendly character A's attack on enemy character A is displayed in slow motion (the period when the progression speed of the battle animation in first display area 079SG005F is V2), the rotation of the pending display in second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the caption from left to right remain unchanged and are executed at a constant progression speed of V3, and background music and sound effects are output from speakers 8L, 8R at a constant playback speed of V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without any change in cycle.

When the variable display is the variable display of Super Reach α1, when the first reach performance first half execution period ends, as shown in FIG. 21-18 and FIG. 21-26(E) to FIG. 21-26(G), a video of ally character A's attack succeeding and enemy character A falling is displayed as a jackpot notification performance in the first display area 079SG005F, and then the decorative symbols stop in a jackpot combination to notify that the game is controlled to a jackpot game state. In particular, when the jackpot notification performance starts, the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden, and the image of the jackpot notification performance is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa. Then, as shown in FIG. 21-26(H), when the variable display ends, the decorative symbols are displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot, and the display on the image display device 5 switches to the normal background image before the reach effect. Furthermore, the display of the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is resumed. After the variable display ends, the decorative symbols and small symbols are displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot during the symbol determination period, and the fourth symbol is lit (both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb are lit).

During the jackpot notification performance, the animation showing the part where friendly character A's attack is successful is displayed at the normal progression speed V1 (corresponding to FIG. 21-26 (E)), and the animation showing the part where the enemy character falls is displayed at a progression speed V2 slower than V1 (corresponding to FIG. 21-26 (F)). Then, the animation showing the decorative symbols stopping in a jackpot combination and controlling the jackpot game state is displayed again at the normal progression speed V1 (corresponding to FIG. 21-26 (G)).

During the jackpot notification performance, the rotation of the reserved display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the caption from left to right remain unchanged and are executed at a constant progression speed V3, and the background music and performance sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R at a constant playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without any change in cycle.

On the other hand, if the variable display is a Super Reach α2 or Super Reach α3 variable display, when the first half of the first reach performance execution period ends, as shown in Figures 21-19 and 21-26 (D), ally character A's attack is not successful and the game moves to the second half of the first reach performance execution period.

As shown in Figure 21-19 and Figure 21-27 (A) to Figure 21-27 (B), when the second half of the first reach effect execution period starts, the battle effect between ally character A and enemy character A continues.

At this time, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the presentation video of the battle presentation is executed at the normal progression speed V1. Furthermore, the rotation of the reserved display and the movement of the caption from left to right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed without change, maintaining the progression speed V3, and the background music and presentation sounds are output from the speakers 8L, 8R without change, maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

In addition, during the execution period of the second half of the first reach effect, when the effect video of the battle effect is executed at the progression speed V1, a chance-up effect may be executed as shown in FIG. 21-27 (B). The chance-up effect is executed at the progression speed V1, just like the effect video of the battle effect.

As the battle performance progresses and approaches the second half of the execution period of the second half of the first reach performance, a video of ally character A attacking enemy character A begins to be displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. When the display of the video begins, the progression speed of the video displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the video switches from V1 to V2, which is slower than V1. As a result, the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 displays in slow motion ally character A punching enemy character A.

In addition, during the period when friendly character A's attack on enemy character A is displayed in slow motion (the period when the progression speed of the battle animation in first display area 079SG005F is V2), the rotation of the pending display in second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the caption from left to right remain unchanged and are executed at a constant progression speed of V3, and background music and sound effects are output from speakers 8L, 8R at a constant playback speed of V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without any change in cycle.

If the variable display is that of Super Reach α2, when the execution period of the second half of the first reach performance ends, as shown in Figure 21-19 and Figure 21-27 (E) to Figure 21-27 (G), in the first display area 079SG005F, after friendly character A's attack fails and he is defeated by enemy character A, a miss notification performance is displayed in which the decorative patterns stop in a miss combination to notify that the variable display result is a miss.

During the miss notification performance, the animation display is executed at the normal progression speed V1 during the part where ally character A's attack fails and the part where the variable display result is notified that it is a miss.

During the loss notification performance, the rotation of the reserved display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from left to right remain unchanged and are executed at the same progression speed V3, and the BGM and performance sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the same playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIG. 21-27(H), when the variable display ends, the decorative symbols are displayed in a combination indicating a loss, and the display on the image display device 5 is switched to the normal background image display before the reach performance. After the variable display ends, the decorative symbols and small symbols are displayed in a combination indicating a loss during the symbol determination period, and the fourth symbol is displayed as off (both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb are displayed as off).

On the other hand, if the variable display is that of Super Reach α3, as shown in Figures 21-20, 21-21, and 21-27 (D), ally character A's attack is successful and defeats enemy character A during the second half of the first reach performance execution period. Then, the game moves to the first half of the second reach performance execution period.

As shown in Figures 21-20, 21-21, and 21-28(A) to 21-28(B), when the second reach effect first half execution period starts, the battle effect between ally character A and enemy character B progresses.

At this time, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the presentation video of the battle presentation is executed at the normal progression speed V1. Furthermore, the rotation of the reserved display and the movement of the caption from left to right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed without change, maintaining the progression speed V3, and the background music and presentation sounds are output from the speakers 8L, 8R without change, maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

When the battle performance progresses and the second half of the execution period of the first half of the second reach performance is reached, as shown in FIG. 21-20, FIG. 21-21, and FIG. 21-28(C), as an effect performance, converging lines start to be displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, and a video of ally character A attacking enemy character B starts to be displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. When the display of the video starts, the progression speed of the video displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the video switches from V1 to V2, which is slower than V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, ally character A is displayed in slow motion punching enemy character B.

In addition, during the period when the attack of ally character A towards enemy character B is displayed in slow motion (the period when the moving image of the battle performance in the first display area 079SG005F is moving at V2), the rotation of the reserved display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from left to right are executed at the same moving speed V3, and the background music and performance sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the same playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J is executed without changing the alternating blinking period of the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb, while the blinking period of the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 becomes shorter (the blinking period becomes faster). Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 21-28 (D), the number of convergence lines as the effect performance described above is gradually increased.

In other words, during the latter half of the second reach effect, the progression speed of the battle effect video slows down to V2, causing the number of concentration lines displayed in the first display area 079SG005F to increase and the flashing of the game effect lamps 9 to become more intense. This increase in the number of concentration lines and the flashing of the game effect lamps 9 makes it possible to effectively draw the player's attention to the result of the battle effect (whether a jackpot notification effect or a miss notification effect will be executed).

Then, after the execution period of the latter half of the second reach effect ends, as shown in Figures 21-20, 21-21, and 21-28 (E), the image displayed at the end of the battle effect (in this feature part 079SG, the image displayed immediately before ally character A's attack hits enemy character B) is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F as a still image display effect.

During the execution of the still image display effect, the progression speed of the video displayed in the first display area 079SG005F switches from V1 to 0, but the rotation of the reserved display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the caption from left to right remain unchanged and are executed at a constant progression speed of V3, and the background music and sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R at a constant playback speed of V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J is executed without changing the alternating blinking cycle of the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb, while the blinking cycle of the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 returns to the cycle before the progression speed of the battle effect video slowed to V2.

When pattern SG-2 is determined as the presentation pattern for the still image display presentation, the color of the image displayed at the end of the battle presentation is inverted as the still image display presentation, as shown in FIG. 21-29(A) to FIG. 21-29(E). After the still image display presentation with the inverted color ends, the jackpot notification presentation is notified that the attack of ally character A hits enemy character B, and that enemy character B will be defeated and then controlled to the jackpot game state. In particular, when the decorative symbols stop in a combination indicating a jackpot as the jackpot notification presentation, the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are made non-displayable, and the image of the jackpot notification presentation is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa. Then, as shown in FIG. 21-29(F), when the variable display ends, the decorative symbols are displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot, and the display on the image display device 5 switches to the normal background image before the reach effect. Furthermore, the display of the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is resumed. After the variable display ends, the decorative symbols and small symbols are displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot during the symbol determination period, and the fourth symbol is lit (both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb are lit).

As shown in FIG. 21-20, when the still image display effect is executed in pattern SG-2, the animation of friendly character A's attack hitting enemy character B is displayed at a progression speed V1, while the animation of enemy character B falling is displayed at a progression speed V2. Then, the animation of decorative symbols stopping in a jackpot combination after enemy character B falls is displayed at a progression speed V1. In particular, when decorative symbols stop in a combination indicating a jackpot as the jackpot notification effect, the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden, and the image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa.

During the jackpot notification performance, the rotation of the reserved display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the caption from left to right remain unchanged and are executed at a constant progression speed V3, and the background music and performance sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R at a constant playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without any change in cycle.

On the other hand, if pattern SG-1 is determined as the still image display effect, the color of the image displayed at the end of the battle effect is not inverted as the still image display effect, and a jackpot notification effect as described above is executed as shown in Figures 21-30(A) to 21-30(D), or a miss notification effect is executed as shown in Figures 21-30(F) to 21-30(H).

In the case where the still image display effect is executed in pattern SG-1, the jackpot notification effect is the same as the case where the still image display effect is executed in pattern SG-2. As shown in FIG. 21-20, the animation of ally character A's attack hitting enemy character B is displayed at a progression speed V1, but the animation of enemy character B falling is displayed at a progression speed V2. After enemy character B falls, it is displayed at a progression speed V1. During the jackpot notification effect, the rotation of the reserved display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from left to right remain unchanged and are executed at a progression speed V3, and the BGM and effect sounds are output from speakers 8L and 8R at a playback speed V4 without change. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth pattern 079SG005J and the flashing of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIG. 21-30(E), when the variable display ends, the decorative symbols are displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot, and the display on the image display device 5 switches to the normal background image before the reach effect. Furthermore, the display of the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is resumed. After the variable display ends, the decorative symbols and small symbols are displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot during the symbol determination period, and the fourth symbol is lit (both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb are lit).

In addition, when the still image display effect is executed in pattern SG-1, the miss notification effect is that the attack of ally character A does not hit enemy character B, and conversely, after enemy character B's attack hits ally character A and ally character A falls, the decorative patterns stop in a miss combination, and it is notified that the game will not be controlled to a jackpot game state.

As shown in FIG. 21-21, the loss notification effect is a video of friendly character A's attack not hitting and being defeated by enemy character B, which is displayed at a progression speed of V1. During the loss notification effect, the rotation of the reserved display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from left to right remain unchanged and are executed at a progression speed of V3, and the background music and sound effects are output from speakers 8L and 8R at a playback speed of V4, without any change. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without any change in cycle. Then, as shown in FIG. 21-30(I), when the variable display ends, the decorative symbols are displayed in a combination indicating a loss, and the display on the image display device 5 switches to the normal background image display before the reach effect effect. After the variable display ends, the combination of decorative and small symbols will be displayed as stopped during the symbol determination period, and the fourth symbol will be turned off (both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb will be turned off).

Next, for the variable display of Super Reach β1 to β3 shown in Figures 21-22, 21-23, and 21-31(A) to 21-31(H), when the variable display starts, a performance video such as a variable display of decorative symbols starts at the normal progression speed V1 in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. At this time, in the second display area 079SG005Sa, the rotation of the reserved display and the movement of the telop from left to right (the progression speed of the video in the second display area 079SG005Sa) are executed at the normal progression speed V3, and BGM and performance sounds corresponding to the variable display start from the speakers 8L and 8R at the normal playback speed V4.

In addition, in the third display area 079SG005Sb, the upper pattern 079SG005Ja and the lower pattern 079SG005jb in the fourth pattern 079SG005J start to alternately light up (blink) at regular intervals, and the game effect lamp 9 starts to blink at regular intervals.

As shown in Fig. 21-22, Fig. 21-23, Fig. 21-31(A) to Fig. 21-31(C), when the timing for the reach effect to develop comes as a result of the progression of the variable display, the third reach effect first half execution period is entered, and a battle effect between ally character B and enemy character A begins. As the battle effect progresses and approaches the second half of the third reach effect first half execution period, a video of ally character B attacking enemy character A begins to be displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. When the display of the video begins, the progression speed of the video displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the video switches from the aforementioned V1 to V2, which is slower than V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the ally character B punching enemy character A is displayed in slow motion.

In addition, during the period when ally character B's attack on enemy character A is displayed in slow motion (the period when the progression speed of the battle animation in first display area 079SG005F is V2), the rotation of the pending display in second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the caption from left to right remain unchanged and are executed at a constant progression speed of V3, and background music and sound effects are output from speakers 8L, 8R at a constant playback speed of V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without any change in cycle.

When the variable display is the variable display of Super Reach β1, when the execution period of the first half of the third reach performance ends, as shown in Fig. 21-22 and Fig. 21-31 (E) to Fig. 21-31 (G), a video of ally character B's attack succeeding and enemy character A falling is displayed as a jackpot notification performance in the first display area 079SG005F, and then it is notified that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state. In particular, when the jackpot notification performance starts, the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are made non-displayable, and images of the jackpot notification performance are displayed in the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa. Then, as shown in FIG. 21-31(H), when the variable display ends, the decorative symbols are displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot, and the display on the image display device 5 switches to the normal background image before the reach effect. Furthermore, the display of the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is resumed. After the variable display ends, the decorative symbols and small symbols are displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot during the symbol determination period, and the fourth symbol is lit (both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb are lit).

During the jackpot notification performance, the animation showing friendly character B's successful attack is displayed at the normal progression speed V1 (corresponding to FIG. 21-30(E)), and the animation showing the enemy character being defeated thereafter is displayed at a progression speed V2 slower than V1 (corresponding to FIG. 21-30(F)). Then, the animation showing the decorative symbols stopping in a jackpot combination and the player being controlled to a jackpot game state is again displayed at the normal progression speed V1 (corresponding to FIG. 21-30(G)).

During the jackpot notification performance, the rotation of the reserved display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the caption from left to right remain unchanged and are executed at a constant progression speed V3, and the background music and performance sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R at a constant playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without any change in cycle.

On the other hand, if the variable display is a Super Reach β2 or Super Reach β3 variable display, when the first half of the third reach performance execution period ends, as shown in Figures 21-23 and 21-31 (D), ally character B's attack is not successful and the game moves to the second half of the third reach performance execution period.

As shown in Figures 21-23 and 21-32(A) to 21-32(B), when the second half of the third reach effect execution period begins, the battle effect between ally character B and enemy character A continues.

At this time, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the presentation video of the battle presentation is executed at the normal progression speed V1. Furthermore, the rotation of the reserved display and the movement of the caption from left to right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed without change, maintaining the progression speed V3, and the background music and presentation sounds are output from the speakers 8L, 8R without change, maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

In addition, during the execution period of the second half of the third reach effect, when the presentation video of the battle effect is executed at the progression speed V1, a chance-up effect may be executed as shown in FIG. 21-32 (B). The chance-up effect is executed at the progression speed V1, just like the presentation video of the battle effect.

In particular, on the image display device 5, the small symbols are given priority over the chance up effect video, while the chance up effect video is given priority over the decorative symbols (the "7"s displayed at the top left and right of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 21-32 (B)). Therefore, in this feature part 079SG, during the execution period of the chance up effect, the player can recognize that a variable display is being performed by visually checking the small symbols, and by displaying the chance up effect video over the decorative symbols, an area for displaying the chance up effect video on the image display device 5 can be reliably secured.

In this feature section 079SG, the chance-up effect animation is displayed with priority over the decorative symbols, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative symbols may be displayed with priority over the chance-up effect animation. By doing so, the player can easily recognize which decorative symbol combination the currently executing reach effect has developed from, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

As the battle performance progresses and approaches the second half of the execution period of the second half of the first reach performance, a video of ally character B attacking enemy character A begins to be displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. When the display of the video begins, the progression speed of the video displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the video switches from V1 to V2, which is slower than V1. As a result, the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 displays in slow motion ally character B punching enemy character A.

In addition, during the period when ally character B's attack on enemy character A is displayed in slow motion (the period when the progression speed of the battle animation in first display area 079SG005F is V2), the rotation of the pending display in second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the caption from left to right remain unchanged and are executed at a constant progression speed of V3, and background music and sound effects are output from speakers 8L, 8R at a constant playback speed of V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without any change in cycle.

If the variable display is that of Super Reach β2, when the execution period of the latter half of the third reach effect ends, as shown in Figures 21-23 and 21-32(E) to 21-32(G), in the first display area 079SG005F, after ally character B's attack has failed and he has been defeated by enemy character A, a miss notification effect is displayed, indicating that the variable display result is a miss.

During the miss notification performance, the animation is displayed at the normal progression speed V1 during the part where ally character B's attack fails and the part where the variable display result is notified that it is a miss.

During the loss notification performance, the rotation of the reserved display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from left to right remain unchanged and are executed at the same progression speed V3, and the BGM and performance sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the same playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIG. 21-32(H), when the variable display ends, the decorative symbols are displayed in a combination indicating a loss, and the display on the image display device 5 is switched to the normal background image display before the reach performance. After the variable display ends, the decorative symbols and small symbols are displayed in a combination indicating a loss during the symbol determination period, and the fourth symbol is displayed as off (both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb are displayed as off).

On the other hand, if the variable display is that of Super Reach β3, then as shown in Figures 21-24, 21-25, and 21-32 (D), ally character B's attack is successful and defeats enemy character A during the second half of the execution period of the third reach performance. Then, the game moves to the first half of the execution period of the fourth reach performance.

As shown in Figures 21-24, 21-25, and 21-33(A) to 21-33(B), when the execution period of the first half of the fourth reach effect is entered, the battle effect between ally character A and enemy character B progresses.

At this time, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the presentation video of the battle presentation is executed at the normal progression speed V1. Furthermore, the rotation of the reserved display and the movement of the caption from left to right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed without change, maintaining the progression speed V3, and the background music and presentation sounds are output from the speakers 8L, 8R without change, maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

As the battle performance progresses and approaches the second half of the execution period of the first half of the fourth reach performance, a video of ally character B attacking enemy character B begins to be displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, as shown in Figures 21-24, 21-25, and 21-33 (C). When the display of the video begins, the progression speed of the video displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the video switches from V1 to V2, which is slower than V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, ally character B punching enemy character B is displayed in slow motion.

In addition, during the period when the attack of ally character B towards enemy character B is displayed in slow motion (the period when the progression speed of the battle animation in the first display area 079SG005F is V2), the rotation of the reserved display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the caption from left to right remain unchanged and are executed at a constant progression speed of V3, and the background music and sound effects are output from the speakers 8L, 8R at a constant playback speed of V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J is executed without changing the alternating blinking cycle of the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb, while the blinking cycle of the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 becomes shorter (the blinking cycle becomes faster).

In other words, during the latter half of the fourth reach effect, the progression speed of the battle effect animation slows down to V2, causing the flashing of the game effect lamp 9 to become more intense, so that the flashing of the game effect lamp 9 can effectively draw the player's attention to the result of the battle effect (whether a jackpot notification effect or a miss notification effect will be executed).

Then, as the latter half of the fourth reach effect progresses, an operation prompting effect is executed. If the effect pattern of the operation prompting effect is determined to be pattern SS-1, an operation prompting image 079SG005Ba resembling the shape of the push button 31B is displayed in the center of the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, along with a meter 079SG005M indicating the operation acceptance period for the push button 31B and an effect image 079SG005E. The updated display of the meter 079SG005M and the enlarged updated display of the effect image 079SG005E toward the periphery of the image display device 5 are then started. As mentioned above, these operation prompting effect images are displayed in the first display area 079SG005F as images based on the image data 2 (see FIG. 21-3), and are therefore displayed as moving images with a constant progression speed regardless of the progression speed of the battle effect.

As shown in FIG. 21-33(D), during the execution of the operation prompting effect, the updated display of the meter 079SG005M notifies the player of the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B, while the enlarged and updated display of the effect image 079SG005E progresses. Note that since the effect image 079SG005E has a predetermined transparency (for example, 10% to 50%), the player can view the battle effect through the effect image 079SG005E, and the visibility of the battle effect is reduced compared to when the operation prompting effect is not being executed. Since the execution of the operation prompting effect is included in the latter half of the fourth reach effect, the battle effect continues at a progression speed V2 even during the execution of the operation prompting effect.

As shown in Figures 21-33 (D) and 21-33 (E), the battle presentation continues at a progression speed V2 while the operation prompting presentation is being executed, but at the end of the operation prompting presentation (the end of operation acceptance of push button 31B), the presentation does not progress to the scene where it is known whether or not ally character B's attack will hit enemy character B; in other words, the big hit notification presentation or miss notification presentation does not start.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 21-34(A) to FIG. 21-34(E), when the presentation pattern of the operation prompting presentation is determined to be pattern SS-2, the operation prompting image 079SG005Bb, which is larger than the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba and is an operation prompting image that imitates the shape of the push button 31B, is displayed in the center of the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, and the meter 079SG005M indicating the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B is also displayed, and the update display of the meter 079SG005M is started. As described above, since these operation prompting presentation images are displayed in the first display area 079SG005F as images based on the image data 2 (see FIG. 21-3), they are displayed as moving images with a constant progression speed regardless of the progression speed of the battle presentation.

As shown in FIG. 21-34(D), during the execution of the operation prompting effect, the update display of the meter 079SG005M notifies the player of the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B, while the operation prompting image 079SG005Bb hides most of the image of the battle effect. As mentioned above, the operation prompting image 079SG005Bb is an image that is larger in size than the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba and has a transparency of 0%. Therefore, when the operation prompting effect is executed in pattern SS-2, the visibility of the battle effect is lower than when the operation prompting effect is executed in pattern SS-1. Since the execution period of the operation prompting effect is included in the latter half of the fourth reach effect, the battle effect continues at the progression speed V2 even during the execution of the operation prompting effect.

As shown in Figures 21-34 (D) and 21-34 (E), the battle presentation continues at a progression speed V2 while the operation prompting presentation is being executed, but at the end of the operation prompting presentation (the end of operation acceptance of push button 31B), the presentation does not progress to the scene where it is known whether or not ally character B's attack will hit enemy character B; in other words, the big win notification presentation or miss notification presentation does not start.

If the player operates the push button 31B during the execution period of the operation prompting effect, or if the operation prompting effect ends without the player operating the push button 31B (if the operation acceptance period for the push button 31B ends), the jackpot notification effect or loss notification effect will be executed from the timing when the player operates the push button 31B or when the operation prompting effect ends.

As shown in Figures 21-24 and 21-35(A) to 21-35(C), the big win notification performance after the operation promotion performance is a video of friendly character B's attack hitting enemy character B, which is displayed at a progressing speed V1, while the video of enemy character B falling is displayed at a progressing speed V2. The video after enemy character B falls is displayed at a progressing speed V1. During the big win notification performance, the rotation of the reserved display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from left to right remain unchanged and are executed at a progressing speed V3, while the background music and performance sounds are output from speakers 8L and 8R at a playback speed V4 without change. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth pattern 079SG005J and the flashing of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIG. 21-35(D), when the variable display ends, the decorative symbols are displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot, and the display on the image display device 5 switches to the normal background image before the reach effect. Furthermore, the display of the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is resumed. After the variable display ends, the decorative symbols and small symbols are displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot during the symbol determination period, and the fourth symbol is lit (both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb are lit).

As shown in Fig. 21-25 and Fig. 21-35(E) to Fig. 21-35(G), the miss notification effect after the operation prompting effect is that the attack of ally character B does not hit enemy character B, and conversely, after enemy character B's attack hits ally character B and ally character B falls, it is notified that the game state is not controlled to a jackpot. In particular, when the miss notification effect is executed, the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden, and the image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa.

As shown in FIG. 21-25, the loss notification effect is a video that is displayed at a speed of V1 until the attack of ally character B does not hit and the decorative symbols stop in a loss combination. During the loss notification effect, the rotation of the reserved display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from left to right remain unchanged and are executed at a speed of V3, and the BGM and sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R at a playback speed of V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIG. 21-35(H), when the variable display ends, the decorative symbols stop in a loss combination and the display on the image display device 5 switches to the normal background image before the reach effect. After the variable display ends, the combination of decorative and small symbols will be displayed as stopped during the symbol determination period, and the fourth symbol will be turned off (both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb will be turned off).

As shown in Figs. 21-26(H), 21-27(H), 10-29(F), 21-30(E), 21-30(I), 21-31(H), 21-32(H), 21-35(D), and 21-35(H), this characteristic part 079SG illustrates an example in which, at the end timing of the variable display, the caption display area 079SG005T including the caption (message) is displayed on the image display device 5; however, the present invention is not limited to this, and, at the end timing of the variable display, the caption display area 079SG005T itself is displayed on the image display device 5, but the display of the caption (message) itself in the caption display area 079SG005T may not be executed.

In addition, in this feature part 079SG, in the variable display of Super Reach α3 and Super Reach β3, an example is given in which the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 is shortened only during the slow motion period immediately prior to the notification effect (the period during which the display of the reach effect performance video is executed at the progression speed V2), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 may be shortened during the slow motion period other than immediately prior to the notification effect. Also, the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 may be shortened during part of the period during which the display of the reach effect performance video is executed at the progression speed V1 (non-slow motion period).

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 with this characteristic part 079SG, as shown in Figs. 21-19 to 21-25, during the first half of each of the first reach performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, a video of each reach performance is displayed on the image display device 5 at a progressing speed V1, and during the second half of each of the first reach performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, a video of each reach performance is displayed on the image display device 5 at a progressing speed V2. Therefore, while the video of each reach performance is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progressing speed V2, it is possible to increase the degree of empathy of the player with the ally character displayed during the reach performance and to increase the sense of anticipation for the execution of the jackpot notification performance, thereby improving the interest in the game. On the other hand, during the first and second half of the first, second, third, and fourth reach performances, the output of background music and sound effects from speakers 8L and 8R remains unchanged and is output at the normal playback speed of V4, preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable.

In addition, the sound output unit in this feature section 079SG includes a voice synthesis IC 079SG132, an amplifier circuit 079SG134, and speakers 8L and 8R, so that highly reproducible background music (music), sound effects, and other performance sounds can be output from speakers 8L and 8R at an appropriate volume during variable displays, including when reach effects are being performed, and when jackpot games are being played, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Also, as shown in Figures 21-20, 21-21, 21-24, and 21-25, during the second half of the second reach effect and during the second half of the fourth reach effect, the game effect lamp 9 flashes at a shorter cycle than normal, so that the performance effect can be improved by flashing the game effect lamp 9 at a shorter cycle during the period when the performance video progression speed is V2.

In addition, in this feature section 079SG, an example is given of a form in which the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 is shortened during the execution period of the latter half of the second reach performance or the latter half of the fourth reach performance, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 may be gradually shortened according to the progress of the second reach performance or the fourth reach performance. In this way, the player can recognize from the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 that the notification performance will be executed soon, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, in this feature part 079SG, an example is given of a form in which the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 is shortened during the execution period of the latter half of the second reach performance or the execution period of the latter half of the fourth reach performance, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 may be executed at any timing during the first reach performance to the fourth reach performance.

In addition, as shown in Figures 21-19 to 21-25, during the execution of each of the first reach performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, the progression speed of the reach performance video changes between V1 and V2, while the rotation speed of the reserved display and the movement speed of the caption are both constant at V3, and the playback speed of the performance sound output from speakers 8L and 8R is constant at V4, which further prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, an example is given in which the rotation speed of the pending display and the moving display speed of the caption displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa are both V3, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the rotation speed of the pending display and the moving display speed of the caption may be different speeds as long as they are constant regardless of the progress of each reach performance.

Also, as shown in FIG. 21-2(A), the area of the first display area 079SG005F is larger than the combined area of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb, so that while each reach effect is being executed, the player can more easily recognize the reach effect displayed in the first display area 079SG005F than the hold display and captions displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Also, as shown in Figures 21-18 to 21-25, during periods other than when the reach effect is in progress, the rotation display of the reserved display is performed at a rotation speed V3 in the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the moving display of the caption is performed at a moving speed V3 in the caption display area 079SG005T. In other words, the rotation display of the reserved display and the moving display of the caption are performed at the same speed as when the reach effect is in progress, which prevents the player from having difficulty recognizing the reserved display and the caption.

Also, as shown in FIG. 21-2 (C), when the characters contained in the caption (message) in the caption display area 079SG005T reach the right end of the caption display area 079SG005T and cease to be displayed, they are simultaneously displayed again at the left end of the caption display area 079SG005T and moved again from left to right, so that the entire caption (message) is always displayed in the caption display area 079SG005T. This allows the player to always recognize the entire moving display of the caption in the caption display area 079SG005T.

Note that, in this characteristic section 079SG, an example is shown in which the entire caption is constantly displayed and moved in the caption display area 079SG005T, but the present invention is not limited to this, and there may be times when part of the caption that is displayed and moved in the caption display area 079SG005T is not visible to the player.

As shown in Fig. 21-20, Fig. 21-21, and Fig. 21-28, during the second half of the second reach effect, the reach effect video is displayed at a progression speed V2 and an effect effect of displaying concentrated lines on the image display device 5 is executed, thereby enhancing the effect of the second half of the second reach effect, and increasing the interest in the game. In particular, in this feature part 079SG, as shown in Fig. 21-28(C) and Fig. 21-28(D), the number of concentrated lines displayed increases as the battle effect progresses, making it easier for the player to recognize that the second reach effect has ended and a jackpot notification effect or a miss notification effect will be executed due to the increase in the number of concentrated lines displayed.

In this feature section 079SG, an example is given of the effect presentation of the present invention being the display of converging lines, but the present invention is not limited to this. Effects such as the movement of the movable body 32 within a predetermined range, the output of specific sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R, the vibration of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B, the image displayed on the image display device 5 or the vibration of the image display device 5 itself, etc. may be executed as effect presentations, and the effectiveness of the effect presentations may be successively increased as the second reach presentation (battle presentation) progresses (for example, the movement range of the movable body 32 may be widened, the volume of the specific sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R may be increased, the vibration of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B may be increased, the image displayed on the image display device 5 or the vibration of the image display device 5 itself may be increased, etc.).

In addition, as shown in Figures 21-26 (G), 21-29 (E), 21-30 (D), 21-31 (G), and 21-35 (C), when the decorative symbols stop in a jackpot combination as a jackpot notification effect, the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the caption display area 079SG005T in the second display area 079SG005Sa are made non-displayable, and the image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa. This further increases the visibility of the jackpot notification effect in the second display area 079SG005Sa, while making it easier for the player to recognize that they are being controlled to a jackpot game state.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, when a jackpot notification effect is executed, the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa are made non-displayable, and the image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first reserved memory display area 079SG005Sa may be displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa. When the display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the caption display area 079SG005T are displayed, an image of the jackpot notification effect may be displayed in the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa (the image of the jackpot notification effect may be displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa, overlapping with the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the caption display area 079SG005T).

In this case, the visibility of the jackpot notification image may be improved by making the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the caption display area 079SG005T transparent or reducing the size of the display, or by making only one of the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the reserved displays displayed within these reserved display areas invisible.

As shown in Fig. 21-28 and Fig. 21-29, during the second half of the second reach effect, a still image display effect can be executed in the first display area 079SG005F, while as shown in Fig. 21-20 and Fig. 21-21, during the still image display effect execution period, the rotating display of the reserved display in the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the moving display of the telop in the telop display area 079SG005T shown in Fig. 21-2 (C) continue without stopping. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the reserved display is being displayed or that the telop is being moved during the execution period of the still image display effect, and prevents the player from having difficulty recognizing the display of the reserved display or the telop due to the rotation display of the reserved display or the moving display of the telop being stopped.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 21-16 and 21-29(A) to 21-29(B), when the still image display effect is executed using pattern SG-2, the color of the still image is inverted, so that the player can easily recognize that the still image display effect is being executed by the inversion of the color of the still image.

In this feature section 079SG, as a still image display effect, a form in which the color of the still image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F is inverted is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a form in which the color of the still image is changed may be one in which the color of the still image is changed to black and white, one in which only a portion of the color of the still image is changed, or one in which a new color is added to the still image.

Also, as shown in FIG. 21-29(B), when the still image display effect is executed with pattern SG-2 and the color of the still image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F is inverted, the colors of the pending display and caption displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the fourth pattern displayed in the third display area 079SG005Sb are not inverted, so the player can easily recognize that the color of the still image has changed by comparing the pending display, caption, fourth pattern, etc. displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa with the still image.

In addition, in each variable display of the super reach in this feature part 079SG, there is a pattern in which the first reach performance or the third reach performance is executed, followed by a transition to the second reach performance or the fourth reach performance, and a pattern in which the variable display ends after the first reach performance or the third reach performance is executed, resulting in a transition to the second reach performance or the fourth reach performance. Therefore, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the display of the performance video of the reach performance is executed at the progression speed V2 during the first reach performance or the third reach performance and then transitions to the second reach performance or the fourth reach performance, or whether or not a notification is given that the performance video of the reach performance during the second reach performance or the third reach performance is executed at the progression speed V2 and then the performance is controlled to the jackpot game state, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 21-19, 21-20, 21-21, 21-23, 21-24 and 21-25, during the first reach performance and the third reach performance, the performance in which an ally character is defeated by an enemy character in the second half execution period of the first reach performance or the second half execution period of the third reach performance and the first half execution period of the third reach performance are executed simultaneously at a progression speed V1, so that it is possible to prevent excessively increasing expectations for being controlled into a jackpot game state due to the progression speed when transitioning from the first half execution period of the first reach performance or the first half execution period of the third reach performance to the second half execution period of the third reach performance being different from the progression speed of the performance in which an ally character is defeated by an enemy character in the second half execution period of the first reach performance or the second half execution period of the third reach performance. Furthermore, as shown in Figs. 21-18, 21-20, 21-22, 21-24, 21-25, 21-26(E) to 21-26(G), 21-29(C) to 21-29(E), 21-30(B) to 21-30(D), 21-31(E) to 21-31(G), and 21-35(A) to 21-35(C), in the big win notification performance of the feature part 079SG, a video of an enemy character falling down due to a hit by an attack of an ally character is displayed at a progression speed V2, while in Figs. 21-19, 21-21, 21-22, 21-23, 21-24, 21-25, 21-26(E) to 21-26(G), 21-29(C) to 21-29(E), 21-30(B) to 21-30(D), 21-31(E) to 21-31(G), and 21-35(A) to 21-35(C), As shown in 1-23, FIG. 21-25, FIG. 21-27(E) to FIG. 21-27(G), FIG. 21-30(F) to FIG. 21-30(H), FIG. 21-32(E) to FIG. 21-32(G), and FIG. 21-35(D) to FIG. 21-35(F), in the miss notification effect, the video of the friendly character falling is displayed at a progression speed of V1, so when the miss notification effect is executed, the video of the miss notification effect is not displayed at a progression speed of V2, which prevents the player from becoming overly dissatisfied and increases the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in this feature section 079SG, when the variable display result of the Super Reach results in a miss notification effect, the display of the performance video of the miss notification effect is executed at a progressing speed V1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and in some of the variable displays of the Super Reach, the display of the performance video of the miss notification effect may be executed at a progressing speed V2 that is slower than V1. In this way, it is possible to create variation in the performance of the miss notification effect, and to increase interest in the game.

In this characteristic section 079SG, the progress speed V1 of the presentation video during the jackpot notification presentation is the third speed in the present invention, and the progress speed V2 of the presentation video during the jackpot notification presentation is the fourth speed in the present invention, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the third speed in the present invention may be a speed different from the progress speed V1. Furthermore, the fourth speed in the present invention may be a speed different from the progress speed V2 as long as it is slower than the third speed.

In addition, as shown in Figures 21-24 and 21-25, when the video display of the reach effect is being executed at a progression speed V2 during the execution period of the latter half of the fourth reach effect, the operation prompting effect is executed, so that the effect of the fourth reach effect can be enhanced by the operation prompting effect.

In this feature 079SG, an example has been given in which the display of the fourth reach effect is executed at a progression speed of V2 while the operation prompting effect is being executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display of the fourth reach effect may be executed at a progression speed of V1 while the operation prompting effect is being executed. Furthermore, a suggestion effect that suggests that the operation prompting effect will be executed before the operation prompting effect is executed may be executed, and the display of the fourth reach effect may be executed at a progression speed of V2 while the suggestion effect is being executed.

As the operation prompting effect of this characteristic part 079SG, in addition to the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba or the operation prompting image 079SG005Bb, a meter 079SG005M that notifies the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F, and while the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba or the operation prompting image 079SG005Bb and the meter 079SG005M are displayed, the display of the fourth reach effect effect animation at the progress speed V2 is continuously executed, but it does not progress to the notification effect. Furthermore, the same big win notification effect or miss notification effect is executed when the player operates the push button 31B during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B and when the operation prompting effect ends without the player operating the push button 31B during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B. For this reason, the notification effect will not be executed before the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B ends (until the operation promotion effect ends), so it is possible to prevent the player from realizing whether or not the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B due to the player not operating the push button.

Note that, in this characteristic section 079SG, an example is given in which the detection means in the present invention is a push button 31B, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the detection means may be an operating means other than the push button 31B, such as a stick controller 31A, or a sensor capable of detecting the player's actions, such as a motion sensor or touch sensor.

Also, as shown in Figures 21-18, 21-20, 21-22, 21-24, 21-26(E) to 21-26(G), 21-29(C) to 21-29(E), 21-30(B) to 21-30(D), 21-31(E) to 21-31(G), and 21-35(A) to 21-35C, in the jackpot notification performance in this feature part 079SG, the animation of the part where the ally character's attack hits the enemy character is displayed at a progressing speed of V1, while the animation of the part where the enemy character falls is displayed at a progressing speed of V2. In contrast, as shown in Fig. 21-19, Fig. 21-21, Fig. 21-23, Fig. 21-25, Fig. 21-27(E) to Fig. 21-27(G), Fig. 21-30(E) to Fig. 21-30(G), Fig. 21-32(E) to Fig. 21-32(G), Fig. 21-35(D) to Fig. 21-35(F), the animation of the miss notification effect of this characteristic part 079SG is displayed at a progression speed V1, and is not displayed at a progression speed V2. In other words, when the big win notification effect is executed, a part of the animation of the big win notification effect is displayed at a progression speed V2, so that the player can be impressed that the big win game state is being controlled.

In addition, in this feature section 079SG, a still image display effect can be executed in pattern SG-2 (a still image display effect in which the color is inverted) as a special effect that can be executed only when the variable display result in this invention is a jackpot, so that the player can be drawn to whether or not the color of the still image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F as the still image display effect is inverted, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Note that, in this feature section 079SG, the still image display effect of pattern SG-2 is exemplified as a special effect in the present invention, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the special effect in the present invention may be an effect other than the still image display effect of pattern SG-2 (for example, an effect in which a specific character is displayed, or an effect in which the color of the effect is gold or rainbow, etc.).

In addition, the operation promotion presentation of this characteristic part 079SG can be executed in either of two presentation patterns: pattern SS-1, in which an operation promotion image 079SG005Ba that imitates push button 31B is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F, and pattern SS-2, in which an operation promotion image 079SG005Bb that is larger in size than operation promotion image 079SG005Ba is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F as an operation promotion image that imitates push button 31B. When the operation prompting effect is executed in the pattern SS-1, the battle effect of the fourth reach effect is visible through the effect image 079SG005E displayed in the first display area 079SG005F, whereas when the operation prompting effect is executed in the pattern SS-2, most of the battle effect of the fourth reach effect is concealed by the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba, so the visibility of the battle effect of the fourth reach effect is lower than when the operation prompting effect is executed in the pattern SS-1. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 21-17, the rate at which the variable display result becomes a jackpot when the operation prompting effect is executed in the pattern SS-2 is lower than the rate at which the variable display result becomes a jackpot when the operation prompting effect is executed in the pattern SS-1, so that the player can pay attention to whether the operation prompting effect is executed in the pattern SS-1 or the pattern SS-2, and the interest in the game can be improved. Furthermore, as shown in Figures 21-24, 21-25, and 21-33(C) to 21-33(E), when an operation promotion image 079SG005Ba is displayed as an operation promotion effect, the display of the battle effect video is executed at a progression speed V2 while the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba is being displayed, which can increase interest in the game.

In this characteristic part 079SG, when the operation prompting effect is executed in pattern SS-2, the operation prompting image 079SG005Bb is displayed on the image display device 5, and the operation prompting image 079SG005Bb reduces the visibility of the fourth reach effect's performance video (battle performance) that is being displayed at a progression speed V2 (slow motion). However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the operation prompting effect is executed in pattern SS-2, in addition to the display of the operation prompting image 079SG005Bb, a dedicated background image may be displayed over the entire display area of the image display device 5, making the fourth reach effect's performance video (battle performance) completely invisible. Also, during the period in which the fourth reach effect's performance video (battle performance) is completely invisible due to the background image dedicated to the operation prompting effect pattern SS-2, the display of the fourth reach effect's performance video may be executed at a progression speed V1 (non-slow motion).

In addition, in this feature part 079SG, as the reach performance of the super reach, the second reach performance can be executed after the first reach performance, and the fourth reach performance can be executed after the third reach performance. Furthermore, as the variable display of the super reach, the variable display of the super reach α1 which notifies of a jackpot after the first half execution period of the first reach performance, the variable display of the super reach β1 which notifies of a jackpot after the first half execution period of the third reach performance, the variable display of the super reach α2 which notifies of a miss by executing the second half execution period of the first reach performance after the first half execution period of the first reach performance, the variable display of the super reach β2 which notifies of a miss by executing the second half execution period of the third reach performance after the first half execution period of the third reach performance, the variable display of the super reach α3 which notifies of a miss by executing the second half execution period of the third reach performance after the first half execution period of the third reach performance, the variable display of the super reach β4 which notifies of a miss by executing the second half execution period of the third reach performance after the first half execution period of the third reach performance, the variable display of the super reach α5 which notifies of a miss by executing the second half execution period of the third reach performance after the first half execution period of the third reach performance, the variable display of the super reach α6 which notifies of a miss by executing the second half execution period of the third reach performance after the first half execution period of the third reach performance, the variable display of the super reach β7 which notifies of a miss by executing the second half execution period of the third reach performance after the first half execution period of the third reach performance, the variable display of the super reach α8 which notifies of a miss by executing the second half execution period of the third reach performance after the first half execution period of the third reach performance, the variable display of the super reach α9 which notifies of a miss by executing the second half execution period of the third reach performance after the first half execution period of the third reach performance, the variable display of the super reach α1 which notifies of a jackpot after the first half execution period of the first reach performance It is possible to execute variable display of Super Reach α3 which transitions to the second reach performance after the out-exchange part execution period, and variable display of Super Reach α3 which transitions to the fourth reach performance after the third reach performance exchange part execution period. As shown in Figures 21-18 to 21-25, when transitioning from the first reach performance first half part execution period to the first reach performance second half part execution period, when transitioning from the first reach performance second half part execution period to the second reach performance first half part execution period, when transitioning from the third reach performance first half part execution period to the third reach performance second half part execution period, When transitioning from the third reach performance second half execution period to the fourth reach performance first half execution period, the performance video of each reach performance is executed at a progression speed V2, when transitioning from the first reach performance first half execution period to the first reach performance second half execution period, when transitioning from the first reach performance second half execution period to the second reach performance first half execution period, when transitioning from the third reach performance first half execution period to the third reach performance second half execution period, and when transitioning from the third reach performance second half execution period to the fourth reach performance first half execution period, Since background music and sound effects are output from 8L and 8R at the same playback speed V4 as in other periods, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the first reach performance first half execution period transitions to the first reach performance second half execution period, when the first reach performance second half execution period transitions to the second reach performance first half execution period, when the third reach performance first half execution period transitions to the third reach performance second half execution period, and when the third reach performance second half execution period transitions to the fourth reach performance first half execution period. Furthermore, by displaying the performance video of each reach performance at a progression speed V2, it is possible to easily recognize the branching of the reach performance that the player is drawing.

Note that, in the variable display of the Super Reach of this feature part 079SG, an example has been given in which two reach effects can be executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display of the Super Reach may be capable of executing three or more reach effects, or may be capable of executing only one reach effect.

The features 079SG of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, but the specific configuration is not limited to these features, and the present invention also includes modifications and additions that do not deviate from the gist of the present invention.

For example, in the feature section 079SG, the first reach performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance are provided as the reach performance of the super reach, and in all of these reach performances, a form in which a part of the performance video of the reach performance is displayed at a progression speed V2 (slow motion) is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a pattern in which the performance video is not displayed at the progression speed V2 in each reach performance (a pattern in which the performance video is always displayed at the progression speed V1) and a pattern in which a part of the performance video is displayed at the progression speed V2 may be provided. Furthermore, the performance content may be different between the reach performance in which a part of the performance video is displayed at the progression speed V2 and the reach performance in which the performance video is not displayed at the progression speed V2. In this way, it is possible to create variation in the reach performance of the super reach, thereby increasing interest in the game.

In addition, in the characteristic part 079SG, an example is given of a form in which the sound effects output from speakers 8L, 8R are always output at a constant playback speed (playback speed V4) regardless of whether the display of the performance video is being executed at the progression speed V2 or not; however, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, as modified example 079SG-1, in the first half of the execution period of the second half of each of the reach performances of the first reach performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, the sound effects may be output from speakers 8L, 8R at playback speed V4, the same as in the execution period of the first half of each of the reach performances of the first reach performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, while in the second half (slow motion period) of the execution period of the second half of each of the reach performances of the first reach performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, the sound effects may be output at a playback speed different from V4 (for example, V5, which is slower than playback speed V4). In this way, the playback speed of the sound effects can be changed while the reach effect video is being displayed at the progression speed V2, thereby improving the effect of the sound effects on the reach effect, thereby increasing interest in the game.

In addition, in the characteristic part 079SG, as shown in FIG. 21-33 and FIG. 21-34, it is possible to reduce the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F during the execution period of the reach performance by displaying the effect image 079SG005E or the operation prompting image 079SG005Bb, while it is not possible to reduce the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa or the third display area 079SG005Sb. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 079SG-2, it may be possible to reduce the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa or the third display area 079SG005Sb.

Furthermore, in cases where it is possible to reduce the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb in this manner, as shown in Figures 21-36 and 21-37, after the reach effect ends, the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F may be reduced as part of the notification effect.

Specifically, as shown in Figures 21-36 (A) to 21-36 (D), when the second reach performance is being executed, once the second reach performance ends along with the still image display performance, a circular effect image 079SG005Ea is displayed in the centre of the first display area as part of the jackpot notification performance or miss notification performance, and the effect image 079SG005Ea is enlarged and displayed towards the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb. Then, when the effect image 079SG005Ea spreads over the entire first display area 079SG005F (when the entire first display area 079SG005F is concealed by the effect image 079SG005Ea), a jackpot notification effect will be displayed to notify the player that they will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state, or a miss notification effect will be displayed to notify the player that they will not be controlled to a jackpot gaming state, as shown in FIG. 21-36(E) and FIG. 21-36(F).

Also, as shown in Figures 21-37 (A) to 21-37 (D), when the fourth reach effect is being executed, when the player operates the push button 31B, or when the operation prompting effect ends without the player operating the push button 31B, a circular effect image 079SG005Ea is displayed in the center of the first display area as part of the jackpot notification effect or miss notification effect, and the effect image 079SG005Ea is enlarged and displayed toward the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb. Then, when the effect image 079SG005Ea spreads over the entire first display area 079SG005F (when the entire first display area 079SG005F is concealed by the effect image 079SG005Ea), a jackpot notification effect will be displayed to notify the player that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state, or a miss notification effect will be displayed to notify the player that the game will not be controlled to a jackpot game state, as shown in FIG. 21-37(E) and FIG. 21-37(F).

The effect image 079SG005Ea shown in Figures 21-36 and 21-37 is an image based on the image data 2 shown in Figure 21-3 (B), and by expanding the drawing range as an image based on the image data 2, it is possible to reduce only the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F, without reducing the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb.

In this way, in this modified example 079SG-2, the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb can be changed, while as shown in Figures 21-36 and 21-37, the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is reduced by the effect image 079SG005Ea as part of the notification effect after the end of the second reach effect or the end of the fourth reach effect, but the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and Since the visibility of the third display area 079SG005Sb does not change, the change in visibility of the first display area 079SG005F makes it easier for the player to recognize the timing at which the notification effect will be displayed, and since the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb does not change, it is possible to prevent the player from having difficulty recognizing the hold display, the telop display, the variable display of the fourth pattern, etc.

In addition, the effect image 079SG005Ea that reduces the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is an image that is drawn as an image of the second image data shown in FIG. 21-3(B), and is drawn so as to be enlarged toward the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb, thereby changing the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F. Therefore, the effect image 079SG005Ea that reduces the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is drawn so as to be enlarged toward the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb, without changing the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb. It is possible to precisely reduce the visibility of only 079SG005F, and because the rendering of the enlarged display of the effect image 079SG005Ea as the second image data is performed from the center of the first display area 079SG005F toward the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb, the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is reduced, making it difficult to change the visibility of the areas corresponding to the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb.

In addition, in this modified example 079SG-2, an example is shown in which the operation prompting effect is executed during the fourth reach effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation prompting effect may be executed as part of the notification effect.

When the operation prompting effect is executed as part of the notification effect, as shown in Fig. 21-38(A) to Fig. 21-38(F) as modified example 079SG-3, the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is reduced by enlarging the effect image 079SG005Ea in the same manner as modified example 079SG-2. Then, when the effect image 079SG005Ea has spread to cover the entire first display area 079SG005F, as shown in Fig. 21-38(D), the operation prompting effect is displayed in the center of the first display area 079SG005F as an operation prompting effect by displaying an operation prompting image 079SG005Ba and a meter 079SG005M.

The operation prompt image 079SG005Ba and the meter 079SG005M can be displayed as images based on the first image data shown in FIG. 21-2 (A), thereby avoiding reduced visibility due to the effect image 079SG005Ea.

After this, the player will be notified that they will be controlled to the jackpot game state or that they will not be controlled to the jackpot game state based on whether the player operates the push button 31B or the operation promotion effect ends without the player operating the push button 31B.

As described above, in this modified example 079SG-3, the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is reduced by enlarging the effect image 079SG005Ea, but the visibility of the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba and the meter 079SG005M displayed as images of the first image data is not reduced, so the operation prompting effect can be made to stand out against the fourth reach effect, effectively encouraging the player to operate the push button 31B.

In addition, in the characteristic part 079SG, when the still image display effect is executed in pattern SS-2 during the execution period of the second reach performance, the variable display result is always a jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 079SG-4, when the still image display effect is executed in pattern SS-2 during the execution period of the second reach performance, the jackpot type of the jackpot may always be a variable jackpot (or even a variable jackpot A, which is the most advantageous for the player). Furthermore, as a performance pattern when the still image display effect is executed in pattern SS-2 during the execution period of the second reach performance, a revival effect may be executed that notifies the player that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state again after a miss notification effect is executed. In addition, in the case where the revival effect is executed after the still image display effect is executed in pattern SS-2, the jackpot type may be a probability variable jackpot or a non-probability variable jackpot (a case where the jackpot game state is controlled to a non-probability variable jackpot and a case where the jackpot game state is controlled to a probability variable jackpot). By doing so, the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not the jackpot notification effect is executed after the still image display effect is executed in pattern SS-2, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, in the characteristic section 079SG, a form in which a message indicating the game status is displayed as the caption displayed in the caption display area 079SG005T has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the caption displayed in the caption display area 079SG005T may be a message indicating whether or not a variable display that is being executed or a variable display that has not yet started will be controlled to a jackpot game status, the title of the reach performance that is being executed, etc.

In addition, the characteristic section 079SG has been exemplified as a form in which a caption can be displayed in the caption display area 079SG005T according to the state of the currently executing effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the caption displayed in the caption display area 079SG005T may be one that can identify the game state, the expectation that the variable display result in the currently executing variable display will be a jackpot (jackpot expectation), an explanation of the currently executing effect (particularly a reach effect), a preview effect that can be executed from a timing before a reach effect, etc.

In addition, in the characteristic part 079SG, as shown in Figs. 21-33 and 21-34, an example is given of a form in which an operation prompting effect (display of operation prompting image 079SG005Ba or operation prompting image 079SG005Bb) is executed during a period in which the reach effect video is displayed at a progression speed V2, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation prompting effect may be executed after the reach effect video returns from a progression speed V2 to a progression speed V1.

In addition, in the characteristic part 079SG, as shown in Figs. 21-33 and 21-34, an example of displaying an operation prompting image 079SG005Ba or an operation prompting image 079SG005Bb on the image display device 5 as an operation prompting effect has been given, but the present invention is not limited to this. As an operation prompting effect, it is not necessary to simply display an operation prompting image 079SG005Ba or an operation prompting image 079SG005Bb. For example, as a preliminary effect to displaying the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba or the operation prompting image 079SG005Bb, an effect may be executed in which the images of multiple push buttons 31B move toward the center of the image display device 5, and finally the images of the push buttons 31B are overlapped to display the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba or the operation prompting image 079SG005Bb.

When the effect of the images of the multiple push buttons 31B moving toward the center of the image display device 5 is executed as a precursor effect of the operation prompting effect, for example, the speed of the movement display of the images of the multiple push buttons 31B may be slowed down as they approach the center of the image display device 5. This allows the player to accurately recognize that the operation prompting effect is being executed, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in the characteristic part 079SG, as shown in Fig. 21-20, Fig. 21-21, Fig. 21-24, Fig. 21-25, when the display of the video of the reach effect is executed at the progression speed V2, the blinking cycle of the game effect lamps (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) may be shortened, but the present invention is not limited to this, and when the display of the video of the reach effect is executed at the progression speed V2, the number of colors (light emitting colors) of the game effect lamp 9 may be different from when the display of the video of the reach effect is executed at the progression speed V1. For example, when the display of the video of the reach effect is executed at the progression speed V1, the game effect lamp 9 may be capable of emitting light in multiple colors, while when the display of the video of the reach effect is executed at the progression speed V2, the game effect lamp 9 may be capable of emitting light in a single color (for example, only white). By doing this, when the reach effect video is displayed at a progression speed V2, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the light color of the game effect lamp 9.

In addition, in the characteristic part 079SG, as shown in Figs. 21-20, 21-21, 21-24, and 21-25, when the display of the reach effect video is executed at the progression speed V2, the blinking cycle of the game effect lamps (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) may be shortened, but the present invention is not limited to this, and when the display of the reach effect video is executed at the progression speed V2, the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 may be lengthened. By doing so, a sense of unity can be given to the display of the reach effect video and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, in the characteristic part 079SG, as shown in Fig. 21-26, Fig. 21-29, Fig. 21-30, Fig. 21-31, and Fig. 21-35, the presentation mode of the jackpot notification presentation is exemplified as a form in which the decorative symbols are displayed while oscillating in a combination indicating a jackpot after the end of the reach presentation, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the timing for displaying the decorative symbols while oscillating in a combination indicating a jackpot may be during the reach presentation.

The present invention may also be applied to a gaming machine that allows the player to select at least a portion of the sound effects, such as background music, to be output from the speakers 8L and 8R during play by operating an operating means that the player can operate. In this way, if the player sets the output of sound effects to suit his/her preferences, when the video display of each reach effect is being executed at the progression speed V1, the sound effects output from the speakers 8L and 8R will be played back at the playback speed V4 without changing, so that it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the sound effects being played back at a speed slower than the playback speed V4, even if the player himself/herself has selected the sound effects to be output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In addition, in the characteristic part 079SG, as an end indication effect in the present invention, an effect in which an ally character is defeated by an enemy character can be executed during the second half execution period of the first reach effect or the second half execution period of the third reach effect, and when this effect is executed, the variable display result is always a miss. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and after an effect in which an ally character is defeated by an enemy character is executed during the second half execution period of the first reach effect or the second half execution period of the third reach effect, the display on the image display device 5 may be temporarily switched to the normal background image display before the reach effect, and then an effect indicating that the variable display result is a jackpot (for example, a revival effect) may be executed.

When executing the revival effect in this manner, the game effect lamp 9 may be lit or blinked before the video of the revival effect is displayed on the image display device 5, to make the player aware that the revival effect is being executed. Furthermore, the presentation mode of the revival effect may be, for example, an ally character attacking the enemy character again and defeating the enemy character. In particular, when executing the revival effect, a part of the video of the revival effect (for example, a video of a scene in which the enemy character falls) may be displayed at a progression speed V2 to enhance the presentation effect of the revival effect.

In addition, although this specification discloses multiple characteristic features and variations, the gaming machine of the present invention may be implemented by combining two or more of these characteristic features and variations.

For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the characteristic part 079SG may be a pachinko gaming machine in which the probability of winning a jackpot can be changed by changing the setting value as shown in Figures 1 to 16. In such a case, for example, a pattern may be provided in which the variable display result in the variable display of Super Reach α1 or Super Reach β1 is a miss, and when a high setting value (e.g., 6) that is advantageous to the player is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the variable display result in the variable display of Super Reach α1 or Super Reach β1 may be a miss at a higher rate than when other setting values are set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In this way, the variable display result being a miss in the variable display of Super Reach α1 or Super Reach β1 can be used as an indication that a high setting value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, so it is possible to draw the player's attention to the variable display result being a miss while suppressing a decrease in the player's interest due to the variable display result being a miss in the variable display of Super Reach α1 or Super Reach β1.

In addition, in the characteristic part 079SG, a pachinko game machine 1 is exemplified as a game machine that performs a predetermined game, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the game machine that performs a predetermined game may be a pachinko game machine 1, a slot machine, or a general game machine, as long as it at least performs a predetermined game.

(Explanation regarding association of characteristic parts)
Each configuration related to the feature portion 059AK may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration related to other feature portions such as the feature portion 063AK, the feature portion 065AK, and the feature portion 079SG. The combined feature portions or the individual feature portions not combined may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration related to the other feature portions. For example, in addition to controlling the time-saving state by stopping and displaying the time-saving pattern as in the feature portion 059AK, the time-saving state may be controlled for a predetermined period after the small winning game state ends based on passing through the time-saving area 063AK20 as in the feature portion 063AK. In addition, the time-saving state may be controlled even when the time-saving pattern is stopped and displayed as a result of the variable display of the normal pattern as in the feature portion 065AK. This increases the opportunities for control to the time-saving state, and improves the interest in the game.

In addition, for example, the time-saving prompting effect in feature part 059AK, the normal time passing prompting effect and the time-saving time passing prompting effect in feature part 063AK, the predetermined effect in feature part 065AK, and the reach effects of Super Reach A to Super Reach C may be set as the predetermined effect in feature part 079SG. Then, during a first period of the predetermined effect, a performance video in which the performance progresses at a first speed can be displayed on the image display device 5 as the display means, and during a second period of the predetermined effect after the first period, a performance video in which the performance progresses at a second speed slower than the first speed can be displayed on the image display device 5, and the performance sound corresponding to the predetermined effect may be configured to be output by the speakers 8L and 8R as the sound output means at the same speed for the performance sound in both the first period and the second period. With this, the progression speed of the effect video of the specified effect changes between the first and second periods, but the speed related to the effect sound does not change between the first and second periods, so it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

(Explanation regarding the association between the characteristic part 059AK and the characteristic part 063AK, and the characteristic part 065AK and the characteristic part 069SG and the characteristic part 099SG)
(Regarding the time-saving state B (relief time-saving state, relief time-saving) in the characteristic part 069SG and the characteristic part 099SG)
As a result of the winning random number value determination process performed in the time-saving state B, the determination result of the variable display result may be determined to be a "miss (time-saving)" display result. However, the time-saving state B is continued without controlling the time-saving state based on the "miss (time-saving)" display result. Since the time-saving state B is designed to be more advantageous than the time-saving state based on the "miss (time-saving)" display result (the time-saving state B is designed to have more times of time-saving), by preventing the time-saving state B from being rewritten to the time-saving state based on the "miss (time-saving)" display result during the time-saving state B, and thereby preventing the time-saving state from being controlled to a time-saving state with fewer times of time-saving, the marketability of a gaming machine equipped with multiple time-saving states can be improved.
In addition, in the case where the variation controlled to the time-saving state B (the 900th variable display in the non-special state (normal state)) results in a "miss (time-saving)" display result, control is performed to the time-saving state B. In the case where the variation controlled to the time-saving state B results in a "miss (time-saving)" display result, a problem arises as to whether to control to the time-saving state B or the time-saving state based on the "miss (time-saving)" display result. However, since the time-saving state B is designed to be more advantageous than the time-saving state based on the "miss (time-saving)" display result (the time-saving state B is designed to have more time-saving times), priority is given to the time-saving state B, and by controlling to the time-saving state B, control to the time-saving state B is prevented from being performed in a time-saving state with fewer time-saving times, and as a result, the marketability of a gaming machine equipped with multiple time-saving states can be improved.

(Explanation regarding the association between the characteristic part 059AK and the characteristic part 063AK, and the characteristic part 065AK and the characteristic part 069SG and the characteristic part 099SG)
(Regarding the relationship between the first special state, the second special state, and the third special state)
The non-special state is a normal state (a state based on low probability), the first special state is a time-saving state that is controlled after the advantageous state (a big win) ends (time-saving state A in the feature part 069SG), the second special state is a time-saving state that is controlled by executing a predetermined number of miss variations without being controlled by the advantageous state (time-saving state B in the feature part 069SG), and the third special state is a time-saving state that is controlled when a miss (time-saving) display result, which is part of the miss display result, is reached ("time-saving A" to "time-saving D" in the feature part 059AK), and these may have the following relationship.
(Relationship 1 with SG2020-069) Regarding the third special state, similar to the second special state, the number of types of the variation patterns of the loss in the third special state may be less than the number of types of the variation patterns of the loss in the first special state, and the average variation time of the loss variation in the third special state may be shorter than the average variation time of the loss variation in the first special state. By doing so, the gaming efficiency of the third special state can be improved, and the third special state can be consumed smoothly.
(Relationship 2 with SG2020-069) The number of types of the variation patterns of the loss in the second special state may be less than the number of types of the variation patterns of the loss in the third special state, and the average variation time of the loss variation in the second special state may be shorter than the average variation time of the loss variation in the third special state. By doing so, the variation efficiency of the second special state can be made higher than that of the first special state and the third special state, and the second game state can be consumed more quickly than either state.
(Relationship 1 with SG2020-071) Regarding the third special state, as with the second special state, the number of types of jackpot fluctuation patterns in the third special state may be less than the number of types of jackpot fluctuation patterns in the first special state, and the average fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation in the third special state may be shorter than the average fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation in the first special state. By doing so, the game efficiency of the third special state can be improved, and the third special state can be consumed smoothly.
(Relationship 2 with SG2020-071) The number of types of jackpot fluctuation patterns in the second special state may be less than the number of types of jackpot fluctuation patterns in the third special state, and the average fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation in the second special state may be shorter than the average fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation in the third special state. By doing so, the fluctuation efficiency of the second special state can be made higher than the first special state and the third special state, and the second game state can be consumed more quickly than either state.
(Relationship 1 with SG2020-079) Regarding the third special state, similar to the second special state, the number of types of pre-reading notices in the third special state may be less than the number of types of pre-reading notices in the first special state, and the execution rate of pre-reading notices in the third special state may be lower than the execution rate of pre-reading notices in the first special state. By doing so, excessive excitement in the third game state can be restricted, and the playability of the third game state can be improved.
(Relationship 2 with SG2020-079) The number of types of pre-reading notices in the second special state may be less than the number of types of pre-reading notices in the third special state, and the execution rate of pre-reading notices in the second special state may be lower than the execution rate of pre-reading notices in the third special state. In this way, excessive excitement in the second special state is restricted, and the second gaming state is made a state with less excitement than either state, thereby preventing a decline in interest in the second gaming state.
(Relationship 1 with SG2020-089) As with the second special state, the execution rate of reach provocation in the third special state may be set lower than the execution rate of reach provocation in the first special state. By doing so, excessive provocation in the third game state can be restricted, and the playability of the third game state can be improved.
(Relationship 2 with SG2020-089) The execution rate of reach provocation in the second special state may be set lower than the execution rate of reach provocation in the third special state. In this way, excessive provocation in the second special state is restricted, and the second gaming state is set to a state with less provocation than either state, thereby preventing a decline in interest in the second gaming state.

1 Pachinko game machine 4A First special symbol display device 4B Second special symbol display device 5 Image display device 100 Game control microcomputer 120 Performance control CPU

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A sound output means;
A display means;
A light emitting means;
A game control means for controlling the progress of a game;
A performance execution means capable of executing a performance based on information from the game control means;
Equipped with
The game control means includes:
A determination means for determining the advantageous state;
A determination means for determining that the advantageous state will be achieved before the determination by the determination means;
a state control means capable of controlling the display to a non-special state and a special state in which a variable display is more easily executed than in the non-special state;
and an information transmitting means capable of transmitting to the performance executing means a plurality of types of information including determination result information capable of identifying that the advantageous state will be controlled when the determination means determines that the advantageous state will be achieved;
The effect execution means is capable of executing a specific effect that suggests that the game is controlled to the advantageous state,
the display means includes a first display area and a second display area closer to the periphery than the first display area;
The specific performance is,
the display means displays a performance video, the sound output means outputs a performance sound, and the light emitting means emits light,
A first specific performance and a second specific performance having a higher expectation level that is controlled to the advantageous state than the first specific performance,
A first period, a second period after the first period, and a third period after the second period in which either one of an advantageous aspect or an unfavorable aspect is notified as a performance result,
The performance execution means includes:
The first display area is capable of displaying the effected video,
In the second display area, information display relating to a game can be displayed;
During the first period, the information display can be displayed in the second display area while the effected moving image in an effect manner progressing at a first speed is displayed in the first display area,
During the second period, the information display can be displayed in the second display area while displaying the effected moving image in an effect mode proceeding at a second speed slower than the first speed in the first display area,
A still effect is executed in which, after displaying the effect video of the effect mode proceeding at the second speed during the second period of the second specific effect , a still image is displayed by freezing the effect video;
When the specific performance is executed, the light emitting state of the light emitting means can be changed in both the first period and the second period,
When the first specific performance is executed, during the second period, it is possible to change the light emission state of the light emitting means at the same interval as that of the first period;
When the second specific performance is executed, the light emission state of the light emitting means can be changed at an interval shorter than the first period during the second period;
There are a plurality of still effects, and the expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state varies depending on which effect is selected;
The state control means controls the non-special state to the special state when a special display result is displayed in the non-special state,
The determination means is capable of determining that the special state will be entered before the state control means controls the vehicle to the special state,
The information transmitting means is capable of transmitting special information capable of specifying that the game machine will be controlled to the special state when the determining means determines that the game machine will be in the special state.

Images